Ve9ve7 PRP Ga091999 7 00

VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Proprietary Service Manual
ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

PROPERTY OF GE HEALTHCARE.
USE OF THESE MATERIALS LIMITED TO AGENTS AND
EMPLOYEES OF GE HEALTHCARE OR OTHER
PARTIES EXPRESSLY LICENSED BY GE HEALTHCARE.
UNLICENSED USE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED
Part Number: GA091999

Revision: 7
GE PROPRIETARY TO GE
DIRECTION GA091999, REVISION 7 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
TRANSLATION POLICY
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
(EN) MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
AVERTISSEMENT NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
(FR)
MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES
DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
WARNUNG VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
(DE) KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
- i
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN.
AVISO NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
(ES) CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM

INGLS.
SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA
ATENO RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
(PT-Br) NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA.
O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA
DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS,
MECNICOS OU OUTROS.
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA EST DISPONVEL APENAS EM INGLS.

SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
AVISO NO TENTE EFECTUAR REPARAES NO EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER
(PT-pt) CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO PREVIAMENTE ESTE MANUAL.
A INOBSERVNCIA DESTE AVISO PODE RESULTAR EM FERIMENTOS NO
TCNICO DE ASSISTNCIA, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE EM CONSEQUNCIA
DE CHOQUE ELCTRICO, PERIGOS DE ORIGEM MECNICA, BEM COMO DE
OUTROS TIPOS.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
AVVERTENZA SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
(IT)
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
ii -
KESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
HOIATUS RGE RITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KESOLEVA
(ET)
TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.
KESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VIB PHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILGI, MEHAANILISE
VI MUU OHU TAGAJRJEL.
TM HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN
ENGLANNINKIELIST MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KNNKSEN
HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.
VAROITUS L YRIT KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT
(FI)
JA YMMRTNYT TMN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.
MIKLI TT VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA
PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON KYTTJN TAI POTILAAN
VAHINGOITTUMINEN SHKISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN
VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.
.

,
.

(EL)
.
,
,
, .
EZEN KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYV KIZRLAG ANGOL NYELVEN RHET EL.

HA A VEV SZOLGLTATJA ANGOLTL ELTR NYELVRE TART IGNYT,
AKKOR A VEV FELELSSGE A FORDTS ELKSZTTETSE.
NE PRBLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNLNI A BERENDEZST, AMG A
FIGYELMEZTETS
(HU) KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYVBEN LERTAKAT NEM RTELMEZTK.
EZEN FIGYELMEZTETS FIGYELMEN KVL HAGYSA A SZOLGLTAT,
MKDTET VAGY A BETEG RAMTS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYB
VESZLYHELYZET MIATTI SRLST EREDMNYEZHETI.
- iii
ESSI JNUSTUHANDBK ER EINGNGU FANLEG ENSKU.

EF JNUSTUAILI VISKIPTAMANNS ARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMLS EN
ENSKU, ER A BYRG VISKIPTAMANNS A TVEGA INGU.
VIVRUN REYNI EKKI A JNUSTA TKI NEMA EFTIR A HAFA SKOA OG
(IS) SKILI ESSA JNUSTUHANDBK.
EF EKKI ER FARI A ESSARI VIVRUN GETUR A VALDI MEISLUM
JNUSTUVEITANDA, STJRNANDA EA SJKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS,
VLRNNAR EA ANNARRAR HTTU.
TENTO SERVISN NVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKM JAZYCE.

V PPAD, E POSKYTOVATEL SLUEB ZKAZNKM POTEBUJE NVOD
V JINM JAZYCE, JE ZAJITN PEKLADU DO ODPOVDAJCHO JAZYKA
KOLEM ZKAZNKA.
NEPROVDJTE DRBU TOHOTO ZAZEN, ANI BYSTE SI PEETLI
VSTRAHA
(CS)
TENTO SERVISN NVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.
V PPAD NEDODROVN TTO VSTRAHY ME DOJT RAZU
ELEKTRICKM PROUDEM PRACOVNKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUEB,
OBSLUNHO PERSONLU NEBO PACIENT VLIVEM ELEKTRICKHOP
PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKHO POKOZEN NEBO
JINMU RIZIKU.
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN P ENGELSK.

HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SRGE FOR OVERSTTELSE.
ADVARSEL FORSG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
(DA) DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LST OG FORSTET.
MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFRE SKADE
P GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR
TEKNIKEREN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.

ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE
KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
WAARSCHUWING
(NL)
ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATINT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
iv -
APKALPES ROKASGRMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGU VALOD.

JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZJAM NEPIECIEAMA INFORMCIJA CIT
VALOD, NEVIS ANGU, KLIENTA PIENKUMS IR NODROINT TULKOANU.
BRDINJUMS NEVEICIET APRKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRMATAS
(LV) IZLASANAS UN SAPRAANAS.
BRDINJUMA NEIEVROANA VAR RADT ELEKTRISKS STRVAS
TRIECIENA, MEHNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISTU TRAUMU APKALPES
SNIEDZJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.
IS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA ILEISTAS TIK ANGL KALBA.

JEI KLIENTO PASLAUG TEIKJUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA NE ANGL,
VERTIMU PASIRPINTI TURI KLIENTAS.
SPJIMAS NEMGINKITE ATLIKTI RANGOS TECHNINS PRIEIROS DARB, NEBENT
(LT) VADOVAUTUMTS IUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR J SUPRASTUMTE
NEPAISANT IO PERSPJIMO, PASLAUG TEIKJAS, OPERATORIUS AR
PACIENTAS GALI BTI SUEISTAS DL ELEKTROS SMGIO, MECHANINI AR
KIT PAVOJ.
DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN FINNES BARE P ENGELSK.

HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR SRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
ADVARSEL IKKE FORSK REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
(NO) SERVICEHNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTTT.
MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDREN, OPERATREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES P
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.
NINIEJSZY PODRCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JZYKU

ANGIELSKIM.
JELI FIRMA WIADCZCA KLIENTOWI USUGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA
UDOSTPNIENIA PODRCZNIKA W JZYKU INNYM NI ANGIELSKI,
OBOWIZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO TUMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA
KLIENCIE.
OSTRZEENIE
(PL)
NIE PRBOWA SERWISOWA NINIEJSZEGO SPRZTU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO
ZAPOZNANIA SI Z PODRCZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM.
NIEZASTOSOWANIE SI DO TEGO OSTRZEENIA MOE GROZI
OBRAENIAMI CIAA SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU
PORAENIA PRDEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU
ZAGROE.
- v
ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI N LIMBA ENGLEZ.

DAC UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENI NECESIT O ALT LIMB
DECT CEA ENGLEZ, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI S FURNIZEZE O
TRADUCERE.
ATENIE
NU NCERCAI S REPARAI ECHIPAMENTUL DECT ULTERIOR
(RO)
CONSULTRII I NELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE.
IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA RNIREA
DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI N URMA
PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALT NATUR.

.

,
.
!
(RU)
.
,
,
,
.
.

, ,
.

, ,
(BG) .

,
,
.
OVAJ PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM

JEZIKU.
AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI,
ODGOVORNOST JE NA KLIJENTU DA PRUI USLUGE PREVOENJA.
UPOZORENJE
(SR)
NEMOJTE POKUAVATI DA SERVISIRATE OPREMU AKO NISTE PROITALI I
RAZUMELI PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE.
AKO NE POTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOE DOI DO POVREIVANJA
SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA UZROKOVANOG ELEKTRINIM
UDAROM, MEHANIKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA.
vi -
TA SERVISNI PRIRONIK JE NA VOLJO SAMO V ANGLEINI.

E PONUDNIK SERVISNIH STORITEV ZA STRANKO POTREBUJE NAVODILA V
DRUGEM JEZIKU, JE ZA PREVOD ODGOVORNA STRANKA SAMA.
NE POSKUAJTE SERVISIRATI OPREME, NE DA BI PREJ PREBRALI IN
OPOZORILO
(SL)
RAZUMELI SERVISNI PRIRONIK.
E TEGA OPOZORILA NE UPOTEVATE, OBSTAJA NEVARNOST
ELEKTRINEGA UDARA, MEHANSKIH ALI DRUGIH NEVARNOSTI IN
POSLEDINIH POKODB PONUDNIKA SERVISNIH STORITEV, UPORABNIKA
OPREME ALI PACIENTA.
OVAJ SERVISNI PRIRUNIK DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM JEZIKU.

AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTIJEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI,
ODGOVORNOST KLIJENTA JE PRUITI USLUGE PREVOENJA.
UPOZORENJE NEMOJTE POKUAVATI SERVISIRATI OPREMU AKO NISTE PROITALI I
(HR) RAZUMJELI SERVISNI PRIRUNIK.
AKO NE POTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOE DOI DO OZLJEDE
SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA PROUZROENE STRUJNIM
UDAROM, MEHANIKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA.
TTO SERVISN PRRUKA JE K DISPOZCII LEN V ANGLITINE.

AK ZKAZNKOV POSKYTOVATE SLUIEB VYADUJE IN JAZYK AKO
ANGLITINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATESKCH SLUIEB JE
ZODPOVEDNOSOU ZKAZNKA.
UPOZORNENIE NEPOKAJTE SA VYKONVA SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKR, AKO SI
(SK) NEPRETATE SERVISN PRRUKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ.
ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA ME VYSTI DO ZRANENIA
POSKYTOVATEA SLUIEB, OBSLUHUJCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA
ELEKTRICKM PRDOM, PRPADNE DO MECHANICKHO ALEBO INHO
NEBEZPEENSTVA.
DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGNGLIG P ENGELSKA.

OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRK N
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FR ATT TILLHANDAHLLA
VERSTTNINGSTJNSTER.
VARNING
FRSK INTE UTFRA SERVICE P UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LST
(SV)
OCH FRSTR DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
OM DU INTE TAR HNSYN TILL DEN HR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I
SKADOR P SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
- vii
BU SERVS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA NGLZCE OLARAK SALANMITIR.

EER MTER TEKNSYEN KILAVUZUN NGLZCE DIINDAK BR DLDE
OLMASINI STERSE, KILAVUZU TERCME ETTRMEK MTERNN
SORUMLULUUNDADIR.
DKKAT
SERVS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKPMANLARA MDAHALE
(TR)
ETMEYNZ.
BU UYARININ GZ ARDI EDLMES, ELEKTRK ARPMASI YA DA MEKANK
VEYA DER TRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNSYENN, OPERATRN
YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AABLR.
(JA)
Traditional
Chinese
viii -
(ZH-CN)
(KO)
- ix
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write Damage In
Shipment on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed for by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE personnel. In
performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable
electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part
number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.
Mail the information to:
Service Documentation,
GE Vingmed Ultrasound AS
P.O.Box: 141
NO 3191 HORTEN
NORWAY
GE employees should use TrackWise to report service documentation issues. These issues will then
be in the internal problem reporting tool and communicated to the writer.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PAD, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see Section 1-4 "Safety considerations" on page 1-16.
x -
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE.
GE makes no representations or warranties with respect to the information herein. In addition, the
information is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of
this document. Nevertheless, GE assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions or any damages,
including special or consequential, resulting from the use of this information. GE will issue updates to
this information periodically, as needed. If there are any questions regarding the information contained
in this manual, please contact your GE Representative.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Permission to use this Advanced Service Software and related documentation (herein called the
material) by persons other than GE employees is provided only under an Advanced Service Package
License relating specifically to this Proprietary Material. This is a different agreement from the one under
which operating and basic service software is licensed. A license to use operating or basic service
software does not extend to or cover this software or related documentation.
If you are a GE employee or a customer who has entered into such a license agreement with GE to use
this proprietary software, you are authorized to use this Material according to the conditions stated in
your license agreement.
However, you do not have the permission of GE to alter, decompose or reverse-assemble the software,
and unless you are a GE employee, you may not copy the Material. The Material is protected by
Copyright and Trade Secret laws; the violation of which can result in civil damages and criminal
prosecution.
If you are not party to such a license agreement or a GE Employee, you must exit this Material now.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
2008 and 2010 - 2013 by General Electric Company. All Rights Reserved.
- xi
Revision History
REVISION DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

1 2008-NOV-20 Initial release of manual.
2 2010-APR-30 Updated for BT10 release.
3 2011-MAR-01 Updated per BT11-M4 release of product.
4 2011-SEP-15 Updated per BT12 release.
5 2012-DEC-10 Updated with changes after the Rev. 4 release of the manual.
6 2013-SEP-13 Updated per XDclear (software v113) release. Added VIVID E7 information in the manual.
Added information for:

- Vivid E9 Vet
7 2013-NOV-21
- Usb Flash Drive (UFD) as replacement for software and manual CDs and DVDs.
- New FRU parts
List of Effected Pages
Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Title Page 7 4-1 to 4-82 7 9-1 to 9-154 7
i to xii 7 5-1 to 5-140 7 10-1 to 10-40 7
1-1 to 1-50 7 6-1 to 6-22 7 Back Cover N/A
2-1 to 2-14 7 7-1 to 7-172 7
3-1 to 3-114 7 8-1 to 8-446 7
Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document. Information pertaining to this document is maintained on ePDM (GE
Healthcare electronic Product Data Management). If you need to know the latest revision, contact your distributor, local GE Sales Representative
or in the USA call the GE Ultrasound Clinical Answer Center at 1 800 682 5327 or 1 262 524 5698.
xii -
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1
Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2

Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
Contents in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
Typical users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 3
Typical users of the Proprietary Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 3
VIVID E9 models covered by this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
VIVID E7 models covered by this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 7
Contents in this sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 7
Overview of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound scanners . . . . . . . .1 - 8
History - hardware/software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 8
History - peripherals/software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 8
FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 8
History - supported probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9
How to turn the scanner ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9
How to check for hardware/software version and installed options . .1 - 9
Purpose of the operator manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9
Important conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 10
Conventions used in this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 10
Model designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 10
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 10
Safety precaution messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 10
Standard hazard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 11
Product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 12
Safety considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 16
Human safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 16
Mechanical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 19
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Table of Contents xiii
Safe practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Labels locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22
Labels on Front of LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22
Label on Rear of LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
Label on Upper OP Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24
Labels on Front Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24
Labels on top of Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24
Labels near Connectors on Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 25
Labels on DVD Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 26
Label for External Connectors, IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 28
Label on Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29
Label, General Info - XDclear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29
Label, General Info - BT12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 30
Label, General Info - BT11/BT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 33
Label, General Info - BT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 36
Label on Rear Cover - detailed descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 37
Label on Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 40
Label on the BEP6s door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 41
Label on the BEP5s door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 42
Label, Disassembly Nester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 43
Dangerous procedure warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 45
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 46
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47

What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47
Customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 48
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 48
System manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 49
xiv -
CHAPTER 2
Site preparations
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Console environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
If the unit is very cold or hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Environmental specifications for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 scanners . . . . 2-3
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Electrical requirements for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Inrush current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Site circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Site power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Unit power plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power stability requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
EMI limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
EMI prevention/abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Probes environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Time and manpower requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Purchaser responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Required facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Desirable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
Minimal floor plan suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
Suggested Floor Plan, VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and EchoPAC PC in
Same Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
Networking setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
Stand alone scanner (without network connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
Scanner connected to hospitals network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
InSite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
Purpose of the DICOM network function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
DICOM option setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
- xv
CHAPTER 3
System setup
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
Setup reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Average setup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Setup warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4
Receiving and unpacking warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4
Receiving the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
The Tilt & Shock indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
Examine all packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
Damage in transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 7
If Shock Indicator has triggered or is missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 7
If Tilt Indicator has triggered or is missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Carton Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 9
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label
on the Carton Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 9
Uncrating the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 10
Packing materials for the Carton Box - recycling information . . . . . .3 - 14
Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Wooden Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 16
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label
for the Wooden Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 16
Unpack the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
Packing materials for the Wooden Box - recycling information . . . . .3 - 19
Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20

Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
EMI protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 21

System specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 21
System requirements verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 21
Physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 21
Mass with monitor and peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 21
Acoustic noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 21
xvi -
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Verification of the systems voltage setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Electrical specifications for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Connections on the I/O Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Connect Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Connect USB Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Connections on the Patient I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Connect ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Connect Heart Microphone (Phono) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Connect Pulse Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Introduction to Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Connect a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
Disconnect a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
Connect AC (mains) Power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29
Switch ON the AC Power to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30
Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
Complete power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Contents in this sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Select System Settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
Enter Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
Date and time adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
Select User Interface Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38
Select Online Manual Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39
Select Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
Service Screen setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
Open Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
Select Video Format, PAL or NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42
Alphanumeric Keyboard configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42
Add Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43
Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43
DVR (Option) Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
Approved Internal Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to USB . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to
- xvii
Ethernet (TCP/IP Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 46

Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 46
Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 46
Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 47
Software Option installation introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 47
Installing a Software Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 47
Remote Check and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 48
Connectivity overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 49
Physical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 49
Stand-alone VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 49
Sneaker Net environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 49
Connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to
an EchoPAC PC Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 49
Connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to
a DICOM Server on a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 49
Connectivity setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 50
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 50
Contents in this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 50
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 50
Select TCP/IP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 51
Changing the AE Title and/or Port Number (Port No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 52
DHCP setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 53
Set the Remote Archives Network Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 56
Save the New Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 57
Setup connection to a DICOM server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 58
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 58
DICOM server IP address setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . .3 - 59
Verify the Network Connection to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 65
Verify the Connection to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 65
DICOM Storage setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 67
DICOM Storage IP-address adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 68
DICOM SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 74
Export configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 76
Setup on the Remote Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 76
Configurable Remote Path User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 77
Display the Dataflow screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 78
Export to Excel - configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 79
Export to MPEGVue configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 80
eVue setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 81
Create a new dataflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 82
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 82
xviii -
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 83
Preparations - Log on as ADM (software v112.1.3 and later) . . . . . 3 - 83
Preparations - Log on with a Service Dongle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 83
To create a new dataflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84
Create new dataflow with Worklist, Database and
DICOM Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 86
Create new dataflow with Worklist and DICOM Storage . . . . . . . . . 3 - 87
Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88
Query/Retrieve Setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 88
Query/Retrieve Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 92
If Retrieve is failing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 94
Mapping of parameters from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to DICOM . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 95
Search screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 95
Patient Information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 96
Examination List screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 97
Worklist Search screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 98
Dual Export to DICOM servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 99
Disk Management setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 99

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 99
Select Destination Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 99
Using Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 99
Set Remote Path for Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 100
Setup on the Remote Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 100
Configure Remote Path User on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 100
InSite ExC setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 101

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 101
Network Configuration - InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 101
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 101
Prerequisites for InSite ExC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 101
Configuring the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 for Network InSite Checkout . . . . . . . 3 - 102
Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 102
Create an Insite permanent user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 107
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 108
Options Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109

Software options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109
Stereo vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109
Color Video Printer setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109
Preparations for installing the CP30DW for the first time . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109
Generic installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109
- xix
Printer Software Driver installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 110

Digital Video Recorder (DVR) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 111
USB Flash Drive (UFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 111
Software and documentation on UFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 111
Setup paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 112

Users Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 112
Product Locator Installation Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 113
xx -
CHAPTER 4
General procedures and Functional checks
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Special Equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Power ON/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Connect AC (mains) Power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Turn Unit ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Complete Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Top Console position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To raise/lower the Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To unlock the Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To lock the Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To move the floating Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
Manually releasing the XY Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
Moving the Top Console up or down when Power is OFF . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
LCD Monitor position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
To unlock the LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
To lock the LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Service Key (Dongle, HASP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Exit to Windows Desktop from the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
Archiving and Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
Loading Presets from removable media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
Download / Upload of System Presets via InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Retrieving the system presets via InSite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Extraction of Preset Folder from zip file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Deleting files from the Questra Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Uploading Presets to the Preset Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Loading presets onto customer system from
the Preset Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31
Restoring VIVID E9/VIVID E7 system presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37
Installation and Setup Procedures for Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37
- xxi
Moving and Transporting the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38

The Casters (Wheels) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38
To prepare the unit to be moved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38
To ensure safety while moving the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 39
Transporting the unit by vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 39
At the new location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 39
Recording important settings and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 40
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 40
Connectivity Dataflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 41
Connectivity Additional Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 42
Connectivity Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43
Connectivity Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43
Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 44
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 46
System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 46
About System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47
About Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47
About HW Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47
About Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47
Admin Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Admin Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Admin Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
Admin Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
Admin System Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 50
Service screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 51
Cleaning the Trackball from the outside (OP-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 54
Remove the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 55
Clean the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 56
Install the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 57
Install the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 57
Test the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 57
4V-D Field Failure Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 58
Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 60
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 60
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 60
Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
Operator Panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 62
Touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 63
xxii -
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63
Test Phantoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63
2D Mode (B mode) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 64
Adjust the 2D mode controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 65
M Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66
Adjust the M Mode controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66
Color Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 67
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 67
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 67
Select Color 2D Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 67
Adjust the Color 2D Mode controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 67
Select Color M Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 68
Adjust the Color M Mode controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 68
PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 69
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 69
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 69
Adjust the PW/CW Doppler Mode controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 69
Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 70
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 70
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 70
Adjust the TVI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 70
Probe/Connectors Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 71
ECG Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 72
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 72
Parts needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 72
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 72
ECG Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 72
Cineloop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 73
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 73
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 73
Adjust the Cineloop controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 73
Back End Processor checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 74
Operator Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 74
Peripheral checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 74
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 74
Printer checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 74
Windows Print Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 74
Setup and Test a Printer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 75
View the Windows Printer Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 75
DVR checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 76
Turn OFF Power to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 77
Mechanical Functions Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 78
- xxiii
Operator Panel Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 78

Casters (Wheels), Brakes and Direction Lock Checks . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 78
Application Turnover Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 79

Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 79
Power supply test & adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 80

Power Supply Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 80
Power Supply Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 80
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 81
xxiv -
CHAPTER 5
Components and functions (theory)
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

VIVID E9 models covered by this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Hard Disk Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
System software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Software patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
The Dataflow concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Stand-alone VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Sneaker net environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Direct connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to
an EchoPAC PC workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and a DICOM server in a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Dataflow naming convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Dataflow examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Predefined Dataflows and Additional Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
New Dataflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
Creating a New Dataflow with Worklist, Database and
DICOM Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
InSite ExC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
InSite ExC Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
InSite ExC Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
- xxv
Initiating a Request for Service (RFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 17

Automatic Request for Service (ARFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 18
InSite ExC Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 19
Exiting InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 19
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 21
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 22
Signal flow overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 23
System configuration and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24
The electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 25
VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27
2D-Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27
Octave Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27
Color Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27
Color Flow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 27
Power Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 28
Tissue Velocity Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 28
Pulsed (PW) Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 28
4D Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 28
Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29

Transporting VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29
Top Console description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29
Content in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 30
Top Consoles location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 30
Connection between the Top Console and the
rest of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 30
The XYZ mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 31
The XY Locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 31
Top Console block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 33
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 33
Bidirectional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 35
xxvi -
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
Bidirectional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
Operator Panel (Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
Operator Panel general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
Operator Panel block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
Main Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
Main Console description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
Air Flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41

General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Air Flow components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Software control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Casters and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Front End Processor (FEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43

Front End Card Rack general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43
Front End Processor cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44
FEPs Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Input DC voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Input Pulser voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Bidirectional signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Fuses, jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Transmitter and Receiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46
Transmitter signal path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46
Phased and Linear Array probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
Receiver signal path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
Signal control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49
Transmitter Board (GTX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Input DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Input TX (Pulser) voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55
- xxvii
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
Other switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
LEDs on the GTX-192 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 56
LEDs on the GTX-64 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 57
Test points on the GTX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 58
Relay Board (RLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 60
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 60
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 61
Input DC Voltages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 61
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 61
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 61
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 61
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 62
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 62
DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 62
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 63
Test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 63
Receiver Board (GRX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 64
Input DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 66
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 66
Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 66
LEDs on the GRX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 66
Test points on the GRX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 66
Front Plane boards (XD BUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 67
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 67
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 67
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 68
Fuses, Jumpers, Dip-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 68
Digital Receiver board (DRX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 69
Input DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
LEDs on the DRX board - the Nathan field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 72
LEDs on the DRX board - the GDIF status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 73
Test points on the DRX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 73
Troubleshooting hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 74
xxviii -
Front End Interface Board (GFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 75

Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
LEDs on the GFI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Test points on the GFI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
FEP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Input DC voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Control signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
Other switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
Back End Processor (BEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Signal Flow and Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Location of the Back End Processor (BEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83
CPU/Back End Processor (BEP) - block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
BEP description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
The EMC Enclosure House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Outside the EMC Enclosure House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Top view comparison BEP5 - BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
BEP6 Face, Top and Rear connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
BEP5 Face and Top connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
BEP6 interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90
USB distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
SATA distribution - BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Use of Expansion Slots on BEP6 Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Use of Expansion Slots on BEP5 Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93
BIOS Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93
Input DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94
Bi-directional signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
- xxix
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 96
LEDs on the BEP5/BEP6 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 96
LEDs on the BEP6s Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 97
LEDs on the BEP5s face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 98
BEP Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 99
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 99
BEP6 Power Board Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 99
BEP5 Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 100
Location in the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 100
Location in the BEP5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 101
Input Voltage (BEP6 / BEP5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 101
Input Signals (BEP6 / BEP5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 101
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 101
Output Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 102
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 102
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 102
LEDs on BEP6 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 102
LEDs on BEP5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 103
Test Points on BEP5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 104
IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 105
Content in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 105
Location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 105
Input DC voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 105
Signals on BEP6 IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 106
Signals on BEP5 IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 107
LEDs on the BEP5 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 108
Graphics Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
Other Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
Dip Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 110
Hard Disk Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 110
Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 111

Main Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 111
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 113
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 113
xxx -

Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 114
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 115
Current limiter, over-voltage protection and
temperature watch-dog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 115
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 115
DIP-Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 115
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 115
Power Up Sequence Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 116
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 116
AC Breaker to ON position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 116
The ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel has
been pressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 118
Power On Sequence (button push), detailed sequence . . . . . . . . . 5 - 120
BEP Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 120
Power Down Sequence description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 121
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 121
Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 121
Forced Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 122
Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 122
DC Surveillance overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 123
Input and Output (I/O) modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 124

Patient I/O (Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 124
Patient I/O Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 125
Patient I/O - inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 126
Patient I/O - outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 127
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 127
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 127
Dip Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 127
BEP6 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 128
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 129
Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 129
BEP5 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 130
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 131
Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 131
Probe Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 131
- xxxi
Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 132

Internal peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 132
DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 132
Digital Video Stream Recorder (DVR (Option)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 132
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 132
External peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 133
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 133
External Color Printer (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 133
USB Flash Drive (USB Flash Card) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 133
USB Hard Drive with RAID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 134
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 134
Network printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 134
Cables for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 135
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 135
Product manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 136

User documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 136
Service documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 136
GE Service / Proprietary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 136
Common Service Desktop overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137
iLinq Interactive Platform Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137
Web Server/Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137
Contact GE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137
Interactive Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 137
Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 138
Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 138
Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 138
Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 139
Restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 after diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 139
xxxii -
CHAPTER 6
Service adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Power Supply adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
LCD Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Review Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
LCD Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Advanced LCD adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Review Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Test the LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
Backlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Accessing the Main LCD and Touch Screen Backlight Adjustments . . . . . 6-6
Backlight and Blue Tint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Adjust LCD Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Test Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Main Monitor and Touch Screen - Setup and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11

Select the Display Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
Identification of the monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Main LCD Screen Resolution and Color Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Touch Screen Resolution and Color Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
DC Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
When to do a Front End Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Front End Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
- xxxiii
Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 16

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 16
Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 16
Release the XY Lock and XY Brake (manually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 16
Adjusting the XY Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 17
XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment . . . . .6 - 18
XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 18
XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 19
Using the Park Lock Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 21
Adjusting the Z mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 21
Direction Lock and Brake adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 22
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 22
xxxiv -
CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics / troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Service Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Service Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Special Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
BSCAN Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Trackball issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
High System Temperature Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Reset the BEP from a Hang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
How to Release the Top Console when power is unavailable . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Content in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
EMI Prevention/Abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Image Artifacts Caused by Front End Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
System Halt Errors - Lock ups or Intermittent Problems . . . . . . . . . 7-9
CD/DVD Drive Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Image CD/DVD not read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
No Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
No Video on LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Wrong Key Activated on the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Incorrect System Time when Daylight Savings Time changes . . . . 7 - 10
Intermittent Blank, but functional (responsive) Touch Panel . . . . . . 7 - 11
Touch Panel Not Responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Probe Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Image or Patient Data Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
- xxxv
Network Connectivity Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 12

First Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 12
Cannot connect to anything via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 12
No Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 12
No Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 13
System Pings and Verifies OK, but does NOT Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 13
Work-around procedure for connecting Vivid E9 to ImageVault v4.x . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 14

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 14
Connectivity Work-around - Image Vault v4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 15
Affected Dataflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 15
Limitations / Implications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 15
Configure VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to the work around . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 16
Reverse configuration on Vivid E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 17
InSite ExC troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 18

Wrong System ID in InSite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 18
Basic Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 18
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 18
Troubleshooting flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 19
Gathering Troubleshooting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 20

Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 20
Collect a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 21
Advanced log options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 21
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 22
Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 27
Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 27
Ctrl+PrintScreen shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 27
To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 27
Virtual Console Observation (VCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 28

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 28
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 29
How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 29
How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 33
Customer Enables VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 34
xxxvi -
Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35

Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
Server History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 37
Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
Diagnostics Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 40
Diagnostic Utility Freezes Up/Times Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 43
Diagnostic Symptom Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 44
Diagnostics - Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 54
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 54
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 55
Diagnostics - Engineering Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 56
Reset PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 56
Diagnostics - Non-Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 57
Essential Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 57
System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 58
Hard Disk Surface Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
Hard Disk Quick Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 60
PCIBus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 61
Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62
Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 63
CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 64
DRAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 65
Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 65
Diagnostics - Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 66
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 66
Mouse (Trackball) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 68
BEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
BEP Interactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Diagnostics - Service Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
Digital Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 74
GFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 76
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 79
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 81
Analog Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 82
Analog CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 85
GRLY Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 89
I/O Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 91
Tx Power Supply Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 94
EPS Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 95
bayBIRD Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 95
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 96
- xxxvii
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 97
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 98
Software Options Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 98
InSite ExC Agent Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 99
Utilities - Common Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 100
Event Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 100
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 102
Disk Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 103
IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 104
Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 105
Windows Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 106
User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 107
Shared Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 108
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 109
Disk Defragmenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 110
Gather Logs Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 111
Image Viewer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 112
Image Compress & Delete Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 113
Scanner Documentation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 114
Distinct Network Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 115
Virtual Console Observation (VCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 116
Telnet Server Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 117
Utilities - Scanner Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 118
Dicom Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 118
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 119
PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 120
Exit From Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 120
Restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 After Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 120
Motor Controller Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 121
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 123
System Doesnt Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 124
The ON/OFF Button is Dark (No Amber Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 124
Main Power Supply Start-up troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 124
Back End Processor (BEP) Boot Up Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 134
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Doesnt Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 135
Intermittent No Boot with old Main Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 137
No Response from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - Its Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 137
Unable to scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 138
Trackball troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 139
Monitor (Main LCD) troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 141
xxxviii -
Intermittent Blank, but

functional (responsive) Upper Panel Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 142
Lower OP Panel contact point cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 142
Locating DRX Boards with CRC Error in logfile.txt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 144
XY Lock is not working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 145
XY Brake Motors Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 145
Z Movement fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 145
Difficult to lock and release the alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 146
USB Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 147
USB Device(s) stopped working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 147
Peripheral Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 148
Contents in this subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 148
Internal Printer troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 149
CD/DVD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 150
USB Harddrive Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 151
Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 152
No Connection to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 152
No Contact with EchoPAC PC, but
Network Connection Seems OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 153
Database Startup Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 154
DICOM Related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 155
Slow Response from DICOM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 155
Images Remain in Spooler with Retry or Failed Status . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 155
Images Exit Spooler, But Do Not Display on Destination . . . . . . . . 7 - 155
Images Not Sorted Into the Single pt Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 155
Probe Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 156
i13L probe is not recognized on VIVID E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 156
M5S-D probe, GE-3MIX, serial numbers below 1697 . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 156
TEE probe message: Scan-plane angle is inaccurate . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 156
TEE Probe Temperature Too High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 157
System Temperature Too High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 158
DVR Issue (BEP5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 158
Noise troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 159

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 160
General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 160
EMI Prevention/abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 161
Different Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 161
Different System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 161
Different Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 162
Disconnect External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 162
Overview of Types of Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 162
Noise Picked up from the Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 162
- xxxix
Noise Received via the External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 162

Doppler Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 163
Intermittent Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 163
Motor Boat Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 163
Self Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside
the VIVID E9/VIVID E7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 163
Heat Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 163
Hardware Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 163
Investigate the Type of Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 164
Power Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 164
Noise in 2D Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 165
Noisy Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 166
Noise in Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 167
Noise in Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 168
Excessive Noise Lines when the cursor
is placed straight down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 168
How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 169
xl -
CHAPTER 8
Replacement procedures
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Warnings and important information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Manpower - When two persons are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Loading / Reloading the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Software Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models versus software requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
VIVID E9 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Customer provided prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Tools provided with the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 at delivery or
after an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Data Management - moving all images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Recording important settings and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14
When to load or reload the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Reloading the Software from Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Introduction to Software Reload from Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Starting the Software Reload from Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Initiate software reload from the Common Service Desktop . . . . . . 8 - 17
Initiate software reload from the Recovery Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
Loading the software from Usb Flash Drive (UFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
Installing the System Software (only for BEP6 / BEPY3) . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
Installing the Application Software (all BEPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Installing the Latest Microsoft Software Patches (all BEPs) . . . . . . 8 - 23
Installing the Translated User Manuals from UFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Installing the Translated User Manuals from UFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
- xli
Loading the Software - from DVD/CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 24

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 24
Preparations for software loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 24
Boot from the System Software DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 25
Selecting installation (A, B or R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 26
Press A. Install System Software. (Erase all partitions) . . . . . . . . . .8 - 27
Press B. Repair/Upgrade Partitions C:\ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 40
Loading Software Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 45
Loading the Software - via InSite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 45
Verify the BIOS version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 45
Upgrade the BIOS version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 45
The BIOS Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 45
Setup after Software loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 46
Verifications after the software has been re-loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 46
Printer Driver Reload (from Remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 47
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 47
Printer Driver Reload Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 47
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 51
Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 52

Covers and Bumpers overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Side Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Side Covers removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Side Covers installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 57
Calibration and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 57
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 57
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 58
Top Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 59
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 59
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 59
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 59
Top Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 60
Top Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 61
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 61
Side Bumpers Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 63
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 63
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 63
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 63
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 63
xlii -
Side Bumpers removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63

Side Bumpers installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Calibration and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Foot Rest Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Foot Rest Bumper removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Foot Rest Bumper installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Front Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Front Cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Front Cover installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Plate Connectors w/Guide removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Plate Connectors w/Guide installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Filter Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Filter Cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Filter Cover installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Rear Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Rear Cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Rear Cover installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
- xliii
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 79
Door, I/O Panel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 80
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 80
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 80
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 80
Remove the I/O Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 81
Install the I/O Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 81
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 82
Cable Hooks replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Cable Hook removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 84
Cable Hook installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 85
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 85
Rear Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 86
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 86
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 86
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 86
Rear Bumper removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 87
Rear Bumper installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 87
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 87
Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 89
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 89
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 89
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 89
Rear Handle removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 90
Rear Handle installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 90
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 90
Printer Filler Storage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 92
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 92
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 92
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 92
Printer Filler Storage removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 92
Printer Filler Storage installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 92
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 93
xliv -
Column Cover Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Column Cover Assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Column Cover Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 96
Calibration and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 96
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 96
Main Cable Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Main Cable Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 99
Main Cable Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Covers under XY / Frogleg motors installation procedure . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Bulkhead Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Remove the Bulkhead Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
Install the Bulkhead Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109
Bumper Boss Z Outer Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Remove the Bumper Boss Z Outer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Install the Bumper Boss Z Outer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Top Console Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 112

- xlv

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 112
LCD Monitor and LCD Arm parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 113

Replacing the 17 LCD Monitor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 113
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 113
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 113
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 113
Remove the 17 LCD Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 114
Disconnect the 17 LCD Monitor Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 114
Remove the 17 LCD Monitor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 115
Install the 17 LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 116
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 117
Replacing the 19 LCD Monitor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 119
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 119
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 119
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 119
Remove the 19 LCD Monitor Cables Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 120
Disconnect the 19 LCD Monitor Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 121
Remove the 19 LCD Monitor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 122
Install the 19 LCD Monitor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 123
Install the Monitor Cables Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 124
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 124
Replacing the LCD Arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 126
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 126
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 126
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 126
Disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 127
Remove the LCD Arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 127
Install the LCD Arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 128
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 129
Replacing the LCD Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 131
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 131
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 131
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 131
Remove the LCD Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 132
Install the LCD Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 135
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 137
xlvi -

LCD Mount Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
LCD Mount Lock removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
LCD Mount Lock installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
17 LCD Firmware Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Tools needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 142
Change the Drive Letter on the memory stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 150
No Serial Communication to the Main Monitor
with SerialOSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 150
Error message displayed with Cfgworkbench tool
when new firmware is uploaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 151
Upper Operator Panel parts replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153

Replacing the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 154
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 154
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 154
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 155
Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156
Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 158
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
Replacing the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 162
Remove the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 163
Install the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 165
Replacing the Main Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 167
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 167
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 167
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 167
Remove the Main Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 169
Main Controller Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 171
- xlvii
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 172
USB Connector Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 173
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 173
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 173
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 173
USB Connector Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 175
USB Connector Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 175
High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 177
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 177
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 177
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 177
High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable removal procedure . . . . . . .8 - 179
High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable installation procedure . . . . .8 - 179
Upper Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 181
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 181
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 181
Upper Bezel removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 181
Upper Bezel installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 181
Frame UI Upper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 183
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 183
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 183
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 183
Remove the Frame UI Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 184
Install the Frame UI Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 184
Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 186
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 186
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 186
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 186
Options Holder removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 187
Options Holder installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 187
Lower Operator Panel Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 189

Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 189
xlviii -
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 189
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 189
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 189
Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 189
Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots installation procedure . . . . . . . . 8 - 190
Replacing the Operator Panel, Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 192
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 192
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 192
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 192
Remove the Operator Panel, Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 193
Install the Operator Panel, Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 195
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 196
Replacing the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 198
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 198
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 198
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 198
Remove the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 199
Install the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 200
Encoder Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 202
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 202
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 202
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 202
Encoder Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 203
Encoder Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 203
Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 205
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 205
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 205
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 205
Lower Switch Board with Elastomer removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 206
Lower Switch Board with Elastomer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 207
Lower Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 208
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 208
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 208
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 209
Remove the Lower Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 209
Install the Lower Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 210
- xlix
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 211
Lower Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 212
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 212
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 212
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 212
Lower Frame Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 214
Lower Frame Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 215
Operator Panel Cable Kit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 216
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 216
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 216
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 216
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 217
Disconnect the Trackball USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 218
Install the Trackball USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 218
Disconnect the USB Video Board Flex Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 218
Install the USB Video Board Flex Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 218
Disconnect the HV Inverter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 218
Install the HV Inverter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 219
Convert old style OP Lower to new style OP Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 221
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 221
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 221
A/N Keyboard parts replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 223

Replacing the Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 224
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 224
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 224
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 224
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 224
Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . .8 - 225
Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . .8 - 226
Replacing the A/N Keyboard or the A/N Keyboard Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Disassemble the A/N Keyboard and
the A/N Keyboard Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 228
Assemble the A/N Keyboard and
the A/N Keyboard Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 229
l -
Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 231

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 231
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 231
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 231
Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 232
Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assy installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 232
J-Rail Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 234
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 234
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 234
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 234
J-Rail Assy removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 235
J-Rail Assy installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 235
Other Top Console Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 237

Replacing the Speaker Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 238
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 238
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 238
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 238
Remove the Speaker Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 239
Install the Speaker Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 239
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 239
Replacing the Bulkhead Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 241
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 241
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 241
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 241
Remove the Bulkhead Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 243
Install the Bulkhead Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 243
Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 245
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 245
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 245
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 245
Remove the Bulkhead Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 246
Install the Bulkhead Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 246
Probe Cable Hook Twin replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 248
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 248
- li
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 248
Remove the Cable Hook, Twin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 248
Install the Cable Hook, Twin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 248
Non-Magnetic Touch Latch replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 250
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 250
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 250
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 250
Non-Magnetic Touch Latch removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 250
Non-Magnetic Touch Latch installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 250
Handle, Left Top / Handle Right Top, replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 252
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 252
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 252
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 252
Handle Left Top / Handle Right Top removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 253
Handle Left Top / Handle Right Top installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 253
Palm Rest ASSY replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 255
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 255
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 255
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 255
Palm Rest ASSY removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 256
Palm Rest ASSY installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 256
Replacing the Probe Holder Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 257
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 257
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 257
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 257
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 257
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 257
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 257
Replacing the Gel Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 259
Up-Down Button Board (Buttons Frame UI Assy) replacement . . . . . . . . .8 - 260
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 260
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 260
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 261
XYZ Buttons removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 261
XYZ Buttons installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 261
Button IF Board Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 263
lii -
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 263
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 263
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 263
Button IF Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 264
Button IF Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 264
Replacing XYZ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 266

XY Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 266
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 266
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 266
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 267
XY Mechanism removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 268
XY Mechanism installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 269
XY Brake Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 270
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 270
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 270
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 270
XY-Brake Assy removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 271
XY-Brake Assy installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 273
XY Park Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
XY Park Lock removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
XY Park Lock installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 275
Z-Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 276
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 276
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 276
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 276
Z-Mechanism removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 278
Z-Mechanism installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 279
Drive Gear Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 280
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 280
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 280
- liii
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 280
Drive Gear Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 281
Drive Gear Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 281
XYZ Control Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 283
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 283
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 283
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 283
XYZ Control Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 284
XYZ Control Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 284
Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 286

Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 286
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 286
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 286
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 286
Remove and clean the filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 287
Rear Air Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 291
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 291
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 291
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 291
Filter removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 291
Filter installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 292
Bottom nylon strip Air Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Filter removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 294
Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 294
Filter installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 294
Fan Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
Fan Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 297
liv -
Fan Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 297

Replacing Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 299
Remove the Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 299
Install the new Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 299
Main Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 301
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 301
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 301
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 301
Main Cable removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 302
Main Cable installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 303
Subwoofer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 305
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 305
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 305
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 305
Sub Woofer removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 306
Sub woofer installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 307
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 307
Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 308
Pedal Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 308
Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 308
Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 308
Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 308
Front End parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 308
Back End parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 308
Casters and Brakes replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 309

Rear Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 310
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 310
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 310
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 310
Rear Casters removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 311
Rear Casters installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 312
Front Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 313
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 313
- lv
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 313
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 313
Front Casters removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 314
Front Casters installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 315
Pedal Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 316
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 316
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 316
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 316
Pedal Mechanism removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 317
Pedal Mechanism installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 317
Brake Pedal replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 319
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 319
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 319
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 319
Brake Pedal removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 319
Brake Pedal installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 320
Pedal Release replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 320
Pedal Dir Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 320
Front End Processor (FEP) / Card Cage parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 321

Front End parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 322
Front End (FEP) Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 325
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 325
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 325
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 325
FEP Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 326
FEP Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 327
Front Plane / XD BUS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 328
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 328
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 328
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 329
Front Plane Boards removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 330
Front Plane Cards installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 332
Relay Board (RLY) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 333
lvi -
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 333
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 333
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 334
Relay Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 335
Relay Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 335
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 335
Receiver Board (GRX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 337
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 337
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 337
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 338
GRX Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 339
GRX Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 339
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 339
Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 341
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 341
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 341
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 341
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 342
GTX Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 344
GTX Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 344
Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 345
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 345
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 345
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 346
DRX Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 347
DRX Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 347
GFI Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 348
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 348
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 348
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 348
GFI Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 349
GFI Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 349
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 349
Collect error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 350
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Card Rack replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 351
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 351
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 351
- lvii
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 351
Vivid E9 Card Rack removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 353
Vivid E9 Card Rack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 354
Programming Backplane Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 355
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 357
Back End Processor (BEP) parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 359

Back End Processor parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 360
Back End Processor (BEP) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 361
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 361
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 361
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 361
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 361
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 362
Back End Processor (BEP) removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 363
Prepeare the new BEP for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 365
Back End Processor (BEP) installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 366
Verification after HDD or BEP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 367
Functional Checks after BEP parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 367
Back End Processor Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 368
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 368
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 368
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 368
Remove BEP6 Power Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 369
Install the BEP6 Power Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 370
Remove BEP5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 371
Install BEP5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 372
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 373
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 373
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 373
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 373
BEP6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 375
BEP6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 376
BEP5 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 377
BEP5 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 378
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 378
lviii -
Graphics Adapter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 379

Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 379
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 379
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 380
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 380
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 380
Preparations - BEP5/BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 381
Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 382
Installing the Graphics Adapter in the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 383
Removing the Video Bypass Board in the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 385
Installing the Video Bypass Board in the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 385
Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 386
Cables for the Prolink Add2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 387
Cables for the ATI FireGL V7200 card - BEP5 . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 387
Cables for the Nvidia Quadro FX1800 /
Nvidia Quadro 2000D - BEP5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 388
Installing the Graphics Adapter in the BEP5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 389
I/O Board Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 390
Patient I/O replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 390
BEP Front Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 391
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 391
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 391
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 391
Front Module removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 392
Front Module installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 393
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 393
Digital Video Stream Recorder (DVR) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394
BEP6 Fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 395
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 395
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 395
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 396
Back End Processor Fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 396
Back End Processor Fan installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 397
BEP Power In Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
BEP Power In Cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
BEP Power In Cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 399
SATA Jumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 400
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 400
SATA Jumper removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 400
- lix
SATA Jumper installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 400

Patient I/O Interface Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 401
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 401
Patient I/O Interface Cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 401
Patient I/O Interface Cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 402
Video Jumper (Flex) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 403
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 403
Video Jumper (Flex) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 403
Video Jumper (Flex) installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 403
DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 404
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 404
DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 404
DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 405
SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 406
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 406
SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 406
SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 406
DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 407
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 407
DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 407
DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 407
DVR Audio cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408
DVR Audio cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408
DVR Audio cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408
BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 409
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 409
BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable removal . . . . . . . . . .8 - 410
BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable installation . . . . . . . .8 - 410
Main Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411
Main Power Supply removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 413
Main Power Supply installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 414
lx -
Collect error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 414

I/O Modules replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 416

Patient I/O Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 416
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 416
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 416
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 416
Patient I/O module removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 417
Patient I/O installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 417
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 419
Side I/O Board Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 421
BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 422
BEP5 I/O Board Assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 423
BEP5 I/O Board Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 424
Peripherals replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 425

Internal Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 425
DVD R/W drive replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 426
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 426
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 426
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 426
DVD R/W drive removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 427
DVD R/W drive installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 427
Digital Video Recorder (DVR) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 430
BEP6 - Digital Video Recorder removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 431
BEP5 - Digital Video Recorder removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 432
- lxi
BEP6 - Digital Video Recorder installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 433

BEP5 - Digital Video Recorder installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 435
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 436
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 438
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 438
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 438
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 438
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer removal procedure . . . . . . . . .8 - 439
BW Printer Filler Storage Box removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 439
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer installation procedure . . . . . . .8 - 439
External Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 440
External USB Storage Drive w/RAID replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 440
USB Flash Card replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 440
Removing the USB Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 440
Installing the USB Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 440
Color Video Printer Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 441
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 441
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 441
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 441
Color Video Printer removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 441
Color Video Printer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 441
Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443

LCD Monitor Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443
Main Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443
OP Cable Kit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443
BEP6 Internal Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443
GFI PCIe Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 444
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 444
Remove the GFI PCIe Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 444
Install the GFI PCIe Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 444
Verification - Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 446

Service Dispatch Debriefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 446
lxii -
CHAPTER 9
Renewal parts
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
Parts list groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7

VIVID E9 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
Content in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
XDclear Software (Application Software Version 113) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
Software on UFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
System Software used for XDclear (BT13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
Application Software used for XDclear (BT13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used
for XDclear (BT13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
BT12 Software (Application Software Version 112) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
System Software used for BT12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
Application Software used for BT12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT12 . . . 9 - 14
BT11 Software (Application Software Version 110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
System Software used for BT11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
Application Software used for BT11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
Software Patches used for BT11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Miscellaneous Software used for BT11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20
BT09 Software (Application software v108.x.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 21
System Software and Application Software used for BT09 . . . . . . . 9 - 21
Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT09 . . . 9 - 22
Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 23
Top Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28
LCD Monitor parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28
Operator Panel (OP) parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 30
OP-6 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 30
OP-5 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
- lxiii
OP-4 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 34
OP-3 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 36
OP-2 specific parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 39
OP 1 specific parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 41
Top Console PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 43
Trackball parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 46
Operator Panel Cable Kit for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9 . . . . . . . . .9 - 47
Button Kits and Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 49
Alphanumeric (AN) Keyboard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 56
AN Keyboard Keysonic KSK-5001 U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 56
Keyboard - 1st version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 58
Common Top Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 61
XYZ parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 69
Main Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 71
Casters (Wheels) parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 73
Front End Processor (FEP) Card Rack parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 75

Front End Processor Card Rack - BT11/BT12 and XDclear with 2D . . . . .9 - 75
Front End Processor Card Rack - BT11/BT12 and XDclear with
4D Expert Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 77
Front End Processor Card Rack - BT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 79
Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 81

Content in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 81
BEP6 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 81
BEP5 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 83
Main Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 86
I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 87
Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 88

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 88
Peripherals Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 88
DVD drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 88
Printer, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 89
Printers, External - USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 89
Printers, Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 90
Digital Video Stream Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 92
USB Flash Drive (UFD) for data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 92
USB Hard Drive with RAID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 93
lxiv -
USB Hard Drive 2TB with RAID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 94
Mains Power Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 95
Internal Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 96

Cable Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 96
Top Console Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 99
XYZ Controller cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 101
Main Power Supply cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 103
Front End Processor (FEP) cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 104
Back End Processor (BEP) cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 105
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 105
BEP6 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 105
BEP5 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 112
Peripherals Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 116
ECG cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 118
Labels VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 120
Physio TX Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 121
Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 122
Probe Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 124

Probe Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 124
Other Probe Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 125
Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 126

Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - XDclear, application software v113 . . . . . . 9 - 126
Options - VIVID E9 - BT12, application software v112.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 129
Kits - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 133

Service kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 133
Hardware Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 134
Upgrade kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 138
Language kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 139
Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 140

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 140
Product manuals for VIVID E9 XDclear, S/W v113.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 141
- lxv
Product manuals for VIVID E7 with XDclear, S/W v113.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 143

Product manuals for BT12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 144
Probes Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 150
6VT-D Probe Care Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 150
6T/6T-RS/6Tc/6Tc-RS/6Tv/9T/9T-RS Probe Care Cards . . . . . . . . .9 - 150
TEE Probes user manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 151
TEE Probe Accessories user manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 152
Intraoperative Probes Users Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 153
Packing parts for reshipment of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 154
lxvi -
CHAPTER 10
Care & maintenance
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic maintenance inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Why do maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Keeping records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Quality assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Maintenance task schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3

How often should maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Tools required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Special tools, supplies and equipment used for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
System checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Peripheral/option checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Mains cable inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Optional diagnostic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
View the logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
General cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Air Filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Probe maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Probe related checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Basic probe care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Cleaning and disinfecting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Cleaning probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Cleaning TEE probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Disinfecting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22
- lxvii
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 24

Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 25
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 26
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 26
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 27
Data sheet for enclosure/chassis leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 28
Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 29
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 29
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 30
Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 31
Lead to lead leakage test record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 31
Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-isolation test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 32
Isolated lead (sink) leakage test record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 32
Probe leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
Generic procedure on probe leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 34
Mains on applied part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 37
When there's too much leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 39

Chassis Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 39
Probe Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 39
Peripheral Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 39
Still Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 39
New Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 39
ECG Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 39
Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 40
lxviii -
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7. The service
provider must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing a
unit.
1-1-2 Contents in this chapter

1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 Important conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-4 Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-5 Labels locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-6 Dangerous procedure warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1-7 Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1-8 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
1-9 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
1-10 Customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-1

Section 1-2
Service manual overview
The service manual provides installation and service information for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound
scanning unit. It is divided in 10 chapters as shown below, in Table 1-1 "Contents in this service manual"
on page 1-2.
1-2-1 Contents in this section

1-2-1 Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2-2 Contents in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2-3 Typical users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-4 Typical users of the Proprietary Service Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-5 VIVID E9 models covered by this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-6 VIVID E7 models covered by this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-7 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-2-2 Contents in this manual

The service manual is divided into ten chapters.
In the beginning of the manual, before chapter 1, you will find the language policy for GEs service
documentation, legal information, a revision overview and the Table of Contents (TOC).
An Index has been included after chapter 10.
Table 1-1 Contents in this service manual
CHAPTER
NUMBER CHAPTER TITLE DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.
2 Site preparations Contains pre-installation requirements for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
3 System setup Contains installation procedure with installation checklist.
4 Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the

General procedures and Functional installation, or as required during servicing and periodic
checks
maintenance.
5 Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the

Components and functions (theory) electronics.
6 Contains instructions on how to make any available adjustments to

Service adjustments
the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
7 Provides procedures for running and diagnostic or related routines

for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
8 Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all

Replacement procedures changeable FRU.
9 Renewal parts Contains a complete list of replacement parts for VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
10 Care & maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures for VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
N/A Index A quick way to the topic youre looking for.
1-2 Section 1-2 - Service manual overview

1-2-3 Typical users of the Basic Service Manual

Service Personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.)
Hospitals Service Personnel
Architectural Planners/Installation Planners (some parts of Chapter 2 - Site preparations)
1-2-4 Typical users of the Proprietary Service Manual

GEHC Service Personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.)
GEHC Online Center Personnel
Licensed Hospital's Service Providers

1-2-5 VIVID E9 models covered by this manual
Table 1-2 VIVID E9 Models and Hardware/Software Compatibility sheet 1 of 3
FRONT END SYSTEM APPLICATION CAN BE

MODEL PROCESSOR BACK END SOFTWARE SOFTWARE UPGRADED
NUMBER DESCRIPTION CARD RACK PROCESSOR VERSION(s) VERSION(S) TO
GB200063 or
Vivid E9 with XDclear 4D Expert Option GA200824
GB000070
17 inch LCD (100-230V) VE9 Card Rack
Complete with
MLA16, GB200001
4D TEE BEP6 w/4D
Vivid E9 with XDclear 4D Expert Option backplane,
GB000080 192 RX channels
19 inch LCD (100-230V)
and one TX card
with 192 channels
v104.3.5 v113.0 or higher N/A
Vivid E9 with XDclear 2D 17 inch LCD
GB000075
(100-230V)
GB000085 Vivid E9 with XDclear 2D 19 inch LCD GB200062 or

(100-230V) GA200804 GB200002
Vivid E9 with XDclear Pro configuration VE9 Card Rack BEP6 wo/4D
GB000090 Complete w. MLA4
17 inch Monitor (100-230V)
Vivid E9 with XDclear Pro configuration

GB000095
GB200001 v104.3.4
v112.0.7 or higher v113.x
BEP6 w/4D (or higher)
GB200003
BEP5 w/4D v104.3.3
Vivid E9 100-230V 4D Expert Option v112.0.x or higher v113.x
GA000940 Nvidia Quadro (or higher)
- 17 LCD
GB200063 or 2000D
GA200824
VE9 Card Rack GA200890
Complete with BEP5 w/4D v104.3.x v112.0.x or higher v113.x
MLA16, Nvidia
4D TEE
backplane, GB200001 v104.3.4
192 RX channels BEP6 w/4D (or higher)
and one TX card
with 192 channels GB200003
Vivid E9 100-230V 4D Expert Option BEP5 w/4D v104.3.3
GA000950 v112.0.x or higher v113.x
- 19 LCD Nvidia Quadro (or higher)
2000D
GA200890
v104.3.x v112.0.x or higher v113.x
BEP w/4D Nvidia

Table 1-2 VIVID E9 Models and Hardware/Software Compatibility (contd) sheet 2 of 3

Vivid E9 100-230V BT12 Pro

GB000040 v113.x
Configuration - 17 LCD GB200002 v104.3.4
v112.1.0 or higher
BEP6 wo/4D (or higher)
GB000050 v113.x
Configuration - 19 LCD
GB200002
GB200062 or v104.3.x v112.0.6 or higher v113.x
Vivid E9 100-230V 2D BEP6 wo/4D
GA000945 GA200804
- 17 LCD VE9 Card Rack GA200900
Complete w. MLA4 BEP5 wo/4D v104.3.x v112.0.x or higher v113.x
GB200002
v104.3.x v112.0.6 or higher v113.x
BEP6 wo/4D
GA000955 Vivid E9 100-230V 2D
- 19 LCD
GA200900
BEP5 wo/4D
GB200001
v110.1.12
BEP6 w/4D
GA200890 or v104.3.x
GA200800
v110.1.x
VIVID E9 100-230V 4D Expert Option BEP5 w/4D
GA000810 v113.x
- 17 LCD Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
GA200824 or Nvidia
GB200063
VE9 Card Rack GB200001
v104.3.x v110.1.12
Complete with BEP6 w/4D
MLA16,
4D TEE backplane GA200890 or
and GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
192 RX channels BEP5 w/4D
Nvidia
VIVID E9 100-230V 4D Expert Option
GA000815 GA200890 or v113.x
- 19 LCD
GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
BEP5 w/4D
Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
Nvidia


GB200002
v110.1.12
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA000830 VIVID E9 100-230V 2D - 17 LCD v110.1.x v113.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
GA200804 or v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
GB200062 v104.1.x
Complete w. MLA4 v110.1.12
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
v104.1.x
GA200744 v113.x
GA200890,
GA000100 VIVID E9, 100-230 VAC (with 4D) GA200800 or v113.x
v104.0.x v108.x.x
5145000-10 NOTE!
BEP5 w/4D Hardware
GA200035
update or box
(console) swap
required.
NOTE: When not otherwise specified, the contents in this manual applies to all VIVID E9 models.
Table 1-3 VIVID E7 Models and Hardware/Software Compatibility

VIVID E7 Pro with XDclear configuration

GB000099 GB200062
- 17 inch LCD GB200002
VE9 Card Rack v104.3.5 v113.0 or higher N/A
BEP6 wo/4D
GB000100 VIVID E7 Pro with XDclear configuration Complete w. MLA4
- 19 inch LCD

1-2-7 Product description
1-2-7-1 Contents in this sub-section

1-2-7-1 Contents in this sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-2-7-2 Overview of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2-7-3 History - hardware/software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2-7-4 History - peripherals/software versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2-7-5 FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2-7-6 History - supported probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2-7-7 How to turn the scanner ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2-7-8 How to check for hardware/software version and installed options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2-7-9 Purpose of the operator manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1-2-7-2 Overview of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound scanners

The VIVID E9 and VIVID E7 ultrasound scanners are high performance digital ultrasound imaging
systems with total data management.
The system provides image generation in 4D (VIVID E9 Expert), 2D (B) Mode, Color Doppler, Power
Doppler (Angio), M-Mode, Color M-Mode, PW and CW Doppler spectra, Tissue Velocity imaging,
Advanced Strain and Contrast applications. The fully digital architecture of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 unit
allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types, throughout the full spectrum of operating
frequencies.
Signal flow from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End, and then over to the Back End Processor
and finally to the monitor and peripherals.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive in the Back End Processor.
All necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
Figure 1-1 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 major components
MAIN MONITOR
UPPER PANEL
WITH STEREO LOUDSPEAKERS
AND TOUCH MONITOR
OPERATOR PANEL
ALPHANUMERIC
KEYBOARD
B/W VIDEO PRINTER DVD PLAYER
DVD RECORDER
DOPPLER (PEDOF) CONNECTOR
PATIENT I/O
PROBE CONNECTORS
BRAKE PEDALS
1-2-7-3 History - hardware/software versions

Please refer to Section 9-6 "Software overview" on page 9-10.
1-2-7-4 History - peripherals/software versions

Please refer to Section 9-16 "Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-88.
1-2-7-5 FRUs for Back End Processor

Please refer to Section 9-13 "Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts" on page 9-81.

1-2-7-6 History - supported probes

Please refer to Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-122.
1-2-7-7 How to turn the scanner ON and OFF

To turn the scanner ON see: 4-2-3 "Power ON/Boot Up" on page 4-4.
To turn the scanner OFF see: 4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-8.
1-2-7-8 How to check for hardware/software version and installed options

To verify the hardware versions on the boards, please refer to Section 9-5 "VIVID E9/VIVID E7
models and hardware/software compatibility" on page 9-7
Please refer to 4-4-1 "Software Configuration Checks" on page 4-79 to check the software versions
on local software on the boards.
Please refer to Section 4-3 "Functional checks" on page 4-60 to check for installed options.
1-2-7-9 Purpose of the operator manual(s)

The operator manuals should be fully read and understood before operating the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
The online versions of the operator manuals are available via the Help function on VIVID E9/VIVID E7s
operator panel.
The translated online user manuals are available on a CD-ROM or on a USB Flash Drive (UFD)
delivered with the system. They are also available on the Common Documentation Library (CDL) for
downloading.

Section 1-3
Important conventions
1-3-2 Conventions used in this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3-3 Standard hazard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3-4 Product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-3-2 Conventions used in this book
1-3-2-1 Model designations

This manual covers the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 scanners listed in 1-2-5 "VIVID E9 models covered by this
manual" on page 1-4.
1-3-2-2 Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
1-3-2-3 Safety precaution messages

Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards to personal are labeled in one of three ways:
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
When a hazard is present that can cause property damage, but has absolutely no personal injury risk,
a NOTICE is used.
DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL

CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
CAUTION CAUTION IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL OR CAN CAUSE
MINOR PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE POSSIBLE.
NOTICE Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.
Example: Disk drive may crash.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure.
NOTE: Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.
1 - 10 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

1-3-3 Standard hazard icons
Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle,
as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be
used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm. Even if a symbol
isnt used in this manual, it may be included for your reference.
Table 1-4 Standard hazard icons
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER HEAT PINCH
LASER
LIGHT
OR
Some others icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-5 Standard Icons that indicates that a special procedure is to be used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
OR
HAND PROTECTION FOOT PROTECTION
Chapter 1 - Introduction 1 - 11
1-3-4 Product icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the equipment.
Table 1-6 Product icons sheet 1 of 4
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
- Manufacturer's name and address

- Date of manufacture
Identification and Rating Plate Rear of console near power inlet
- Model and serial numbers
- Electrical ratings
Used to indicate the degree of safety or

Type/Class Label Rear of console
protection.
Equipment Type BF (man in the box

Probe connectors including Doppler probe
symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type
connector
equipment having a floating applied part.
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box

symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates Probe connectors and ECG connector.
equipment having a floating applied part On newer systems also on the rear of the
having a degree of protection suitable for system.
direct cardiac contact.
DEFIBRILLATOR-PROOF TYPE CF
At the ECG connector on front of system.
EQUIPMENT.
Laboratory logo or labels denoting

Device Listing/Certification Labels conformance with industry safety Rear of console
standards such as UL or IEC.
CAUTION - This unit weighs Special

care must be used to avoid
This precaution is intended to prevent
injury that may result if one person attempt On the console where easily seen during
to move the unit considerable distances or transport
on an incline due to the weight of the unit.
Do not push VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sideways

when casters are in break position. Both sides of Top Console
Instability may occur.
DANGER - Risk of explosion used in The system is not designed for use with Rear of console
flammable anesthetic gases.

Table 1-6 Product icons (contd) sheet 2 of 4
The system is not designed for use with Rear of console

flammable anesthetic gases.
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SCANNERS VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SCANNERS

TESTED AND PRODUCTION
MONITORED BY TUV PRODUCT
SERVICE NRTL WITH RESPECT TO REAR OF CONSOLE ON VIVID E9/
ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE AND VIVID E7
MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY IN
ACCORDANCE WITH UL2601-1 AND
CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.601.1
This unit carries the CE mark.

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 unit complies with
regulatory requirements of the European
Directive 93/ 42/EEC concerning medical
devices. REAR OF CONSOLE
It also complies with emission limits for a
Group 1, Class B Medical Device as stated
in EN 60601-1-2
(IEC 60601-1-2).
CAUTION The equilateral triangle is

usually used in combination with other VARIOUS
symbols to advise or warn the user.
ATTENTION - Consult accompanying

documents
is intended to alert the user to refer to the
VARIOUS
operator manual or other instructions
when complete information cannot be
provided on the label.
CAUTION - Dangerous voltage

(the lightning flash with arrowhead in
VARIOUS
equilateral triangle) is used to indicate
electric shock hazards.
PINCH POINT
Indicates moving parts that may cause VARIOUS
injury (such as LCD arm)
Mains OFF REAR OF SYSTEM ADJACENT TO

Indicates the power off position of the
MAINS SWITCH
mains power switch.
Mains ON
Indicates the Power ON position of the
mains power switch.
ON Indicates the power on position of the
power switch. Rear of system
CAUTION
THE ON/OFF BUTTON ON THE
OPERATOR PANEL DOES NOT
ISOLATE MAINS SUPPLY
On/off button
CAUTION
SYSTEM SHUTDOWN USING THE ON/
OFF BUTTON DOES NOT DISCONNECT
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 FROM MAINS
VOLTAGE. Operating Panel
For disconnecting VIVID E9/VIVID E7
from mains voltage after system
shutdown, please set the circuit breaker
close to the mains inlet to OFF as
described in
4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-8.
Protective Earth USED SEVERAL PLACES INSIDE THE

Indicates the protective earth (grounding)
SCANNER.
terminal.
Equipotential
Indicates the terminal to be used for
connecting equipotential conductors when REAR OF CONSOLE
interconnecting (grounding) with other
equipment as described in IEC60601-1.
This symbol indicates that waste electrical

and electronic equipment must not be
disposed of as unsorted municipal waste
and must be collected separately. Please
REAR OF CONSOLE
contact an authorized representative of
the manufacturer for information
concerning the decommissioning of your
equipment.

This product consists of devices that may

contain mercury, which must be recycled
or disposed of in accordance with local,
REAR OF LCD Monitor
state, or country laws. (Within this system,
the backlight lamps in the monitor display,
contain mercury.)
Section 1-4
Safety considerations
1-4-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-4-3 Human safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-4-4 Mechanical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-4-5 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-4-2 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-4-3 Human safety

Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.
Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated in a VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Training Seminar are authorized to
service the equipment.
Local laws may restrict this device for sale or use by or on the order of a physician.
NOTE: For VIVID E9 Vet, local laws may restrict this device for sale or use by or on the order of a
veterinarian.

ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING VIVID E9/VIVID E7, SOME
METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD
IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, GE HAS LIMITED THE LIFTING WEIGHT
FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG (35 LBS)
REQUIRES 2 PEOPLE.
WARNING HAVE TWO PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO DELIVER AND UNPACK THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE UNIT CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY
ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.
1 - 16 Section 1-4 - Safety considerations

1-4-3 Human safety (contd)
WARNING WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE GAS SHOCK IS
COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY.
DURING NORMAL OPERATION THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR
AND THE MECHANICAL FORCE OF THE GAS SHOCK ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE
IF/WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THIS GAS SHOCK.
PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND THE SHOCK
PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE ELEVATION
ASSEMBLY.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION
OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A
DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, ONLY
INSTALL GE APPROVED PARTS. DO NOT PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED
MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING ENSURE THAT THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IS TURNED OFF AND UNPLUGGED
WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE
NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/
OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
ULTRASOUND SYSTEM COMPONENTS MAY BE ENERGIZED. ALWAYS REFER TO
THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM'S PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL FOR LOTO
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, VIVID E9/VIVID E7 MUST BE TURNED OFF AND
DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SOURCE.
WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE
NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/
OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
ULTRASOUND SYSTEM COMPONENTS MAY BE ENERGIZED. ALWAYS REFER TO
THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM'S SERVICE MANUAL FOR LOTO WARNINGS AND
CAUTIONS.
1-4-3 Human safety (contd)
WARNING BEWARE OF POSSIBLE SHARP EDGES ON ALL MECHANICAL PARTS.

IF SHARP EDGES ARE ENCOUNTERED, THE APPROPRIATE PPE SHOULD BE USED
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.
WARNING TILTING THE CONSOLE REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE IN ORDER TO AVOID INJURY TO
SERVICE PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING WEAR ALL PPE INCLUDING GLOVES AS INDICATED IN THE CHEMICAL MSDS.

1-4-4 Mechanical safety
WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,

YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A UFD, A
DVD OR TO HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE.
WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE KEYBOARD IS LOCKED IN ITS
LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED AND THE
SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIWEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE
LOCKED POSITION.
WARNING WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE
EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER.
WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND
PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR
DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT
MAY BE DAMAGED.
WARNING THE SYSTEM SHOULD NOT BE MOVED WITH THE OPERATING PANEL EXTENDED.
POSITION THE OPERATING PANEL IN ITS CENTERED AND LOCKED POSITION.
LOWER THE OPERATING PANEL AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE BEFORE MOVING THE
SYSTEM.
WARNING REMEMBER: IF THE FRONT CASTER SWIVEL LOCK IS ENGAGED FOR

TRANSPORTATION, PRESSING THE RELEASE PEDAL ONCE DISENGAGES THE
SWIVEL LOCK. YOU MUST DEPRESS THE RELEASE PEDAL A SECOND TIME TO
ENGAGE THE BRAKE.
CAUTION BEFORE YOU MOVE OR TRANSPORT THE SYSTEM, MAKE SURE TO LOCK THE LCD MONITOR
ARM FIRMLY AND FLIP DOWN THE MONITOR TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM.
CAUTION ALWAYS LOCK THE TOP CONSOLE (OPERATOR PANEL) IN ITS PARKING (LOCKED)
POSITION BEFORE MOVING THE SCANNER AROUND.
CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY WHEN YOU MOVE THE LCD MONITOR AND THE MONITOR ARM, DO NOT
PUT YOUR FINGER, HAND, OR OBJECT ON THE JOINT OF THE MONITOR OR THE MONITOR
ARM.
CAUTION ENSURE THAT NOBODY TOUCH THE CONSOLE ARM/FROGLEG WHEN MOVING THE
OPERATOR PANEL.
CAUTION DO NOT MOVE THE UNIT IF THE OPERATOR PANEL IS IN UNLOCKED POSITION.
CAUTION KEEP THE HEAT VENTING HOLES ON THE MONITOR UNOBSTRUCTED TO AVOID
OVERHEATING OF THE MONITOR.
1-4-4 Mechanical safety (contd)
CAUTION VIVID E9/VIVID E7 WEIGHS 128 KG (283 LB.) OR MORE, DEPENDING ON INSTALLED
PERIPHERALS, WHEN READY FOR USE. CARE MUST BE USED WHEN MOVING IT OR
REPLACING ITS PARTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE PRECAUTIONS LISTED BELOW COULD
RESULT IN INJURY, UNCONTROLLED MOTION AND COSTLY DAMAGE.
ALWAYS:
- BE SURE THE PATHWAY IS CLEAR.
- USE SLOW, CAREFUL MOTIONS.
- USE TWO PEOPLE WHEN MOVING ON INCLINES OR LIFTING MORE THAN 16 KG (35 LBS).
CAUTION DO NOT TRANSPORT VIVID E9/VIVID E7 IN A VEHICLE WITHOUT LOCKING THE CASTERS
-
(WHEELS) AND SECURING IT AS DESCRIBED IN 4-2-16-4 "Transporting the unit by vehicle" on
page 4-39.
CAUTION USE PROTECTIVE GLASSES DURING DRILLING, FILING AND DURING ALL OTHER WORK
WHERE EYES NEED PROTECTION.
CAUTION USE SAFETY SHOES WHEN DOING WORK WHERE THERE IS ANY CHANCE OF FOOT
DAMAGE.
CAUTION USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN DRILLING AND CUTTING.
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle, see 4-2-16-4 "Transporting
the unit by vehicle" on page 4-39.

1-4-5 Electrical safety
1-4-5-1 Safe practices

Follow these guidelines to minimize shock hazards whenever you are using the scanner;
The equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged
into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards.
WARNING CONNECTING A VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL
MOST LIKELY DESTROY IT.
1-4-5-2 Probes
Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:
Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
- housing
- cable strain relief
- lens
- seal
- connector pins
- locking mechanism
Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
The system has more than one type of probe port. Use the appropriate probe port designed for the
probe you are connecting.
Section 1-5
Labels locations
1-5-2 Labels on Front of LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-5-3 Label on Rear of LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-5-4 Label on Upper OP Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-5-5 Labels on Front Handle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-5-6 Labels on top of Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-5-7 Labels near Connectors on Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-5-8 Labels on DVD Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-5-9 Label for External Connectors, IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-5-10 Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-5-11 Label on Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-5-12 Label on Rear Cover - detailed descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1-5-14 Label on the BEP6s door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1-5-15 Label on the BEP5s door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1-5-16 Label, Disassembly Nester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1-5-2 Labels on Front of LCD Monitor
Table 1-7 Labels on Front of LCD Monitor
DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION
LABEL GE LOGO (MEAT BALL)
XDCLEAR LABEL
1 - 22 Section 1-5 - Labels locations

1-5-3 Label on Rear of LCD Monitor
Table 1-8 Label on Rear of LCD Monitor
LABEL, LCD MERCURY_RATING
1-5-4 Label on Upper OP Panel
Table 1-9 Label on Upper OP Panel
VIVID E9 NAMEPLATE, GOLD,

UPPER OP PANEL (Used on VIVID E9 with 4D Expert
option)
VIVID E9 NAMEPLATE, BRONZE,

UPPER OP PANEL
(Used on VIVID E9 with 2D)
VIVID E9 NAMEPLATE, PERIWINKLE,

UPPER OP PANEL
(Used on VIVID E9 Pro)
VIVID E9 NAMEPLATE, UPPER OP PANEL, SILVER

(Used on VIVID E9 BT09)
1-5-5 Labels on Front Handle

None.
1-5-6 Labels on top of Console
Table 1-10 Labels on top of Console
LABEL WARNING
Do not push VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sideways when casters
are in brakeage position. Instability may occur.
LABELS ON BOTH SIDES
OF SCANNER.

1-5-7 Labels near Connectors on Front
Table 1-11 Labels near Connectors on Front

5166825 rev2
Label, Front Panel
Label, Patient IO
DEFIBRILLATOR-PROOF TYPE CF
EQUIPMENT.
GA314321-01
Label, Probe Connectors
Table 1-11 Labels near Connectors on Front (contd)

Label, Doppler (Pedof) Connector
Vivid E9 Doppler port label - China

For BT12 and later.
1-5-8 Labels on DVD Units
Table 1-12 Labels on DVD units

Label, DVD DVD

GA314383-01
Label, DVR Digital Video Recorder DVR Digital Video Recorder

GA314384-01

1-5-9 Label for External Connectors, IO Board
Table 1-13 Label for External Connectors, IO Board

Label for External Connectors, IO Board
L R
5180173 rev1
1-5-10 Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker
Table 1-14 Labels on AC Power Supply (Main Power Supply)

Label, AC Controller
Label, System Part Number

and Power Rating
Label, System Serial Number and

manufacturing week/year.

1-5-11 Label on Rear Cover
1-5-11-1 Label, General Info - XDclear
Table 1-15 Label, General Info - XDclear
Label, General Info - XDclear

(International)
Label, General Info - XDclear

(International)
Table 1-16 Label, VIVID E9 Vet
Vet label for VIVID E9.
1-5-11-2 Label, General Info - BT12
Table 1-17 Label, General Info - BT12 sheet 1 of 3
Label, General Info - BT12

(International)
(Introduced MAR. 2013)

(International)
(Introduced JUN. 2012)

(International)
Additional Label - Argentina

Table 1-17 Label, General Info - BT12 (contd) sheet 2 of 3

Brazil

China

Mexico

Korean
Table 1-17 Label, General Info - BT12 (contd) sheet 3 of 3
Label, General Info - BT11 and BT12

(Importer: Alkan Medical, Egypt)

(Importer: GE Medical Systems, Egypt)

1-5-11-3 Label, General Info - BT11/BT10
Table 1-18 Label, General Info - BT11/BT10 sheet 1 of 3

(International)
(Introduced SEP 2010)

(International)
(Introduced AUG 2010)

(International)

(Importer: Alkan Medical, Egypt)
Table 1-18 Label, General Info - BT11/BT10 (contd) sheet 2 of 3

(Importer: GE Medical Systems, Egypt)

Korean

Korean
Used after June 1, 2012

Korean
Used before June 1, 2012.

Table 1-18 Label, General Info - BT11/BT10 (contd) sheet 3 of 3

(Egypt)

Chinese

Chinese
1-5-11-4 Label, General Info - BT09
Table 1-19 Label on Rear Cover

International

Chinese

Korean

1-5-12 Label on Rear Cover - detailed descriptions
Table 1-20 Label on Rear Cover - detailed descriptions sheet 1 of 3
Label on Rear Cover.
Follow instructions for use.

Read and understand all instructions in the User's
Manual before attempting to use the ultrasound unit.
CAUTION - Dangerous voltage

(the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral
triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.
ATTENTION - Consult accompanying

documents
is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator
manual or other instructions when complete
information cannot be provided on the label.
The system is not designed for use with flammable

anesthetic gases.
This precaution is intended to prevent injury that

may result if one person attempt to move the unit OR
considerable distances or on an incline due to the
weight of the unit.
CAUTION - This unit weighs Special care must be used to avoid
Table 1-20 Label on Rear Cover - detailed descriptions (contd) sheet 2 of 3
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SCANNERS

TESTED AND PRODUCTION MONITORED BY
TUV PRODUCT SERVICE NRTL WITH RESPECT
TO ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE AND
ACCORDANCE WITH UL2601-1 AND CAN/CSA
C22.2 NO.601.1
VIVID E9 SCANNERS
TESTED AND PRODUCTION MONITORED BY
TUV PRODUCT SERVICE NRTL WITH RESPECT
TO ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE AND
ACCORDANCE WITH UL2601-1 AND CAN/CSA
C22.2 NO.601.1
GOST
This symbol indicates that waste electrical and

electronic equipment must not be disposed of as
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected
separately. Please contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for information
concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

Table 1-20 Label on Rear Cover - detailed descriptions (contd) sheet 3 of 3
This unit carries the CE mark.

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 unit complies with
regulatory requirements of the European Directive
93/ 42/EEC concerning medical devices.
It also complies with emission limits for a Group 1,
Class B Medical Device as stated in EN 60601-1-2
(IEC 60601-1-2).
GROUP 1 Class A
(Some units produced in 2010 are Class B).
CAUTION
United States law restricts this device to sale or use
by or on the order of a physician.
CLASS I
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit is a Class I
device, type CF, according to Sub-clause 14 of
IEC60601-1 (1988).
TYPE CF
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC
878-02-05 indicates equipment having a floating
applied part having a degree of protection suitable
for direct cardiac contact.
MANUFACTURER
1-5-13 Label on Side Covers
Table 1-21 Label, Vet on Side Covers
Vet labels on Side Covers.

1-5-14 Label on the BEP6s door
Figure 1-2 Label on the BEP6s door
1-5-15 Label on the BEP5s door
Figure 1-3 Label on the BEP5s door

1-5-16 Label, Disassembly Nester

This label is located on the outside of the Front End Racks cover (inside unit).
Figure 1-4 Label, Disassembly Nester
Section 1-6
Dangerous procedure warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

ADJUSTING.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION
OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A
DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, ONLY
INSTALL GE APPROVED PARTS. DO NOT PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED
MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
1 - 44 Section 1-6 - Dangerous procedure warnings

Section 1-7
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements (USA) or local Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring
you are in total control of the AC power plug at all times during the service process.
To apply Lockout/Tagout (LOTO):
1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown.

2.) Shutdown the equipment.
3.) Isolate the equipment.
4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.
5.) Control all stored and residual energy.
6.) Verify isolation.
All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.
WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
TAG
&
1. FOLLOW LOCK OUT/TAG OUT PROCEDURES.
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
2. TURN OFF THE BREAKER.
3. UNPLUG THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
4. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG.
5. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE, AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO
VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER
IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET.
Section 1-8
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE Healtcare policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior
to shipment. GE Healtcare employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/
equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part
or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils
or an ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
NOTE: The USER/SERVICE staff should dispose of all the waste properly, per federal, state, and local
waste disposal regulations.
The Ultrasound system is not meant to be used for long-term storage of patient data or images. The
user is responsible for the data on the system and a regular backup is highly recommended.
If the system is sent for repair, please ensure that any patient information is backed up and erased from
the system before shipping. It is always possible during system failure and repair to lose patient data.
GE is not responsible for the loss of this data.
If PHI (Patient Healthcare Information) data needs to be sent to GE employees for service purposes,
GE will ascertain agreement from the customer. Patient information shall only be transferred by
approved service processes, tools and devices restricting access, protecting or encrypting data where
required, and providing traceability in the form of paper or electronic documents at each stage of the
procedure while maintaining compliance with cross-border restrictions of patient information transfers.
1 - 46 Section 1-8 - Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Section 1-9
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1-9-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radiofrequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-9-2 Compliance
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity
from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient
requirements.
Applicable standards are: 47CFR Part 18, IEC6060112:2001.
NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are
in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all
comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-9-3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL
FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING
CONTACT.
Section 1-10
Customer assistance
1-10-1 Contact information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the user manual, or if you
require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as
listed below.
Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to the Customer
Care team:
System ID serial number.

Software version.
Date and time of occurrence.
Sequence of events leading to issue.
Is the issue repeatable?
Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
Detailed description of any problem encountered.
Where applicable, save the appropriate log files. Remember to save the log files for each day on a
separate media, labelled accordingly.
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
Table 1-22 Phone numbers for Customer Assistance
LOCATION PHONE NUMBER
USA Service: On-site 1-800-437-1171

GE Medical Systems
Ultrasound Service Engineering Service Parts 1-800-558-2040
9900 Innovation Drive
Wauwatosa, WI 53226 Application Support 1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698
Canada 1-800-668-0732
Service 1-800-321-7937
Latin America
Application Support 1-262-524-5698
Europe (OLC- EMEA)

OLC - EMEA
GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH
Phone: +49 (0)212 2802 - 652
Beethovenstrae 239
+33 1 3083 1300
Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen
Fax: +49 (0) 212 2802 - 431
Germany
Online Services Ultrasound Asia

Australia Phone: +(61) 1-800-647-855
China +(86) 800-810-8188
India +(91) 1800-425-8025
Japan +(81) 42-648-2940
Korea +(82) 2620 13585
Singapore +(95) 6277-3444
1 - 48 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

1-10-2 System manufacturer
Table 1-23 System manufacturer
MANUFACTURER PHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER
GE VINGMED ULTRASOUND A/S

STRANDPROMENADEN 45
P.O. BOX 141 +47 3302 1100 +47 3302 1350
NO-3191 HORTEN
NORWAY
This page left blank to facilitate double-sided printing.
1 - 50 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

Chapter 2
Site preparations
Section 2-1
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the setup of a VIVID E9/
VIVID E7. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the
unit.

2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 General console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3 Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Chapter 2 - Site preparations 2-1

Section 2-2
General console requirements
2-2-2 Console environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2-3 Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-4 EMI limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-2-5 Probes environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2-6 Time and manpower requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-2-2 Console environmental requirements
2-2-2-1 If the unit is very cold or hot

When unpacking the Ultrasound system, allow the temperature of the Ultrasound system to stabilize
before powering up. The following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures
from storage or transport temperatures.
CAUTION IF THE UNIT IS VERY COLD OR HOT, DO NOT TURN ON ITS POWER UNTIL IT HAS HAD A
CHANCE TO ACCLIMATE TO ITS OPERATING ENVIRONMENT.
Table 2-1 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Acclimate Time

oC -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
o -40 -31 -22 -13 -4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149 158
F
Hrs 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
2-2 Section 2-2 - General console requirements

2-2-2-2 Environmental specifications for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 scanners
Temperature Limits:
Operation:
10 to 35 C (50 to 95 F)
Storage and Transport:
-20 to 60 C (-4 to 140 F)
Humidity Limits:
Operation:
30 - 60% rH non-condensing
30 - 95% rH non-condensing
Air Pressure Limits:

Operation:
700-1060 hPa
700-1060 hPa
Heat Dissipation:
3800 BTU/h
2-2-2-3 Cooling
The cooling requirement for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 scanner with monitor and on board peripherals, is
up to 3800 BTU/h. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in
the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/h demand on the cooling system.
2-2-2-4 Lighting
Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.

2-2-3 Electrical requirements
2-2-3-1 General requirements
NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will function on voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power in North America, then a center tapped power source is required.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.

2-2-3-2 Electrical requirements for VIVID E9/VIVID E7

In the table below, the electrical specifications for VIVID E9 and VIVID E7 includes monitor and on board
peripherals.
Table 2-2 Electrical specifications for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
POWER
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE TOLERANCES CONSUMPTION FREQUENCY
XDclear (S/W v113.x)
GB000070 Vivid E9 4D Expert Option 17 inch LCD
GB000075 Vivid E9 2D 17 inch LCD

100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
GB000090 Vivid E9 Pro configuration 17 inch LCD
GB000099 Vivid E7 'XDclear' 'Pro configuration' 17'
BT12
GA000940 Vivid E9 4D Expert Option - 17 LCD
GA000945 Vivid E9 2D - 17 LCD

100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
GB000040 Vivid E9 BT12 PRO Configuration 17 LCD
BT11
GA000810 VIVID E9 4D Expert Option - 17 LCD

100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
GA000830 VIVID E9 2D - 17 LCD
BT09
GA000100 VIVID E9 (with 4D) - v108.x.x 100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
The current drain will vary depending on the mains voltage.
At 230 VAC the current may be up to 5 A.


2-2-3-3 Inrush current

During power on, an inrush circuit will prevent the current from increasing above the stated values.
Table 2-3 Inrush current at different mains voltages
VOLTAGE 50 Hz 60 Hz
264 VAC 13 A 12 A
220 VAC 9A 11 A
110 VAC 5.5 A 6A
90 VAC 6A 5A
2-2-3-4 Site circuit breaker
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR. THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SCANNER REQUIRES A DEDICATED
SINGLE BRANCH CIRCUIT. TO AVOID CIRCUIT OVERLOAD AND POSSIBLE LOSS OF
CRITICAL CARE EQUIPMENT, MAKE SURE YOU DO NOT HAVE ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT
OPERATING ON THE SAME CIRCUIT.
It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the unit be readily accessible.
2-2-3-5 Site power outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other outlets
adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also
be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and
national electrical codes.
2-2-3-6 Unit power plug

If the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the
installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
2-2-3-7 Power stability requirements

Voltage drop-out
Max 10 ms.
Power transients (all applications)
Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including
line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

2-2-4 EMI limitations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. The VIVID E9/VIVID E7
complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These
sources include:
medical lasers,
scanners,
cauterizing guns,
computers,
monitors,
fans,
gel warmers,
microwave ovens,
light dimmers
mobile phones
in-house wireless phones (DECT phones)
wireless computer keyboard and mouse
air conditioning system
High Frequency (HF) surgery equipment
general AC/DC adapters
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
See Table 2-4 on page 2-8 for EMI Prevention tips.

2-2-4-1 EMI prevention/abatement
Table 2-4 EMI prevention/abatement
EMI RULE DETAILS
Keep the unit at least 5 meters (15 feet) away from other EMI sources.
Be aware of RF sources Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high
frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.
Ground the Ultrasound Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images.
system Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws.
Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.
Install all screws, RF
Install the Card Rack Cover over the Card Rack.
gaskets, covers, cores
Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound
signals.
If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket.
Replace broken RF gaskets
Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. otherwise, the gap created will permit RF
RF gaskets touch metal leakage. or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding.
Use GE specified harnesses
Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is
and peripherals
specified.
Take care with cellular

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
phones
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the Card Rack or hang out of the peripheral bays.
Properly dress peripheral
Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. attach the monitor
cables
cables to the frame.
2-2-5 Probes environmental requirements
Table 2-5 Operation and storage temperatures for probes

Electronic PAMPTE
Operation: 10 to 40 C (50 to 104 F) 5 to 42.7 C (41 to 108,9 F)
Storage: -20 to 50 C (-4 to 122 F) -20 to 60 C (-4 to 140 F)
Temperatures in degrees Celsius (oC) conversion to degrees F: (oF) = (oC * 9/5) + 32
CAUTION PAMPTE probes are designed for storage temperatures of -20 to +60 degrees C
(-4 to +140 degrees F).
Electronic probes are designed for storage temperatures of -20 to +50 degrees C
(-4 to +122 degrees F).
When exposed to large temperature variations, the product should be kept at room temperature
the needed time to stabilize its temperature before use.
Refer to Table 2-1 "VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Acclimate Time" on page 2-2 to determine the needed
settlement time.

2-2-6 Time and manpower requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible, if possible, six weeks
before delivery, to allow enough time to make any changes.
WARNING HAVE TWO PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO DELIVER AND UNPACK THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE UNIT CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY
ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.

Section 2-3
Facility needs
2-3-2 Purchaser responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-3-3 Required facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-4 Desirable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-3-5 Minimal floor plan suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-3-6 Suggested Floor Plan, VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and EchoPAC PC in Same Room . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-3-7 Networking setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-3-2 Purchaser responsibilities

The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.
Purchaser responsibility includes:
Procuring the materials required.

Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.
Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site
prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other
connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be
performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical
installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All
electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical
codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a nonlisted or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the system than the interface kit allows, presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
2 - 10 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

2-3-3 Required facility needs
NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will function on voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power in North America, then a center tapped power source is required.
Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage (see Table 2-2 on page 2-5) meeting
all local and national codes which is located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the units proposed location
Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide
Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling
Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
NOTE: VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has two outlets inside the unit, one is for the B/W printer and one spare.
Power outlets for other medical equipment

Power outlets for test equipment within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of unit
Clean and protected space to store probes (in their cases or on a rack)
Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)
Chapter 2 - Site preparations 2 - 11

2-3-4 Desirable features

Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide
Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
Sink with hot and cold water
Receptacle for biohazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
Emergency oxygen supply
Storage for linens and equipment
Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
Dual level lighting (bright and dim)
Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals
2-3-5 Minimal floor plan suggestion
Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan, 2.5 m x 3 m (8 by 10 foot)

Scale:
Each square equals one
square foot (app. 31 x 31 cm)
Ethernet Connector
Ultrasound Power outlet

Unit
GE cabinet for
software and
manuals (optional)
2-3-6 Suggested Floor Plan, VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and EchoPAC PC in Same Room
A dedicated Ethernet network wall outlet

3 Dedicated Power outlets
EchoPAC PC parts UPS
A dedicated Analog Telephone jack
Hot & Cold water
A dedicated Ethernet
network wall outlet
1.5m
243,84 cm A dedicated Power
outlet
105cm
609.6 cm
Figure 2-2 Suggested Room with EchoPAC PC and Ultrasound Scanner

2-3-7 Networking setup requirements
2-3-7-1 Stand alone scanner (without network connection)

None.
2-3-7-2 Scanner connected to hospitals network

Supported networks:
10/100/1000 Mbit Ethernet/DICOM network (option)
2-3-7-3 InSite Requirements

InSite requires an Ethernet connection either via:
10/100 Mbit or 10/100/1000 Mbit Interface
2-3-7-4 Purpose of the DICOM network function

DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient
information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to
workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring
images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while
scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at
a lower cost.
2-3-7-5 DICOM option setup requirements

To configure the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to work with other network connections, the sites network
administrator must provide information to complete the form in Figure 2-3 "Worksheet for DICOM
Network Information" on page 2-14. Ensure that there are no spaces in any field of the form.
Entries must include:
A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.
The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer)
and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for error solving.
Chapter 2 - Site preparations 2 - 13

2-3-7-5 DICOM option setup requirements (contd)
Figure 2-3 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information
VIVID E9/
VIVID E7
Host Name Local Port IP Address . . .
AE Title Net Mask . . .
ROUTING INFORMATION GATEWAY IP Addresses

Destination
IP Addresses Default . . .
ROUTER1 . . . . . .
ROUTER2 . . . . . .
ROUTER3 . . . . . .
DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION

NAME MAKE/REVISION AE TITLE IP ADDRESSES PORT
Store 1 . . .
Store 2 . . .
Store 3 . . .
Store 4 . . .
Store 5 . . .
Store 6 . . .
Worklist . . .
Storage
. . .
Commit
MPPS . . .

Chapter 3
System setup
Section 3-1
Overview
This chapter contains information needed to install VIVID E9/VIVID E7. Included is a procedure that
describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim.
How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual installation, and how to check and test the unit, probes,
and external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure.

3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Setup reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3 Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-4 Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-5 Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-7 Connectivity overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-8 Connectivity setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3-9 Disk Management setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3-10 InSite ExC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3-11 Options Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3-12 Setup paperwork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Chapter 3 - System setup 3-1

Section 3-2
Setup reminders
3-2-1 Average setup time
Table 3-1 Average installation time
AVERAGE
DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION COMMENTS
TIME
UNPACKING THE SCANNER 0.5 HOUR
INSTALL SCANNER WO/OPTIONS 4 HOURS DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION
DICOM NETWORK CONFIGURATION 2 HOURS OR MORE DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION
INSTALL INSITE / ILINK 0.5 HOUR
3-2-2 Setup warnings
DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METERS GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DONT TOUCH
THE UNIT!
CAUTION IF THE UNIT IS VERY COLD OR HOT, DO NOT TURN ON ITS POWER UNTIL IT HAS HAD A
CHANCE TO ACCLIMATE TO ITS OPERATING ENVIRONMENT.
Table 3-2 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Acclimate Time

oC -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
oF -40 -31 -22 -13 -4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149 158
Hrs 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK, CONNECT THE UNIT TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED

POWER OUTLET. DO NOT USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER. THIS DEFEATS SAFETY
GROUNDING.
CAUTION DO NOT WEAR THE ESD WRIST STRAP WHEN YOU WORK ON LIVE CIRCUITS AND MORE
THAN 30 V PEAK IS PRESENT.
CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THIS UNIT UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND COOLING REQUIRE THIS.
3-2 Section 3-2 - Setup reminders

3-2-2 Setup warnings (contd)
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

THE USER MANUAL(S) SHOULD BE FULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD BEFORE OPERATING
THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7 AND KEPT NEAR THE UNIT FOR QUICK REFERENCE.
CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

ALTHOUGH THE ULTRASOUND ENERGY TRANSMITTED FROM THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7 PROBE
IS WITHIN AIUM/NEMA STANDARDS, AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE. ULTRASOUND
ENERGY CAN PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE.

Section 3-3
Receiving and unpacking the equipment
3-3-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to receive and unpack VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Two types of packages have been used; a Wooden Box and a Carton Box on a Wooden Pallet. Some
of the Receiving and Unpacking instructions are specific for only one of the boxes. This will be stated
where applicable.

3-3-1 Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3-3 Receiving and unpacking warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3-4 Receiving the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3-5 Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Carton Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-3-6 Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Wooden Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-3-3 Receiving and unpacking warnings
CAUTION TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO UNPACK THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7 BECAUSE OF THE WEIGHT.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7 CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE
BY ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.
TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED WHENEVER A PART WEIGHING 16 KG (35 LBS) OR MORE MUST
BE LIFTED.
CAUTION REMEMBER TO USE RELEVANT PERSONAL PROTECTING EQUIPMENT (PPE) DURING

PACKING/UNPACKING. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL EHS REPRESENTATIVE.
3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

3-3-4 Receiving the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
3-3-4-1 The Tilt & Shock indicators
Overview
Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the
package itself is undamaged.
To make it easier to detection if the handling during transportation has been improper, a set of Tilt &
Shock indicators have been attached to the transportation box.
Table 3-3 Shock and Tilt Watch
Description Illustration
ShockWatch
Tilt Watch

3-3-4-2 Examine all packages
Examine all packages closely at time of delivery, as described in the procedure below.
Table 3-4 Examine all packages

STEP TASK ILLUSTRATIONS
1 Is damage apparent?
If YES; continue with the instructions in subsection
3-3-4-3 - Damage in transportation.
If NO; continue with the next step.
2 Is the Shock Indicator red colored inside the middle of the

indicator? RED COLOR
If YES: The Shock Indicator has been activated.
Continue with the instructions in subsection
3-3-4-4 - If Shock Indicator has triggered or is missing,
then continue with the next step.
If NO: continue with the next step.
3 Is the Tilt Indicator red colored inside the middle of the

indicator?
If YES: The Tilt Indicator has been activated. RED COLOR
3-3-4-5 - If Tilt Indicator has triggered or is missing
before you continue with the next step.
If NO: continue with the next step
5 Carton Box ONLY:

Continue with:
3-3-5 "Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Carton Box" on page 3-9.
4 Wooden Box ONLY:

The two upper hinges on the Front Side and the Rear Side of
the wooden transportation box have been sealed with red
plastic seals, marked GE Vingmed Ultrasound and a serial
number. Verify that the four red plastic seals are intact at
arrival.
If seals are broken:

If broken, it indicates that the container may have been
opened after it left the manufacturer.
3-3-4-3 - Damage in transportation.
Continue with the instructions in:

3-3-6 - Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Wooden Box.

3-3-4-3 Damage in transportation

Follow this procedure if damage is apparent, or if the Tilt & Drop indicators show failure:
Table 3-5 Damage in transportation

STEP TASK
1 Write Damage In Shipment on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed
for by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent.
2 Report the damage to the carrier.

Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in
any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier.
A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14
day period.
3-3-4-4 If Shock Indicator has triggered or is missing

The purpose of a shock indicator label is NOT to tell if a product has been damaged during shipment.
The purpose of these labels is to alert people handling a package that the product contained is very
sensitive to shock damage and that it should be handled carefully. It is basically an active Fragile label
that turns red if a predetermined shock does occur. Because the labels can receive false activation due
to an impact shock directly on the label, an activated label must not be interpreted to mean product
damage. It simply means that the receiver should note on the shipping papers at the time of receipt that
the label was activated and the product should be inspected for possible concealed damage.
Conversely, a high level, product-damaging shock could occur to the package in a way that does not
activate the label, so a non activated label does not insure that the product is not damaged. Some
degree of inspection is still required.
Table 3-6 Shock Indicator has triggered or is missing
STEP TASK
1 If the Shock Indicator is missing:

Note on the shipping papers at the time of receipt that the Shock Indicator label is
missing.
If the Shock Indicator has triggered:
Note on the shipping papers at the time of receipt that the Shock Indicator label was
activated.
2 Inspect the product for possible concealed damage.

3-3-4-5 If Tilt Indicator has triggered or is missing

The purpose of the tilt indicator label is to alert people handling a product that it is sensitive to tipping
and it must remain upright at all times. It is basically an active Up Arrow that changes color if the
package is tipped 89 degrees or more from horizontal. These labels can be false activated if tipped less
than 89 degrees, and shocked or vibrated at the same time. This event does occur, but is considered
uncommon. If a package is received with an activated tilt indicator label, there is high degree of certainty
it tipped 89 degrees or more from horizontal during shipment.
An activated tilt indicator label does not indicate if the package was simply Tipped (laid down with no
impact shock) or Tipped Over (free fall, with an impact shock). Using both shock indicator labels and
tilt indicator labels will help identify if a Tip Over impact shock occurred.
Table 3-7 Tilt Indicator has triggered or is missing
STEP TASK
1 If the Tilt Indicator is missing:

Note on the shipping papers at the time of receipt that the Tilt Indicator label is missing.
If the Tilt Indicator has triggered:
Note on the shipping papers at the time of receipt that the Tilt Indicator label was
activated.
2 Inspect the product for possible concealed damage.

3-3-5 Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Carton Box
3-3-5-1 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label on the Carton Box

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label is printed on four sides of the Carton Box.
Figure 3-1 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label printed on the Carton Box
ICONS ICONS ICONS

and DESCRIPTION and DESCRIPTION and DESCRIPTION
SYMBOLS SYMBOLS SYMBOLS
KEEP AIR PRESSURE

FRAGILE, HANDLE
BETWEEN 70 kPa and DO NOT STACK
WITH CARE
106 kPa
KEEP
TRANSPORTATION TOP UPRIGHT
KEEP DRY, PROTECT
TEMPERATURE TRANSPORTA-TION
FROM MOISTURE
BETWEEN -20C AND AND STORAGE
+60C
RECYCLING.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
HANDLE WITH CARE RECYCLABLE
BETWEEN 30 AND 95%
PACKING PARTS
MANUFACTURER

3-3-5-2 Uncrating the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Table 3-8 Uncrating the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sheet 1 of 4
Step Task Illustration
1. Cut the straps around the crate.
2. Remove the Top Cover.
3. Remove the Complete Column Left and

Complete Column Right.
4. Remove the Box For Accessories.
3 - 10 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

Table 3-8 Uncrating the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 2 of 4
5. Remove the two Frames (sides) and the two

Exit Ramp Bases.
6. Install the two Exit Ramp Base on the

Complete Exit Ramp (the rear plate).
7. Remove the Support For Monitor.
Chapter 3 - System setup 3 - 11

8. Remove the Complete Front Protection.
9. Remove the plastic bag from the VIVID E9/

VIVID E7.
10. Remove the Inlay UI Top.
11. Fold down the assembled Exit Ramp.

12. Unlock the Front Brakes on the VIVID E9/

VIVID E7, but keep direction lock activated.
The direction lock keeps the front wheels in
position, and secures the direction stability
when the system is rolled down the ramp
from the pallet.
13. Unlock the Rear Brakes.
1 - Direction (Dir) Lock

2 - Release Dir Lock and Front Brakes
3 - Front Brakes
4 - Rear Brakes
14. Carefully move the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 down
the ramp, with rear end first.
15. Assemble the empty transportation box and
place all of the filling inside the box before
you close it.
Close the box, and store it for possible future
use.

3-3-5-3 Packing materials for the Carton Box - recycling information

The packing materials for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 are recyclable, refer to the table below.
Table 3-9 Packaging parts for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sheet 1 of 2
Item Description QTY. Material *) Illustration
1. Export pallet 1200 x 800 1 D
2. Complete base 1 A
3. Complete column left and right 2 A
4. Support for monitor 1 C
5. Inlay UI Top 1 C
6. Complete front protection 1 B
7. Exit ramp 1 A
8. Frame 1112 x 740 x 1225 2 A
9. Exit ramp base 2 A

Table 3-9 Packaging parts for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 2 of 2
Item Description QTY. Material *) Illustration
10. Box for accessories 1 A
11. Top cover 1140 x 755 x 150 1 A
12. Support plate, used to keep 1 A

Front Protection in place if there
are few or none probes
included.
13. Protectors for Top Cover 2 A
*) Material type: A: BB34bc with varnish C9068

B: BB27c with varnish C9068
C: PE foam, Stratocell
D: Wood ISPM15

3-3-6 Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Wooden Box
3-3-6-1 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label for the Wooden Box
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label is located at the front of the Wooden Transportation
Box.
Figure 3-2 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Transportation Box Label used on the Wooden Box
106 kPa 60 C 95%
RELATIVE HUMIDITY HANDLE WITH KEEP DRY,

70 kPa -20 C 30%
BETWEEN 30 and 95% CARE PROTECT FROM MOISTURE

Vivid E9

(Max size): 116x78x133 mm (LxWxH)
(Net weight): 128 kg
(Gross weight): 200 kg
(Box No.): 1/1
GE Vingmed Ultrasound AS
Strandpromenade 45
N-3191 Horten

GaG
: Vivid E9
:
GGGZ[ZG
wvihGGG^SG_
: GE Vingmed Ultrasound AS OP
aGW`TYW`
GaGGGGGGSG
GGGGGGG
GG
GGaGGG
: 1 Set
Vivid E9
, , :
AC: 100 ~ 230 VAC, 50 ~ 60 Hz, 1100 W
: 1 , CF

KEEP TRANSPORTATION TOP UPRIGHT FRAGILE,

TEMPERATURE BETWEEN TRANSPORTATION & HANDLE WITH CARE
-20C and +60C STORAGE
KEEP AIR PRESSURE

BETWEEN
GA314326-05
70 kPa and 106 kPa
RECYCLING.
RECYCLABLE WOOD MANUFACTURER

3-3-6-2 Unpack the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Table 3-10 Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Wooden Box sheet 1 of 2
Step Task
1. Open the four hinges on each door and remove the doors.
One of the doors are used as ramp out off and into the transportation box.
On the first version of the Transportation Box, only the front door is meant to be used as a ramp. It has bevel cut in one end.
Front door bevel cut.
This end of the door
should be used as
the lower end of the
ramp.
2. Place the front door as a ramp against the rear edge of the pallet.
Labank
On the second version transportation box, the ramp is placed

directly on the labank ends.
3. Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanners Operator Panel and all
the filling material, from the Transportation Box.

Table 3-10 Unpacking VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from the Wooden Box (contd) sheet 2 of 2
Step Task
4.
NOTICE
Moving the unit in and out of the transportation box
The unit has brakes on all wheels, but direction lock only on the
front wheels. The wheels position when moving the system into Direction Lock Brake Brakes
its transportation box are therefore vital. If the wheels are
swiveling when the system is inside the transportation box, it
may jam the system inside the box. The system must be moved
backwards both into and out of the transportation box.
Moving the system into the transportation box

1. Align the front wheel under the front end of the system as
shown in Figure 1.
2. Push the direction lock pedal to lock the front wheels in this
direction. Check that they are locked.
3. Push the Top Console to its lowest and most backward Front Wheels Rear Wheels
locked position.
4. Pull the system into the box with the rear end first. Figure 1: Brakes and direction locks
Moving the system out of the transportation box Transportation box

1. Unlock brakes but keep direction lock activated. The
direction lock keeps the front wheels in position, and secures
the direction stability when the system is rolled out of the
transportation box.
2. Pull the system out of the box with rear end first.
CAUTION
Have two people available to unpack the system.
Attempts to move the system considerable Figure 2: Console and Wheels position
distances or on an incline by one person could
result in injury or damage or both.
Transport notice GA314329-02
Press once on the Release pedal to release the brakes.

Press once on the Direction Lock pedal to keep direction lock activated. The direction lock keeps the front wheels from swiveling
and blocking the system inside the narrow transportation box.
5. Carefully move the instrument out of the Transportation Box, down the ramp, with rear end first.
6. Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit.
7. Place all the filling material inside the Transportation Box, close it and store it for possible use in the future.

3-3-6-3 Packing materials for the Wooden Box - recycling information

The packing materials for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 are recyclable:
The Transportation Box is made of spruce or similar material.

(PHYTOSANITARY CERTIFICATE included in all shipments to The People's Republic of China.)
Lever lockings (hinges) are made of zinc plated steel.
The inner reinforcements are made of Ethafoam (Polyethylene foam).
The plastic foil is made of LDPE (Low Density Polyethylene).

Section 3-4
Preparing for setup
3-4-1 Verify Customer Order
Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items
that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.
3-4-2 Physical inspection

Verify that the system arrived intact (visual inspection).
If the system has been damaged, please refer to Damage in Transportation on page x in the beginning
of this manual.
3-4-3 EMI protection

This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by
this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured
before the unit is put into operation.
See 2-2-4 "EMI limitations" on page 2-7 for more information about EMI protection.
3 - 20 Section 3-4 - Preparing for setup

Section 3-5
Completing the setup
This section describes how to complete the installation of VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

3-5-2 Contents in this section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-5-3 System specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-5-4 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-5-5 Connections on the I/O Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-5-6 Connections on the Patient I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-5-7 Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-5-8 Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-5-9 Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-5-10 Complete power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-5-3 System specifications
3-5-3-1 System requirements verification

Verify that the site meets the requirements listed in Chapter 2 (see: "Facility needs" on page 2-10).
Verify that the specifications below dont conflict with any on-site conditions.
3-5-3-2 Physical dimensions

The physical dimensions of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 unit are summarized in Table 3-11.
Table 3-11 Physical dimensions of VIVID E9/VIVID E7 with monitor and peripherals
HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH UNIT

137.5/157.5 54.0 80.0 cm
54.1/62.0 21.2 31.4 Inches
3-5-3-3 Mass with monitor and peripherals
Table 3-12 Mass of VIVID E9/VIVID E7 with monitor and peripherals
MODEL WEIGHT [KG] WEIGHT [LBS]

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 128 283
3-5-3-4 Acoustic noise level

Less than 55 dB(A) at 20 degrees Celsius, measured in the operators head position, 20 cm in front of
the keyboards right corner, at 1.30 m above the floor, and in a distance of 1 meter at all four sides, 1
meter above the floor.

3-5-4 Electrical specifications
WARNING CONNECTING A VIVID E9/VIVID E7 UNIT TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL
MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE UNIT.
3-5-4-1 Verification of the systems voltage setting

Verify that the mains voltage specified for the unit is available on-site.
The voltage setting for the unit is found on a label near the Mains Power Circuit Breaker on the rear of
the system.
Figure 3-3 Mains Voltage Rating label

VERIFY THAT THE VOLTAGE ON THE
LABEL CORRESPONDS TO THE SITES
R E F # 1 G A 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 -2 3 0 V A C MAINS VOLTAGE
R E F # 2 H 4 5 5 4 1 S D 1 1 0 0 W
M o d e l: V iv id E 9 5 0 /6 0 H z
0 1
G A 3 1 4 3 2 3
3-5-4-2 Electrical specifications for VIVID E9/VIVID E7

In the table below, the electrical specifications for VIVID E9 and VIVID E7 includes monitor and on board
peripherals.
Table 3-13 Electrical specifications for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
POWER
XDclear (S/W v113.x)

100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
BT12

100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
3 - 22 Section 3-5 - Completing the setup

Table 3-13 Electrical specifications for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd)
POWER
BT11

100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
BT09
GA000100 VIVID E9 (with 4D) - v108.x.x 100-230 VAC 10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
The current drain will vary depending on the mains voltage.


3-5-5 Connections on the I/O Rear Panel

NOTE: Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according
to the respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC60950 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-
1 for medical equipment). Furthermore, all complete configurations shall comply with the valid
version of the system standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects additional equipment
to the signal input part or signal output part of VIVID E9/VIVID E7, configures a medical system,
and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the valid version
of IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical service department or your local
representative for GE.
3-5-5-1 Connect Ethernet

Connect the network cable to the Ethernet connector on the BEP I/O board.
The connector is located on the connector panel on the rear side of VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 3-4 Ethernet connection on rear side of VIVID E9/VIVID E7
!
ETHERNET
CONNECTOR
L R
3-5-5-2 Connect USB Flash Card
NOTE: USB Flash Cards approved for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 are verified for EMC performance according
to EN55011 class B. The use of any other USB Flash Cards will compromise this verification,
and may cause interference on VIVID E9/VIVID E7 itself, or on other electronic devices.
For approved models, see: Section 9-16 "Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-88.
Install the USB Flash Card in one of the USB ports on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. Two ports are provided
on the Operator Panel, to the left for the Touch Screen.

3-5-6 Connections on the Patient I/O panel

The Patient I/O panel is located on the front of VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 3-5 Patient I/O Panel
1 - PHONO
2 - ECG
3 - AUX (PRESSURE/PULSE)
3-5-6-1 Connect ECG

Connect the ECG cable to the ECG connector on the Patient I/O panel.
3-5-6-2 Connect Heart Microphone (Phono)

The Heart Microphone has its corresponding Phono adapter. See Section 9-21 "Physio TX Parts" on
page 9-121.
Connect the Heart Microphone via the corresponding Phono Adapter to the Phono input on the Patient
I/O panel.
Figure 3-6 Heart Microphone (Phono)
PHONO ADAPTER
MA-300
3-5-6-3 Connect Pulse Pressure Transducer

Connect the Pulse Pressure Transducer via the corresponding Auxiliary/Pressure Adapter to the Patient
I/O panel. For Part Number and model information, see Section 9-21 "Physio TX Parts" on page 9-121.
Figure 3-7 Pulse Pressure Transducer
AUX/PRESSURE
TY-306
ADAPTER

3-5-7 Connecting Probes
3-5-7-1 Introduction to Connecting Probes

Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is on or off.
The system has three types of probe ports; one PD probe port, three PDT probe ports (Figure 3-8) and
a Doppler probe port.
The PD probe port is compatible with the Vivid 7 probe connectors.

The three PDT probe ports are specific to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 probe connectors.
The Doppler probe port is used for CW Doppler probes (non-sector-probes), sometimes called
PEDOF probes.
Figure 3-8 Probe connectors
1 - PD PROBE PORT: FOR VIVID 7 COMPATIBLE PROBE CONNECTORS

2 - PDT PROBE PORTS: FOR VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SPECIFIC PROBE CONNECTORS
NOTE! The Doppler probe port is not illustrated here.

3-5-7-2 Connect a probe
NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a probe.
CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW THE PROBE HEAD TO HANG FREELY. EXCESSIVE IMPACT TO THE PROBE
WILL RESULT IN IRREPARABLE DAMAGE.
CAUTION TO PREVENT PROBE CONNECTOR PINS DAMAGE, OR PCB BOARD DAMAGE, DO NOT USE
EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN CONNECTING THE PROBES.
CAUTION KEEP THE PROBE CABLES AWAY FROM THE WHEELS.

DO NOT BEND THE PROBE CABLES
DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES.
1.) Before connecting the probe:

a.) Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets.
b.) Remove any dust or foam rests from the probe pins.
c.) Verify the probe and the probe cable for any visual damage.
2.) Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing upward.
3.) Turn the connector locking handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position.
4.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
5.) Turn the locking handle clockwise to the full vertical position to lock in place.
6.) Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor.
3-5-7-3 Disconnect a probe

1.) Rotate the lock handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector.
2.) Remove the connector from the port.
3.) Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case, see 10-5-5 "Probe
maintenance" on page 10-13 for cleaning instructions.

3-5-8 Power On/Boot Up
3-5-8-1 Warnings
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.
NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five (5) seconds. When turning OFF
the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker
ON.

3-5-8-2 Connect AC (mains) Power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Connecting AC Power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit, involves preliminary checks of the
power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the Circuit Breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
3.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4.) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
5.) Connect the Power Cables female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
6.) Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp (ACC Clamp).
7.) Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, if not, switch it OFF.
Figure 3-9 The Circuit Breaker and On/Off button
8.) Connect the Power Cables other end (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the
proper rated voltage, and the unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

3-5-8-3 Switch ON the AC Power to VIVID E9/VIVID E7
1.) Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit.
Figure 3-10 The Circuit breaker and On/Off button
You should hear a click from the relays in the AC Power and the unit is ready to boot.
2.) Press once on the On/Off key on the Operator Panel to boot the unit.
During a normal boot, you may observe that:
a.) The units ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the
fan sound).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Operator Panel (Console), Monitor, Front End
Processor and Back End Processor.
c.) Back End Processor and rest of scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
d.) Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
e.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
f.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
Figure 3-11 Start-up bar
g.) The software initiates and sets up the Front End electronics and the rest of the instrument.
h.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.

3-5-8-3 Switch ON the AC Power to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd)

i.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that
no probe has been connected.
Figure 3-12 2D Screen on the display.
NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typical less than two minutes. If starting after a power loss or a
lock-up, the start-up time may be up to four minutes.

3-5-9 Power shut down

When you switch off the unit, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence.
Figure 3-13 System - Exit menu
The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when switching off the unit, gives you these choices:
Logoff
Use this button to log off the current user.
The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.
If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment.
Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down. It is recommended to
perform a full shutdown at least once a week.
If the Shutdown button is dimmed, use the key-combination <Ctrl+Alt+R> to shut down the unit.
Cancel
Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.
Exit (Only available when logged in as GE Service with Service Dongle)

Select this button when you want to exit to the Windows Desktop.
NOTE: If you need to restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 when logged on to the Windows Desktop, ensure that
you do a complete power down (Shut Down). This is required to power up the Front End
Processor.
Figure 3-14 System - Exit menu (when logged in using Service Dongle)

3-5-10 Complete power down
1.) Press once on the On/Off key on the Operator Panel to display the System - Exit menu.
Figure 3-15 Press once on the key with the green light
PRESS ONCE
Figure 3-16 Select Shutdown
2.) Select Shutdown to do a complete power down of the unit.

The Back End Processor will first turn off the scanner activity and print the message Please wait -
Shutdown in progress in the LCD display on the Operator Panel.
Next, it starts to shut down itself. The time to turn down the unit, including the Back End Processor,
may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute.
The last thing that shuts down, is the light on the Operator Panel, indicating that you can continue
with the next step.
NOTICE Be sure to wait with the next step until the system has finished its shut-down. Failing to do so, may
destroy data on the hard disk, making the system fail later.

3-5-10 Complete power down (contd)

3.) Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the unit. This will cut power
distribution within the unit.
Figure 3-17 Circuit Breaker located on rear of the unit
MAINS POWER CIRCUIT

BREAKER

Section 3-6
Configuration
This section describes how to configure the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

3-6-3 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-6-4 Service Screen setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-6-5 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-6-6 Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-6-7 Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
After completing configuration, as described in this section, next step is to control/adjust connectivity
settings, starting with Section 3-7 "Connectivity overview" on page 3-49.
3-6-3 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 configuration

3-6-3-2 Select System Settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-6-3-3 Enter Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-6-3-4 Date and time adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3-6-3-5 Select User Interface Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3-6-3-6 Select Online Manual Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3-6-3-7 Select Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

3-6-3-2 Select System Settings screen

1.) Select Config (F2) and log on as adm, see 4-2-7 "Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM" on
page 4-15.
2.) Select System and then select Settings, if needed.
Figure 3-18 Hospital and department name
SETTINGS
HOSPITAL NAME
DEPARTMENT
SYSTEM
3-6-3-3 Enter Location
Table 3-14 Location name
STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT(S)
The 24 first characters of this name are displayed on the scanning

Select the Hospital field, see Figure 3-18, and type the name of screens title bar (after restart)
1
the hospital (max 64 characters). All 64 are displayed on the image properties on saved images (after
restart).
Select in the Department field, see Figure 3-18, and type the This name will be displayed on the image properties on saved images as
2
name of the department (max 64 characters). soon as the unit has been restarted.
3 - 36 Section 3-6 - Configuration

3-6-3-4 Date and time adjustments
Figure 3-19 Date and time adjustments

a
Table 3-15 Date and Time adjustments
Open the System (Configuration) Window, see 4-2-7 "Logging

1 on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM" on page 4-15. The System Settings window is displayed.
Select System, if needed.
Select the preferred Date Format, see (d) in Figure 3-19.

DD = Date (two digits)
2 EU: the European/International DD.MM.YYYY format is used
MM = Month (two digits)
US: the American MM.DD.YYYY format is used
YYYY = Year (four digits)
24: the 24 hour format is used

3 Select the preferred Time Format, see (c) in Figure 3-19.
12: the 12 AM/PM hour format is used
4 Adjust the date, see (a) in Figure 3-19. New date is displayed
5 Adjust the time, see (b) in Figure 3-19. New time is displayed
1900: the number 19 is automatically displayed when entering the year

in the patient date of birth.
To edit century, press BACKSPACE twice.
2000: the number 20 is automatically displayed when entering the year
Select Default Century (1900, 2000 or None), see (e) in Figure
6 in the patient date of birth.
3-19.
To edit century, press BACKSPACE twice.
None: the four digits have to be typed when entering the year in the
patient date of birth.
The selected setting will be used as soon as the unit has been restarted.

3-6-3-5 Select User Interface Language
Figure 3-20 Select User Interface Language
LANGUAGE
Table 3-16 Language Adjustments
1. Open the Configuration Window, see 4-2-7 "Logging on to

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM" on page 4-15. The System Settings window is displayed.
2. Use the Language drop down dialog, see Figure 3-20, to select The selected language will be used as soon as the unit has been
your preferred language for the on-screen interface. restarted.

3-6-3-6 Select Online Manual Language
Figure 3-21 Online Manual Language Selection
MANUAL LANGUAGE
Table 3-17 Online Manual Language Selection

2. Use the Manual Language drop down dialog, see Figure 3-21, The selected language will be used as soon as the unit has been
to select your preferred language. restarted.

3-6-3-7 Select Units of Measure
Figure 3-22 Select Units of Measure
UNITS
Table 3-18 Select Units of Measure

2. The selected units (Metric or US) will be used for measurements as soon
Use the drop down dialog to select Metric or US Units.
as the unit has been restarted.
3. Restart the scanner. All the changed settings will be used after the restart.

3-6-4 Service Screen setup

3-6-4-2 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-6-4-3 Open Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-6-4-4 Select Video Format, PAL or NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-6-4-5 Alphanumeric Keyboard configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-6-4-6 Add Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-6-4-2 Overview
The Service Screen gives you access to:
Select Video Format to be used by DVR

Select DVR
Adjust LCDs Contrast and Backlight Intensity
Alphanumeric Keyboard Setups
Printer Setup
Monitor Selection
3-6-4-3 Open Service Screen

1.) Press Config (F2) and log on as adm, see 4-2-7 "Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM" on
page 4-15.
2.) Select Service (lower, right part of window) to view the Service Screen, see Figure 3-23 on page
3-41.
Figure 3-23 Service Screen
SERVICE

3-6-4-4 Select Video Format, PAL or NTSC

This selection must correspond to the Video Standard (PAL or NTSC) used at the location.
From the Video Settings drop-down menu, select the correct video format (NTSC or PAL).
Figure 3-24 Select Video Format
SELECT VIDEO
FORMAT
3-6-4-5 Alphanumeric Keyboard configuration
NOTE: This Procedure is not required if the alphanumeric keyboard is a US keyboard, since the default
setting is set to US English keyboards.
Figure 3-25 Select Keyboard Setup
KEYBOARD SETUP
1.) Select Keyboard Setup to get access to Keyboard Properties.
Figure 3-26 Select Keyboard Properties
2.) Select Languages, to display the program languages screen.

3.) Use the Language used in menus and dialogs scroll bar to find the correct language for your use.

3-6-4-6 Add Printer
NOTE: This function may be unavailable for some software versions and it will not always function due
to that usually, a special Installation Wizard is to be used. Please follow instructions in the
respective printer installation procedure for correct printer installation. See 3-6-5 "Optional
Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-45 for more information.
Figure 3-27 Add Printer
ADD PRINTER
1.) Select Add Printer to start the Add Printer (Installation) Wizard.
Figure 3-28 Add Printer Wizard
2.) Follow the instructions in the Wizard to install a new printer.
3-6-4-7 Monitor Selection

Some characteristics are different for the different LCD monitors.
Figure 3-29 Select Monitor model
MONITOR
Select the Monitor model in the Monitor pull-down menu.

3-6-4-8 DVR (Option) Setup
NOTE: Installation instructions for the Digital Video Recorder (DVR) option is included in the DVR
Installation manual, Direction Number GA294614.
Selecting Offline mode
Follow these steps to select Offline mode for the DVR:
1.) Install media in the DVR Recorder.

2.) Go into Config (F2) > Service.
3.) Select Offline.
4.) Reboot the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

3-6-5 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection

3-6-5-2 Approved Internal Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-6-5-3 External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-6-5-4 External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to Ethernet (TCP/IP Network) . . . . . . . 3-46
3-6-5-5 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-6-5-2 Approved Internal Peripherals

This list covers the internal peripherals available for VIVID E9/VIVID E7:
Printer, Monochrome (Black & White), Digital

- SONY UP-D897
- MITSUBISHI Digital Monochrome Printer P95DE
Digital Video Recorder (DVR)
3-6-5-3 External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to USB

One of the external units listed below, may be connected to the USB port on the rear of the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7:
Footswitch
Configuration of the footswitch is done on the Config > Imaging > Application screen.
For more information, refer to the VIVID E9 or VIVID E7 user manual.
External Data Storage:

- USB Flash Card
- Desktop hard drive (2TB with RAID1)
COLOR Printers:
- SONY UPD-25MD
- SONY UPD-23MD
- MITSUBISHI Digital Color Printer CP30DW

3-6-5-4 External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to Ethernet (TCP/IP Network)

When installing a new external printer, connected via Ethernet (TCP/IP Network), please refer to the
respective Installation manuals in the table below.
Table 3-19 Installation manuals / instructions
MANUAL
POS PRINTER MODEL DIRECTION NUMBER COMMENTS
1 HP OfficeJet Pro 8000 GA294652
2 HP OfficeJet PRO K5400dn GA294652 Printer is obsolete from factory.
3 HP OfficeJet PRO K550 GA294652 Printer is obsolete from factory.
4 HP Color LaserJet 3600n GA294652 Printer is obsolete from factory.
5 HP Laser Jet Pro 400 color M451 GA294652
6 HP Color LaserJet CP2025n GA294652 Printer is obsolete from factory
7 HP Inkjet 1200DTN GA294652 Use FC194654 as a reference
Printer is obsolete from factory.

8 HP Inkjet 1100DTN GA294652
Use EP194599 as a reference

9 HP Deskjet 6127 GA294652
10 HP Deskjet 990 Cxi GA294652
11 LEXMARK C762N FC194475
12 LEXMARK C752N FC194475 Printer is obsolete from factory.
13 LEXMARK C750N FC194252 Printer is obsolete from factory.
14 EPSON 980N EP091298 (see: chapter 3) Printer is obsolete from factory.
3-6-5-5 Additional Information

See Section 9-16 "Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-88 for replacement units.
3-6-6 Available Probes

See Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-122.

3-6-7 Software Options Configuration

3-6-7-2 Software Option installation introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-6-7-3 Installing a Software Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-6-7-4 Remote Check and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3-6-7-2 Software Option installation introduction

A Password (Software Option String) enables a software option or a combination of software options.
This password is specific for each VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
For a list of available options, see: Section 9-24 "Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-126.
3-6-7-3 Installing a Software Option

page 4-15.
2.) Select Admin (lower part of window),
3.) Select the System Admin tab.
Figure 3-30 System Admin screen
SYSTEM ADMIN TAB
NEW
ADMIN

3-6-7-3 Installing a Software Option (contd)

4.) Select New to open the New Key dialog where you type the Software Option Key (Alphanumeric
String).
Figure 3-31 Type Software Option Key (Alphanumeric string)
Field for Software Option Key (Alphanumeric String)
CAUTION INCORRECT PASSWORD ENTRY WILL RESULT IN LOSS OF SYSTEM OPTIONS.

IF PASSWORD IS INCORRECT, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL GE SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE OR THE ONLINE CENTER.
5.) Type the Password (Software Option Key (Alphanumeric string)).

6.) Press Save to save the new setting.
7.) Restart to save and activate the settings and adjustments you have done so far.
3-6-7-4 Remote Check and Configuration

Contact the OnLine Center for InSite Checkout.

Section 3-7
Connectivity overview
NOTE: If you are new or unfamiliar to connectivity on VIVID E9/VIVID E7, you should read Section 5-
5 "Connectivity" on page 5-7 before you continue with the next descriptions and procedures.
3-7-1 Physical connection
3-7-1-1 Stand-alone VIVID E9/VIVID E7

No network connection needed.
3-7-1-2 Sneaker Net environment

No network connection needed.
Use removable media to move data from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to another unit.
3-7-1-3 Connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to an EchoPAC PC Workstation

Direct Cable Connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to an EchoPAC PC Workstation via a Crossover
Cable
You will only need a Crossover Cable for network use to connect the two units this way.
a.) Connect one end of the crossed network cable to the network connector on the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7.
b.) Connect the other end to the network connector to the EchoPAC PC Workstation, see chapter
3 in the EchoPAC PC Workstation Service Manual.
Connection via a Peer-to-Peer Network
You will need a network hub and one network cable for each unit connected to the hub.
Connection via Hospital Network

You will need one network cable to connect the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to a wall outlet on the hospitals
network.
3-7-1-4 Connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to a DICOM Server on a Network

You will need one network cable.
1.) Connect one end of the cable to the Ethernet connector on VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
2.) Connect the other end of the cable to the wall outlet.
If a Peer-to-Peer Network is connected to the hospitals network, you may connect the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 to the Peer-to-Peer Network.

Section 3-8
Connectivity setup
NOTE: If connected to a stand-alone network (Peer-to-Peer network with a VIVID E9/VIVID E7
scanner, an EchoPAC PC workstation and an optional network printer), you should use default
delivery settings.
3-8-1 Introduction
To be able to use the network functions when connected to a hospital network, the scanner must have
a proper network address.
Before you can set up the scanner, you need to collect some information.
The "Worksheet for DICOM Network Information" on page 2-14 can be used for gathering this
information.
Typical source for this information is the network administrator.
3-8-2 Contents in this Section

3-8-3 "Compatibility" on page 3-50
3-8-4 "Select TCP/IP Screen" on page 3-51
3-8-5 "Changing the AE Title and/or Port Number (Port No.)" on page 3-52
3-8-6 "DHCP setup" on page 3-53
3-8-7 "Set the Remote Archives Network Information" on page 3-56
3-8-8 "Save the New Settings" on page 3-57
3-8-9 "Setup connection to a DICOM server" on page 3-58
3-8-10 "Export configuration" on page 3-76
3-8-11 "Create a new dataflow" on page 3-82
3-8-12 "Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Setup" on page 3-88
3-8-13 "Mapping of parameters from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to DICOM" on page 3-95
3-8-14 "Dual Export to DICOM servers" on page 3-99
3-8-3 Compatibility
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 can communicate with:
EchoPAC PC
Image Vault
- For networks with Image Vault 5 server running on Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server
2008:
- If not already done, install the Vivid Raw Data Module (RDCM), software version v113, on
the Image Vault server.
For instructions, see: Vivid Raw Data Module (RDCM) Installation Manual, Direction
Number IV294001.
Other units via DICOM
NOTE: Vivid E9 cant read files directly from EchoPAC MAC or from MAC formatted MO disks. Please
use an EchoPAC PC workstation with an MO drive and with MacDrive 5 or MacDrive 6 installed.
EchoPAC PC can also open EchoPAC MAC examinations stored on a server.
3 - 50 Section 3-8 - Connectivity setup

3-8-4 Select TCP/IP Screen

page 4-15.
2.) If not already selected, select Connectivity from the bottom row of buttons on the screen.
3.) Select the TCP/IP TAB (it is named Tcpip). The resulting screen gives you an overview of many of
the network settings for VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
.
Figure 3-32 TCP/IP Overview screen for VIVID E9/VIVID E7

DETAILED DICOM LOG:
SELECT TO TURN DETAILED DICOM LOG ON.
(IT WILL BE TURNED OFF AFTER A RESTART)
COMPUTER NAME / AE TITLE:

FOR VIVID E9/VIVID E7, THIS NAME IS ON
THE FORM: VIVIDX-00NNNN, WHERE
00NNNN IS A NUMBER (NNNN IS THE
SCANNERS SERIAL NUMBER).
PORT NO:
DEFAULT PORT NUMBER: 104
REMOTE ARCHIVE SETUP AREA:

IP SETTINGS AREA FOR A REMOTE
ARCHIVE.
EXAMPLE: ECHOPAC PC (ECHOPAC7).
DEFAULT SETUP:
REMOTE ARCHIVE IP-ADDR: 10.0.0.4
REMOTE ARCHIVE NAME (THE NAME OF
THE PC OR SERVER WITH THE REMOTE
ARCHIVE): ECHOPAC7-000001
NETWORK SETTINGS:
USE NETWORK SETTINGS IF YOU NEED
TO CHANGE VIVID E9/VIVID E7s IP SAVE SETTINGS
SETTINGS OR TURN DHCP ON OR OFF. SELECT SAVE SETTINGS TO
ARCHIVE ANY CHANGES YOU HAVE
DONE TO THE TCP/IP SETTINGS

3-8-5 Changing the AE Title and/or Port Number (Port No.)
Figure 3-33 AE Title and Port No.
1.) To change AE Title and/or Port No., edit the respective fields.
2.) Select Save settings to store your changes. This will bring up a new Warning screen.
Figure 3-34 Warning
3.) Select Ok to save your changes or Cancel to return without saving any changes.
4.) Reboot VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to activate the settings or continue with other Tcpip set-up tasks.

3-8-6 DHCP setup

Follow the instructions below to configure the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s use of DHCP.
.
Figure 3-35 Advanced Settings
NETWORK SETTINGS
1.) When in the TCP/IP screen, select Network Settings to display the Network Connections screen,
see Figure 3-36 "Network Connections" on page 3-53.
Figure 3-36 Network Connections
2.) Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties from the pop-up menu to go to the Local
Area Connection Properties screen (see next page).

3-8-6 DHCP setup (contd)
Figure 3-37 Local Area Connection Status
3.) Select Properties to display the Local Area Connection Properties
Figure 3-38 Local Area Connection Properties
4.) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then select Properties.

3-8-6 DHCP setup (contd)
Figure 3-39 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
To turn DHCP on:
Select: Obtain an IP address automatically.
To turn DHCP off:
1.) Select: Use the following IP address:

2.) Enter the:
- IP address
- Subnet mask
- Default gateway
To save your new settings and close the open windows:
1.) Select OK to save the setting and close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog.
2.) Select OK to close (and save) the Local Area Connection Properties dialog.
3.) Select Close to close the Local Area Connection Status dialog.
4.) Select the x in the upper right corner to close the Network Connections window.

3-8-7 Set the Remote Archives Network Information

To be able to connect to a remote archive, on a remote computer or server, you must configure
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to communicate with it.
In the Remote Archive Setup area of the Tcpip screen (see example in Figure 3-40), enter the;
1.) Remote Archive IP address. (Default IP Address from factory: 10.0.0.4).

2.) Remote Archive Name. (Default Remote Archive Name from factory: ECHOPAC7-000001).
.
Figure 3-40 TCP/IP Set-up for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
IP ADDRESS FOR THE

REMOTE ARCHIVE
COMPUTER NAME FOR
THE REMOTE ARCHIVE

3-8-8 Save the New Settings

1.) Press Save Settings to save the new settings.
.
Figure 3-41 Save New TCP/IP settings
SAVE SETTINGS
A Warning is displayed on the screen, see illustration below.
Figure 3-42 Warning
2.) Select OK to save the new settings. (By selecting Cancel, the previous settings will be kept.)
3.) The new settings are saved to a common settings file. After a restart, the settings are also included
in other screens.
4.) Restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to activate the changes.

3-8-9 Setup connection to a DICOM server

3-8-9-2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3-8-9-3 DICOM server IP address setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3-8-9-4 Verify the Network Connection to a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-8-9-5 Verify the Connection to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-8-9-6 DICOM Storage setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-8-9-7 DICOM Storage IP-address adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3-8-9-8 DICOM SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3-8-9-2 Overview
In this case the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is configured to work with DICOM servers in a network environment.
Images are first saved on the local image buffer on the scanner. At the end of the examination the
images are sent to the DICOM server via a DICOM spooler and to the local database, depending on
dataflows.
This scenario requires that the scanner is configured to be connected to DICOM servers as described
below.
To connect to the DICOM server, the following information has to be entered in the scanner:
The DICOM server IP address.

The DICOM server port number.
The DICOM server AE title (the server applications name).

3-8-9-3 DICOM server IP address setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7

page 4-15.
2.) Select Connectivity (in the lower part of the window).
3.) Select the Dataflow tab.
Figure 3-43 Dataflow
NAME FIELD
4.) Select the arrow to the right for the Name field to list all dataflows in a pull-down menu.

3-8-9-3 DICOM server IP address setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd)
Figure 3-44 Select Dataflow
ARROW
SELECT DATAFLOW
FROM DATAFLOW NAME
PULL-DOWN MENU.
5.) Select the dataflow you want to configure from the Dataflow Name pull-down list, see Figure 3-44.
In Figure 3-46, the selected flow, Worklist/Local Archive - DICOM Server/Int. HD, is shown. Setup of
other dataflows are similar to this example.

Figure 3-45 Worklist
DIRECT STORE
HIDDEN
WORKLIST
PROPERTIES
If Direct Store is enabled, the image will go to the DICOM server immediately after it is acquired.
You will need to verify that the DICOM server is capable of keeping the connection open for the time it
takes to complete an examination.
If Hidden is enabled, the dataflow will be invisible in the Search/Create Patient screen.
Uncheck Hidden to display the dataflow in the Search/Create Patient screen.
6.) Select Worklist. (The Worklist entry must be highlighted.)

7.) Select Properties to display the Properties dialog.

Figure 3-46 Worklist/Local Archive - DICOM Server/Int. HD flow
IP-ADDRESS DOWN-ARROW
8.) Select the IP-Address down-arrow to choose the Worklist Server from the pull-down menu.
NOTE: It is not possible to change the setting in the IP-Address field by editing it. See description
below, starting with step 9, to change the setting.
Figure 3-47 DICOM Servers Properties dialog
DO NOT SELECT THE

SEARCH CRITERIAS
BUTTON IF NOT TOLD SO
BY THE ONLINE CENTER.


9.) Follow the steps below to change the IP-Address settings:
a.) From the Ip-Address pull-down menu, select <Modify> to display the IPs dialog.
Figure 3-48 Select <Modify>
b.) Select the server you want to modify from the IPs dialog and then select Modify.
Figure 3-49 Select the server to modify
SELECT SERVER
MODIFY
c.) Edit the Name and/or the IP address of the server, see Figure 3-50 "Edit Name and/or IP
address" on page 3-64.

Figure 3-50 Edit Name and/or IP address
Name
IP address
d.) Select OK to save the new settings and close the dialog.
e.) Select OK to close the IPs dialog to return to the Worklist Properties dialog.
Figure 3-51 DICOM Servers Properties dialog
AE TITLE
PORT NO
DO NOT SELECT THE

SEARCH CRITERIAS
BUTTON IF NOT TOLD SO
BY THE ONLINE CENTER.
f.) Enter the DICOM server AE Title. This entry is case sensitive and must match exactly.
g.) Enter the DICOM server Port.No (Port Number)
h.) For some DICOM Servers, the default Time-out setting (30) is too low. See Section 6-11
"Adjust time-out for DICOM servers" on page 6-22 for more info.
i.) Select OK to close the Worklist properties dialog and save changes.

3-8-9-4 Verify the Network Connection to a Device

Follow the Steps Below to do a First Test (TCP-IP Ping) of the Connection:
1.) Highlight the device to be verified.

2.) Select Properties.
3.) Select the Smiley button to Ping the server.
NOTE: By selecting the Smiley button, a ping is sent to the remote server to see if it is accessible via
the network. It is not a DICOM Echo (DICOM ping), so it does not check AE title or port number.
4.) If the network connection to the server is OK, it will be illustrated by a smiling Smiley .
A sad Smiley indicates that the network connection is failing.
Typical causes:
- Network cable not connected.

- Configuration error(s).
3-8-9-5 Verify the Connection to a Device

1.) Select (highlight) the device you want to verify the connection to.
NOTE: You can only check one device at a time.
Figure 3-52 Verify connection to a device
SELECT DEVICE
TO BE
VERIFIED.
CHECK
2.) Select Check to start the verification process of the connection to the device.
The verification process may use some amount of time (several seconds).
When done, a Warning may be displayed on screen for some seconds. When the Warning has
closed, a sign is displayed in front of the device, indicating if the test passed (green check-mark) or
failed (red X).

3-8-9-5 Verify the Connection to a Device (contd)
NOTE: If the Check button fails directly, the AE Title is probably wrong.
If the Check button fails after a long time (corresponding to the time-out), the IP address or Port
Number is probably wrong.
In the illustration below, the message indicates that the pinging of the server worked fine (line 1),
but the application on the server didnt respond (line 2).
Figure 3-53 Warning - Check status
Figure 3-54 Verification result
A GREEN CHECK-
MARK INDICATES
THAT THE TEST
PASSED.
A RED CROSS, AS
ILLUSTRATED,
INDICATES THAT
THE CONNECTION
FAILED.

3-8-9-6 DICOM Storage setup

1.) Select Dicom storage.
Figure 3-55 Select Dicom storage
PROPERTIES
DICOM STORAGE
2.) Select Properties to display the DICOM Storage properties screen.
Figure 3-56 DICOM Storage Properties
IP-ADDRESS

3-8-9-7 DICOM Storage IP-address adjustment

1.) Select the down-arrow at the IP-Address pull-down menu to select the DICOM Storage server.
2.) Select <Modify> from the pull-down menu if you need to modify the servers parameters or add a
new server. This will bring up the IPs dialog.
Figure 3-57 IP Adjustments
If no changes are needed, continue with step 7.
3.) To modify any of the settings, select the server you want to modify, and then select Modify. This
will bring up the Enter name and Ip dialog.
Figure 3-58 The IPs dialog
4.) In the Enter name and Ip dialog you can modify the servers name and IP-address.
- Select OK to save the new settings and close the dialog.
- Select Cancel to close the dialog without saving the changes.
5.) If you want to add a new server, select Add in the IPs dialog.
a.) Type the servers name and IP-address in the Enter name and Ip dialog.
b.) Select OK to save the new settings and close the dialog. Cancel will close the dialog without
saving the changes.
3-8-9-7 DICOM Storage IP-address adjustment (contd)

6.) Follow these steps if you want to delete any of the servers from the list:
a.) Select the server you want to delete, and then select Delete. This will bring up a warning where
you are asked if you want to delete the server from the list.
b.) Select OK to confirm or Cancel if you dont want to delete the server from the list.
7.) Next, verify the other settings and parameters as described below.
IP-ADDRESS
Name
Raw data Storage - Name of service.
AE Title
DICOMSTORAGESCP - The DICOM servers AE Title.
Port No
Verify / set the DICOM servers Port Number.


Image Settings
- Allow Raw Data - default OFF (unchecked)
- Raw Compr. - default OFF (unchecked)
- Allow Multiframe - default ON (checked)
- Only Black and White - default OFF (unchecked)
- Max Framerate - The pull-down menu gives you these choices;
- 25 - 25 pictures per second
- 30 - 30 pictures per second
- Full - the scanning frame rate
- Compression
CAUTION Setting compression to None may lead to very long transfer time and loops larger than 500s
frames will be truncated. In case this happen, a warning is displayed on the screen.
The pull-down menu gives you these choices;
- Jpeg - JPEG/JPG compression (Default). JPEG is not lossless.

- None - (un-compressed data with huge files)
NOTE: If you are using compression None, it is strongly advised to reduce Frame Rate to 25 or 30 to
avoid truncating loops
- Rle - Run Length Encoding. This is lossless compression.

- Quality % - Set the wanted quality %. Default value is 95%.
- If files are stored with a quality lower than 95% they will occupy less space, but loose
some quality.
NOTE: Setting the quality % too low may add so much artifacts to the images that they cannot be used
for diagnosis.
- If files are stored with a quality above 95% the files will grow much bigger without almost
no quality change.
Smiley
Select the Smiley button to ping the server. If the network connection is OK, the Smiley will smile,
if the connection fail, the Smiley will turn sad.
NOTE:By selecting the Smiley button, a ping is sent to the remote server to see if it is accessible via the
network. It is not a DICOM Echo (DICOM ping), so it does not check AE title or port number.
Reopen per Image

If Reopen per image is enabled, VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will create a new connection (association) for
each image. This may be useful for DICOM servers that do not accept different image types in the
same association.


Storage Commitment
If you want to enable Storage Commitment, check the check-box and click on the button Storage
Commitment.
In the dialog, enter IP address, Name, AE Title and Port Number.
Figure 3-60 Storage Commitment properties
MPPS
If you want to enable MPPS, check the check-box and click on the button MPPS. In the dialog,
enter IP address, Name, AE Title and Port Number.
Figure 3-61 MPPS

DICOM SR
If SR is enabled, all M&A that is supported by DICOM is sent to the DICOM server (in a separate
job).
Allow SR Private Data

By default, this function is disabled.
Allow SR Private Data is intended for receivers that can handle Private Data, like the CA-1000.
Signed Doppler Velocities. The default setting is: Disabled. It means that signs for Doppler
Velocities are removed in the DICOM SR.
Figure 3-63 Dicom SR Settings
Retry
- Max # - The number of times the software will try to connect if the connection doesnt succeed
the first time(s).
- Interval - The interval in seconds between each attempt to connect.

Timeout
Adjust Time-out setting.
The retry settings can be used to make jobs retry on bad networks. There is no need to set retries
for mobile (off-line) use.
OK/Cancel
- Select OK to save all changes. The changes will take place after the scanner has been
restarted.
- Select Cancel to return without saving any changes.

3-8-9-8 DICOM SR
DICOM Structured Reporting (SR) is a standardized format for medical results. Vivid E9 supports the
specialized form for Adult Echo Ultrasound (TID 5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report) and
Vascular Ultrasound (TID 5100 Vascular Ultrasound Procedure Report) for M&A results.
With the DICOM SR support, M&A for an exam can be sent at the end of the exam or when exported
from local archive. The destination can be either a server on the network (Storage SCP) or a removable
media (DICOM Media) depending on the DICOM dataflow selected.
TID5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report is sent if the exam contains M&A from category Cardiac
or Pediatric (Heart). TID5100 Vascular Ultrasound Procedure Report is sent if the exam contains M&A
from category Vascular or Abdominal. If the exam contains M&A from both Cardiac/Pediatric (Heart)
and Vascular/Abdominal categories, two SR documents are sent.
TID5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report and TID5100 Vascular Ultrasound Procedure Report
do not support all M&A results from Vivid E9. They are limited to the following:
No unassigned measurement.
Refer to the Vivid E9 Reference manual for a complete list of supported parameters.
The following modes: 2D, M-mode, Color Flow, PW Doppler, CW Doppler, 3D and TDI.
Not Modified Simpson or Bullet methods.
Refer to the Vivid E9 Reference manual for a complete list of supported methods.
Basic derivations (Average, Last, Min and Max), no references between the derived measurements
and the ones they were made from.
Wall Motion Scoring: individual segment scores only according to 16-segment model, no graded
Hypokinesis (only Hypokinesis is used).
DICOM SR must be activated for each DICOM device.
1.) Press Utility/Config on the Touch panel and log on as administrator.

2.) Select the Connectivity category and Dataflow subgroup.
The Dataflow sheet is displayed.
3.) Select the DICOM dataflow to configure in the Name pull-down menu.

3-8-9-8 DICOM SR (contd)

4.) Select a DICOM storage device in the Selected devices pane and press Properties.
The Properties window for the selected DICOM storage device is displayed.
Figure 3-64 DICOM storage properties window
5.) Check the option Allow SR to enable DICOM SR.

The following additional options are available:
- Allow SR private data: send the current exam data in a private format. This option is by
default unchecked and should only be used with DICOM storage devices that can handle
private data format.
- Signed Doppler velocities: send signed Doppler velocities.
These settings apply to both TID5200 Echocardiography Procedure Report and TID5100
Vascular Ultrasound Procedure Report
6. Select OK.

3-8-10 Export configuration

The destination for Export of patient records to Excel and MPEG must be configured prior to use. This
is done from the Dataflow screen.

3-8-10-2 Setup on the Remote Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3-8-10-3 Configurable Remote Path User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3-8-10-4 Display the Dataflow screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-8-10-5 Export to Excel - configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-8-10-6 Export to MPEGVue configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3-8-10-7 eVue setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3-8-10-2 Setup on the Remote Share

Required setup on the remote share:
1.) Add user/password

2.) Set Share permissions
3.) Set Security permissions
NOTE: The User on the remote share must have all rights/controls for the shared folder.
The following default network user is predefined on VIVID E9/VIVID E7:

- User: E1c2h3o4C5l6i7e8n9t
- Password: u1l3t5r7a
It is possible to set a secondary user if required by the remote share.
For instructions, see: 3-8-10-3 "Configurable Remote Path User" on page 3-77.
NOTE: The default User / Password is always used as primary log in credential. No attempt is made to
use the secondary if log in succeeds using the primary.

3-8-10-3 Configurable Remote Path User
NOTE: The default User / Password is always used as primary log in credential. No attempt is made to
use the secondary user if log in succeeds using the primary.
NOTE: The configurable user and password is used for all remote paths configurable throughout the
system as secondary log in credential.
NOTE: The User on the remote share must have all rights/controls for the shared folder.
Follow these steps to set up a Secondary Remote Path User:
1.) Select Config/F2 to log on as ADM. (Default password: ulsadm).

For a detailed description, see: 4-2-7 "Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM" on page 4-15.
2.) Select Connectivity > Tools.
Figure 3-65 Secondary Remote Path User
3.) Enter the User and Password in the respective fields.
NOTE: The field User can either be on the form username, or domain\username.

3-8-10-4 Display the Dataflow screen

Follow these steps to Display the Dataflow Screen:
1.) Press CONFIG (F2) and log on as ADM (administrator)

2.) Select Connectivity > Dataflow.
The Dataflow sheet is displayed, see Figure 3-66 "The Dataflow sheet" on page 3-78.
3.) Select the dataflow Misc. Export in the Name pull-down menu.
Figure 3-66 The Dataflow sheet
NAME PULLDOWN
MENU

3-8-10-5 Export to Excel - configuration

1.) Select the Excel storage device in the Selected devices pane and press Properties.
The Excel properties window is displayed.
Figure 3-67 The Excel properties window
EXCEL STORAGE
PROPERTIES
2.) Select a removable media or a network volume remote path as the destination in the Destination
pull-down menu.
NOTE: Remote paths for network volumes must be entered once in the Remote path field before they
can be selected from the Destination Pull-down menu.
3.) Select OK.

4.) Press CONFIG (F2) if you want to quit Config.

3-8-10-6 Export to MPEGVue configuration

1.) Select the MPEGVue device in the Selected devices pane and press Properties.
The MPEGVue properties window is displayed.
Figure 3-68 The MPEGVue properties window
2.) Select a removable media or a network volume remote path as the destination in the Destination
Pull-down menu.
NOTE: Remote paths of network volumes must be entered once in the Remote path field before they
3.) Check the options as required.

4.) Select OK.
5.) Press CONFIG (F2) if you want to exit Configuration.

3-8-10-7 eVue setup

1.) Select CONFIG (F2) and log on as ADM (administrator).
2.) Select the Connectivity category and Dataflow subgroup. The Dataflow sheet is displayed.
3.) Select the dataflow Local Archive - Int. HD/eVue in the Name pull-down menu.
Figure 3-69 The eVue dataflow
4.) Select the eVue device in the Selected devices pane and press Properties. The eVue properties
window is displayed.
Figure 3-70 The eVue Properties
5.) Select a network volume remote path as the destination in the Destination pull-down menu.
NOTE: Remote paths of network volumes must be entered once in the Remote path field before they
6.) Check the options as required.

7.) Select OK and press CONFIG (F2).

3-8-11 Create a new dataflow
3-8-11-1 Overview
It is possible to make new dataflows by combining the predefined settings.
Prior to software version v112.1.3, this configuration was available to GE Service only.
Starting from software v112.1.3, users logged on with the ADM rights have access to this
configuration.
The table below describes the legal combination of inputs and outputs in a dataflow.
Table 3-20 Allowed combinations of inputs and outputs in a dataflow
OUTPUT
Remote
INPUT Database + Database +
Remote DICOM DICOM DICOM
No Output Database Database Storage Storage Storage
Database X X
Remote Database X X
DICOM Worklist X
DICOM CD Read X
DICOM USB device Read X
Query/Retrieve X
Worklist/database X X
Worklist/rem database X X
No input device X

3-8-11-2 Prerequisite
Software v112.1.3 and later: None.
Continue with: 3-8-11-3 "Preparations - Log on as ADM (software v112.1.3 and later)" on page 3-83.
Prior to software v112.1.3: A GE Service Dongle (+password) is needed to make new dataflows.
Continue with: 3-8-11-4 "Preparations - Log on with a Service Dongle" on page 3-83.
3-8-11-3 Preparations - Log on as ADM (software v112.1.3 and later)

1.) Select Config (F2).
2.) Log on as ADM. (Default password: ulsadm).
3.) Select Connectivity > Dataflow to display the Dataflow screen (see Figure 3-71.)
4.) Continue with 3-8-11-5 "To create a new dataflow" on page 3-84.
3-8-11-4 Preparations - Log on with a Service Dongle

1.) Power down the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
2.) Install the GE Service Dongle in one of the USB ports.
3.) Start VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
4.) Log on with the GE Service password.
6.) Select Connectivity > Dataflow to display the Dataflow screen. Since the GE Service Dongle is
used, the extra buttons are displayed.
Figure 3-71 Dataflow screen with extra buttons
RENAME
ADD
REMOVE

3-8-11-5 To create a new dataflow

1.) Select Add to start the creation of a new dataflow. This will bring up the Enter new name dialog.
Figure 3-72 Enter new name dialog
2.) Enter the name for the new dataflow.

Example: DR PACS Worklist
Figure 3-73 Enter the name of the new dataflow
3.) Select Ok.

3-8-11-5 To create a new dataflow (contd)

The new dataflow is ready for set-up.
Figure 3-74 New dataflow is ready for set-up

3-8-11-6 Create new dataflow with Worklist, Database and DICOM Storage
To create a new dataflow with Worklist, Database and DICOM Storage, do the following in exactly these
steps:
NOTICE Failure to add destinations to the dataflow in the correct order may or will cause intermittent errors.
1.) Add the Worklist Input, highlight it, select properties, and name it (i.e.: DR PACS Worklist or just
Worklist).
Go to the IP Address field, scroll down and select <Modify>. This will allow you to edit or add IP
Addresses (New Destinations/devices). If the correct IP Address is already in the list, just select it.
2.) Add the Database Input/Output, highlight it, select properties, and name it (i.e.: Local Archive - Int
HD).
Go to the IP Address field and (if the Database is to be the Local Archive) verify that My Computer
is selected.
The IP Address should then be correct and the Database Name and Archive File Location entries
should auto-populate correctly.
3.) Add the DICOM Storage Output, highlight it, select properties, and name it (i.e.: DR PACS Store).
Addresses (New Destinations/devices).
If the correct IP Address is already in the list, just select it.
If you create the Dataflow in any other order or remove and add an entry later, you may or will receive
you are not connected to the Database errors when trying to create a patient locally. The Worklist will
work, however they can NOT save patients created on the Vivid 7 to the Archive while using that
dataflow.
You can change the information on each entry in a Dataflow as long as you do NOT remove or add to
the Dataflow out of sequence.
You should also set Direct Search to All patients for the new dataflow.

3-8-11-7 Create new dataflow with Worklist and DICOM Storage

This dataflow is intended for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 scanners in a DICOM network, where the data should
not be stored locally on the scanner.
To create a new dataflow with Worklist and DICOM Storage, do the following steps:
1.) Add a new dataflow in Config screen, Connectivity, Dataflow tab. Enter a name, e.g. Worklist -
DICOM Storage.
2.) Select OK.
3.) Add the Worklist input. Configure (at least) IP address, AE title and Port Number.
4.) Select OK.
5.) Add the Dicom Storage output.
Configure (at least) IP address, AE title and Port Number. If the site has integrated EchoPAC PC
and CA-1000, enable Allow SR and Allow SR Private Data. Signed Doppler Velocities is
disabled by default. This means that signs for Doppler Velocities are removed in the DICOM SR.
See screen dump
Figure 3-75 Dicom SR Settings
6.) Select OK.

7.) If this dataflow should be the default at start-up, enable Default for the dataflow.

3-8-12 Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Setup

3-8-12-2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3-8-12-3 Query/Retrieve Setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3-8-12-4 Query/Retrieve Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3-8-12-2 Overview
The Query/Retrieve function makes it possible to search for and retrieve DICOM data from a DICOM
server for further analysis on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
NOTE: You may have to set up VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as a destination on the server.
3-8-12-3 Query/Retrieve Setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7

page 4-15.
2.) Select Connectivity > Dataflow
3.) Select Query Retrieve from the Name pull down menu
Figure 3-76 Select Query Retrieve
NAME PULLDOWN
MENU
QUERY RETRIEVE

3-8-12-3 Query/Retrieve Setup on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd)

In Figure 3-77, the selected dataflow, Query/Retrieve, is shown.
Figure 3-77 Query/Retrieve workflow
4.) Select QueryRetrieve so it is highlighted and then select Properties to display the Properties dialog.
Figure 3-78 Select Query/Retrieves Properties
QUERY RETRIEVE
PROPERTIES DIALOG
SELECT
QUERY RETRIEVE
AND THEN SELECT
PROPERTIES

Figure 3-79 DICOM Query/Retrieve properties
IP-ADDRESS
DOWN-ARROW
AE TITLE
PORT NO
DO NOT SELECT THE

SEARCH CRITERIA
BUTTON IF NOT TOLD
SO BY THE ONLINE
CENTER.
5.) Select the IP-address down-arrow to choose the DICOM Query/Retrieve server from the pull down
menu. In some cases, the server to use is the same as used for DICOM Storage.
If the server to use is missing from the list, select <Modify> from the pull down menu and edit the
setup for one of the predefined servers.
6.) Enter the correct AE Title and Port Number for the DICOM Query/Retrieve server in the respective
fields in the Query/Retrieve screen.

Change Search Criterias

It is possible to set up special Search Criterias for DICOM Query/Retrieve. In most cases you may leave
the Search Criterias as is, and skip this adjustment.
Follow the steps below to change the Search Criterias parameters:
1.) Select Search Criterias
Figure 3-80 Select Search Criterias
SEARCH CRITERIAS
ADD TO LIST
REMOVE
2.) Select the correct tag from the Select Tag pull-down menu.
3.) If needed, type in the value.
4.) Select Add to List
5.) Select OK to close the Search Criterias window.

3-8-12-4 Query/Retrieve Verification
Figure 3-81 DICOM Query/Retrieve properties

SMILEY
(NETWORK PING)
OK
Follow the steps below to do a first test (TCP-IP Ping) of the connection:
1.) Select Query retrieve and then select Properties.

2.) Select the Smiley button to Ping the server.
NOTE: The smiley checks if the remote server is accessible (ping). It is not a DICOM Echo (DICOM
ping), so it does not check AE title or port number.
3.) If the network connection to the server is OK, it will be illustrated by an smiling Smiley .
A sad Smiley indicates that the network connection is failing.
Typical causes:
- Network cable not connected.
- Configuration error(s).
4.) When ready, select OK to close the DICOM Query/Retrieve properties and save changes.

3-8-12-4 Query/Retrieve Verification (contd)

Follow the steps below to test the DICOM Query/Retrieve workflow:
NOTE: This check uses both Ping and DICOM Ping.

- Ping is used to verify the TCP/IP connection to the server.
- DICOM Ping is used to verify that the DICOM application is answering.
Figure 3-82 Check the DICOM Query/Retrieve workflow
QUERYRETRIEVE
CHECK
1.) Select QueryRetrieve from the Selected devices list.

2.) Select Check.
- If the test pass, a pop-up dialog, reporting the results as OK, is displayed, see Figure 3-83.
Figure 3-83 Test (Check) Passed
- Select OK to continue.
A green check mark to the left of the Selected devices indicates that the test was successfully
passed.
Figure 3-84 Test (Check) Passed

3-8-12-4 Query/Retrieve Verification (contd)

- If the test fails, a pop-up dialog reporting the results as 0 of 1 OK is displayed. In the example
in Figure 3-85, the warning message pop up almost at once, and it states that for the Server
Check (Ping), 1 of 1 is OK but the Device Check failed (0 of 1 OK). This indicates that the
network connection functions OK, but the application on the remote server is not answering.
If the test fails directly, as described in this example, the AE Title is probably wrong.
Figure 3-85 Test (Check) Fails directly
A red X to the left of the Selected devices indicates that the test failed, but it doesnt indicate the cause.
Figure 3-86 Test (Check) Failed
- If the Check button fails after a long time (corresponding to the timeout), the Warning will look
like the example in Figure 3-87, where both tests failed.
Figure 3-87 Both Tests Failed
In this case, the IP address or Port Number is probably wrong.
3-8-12-5 If Retrieve is failing

If Retrieve is failing, but Query is functioning, verify if the scanner has been registered as a receiver on
the server.

3-8-13 Mapping of parameters from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to DICOM

3-8-13-2 Search screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3-8-13-3 Patient Information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3-8-13-4 Examination List screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3-8-13-5 Worklist Search screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3-8-13-2 Search screen
Figure 3-88 Search Screen
1 4
5
2
6
Table 3-21 Search Screen
ITEM VIVID 7 FIELD NAME DICOM TAG NUMBER DICOM TAG NAME
1 LAST NAME, FIRST NAME (0010,0010) PATIENTS NAME
2 SEX (0010,0040) PATIENTS SEX
3 ACCESSION (0008,0050) ACCESSSION NUMBER
4 PATIENT ID (0010,0020) PATIENT ID
5 BIRTHDATE (0010,0030) PATIENTs BIRTHDATE
6 STUDY ID (0020,0010) STUDY ID

3-8-13-3 Patient Information screen
Figure 3-89 Patient Information screen
3
5
4
8
6
Table 3-22 Patient Information Screen
1 OPERATOR (0008,1070) OPERATORS NAME
2 REF. DOC (0008,0090) REFFERING PHYSICIANS NAME
3 DIAGN.PHYS. (0008,1050) PERFORMING PHYSICIANS NAME
4 WARD/DEPT (0008,1040) INSTITUTIONAL DEPARTMENT NAME
5 DESCRIPTION (0008,1030) STUDY DESCRIPTION
6 WEIGHT (0010,1030) PATIENTS WEIGHT
7 HEIGHT (0010,1020) PATIENTS SIZE
8 CONTRAST (0018,0010) CONTRAST/BOLUS AGENT

3-8-13-4 Examination List screen
Figure 3-90 Examination List Screen
Table 3-23 Examination List Screen
1 REFERRAL REASON (0010,2180) ADDITIONAL PATIENTS HISTORY
2 DIAGNOSIS (0008,103E) SERIES DESCRIPTION

3-8-13-5 Worklist Search screen
Figure 3-91 Worklist Search Screen
4 5
1
2 6
3
7
Table 3-24 Worklist Search Screen
1 LAST NAME, FIRST NAME (0010,0010) PATIENTS NAME
2 SEX (0010,0040) PATIENTS SEX
3 ACCESSION (0008,0050) ACCESSION NUMBER
4 BIRTHDATE (0010,0030) PATIENTS BIRTHDATE
5 PATIENT ID (0010,0020) PATIENT ID
6 STUDY ID (0040,1001) REQUESTED PROCEDURE ID
SCEDULED PROCEDURE STEP

7 EXAM BETWEEN (0040,0002)
START DATE

3-8-14 Dual Export to DICOM servers

NOTE: Use these steps only if you need to send images to two DICOM servers!
1.) Install the Service Dongle and restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
2.) Go to Windows.
3.) From Windows, select Start > Run > echoloader /service
4.) Select the Connectivity tab
5.) ADD the extra DICOM Server Dataflow.
Section 3-9
Disk Management setup
3-9-1 Introduction
The Disk Management function allows the user to manage hard disk space while maintaining the patient
database on the system. The Disk Management function can be used to move, copy or delete images
and move or copy reports from the oldest patient records. The Disk Management function has also an
auto-purge feature that will automatically delete images and reports that have already been copied if the
local hard disk is getting full.
For more information, please see Disk management in the User Manual.
NOTE: The User Manual is available on the Help function on the Touch Screen.
For a list of available User Manuals, see: Section 9-26 "Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on
page 9-140.
3-9-2 Select Destination Device

Select a removable media, a USB storage, or a network share folder from the Destination Device pull-
down menu.
3-9-3 Using Removable Media

If using removable media, it is recommended to use dedicated media to the Disk Management process.
Dont use Removable Media already used for data backup, when performing Disk Management.
Do not use the same Removable Media on different systems.
NOTE: If using DVDs for Disk Management and/or backup, always use medical grade DVD recordable
discs (DVD-R).

3-9-4 Set Remote Path for Disk Management

To be able to select a network share folder in the Destination Device pull-down menu, the path must
first be entered in the Remote Path field.
To be able to set up the connection from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to the server, the correct User and
Password must be entered both on the server side to allow access, and on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
to be able to get access to the server.
Follow the steps below to setup the Remote Path:
1.) Select the Disk Management screen.

2.) Enter the path to the remote server in the Remote Path field.
Example: In this example, the server name is: BigStore
In this example, the folder to use, is: ImageArchive
Enter \\BigStore\ImageArchive in the Remote Path field, then press Enter on the keyboard.
The Remote Path will now be available for selection in the Destination Device pull-down menu.
NOTE: The Computer Name for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is automatic included at the end of the path.
3.) If not already done, select the Remote Path as the Destination Device.
3-9-5 Setup on the Remote Share

For setup on the Remote Share, see: 3-8-10-2 "Setup on the Remote Share" on page 3-76.
3-9-6 Configure Remote Path User on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7

To configure the Remote Path User on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, see: 3-8-10-3 "Configurable Remote
Path User" on page 3-77.

Section 3-10
InSite ExC setup
3-10-1 Introduction
InSite (InSite with Express Connect) is the connectivity to the scanner that allows GE to deliver our
remote diagnostics capability.
3-10-2 Network Configuration - InSite ExC
3-10-2-1 Overview
InSite ExC is available for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 systems.
For the latest information, please refer to the respective Support Central site:
EMEA: http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=49906
US: http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=49420
3-10-3 Prerequisites for InSite ExC setup

If not already available, collect the following information from the IT Administrator:
A.) Proxy Server, if necessary:
________/_________/________/________ and Port __________________
B.) Proxy Authentication, if necessary:
User _______________________________ and Password__________________
C.) System ID (SID) number____________________________________

3-10-4 Configuring the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 for Network InSite Checkout
3-10-4-1 Configuration Steps

1.) Complete 3-10-3 "Prerequisites for InSite ExC setup" on page 3-101.
2.) Configure the system on the customers network using the System IP Address and Gateway
Address collected earlier.
NOTE:See Section 3-8 "Connectivity setup" on page 3-50 to configure the system to access the network.
3.) On the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, access the Service Login screen.
The Service Login screen opens (Figure 3-92).
NOTE: Figure 3-92 is an example from an engineering system.

See Clinical Systems Remote Service Support - Support Central:
- EMEA: http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=49906
- US: http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=49420
for other systems where Insite ExC is available.
Figure 3-92 Service Login Screen
4.) Select GE Service and enter the currently valid GE Service password, then select Okay.
The Service Desktop opens.
3 - 102 Section 3-10 - InSite ExC setup

3-10-4-1 Configuration Steps (contd)

5.) Select the Configuration tab.
The Configuration Page opens (Figure 3-93).
Figure 3-93 Configuration Home Page - Example


6.) Select Questra Agent Configuration.
The Agent Configuration Tool screen opens (Figure 3-94).
Figure 3-94 Completed Agent Configuration Tool screen
See Step 8 (in text below).
ALL ELEMENTS IN BOLD

MUST BE COMPLETED!
Must be:
PRODUCT
RPROC or EURO
WARN
See Step 14 and Step 15

(on next page)
MUST BE:
Enable
D:\Export
*.zip
Must be DISABLE, unless a
proxy server is provided by the
hospital
SUBMIT CHANGES
7.) The Device Name field is pre-populated. This is a required field.

8.) In the CRM No: field, enter the System ID.
NOTE: This is a required field. For consoles located in the U.S.A. the System ID is pre-populated. This
must Match Exactly the System ID in Cares. Failure to match the System ID and CRM number
will result in customer dispatch not reaching proper destination. Result is the customer will not
receive a call from support staff. Outside of U.S.A follow the local System ID convention.
9.) In the Display Name field, enter a descriptive name that is easy to identify with this device. For
example, Unit 1.
10.)In the Description field, create a unique description of the system.
This is a required field. For example, St. Marys Hospital.
11.)Select Continent and Country on drop-down menus.

12.)In the Address fields, enter the address where the system resides. Be sure to enter the zip code of
the address, or the longitude and latitude position.
13.)Use the following settings if this is a customer system:
- Enterprise Server: - PRODUCT.
- Service Center: - RPROC/EURO (Depending upon your location).
- Log Level: - WARN
NOTE: Do not change the Log Level field selection unless you receive an OLC request.
NOTE: If data is missing from any required fields, the form will refresh and the required fields will be
identified by red labels when you click Submit Changes.
NOTE: The Reset Form button will clear the current data, if you want to start over from scratch.
14.)The Enterprise Server URL field should be pre-populated with the correct IP address:
https://198.169.188.10:443
(This is the IP address to https://us0-ws.service.gehealthcare.com:443).
If not pre-populated, enter the IP address.
15.)The Enterprise Tunnel URL field, should be pre-populated with the correct IP address:
https://198.169.188.11:443
(This is the IP address to https://us0-rd.service.gehealthcare.com:443).
If not pre-populated, enter the IP address.
16.)Do not change the File Repository path.
This path is set by Engineering as: D:\insite2Data\etc. InSite ExC files in this directory are sent to
the GE repository where the OLC can choose to review periodically.
17.)The File Watcher selection is set by Engineering and should always be enabled.
18.)Ensure the Filter field has the following entry "*.zip".
NOTE:File Watcher automatically sends to the GE repository any new or modified files that reside in the
specified directory AND match the filter criteria.
19.)If the customer site does not require a proxy server, set the Proxy field to Disable, and continue with
Step 21.
20.)If the customer site requires a proxy server, then enter the Proxy IP and Port Number (we must use
the Proxy IP and not a naming convention).
- If the customer site does not require Proxy Authentication, set the Proxy Authentication field
to Disable, and continue with Step 21.
- If the customer site requires Proxy Authentication, set the Proxy Authentication field to
Enable, enter the Proxy User and Password fields, and confirm the Scheme field.
21.)Select Submit Changes shown in Figure 3-94.
If a screen requests ok for password, select Yes. The Submit Changes screen opens.
22.)Reboot.


23.)Return to the Service Home Page (Figure 3-95) and confirm that Service Connectivity is Configured
and Checked Out.
If configured properly, the Service Home Page updates in approximately 10 seconds (although it
may take up to 2 minutes). If it does not check out, confirm the Agent Configuration Tool screen has
correct URL / IP address information. Make corrections, and repeat Step 21. If it fails again, access
the Support Central site for troubleshooting information.
Figure 3-95 Service Home Page - VIVID E9/VIVID E7
SYSTEM IS CHECKED OUT

(See text field in illustration)
24.)If the system indicates 'Checked Out' you can be confident that the system has registered correctly
with the Questra Backoffice. If required, you can further verify connectivity using one of the following
methods:
a.) If you have access to remote connectivity, use your account.
b.) Call for InSite checkout.
c.) Call OLC or RSS. (OLC has training available on myLearning.)

3-10-4-2 Create an Insite permanent user

An Insite permanent user is required for automatic system error reporting to the GE digital service
network.
1.) Select the Contact GE icon on the status bar.

The Insite service menu is displayed.
Figure 3-96 The Insite service menu
2.) Select Request for service.

The Contact GE screen is displayed.
Figure 3-97 The Contact GE screen
3.) Select Users on the top menu.

The Permanent users screen is displayed.
4.) Press Add user (see arrow in Figure 3-98).
Figure 3-98 The Permanent users screen

3-10-4-2 Create an Insite permanent user (contd)

5.) Fill in the required information and press the Add user button (see arrow in Figure 3-99).
Figure 3-99 The Permanent users screen
The permanent user is created.
6.) Close the window.
3-10-4-3 Troubleshooting
For Troubleshooting, see: Section 7-8 "InSite ExC troubleshooting" on page 7-18,
or the Clinical Systems Remote Service Support - Support Central:
- EMEA: http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=49906
- US: http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=49420.

Section 3-11
Options Setup
3-11-1 Software options
Most of the options for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 are activated by installing a password (alphanumeric text
string).
For installation instructions, see: 3-6-7 "Software Options Configuration" on page 3-47.
For available options, see: Section 9-24 "Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-126.
3-11-2 Stereo vision

For descriptions and setup instructions, please refer to Stereo vision in chapter 5 in the user manual.
3-11-3 Color Video Printer setup

NOTE: The Color Video Printer is an option.
An external Color Video Printer may be connected to one of the USB ports on VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
For a list of supported printers, see: 3-6-5-3 "External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to USB" on
page 3-45.
NOTE: SONY UP-D23MD/UP-D25MD and MITSUBISHI CP30DW are medical devices so they can be
placed near the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. The USB cable is 5 meters long, so it must be placed within
reach of this cable.
3-11-3-1 Preparations for installing the CP30DW for the first time
Set Switch 1 and 2 on the rear side of the printer to ON.
- Please refer to the documentation for the printer if you need help to locate the switches.
- Please refer to the Printer Driver Installation Manual, Direction GA294652, Rev. 3 (or newer)
if you need to install a new printer driver.
3-11-3-2 Generic installation instructions

1.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and to the USB port on VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Rear Panel.
2.) Select the correct Power cable and connect it to the printer and to the mains power outlet.
3.) Switch on the power switch on the printer.
To be able to use the printer, the printer must be selected on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
For more information, please refer to the Printer Driver Installation Manual, Direction GA294652, Rev.
3 (or newer).

3-11-4 Printer Software Driver installation

For installation of software drivers for new printers, please refer to the latest revision of the Printer Driver
Installation Manual, Direction Number GA294652.
3 - 110 Section 3-11 - Options Setup

3-11-5 Digital Video Recorder (DVR) Assembly

The Digital Video Recorder (DVR) Assembly consists of a recording device inside the BEP. It is
constructed as a PCI board and has an onboard hard disk drive (HDD) used for the initial buffering of
the datastream. A DVD recorder, located below the standard DVD drive, is used for recording the
buffered datastream onto DVD+RW discs.
For installation instructions, please refer to the VIVID E9 DVR Installation Manual, Direction number:
GA294614.
3-11-6 USB Flash Drive (UFD)

There is no special setup procedure for use of a UFD for storage.
3-11-6-1 Software and documentation on UFD

Starting from late 2013, a UFD was introduced for delivering the software and electronic documentation.
All the needed software and documentation is included on the UFD.

Section 3-12
Setup paperwork
NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. USB Flash Drive (UFD) or CD-ROMs with
documentation, User's Manuals, Installation Manuals etc.) for the peripheral units must be kept
as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user
informations are available during the operation and service of the complete system.

3-12-1 "Contents in this Section" on page 3-112
3-12-2 "Users Manual(s)" on page 3-112
3-12-3 "Product Locator Installation Card" on page 3-113
3-12-2 Users Manual(s)

Check that the correct user manual(s) or UFD/CD-ROM/DVD with user manuals, per software (SW)
revision and language, for the system is included.
For a complete list of Users Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7, refer to Section 9-26 "Product Manuals
for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-140.
3 - 112 Section 3-12 - Setup paperwork

3-12-3 Product Locator Installation Card
NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be the same as the provided Product
Locator card.
From the factory, a sheet with five Product Locator cards for transportation and one for Installation are
included.
Figure 3-100 Product Locator Installation Card (Example)

3 - 114 Section 3-12 - Setup paperwork

Chapter 4
General procedures and Functional checks
Section 4-1
Overview
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
scanner and diagnostics instructions using the built-in service software.

4-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-4 Application Turnover Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-5 Power supply test & adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4-6 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Chapter 4 - General procedures and Functional checks 4-1

4-1-3 Special Equipment required

An empty (blank) DVD+RW disc
ECG Pads
ECG Harness:
- CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N:164L0025
- LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N: 164L0027
or
- CABLE ECG MARQ. IEC/EU+AS, P/N:164L0026

- LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. IEC/EU+AS, P/N:164L0028
At least one probe (ideally you should check all the site probes used by the system.)
For available probes, see: Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-122.
4-2 -
Section 4-2
General procedures
NOTICE SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers
are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
CAUTION ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.

Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO

TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION.
Beware that the Main Power Supply and Back End Processor may be energized even if the
power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
4-2-1 Overview
Some procedures are used more often than other. The intention with this section is to keep the most
used procedures in one place.

4-2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2-4 Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-2-5 Top Console position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-2-6 LCD Monitor position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-2-7 Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-2-8 Service Key (Dongle, HASP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-2-9 Exit to Windows Desktop from the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-2-10 Removable Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-2-11 Archiving and Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-2-12 Download / Upload of System Presets via InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-2-13 Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-2-14 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-2-15 Installation and Setup Procedures for Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-2-16 Moving and Transporting the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-2-17 Recording important settings and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-2-18 Cleaning the Trackball from the outside (OP-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-2-19 Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-2-20 4V-D Field Failure Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3-1 Warnings
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.
NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five (5) seconds. When turning OFF
the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker
ON.
4-4 Section 4-2 - General procedures

4-2-3-2 Connect AC (mains) Power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Connecting AC Power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit, involves preliminary checks of the
power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the Circuit Breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
3.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4.) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
5.) Connect the Power Cables female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
6.) Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp (ACC Clamp).
7.) Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, if not, switch it OFF.
Figure 4-1 The Circuit Breaker and On/Off button
8.) Connect the Power Cables other end (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the
proper rated voltage, and the unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

4-2-3-3 Turn Unit ON

1.) Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit.
Figure 4-2 The Circuit breaker and On/Off button
You should hear a click from the relays in the AC Power and the unit is ready to boot.
2.) Press once on the On/Off key on the Operator Panel to boot the unit.
During a normal boot, you may observe that:
a.) The units ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the
fan sound).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Operator Panel (Console), Monitor, Front End
Processor and Back End Processor.
c.) Back End Processor and rest of scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
d.) Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
e.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
f.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
Figure 4-3 Start-up bar
g.) The software initiates and sets up the Front End electronics and the rest of the instrument.
h.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.

4-2-3-3 Turn Unit ON (contd)

i.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that
no probe has been connected.
Figure 4-4 2D Screen on the display.
NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typical one and a half minutes or less. If starting after a power loss
or a lock-up, the start-up time may be up to four minutes.


When you switch off the unit, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence.
Figure 4-5 System - Exit menu
The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when switching off the unit, gives you these choices:
Logoff
Use this button to log off the current user.
The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.
If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment.
Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down. It is recommended to
perform a full shutdown at least once a week.
If the Shutdown button is dimmed, use the key-combination <Ctrl+Alt+R> to shut down the unit.
Cancel
Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.
Exit (Only available when logged in as GE Service with Service Dongle)

Select this button when you want to exit to the Windows Desktop.
NOTE: If you need to restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 when logged on to the Windows Desktop, ensure that
you do a complete power down (Shut Down). This is required to power up the Front End
Processor.
Figure 4-6 System - Exit menu (when logged in using Service Dongle)

4-2-4-1 Complete Power Down

1.) Before Power Down, lock the Top Console in its lower, locked position. This is required if you are
going to move or transport the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to ensure maximum stability.
NOTE: For service purposes, you may want to move the Top Console after Power Down. If you leave
the Top Console in unlocked position, it will be sensed during Power Down, and the brakes that
usually stabilize the position of the Top Console, will be released so you can move the Top
Console in the XY directions.
2.) Press once on the On/Off key on the Operator Panel to display the System - Exit menu.
Figure 4-7 Press once on the key with the green light
Figure 4-8 Select Shutdown
3.) Select Shutdown to do a complete power down of the unit.

The Back End Processor will first turn off the scanner activity and print the message Please wait -
Shutdown in progress in the LCD display on the Operator Panel.
Next, it starts to shut down itself. The time to turn down the unit, including the Back End Processor,
may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute.
The last thing that shuts down, is the light on the Operator Panel, indicating that you can continue
with the next step.

4-2-4-1 Complete Power Down (contd)
NOTICE Be sure to wait with the next step until the system has finished its shut-down. Failing to do so, may
destroy data on the hard disk, making the system fail later.
4.) Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the unit. This will cut power
distribution within the unit.
Figure 4-9 Circuit Breaker located at rear of the unit
MAINS POWER CIRCUIT

BREAKER
4 - 10 Section 4-2 - General procedures

4-2-5 Top Console position adjustment

The systems Top Console can be freely moved in all directions. The vertical displacement of the Top
Console is motor driven. The control buttons are located around the handles (Figure 4-10).
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
Top Console. This includes both objects and people.
Figure 4-10 Top Console adjustment controls
1. Lock and brake release button: Unlock and move the Top Console horizontal.
2. Up/Down button: Move the Console up or down
4-2-5-1 To raise/lower the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Up/Down button (Figure 4-10, button 2) accordingly to raise or lower the
Top Console.
2.) Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired height.
4-2-5-2 To unlock the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button(s) (Figure 4-10, button 1) and pull the Top
Console out of the locked position until the Top console is in the desired position.
2.) Release the button(s).
4-2-5-3 To lock the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button(s) (Figure 4-10, button 1) while pushing
the Top Console in the locked position.
2.) Release the button(s).
4-2-5-4 To move the floating Top Console

1.) The unlocked Top Console can be easily moved by pressing and holding down the Lock and brake
release button(s) (Figure 4-10, button 1) and move the Top Console in any direction.
2.) Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired height.
Chapter 4 - General procedures and Functional checks 4 - 11

4-2-5-5 Manually releasing the XY Lock

Even if the power is OFF, it is possible to manually release the consoles XY-mechanism (frog leg).
The release point is located on the rear of the XY Mechanism (Frog Leg).
Figure 4-11 XY mechanism release
XY RELEASE
1.) Insert a small tipped screwdriver or eq. into the release point and push until a click is heard. Some
force may be required if the lock adjustment is tight adjusted.
Figure 4-12 Manually releasing the XY Lock
2.) Move the console to the wanted position.

4-2-5-6 Moving the Top Console up or down when Power is OFF

The Z mechanism can be manually repositioned (moved up or down) in the event the drive gear is
disconnected or has failed, or if the mains power is turned off or disconnected, or if it is a mains power
failure.
Figure 4-13 Up/Down Release Handle
MOVE HANDLE (ABOVE THE ARROW IN

THE ILLUSTRATION) TO THE RIGHT TO
RELEASE THE Z MECHANISM
WARNING OPERATOR CONSOLE CAN DROP UNEXPECTEDLY WHEN THE MECHANISM IS

RELEASED.
Move the handle a few millimeters to the right side, to release the Z Mechanism (disengage the
motor drive unit), and at the same time move the Top Console up or down, as required.

4-2-6 LCD Monitor position adjustment
Figure 4-14 LCD monitor position adjustment
4-2-6-1 To unlock the LCD monitor

Turn the release knob counter clockwise to unlock the LCD monitor.
The LCD monitor can be moved freely in all directions.
4-2-6-2 To lock the LCD monitor

Turn the release knob clockwise to raise the lock and move the LCD monitor into the parked
position.

4-2-7 Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM

To select Config, choose either Procedure A or Procedure B:
A.) Procedure A: On the Touch Screen:

1.) Select the Utility tab.
Figure 4-15 Select Utility
UTILITY
2.) Then select Config.
Figure 4-16 Select Config
CONFIG
B.) Procedure B: On the alphanumeric keyboard:

Press F2.
Both method A and B will bring up the Operator Login dialog where you must log on.
Figure 4-17 Operator Login

4-2-7 Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM (contd)

As default, two users are defined, USR and ADM.
USR
If you log on as USR, you will have access to do set-up tasks that a user may need to do during
daily use.
Example: To select a printer.

As default, no password has been set for USR. Just type the name USR and select Login.
ADM
If you log on as ADM, you will have access to do general set-up and service adjustments.
Example: Adjust network and connectivity settings.

As default, the password for ADM is ulsadm. Select the name ADM, the password (ulsadm) and
select Login.
It is possible for the administrator (ADM) to establish new users and set unique passwords for each
user, including a new password for ADM. If the login as ADM fails, contact the responsible person
in the hospital to get access.
The Emergency button stores data only from current patient examination.
The Cancel button is used to cancel the login.
If this is the first time the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is turned on, the Imaging and Analysis - Global Level
window is displayed. (If another screen was displayed earlier, before logging out, or turning unit off,
that screen will be displayed.)
Figure 4-18 Imaging and Analysis - Global Level window

4-2-8 Service Key (Dongle, HASP)

A Service Dongle and a proprietary GE Service password are necessary for use by GE Service when
performing proprietary level diagnostics like accessing the desktop on the BEP. The password used
with the GE service dongle changes at specific intervals.
1.) Power down the unit, see section 4-2-4 on page 4-8.
2.) Attach your GE Service Dongle to any accessible USB port. VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has several USB
ports to choose between. There are USB ports on the Operator Panel, on the rear of the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 and on the monitor.
3.) Power ON the unit.
If a Service Dongle is plugged in, a Maintenance Access dialog will be displayed on the screen.
Figure 4-19 Maintenance Access dialog
Dialog for software v112.1.0 and later Dialog for software v112.0.x and lower
4.) If applicable: Leave the Username field empty.

5.) Type the current GE Service Password in the Password field.
NOTE: READ THIS NOTE BEFORE YOU CONTINUE:

After you have selected OK, the Start Application dialog will be displayed on screen. Be ready
to select MAINTENANCE before the Time Bar is full, or the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 application
software will be started.
A description on how to recover, if you fail to select MAINTENANCE is included, but you will
spend some extra time doing it.
6.) Select OK in the Maintenance Access dialog to verify the password. The Start Application dialog
will be displayed on screen.
7.) Select MAINTENANCE to enter Maintenance mode.
This will bring up the Maintenance dialog.
8.) Select EXIT TO WINDOWS. This will display the Windows Desktop on screen.

4-2-9 Exit to Windows Desktop from the Application Software

Follow these steps if you want to exit to the Windows Desktop when the application software is running.
The Service Dongle must be plugged in, if not, see section 4-2-8 on page 4-17.
1.) On the Alphanumeric Keyboard, press Ctrl+Alt+R. This will bring up either the;
- Start Application dialog (continue with step 2), or
- The Maintenance dialog (continue with step 3).
2.) If the Start Application dialog is displayed, select MAINTENANCE to enter Maintenance mode.
This will bring up the Maintenance dialog.
3.) In the Maintenance dialog, select EXIT TO WINDOWS. This will display the Windows Desktop on
the screen.
NOTE: If you need to restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7, ensure that you do a complete power down (Shut
Down). This is required to power up the Front End Processor.
4-2-10 Removable Media

Refer to the latest revision of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 User Manual to perform the following tasks:
Using Removable Media

Labeling Removable Media
Formatting Removable Media
Verifying Removable Media
4-2-11 Archiving and Loading Presets
4-2-11-1 Loading Presets from removable media

For information, refer to the latest revision of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 User Manual.

4-2-12 Download / Upload of System Presets via InSite ExC
4-2-12-1 Retrieving the system presets via InSite

Follow these steps to retrieve the presets:
1.) Ask the customer to press Alt-D to save error logs and presets.
BT11: Remotely, you can get presets by exercising Gather Logs Utility from CSD via InSite.
2.) Use the destination drop down and select Internal HD (D:\export).
Figure 4-20 Store to Internal HD (D:\export)
3.) Select the Save and Export button. The file is stored to the D:\Export folder ready for InSite
retrieval.

4-2-12-1 Retrieving the system presets via InSite (contd)

4.) Connect to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 via InSite ExC.
The indicator shows that new logs have been saved to the D:\export folder.
Figure 4-21 New logs have been saved to the D:\export folder
5.) Select Manage system files under Service in the IDM application.
Figure 4-22 IDM application: Manage system files


6.) Place a check mark in the box next to the file to be downloaded.
Figure 4-23 Mark file for download
7.) Press the Download button.
Figure 4-24 Click link to start download
8.) Click on the link to begin the download.


9.) Click the Save button.
Figure 4-25 File Download selection
10.)Save the file on your computer, preferably in a folder named Presets.
Figure 4-26 Select folder for saving

4-2-12-2 Extraction of Preset Folder from zip file

Follow this procedure to extract the Presets folder from the zip file:
1.) Right click on the saved zip file

2.) Select Open With and Compressed (zipped) Folders (a).
Figure 4-27 Locate the userprefs folder in the zip file
b c
3.) Navigate to the userdefs folder by double clicking on idunn, target, resources, and idunn (b).
The userdefs folder should now be displayed (c).

4-2-12-2 Extraction of Preset Folder from zip file (contd)

4.) Right click on the userdefs folder and select Copy from the pop up menu.
Figure 4-28 Right click and copy
5.) Navigate back up to the Presets folder, right click in the blank area of the window and select
Paste.
Figure 4-29 Paste
There should now be a userdefs folder along with the original zip file.

4-2-12-2 Extraction of Preset Folder from zip file (contd)

6.) Right click on the userdefs folder and from the pop up menu select Send To, then Compressed
(zipped) Folder.
Figure 4-30 Send to Compressed (zipped) folder
7.) A new zip file will be created from the userdefs folder ready for upload to the Presets server.
Figure 4-31 The zipped userdefs folder

4-2-12-3 Deleting files from the Questra Server

Follow this procedure to delete the file (or files) in the IDM application:
1.) Select Manage system files in the IDM application.
Figure 4-32 Manage system files
2.) Place a check mark in the box beside the file or files to be deleted.
3.) Click the trash can icon in the upper right corner.
Figure 4-33 Select and delete

4-2-12-3 Deleting files from the Questra Server (contd)

4.) Press Yes to confirm.
Figure 4-34 Confirmation

4-2-12-4 Uploading Presets to the Preset Server

Follow this procedure to upload the presets to the Preset Server:
1.) On your computer select the Windows Start button

2.) Then select Run.
3.) Input the following path to the server:
\\med.ge.com\fs\am\Clinical\Services\UltrasoundPreset
4.) Then click OK
Figure 4-35 Select Run and type server address.
NOTE: To make access to the server easy, save this URL to your favorites
You should now see the contents of the Ultrasound Preset Server
Figure 4-36 Content in Ultrasound Preset Server
5.) Once the server is open, Select the US Presets folder

4-2-12-4 Uploading Presets to the Preset Server (contd)

6.) Select the VE9 folder
Figure 4-37 Select VE9
7.) Create a new folder by clicking Make a new folder.
Figure 4-38 Make a new folder
8.) Name the folder after the System ID: VE9xxxxxx.

9.) Open the newly created folder.
10.)Drag and drop the userdefs.zip file from the folder on your computer to the one created on the
server.

4-2-12-4 Uploading Presets to the Preset Server (contd)

11.)Finally rename the file to include the date, as we may have several copies in a folder.
Figure 4-39 Rename zip file to include date.
The userdefs.zip file can now be deleted off of your computer and can be downloaded at anytime by
re-accessing the server.

4-2-12-5 Loading presets onto customer system from the Preset Server
NOTE: At the time of this procedure update (February, 2010), Presets can be uploaded to the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7, but cannot be restored remotely. On-site FE must be present for Presets
to be restored.
Follow this procedure to load presets from the Presets server.
1.) Access the Preset Server by going to the Windows Start button, select Run and type in:
\\med.ge.com\fs\am\Clinical\Services\UltrasoundPreset
2.) Select OK.
Figure 4-40 Select Run and type server address.
3.) Once the server is open, select the US Presets folder, select the VE9 folder and then the correct
System ID folder.
4.) Drag and drop the userdefs.zip file onto your desktop or appropriate folder.
Figure 4-41 Copy userdefs.zip file to your PC

4-2-12-5 Loading presets onto customer system from the Preset Server (contd)
5.) Log onto the correct system via the IDM Application Suite.
6.) Select File Management > Manage system files.
Figure 4-42
7.) Select My Files.

8.) Click the + to open the Upload window.
Figure 4-43
9.) Using the Browse button, locate the userdefs file on your laptop selected from the Preset Server
for uploading.
10.)Select Upload to start uploading the file.
11.)Select Close upon completion of the transfer.

4-2-12-5 Loading presets onto customer system from the Preset Server (contd)
Figure 4-44 Transfer the files to the Log folder
a
c
b
12.)Go to File Management and select Transfer Files (a).

13.)Then select System Files under the Transfer tab (b).
14.)Check the userdefs.zip file under From (c).
15.)Click to open the folder under To (d), then the Log folder (e).
16.)Click on Ok (f).
Verify that the userdefs folder was uploaded to the system

Use this procedure to verify that the new userdefs folder was uploaded to the system:
1.) From the main screen of the IDM application, observe that the folder icon is visible (a).
Figure 4-45 Main screen of the IDM application
2.) Click on the folder and verify that the file transferred is the userdefs.zip (b).

4-2-12-6 Restoring VIVID E9/VIVID E7 system presets
NOTE: As of the creation date of this document, February 2011, it is not possible to remotely restore
presets to the system via InSite ExC.
However, the transfer of the system presets from the GE Preset Server to the system is possible
and the restore operation can then be performed manually by authorized on-site service
personnel using the following procedure.
1.) Plug in the service key and press CTL-ALT-R to restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 application.
2.) Type in the service password, select Maintenance Mode and then Exit to Windows.
3.) Open My Computer and navigate to the D:\Log folder where you should find the downloaded
userdefs.zip file (a).
Figure 4-46 D:\log folder with userdefs.zip

4-2-12-6 Restoring VIVID E9/VIVID E7 system presets (contd)
Figure 4-47 Move userdefs folder to correct location - 1 of 2
1.) Double click the userdefs.zip file and the unzipped userdefs folder will open in another window.
2.) Right click on the folder and select Copy.
3.) Press the backspace key to navigate back up to My Computer and then on the D: drive navigate
down to idunn\target\resources\idunn.
4.) Right click on the userdefs folder and select Rename from the pop up menu.
5.) Rename it to: userdefs.old.

4-2-12-6 Restoring VIVID E9/VIVID E7 system presets (contd)
Figure 4-48 Move userdefs folder to correct location - 2 of 2
6.) Right click in the blank area of the window and select Paste from the pop-up menu (f).
7.) The new userdefs folder should now appear in the window (g).
8.) Close all windows and restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
The operation is complete and the system will now reflect the newly restored presets.

4-2-13 Data Management

Refer to the latest revision of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 User Manual to perform the following tasks:
Configuring the Disk Management Function

Setting the Disk Management Schedule
Configuring Data Management Settings
Configuring Destination Device Setting
Running the Disk Management Function
Starting Disk Management Manually
4-2-14 Backup
For information, refer to the latest revision of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 User Manual.
4-2-15 Installation and Setup Procedures for Peripherals

Please refer to 3-6-5 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-45.

4-2-16 Moving and Transporting the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
4-2-16-1 The Casters (Wheels) control

The wheels of the unit are controlled by the pedals located between the front wheels of the unit.
Examine the wheels frequently for defects to avoid breaking or jamming.
Figure 4-49 Pedals
1.) Press the right pedal to engage the Parking brake.

2.) Press the center pedal to release the Parking brake.
3.) Press the left pedal to engage the Swivel lock.
4.) Press the center pedal to release the Swivel lock.
4-2-16-2 To prepare the unit to be moved

1.) If not locked, move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position (see: 4-2-5 "Top
Console position adjustment" on page 4-11 and 4-2-6 "LCD Monitor position adjustment" on page
4-14).
2.) Turn the system off, including the circuit breaker (see 4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-8), and
remove the plug from the wall.
3.) Disconnect all cables linking the unit to any off-board peripheral devices and network.
4.) Secure the units power cable.
5.) Place all probes in the probe holder. Ensure that the probe cables do not protrude from the unit or
interfere with the wheels.
6.) Ensure that no loose items are left on the unit.
7.) Fold down the monitor.
8.) Unlock the brake.

4-2-16-3 To ensure safety while moving the unit

1.) Ensure that the keyboard console and LCD monitor are in locked position (see: 4-2-5 "Top Console
position adjustment" on page 4-11 and 4-2-6 "LCD Monitor position adjustment" on page 4-14).
WARNING DO NOT MOVE THE UNIT IF THE KEYBOARD CONSOLE AND LCD MONITOR ARE IN
FREE POSITION.
ENSURE THAT THE HANDS OF THE PATIENT ARE AWAY FROM THE CONSOLE ARM
WHEN MOVING THE KEYBOARD CONSOLE.
2.) Proceed cautiously when crossing door or elevator thresholds. Grasp the front handle grips or the
back handle bar and push or pull. Do not attempt to move the unit using cables or probe connectors.
Take extra care while moving the unit on inclines.
3.) Ensure that the unit does not strike the walls or door frames.
4.) Ensure that the pathway is clear.
5.) Move the unit slowly and carefully.
CAUTION Avoid ramps that are steeper than 10 degrees.
6.) Use two or more persons to move the unit over long distances or on inclines.
4-2-16-4 Transporting the unit by vehicle

Take extra care when transporting the unit by vehicle. In addition to the moving precautions listed on
4-2-16-3 "To ensure safety while moving the unit" on page 4-39, follow the procedure described below.
1.) If not locked, move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position (see: 4-2-5 "Top
Console position adjustment" on page 4-11 and 4-2-6 "LCD Monitor position adjustment" on page
4-14).
WARNING DO NOT MOVE/LIFT THE UNIT IF THE KEYBOARD CONSOLE AND LCD MONITOR ARE
IN FREE (UNLOCKED) POSITION.
2.) Disconnect all probes and secure them in their boxes.
3.) Ensure that the transporting vehicle is appropriate for the units weight.
4.) Park the vehicle on a level surface for loading and unloading.
5.) Secure the unit while it is on the lift, to prevent rolling. Do not attempt to hold it in place by hand.
Cushion the unit and strap the lower part so that it does not break loose.
6.) Ensure that the unit is secured inside the vehicle. Secure it with straps to the two hooks under the
system to prevent movement while in transit.
7.) Drive cautiously to prevent vibration damage.
4-2-16-5 At the new location

1.) When the unit is in place at a new location, lock the wheel brakes.

4-2-17 Recording important settings and parameters
NOTICE An error, or a power loss may occur during the software loading.
Always keep a record of the settings for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 on paper. Verify if it is current
before starting a software loading!
4-2-17-1 Overview
This subsection includes descriptions for recording data from the following screens:
Connectivity
- Dataflow (see: 4-2-17-2 "Connectivity Dataflow" on page 4-41)
- Additional Outputs (see: 4-2-17-3 "Connectivity Additional Outputs" on page 4-42)
- Tools (see: 4-2-17-4 "Connectivity Tools" on page 4-43)
- Formats (see: 4-2-17-5 "Connectivity Formats" on page 4-43
- Tcpip (see: 4-2-17-6 "Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings" on page 4-44)
System
- Settings (see: 4-2-17-7 "System Settings" on page 4-46)
About
- System Version (see: 4-2-17-9 "About System Version" on page 4-47)
Admin
- Disk Management (see: 4-2-17-13 "Admin Disk Management" on page 4-48)
- Backup (see: 4-2-17-14 "Admin Backup" on page 4-48)
- Restore (see: 4-2-17-15 "Admin Restore" on page 4-49)
- Users (see: 4-2-17-16 "Admin Users" on page 4-49)
- System Admin (see: 4-2-17-17 "Admin System Admin" on page 4-50)
Service
- Service screen (see: 4-2-17-18 "Service screen" on page 4-51)

4-2-17-2 Connectivity Dataflow

2.) Select Connectivity > Dataflow
Figure 4-50 The Dataflow screen
3.) Record the settings for each Dataflow in use by the site.

4-2-17-3 Connectivity Additional Outputs

2.) Select Connectivity > Additional Outputs.
Figure 4-51 Additional Outputs
3.) Select Button P1 in the Button pull-down menu.

4.) Record the settings for Button P1.
5.) Select Button P2 in the Button pull-down menu.
6.) Record the settings for Button P2.
7.) Select Button Record in the Button pull-down menu.
8.) Record the settings for Button Record.

4-2-17-4 Connectivity Tools

2.) Select Connectivity > Tools.
Figure 4-52 Tools
3.) If in use: Record the Remote Path.

4.) If in use: Record the Configurable Remote Path User. Also ensure that you have the correct
Password for this user available, before you continue.
4-2-17-5 Connectivity Formats

Ensure that an Application Specialist have recorded the needed information from the Formats screen.

4-2-17-6 Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings

2.) Select Connectivity > Tcpip.
3.) Record all settings in: Table 4-1 "Record settings from Tcpip screen and sub-screens" on page 4-45.
Figure 4-53 Tcpip screen, Example Settings
NETWORK SETTINGS
4.) Select Network Settings.
Figure 4-54 Tcpip > Network Settings
5.) Double-click Local Area Connection.

6.) Select Properties.
7.) Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
8.) Select Advanced
9.) Record the settings in Table 4-1 "Record settings from Tcpip screen and sub-screens" on page 4-45.
- Record if DHCP is Enabled.
- Record IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateways

4-2-17-6 Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings (contd)
Table 4-1 Record settings from Tcpip screen and sub-screens
PARAMETER VALUE
COMPUTER NAME
AE TITLE
PORT NO
REMOTE ARCHIVE SETUP
REMOTE ARCHIVE IP-ADDR
REMOTE ARCHIVE NAME
DHCP
ENABLED ___
DHCP
DISABLED ___
IP SETTINGS - IF DHCP IS DISABLED
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
DEFAULT GATEWAY

4-2-17-7 System Settings

2.) Select System > Settings.
Figure 4-55 Settings
3.) Record the following information for Location:

- Hospital
- Department
4.) Record the following information for Date and Time:
- Time Format
- Date Format
- Default Century
5.) Record the selected Language.
6.) Record the selected Manual Language.
7.) Select the selected Units.
4-2-17-8 System Test

There are no data on this screen that need to be recorded.

4-2-17-9 About System Version

2.) Select About > System Version.
Figure 4-56 Information available on the About tab
3.) Record software and hardware versions in Table 4-2 "Record Software versions" on page 4-47.
Table 4-2 Record Software versions
DESCRIPTION RECORD VERSIONS
APPLICATION SW VERSION
SYSTEM SW VERSION
4-2-17-10 About Firmware Version

4-2-17-11 About HW Version

4-2-17-12 About Probes


4-2-17-13 Admin Disk Management

2.) Select Admin > Disk Management.
Figure 4-57 Disk Management
3.) Record the selected Reminder Interval Every setting.
4-2-17-14 Admin Backup

2.) Select Admin > Backup.
3.) Record Remote Path.

4-2-17-15 Admin Restore

2.) Select Admin > Restore.
3.) Record Remote Path.
4-2-17-16 Admin Users

2.) Select Admin > Users.
Figure 4-58 Users
3.) Select and record all data for each user in the User List.

4-2-17-17 Admin System Admin

2.) Select Admin > System Admin.
Figure 4-59 System Admin (Example)
3.) Record the SW Option Key - one or more alphanumeric strings - from the SW Option Key field.
WARNING MAKE SURE THAT THE SOFTWARE OPTION KEY (ALPHANUMERIC PASSWORDS)
HAVE BEEN RECORDED CORRECTLY. IF THE KEY IS INCORRECT, YOU WILL NOT BE
ABLE TO LOG ON AFTER THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
THE PASSWORD IS CASE SENSITIVE. HYPHENS MUST ALSO BE RECORDED. THERE
MAY BE MORE THAN ONE PASSWORD.
Table 4-3 Software Options Keys
SW OPTIONS KEYS

4-2-17-18 Service screen

2.) Select Service.
.
Figure 4-60 Service Settings
3.) Record Video settings Format in Table 4-4 "Service screen settings" on page 4-51.
4.) Record Monitor in Table 4-4 "Service screen settings" on page 4-51.
Table 4-4 Service screen settings
PARAMETER VALUE
VIDEO-SETTINGS FORMAT
___PAL ___NTSC
MONITOR

4-2-18 Cleaning the Trackball from the outside (OP-5)

On the latest version of the Lower Operator Panel (OP-5), an optical trackball is used.
If dust is interfering with the light in an optical trackball, cleaning is required.
When cleaning is needed
1.) Power OFF the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 4-61 Trackball on new style Lower panel
2.) Place your fingers onto the Top Locking Plate.

3.) Rotate the Top Locking Plate counterclockwise until it can be removed from the keyboard.
4.) Lift off the Top Locking Plate including the Rubber Dust Filtering Ring and trackball from the
keyboard.
5.) Wipe off any oil or dust from the trackball using a cleaner or dry cloth.
6.) Wipe off any oil or dust from the trackball housing, rollers, etc., using a cleaner or cotton bud.
CAUTION MAKE SURE NOT TO SPILL OR SPRAY ANY LIQUID INTO THE TRACKBALL HOUSING
(KEYBOARD OR VIVID E9/VIVID E7).
AVOID ORGANIC SOLVENTS THAT MAY DAMAGE THE MECHANICAL PARTS OF THE
TRACKBALL ASSEMBLY.
DO NOT APPLY MUCH FORCE TO THE SMALL BALL.
7.) Insert the trackball into the housing.

8.) Place the Top Locking Plate including the Rubber Dust Filtering Ring back on the OP and lock it by
rotating it clockwise.
NOTE: Plastic hood is not supposed to be flush due to curvature on the panel.
Test the Trackball
Power up the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and check that the trackball now works as intended.

4-2-19 Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4)
4-2-19-1 Introduction
OP-4, OP-3 and OP-2:
On these Operator Panels, an optical trackball is used. If dust is interfering with the light in an optical
trackball, cleaning is required. This involves removing the OP and then remove and open the
Trackball, as described in the procedure below.
OP-1:
An inductive trackball is used on the first version of the Operator Panel. It is only needed to clean
the inductive trackball if it doesnt move easy. This involves removing the OP and then remove and
open the Trackball, as described in the procedure below.
4-2-19-2 Manpower
One person, 30 minutes,
4-2-19-3 Tools
Antistatic brush and/or antistatic vacuum cleaner
Tools as listed in: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 8-6

4-2-19-4 Preparations
TAG
&
LOCKOUT

Signed Date

POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
To get access to the trackball for cleaning, you must perform the following steps:
1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all probes and external I/O cabling.
4.) Remove the Operator Panel, Upper
5.) Remove the Operator Panel, Lower and place it on a clean surface with the front down.
Follow these links if you need more information:

8-8-3-4 "Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-156.
8-9-4-4 "Remove the Operator Panel, Lower" on page 8-193.

4-2-19-5 Remove the Trackball
Figure 4-62 Trackball with fixing screws
Follow these steps to remove the Trackball:
1.) Unplug the cable connectors from the Trackball.

2.) Use the Hex key to remove the two fixing screws with shims.
3.) Remove the Trackball and the Fixing Ring.
Figure 4-63 Trackball removed

4-2-19-6 Clean the Trackball

Dust is often building up behind the ball, so it interferes with the ball rotation and for optical trackballs
the light used for sensing. To get access for cleaning, you need to remove the ball.
The ball is held in position by the Dust Gasket.
1.) Turn the Dust Gasket counter-clockwise to unlock it.
Figure 4-64 Remove Trackball Dust Gasket
2.) Remove the Dust Gasket.
Figure 4-65 Dust Gasket removed
3.) Remove the ball.

4.) Use a soft antistatic brush and/or an antistatic vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, both on the ring
and inside the ball house.
5.) When done, install the ball and the Dust Gasket.
.
2
1
Figure 4-66 Install Dust Gasket

4-2-19-6 Clean the Trackball (contd)

6.) Install the Fixing Ring.
The Fixing Ring has small tabs on the top and bottom side, see figure below. The tabs are used to
fix the Fixing Ring in the correct position, and are positioned on different locations on the top and
the bottom sides of the ring. When used for the Vivid E9, install it so the fixing screw holes on the
Fixing Ring align with the fixing screw holes on the Trackball assembly.
Figure 4-67 Fixing Ring installed for use on the Vivid E9.
4-2-19-7 Install the Trackball

Follow these steps to install the Trackball:
1.) Install the Trackball.

2.) Install the two fixing screws with shims so it locks the Trackball and Fixing Ring in the correct
position.
3.) Connect signal cable connectors to the Trackball.
4-2-19-8 Install the Front Panel

1.) Install the Operator Panel, Upper.
2.) Install the Operator Panel, Lower.
4-2-19-9 Test the Trackball

Power up the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and check that the trackball now works as intended.

4-2-20 4V-D Field Failure Data Collection

To ensure that sufficient failure information is available for returned 4V-D probes, the following
information must be gathered prior to returning the probe:
Failure modes:
1.) Probe will not scan on system

2.) Mechanical/audible noise issues related to cooling system
3.) Image noise artifacts
4.) Other
All 4V-D probe failures must include:
Probe Serial Number (S/N): _______________________________
Console software version: _________________________________
Gather information by failure type:
1.) Probe will not scan on system

a.) Retrieve log files.
b.) When (Date and Time) did the problem start to happen? ___________________________
Get as accurate date and time as possible for easier analysis of the log file.
c.) Is the probe selectable in the probe menu? _____________

d.) What happens when probe is selected?
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
e.) Does an error message window pop up? _____________
f.) If so, what is the message?
_______________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
g.) Has the probe been working properly and then started to fail? _____________
h.) Did it fail while scanning, or was the failure discovered when trying to select the 4V probe?
_____________
i.) Is the probe constantly failing, or does it sometimes work?
_______________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________

4-2-20 4V-D Field Failure Data Collection (contd)

j.) Plug the probe into all three connectors, is it failing in all three? _____________
Is the probe hard to plug in, a lot of friction? _____________
k.) Any signs of damage/contamination on the connector pins?
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
2.) Mechanical/audible noise issues related to cooling system

a.) Has the audible noise become worse over time? _____________
b.) Is the probe triggering the system's overheating protection mechanism (System turns off probe
due to temperature too high)? _____________
c.) If overheat error then retrieve log files.
3.) Image noise artifacts
a.) Is the artifact reproducible? _____________
b.) If YES:
1.) Reselect probe
2.) Go into the mode/settings showing the problem.
3.) Save the log file.
Reproducible steps will then be found at the end of the log.
It is important to reselect the probe, so that we have a reference point in the log.
c.) If possible, obtain image/loop showing the artifact.
d.) If problem is not reproducible, get as much information as possible about mode/settings etc.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
e.) Retrieve log files.
f.) Get approximate time of when the problem occurred to be able to correlate image artifact to
events in the log.
_______________________________________________________________________
g.) If operator saved an image at the time of problem, get a copy of it.
h.) Do other probes show (weak) signs of artifacts? _____________
If so, it could point towards a problem with the console or external noise pickup that 4V is more
sensitive to than other probes.
IMPORTANT
Send log file and answers to the questions above to: Hiroki.Ito@GE.com
Return the probe through the normal GPRS process, where it will be routed to the make center.

Section 4-3
Functional checks
4-3-1 Overview
In this section, the functional checks for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 are described. Functional checks are used
to verify that the product works as intended. Functional checks may also be used during
troubleshooting.

4-3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-3-2 Contents in this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-3-3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-3-4 Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-3-5 Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-3-6 2D Mode (B mode) Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-3-7 M Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4-3-8 Color Mode Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4-3-9 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-3-10 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-3-11 Probe/Connectors Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-3-12 ECG Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4-3-13 Cineloop Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-3-14 Back End Processor checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-3-15 Operator Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-3-16 Peripheral checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-3-17 Mechanical Functions Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-3-3 Preparation
Turn on power to VIVID E9/VIVID E7. For detailed description, see: 4-2-3 "Power ON/Boot Up" on page
4-4.

4-3-4 Basic Controls
4-3-4-1 Operator Panel (OP)
Figure 4-68 Operator Panel (OP)
1. ON/OFF Button 9. Print, secondary capture
10. Freeze, 2D Freeze

Patient selection, Probe selection, Protocol based
2.
acquisition, Worksheet and Image review
11. Measurement, image store
3. Active mode gain 12. Auto, cursor and angle
4. 2D Gain 13. Trackball
5. Scan mode selection 14. TGC sliders
6. Zoom 15. Speaker volume control
7. Depth 16. Touch panel
8. Display controls, Annotation 17. USB port

4-3-4-2 Trackball
Different functions can be assigned to the trackball depending on the current active mode. The trackball
functions are organized in functional groups. The trackball functional groups are displayed in the lower
right corner of the screen. Each group can have one or more controls that can be selected using the
keys on the trackball area as described below.
The trackball area consists of:
The Trackball: used as a cursor control in acquisition mode, scrolling control in freeze mode and
as a selecting tool (like a mouse cursor) in post-processing mode.
Two select keys (identical): depending on the situation, the select keys toggle between the
trackball functions within the active functional group or perform the selected control or highlighted
menu item.
The Upper key: this key can be configured as either a select key, a pointer, an image store button
or an image cursor.
The Trackball key: toggles between the trackball functional groups.
The Update menu key: enables quick access to image related functions from a pop-up menu.
Figure 4-69 The Trackball area
1. Trackball key: toggles between trackball functional 3. Update Menu key:

groups. -Display a pop-up System menu.
2. Select keys: 4. Trackball
- Toggles between the functions within the active - Adjusts the selected control
group. Groups with several functions are marked with - Move the marker
a + symbol.
- Performs the selected control or highlighted menu
item
5. Upper key:
Can be configured as either a select key, a pointer, an
image store button or an image cursor.

4-3-4-3 Touch panel

The Touch panel enables the access of context specific controls. The mode/function specific controls
are organized in tabbed folders. Within each folder several pages may be accessed. Only the folders
available in the current state are displayed and can be accessed by pressing the corresponding folder
tab on the Touch panel.
At the bottom of the Touch panel, there are five combination rotary/push buttons. The functionality of
these rotaries changes, depending upon the currently-displayed folder/page.
Figure 4-70 Touch panel
1.) Select a tab to open a folder.

2.) Browse through all pages for the active folder.
3.) Rotary/Push buttons with assigned controls.
- Rotate the button to adjust the control.
- Press (push) the button to select the alternative control.
4-3-5 Performance Tests
4-3-5-1 Test Phantoms

The use of test phantoms is only recommended if required by your facility's (customers) QA program.
4-3-6 2D Mode (B mode) Checks
The 2D Mode is the systems default mode.

Figure 4-71 2D Mode Screen Example
Status Window
Control Menu
1.) Connect one of the probes.
- See "Connecting Probes" on page 3-26 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-122.
2.) Turn ON the scanner.
The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).

4-3-6-3 Adjust the 2D mode controls
WARNING ALWAYS USE THE MINIMUM POWER REQUIRED TO OBTAIN ACCEPTABLE IMAGES
IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE GUIDELINES AND POLICIES.
1.) Press 2D on the Operator Panel to access 2D mode.
2.) These Image Controls are used to optimize the 2D picture. Verify that all the listed controls are
working as intended:
- Use Gain and TGC controls to optimize the overall image together with the Power control.
- Use Depth to adjust the range to be imaged.
- Use Focus to center the focal point(s) around the region of interest.
- Use Frequency (move to higher frequencies) or Frame rate (move to lower frame rate) to
increase resolution in image.
- Use Frequency (move to lower frequency) to increase penetration.
- Use the Reject control to reduce noise in the image.
- Use the DDP control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner, less
noisy image.
- Use UD Clarity (Cardiac) or UD Speckle reduce (non-cardiac) to reduce image speckle.
Extra care must be taken to select the optimal Speckle reduction level, as too much filtering
of speckle can mask or obscure desired image detail.
- Use Adaptive reject (Cardiac) to reduce near field haze and blood pol artifact without diluting
tissue appearance of moving structures.

4-3-7 M Mode Checks
Figure 4-72 M-Mode Screen Example
1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector.
- See 3-5-7 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-26 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-122.
3.) Press MM on the Operator panel to bring up an M-Mode picture on the screen.
4.) Use the trackball to position the cursor over the required area of the image.
4-3-7-3 Adjust the M Mode controls

These Image Controls are used to optimize the M mode picture. Verify that all the listed controls are
working as intended:
Adjust Horizontal sweep to optimize the display resolution.

Adjust Gain and TGC controls to adjust the range to be imaged.
Use the Frequency (move to higher frequencies) or the Frame rate control (move to lower frame
rate) to increase resolution in image.
Use the Frequency (move to lower frequency) to increase penetration.
Adjust Focus to move the focal point(s) around the region of interest in the M-Mode display.
Adjust Dynamic range to optimize the useful range of incoming echoes to the available grey scale.
Adjust Compress and Edge Enhance to further optimize the display.
Adjust Reject to reduce noise while taking care not to eliminate significant low-level diagnostic
information.

4-3-8 Color Mode Checks
Color Flow screens are 2D or M Mode screens with colors representing blood or tissue movement.
Color Flow may be selected both from 2D mode or from M mode or a combination of these.
1.) Connect one of the probes to the scanners left-most probe connector.
- See "Connecting Probes" on page 3-26 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see: Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-122.
4-3-8-3 Select Color 2D Mode

1.) From an optimized 2D image, press Color.
2.) Use the trackball (assigned function: Pos) to position the ROI frame over the area to be examined.
3.) Press Select. The instruction Size should be highlighted in the trackball status bar.
NOTE: If the trackball control Pointer is selected, press trackball to be able to select between Position
and Size controls.
4.) Use the trackball to adjust the dimension of the ROI.
4-3-8-4 Adjust the Color 2D Mode controls

Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the color flow area.
Adjust Scale to the highest setting that provides adequate flow detection.
NOTE: The scale value may affect FPS, Low Velocity Reject, and Sample Volume.
Adjust Low Velocity Reject to remove low velocity blood flow and tissue movement that reduces
image quality.
Adjust Variance to detect flow disturbances.
Adjust Sample volume (SV) to a low setting for better flow resolution, or a higher setting to more
easily locate disturbed flows
Adjust Frequency to optimize the color flow display. Higher settings improve resolution. Lower
settings improve depth penetration and sensitivity. This does not affect the frequency used for 2D
and M-Mode.
NOTE: NOTE: Frequency setting may affect FPS, SV and Low Velocity Reject.
Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible.
NOTE: The Power setting affects all other operating modes.

4-3-8-4 Adjust the Color 2D Mode controls (contd)

Adjust the following settings to further optimize display of the image:
Use Invert to reverse the color assignments in the color flow area of the display.
Use Tissue priority to emphasize either the color flow overlay, or the underlying grey scale tissue
detail.
Use Baseline to emphasize flow either toward or away from the probe.
Use Radial and Lateral Averaging to reduce noise in the color flow area. Radial and Lateral
Averaging smooths the image by averaging collected data along the same horizontal line. An
increase of the lateral averaging will reduce noise, but this will also reduce the lateral resolution.
4-3-8-5 Select Color M Mode

1.) Select M Mode (See: 4-3-7 "M Mode Checks" on page 4-66).
NOTE: If the trackball control Pointer is selected, press trackball to be able to select between Position
and Size controls.
4-3-8-6 Adjust the Color M Mode controls

Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the color flow area.
Adjust Scale to the highest setting that provides adequate flow detection.
NOTE: The scale value may affect FPS, Low Velocity Reject, and Sample Volume.
Adjust Low Velocity Reject to remove low velocity blood flow and tissue movement that reduces
image quality.
Adjust Variance to detect flow disturbances.
Adjust Sample volume (SV) to a low setting for better flow resolution, or a higher setting to more
easily locate disturbed flows
Adjust Frequency to optimize the color flow display. Higher settings improve resolution. Lower
settings improve depth penetration and sensitivity. This does not affect the frequency used for 2D
and M-Mode.
NOTE: NOTE: Frequency setting may affect FPS, SV and Low Velocity Reject.
Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible.
NOTE: The Power setting affects all other operating modes.
Adjust the following settings to further optimize display of the image:
Use Invert to reverse the color assignments in the color flow area of the display.
Use Tissue priority to emphasize either the color flow overlay, or the underlying grey scale tissue
detail.
Use Baseline to emphasize flow either toward or away from the probe.
Use Radial and Lateral Averaging to reduce noise in the color flow area. Radial and Lateral
Averaging smooths the image by averaging collected data along the same horizontal line. An
increase of the lateral averaging will reduce noise, but this will also reduce the lateral resolution.

4-3-9 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks
PW and CW Doppler are used to measure velocity (most often in blood).
Doppler mode can be done with a special pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary
probe, you can first bring up a 2D picture for navigation purpose and then add PW/CW Doppler.
1.) Connect one of the probes to the scanner.
- See 3-5-7 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-26 for info about connecting the probes.
2.) Turn ON the scanner
3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting.

4.) Press PW or CW to start Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW) or Continuous Wave Doppler (CW).
5.) Use the trackball to select the Area of Interest (Sample Volume) in PW or direction of interest in CW.
4-3-9-3 Adjust the PW/CW Doppler Mode controls

Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the spectral Doppler area.
Adjust Low velocity reject to reduce unwanted low velocity blood flow and tissue movement.
In PW mode, adjust Sample volume to low setting for better resolution, or higher setting to more
easily locate the disturbed flows.
Adjust the Compress setting to balance the effect of stronger and weaker echoes and obtain the
desired intensity display.
Adjust Frequency to optimize flow display. Higher setting will improve resolution and the lower
setting will increase the depth penetration.
Adjust Frame rate to a higher setting to improve motion detection, or to a lower setting to improve
resolution.
NOTE: Frequency and Frame rate settings may affect the Low Velocity Reject.
Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible. This is particularly
important in CW mode, as the energy duty cycle is 100% (constant).
NOTE: The Doppler Power setting affects only Doppler operating modes.
Adjust the following settings to further optimize the display of the image.
Use the Horizontal sweep to optimize the sweep speed.
To view signal detail, adjust Scale to enlarge the vertical spectral Doppler trace.
Use Invert to reverse the vertical component of the spectral Doppler area of the display.
Use Angle correction to steer the ultrasound beam to the blood flow to be measured.

4-3-10 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks
TVI calculates and color codes the velocities in tissue. The tissue velocity information is acquired by
sampling of tissue Doppler velocity values at discrete points. The information is stored in a combined
format with grey scale imaging during one or several cardiac cycles with high temporal resolution.
1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector.
- See Connecting Probes, page 3-26 for info about connecting the probes
2.) Turn ON the scanner
3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting.

4.) Press TVI.
NOTE: If the trackball control pointer is selected, press trackball to be able to select between Position
and Size controls.
4-3-10-3 Adjust the TVI Controls

To reduce quantification noise (variance), the Nyquist limit should be as low as possible, without
creating aliasing. To reduce the Nyquist limit: Reduce the Scale value.
NOTE: The Scale value also affects the frame rate. There is a trade off between the frame rate and
quantification noise.
TVI provides velocity information only in the beam direction. The apical view typically provides the
best window since the beams are then approximately aligned to the longitudinal direction of the
myocardium (except near the apex). To obtain radial or circumferential tissue velocities, a
parasternal view must be used. However, from this window the beam cannot be aligned to the
muscle for all the parts of the ventricle.
NOTE: PW will be optimized for Tissue Velocities when activated from inside TVI.

4-3-11 Probe/Connectors Check

NOTE: Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is ON or OFF
CAUTION TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WITH THE PROBE CABLES:

- KEEP AWAY FROM THE WHEELS
- DO NOT BEND
- DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES
Table 4-5 Probe and Connectors Checks
Step Task Expected Result(s)
1. Press Probe on the Operator Panel. A list of the connected probes will pop up on the screen.
2. If not already selected. Use the trackball to select the An application menu for the desired probe is listed on
desired probe. the screen.
3. Trackball to the desired application

Press Select to launch the application.
The selected application starts.
To change application without changing the current
probe, press Appl. on the Operator Panel.
4. Verify no missing channels All channels are functioning.
5. Verify there's no EMI/RFI or artifacts specific to the

No EMI/RFI or artifacts.
probe.
6. Test the probe in each active connector slot.,

It will display pictorial data each time
see 3-5-7 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-26
7. Do a leakage test on the probe, see Section 10-7

It passes the test.
"Electrical Safety Tests" on page 10-20
8. Repeat this procedure for all available probes.

4-3-12 ECG Check
The ECG capability on this unit, is intended as use as a trigger for measurements, but can also be
viewed on the screen.
4-3-12-2 Parts needed

ECG Harness, P/N:16L0026 + P/N:16L0028
ECG Pads, (3 pc)
or
ECG simulator
None
4-3-12-4 ECG Check
Table 4-6 ECG Check
1. Connect the ECG harness to the connector on the front The unit displays a straight curve along the bottom
of the system. edge of the image sector on the screen.
2. Connect the three leads to a ECG simulator,

When connecting, the signal on the screen will be noisy
or
When the connection is completed, a typical clean ECG
Fasten the three ECG Pads to your body and connect
signal is displayed.
the three leads to respective ECG Pad

4-3-13 Cineloop Check
A cineloop is a sequence of images recorded over a certain time frame. When using ECG the time frame
can be adjusted to cover one or more heart cycles. When frozen, the System automatically displays the
cineloop boundary markers on either side of the last detected heart cycle (Figure 4-73).
Figure 4-73 The Cineloop controls display
1. Left marker 3. Right marker

2. Current frame 4. Cine speed
4-3-13-2 Preparation
1.) Connect one of the probes to the scanner.
- See 3-5-7 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-26 for info about connecting the probes
2.) Turn ON the scanner. The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).
4-3-13-3 Adjust the Cineloop controls

1.) Press Freeze.
The left and right markers are displayed on either side of the last detected heart cycle on the ECG
trace.
2.) Press 2D Freeze.

The selected heart beat is played back.
3.) Press 2D Freeze to freeze the cineloop.

Use the trackball to scroll through the acquisition and find the sequence of interest.
4.) Adjust Cycle select to move from heart beat to heart beat and select the heart cycle of interest.
5.) Adjust Num cycles to increase or decrease the number of heart beats to be played back.
6.) Adjust Left marker and Right marker to trim or expand the cineloop boundaries.

4-3-14 Back End Processor checks

If all the previous tests have been passed successfully, the Back End Processor is most likely OK.
If the system seems to be operating erratically, please refer to Chapter 7 - Diagnostics /
troubleshooting.
4-3-15 Operator Panel Test

The Operator Panel is tested when the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is powered up as part of the start-up
scripts, run at every start-up.
For more info, see:7-12-11 "Diagnostics - Interactive Tests" on page 7-66.
4-3-16 Peripheral checks
4-3-16-1 Overview
Checks for the following peripherals are included:
4-3-16-2 "Printer checks" on page 4-74

4-3-16-6 "DVR checks" on page 4-76
4-3-16-2 Printer checks

The internal printer is controlled from the P1 and P2 keys on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Operator Panel.
The factory default is:
P1 for the internal printer

P2 for external (network) printer
Table 4-7 Printer checks
1. When scanning in 2D Color Mode, Press Freeze to Image scanning stops with the last picture on the
stop image acquisition. screen.
2. Press P1 on the Operator Panel The image displayed on the screen is printed on the
assigned printer.
3. Press P2 on the Operator Panel The image displayed on the screen is printed on the
assigned printer.
4. Check if the print quality on the pictures from both

printers are of expected quality.
4-3-16-3 Windows Print Test Page

This tests that the printer is correctly installed and hooked up at the Windows level.
1.) Open the Printers folder, either from Start > Settings > Printers or from Utilities > System > Printers.
2.) Right click on a printer and select Preferences.
3.) Select Print Test Page (this will send a print to the printer bypassing all of the Scanner software).
4.) Observe the page. If the page prints out, the problem you are looking for is probably a configuration
issue in windows, or configuration issue in Utilities > Connectivity. If the page does not print out,
there probably is a cabling issue, or a printer configuration issue in Windows.
NOTE: For the Sony small format printers you will see the test page clipped. This is normal.

4-3-16-4 Setup and Test a Printer Service

1.) Select Utility > Connectivity
If you get a pop-up asking you to log on, select ADM. If the customer has not changed the user, the
password is ulsadm.
2.) Select the Service tab.

3.) In the comb box Select Service to Add select Standard Print and click on Add.
4.) In the right pane Properties Combo Box Select the printer you wish to test. Set any other
parameters you desire.
5.) In the left pane Properties Enter a name that describes the printer and configuration you just
selected in the right pane.
6.) Select the Button tab.
7.) Select one of the Physical Print Buttons that you want to configure.
8.) In the right pane click on the service name you just created in the Services Tab.
9.) Click on the >> button. This will place this service in the PrintFlow View for the printer button you
selected.
10.)Click on Save.
You have now configured a printer service and attached it to a print button.
Now you can test the printer by pressing the print button you just configured. If you configured it for 1
row and 1 column each time you press the print button you will get a print sent to the printer. If you
configured some other combination of rows or columns you will have to push the printer button multiple
times before a print is sent to the printer.
If the image does not print, check the configuration to verify that you have it set up correctly.
4-3-16-5 View the Windows Printer Queues

Go to Utility > System > Peripherals
Click on Properties.

4-3-16-6 DVR checks

Overview
The DVR is operated from VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Operator Panel. The DVR status displayed on the
screen indicates the current DVR function.
Figure 4-74 DVR status on the title bar
1. Video counter 6. Pause (red while recording)
2. Title number 7. Fast Forward
3. Recording (red) 8. Rewind
4. Stop 9. Eject
5. Play 10. Search
Tools
A blank DVD+RW disc.
Recording
1.) Insert a blank DVD+RW in the DVR unit.
NOTE: New disks need to be prepared for recording. The preparation takes about one minute. Observe
the busy light on the DVR unit or the busy icon on screen.
2.) Create a patient record or open an existing one.

3.) Press Record on the Operator Panel.
A red dot is displayed in the DVR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun.
NOTE: A new title is created for each recording session.
4.) Press Record to toggle between pause and record.
NOTE: When recording is resumed after pause a new chapter is created.
5.) To stop recording, press Stop/Eject on the Touch Panel.

4-3-16-6 DVR checks (contd)

Play back an examination
1.) Insert the DVD to play back and wait while it is loading.
2.) Press Playback on the Touch Panel.
3.) Use the buttons on the Touch Panel to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop,
pause, rewind or fast forward. Press the dedicated Prev and Next buttons to change title or chapter.
4.) To find a patient record, press Go to/Search on the Touch Panel.
The Video Counter/Search window is displayed.
5.) Select a title from the Recording title drop-down menu and press Search counter.
Playback of the selected title is started.
Ejecting the DVD
1.) Press Stop/Eject twice to eject the disk.

The Finalize window is displayed.
2.) Select:
- Yes:
The DVD is finalized and ejected. Finalized DVD cannot be reused for recording.
- No:
The DVD is ejected without being finalized. The DVD can be reused for recording additional
titles, but it will not be playable on other DVD players without being finalized.
4-3-16-7 Turn OFF Power to VIVID E9/VIVID E7

See 4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-8.

4-3-17 Mechanical Functions Checks
4-3-17-1 Operator Panel Movement

Please refer to:
4-2-5 "Top Console position adjustment" on page 4-11.

4-2-6 "LCD Monitor position adjustment" on page 4-14.
4-3-17-2 Casters (Wheels), Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

The wheels are controlled by the pedals situated between the front wheels of the unit (see Figure 4-75).
Examine the wheels frequently for defects to avoid breaking or jamming.
Table 4-8 Wheel Characteristics
WHEEL CHARACTERISTICS
FRONT SWIVEL, SWIVEL LOCK AND BRAKE
REAR SWIVEL AND BRAKE
Figure 4-75 Pedals
Follow the steps below to verify that Brakes and Direction Locks function as intended.
1.) Press the right pedal to engage the front wheel brakes. Apply a pressure on the scanner to
verify that the brakes works as intended.
2.) Press the center pedal to release the front wheel brakes.
3.) Press the left pedal to engage the Swivel lock. Ensure that the wheels lock, making it impossible
to turn the scanner to the sides.
4.) Press the center pedal to release the Swivel lock.

5.) Apply the additional brakes on the rear wheels and verify that they function. When finished, release
the additional brakes.

Section 4-4
Application Turnover Check List
Complete these checks before returning the scanner to customer for use:
4-4-1 Software Configuration Checks
Table 4-9 Software Configuration Checks
STEP TASK CHECK ( )
1. Check Date and Time setting
2. Check that Location (Hospital Name &

Department) is correct
3. Check Language settings
4. Check assignment of Printer Keys
5. Check that all of the customers options are

correct installed

Section 4-5
Power supply test & adjustments
4-5-1 Power Supply Test Procedure
There is no need to do any special tests on the Power Supplies if there dont seems to be a problem
that may be related to the Power Supply.
Refer to 7-14-3 "System Doesnt Power On / Boot Up" on page 7-124, if you appear to have a problem
that may be related to the Power Supplies.
4-5-2 Power Supply Adjustment

There are no adjustments on the power supply. The DC Power is self-regulated. If a voltage is outside
the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply itself or with a unit
connected to that specific power outlet. When an error occur, the power will be turned off immediately.
Refer to 7-14-3 "System Doesnt Power On / Boot Up" on page 7-124, if you appear to have a problem
that may be related to the Power Supplies.
4 - 80 Section 4-5 - Power supply test & adjustments

Section 4-6
Site Log
Table 4-10 Site Log
DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS

Table 4-10 Site Log (contd)
DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS
4 - 82 Section 4-6 - Site Log

Chapter 5
Components and functions (theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
This chapter explains VIVID E9/VIVID E7s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem
functions. It also describes the Power Distribution System and the Common Service Desktop interface.

5-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3 Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-5 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-6 InSite ExC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-7 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-8 Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-9 Main Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-10 Air Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-11 Casters and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5-12 Front End Processor (FEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5-13 Back End Processor (BEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
5-14 Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
5-16 Input and Output (I/O) modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
5-17 Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
5-18 Cables for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
5-19 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
5-20 Product manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
5-21 Common Service Desktop overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
5-22 Restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 after diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Chapter 5 - Components and functions (theory) 5-1

Section 5-2
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility

GB200063 or
GA200824
GB000070 Vivid E9 with XDclear 4D Expert Option
Complete with
MLA16, GB200001
4D TEE BEP6 w/4D
backplane,
GB000080 Vivid E9 with XDclear 4D Expert Option
19 inch LCD (100-230V) 192 RX channels
and one TX card
with 192 channels
GB000075
(100-230V)

(100-230V) GA200804 GB200002

GB000095
GB200001 v104.3.4
GB200003
BEP5 w/4D v104.3.3
- 17 LCD
GB200063 or 2000D
GA200824
MLA16, Nvidia
4D TEE
and one TX card
2000D
GA200890
BEP w/4D Nvidia
5-2 Section 5-2 - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility



GB000040 v113.x
v112.1.0 or higher
GB000050 v113.x
GB200002
GA000945 GA200804
GB200002
v104.3.x v112.0.6 or higher v113.x
BEP6 wo/4D
GA000955 Vivid E9 100-230V 2D
- 19 LCD
GA200900
BEP5 wo/4D
GB200001
v110.1.12
BEP6 w/4D
GA200890 or v104.3.x
GA200800
v110.1.x
GA000810 v113.x
- 17 LCD Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
GA200824 or Nvidia
GB200063
v104.3.x v110.1.12
MLA16,
and GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
Nvidia
GA000815 GA200890 or v113.x
- 19 LCD
GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
BEP5 w/4D
Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
Nvidia


GB200002
v110.1.12
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
GA200804 or v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
GB200062 v104.1.x
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
v104.1.x
GA200744 v113.x
GA200890,
v104.0.x v108.x.x
5145000-10 NOTE!
BEP5 w/4D Hardware
GA200035
update or box
(console) swap
required.
5-2-2 VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility


GB000099 GB200062
BEP6 wo/4D
GB000100 VIVID E7 Pro with XDclear configuration Complete w. MLA4
- 19 inch LCD

Section 5-3
Software overview
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has a huge amount of features implemented in software. The intention with this
section is to give you a brief overview of the software used on VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

5-3-3 Hard Disk Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-3-4 System software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3-5 Application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3-6 Software patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3-7 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3-8 Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3-3 Hard Disk Partitions

The hard disk drive on VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is divided into five partitions.
Table 5-3 Use of the Partitions
DRIVE LETTER LABEL SIZE COMMENTS
BOOT partition (GRUB)

- BOOT 0.05 GB Hidden in Windows, but available
via InSite
C: SYSTEM 15 GB System and program files
D: USER 10 GB User files and swap files
E: ARCHIVE REMAINING Database files and images
F: REPOSIT 8 GB Repository
When installing (or reinstalling) software, you get the choice to either erase all the contents on the hard
drive and install new System Software, or only repair or upgrade the software on the C:\ partition.
If you chose to erase all the contents on the hard drive, all stored data, including all set-up data and
patient archive, will be lost.
It is considered to be the best practice to always move images away from the hard disk drive, do backup
of databases etc. and record important configuration data on paper before starting a software load or
reload.

5-3-4 System software

The System Software contains the operating system and 3rd party software.
It is based on Windows XP Embedded and is included on the UFD or on a DVD.
The two BEP versions are using different versions of the the System Software. Both versions are
included on the UFD, but they are separated on different DVDs.
For software versions, see: Section 9-6 "Software overview" on page 9-10.
5-3-5 Application software

The Application Software includes all the functionality for VIVID E9/VIVID E7. It is included on the UFD
or on a CD-ROM.
5-3-6 Software patches

Sometimes, usually in-between ordinary software releases, there may be issued Software Patches.
A Software Patch may be a new version of one or a few files that fixes an issue that have been found
after the last released software was released. A Software Patch can sometimes be used to install new
files like new software drivers for peripherals.
The software patches are included on the UFD or on a CD-ROM.
5-3-7 Software Updates

For upgrade kits, see: Section 9-25 "Kits - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-133.
5-3-8 Common Service Desktop

Information about the Common Service Desktop is included in Section 5-21 "Common Service
Desktop overview" on page 5-137.
How to use the Common Service Desktop is described in Chapter 7, see Section 7-12 "Common
Service Desktop" on page 7-35.
Section 5-4
Options
For a list of the available options, see: Section 9-24 "Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-126.
For descriptions of the options, see the User Manual.
For Installation instructions, see: Section 3-11 "Options Setup" on page 3-109.
For configuration, see: 3-6-7 "Software Options Configuration" on page 3-47.
5-6 Section 5-3 - Software overview

Section 5-5
Connectivity
This section describes communication and connection options between the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
ultrasound scanner and other devices in the hospital information system.

5-5-3 The Dataflow concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-5-4 Stand-alone VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-5-5 Sneaker net environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-5-6 Direct connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to an EchoPAC PC workstation . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-5-7 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and a DICOM server in a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-5-8 Dataflow naming convention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-5-9 Dataflow examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-5-10 Predefined Dataflows and Additional Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-5-11 New Dataflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-5-12 Creating a New Dataflow with Worklist, Database and DICOM Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-5-3 The Dataflow concept

Communication between the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit and other information providers on the
network takes the form of dataflows. Each dataflow defines the transfer of patient information from either
an input source to the unit, or from the unit to an output source (see examples in 5-5-9 "Dataflow
examples" on page 5-9).
Patient information can include demographic data and images, as well as reports and Measurement and
Analysis (M&A) data.
A dataflow is a set of pre-configured services. Selecting a dataflow will automatically customize the
ultrasound unit to work according to the services associated with this dataflow.
By utilizing dataflows, the user can configure the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit to optimally meet
the needs of the facility, while keeping the user interface unchanged. Once the dataflow is selected, the
actual location of the database is entirely transparent.

5-5-4 Stand-alone VIVID E9/VIVID E7

In this case, images will most likely be reviewed from a removable media (UFD/DVD or CD). If digital
images are stored, they should be saved directly to the removal media.
5-5-5 Sneaker net environment

In this case, the EchoPAC PC (one or several) is used for review of studies acquired on one or more
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 without being connected in a network. Images can be stored on the scanners
internal hard drive (recommended) or on a dedicated removable media.
Images stored on internal hard drive

In this configuration images are first stored on the scanners hard drive and then exported from the
scanners hard drive to a sneaker CD, DVD or UFD and finally imported from the sneaker CD, DVD
or UFD to the EchoPAC PCs internal hard drive.
Images stored on dedicated removable media

In this configuration the images are stored directly on a dedicated removal media and imported to
the EchoPAC PCs internal hard drive.
5-5-6 Direct connection from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to an EchoPAC PC workstation

In this case, the data is transferred from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to a dedicated EchoPAC PC
Workstation over an Ethernet connection.
The connection may be done in one of three ways:
with a crossover cable as a Peer-to-Peer Network

connection via a Local Area Network (LAN) - set up for this special use only
connection via the hospital network (Local Area Network - LAN or Wide Area Network - WAN)
The database from the EchoPAC PC is used as the master and images are stored directly to the
EchoPAC PC internal hard drive.
In this configuration the scanner is just an intermediate acquisition unit which after completion of a study,
will not contain any patient information, measurements or images. The acquisition can be done online
or offline.
5-5-7 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and a DICOM server in a network

In this case, the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is configured to work with a DICOM server in a network
environment. Usually, this will be the hospital network. Images are first saved on the local image buffer
on the scanner. At the end of the examination the images are sent to the DICOM server via a DICOM
spooler. This scenario requires that the scanner is configured to be connected to the DICOM server.
5-5-8 Dataflow naming convention

The predefined dataflows have descriptive names.
Example: LocalArchive-Int HD/DICOM Server

The name indicates that patient data is archived locally in the archive on the internal hard disk and
images are stored to an MO disk.
5-8 Section 5-5 - Connectivity

5-5-9 Dataflow examples

Communication between the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit and other information providers on the
network takes the form of dataflows. Selecting a dataflow will automatically customize the ultrasound
unit to work according to the services associated with this dataflow.
Each dataflow defines the location and format of patient information. Patient information can include
demographic data and images, as well as reports, measurement and analysis data.
By utilizing dataflows, the user can configure the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit to optimally meet
the connectivity needs of the facility, while keeping the user interface unchanged. The dataflow concept
allows the flexibility of data to be obtained from various sources and allows data to flow to various output
sources.
Table 5-4 Stand-alone scanner
Stand-alone scanner
Scanner
PHONO ECG AUX

(pressure/pulse)
Acquisition: Review:
Scanner dataflow: LocalArchive-Int.HD Scanner dataflow: LocalArchive-Int.HD
The local database is used for patient archiving. Images are stored to internal harddrive.

5-5-9 Dataflow examples (contd)
Table 5-5 Scanner and Workstation in a direct connect environment
Scanner and Workstation in a direct connect environment
EchoPAC PC
PHONO ECG AUX

(pressure/pulse )
Scanner dataflow: RemoteArch-Remote HD Workstation dataflow: LocalArchive-Int.HD
In this scenario the data is transferred from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to a dedicated EchoPAC PC workstation
over the Ethernet (either in a peer-to-peer connection with a crossover cable, or in a network). The database
from the EchoPAC PC is used as the master and images are stored directly to the EchoPAC PC internal hard
drive. In this configuration the scanner is just an intermediate acquisition unit which after completion of a study,
will not contain any patient information, measurements or images.
Up to three scanners can be connected to one EchoPAC PC if the workstation has the EchoPAC Share option
enabled.
Table 5-6 Scanner and Workstation in a network environment
Scanner and Workstation in a network environment
Server
EchoPAC PC
PHONO ECG AUX

(pressure/pulse)
Scanner dataflow: RemoteArch-Remote HD Workstation dataflow: RemoteArch-Remote HD
In this scenario the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is configured to work with an ImageVault patient demographics and
image server in a network environment. Images are first saved on the local image buffer on the scanner and
transferred to the server when saving the examination.
5 - 10 Section 5-5 - Connectivity

5-5-9 Dataflow examples (contd)
Table 5-7 Scanner and DICOM server in a Network
Scanner and DICOM server in a Network
DICOM Server
PHONO ECG AUX

(pressure/pulse)
Scanner DICOM dataflows:

DICOM server: Images are stored to a DICOM server.
Local Archive - Int HD/DICOM Server: The local archive is used for patient archiving. Images are stored to the
internal hard drive and to a DICOM server.
Remote Archive - Remote HD/DICOM Server: A remote database is used for patient archiving. Images are
stored to a network image volume and to a DICOM server.
Worklist/Local Archive - DICOM Server/Int HD: Search in a DICOM Modality Worklist, the patient found is
copied into local database. The patient information and the examination results are stored to the local database.
Images are stored to a DICOM server and to an image volume on the local hard drive.
Worklist/Remote Archive - DICOM Server/Remote HD: Search in a DICOM Modality Worklist, the patient
found is copied into a remote database. The patient information and the examination results are stored to a
remote database. Images are stored to a DICOM server and to an image network volume as pure DICOM in
both locations.
Query/Retrieve: Retrieve images from a DICOM server based on query parameters.
Chapter 5 - Components and functions (theory) 5 - 11

5-5-10 Predefined Dataflows and Additional Outputs

To get access to the Dataflows, select F2, log on as ADM, select Connectivity > Dataflow.
The following dataflows are available on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7:
Local Archive - Int HD

Remote Archive - Remote HD
Worklist/Local Archive - DICOM Server/Int. HD
Worklist/Remote Archive - DICOM Server/Remote HD
DICOM CD/DVD read
DICOM Server
CD/DVD Archive
DICOM CD/DVD
Remote Import/Export
Worklist/Remote Archive-Remote Storage
Local Archive - Int HD/DICOM Server
Remote Archive - Remote HD/DICOM Server
Dicom Print
Query retrieve
Local Archive - Int HD/eVue
Misc Export
Remote Archive - Remote HD/eVue
Worklist/Local Archive - Local HD
USB Hard Disk/Memstick
DICOM USB Hard Disk/Memstick
Worklist - DICOM Server
The Outputs, listed below, can be assigned to the P1/P2 buttons and to Record:
To get access to the Additional Outputs, select F2, log on as ADM, Select Connectivity > Additional
Outputs.
Dicom Print
Dicom Storage
Printer
Store to clipboard
Video Record

5-5-11 New Dataflows

It is possible to make new dataflows by combining the predefined settings. New dataflows can only be
added in allowed combinations.
NOTE: You can not combine two services of the same type.
NOTE: DICOM Query retrieve, and DICOM CD Read can not be combined with any other service.
The matrix in the table below describes the allowed combinations of inputs and outputs in a dataflow.
Table 5-8 Allowed combinations of inputs and outputs in a dataflow
OUTPUT
Remote
INPUT Database + Database +
Remote DICOM DICOM DICOM
No Output Database Database Storage Storage Storage
Database X X
Remote Database X X
DICOM Worklist X
DICOM CD Read X
DICOM USB device Read X
Query/Retrieve X
Worklist/database X X
Worklist/rem database X X
No input device X

5-5-12 Creating a New Dataflow with Worklist, Database and DICOM Storage
To create a new dataflow with Worklist, Database and DICOM Storage, do the following in exactly these
steps:
NOTICE Failure to add destinations to the dataflow in the correct order may or will cause intermittent errors.
1.) Add the Worklist Input, highlight it, select properties, and name it (i.e.: DR PACS Worklist or just
Worklist).
Addresses (New Destinations/devices). If the correct IP Address is already in the list, just select it.
2.) Add the Database Input/Output, highlight it, select properties, and name it (i.e.: Local Archive - Int
HD).
Go to the IP Address field and (if the Database is to be the Local Archive) verify that My Computer
is selected.
The IP Address should then be correct and the Database Name and Archive File Location entries
should auto-populate correctly.
3.) Add the DICOM Storage Output, highlight it, select properties, and name it (i.e.: DR PACS Store).
Addresses (New Destinations/devices).
If the correct IP Address is already in the list, just select it.
If you create the Dataflow in any other order or remove and add an entry later, you may or will receive
you are not connected to the Database errors when trying to create a patient locally. The Worklist will
work, however they can NOT save patients created on the Vivid 7 to the Archive while using that
dataflow.
You can change the information on each entry in a Dataflow as long as you do NOT remove or add to
the Dataflow out of sequence.
You should also set Direct Search to All patients for the new dataflow.
Related information:
See the User Manual for more information about Dataflows.

Section 5-6
InSite ExC
5-6-1 Introduction
InSite ExC is your direct link with a GE Online Service Engineer or Applications Support Engineer, or a
Request for Service via the InSite ExC link at the bottom of the display screen.
5-6-2 InSite ExC Icon

The InSite ExC icon in the status bar change symbol and color depending on ongoing activity.
Figure 5-1 InSite ExC icon in the status bar
Clicking on the Icon brings up the InSite ExC menu.
Figure 5-2 InSite ExC Menu
Menu Choices
Service Desktop: Opens the Service Desktop on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Request For Service. Opens a service dispatch with GE Service.
Connect to GE. Direct contact with GE Technical Support.

5-6-3 InSite ExC Status

Depending on the ongoing activity, the InSite ExC icon change.
Table 5-9 InSite ExC Icons, depending on ongoing activity
ICON DESCRIPTION
Idle State - Online Center Is Not Connected

Black and White Icon - InSite ExC activated but system not open for Technical
Support access.
Servicing State - Online Center Is Connected

Yellow Icon - InSite ExC activated and Technical Support can look around on
your system, see temperatures and voltage information, see status, get files
stored with Alt > D and look at logs, but cannot perform any service related
functions.
Disruptive State - Online Center Is Connected

Red Icon with clock - InSite ExC activated.
Disrupted State - Online Center Is Connected

Red Icon with GE Logo - InSite ExC activated and Technical Support can look
around on your system, run diagnostics, gather logs, and initiate VCO.
Active Messaging State - Online Center Is Connected

The system has received information from the GEHC remote service office.
5 - 16 Section 5-6 - InSite ExC

5-6-4 Initiating a Request for Service (RFS)

To initiate an RFS
1.) Position the Windows pointer on top of the GE InSite ExC icon at the bottom of the display.
2.) Press the Right Trackball Set Key. This opens of the RFS screen which sends a service dispatch
directly to GE Service after you fill in the following information:
- Items with a red asterisk
- Problem type
- Problem area
- Problem description
- Send
3.) After you have completed filling in all of this information, press Send to initiate the Request for
Service.
Figure 5-3 Request for Service Contact Information

5-6-5 Automatic Request for Service (ARFS)

(This feature was introduced for software version v112.0 (BT12))
If some important parameters are outside the predefined limits, an ARFS will be sent to GE via InSite.
The parameters in the table below are monitored:
Table 5-10 Monitored parameters for ARFS
# Report Error (RFS) Accepted Values Comment
1. If the temperature on any of the DRX cards rise

above 80 C (176 F), an ARFS is generated.
DRX4_TOP (DRX1-4) -10 C - 80 C (The lower temperature limit (-10 C) is outside the
operating temperature for the product, so the readings
should never be as low as this temperature.)
2. Rack Fan 1 100 - 5000 [RPM]

If the fan speed is lower than 100 RPM, the fan has
3. Rack Fan 2 100 - 5000 [RPM] most likely stopped, and an ARFS is generated.
(The upper limit (5000 RPM) is above the speed that
4. Rack Fan 3 100 - 5000 [RPM] the fans can archive, so the readings should never be
as high as this limit.)
5. Rack Fan 4 100 - 5000 [RPM]
6. Probe CRC failure N/A ARFS is generated on Probe CRC failure.
For the ARFS to be operational, a permanent user has to be created.
See: 3-10-4-2 "Create an Insite permanent user" on page 3-107.
5 - 18 Section 5-6 - InSite ExC

5-6-6 InSite ExC Definitions

Here are definitions for the different InSite ExC states:
Virtual Console Observation (VCO). Allows Technical Support to control VIVID E9/VIVID E7
functionality remotely.
Disruptive. Allows GEs Technical Support person to connect to your system via VCO, to run
diagnostics directly on your VIVID E9/VIVID E7 system, and to collect system logs. When the
system is in Disruptive Mode, the icons are red. There are two disruptive states. If you see a
telephone with a clock, then the system is in Disruptive, Not Connected Mode. If you see a
telephone with GE, then the system is in Disruptive, Connected Mode.
Non-Disruptive. Allows GEs Technical support person to look around on your system, but cannot
perform any service-related functions, depending on whether InSite has connected or not
connected. There are two Non-Disruptive states. If you see a black and white icon, InSite ExC is
activated, but not open for Technical Support access. If you see a yellow icon, InSite ExC is
activated and the Technical Support person can look around on your system, but cannot perform
any service-related functions.
Connected. InSite ExC is connected.
Not Connected. InSite ExC is not connected.
NOTE: When Disruptive mode has been activated or a diagnostic has been run, the message, Due to
Service testing reboot required, appears in red at the bottom of the display. It is recommended
that you reboot the system before use. Make sure you disable disruptive mode before rebooting
or the message will not be cleared.
5-6-7 Exiting InSite ExC

To exit InSite ExC:
1.) Press the Left Trackball Set key.

2.) Select Connect to GE.
3.) Press the Right Trackball Set key. The GE Technical Support person then exits Disruptive Mode
and VCO.
4.) Reboot your VIVID E9/VIVID E7 system.

Section 5-7
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 overview
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and how it function.

5-7-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-7-4 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-7-5 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-7-6 Signal flow overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-7-7 System configuration and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-7-8 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-7-9 The electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-7-10 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-7-11 VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-7-3 Introduction
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with
total data management.
The system provides image generation in 4D (model dependant), 2D (B) Mode, Color Doppler, Power
Doppler (Angio), M-Mode, Color M-Mode, PW and CW Doppler spectra, Tissue Velocity imaging,
advanced Strain and Contrast applications. The fully digital architecture of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 unit
allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types, throughout the full spectrum of operating
frequencies.
5 - 20 Section 5-7 - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 overview

5-7-4 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 general description
Figure 5-4 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 major components
MAIN MONITOR
UPPER PANEL
WITH STEREO LOUDSPEAKERS
AND TOUCH MONITOR
OPERATOR PANEL
ALPHANUMERIC
KEYBOARD
B/W VIDEO PRINTER DVD-R PLAYER/RECORDER
PATIENT I/O
DOPPLER (PEDOF) CONNECTOR
PROBE CONNECTORS
BRAKE PEDALS
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector
Panel to the Front End Electronics, then to the Back End Processor, and finally, the results are displayed
on the monitor.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive, inside the Back End Processor (BEP), and all
necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
A Physio module, the Patient I/O, is incorporated in the Back End Processor (BEP) to provide ECG
signals to synchronize cardiac ultrasound image acquisition. Other analog signals, from devices such
as treadmills (e.g. ECG and phono), may also be processed by the Patient I/O.

5-7-5 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 block diagram
Figure 5-5 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 block diagram
NOTE: Depending on VIVID E9/VIVID E7 model and installed options, the number of cards and the
part numbers on the cards will vary.

5-7-6 Signal flow overview

The GTX board(s) in the Front End Processor, generates the strong bursts transmitted by the probes
as ultrasound, into the body. The Transmit bursts are routed from the GTX board via the XD bus to the
Relay board where the ultrasound probes are connected.
Weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure are received by the probes and routed via
the Relay board and the XD bus to the RX boards. The RX boards amplifies these signals. Then the
signals are routed to the DRX board(s) where the signals are A/D converted. The digital signals are then
further processed on the DRX boards.
After amplification and digital signal processing in the Front End electronics, the signal is transferred via
the PCIe bus to the Back End Processor. The Back End Processor receives input commands from the
User Interface (Operator Panel), handles the communication with the rest of the system, delivers signals
(digital video) to the LCD screen and the Touch Screen. controls and delivers digital video signals to an
optional, internal, Digital Video Recorder, provides output to an optional, internal printer. The
communication to the network (Ethernet) is also handled by the Back End Processor.

5-7-7 System configuration and software

System configuration is stored on a hard disk drive inside the Back End Processor.
At power up, all necessary software is loaded from the hard disk drive.
5-7-8 Operator Panel

The user initiates system operation via the Operator Panel which contains a control panel with different
controls for TGC and an LCD touch display. An alphanumeric keyboard is located as a drawer below
the Operator Panel.
5-7-9 The electronics

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 internal electronics are divided into two card cages:
Front End Processor (FEP)

The FEP is sometimes called Front End Card Cage, Front End, or only Card Cage.
For details about the FEP, see: Section 5-12 "Front End Processor (FEP)" on page 5-43.
Back End Processor (BEP)

For details about the BEP, see: Section 5-13 "Back End Processor (BEP)" on page 5-82.

5-7-10 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 interconnection diagram
Figure 5-6 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 w/ BEP6 interconnection diagram

5-7-10 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 interconnection diagram (contd)
Figure 5-7 VIVID E9 w/ BEP5 interconnection diagram

5-7-11 VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Operating Modes
5-7-11-1 2D-Mode (B-Mode)

2D-mode or B-Mode is a two-dimensional image of the amplitude of the echo signal. It is used for
location and measurement of anatomical structures and for spatial orientation during operation of other
modes. In 2D-mode, a two-dimensional cross-section of a three-dimensional soft tissue structure such
as the heart is displayed in real time. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different
gray scale or color values in the display. The outline of the 2D cross-section is a sector, depending on
the particular transducer used. 2D-mode can be used in combination with any other mode.
5-7-11-2 Octave Imaging

In Octave Imaging, sometimes called Tissue Harmonic Imaging, acoustic aberrations due to tissue are
minimized by receiving and processing the second harmonic signal that is generated within the
insonified tissue. VIVID E9/VIVID E7`s high performance Octave Imaging provides superb detail
resolution and penetration, outstanding contrast resolution, excellent acoustic clutter rejection and an
easy to operate user interface for switching into Octave Imaging mode. Coded Harmonics enhances
near field resolution for improved small parts imaging as well as far field penetration. It diminishes low
frequency amplitude noise and improves imaging technically difficult patients. It may be especially
beneficial when imaging isoechoic lesions in shallow-depth anatomy in the breast, liver and hard-to-
visualize fetal anatomy. Coded Harmonics may improve the 2D-Mode image quality without introducing
a contrast agent.
5-7-11-3 M-Mode
In M-mode, soft tissue structure is presented as scrolling display, with depth on the Y-axis and time on
the X-axis. It is used primarily for cardiac measurements such as value timing on septal wall thickness
when accurate timing information is required. M-mode is also known as T-M mode or time-motion mode.
Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display. M-
mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam. Depth is
arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis. M-mode is normally used in
conjunction with a 2D image for spatial reference. The 2D image has a graphical line (M-line)
superimposed on the 2D image indicating where the M-mode beam is located.
5-7-11-4 Color Doppler Mode

Color Doppler is used to detect motion presented as a two-dimensional display. There are three
applications of this technique:
Color Flow Mode - used to visualize blood flow velocity and direction
Power Doppler (Angio) - used to visualize the spatial distribution of blood
Tissue Velocity Imaging - used to visualize tissue motion direction and velocity
5-7-11-5 Color Flow Mode

A real-time two-dimensional cross-section image of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is
presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent blood flow (velocity,
variance, power and/or direction). To provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section
is overlaid on top of the gray scale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the
overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler), gray scale (echo) information or a blended
combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft tissue structures and from
the red blood cells. Blood velocity is the primary parameter used to determine the display colors, but
power and variance may also be used. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals from
stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming that
blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be used to
enhance the discrimination. Color flow can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral Doppler
modes.

5-7-11-6 Power Doppler

A real-time two dimensional cross-section of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is presented
as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent the power in blood flow echoes. Often,
to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid on top of the gray scale
cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to
display color (Doppler power), gray scale (echo) information or a blended combination is based on the
relative strength of return echoes from the soft-tissue structures and from the red blood cells. A high
pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue
motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding
tissue, although additional parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination. The power in
the remaining signal after wall filtering is then averaged over time (persistence) to present a steady state
image of blood flow distribution. Power Doppler can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral
Doppler modes as well as with 4D mode.
5-7-11-7 Tissue Velocity Imaging

The Tissue Color Doppler Imaging is used for color encoded evaluation of heart movements. The Tissue
Velocity Imaging image provides information about tissue motion direction and velocity.
5-7-11-8 Pulsed (PW) Doppler

PW Doppler processing is one of two spectral Doppler modalities, the other being CW Doppler. In
spectral Doppler, blood flow is presented as a scrolling display, with flow velocity on the Y-axis and time
on the X-axis. The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow, while the absence of
spectral broadening indicates laminar flow. PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed
Doppler signals. This information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the
sample volume. PW Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D image
with an M-line and sample volume marker superimposed on the 2-D image indicating the position of the
Doppler sample volume. The sample volume size and location are specified by the operator. Sample
volume can be overlaid by a flow direction cursor which is aligned, by the operator, with the direction of
flow in the vessel, thus determining the Doppler angle. This allows the spectral display to be calibrated
in flow velocity (m/sec.) as well as frequency (Hz). PW Doppler also provides the capability of
performing spectral analysis at a selectable depth and sample volume size. PW Doppler can be used
in combination with 2D and Color Flow modes.
5-7-11-9 4D Imaging
NOTE: The VIVID E7 does not support 4D.
NOTE: 4D is an option available for some VIVID E9 models.
Real-time, non-gated 4D imaging

The 4D probes on the Vivid E9 enables real-time, non-gated 4D tissue and color imaging. The
volume data is displayed in real-time with volume rendering techniques for visualization of valves
and structures.
Real-time, gated 4D imaging

The 4D probes on the Vivid E9 enables the acquisition of larger tissue/color volumes with ECG
gated acquisition. The data acquired is displayed in real-time so that the user can control the quality
of the data acquired throughout the scanning process.
For more information on 4D, please refer to the VIVID E9 User Manual.

Section 5-8
Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Top Console and to tell
you how it function.

5-8-3 Transporting VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-8-4 Top Console description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-8-5 Operator Panel (Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5-8-3 Transporting VIVID E9/VIVID E7

The Top Console must be locked into the lower, center (X/Y) position before transporting the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7. The LCD Monitor must be in its flipped down position. If transported in a vehicle, the brakes
must be set.
For instructions, see:
4-2-16-2 "To prepare the unit to be moved" on page 4-38

4-2-16-4 "Transporting the unit by vehicle" on page 4-39
5-8-4 Top Console description
5-8-4-1 Content in this section

5-8-4-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-8-4-3 Top Consoles location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-8-4-4 Connection between the Top Console and the rest of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . 5-30
5-8-4-5 The XYZ mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-8-4-6 The XY Locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-8-4-7 Top Console block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-8-4-8 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-8-4-9 Bidirectional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5-8-4-10 Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5-8-4-11 Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5-8-4-12 LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
17 LCD Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
19 LCD Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-8-4-13 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-8-4-14 Bidirectional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-8-4-15 Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-8-4-16 Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

The Top Console includes:
LCD monitor on an adjustable arm

Operator Panel with;
- an ON/OFF switch
- a touch screen and a switch board with controls for manipulating the picture quality and for
use in Measure & Analyze (M&A)
- an alphanumeric keyboard (QWERTY keyboard) on a drawer below the switch board.
speakers for stereo sound output used during Doppler scanning/replay
5-8-4-3 Top Consoles location in the unit

The Top Console is located on the top of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, and includes the Main LCD monitor,
the Monitor Arm, the Operator Panel with the Touch Screen, Speakers and an alphanumeric keyboard
as an drawer below the Operator Panel.
Figure 5-8 Top Consoles location
TOP CONSOLE
5-8-4-4 Connection between the Top Console and the rest of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
A flexible harness of electrical wires secures the connection between the Top Console and the rest of
the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5 - 30 Section 5-8 - Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
5-8-4-5 The XYZ mechanism

The Top Console can be adjusted without moving the complete VIVID E9/VIVID E7 console.
It can be moved;
up/down (Z-axis)
sideways to the left and to the right (X-axis)
back and forth (Y-axis).
The vertical movement of the console is motor driven. The control buttons for the electrical motor are
located around the handles. A gas spring inside the system assists in the Z-axis (vertical) movement.
The brakes used for locking the Top Consoles X and Y movement are operated by electrical motors.
5-8-4-6 The XY Locking mechanism

In addition to the brakes described above, a Park Lock mechanism is used to lock the Top Console in
the park position used during transportation.
Description of the Locking Mechanism
Figure 5-9 shows the Park Lock when the Operator Panel is in a locked position.
Figure 5-9 Park Lock in locked position
When the Operator Panel releases, the Threaded Lead Screw (4) rotates clockwise, moving the Lock
Nut outwards and thus lowering the Park Lock Lever downwards and the Park Lock mechanism is
released.

5-8-4-6 The XY Locking mechanism (contd)

The Threaded Lead Screw (4) then rotates CCW and returns to its original position. This is shown in
Figure 5-10 "Unlocked position" on page 5-32.
Figure 5-10 Unlocked position
1
4
When the Operator Panel moves into locked position a micro switch (1) is activated.
The micro switch activation is used by the Motor Controller to detect when the Operator Panel is in
locked position.
The XY (frogleg) brakes will stay ON if the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is powered down when the Operator
Panel is locked. This enables release of the Park Lock, initiated by the micro switches on the Front
Handle of the Operator Panel.
5-8-4-7 Top Console block diagram
Figure 5-11 Top Console block diagram
MAIN CABLE
TO/FROM MAIN CONSOLE
MAIN CABLE Cable List:

DVI VIDEO
48V POWER/AUDIO
USB FOR OP PANEL Cable Part Number Description
USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
UP/DOWN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES E 5256600 VIDEO (HDMI-DVI) CABLE - LCD
F 5196890 POWER/USB CABLE - LCD
G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2x used)
U GA200311 UP/DOWN BUTTONS (2x used)
W 5196592 Safety Ground Wire LCD Arm (2x used)
5-8-4-8 Input Signals

DVI Video for the Main LCD monitor
+48 VDC power for the electronics
Audio (Stereo) for the speakers
USB with video for the Touch Screen
USB for the OP Panel

5-8-4-9 Bidirectional Signals

USB to a USB HUB with 7 outlets:
- USB to the Main Monitor
- USB connector on the Bulkhead
- 2 x USB connectors on the Operator Panel
- USB for the Trackball
- USB for the Alphanumeric Key Board
- USB for the Switch Board (buttons on the OP) and the touch keys on the Touch Screen
5-8-4-10 Output Signals

Control signals from the Up/Down and brake release switches.
5-8-4-11 Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs

There are several LEDs on the Switch Board.
5-8-4-12 LCD Monitor
17 LCD Monitor Block Diagram

A 17-inch High Resolution Monitor with no interlace scan is used as the main monitor.
Figure 5-12 Main 17 LCD Monitor Block Diagram
GROUND
DIGITAL VIDEO FROM

THE OPERATOR PANEL
+48VDC / USB
19 LCD Monitor Block Diagram

A 19 high resolution LCD monitor is available as an alternative to the 17 monitor.
Figure 5-13 Main 19 LCD Monitor Block Diagram
GROUND
DIGITAL VIDEO FROM THE

OPERATOR PANEL
+48VDC / USB

Digital Video Signals (HDMI)
+48 VDC

USB

NONE

NONE
5-8-5 Operator Panel (Control Panel)
5-8-5-1 Operator Panel general description

The Operator Panel includes an On/Off switch, different controls for manipulating the picture quality,
and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A).
An alphanumeric keyboard is located on a drawer under the Operator Panel.
Figure 5-14 Operator Panel
Table 5-11 Operator Panel - Callouts

1 On/Off button 9 Print, secondary capture
10 Freeze, 2D Freeze
Patient selection, Probe selection, Protocol
2
based acquisition, Worksheet and Image review 11 Measurement, image store
3 Active mode gain 12 Cursor, Angle, and Auto
4 2D Gain 13 Trackball
5 Scan mode selection 14 TGC sliders
6 Zoom 15 Speaker volume control
7 Depth 16 Touch Screen (Touch Panel)
8 Display controls, Annotation 17 USB ports
5-8-5-2 Operator Panel block diagram

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Operator Panel is a complex user interaction device with several sub devices.
This includes a trackball with buttons, an alphanumeric keyboard, a custom keyboard, and a touch panel
overlay. See the diagram below for a simplified view of how these devices are interconnected.
Figure 5-15 Operator Panel block diagram

LCD Screen
On/Off
Display
driver
PWR 48V
Touch overlay
Custom keyboard
USB connection USB
to/from host HUB
USB port (rear)
USB port to Main

A/N keyboard
Display
USB ports (front) Trackball
The block diagram in Figure 5-15 shows a USB HUB with 7 connections:
1.) The custom keyboard

2.) An alphanumeric keyboard
3.) A trackball with some buttons
4.) An separate USB port for the main display.
5.) A spare USB port.
6.) External USB connector for connecting memory sticks, service dongle etc.
7.) External USB connector for connecting memory sticks, service dongle etc.
The display interface for the touch screen has its own USB line.
The alphanumeric keyboard is a regular Windows USB keyboard, and similarly the trackball with the
buttons implements a regular Windows USB mouse.
The custom keyboard is the main controller for the operating panel. It interfaces all of the additional
rotaries, push buttons, potentiometers etc. It also connects to the touch panel overlay and handles the
push events from this.
Additionally the custom keyboard also interfaces the trackball buttons. These buttons generate events
for both the trackball device and the custom keyboard.
Example: The trackball has three select buttons. For the trackball device these are all seen as the left mouse
button, but to the custom keyboard these three buttons have three distinct IDs. Backlighting of these
buttons are only controlled via the custom keyboard.

5-8-5-2 Operator Panel block diagram (contd)

Other functions of the custom keyboard are:
Volume control for the audio amplifier located in the host system.
LCD display adjustments: Backlight.
Download of firmware
Controlling backlighting of all buttons and knobs, including the A/N keyboard.
Figure 5-16 Top Console (with Operator Panel) block diagram
TO/FROM
MAIN CONSOLE
MAIN CABLE
DVI VIDEO
48V POWER/AUDIO
USB FOR OP PANEL
USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
UP/DOWN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES

From Main Console (Frog Cable)
DVI Video for the Main Monitor

+48 VDC power for the electronics
Audio (Stereo) for the speakers
USB5 with video for the Touch Screen

To/from Main Console (Frog Cable)
USB6 to a USB HUB with 7 outlets:

- USB to the Main Monitor
- USB connector on the Bulk Head
- 2 x USB connectors on the Operator Panel
- USB for the Trackball
- USB for the Alphanumeric Key Board
- USB for the Switch Board and the touch keys on the Touch Screen
To/from Main LCD Monitor
USB

To/from Main Console (Frog Cable)
Control signals from the Up/Down and brake release switches.

To/from Main LCD Monitor
Digital Video Signals

+48 VDC

There are several LEDs on the Switch Board.

Section 5-9
Main Console
5-9-1 Main Console description
Figure 5-17 Main Console
MAIN CONSOLE
The Main Console hosts the:
Patient I/O
I/O Rear Panel (BEP I/O Board)
Optional B/W printer
One or two (optional) DVD drives
- DVD drive #1 (the upper one) can be used to read and store data. This drive is also used for
software installation during a software upgrade.
- The optional, second DVD drive (DVR) is used to record and replay video, captured by the
Digital Video Stream Recorder (option).
Power Supply (Main LV Power)
Lifting mechanism for the Frog Leg and Top Console
Rear handle
Front and Rear Casters with lock and brake mechanism
The Main Console consists of a frame that acts as the skeleton of the system. The other parts, listed
above, are mounted to the frame. The outside of the Main Console is covered with plastic covers.
5 - 40 Section 5-9 - Main Console

Section 5-10
Air Flow control
5-10-1 General description
5-10-1-1 Air Flow components

The Air Flow control includes the following components:
Air filter in the air intake on the rear of the of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Air filter in the air intake below the fans of the of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (ref. next step).
Fan unit on bottom of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Two fans on top of the Card Rack.
Fans inside the BEP and the Main Power Supply.
Temperature sensors several places inside VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Temperature control software on the BEP
5-10-1-2 Software control

Software, running on the BEP, samples the temperature on each sensor.
If the temperature rises, fan speed (and air flow) is increased.

If the temperature decrease, the fan speed decrease.
If the temperature increase over a pre-defined level for each sensor, the scanner will shut down. It will
then need to rest for a period of time, until the temperature inside the unit has decreased to an
acceptable value, before it is possible to turn it on again. If the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 power down due to
high temperature inside the unit, it may indicate that the air filters need to be dusted or a failure situation.
5-10-2 Location in the unit
Table 5-12 Location in the unit
ITEM DESCRIPTION LOCATION
1. - on the bottom of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Air Filter
- on the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
2. Fan Unit - below the systems Card Rack (Front End Rack).
3. Two fans on top of the Card Rack - on a bracket above the Card Rack (Front End Rack).
4. Distributed over several of the cards in the Card Rack

Temperature Sensors
(Front End Rack).
5. Software Software program running on the BEP.
Please refer to Chapter 7 for troubleshooting hints:
7-4-4 "High System Temperature Error" on page 7-3

7-14-22 "System Temperature Too High" on page 7-158
7-15-5-7 "Heat Problems" on page 7-163

Section 5-11
Casters and Brakes
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has four casters (wheels), the Front Casters and the Rear Casters.
All Casters are mounted on swivels so they can change direction as needed.
Additional, the Front Casters can be locked in fixed directions.
Three plastic pedals are located at the front of the system.
The pedals are mounted on the Pedal Mechanism. The Pedal Mechanism has two major functions.
These are:
- direction lock
- parking brake
The third pedal is the release pedal, used to release the two other functions, if activated.
The direction lock and brake is operating on the front wheels. A lever placed on each of the front
wheels give the interface to the pedal mechanism. These levers are engaged by rods being moved
by a rotating bracket (Bracket Rotation). When the mechanism is engaged in either position, the
pedal will not move back into a neutral position. This is to indicate which function that is activated.
It will then be needed to release this by the release pedal.
The Rear Casters have brakes that are operated individually for each caster.
5 - 42 Section 5-11 - Casters and Brakes

Section 5-12
The purpose of this section is to tell you about the Front End Processor and how it function.

5-12-3 Front End Card Rack general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5-12-4 Transmitter and Receiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5-12-5 Transmitter Board (GTX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5-12-6 Relay Board (RLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5-12-7 Receiver Board (GRX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5-12-8 Front Plane boards (XD BUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5-12-9 Digital Receiver board (DRX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5-12-10 Front End Interface Board (GFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5-12-11 FEP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5-12-3 Front End Card Rack general description

The Front End Card Cage / Card Rack with the electronics is also called the Front End Processor (FEP).
NOTICE The cards have color-keys on the connectors to prevent installation in the wrong rack position. Do not
change the color-keys position. Dont insert a card in the wrong position in the Card Rack. If the power
is turned on with a card placed in the wrong position, the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will be destroyed.

5-12-3-1 Front End Processor cards overview
Figure 5-18 Card Rack cards
Table 5-13 The Front End Processor Card Positions
SHORT MAX QTY IN

NAME COMPLETE NAME SYSTEM COMMENT
GRLY RELAY BOARD 1
GRX RECEIVER BOARD 2
The number of cards in use

GTX TRANSMITTER BOARD 4 vary by VE9 model and card
model used.
Not shown in the illustration

FRONT PLANE above.
FRONT PLANE / TRANSDUCER BUS BOARD 2
/ XD BUS Two (2x) cards are always
used.
DRX DIGITAL RECEIVER BOARD 4
GFI GLOBAL RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFACE BOARD (GFI) 1
5 - 44 Section 5-12 - Front End Processor (FEP)

5-12-3-2 FEPs Location in the Unit
Figure 5-19 Front End Processors Location
FRONT END PROCESSOR
The FEP is located on the right side of the system, behind the Right Side Cover.
5-12-3-3 Input DC voltages

These voltages comes from the Main Power Supply.
+ 24 VDC
+/- 6 VDC
+/- 15 VDC
5-12-3-4 Input Pulser voltages

TSV1P: 0 VDC to +95 VDC
TSV1N: 0 VDC to -95 VDC
These voltages comes from the Main Power Supply.
5-12-3-5 Input signals

RX signals from probes
BEP to Card Rack Backplane Cable
- +5VDC (to GFI)
5-12-3-6 Bidirectional signals

PCI Express cable
- control signals from the BEP
- digital data to the BEP
- I2C bus
- BSCAN
5-12-3-7 Output signals

TX signals to probes
- GFI audio (to BEP)
5-12-3-8 Fuses, jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs

See descriptions for each card/module
5-12-4 Transmitter and Receiver subsystem
5-12-4-1 Transmitter signal path
Figure 5-20 The Ultrasound Transmitter with up to four GTX boards.
DOPPLER PROBE CW_BUS (RX)
GRX DRX
RELAY
BOARD
PROBES
FE_BUS
LVDS_BUS
XD_BUS
DLP PCIe BUS
TO/FROM BEP
GFI
BOARD
DL
FE_BUS
GTX
STA_BUS
NOTE: The number of cards depend on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 model, and options installed.
The Global Radio Frequency Interface board (GFI) loads scan parameters via the FE_BUS into
local RAM on the GTX board(s) and on the DRX boards.
The scan parameters includes probe dependant steering and focusing delay for a certain scan
pattern. Thus, when the GFI board goes through a scan sequence, it loads the proper contents of
the RAM into the TX ASIC (DAVID), then issues a transmit trigger pulse (TXTRIG_L) for the
transmitter and a receive synchronization pulse (TXTRIG) for the Beam Formers on the DRX
boards.
By firing the transmit pulses from the different elements at certain repeated time intervals and with
different delays, the ultrasound beam can be steered in desired directions to obtain the selected
scan patterns (e.g. 2D, 2D Flow etc.).

5-12-4-1 Transmitter signal path (contd)

The ultrasound transmit bursts are generated on the GTX board(s), initiated by the transmit trigger
pulse (TXTRIG_L). The transmit trigger starts the TX ASIC (DAVID) on the GTX board, each
generating several transmit pulses with different delays. The transmit pulses are then routed to
separate transmit amplifiers fed with voltage HV1 and HV2. The voltages HV1 and HV2 are
controlled by the Acoustic Power Control software.
The transmit pulses are routed via the Front Plane (XD bus), located on the front side of the GTX,
GRX and Relay boards, to the Relay board, where they are fed to the selected probe.
If the CW Doppler probe is selected, one of the TX channels from the GTX is routed via the Back
Plane to a separate connector, then via a cable to the Doppler probe connector on the front of
VIVID E9/VIVID E7. In the Doppler probe, the signal is connected to one of the two probe elements.

5-12-4-2 Phased and Linear Array probes

Phased and Linear Array probes consist of several identical transducer elements (e.g. 64, 128,
192).
Four probes can be connected to the system at the same time. The probe connectors are physically
located on the Relay Board, where one is selected and connected to the transmitter (GTX boards)
and receiver (GRX board) through a number of relays.
For available probes, see: Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-122.
5-12-4-3 Receiver signal path
Figure 5-21 The Ultrasound Receiver
GRX DRX
RELAY
BOARD
PROBES
FE_BUS
LVDS_BUS
XD_BUS
DLP PCIe BUS
TO/FROM BEP
GFI
BOARD
DL
FE_BUS
GTX
STA_BUS
The reflected signal from body structures and blood cells are routed from the probe, via the Relay
Board and the Front Plane to the GRX (receiver) boards, where pre-amplification and Analog Time
Gain Compensation (ATGC) is performed. The gain is determined by an analog control signal
(ATGC) generated by the Global Radio Frequency Interface board (GFI).
On the very input of the GRX boards are transmit/receive (T/R) switches to prevent the transmitters
from destroying the receivers.
The output channels from the GRX boards are fed to the DRX boards where the signals in each
receiver channel are A/D converted. Then the beamforming for the received signals takes place.
5-12-4-4 Signal control
Figure 5-22 The Ultrasound Transmitter and Receiver Control Signals
GRX DRX
RELAY
BOARD
PROBES
FE_BUS
LVDS_BUS
XD_BUS
DLP PCIe BUS
TO/FROM BEP
GFI
BOARD
DL
FE_BUS
GTX
STA_BUS
The Global Radio Frequency Interface (GFI) board controls the GTX (transmitter) and GRX / DRX
(analog and digital receiver boards). GFI loads all parameters to the GTX and DRX ASICs. It reads
the probe identification, selects probe connector on Relay board and controls the high voltage
multiplexer in linear probes.
In addition the GFI generates:
- the transmit trigger pulse for GTX
- a receive synchronization pulse (TXTRIG_L) used by DRX
- a differential ATGC voltage used by GRX
- global 50 MHz and 200 MHz system clocks and Reset pulse (SRES)
- Test signal / Dither signal
- Probe ATGC for 3V probe
The output signals from the DRX is fed to the GFI for further signal processing. The result is transferred
via the PCI Express (PCIe) bus to the BEP for more signal processing.

5-12-5 Transmitter Board (GTX)
5-12-5-1 General description
Figure 5-23 GTX boards
GTX-TLP192 GTX-TLP 3.0
GTX-TLP192
Two Transmitter Board models have been used in VIVID E9:

GTX-TLP 3.0 with 64 channels per card

GTX-TLP192 with 192 channels per card (Introduced August 2011)
GTX-TLP 3.0
The GTX-TLP 3.0 contains 64 individually controlled transmit channels. In VIVID E9, either three or four
boards are used, giving a total of 192 or 256 TX channels.
The 3V-D probe, used on BT08 systems, requires 256 TX channels, so four TX boards with 64 TX
channels each, are used. Each channel from the TX boards is connected to 4 elements in the probe,
so we can transmit on 1024 elements (256 x 4).
All other probes use 192 or less TX channels. In this case, three TX boards with 64 channels are
used.
GTX-TLP192
The GTX-TLP192 contains 192 individually controlled transmit channels on one board, and replaces the
three TX boards with 64 TX channels each, described above.
The GTX board(s) provide transmit pulses via the Front Plane (XD BUS) to the Relay board and then
to the transducer array (the probes). This board is used on the VIVID E7 PRO.
NOTE: The GTX-TLP 3.0 and the GTX-TLP192 requires different Front Plane cards.

5-12-5-1 General description (contd)
Figure 5-24 Block Diagram for the GTX board (one channel illustrated)
TSV1&2
FROM
MAIN POWER SUPPLY TSV1P
TSV2P
TSV2N
TSV1N
TX_TRIG_L
FROM GFI
FE_BUS TRANSMIT XD1-n

FRONT END TX
FROM GFI INTERFACE PULSE TO RLY VIA XDBUS
GEN.
Frequency-, delay- and pulse-width parameters for the boards are received on the FE_BUS from the
GFI. The parameters are decoded and stored in the DAVID beamformer ASICs.
A pulse from the GFI board, TX_TRIG_L, trigs the Transmit Pulse Generators.
TS Voltage 1 and TS Voltage 2 from the Main Power Supply, supply the transmitters with the needed
voltages to generate the correct ultrasound signals.

5-12-5-2 Location in the Unit

VIVID E9 BT08 uses four GTX TLP 3.0 boards, ref. Figure 5-25.
VIVID E9 BT09 uses three GTX TLP 3.0 boards, ref. Figure 5-26.
VIVID E9 BT11 uses either three GTX TLP 3.0 boards, ref. Figure 5-26, or one GTX-TLP192
board, ref. Figure 5-27.
NOTE: If the GTX-TLP192 card is used, only one TX card is required.
Figure 5-25 GTX TLP 3.0 boards location - 256 TX channels (BT08 systems)
CW PROBE
CONNECTOR OPTIONAL DC VOLTAGES
TX (PULSER) VOLTAGES
BACKPLANE VPD GFI AUDIO
+5VDC
BOUNDARY SCAN MAIN
POWER
SUPPLY
FRONT OF
VIVID E9/
GTX TLP 3.0
GTX TLP 3.0
GTX TLP 3.0
GTX TLP 3.0

GRX - 128
GRX - 64
RELAY
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
GFI
FRONT PLANE (TRANSDUCER BUS BOARD) TO/FROM
BACK END PROCESSOR
Figure 5-26 GTX TLP-3.0 boards location - 192 TX channels (BT09 and some BT11 systems)
CW PROBE
+5VDC
BOUNDARY SCAN MAIN
POWER
SUPPLY
FRONT OF
VIVID E9/
GTX TLP 3.0
GTX TLP 3.0
GTX TLP 3.0

NOT USED
GRX - 128
GRX - 64
RELAY
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
GFI

BACK END PROCESSOR

5-12-5-2 Location in the Unit (contd)
Figure 5-27 GTX TLP-192 board location - 192 TX channels (introduced 2011)
CW PROBE
+5VDC
BOUNDARY SCAN MAIN
POWER
SUPPLY
FRONT OF
VIVID E9/
GTX-TLP-192
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
GRX - 128
GRX - 64
RELAY
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
GFI
BACK END PROCESSOR
5-12-5-3 Input DC Voltages

The voltages are delivered from the Main Power Supply.
+24 VDC
The +24 VDC voltage is used to generate + 3.3 VDC, + 2.5 VDC, and several other voltages,
internal on the card.
+ 6 VDC
+/- 15 VDC
5-12-5-4 Input TX (Pulser) voltages



TX_TRIG
I2C BUS
JTAG/BSCAN
5-12-5-6 Control Signals

HSS FE BUS (High Speed Serial Bus)
5-12-5-7 Outputs
Pulses sent via the Front Plane to the selected probe.
HSS FE BUS (High Speed Serial Bus) to the next board.
5-12-5-8 Fuses
None.
5-12-5-9 Jumpers
None.
5-12-5-10 DIP-switches
S1 - CPLD. (NOT USED BY SERVICE.)
5-12-5-11 Other switches

S2 - Debug Push Button. (NOT USED BY SERVICE.)

GE
5 - 56
DS9
DS2
DS7
DS6
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS8
DS1
DS11
DS12
DS10
LED NO.
DS5
DS8
DS6
DS7
DS9
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
DS12
DS11
DS10
5-12-5-12
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
COLOR
YELLOW
Table 5-14
DIRECTION GA091999, REVISION 7
DONE
INIT_B
TX_TRIGGER
DAVID_RESET
DCM_LOCKED
DAVID_ERROR
CW MODE LED
DESCRIPTION
GLOBAL_RESET
LEDs on the GTX-192 board
FPGA_CTRL_REG(0)
DAVID_CRC_ERROR
Figure 5-28 LEDs on GTX-192
DIGITAL POWER GOOD

VSS, VDD_DR1 & VLL GOOD
DS8
DS6
DS7
DS9
R521 TP49 TP1
J5
GND
DS12
DS10
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
DS11
R532
15
R518 TP34
R349
R350
R351
R355
A C106 A R522
R84
A
R541
R165
R142
R348
R347
R346
R345
R539
R141
B B R530
R536
R538
R540
B B
e1
R494
R493
C715
C143 C
TP20
J10 C J9 C J12 J11 C R519 TP55

D D D D R531
S2
E E Dev.waiver:
R60
R151
E E
S6
D28
U64
R520 TP33
R495
C141
F F U40 U58 F F
C315
ON 455280 Made in Norway
R51
R497
R119
22 25 15 11 1
22 25 15 11 1
GND
C825
P/N:GA200726-
C147 R496
C142
R356
R354
R353
R352
GTX-TLP 192
R290
Q6
D32
Bar-code
K1
K2
R292
R393
R291
R394
C185
D19
D21
R471 R470 R469 R468 R480 R478 R477 R476 R488 R487 R486 R485
C16_8 R15_8 R16_8 C17_8 C33_7 R31_7 R32_7 C34_7 C16_5 R15_5 R16_5 C17_5 C33_4 R31_4 R32_4 C34_4 C16_2 R15_2 R16_2 C17_2 C33_1 R31_1 R32_1 C34_1 C16_23 R15_23 R16_23 C17_23 C33_22 R31_22 R32_22 C34_22 C16_20 R15_20 R16_20 C17_20 C33_19 R31_19 R32_19 C34_19 C16_17 R15_17 R16_17 C17_17 C33_39 R31_39 R32_39 C34_39 C16_38 R15_38 R16_38 C17_38 C33_37 R31_37 R32_37 C34_37 C16_35 R15_35 R16_35 C17_35 C33_34 R31_34 R32_34 C34_34
R13_8 R11_8 R12_8 R14_8 R29_7 R27_7 R28_7 R30_7 R13_5 R11_5 R12_5 R14_5 R29_4 R27_4 R28_4 R30_4 R13_2 R11_2 R12_2 R14_2 R29_1 R27_1 R28_1 R30_1 R13_23 R11_23 R12_23 R14_23 R29_22 R27_22 R28_22 R30_22 R13_20 R11_20 R12_20 R14_20 R29_19 R27_19 R28_19 R30_19 R13_17 R11_17 R12_17 R14_17 R29_39 R27_39 R28_39 R30_39 R13_38 R11_38 R12_38 R14_38 R29_37 R27_37 R28_37 R30_37 R13_35 R11_35 R12_35 R14_35 R29_34 R27_34 R28_34 R30_34
D1_8
D2_8
D3_8
D4_7
D5_7
D6_7
D1_5
D2_5
D3_5
D4_4
D5_4
D6_4
D1_2
D2_2
D3_2
D4_1
D5_1
D6_1
D1_23
D2_23
D3_23
D4_22
D5_22
D6_22
D1_20
D2_20
D3_20
D4_19
D5_19
D6_19
D1_17
D2_17
D3_17
D4_39
D5_39
D6_39
D1_38
D2_38
D3_38
D4_37
D5_37
D6_37
D1_35
D2_35
D3_35
D4_34
D5_34
D6_34
C148 C711
R3_8
R4_8
R6_8
R5_8
R3_5
R4_5
R6_5
R5_5
R3_2
R4_2
R6_2
R5_2
R19_7
R20_7
R22_7
R21_7
R19_4
R20_4
R22_4
R21_4
R19_1
R20_1
R22_1
R21_1
R3_23
R4_23
R6_23
R5_23
R3_20
R4_20
R6_20
R5_20
R3_17
R4_17
R6_17
R5_17
R3_38
R4_38
R6_38
R5_38
R3_35
R4_35
R6_35
R5_35
R19_22
R20_22
R22_22
R21_22
R19_19
R20_19
R22_19
R21_19
R19_39
R20_39
R22_39
R21_39
R19_37
R20_37
R22_37
R21_37
R19_34
R20_34
R22_34
R21_34
R8_8
R8_5
R8_2
R24_7
R24_4
R24_1
R8_23
R8_20
R8_17
R8_38
R8_35
R24_22
R24_19
R24_39
R24_37
R24_34
R7_8
R7_5
R7_2
R23_7
R23_4
R23_1
R7_23
R7_20
R7_17
R7_38
R7_35
R23_22
R23_19
R23_39
R23_37
R23_34
C13_8 C30_7 C13_5 C30_4 C13_2 C30_1 C13_23 C30_22 C13_20 C30_19 C13_17 C30_39 C13_38 C30_37 C13_35 C30_34
Q1_8
Q2_7
Q1_5
Q2_4
Q1_2
Q2_1
Q1_23
Q2_22
Q1_20
Q2_19
Q1_17
Q2_39
Q1_38
Q2_37
Q1_35
Q2_34
C701 C713
R9_8
R9_5
R9_2
R10_8
R26_7
R25_7
R10_5
R26_4
R25_4
R10_2
R26_1
R25_1
R9_23
R9_20
R9_17
R9_38
R9_35
C10_8 C11_8 C27_7 C28_7 C10_5 C11_5 C27_4 C28_4 C10_2 C11_2 C27_1 C28_1
R10_23
C10_23 C11_23
R26_22
C27_22 C28_22
R25_22
R10_20
C10_20 C11_20
R26_19
C27_19 C28_19
R25_19
R10_17
C10_17 C11_17
R26_39
C27_39 C28_39
R25_39
R10_38
C10_38 C11_38
R26_37
C27_37 C28_37
R25_37
R10_35
C10_35 C11_35
R26_34
C27_34 C28_34
R25_34
C6_8
C6_5
C6_2
C23_7
C23_4
C23_1
C6_23
C6_20
C6_17
C6_38
C6_35
C23_22
C23_19
C23_39
C23_37
C23_34
LEDs on the GTX-192 board

C4_8 C3_8 C21_7 C20_7 C4_5 C3_5 C21_4 C20_4 C4_2 C3_2 C21_1 C20_1 C4_23 C3_23 C21_22 C20_22 C4_20 C3_20 C21_19 C20_19 C4_17 C3_17 C21_39 C20_39 C4_38 C3_38 C21_37 C20_37 C4_35 C3_35 C21_34 C20_34
TP62
U1_8
U2_7
U1_5
U2_4
U1_2
U2_1
U1_23
U2_22
U1_20
U2_19
U1_17
U2_39
U1_38
U2_37
U1_35
U2_34
R1_8 C2_8 C5_8 R17_7 C19_7 C22_7 R1_5 C2_5 C5_5 R17_4 C19_4 C22_4 R1_2 C2_2 C5_2 R17_1 C19_1 C22_1 R1_23 C2_23 C5_23 R17_22 C19_22 C22_22 R1_20 C2_20 C5_20 R17_19 C19_19 C22_19 R1_17 C2_17 C5_17 R17_39 C19_39 C22_39 R1_38 C2_38 C5_38 R17_37 C19_37 C22_37 R1_35 C2_35 C5_35 R17_34 C19_34 C22_34
R2_8
R2_5
C40
R2_2
C707
R18_7
R18_4
R18_1
R2_23
R2_20
R2_17
R2_38
R2_35
C33_8 R31_8 R32_8 C34_8 C16_6 R15_6 R16_6 C17_6 C33_5 R31_5 R32_5 C34_5 C16_3 R15_3 R16_3 C17_3 C33_2 R31_2 R32_2 C34_2 C16_24 R15_24 R16_24 C17_24 C33_23 R31_23 R32_23 C34_23 C16_21 R15_21 C17_21 C33_20 C34_20 C16_18 C17_18 C33_17 C34_17 C16_39 C17_39 C33_38 C34_38 C16_36 C17_36 C33_35 C34_35 C16_33 C17_33
R18_22
R16_21 R31_20 R32_20 R15_18

R18_19
R16_18 R31_17 R32_17 R15_39

R18_39
R16_39 R31_38 R32_38 R15_36

R18_37
R16_36 R31_35 R32_35 R15_33

R18_34
R16_33
R29_8 R27_8 R28_8 R30_8 R13_6 R11_6 R12_6 R14_6 R29_5 R27_5 R28_5 R30_5 R13_3 R11_3 R12_3 R14_3 R29_2 R27_2 R28_2 R30_2 R13_24 R11_24 R12_24 R14_24 R29_23 R27_23 R28_23 R30_23 R13_21 R11_21 R12_21 R14_21 R29_20 R27_20 R28_20 R30_20 R13_18 R11_18 R12_18 R14_18 R29_17 R27_17 R28_17 R30_17 R13_39 R11_39 R12_39 R14_39 R29_38 R27_38 R28_38 R30_38 R13_36 R11_36 R12_36 R14_36 R29_35 R27_35 R28_35 R30_35 R13_33 R11_33 R12_33 R14_33
D4_8
D5_8
D6_8
D1_6
D2_6
D3_6
D4_5
D5_5
D6_5
D1_3
D2_3
D3_3
D4_2
D5_2
D6_2
D1_24
D2_24
D3_24
D4_23
D5_23
D6_23
D1_21
D2_21
D3_21
D4_20
D5_20
D6_20
D1_18
D2_18
D3_18
D4_17
D5_17
D6_17
D1_39
D2_39
D3_39
D4_38
D5_38
D6_38
D1_36
D2_36
D3_36
D4_35
D5_35
D6_35
D1_33
D2_33
D3_33
R3_6
R4_6
R6_6
R5_6
R3_3
R4_3
R6_3
R5_3
R19_8
R20_8
R22_8
R21_8
R19_5
R20_5
R22_5
R21_5
R19_2
R20_2
R22_2
R21_2
R3_24
R4_24
R6_24
R5_24
R3_21
R4_21
R6_21
R5_21
R3_18
R4_18
R6_18
R5_18
R3_39
R4_39
R6_39
R5_39
R3_36
R4_36
R6_36
R5_36
R3_33
R4_33
R6_33
R5_33
R19_23
R20_23
R22_23
R21_23
R19_20
R20_20
R22_20
R21_20
R19_17
R20_17
R22_17
R21_17
R19_38
R20_38
R22_38
R21_38
R19_35
R20_35
R22_35
R21_35
R8_6
R8_3
R24_8
R24_5
R24_2
R8_24
R8_21
R8_18
R8_39
R8_36
R8_33
R24_23
R24_20
R24_17
R24_38
R24_35
C195 C712
R7_6
R7_3
R23_8
R23_5
R23_2
R7_24
R7_21
R7_18
R7_39
R7_36
R7_33
R23_23
R23_20
R23_17
R23_38
R23_35
Q2_8
Q1_6
Q2_5
Q1_3
Q2_2
Q1_24
Q2_23
Q1_21
Q2_20
Q1_18
Q2_17
Q1_39
Q2_38
Q1_36
Q2_35
Q1_33
R9_6
R9_3
R26_8
R25_8
R10_6
R26_5
R25_5
R10_3
R26_2
R25_2
R9_24
R9_21
R9_18
R9_39
R9_36
R9_33
R10_24
R26_23
R25_23
R10_21
R26_20
R25_20
R10_18
R26_17
R25_17
R10_39
R26_38
R25_38
R10_36
R26_35
R25_35
R10_33
C6_6
C6_3
C23_8
C23_5
C23_2
C6_24
C6_21
C6_18
C6_39
C6_36
C6_33
C23_23
C23_20
C23_17
C23_38
C23_35
C705 C714
C21_8 C20_8 C4_6 C3_6 C21_5 C20_5 C4_3 C3_3 C21_2 C20_2 C4_24 C3_24 C21_23 C20_23 C4_21 C3_21 R45 C21_20 C20_20 C4_18 C3_18 C21_17 C20_17 C4_39 C3_39 C21_38 C20_38 C4_36 C3_36 C21_35 C20_35 C4_33 C3_33
TP73
TP112
U2_8
U1_6
U2_5
U1_3
U2_2
U1_24
U2_23
U1_21
U2_20
U1_18
U2_17
U1_39
U2_38
U1_36
U2_35
U1_33
C18_8 C1_6 C18_5 C1_3 C18_2 C1_24 C18_23 C1_21

R46 C18_20 C1_18 C18_17 C1_39 C18_38 C1_36 C18_35 C1_33
R2_6
R2_3
R18_8
R18_5
R18_2
R2_24
R2_21
R2_18
R2_39
R2_36
R2_33
C16_7 R15_7 R16_7 C17_7 C33_6 R31_6 R32_6 C34_6 C16_4 R15_4 R16_4 C17_4 C33_3 R31_3 R32_3 C34_3 C16_1 R15_1 R16_1 C17_1 C33_24 R31_24 R32_24 C34_24 C16_22 R15_22 C17_22 C33_21 C34_21 C16_19 C17_19 C33_18 C34_18 C16_40 C17_40 C33_40 C34_40 C16_37 C17_37 C33_36 C34_36 C16_34 C17_34 C33_33 C34_33
R18_23
R16_22 R31_21 R32_21 R15_19

R18_20
R16_19 R31_18 R32_18 R15_40

R18_17
R16_40 R31_40 R32_40 R15_37

R18_38
R16_37 R31_36 R32_36 R15_34

R18_35
R16_34 R31_33 R32_33

R13_7 R11_7 R12_7 R14_7 R29_6 R27_6 R28_6 R30_6 R13_4 R11_4 R12_4 R14_4 R29_3 R27_3 R28_3 R30_3 C61 R13_1 R11_1 R12_1 R14_1 R29_24 R27_24 R28_24 R30_24 R13_22 R11_22 R12_22 R14_22 R29_21 R27_21 R28_21 R30_21 R13_19 R11_19 R12_19 R14_19 R29_18 R27_18 R28_18 R30_18 R13_40 R11_40 R12_40 R14_40 R29_40 R27_40 R28_40 R30_40 C709 R13_37 R11_37 R12_37 R14_37 R29_36 R27_36 R28_36 R30_36 R13_34 R11_34 R12_34 R14_34 R29_33 R27_33 R28_33 R30_33
LIT
LIT
D1_7
D2_7
D3_7
D4_6
D5_6
D6_6
D1_4
D2_4
D3_4
D4_3
D5_3
D6_3
D1_1
D2_1
D3_1
D4_24
D5_24
D6_24
D1_22
D2_22
D3_22
D4_21
D5_21
D6_21
D1_19
D2_19
D3_19
D4_18
D5_18
D6_18
D1_40
D2_40
D3_40
D4_40
D5_40
D6_40
D1_37
D2_37
D3_37
D4_36
D5_36
D6_36
D1_34
D2_34
D3_34
D4_33
D5_33
D6_33
R3_7
R4_7
R6_7
R5_7
R3_4
R4_4
R6_4
R5_4
R3_1
R4_1
R6_1
R5_1
R19_6
R20_6
R22_6
R21_6
R19_3
R20_3
R22_3
R21_3
R3_22
R4_22
R6_22
R5_22
R3_19
R4_19
R6_19
R5_19
R3_40
R4_40
R6_40
R5_40
R3_37
R4_37
R6_37
R5_37
R3_34
R4_34
R6_34
R5_34
R19_24
R20_24
R22_24
R21_24
R19_21
R20_21
R22_21
R21_21
R19_18
R20_18
R22_18
R21_18
R19_40
R20_40
R22_40
R21_40
R19_36
R20_36
R22_36
R21_36
R19_33
R20_33
R22_33
R21_33
R8_7
R8_4
R8_1
R24_6
R24_3
R8_22
R8_19
R8_40
R8_37
R8_34
R24_24
R24_21
R24_18
R24_40
R24_36
R24_33
R7_7
R7_4
R7_1
R23_6
R23_3
R7_22
R7_19
R7_40
R7_37
R7_34
R23_24
R23_21
R23_18
R23_40
R23_36
R23_33
C12_7 C29_6 C12_4 C29_3 C55 C12_1 C29_24 C12_22 C29_21 C12_19 C29_18 C12_40 C29_40 C708 C12_37 C29_36 C12_34 C29_33
Q1_7
Q2_6
Q1_4
Q2_3
Q1_1
Q2_24
Q1_22
Q2_21
Q1_19
Q2_18
Q1_40
Q2_40
Q1_37
Q2_36
Q1_34
Q2_33
R9_7
R9_4
R9_1
R10_7
R26_6
R25_6
R10_4
R26_3
R25_3
R10_1
R9_22
R9_19
R9_40
R9_37
R9_34
R26_24
R25_24
R10_22
R26_21
R25_21
R10_19
R26_18
R25_18
R10_40
R26_40
R25_40
R10_37
R26_36
R25_36
R10_34
R26_33
R25_33
C6_7
C6_4
C6_1
C23_6
C23_3
C6_22
C6_19
C6_40
C6_37
C6_34
PROPRIETARY TO GE
C23_24
C23_21
C23_18
C23_40
C23_36
C23_33
C4_7 C3_7 C21_6 C20_6 C4_4 C3_4 C21_3 C20_3 C63 C4_1 C3_1 C21_24 C20_24 C4_22 C3_22 C21_21 C20_21 R103 C4_19 C3_19 C21_18 C20_18 C4_40 C3_40 C21_40 C20_40 C710 C4_37 C3_37 C21_36 C20_36 C4_34 C3_34 C21_33 C20_33
U1_7
U2_6
U1_4
U2_3
U1_1
U2_24
U1_22
U2_21
U1_19
U2_18
U1_40
U2_40
U1_37
U2_36
U1_34
U2_33
C1_7 C18_6 C1_4 C18_3 C1_1 C18_24 C1_22 C18_21

R102 C1_19 C18_18 C1_40 C18_40 C1_37 C18_36 C1_34 C18_33
R2_7
R2_4
R2_1
R562
R18_6
R18_3
R2_22
R2_19
R2_40
R2_37
R2_34
R18_24
R18_21
R18_18
R18_40
R18_36
R18_33
R561
C68
Q22
D27
C645
Q23
C158
TP54
LIT IN CW MODE
R555
R556
R560
R559
R563
R564
C70
HS4
A1
A1
A1
AB1
AB1
AB1
TP60
C585
C395
C478
C447
C546
C590
C499
C587
C435
C398
C409
C520
C495
C353
C539
C373
C507
C564
C591
C431
C505
C406
C496
C476
C443
C444
C471
C484
C691
C699
C678
C692
C696
C688
C689
C674
C684
C693
C685
C670
C690
C680
C258
TP56
C351
C76
C77
C17 C253 C451 C255 C260 C525 C266 C364 C676

C397 C378 C687
C441 C349 C694
C402 C437 C74 C559 C581 C75 C702 C666
U56
U55
HS9
C46 C519 C589 C681 C78

C400 C426 C557 C421 S5 C695 C683
C465 C548 S4 C419 C372 C682 C672
C490 C565 C677
U4
U2
TP29
TP13
C586
D10
D11
C575 C379 C479 C697 C662

U73
C354 C424 C363 C582 C703 C668

C434 C551 C375 C568 C698 C679
HS6
U26
HS7
U27
TP88
C446 C518 C480 C497 C686 C673 C36

D12
D13
C44 R29 R30 C549 C436 C658

R36
R37
R120
C414 C566 C403 C352 C655 C671
LIT DURING SCANNING

C254 C537 C477 C265 C358 C407 C643 C644 C660
R31 C348 C526 C664
D9
D31
C483
C423
C573
C541
C562
C455
C386
C594
C383
C592
C454
C466
C448
C570
C366
C417
C430
C543
C558
C380
C527
C532
C522
C460
C648
C659
C646
C661
C652
C663
C650
C665
C656
C667
C669
C654
C533 C560 C675

C475
C506
A22
AB22
A22
A22
AB22
AB22
D4
C94
NORMAL OPERATION
C65
C69
TP84
C93
C491
C458
C704
C700
R96
C13
R97
R99
R100
R94
R101
R340
R392
R391
R442
R441
R338
TP85
DS14
C252
TP6
R339
R550
R342
R341
R371
R448
R357
R358
R426
R431
R445
R443
R449
R479
R446
R447
R553
R549
R398
R397
R404
R444
R401
R403
TP50
R182
R181
R216
DS18
R273
R269
DS17
DS13
R212
DS16
DS15
MP7 MP15 MP5

D14
C27 C28
R17 R20
R301 R316
R303 R312 R16 R15 R19 R18
TP7 C62
3V3
TP9
R183
C146
R308 R300 C23 C24

U60
R317 R302 R185 C30 C31

R501 R4
24
R313 R304
U54
HS8
TP5
C81
R186
C145
TP61
GND
R311 R309 C96

S1
L2
C33 C37 C344 C343 C350 C25
Section 5-12 - Front End Processor (FEP)

R184
L1
U5 C159
U9
25
C11
48
U13
C20 C21 C149

D25
C229
R567
U10
C101
U7
C331
HS1
C15 C18 C12 C80

S3
C244 C235
R57
R56
R55
R54
R53
R52
R79
R83
R85
R93
R283
R285
R95
C102 R1 R12 R13 FL9
MP11
MP17
TP44
R35
C7
D8
TP4
C144
R70
TP58
R107
R34
R74 C192 C3
R262 R276 D30 C336
D1
D2
R71 C340 R6 R7
TP2 R58
HS2
U61
HS3
R134 R133 R264 R528 Q2

D24
R78 R8
SP6
SP3
SP7
R135
R140
R256
C346
38
37
R123 R122 R278 R87

C231
R529
R59 R82
U12
R502
C5
C105
U11
R259
R297
R241
R227
R157
R281
R279
R42
R166
R287
R298
R327
R326
R325
C97
U71
R246 C157 C178 R533

R139
R138
R137
R136
R299
R289
R324
R247
C6
C338
TP51
R534
R114
R112
R251 R315 R275 R310

R111
R113
C29 C332 C345

J1
TP82
24
R314
C269
R504
T1
R319
C270
R369
T16
TP63
U24 U21
C161
C333
R243
R249
R253
R252
R267
R268
R272
R271
C230 R378 R368 C316 C10

Q4
25
48
C184
C334
C341
C278
R98
2
TP59
R104
R169 R377 R367 R188

R250
R255
R270
R274
TP40
C122
C290
D23
TP89
TP91
TP96
TP97
R526
R499
C318 R376 C42

R381
R383
R384
D16
R293 R296 R187

R168
R167
R375
R370
C317
C216 C320
U19
C41
R163
R400
C327
R192 R189 R88

TP3
C234 R233
R148
R147
R146
R127
R126
R125
R145
R542
R207
R402
R382
R380
C319
R373
T1
U15
HS5
C222 R232
R523
R2
R3
R205 C47
R344
R343
R334
R331
R328
R226
U65
C1
C2
U36
R203
MP3
A1
A16
R209
U70
C16
R152
R153
R385
R131
R386
C719
C717
R195
C326
R546
R321
R130
R129
R547
R144
R143
R548
R245 U16 R32 R33

R66
R47
R237
FL6
FL3
C114 C115 R573

Q3
FL30
FL18
R76
R149 48
R242
R240
R248
R235
24
R128 25
C49
TP52
R618
R164
R615
R524
R43
TP38
R221
R571 R572
R177
R174
R173
R179
R180
C66
C86
R222 C45
FL23 FL26
LIT
LIT
R336
R335
R170
R223 U23 U22 R570 R498

U63
C250 C251
R89
C90
D5
MP19
R231
R516
C328
R525
R537
R535
R527
R500
25
48
Q5
24
C325
R217 C89 FL24 FL25

C335
C342
C309 R224
U18
C73
SP1
TP66
FL28 FL29 MP13 MP1 MP9

R220
R230
C154
C135
C155
C136
C156
C72
R201
R161
R337
R204
C186
C196
1 19 1 11 22 1 11 19 1 11 15 25
C236
R117
R110
R109
C110
10 1 F F F F F F
E 11 E E E
DG E E
D
J6
D D D D D D
C
J4
C
J8
C
J2
C
J3
C C C
BG B B B B
B B B
A A A A A A A
START UP
ERROR CONDITION
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
5-12-5-13 LEDs on the GTX-64 board
Figure 5-29 LEDs
J11
DS9
DS9
DS19
DS19
DS17 DS17
DS18
DS18
J12
DS1
DS2 DS1
DS3 DS2
DS3
DS4 DS4
DS5
DS5 DS6
DS7
DS6 DS8
DS7
DS8
Table 5-15 LEDs on the GTX-64 board
LED NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION NORMAL OPERATION START UP ERROR CONDITION

CPLD MD1711
DS9 GREEN ON ON
ANALOG POWER ENABLED
ADM1062
DS19 GREEN ON ON
ALL DIGITAL POWER IS GOOD
DS17 GREEN CPLD IF_FPGA init done ON OFF
DS18 GREEN CPLD IF_FPGA init ON OFF

IF_FPGA -
DS1 GREEN OFF OFF FPGA/DAVID ERROR
GTXIF_DAVID_ERROR_sig(0)
IF_FPGA -
IF_FPGA -
IF_FPGA -
IF_FPGA -
DS5 GREEN OFF OFF
ctrlRegFFF0out(0)
IF_FPGA -
DS6 RED ON OFF
Txtrig_n_sig(0)
DS7 RED IF_FPGA - Global_rst_n OFF OFF
IF_FPGA
DS8 RED ON OFF
DEBUG_BUTTON AND FE_global_rst_n

5-12-5-14 Test points on the GTX board
Table 5-16 Test points sheet 1 of 2
TP # DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION
TP1-TP8 GND
TP9 3V3
TP10 GND
TP11 1V2
TP12 GND
TP13 1V8
TP14-TP19 NOT USED BY SERVICE
TP20 GND TP11

TP29 GND GND - TP2

GND - TP66 GND - TP6
TP33 TSV2P (0 TO 95V) /10

TP34 TSV1P (0 TO 95V) /10
TP35-TP37 NOT USED BY SERVICE GND - TP12

GND - TP38
TP38 GND
TP39 NOT USED BY SERVICE GND - TP10 GND - TP58

GND - TP51
TP40 3V3 CLOCK
GND - TP7 GND - TP29
TP41-TP43 NOT USED BY SERVICE TP61 GND - TP20
TP52
TP50 GND - TP4
TP44 GND TP65
TP59 TP40
TP9
TP49 TSV2N (-95 TO 0V) /10 GND - TP5
TP50 VOUT2 (2.3V) GND - TP44

TP13
GND - TP69 TP33 TP34
TP51-TP53 GND
TP54 NOT USED BY SERVICE

GND - TP8
TP55 TSV1N (-95 TO 0V) /10 GND - TP3
GND - TP53 TP55 TP49
TP56

GND - TP1
TP58 GND
TP59 V24
TP61 2V5
TP62 GND - NOT USED BY SERVICE
TP65 VOUT1 (4.0V)
TP66 GND

TP69 GND

Table 5-16 Test points (contd) sheet 2 of 2
TP # DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION
TP70-TP81 NOT USED
TP82 GND
TP83 NOT USED GND - TP84 GND - TP85

TP84-TP85 GND
TP86-TP87 NOT USED
TP88 GND
TP89-TP90 NOT USED
TP91 GND TP97
TP92 NOT USED

TP93 GND
TP94-TP95 NOT USED

GND -TP91
TSV2 DRIVER IN CW MODE: +5.2V
TP96 ELSE: TSV1 & CLAMP DRIVER:
+11V GND -TP93
TP97 AVEE (CLAMP AND BIAS -11V)
TP98 11VPA
TP98
VDD_DR2
TP99 TSV2 DRIVER IN CW MODE: +5.2V
ELSE: TSV2 DRIVER +11V
TP100 NOT USED TP101

TP99
TP101 VLL +3.3V
TP96
TP102 NOT USED BY SERVICE GND - TP88
GND - TP82
TP103 NOT USED
TP104-
NOT USED BY SERVICE
TP106
TP107-
NOT USED
TP111

GE
5 - 60
5-12-6
5-12-6-1

DS8 DS10 DS9 DS12 DS11
K12 K101 K103 R211 R213 R212

DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
R23 R108 R107 R106 R105 R104 R73

C125 C121 K247 C120 C124
R215
R214
R217
C128 C132
R216
S3
R139
R138
K249 R140
R137
K8 K9 K51 K54 K107 K124 K118 K139 K132 K150
K35 K27 K46 K91
A B C D E F G H J K L M
C129 C133
K24 K40 K45 K48 J13 10
K11 K10 K96 K102 K121 K112 K117 K129 K144 K149
20
K34 K39 K29 K90 K6 K1 K95 K53 K106 K111 K126 K138 K143 K134 C136 C140
34 R146 R148
K33 K26 K44 K89 K5 K50 K100 K105 K123 K116 K137 K131 K148 K251
R145 R147
S6
C134 C130 K250 C131 C135 J3
C122 C126 C123 C127 C141 C137
K3 K7 K2
K287_J14 K288_J14 K83 K86 K171 K188 K182 K203 K196 K214
K67 K59 K78 K155 C138 C142
K290_J14 K289_J14 K160 K166 K185 K176 K181 K193 K208 K213 38 37
K56 K72 K77 K80 J1_J14 R150 R152
10
R149 K252 R151
J2
20
K7_J14 K1_J14 K159 K85 K170 K175 K190 K202 K207 K198 2
K66 K71 K61 K154
C139 C143
34 K6_J14 K82 K164 K169 K187 K180 K201 K195 K212
K65 K58 K76 K153 C18
U4
R37
CR3
S1 T3
S4
K20 K19 K21 K22 C146 C144 K253 C145 C147 C111
General description
K3_J14 K5_J14 K2_J14

U1
C150 C148 C149 C151
CR4
R36
C19
K287 K288 K280 K286 K219 K224 K230 K235 K240 K246
R35
U2
R2
Relay Board (RLY)
C20
K290 K289 K279 K284 K218 K223 K229 K234 K239 K245
CR6
R42
K267 K256 K262 K275

J1_J15 10 R60 U3
K7_J15 K1_J15 C26 R8

R41
CR7
20 K217 K228 K233 K244

Figure 5-30 Relay board
K266 K255 K261 K274

U5
R40
CR5
R67 R63
Q10
C46
C107
C108
K265 K260 K273 34 U34 TP1 TP2

C37
50 26
C48
S5 R49
U9 51 25 D1
R114
R119
C94
TP6
FL16
CR16 C92
U15 Q6 Q3 Q1
Q4 Q5
Q7
R111
C45
U7
R200
R199
R198
R197
R196
U16
C110
C112
R192
R190 R191 HS2

FL14
Q2
TP7
75
C88 C90
CR1 R91 R74

C166
C74
C164
C165
C109 R55 R54 R52 R47 R56 R57
R195
K3_J15 K5_J15 K2_J15 76 100
R115
R120
Q11
C34
U14 R21 R50 R48 R46 R53 R51

U31 U32 U33 C117
U37 Y1
C73
R187 R188 R189 U35 PS1 U18 U17 S2
TP13
C103
C115
R201
R202
CR15 VR2
C113
R110
CC
BB
AA
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
R71
C162
C163
C161
K13 K14 R109 R64

C38 C39 R30
U28 U29 U30 HS1
U10 VR1 TP5
Figure 5-31 Probe connectors

R184 R185 R186 U8
C49
CR2 U11 U13

CR14
C159
U12
C158
C160
K18 K15 U19 C31 C32

C55 C58
R178 U25 U26 U27 R99 D9 D7
C72
R103
R98
FL9
J16 U6 C57
C25
R3 R102 TP11
R101 R95 R18 R17
R100 D10 D8 F3
TP8
K16 K17 D2 D3 R22

TP10 C99 C101
FL21
C66
U21 U20 U22 U23 U24 C83 TP9 C98 R11 R12 R16 R15
C84
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
R20
FL5
FL2
FL3
FL7
FL6
C64
F2 R9 R10 R14 R13

FL20
F1
C29
FL19 FL18
C28
FL1
R180 R179 R181 R182 R183
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
CC
BB
AA
The module contain four probe connectors:

NOTE:
Transmitter or Receiver modules that are active.
connector. The Doppler Probe has two XD channels.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
OF THE BOARD.
two connectors support probes with 192 XD channels

one connector supports probes with 128 XD channels

2 - PDT PROBE PORTS: FOR VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SPECIFIC PROBE
THE PROBE CONNECTORS ARE
MOUNTED ON THE SOLDER SIDE
1 - PD PROBE PORT: FOR VIVID 7 COMPATIBLE PROBE CONNECTORS

Relays are used in order to switch the connections between the active probe connectors.
one connector supports both probes with 192 XD channels and probes with 256 XD channels
The signals to the Doppler probe are routed via the FEP Backplane and cables to the Doppler probe
The main task of the Relay Board is to route the transducer channels between the active probe and the

The Relay board is located in the Front End Rack on the end nearest to the front of the scanner.
5-12-6-3 Input DC Voltages:

+15VDC
+6VDC
-6VDC
-15VDC
+100V PMXVPP (Voltage for Probe MUX)
-100V PMXVNN (Voltage for Probe MUX)
Voltages provided by regulators on the board:
+12 VDC
+5 VDC
+3.3 VDC
-3.3 VDC
-5 VDC
and
LVDC (3.3 V/2.5A) for RT3D probe

Transmit period:
XMIT Pulses via the XD_BUS
Receive period:
Echo signals from the selected probe

LVDS_BUS
STA_BUS
PSEL_BUS
TXDPEN
GFI_RLY_CW_ACTIVE_N
SP2_BUS

Transmit period:
XMIT Pulses to the selected probe
Receive period:
Echo signals via XD_BUS to GRX cards

GE
5 - 62
5-12-6-9
5-12-6-8
5-12-6-7
K12 K101 K103 R211 R213 R212

R23 R108 R107 R106 R105 R104 R73

C125 C121 K247 C120 C124
R215
R214
R217
C128 C132
R216
S3
R139
R138
NONE
NONE
Fuses
K249 R140
R137
K8 K9 K51 K54 K107 K124 K118 K139 K132 K150
K35 K27 K46 K91
F3
F2
F1
C129 C133
K24 K40 K45 K48 J13 10
K11 K10 K96 K102 K121 K112 K117 K129 K144 K149
Jumpers
FUSE
20
Table 5-17
34 R146 R148
K33 K26 K44 K89 K5 K50 K100 K105 K123 K116 K137 K131 K148 K251
R145 R147
S6
C134 C130 K250 C131 C135 J3
C122 C126 C123 C127 C141 C137
K3 K7 K2
DIP-switches
K287_J14 K288_J14 K83 K86 K171 K188 K182 K203 K196 K214
K67 K59 K78 K155 C138 C142
K290_J14 K289_J14 K160 K166 K185 K176 K181 K193 K208 K213 38 37
K56 K72 K77 K80 J1_J14 R150 R152
10
R149 K252 R151
J2
20 K7_J14 K1_J14 K159 K85 K170 K175 K190 K202 K207 K198 2
K66 K71 K61 K154
C139 C143
34 K6_J14 K82 K164 K169 K187 K180 K201 K195 K212
K65 K58 K76 K153 C18
U4
R37
CR3
S1 T3
S4
K20 K19 K21 K22 C146 C144 K253 C145 C147 C111
K3_J14 K5_J14 K2_J14
U1
C150 C148 C149 C151
CR4
R36
C19
K287 K288 K280 K286 K219 K224 K230 K235 K240 K246
R35
U2
R2
C20
K290 K289 K279 K284 K218 K223 K229 K234 K239 K245
CR6
R42
K267 K256 K262 K275

J1_J15 10 R60 U3
K7_J15 K1_J15 C26 R8

R41
CR7
K266 K255 K261 K274 20 K217 K228 K233 K244

U5
R40
CR5
R67 R63
Q10
C46
C107
C108
K265 K260 K273 34 U34 TP1 TP2

C37
50 26
C48
S5 R49
U9 51 25 D1
R114
R119
C94
TP6
FL16
CR16 C92
U15 Q6 Q3 Q1
Q4 Q5
Q7
R111
C45
U7
R200
R199
R198
R197
R196
U16
C110
C112
R192
R190 R191 HS2

FL14
Q2
TP7
75
C88 C90
CR1 R91 R74

C166
C74
C164
C165
C109 R55 R54 R52 R47 R56 R57
R195
K3_J15 K5_J15 K2_J15 76 100
R115
R120
Q11
C34
U14 R21 R50 R48 R46 R53 R51

U31 U32 U33 C117
U37 Y1
C73
R187 R188 R189 U35 PS1 U18 U17 S2
TP13
C103
C115
R201
R202
CR15 VR2
C113
R110
CC
BB
AA
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
R71
C162
C163
C161
K13 K14 R109 R64

C38 C39 R30
U28 U29 U30 HS1
R184 R185 R186 U10 U8 VR1 TP5
C49
CR2 U11 U13

CR14
C159
U12
C158
C160
K18 K15 U19 C31 C32

C55 C58
R178 U25 U26 U27 R99 D9 D7
C72
R103
R98
FL9
J16 U6 C57
C25
R3 R102 TP11
R101 R95 R18 R17
R100 D10 D8 F3
TP8
K16 K17 D2 D3 R22

TP10 C99 C101
FL21
C66
U21 U20 U22 U23 U24 C83 TP9 C98 R11 R12 R16 R15
C84
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
R20
FL5
FL2
FL3
FL7
FL6
C64
F2 R9 R10 R14 R13

FL20
F1
C29
FL19 FL18
C28
FL1
R180 R179 R181 R182 R183
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
CC
BB
AA
VALUE
Figure 5-32 Fuses on the Relay board
Fuses on the Relay board
1.1A/6V Auto Recover
0.4A/30V Auto Recover

240mA/125V Fast Action
F3
F1
F2
PROPRIETARY TO GE

probe (-3.3VDC)
DESCRIPTION
+5V (VCC1) to Probe

Security for (Pedof) Doppler probe
Securing the regulator used for -3V3 supply for 3V

GE
DS9
DS8
DS7
DS6
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
DS12
DS11
DS10
LED NO.
5-12-6-10
5-12-6-11
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
COLOR
LEDs
Table 5-18
Test points
DS8
DS9
DS12
DS10
DS11
VCC
+12V
+3V3
LVDC
-5V AVEE
DLP_AUX
DLP +12V
DLP LVDC
STATUS_LED
DLP AUX (-3.3V)

DESCRIPTION
DLP PMX_VNN (-100V)

DLP PMX_VPP (+100V)
DS7
DS6
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
Figure 5-33 LEDs on the Relay board
There are no test points for service use.

LEDs on the Relay board
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
3 OR 4
PRESENT IN
CONNECTOR 4
IN CONNECTOR #4
IN CONNECTOR #4
IN CONNECTOR #4
IN CONNECTOR #4
GREEN WHEN PROBE
GREEN WHEN PROBE
LIT WHEN 4V ACTIVE IN

PROBE CONNECTOR #4
NORMAL OPERATION
LIT WHEN PROBE ACTIVE

ACTIVE IN CONNECTOR 2,
PROPRIETARY TO GE
K12 K101 K103 R211 R213 R212

R23 R108 R107 R106 R105 R104 R73

C125 C121 K247 C120 C124
R215
R214
R217
C128 C132
Chapter 5 - Components and functions (theory)

R216
S3
R139
R138
K249 R140
R137
K8 K9 K51 K54 K107 K124 K118 K139 K132 K150
K35 K27 K46 K91
START UP
C129 C133
K24 K40 K45 K48 J13 10
K11 K10 K96 K102 K121 K112 K117 K129 K144 K149
20
34 R146 R148
K33 K26 K44 K89 K5 K50 K100 K105 K123 K116 K137 K131 K148 K251
R145 R147
S6
C134 C130 K250 C131 C135 J3
C122 C126 C123 C127 C141 C137
K3 K7 K2
K287_J14 K288_J14 K83 K86 K171 K188 K182 K203 K196 K214
K67 K59 K78 K155 C138 C142
DS8, DS9, DS10, DS11 AND DS12 ARE DEBUG LEDS FOR PROBE CONNECTOR #4
K290_J14 K289_J14 K160 K166 K185 K176 K181 K193 K208 K213 38 37
K56 K72 K77 K80 J1_J14 R150 R152
10
R149 K252 R151
J2
20 K7_J14 K1_J14 K159 K85 K170 K175 K190 K202 K207 K198 2
K66 K71 K61 K154
C139 C143
34 K6_J14 K82 K164 K169 K187 K180 K201 K195 K212
K65 K58 K76 K153 C18
U4
R37
CR3
S1 T3
S4
K20 K19 K21 K22 C146 C144 K253 C145 C147 C111
K3_J14 K5_J14 K2_J14
U1
C150 C148 C149 C151
CR4
R36
C19
K287 K288 K280 K286 K219 K224 K230 K235 K240 K246
R35
U2
R2
C20
K290 K289 K279 K284 K218 K223 K229 K234 K239 K245
CR6
R42
K267 K256 K262 K275

J1_J15 10 R60 U3
K7_J15 K1_J15 C26 R8

R41
CR7
K266 K255 K261 K274 20 K217 K228 K233 K244

U5
R40
CR5
R67 R63
Q10
C46
C107
C108
K265 K260 K273 34 U34 TP1 TP2

C37
50 26
C48
S5 R49
U9 51 25 D1
R114
R119
C94
TP6
FL16
CR16 C92
U15 Q6 Q3 Q1
Q4 Q5
Q7
R111
C45
U7
R200
R199
R198
R197
R196
U16
C110
C112
R192
R190 R191 HS2

FL14
Q2
TP7
75
C88 C90
CR1 R91 R74

C166
C74
C164
C165
C109 R55 R54 R52 R47 R56 R57

R195
K3_J15 K5_J15 K2_J15 76 100

R115
R120
Q11
C34
U14 R21 R50 R48 R46 R53 R51

U31 U32 U33 C117
U37 Y1
C73
R187 R188 R189 U35 PS1 U18 U17 S2

TP13
C103
C115
R201
R202
CR15 VR2
C113
R110
CC
BB
AA
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
R71
C162
C163
C161
K13 K14 R109 R64

C38 C39 R30
U28 U29 U30 HS1
R184 R185 R186 U10 U8 VR1 TP5
C49
CR2 U11 U13

CR14
C159
U12
C158
C160
K18 K15 U19 C31 C32

C55 C58
R178 U25 U26 U27 R99 D9 D7
C72
R103
R98
FL9
J16 U6 C57
C25
R3 R102 TP11
R101 R95 R18 R17
R100 D10 D8 F3
TP8
K16 K17 D2 D3 R22

TP10 C99 C101
FL21
C66
U21 U20 U22 U23 U24 C83 TP9 C98 R11 R12 R16 R15
C84
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
R20
FL5
FL2
FL3
FL7
FL6
C64
F2 R9 R10 R14 R13

FL20
F1
C29
FL19 FL18
C28
FL1
R180 R179 R181 R182 R183

Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
CC
BB
AA
ERROR CONDITION
5 - 63
5-12-7 Receiver Board (GRX)
Figure 5-34 GRX board
Figure 5-35 GRX Block Diagram
Mixer Clock
Pencil Doppler
Probe
(CW mode) Mixer and Band Pass
Filter 12 Bit ADC
I-Data
I
Mixer Clock Programmable
Gain,
64 Mixers and Mux 300/600Hz GFI
Band Pass High Pass Board
Filters Filter,
T/R
Q
(PW mode) Q-Data
Relay
19 dB Gain -23.5 to +24.5 dB Gain
+
Rx[1:192] Transmit / DRX
Receive Board
Transducer Switch
-
Input
Preamp VGA
Rx[1:192]
AnalogTest
Signal Gain
Control
Buffer & Level

Adjustment
Low Pass Time variable gain control

TGC Ctrl Low
FilterPass
Filter
Enable / Power Down

Ctontrol


The analog Receiver boards (GRX) receives the weak ultrasound echo signals from the probes, via the
Relay board and the XD bus on the Front Plane boards. The main task for the GRX boards are to do
Time Variable Amplification on the echo signals.
To support 192 analog receiving channels from the probes, two different GRX boards are used in
VIVID E9/VIVID E7:
64 Channel Receiver board without analog CW Doppler

128 Channel Receiver board with analog CW Doppler
The 128 channel Receiver board also include the needed circuits to demodulate the CW Doppler signals
from a Pedof probe.
NOTE: Some probes, like the 3V and 4V, are pre-beamforming the received signals from the
transducer elements down to 192 channels. These 192 channels are connected to the system
as described above.
A T/R switch on the inputs to the GRX boards protect the input circuits on the boards from the transmit
signals from the GTX boards.
The on board temperature is sensed with either two or three temperature sensors on each board,
depending on the board type.
One sensor is located in the upper part of the board (all receiver boards)
One sensor in located in the lower part of the board (all receiver boards)
One sensor at the Doppler circuits to sense the heat generated by the analog CW Doppler (only on
the 128 Channel Receiver board with analog CW Doppler)
A separate circuit is used to monitor important inboard DC voltages.
Figure 5-36 GRX location

2 pc GRX boards


+6 VDC
-5 VDC
+15 VDC
-15 VDC
5-12-7-4 Outputs
After Time Variable Amplification the analog signals are sent via high level, analog, differential lines
to the DRX board for A/D conversion and beamforming.
When using the Pedof probe, the demodulated Doppler signals are sent to the DRX board for A/D
conversion.
5-12-7-5 Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches

None
5-12-7-6 LEDs on the GRX board

The GRX board has four LEDs:
5-12-7-7 Test points on the GRX board

There are no test points for use by Service.

5-12-8 Front Plane boards (XD BUS)
5-12-8-1 General Description

The two Front Plane boards plug into the rear edge connectors on the Relay Board, the GTX Board(s)
and on the GRX Board(s).
The XD signals, TX and RX signals to and from the probes (via the Relay Board) are routed via these
boards.
Figure 5-37 Front Plane board for GTX w/192 channels (A) and for GTX w/64 channels (B)
A B
Two different Front Plane boards have been used:
The first model (B), supporting up to four TX cards with 64 channels each, was used from the
introduction of VIVID E9.
In August 2011, a new Front Plane board model (A), supporting the TX card with 192 TX channels,
was phased into production. This version is also used for the VIVID E7.

The Front Plane boards plugs into the connectors on the rear of the Relay board, the GTX board(s) and
the GRX board(s).
Table 5-19 Input Signals
INPUT DESCRIPTION CONNECTION FROM

Active Probe via Relay board in Receive
Back scattered echo signals (Receive Mode) and Mode
XD1 - XD256
Transmitter pulses (Transmit Mode)
GTX board(s) in Transmit Mode.

Table 5-20 Output Signals
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION CONNECTION TO

Active Probe via Relay board in
Transmitter pulses (Transmit Mode) and Back scattered
XD1 - XD256 Transmit Mode
echo signals (Receive Mode)
GRX board(s) in Receive Mode.
5-12-8-5 Fuses, Jumpers, Dip-switches and LEDs

None

5-12-9 Digital Receiver board (DRX)

A DRX board provides two main functions to the beamformer:
1.) Conversion of analog RF input signals from 64 channels into streams of digital data, and
2.) Receive signal beamforming. The DRX performs optimal, range dependent focusing and steering
to create multiple receive beams simultaneously.
The DRX board has the capability of beamforming multiple beams or lines (MLAs) simultaneously. 16
lines of receive beamformed data is referred to as MLA16. The DRX2 board is designed in such a way
that it can be built in MLA4 (5301040), MLA8 (5301080), and MLA16 (5301160) configurations.
All digital signal processing and beamforming is performed in ASICs referred to as Nathan.
The analog signals from the GRX are first anti aliasing filtered. After Anti Aliasing Filtering of the signals
in all the receiver channels, the signals are fed to an ADC (Analog/Digital Converter). Each ADC
handles 8 channels. The 8 digital signals from an ADC are then fed to 1/2 Nathan. One Nathan handles
16 channels at the same time. The output is then connected to the next Nathan.
Up to four DRX boards with 64 receiver channels each, can be used to support up to 256 receiver
channels. Today we are using three DRX boards to support 192 receiver channels.
For probes with more than 192 RX channels, some beamforming takes place in the probe, so only 192
RX channels are required on the scanner.

Figure 5-38 DRX location
Up to 4 pc DRX boards
(VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is using
three DRX boards).


+24 VDC.
Other voltages are generated locally on the GRX:
3V3
2V5
2V5_MGT_Tx
1V8 (one for each Nathan column in use)
1V5
The voltages are monitored on-board

64 channels differential analog channels (via FEP Backplane, from GRX)

Clocks (2 x 50MHz, 200 MHz and 156.25 MHz)
5-12-9-6 Outputs
Digital signal data to next DRX. Data from the last DRX card is sent to GFI.

None

5-12-9-8 LEDs on the DRX board - the Nathan field

The Nathan field has an array of LEDs that display Nathan status. There is one green LED per Nathan
as well as one common red LED per Nathan row. The leds are arranged as follows:
Figure 5-39 LEDs for Nathan (beamforming) circuits
Nathan Row 0 Status 3 2 1 0
Nathan Error 3 2 1 0
Each Nathan drives two signals connected to LEDs, a green running light and a red error status light.
When Nathan is receiving TXTRIG signals during scanning, the green lights for Nathans in a column
will turn on in sequence, based on the Nathan soft id value.
When no TXTRIGS are being received, and Nathan is in an idle state, all of the Nathan LEDs will
blink in unison at an interval of approximately 0.5 seconds.
When Nathan is not receiving a system clock, the LED behavior is not defined.
The red error light will turn on when Nathan generates an internal error, and turn off when the error
state is cleared by an access to the error register in Nathan.

5-12-9-9 LEDs on the DRX board - the GDIF status display

Programming status LEDs exist on the left side of the board. They indicate the programming status of
the GDIF FPGA.
GDIF debug LEDs exist near the lower left side of the board. They are used for GDIF status display.
Figure 5-40 GDIF status display
INT
DONE
GDIF LED 0 TOP MGT 1 LINK UP
GDIF LED 2 BOTTOM MGT 1 LINK UP
GDIF LED 8 BOARD LAST IN CHAIN
GDIF LED 9 ERROR CONDITION
5-12-9-10 Test points on the DRX board
Figure 5-41 Test points
TX_TRIG_N
RESET_N
24V
3V6
3V3_ADC
3V3
2V5_MGT_TX
2V5_MGT_RX
2V5
1V5
1V8 COL3
1V8 COL2
1V8 COL1
1V8 COL0

5-12-9-11 Troubleshooting hints

If eight (8) channels are dead: It may be a broken ADC on the DRX.
If sixteen (16) channels are dead: The Nathan interface may be broken.
During power up, the 4 x 4 LEDs (see Figure 5-39 "LEDs for Nathan (beamforming) circuits" on
page 5-72) will be stable ON. If they blink at this time, it indicates an error.
During scanning the 4 x 4 LEDs will blink: LEDs in first column will turn ON, then the LEDs in the
next column are lit, then the LEDs in the third column and at last the LEDs in the fourth row. Next,
the sequence will repeat.
The voltages on the board are monitored by ADM1062 circuits. If a voltage error occurs, the card
will be reset. If this occur during startup, the card will not start at all.
If the card starts, the voltages are OK.
If it is artifacts in the picture (during scanning), you may try to interchange the position for the DRX
boards, and scan again. If the artifacts moves to the left or to the right, it indicates an error on a
DRX. If the artifact dont move, the problem is elsewhere in the signal chain.

5-12-10 Front End Interface Board (GFI)
Figure 5-42 GFI2 board
The GFI is the Front End Processors (FEPs) interface to the Back End Processor (BEP).
Figure 5-43 GFI block diagram
XC2VP40


During boot, various setup parameters are downloaded from the BEPs hard drive, via the PCI Express
bus to the GFI2 board. On the GFI2 board, the parameters are loaded to a high speed, DDR II RAM.
When a scanning mode is selected, or scanning parameters are adjusted, the GFI board receives setup
parameters from the BEP and pass these on to the FE boards. The GFI also, based on some of these
parameters, control some front end signals directly.
The digitized and beamformed ultrasound data, received from the DRX boards, are further processed
on the GFI board before the result is sent to the BEP for use in the display system.
TMS320C6455
The TMS320C6455 is a digital signal processor (DSP). It incorporates a PCI interface and two memory
ports (DDR-II SDRAM interface and EMIF (external memory interface)). The DSP operates at 1 GHz,
the EMIF operates at 133MHz, the DDR-II SDRAM at 200 MHz and the PCI bus operates at 66 MHz.
PCI to PCI-Express bridge
The PCI to PCI-Express bridge is the interface between the 255 MHz PCI bus to/from the DSP and the
PCI-Express connection to/from the BEP.
CedSdem XC4VSX35
The CedSdem XC4VSX35 is a Field-Programmable gate array (FPGA). It is connected to the DSPs
External Memory Interface (EMIF) via a 64 bit bus running on 133MHz and is communicating with:
GFEINTF XC2VP40 (Front End Interface circuit)

QDR2 TGC RAM (Storing coefficients for the digital gain and frequency control used for digital
signal amplification and demodulation)
GFEINTF XC2VP40
The GFEINTF XC2VP40 (Front End Interface) is used to provide control data to the rest of the FE and
receive data back from the FE.
FE Cache SDR 133 MHz: Used to store setup data for FE.
Doppler Audio: Setup parameters for Doppler.
ATGC DAC: Digital to analog converter for the Time Gain Control (TGC) used by the GRX boards.
TGEN DAC:
TEE PROBE: Signals to control the TEE probe. Signals from the switches on the TEE probe.
ADC I/F:
Probe Mux/ TX Power/ FE Control/ Timers SAP Control
I2C controller used for monitoring temperatures and voltages throughout the front end. The I2C
controller is also used to read VPD proms on the other front end boards.
Power DC/DC
The input voltage (24 VDC) is converted to the needed on-board voltages.
JTAG CONTROL
JTAG boundary scan is used during production control of the board.
4D Controller Module
The 4D Controller Module isnt used by the current versions of VIVID E9/VIVID E7.


The GFI2 board is plugged into the Back Plane as the right most board in the FE rack.
Figure 5-44 GFI2 location
GFI2 BOARD

+24 DC (from Main LV Power via FEP Backplane)
+/- 15 VDC
+/- 6VA DC
BEP5V
Other needed voltages are generated locally on the GFI.
5-12-10-4 Clocks
These clocks are generated on the board:
200 MHz for on board (GFI) use

200/50 MHz (for the RX board)
200 MHz for the RX board

TS_LEVEL_OK (indicates level stable and ready for transmit)
TS_OK (indicates voltages, currents, power OK)

5-12-10-6 Outputs
PCI Express bus to BEP (connector J14 on the card)
STA bus
Other Control signals like TXTRIG etc.

None
5-12-10-8 LEDs on the GFI board
Table 5-21 LEDs on the GFI board
LED NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION NORMAL OPERATION START UP ERROR CONDITION

DS1 GREEN 3V3 STATUS LIT
DS4 GREEN CORE DSP STATUS LIT
DS6 GREEN DRX1 LIT IF DRX 1 IS MISSING

DARK IF THE FPGAs ON
THE BOARDS HAVE NOT
DARK BEFORE STARTUP,
DS10 GREEN GTX1 LIT IF GTX 1 IS MISSING BEEN SUCCESSFULLY
PROGRAMMED.
DS11 GREEN GTX2 LIT IF GTX 2 IS MISSING
DS14 GREEN GFI-DONE
DS15 GREEN VDD_3V3 LIT
DS16 GREEN VDD_1V5 LIT
DS17 GREEN VDA_3V3 LIT
DS18 GREEN VDA_1V5 LIT
DS19 GREEN SD_DEBUG 0
DS22 GREEN GFE_DEBUG 0
5-12-10-9 Test points on the GFI board

There are no test points for use by Service.

5-12-11 FEP Backplane
Figure 5-45 FEP Backplane
4.
1.
2.
3.
Front side of the FEP Backplane Rear side of the FEP Backplane
1. CW Doppler Connector 2. Power Connectors
2. Power Connectors (2x) 4. FEP Backplane Connector
3. Fan Connector
The front side of the FEP Backplane has connectors for the Front End boards (RELAY, GRX, GTX, DRX
and GFI), the Main Power Supply, the BEP I/O Board, the Fan Connector and a connector for the CW
probe signals.
On the rear side of the FEP Backplane, there is the FEP Backplane Connector with BSCAN signals,
GFI Audio, +5V (from GFI) and I2C signals from the FEP Backplane.
Voltages are distributed from the Main Power Supply to the different boards.
Control signals and Clocks are distributed from the GFI board to the other boards.
Low amplitude analog signals from GRX board to DRX board.
MLA data signals are routed from DRX board to GFI board.
The BSCAN signals, GFI Audio, +5V (from GFI) and I2C signals are routed to the BEP and/or BEP
I/O Board, depending on the BEP model in use.
The only active electronics on the FEP Backplane is a I2C memory device for the Board Info and a
voltage regulator for the power supply to the I2C memory.
In addition, there are termination resistors and power supply bypass capacitors.

5-12-11-2 Location in the unit

The FEP Backplane is attached to the rear side of the Front End Card Rack.
Figure 5-46 FEP Backplane location
FEP BACKPLANE

See: Section 5-14 "Power distribution" on page 5-111.

See description for each FE board.
5-12-11-5 Control signals

5-12-11-6 Outputs
5-12-11-7 Fuses
NONE.
5-12-11-8 Jumpers
NONE.
5-12-11-9 DIP-switches
NONE
5-12-11-10 Other switches

NONE.

Section 5-13
The BEP and its sub-modules acts as the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s central processor.
This chapter includes descriptions for the vital BEP modules.

5-13-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
5-13-4 Signal Flow and Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
5-13-5 Location of the Back End Processor (BEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5-13-6 CPU/Back End Processor (BEP) - block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5-13-7 BEP description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5-13-8 BEP6 Face, Top and Rear connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5-13-9 BEP5 Face and Top connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5-13-10 Input DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5-13-11 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5-13-12 Bi-directional signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5-13-13 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5-13-14 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5-13-15 BEP Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
5-13-16 IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5-13-17 Graphics Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5-13-18 Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
5-13-3 Introduction
The Back End Processor is a computer, designed specially for the use in the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
ultrasound scanners made by GE.
The following BEP models have been used for VIVID E9/VIVID E7:
BEP6 was introduced in manufacturing in October 2012.

The BEP6 is also called BEPY3. The BEP6 is used both for the VIVID E9 and the VIVID E7.
BEP5 was introduced at the introduction of VIVID E9 and was phased out of manufacturing in
October-November 2012.
- BEP5 has also been called BEPY1 or BEPY2, depending on the installed System Software
version.
5-13-4 Signal Flow and Processing

The Back End Processor receives the data from the Front End electronics, stores it in memory, performs
scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the systems monitors.
Back End Processor software is also processing the Color Flow, Doppler, M-Mode data and the 3D/4D
data.
5 - 82 Section 5-13 - Back End Processor (BEP)

5-13-5 Location of the Back End Processor (BEP)

The BEP is located on the left side, inside the scanner, see Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-47 Back End Processor
THE BEP IS LOCATED BEHIND

THIS (LEFT SIDE) COVER

5-13-6 CPU/Back End Processor (BEP) - block diagram

The wiring is somewhat different between the BEP5 and the BEP6, as illustrated in:
Figure 5-48 - BEP6 block diagram

Figure 5-49 - BEP5 block diagram
Figure 5-48 BEP6 block diagram
FROM
FEP BACKPLANE CONNECTOR MAIN PWR SUPPLY
TO GFI
HDD
CONTROL SIGNAL TO
MAIN PWR SUPPLY
AUDIO L
DVI Video, Audio, 2xUSB, 48V, Power ON/OFF switch, Safety GND, AUDIO R
Outer Boss Brake/Motor-Brake Commands
DVI-I
BEP6
FROM MAIN DVR GRAPHICS
USB POWER
PWR SUPPLY (OPTION) ADAPTER LED
IO BOARD BOARD
USB FRONT LED
PANEL
10/100/1000MbT LED
BW USB
PRINTER
IPASS2
PCIE x1
POWER AUX
WOOFER PATIENT
DVD DRIVE SATA PHONO
IO
(DVR OPTION) USB
ECG
DVD DRIVE SATA

MOTHERBOARD
BEP6 w/4D and DVR
Figure 5-49 BEP5 block diagram
TO FEP BACKPLANE AND TO GFI
VOLTAGE FROM POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL SIGNAL TO POWER SUPPLY LED
LED
DVI Video, Audio, 2xUSB, 48V, Power ON/OFF LED
switch, Safety GND, Outer Boss Brake/Motor-
Brake Commands
VOLTAGE FROM POWER SUPPLY
NOTE:
ON VIVID E9 WITHOUT DVR, THE SHORT CABLE BETWEEN THE
GRAPHICS BOARD AND THE DVR IS MISSING, AND THE DVI OUT
CABLE FOR THE IO BOARD IS CONNECTED TO THE VIDEO CARD.

5-13-7 BEP description
5-13-7-1 The EMC Enclosure House

A power supply for local voltages (see: 5-13-15 "BEP Power Supply" on page 5-99.)
A motherboard with RAM, a processor and PCI connectors for extension cards
An I/O board on the rear of the BEP (see: 5-13-16 "IO Board" on page 5-105.)
5-13-7-2 Outside the EMC Enclosure House

Front Panel with status lights (LEDs) for hard disk activity and network speed (upper LED) and
network activity (lower LED).
Figure 5-50 Front Panel
Patient I/O with AUX, Phono and ECG connectors.

For description, see: 5-16-3 "Patient I/O (Physio)" on page 5-124.
BEP I/O Board.
For information, see: 5-16-5 "BEP5 I/O Board" on page 5-130.

5-13-7-3 Top view comparison BEP5 - BEP6
Figure 5-51 Top view comparison BEP5 - BEP6
BEP5 BEP6

5-13-8 BEP6 Face, Top and Rear connections
Table 5-22 BEP6 Face connections
ITEM DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION
1. J21 - Upper LCD Video Out (Main LCD Video)
2. J3 - SA1 DVD (SATA to DVD)
3. J2 - SA2 SPARE (SATA to DVD)
4. J22 - A/V OUT (OP Console)

Pins of note:
5: PWR_SW
6: 5V_STDBY 1
9-13: 48V
17, 22-25: GND
18: PWR_LED_P
21: PWR_LED_N
2
5. Test Connector (Factory Test)
Pins of note:
3
5, 13, 23: Ground
3: 24V
4: 48V
8: 12V 4
9: 5V
10: AC_FAIL_N
11: 3.3V 5
12: 5V_STDBY
16: Not Used on Vivid E9
24: PWR_SW
6
25: PSON_N
7
6. J100 - OP Panel Video (USB)
8
7. J7 - OP Panel Buttons (USB)
9
8. J28 - XYZ Motor (USB)
10
9. J27 - Spare (USB)
11
10. J26 BW Printer (USB)
12
11. J25 - Spare (USB)
13
12. J4 - Main PS USB (USB)
13. J14 - Spare (USB) 14

14. J29 - Power (to peripherals) 15
Pinout: 1, 2 - GND
16
3,5 - 12V
4,6 - 5V
15. J30- Power (to peripherals)

1, 2 - GND
3,5 - 12V
4,6 - 5V
16. J33 Center (Center Speaker / Sub-woofer)

5-13-8 BEP6 Face, Top and Rear connections (contd)
Table 5-23 BEP6 Top connections
1. J1 - Main PS 48V, 5V In
2. J5 - Front End Rack (PCIe to GFI)

2
Table 5-24 BEP6 Rear connections
1. J40 - Customer USB
2. J41 - Customer USB 1 2 3 4
3. J46 - LAN 10/100/1000 Mbit
4. J44 - Customer Video Out
5. J43 - Customer Audio
5 6
6. J42 - Customer Audio

5-13-9 BEP5 Face and Top connections

Please refer to the illustrations.
Figure 5-52 BEP5 Face connections
(Sub-woofer)
Figure 5-53 BEP5 Top connections
USB to
Main PS
PCI Express SATA to DVD

to GFI
Main PS
(48VDC, 5VSB,
Power OK)

5-13-9-1 BEP6 interior
Figure 5-54 BEP6 interior

5-13-9-2 USB distribution

USB is used to communicate with, and/or control, many functions and devices in the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7.
The illustration below shows how the USB signals are distributed in BEP6.
Figure 5-55 USB distribution in BEP6
The illustration below shows how the USB signals are distributed in BEP5.
Figure 5-56 USB distribution in BEP5

5-13-9-3 SATA distribution - BEP6
Figure 5-57 BEP6 - SATA distribution
5-13-9-4 Use of Expansion Slots on BEP6 Motherboard

The Motherboard is a custom board designed for GEHC.
2GB RAM
Intel CPU i3-540
has Temperature, Voltage, and Fan Speed monitoring.
Use of Expansion Slots, listed from the rightmost slot:
BEP 6.0 Power Board Assembly

Graphics Adapter (Video Card)
DVR Board (Optional)
The I/O Board is plugged into a double slot on the left side of the notherboard.

5-13-9-5 Use of Expansion Slots on BEP5 Motherboard

The Motherboard is a custom board designed for GEHC.
Based on Intels BTX Form Factor

2GB RAM
Intel Core2 Duo E6400 Processor
has Temperature, Voltage, and Fan Speed monitoring.
Use of Expansion Slots, listed from the rightmost slot:
DVR Board (Optional)

Graphics Adapter (Video Card)
5-13-9-6 BIOS Beep Codes

BIOS uses beeps of varying duration. A long beep will typically last for 2 seconds while a short beep will
last only 1 second. BIOS also uses beeps of different frequency to indicate critical errors. If BIOS detects
that the CPU is overheating it may play a high pitched repeating beep while the computer is running.
Table 5-25 BEP Beep Codes
Beep Code Meaning Possible Cause
1 Long, 2 Short Video adapter failure Bad video adapter
Repeating (Endless loop) Memory error Bad memory or bad connection
1 Long, 3 Short Video adapter failure Bad video adapter or memory
High freq. beeps (while running) CPU is overheating CPU fan failure
Repeating High, Low beeps CPU failure Bad processor
5-13-10 Input DC Voltages

NOTE: The BEP is not connected to AC power.
The BEP gets it power supply via the BEP Power Supply. (See: 5-13-15 - BEP Power Supply.)

5-13-11 Input Signals

BEP6:
Audio signal path: GFI > FEP Backplane > BEP6 MBD > [a and b]
a: > IO Board > Audio Out
b: > DVR
Figure 5-58 Audio map - BEP6
BEP5:
Audio signal path: GFI > FEP Backplane > BEP > IO Board > Audio Out / BEP Motherboard)

5-13-12 Bi-directional signals

BEP6:
Table 5-26 BEP6 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
IPASS2 (BEP MBD) > Cable N (inside

PCIe PCI Express BEP) > J5 (BEP) > PCI Express Cable >
GFI
BEP MBD > IO > J46 (Rear Panel)

Network 10/100/1000 Mbit (Routed via printed circuits on the
cards.No cables are used.)
BEP5:
Table 5-27 BEP5 Bi-directional Signals

J3 (BEP Motherboard) > Cable 4 (inside
PCIe PCI Express BEP) > J5 (BEP) > PCI Express Cable >
GFI
Card Rack (FEP) Motherboard >
BSCAN Boundary Scan (GTX/DRX/GFI)
Cable N > I/O Board > USB
BEP Motherboard > Cable 12 > J46

Network 10/100/1000 Mbit (Rear Panel)
NOTE: For other signals on the Rear Panel, see: 5-13-16 "IO Board" on page 5-105.

5-13-13 Outputs
Table 5-28 Output Signals

PSON_N BEP POWER SUPPLY > Power Cable
DVI Out Digital Video Interface Out
AUDIO OUT (L) Left channel
AUDIO OUT (R) Right channel

AUDIO OUT (C) Centre (Bass) channel
5-13-14 LEDs
5-13-14-1 LEDs on the BEP5/BEP6 Front
Figure 5-59 Front Panel
Table 5-29 LEDs on the BEPs front
ITEM LED NAME DESCRIPTION
HD ACTIVITY
1 ACT LED
Blinks when the Hard Disk drive is active
NETWORK SPEED
10MBit: No Light
2 SPD LED
100 MBit: Amber Light
1000 Mbit: Green Light
NETWORK ACTIVITY
3 ACT LED
Lit (green)

5-13-14-2 LEDs on the BEP6s Side Cover
Table 5-30 LEDs on the BEP6s Side Cover
The LEDs for the BEP6s Power Supply can be viewed without
removing the BEP6s Front Cover
Description of the LEDs (listed from the top):

ATX POWER OK
POWER ON
+3.3V
+5.5V STBY
+28V
+5V
POWER OK
+48V
+12V

5-13-14-3 LEDs on the BEP5s face
Figure 5-60 LEDs on the BEP5s face
Table 5-31 LEDs below DVI connector
LED NAME DESCRIPTION ERROR Conditions

Green LED indicates that there is video output
DVI IN Blinking Green/Amber or OFF
from the Graphic Card to the BEP IO
Hub3 OK/Error Green LED means OK Blinking Green/Amber or OFF
Hub2 OK/Error Green LED means OK Blinking Green/Amber or OFF
MC OK/Error Green LED means USB micro controller is OK Blinking Green/Amber or OFF
Table 5-32 LEDs at the USB connectors
LED NAME OK LED ERROR LED

J7 USB LEDs Lit green Blinking Green/Amber or OFF


5-13-15 BEP Power Supply
5-13-15-1 Description
Three different BEP Power Supplies have been used, depending on the BEP model:
BEP6.0 Power Board Assembly

BEP Power Supply, VIVID E9 (for the latest BEP5 models)
GE Custom Power Supply Board (for the first BEP5 models)
NOTE: The BEP Power Supply does not handle AC voltages.
The BEP Power Supply receives its input DC voltage from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Main Power Supply.
Dedicated control signals, are used for controlling the BEP Power Supply.
5-13-15-2 BEP6 Power Board Assembly Block Diagram
Table 5-33 BEP6 Power Supply Block Diagram
This connector is not used in the VIVID E9/

1.
VIVID E7.
2
PCN 2
+48 VDC from Main Power Supply > POWER
2. CABLE BEP 48V (GA200715) > connector J1
(on top of BEP6) > PCN 2.
Control signals: ACFAIL and 5V STBY.
PCN 3
This plug fits into the connector CN PWR2 on the
BEP6s motherboard.
3.
+12 VDC to the BEP6 motherboard.
+ 5VDC to the BEP6 motherboard.
+3.3VDC to the BEP6 motherboard.
PCN 4 4
This plug fits into the connector CN PWR1 on the
4. BEP6s motherboard.
+48 VDC to the BEP6 motherboard.
Control signals: ACFAIL, 5V STBY and 5vDUAL

5-13-15-3 BEP5 Power Supply Block Diagram
Figure 5-61 BEP5 Power Supply Block Diagram

MAIN POWER SUPPLY
HDD (SATA POWER)
TO
BEP MOTHERBOARD
TO PATIENT I/O
TO I/O BOARD
5-13-15-4 Location in the BEP6

The BEP6 Power Supply Card is located inside the BEP6, at the right-hand side (when opening the
BEP).
Figure 5-62 BEP6 Power Supply Card location
BEP6 POWER SUPPLY CARD

5-13-15-5 Location in the BEP5

The BEP Power Supply is located inside, at the top of the BEP5.
Figure 5-63 BEP5 Power Supply Location
BEP5 POWER SUPPLY
5-13-15-6 Input Voltage (BEP6 / BEP5)

+48 VDC from the Main Power Supply.
5-13-15-7 Input Signals (BEP6 / BEP5)

48V_OK from Main Power Supply
5-13-15-8 Bi-directional Signals

None.

5-13-15-9 Output Voltages

+48V
+12V
+5V
+3.3V
+5Vstby
5-13-15-10 DC Voltages
Table 5-34 DC Input Voltages
INPUT DESCRIPTION CONNECTED TO

+5Vstb Standby voltage Main Power Supply > BEP Power
+48 VDC Power Supply Supply > BEP Motherboard / IO Board
GND Electrical Ground DC Power Supply
Table 5-35 Input Signals

PS_ON#
Indicates that 48V from Main Power Supply is up and Main Power Supply > Power Cable - BEP 48V
48V_OK
stable. BEP J1 > BEP Power Supply
AC_FAIL#
AUDIO
GFI Audio (Doppler audio) See: 5-13-11 "Input Signals" on page 5-94.
(ON BEP6)
GFI > FEP BACKPLANE CONNECTOR >

BEP TO CARDRACK CABLE > J36 (I/O
AUDIO Board) > J42 (IO Board) / J43 (IO Board) /J35
(ON BEP5) GFI Audio (Doppler audio)
(IO Board) > Motherboard Harness > DVR
Board (Audio in) / BEP Motherboard (CN18
(Audio In))
5-13-15-12 LEDs on BEP6 Power Supply

Nine LEDs on the BEP6 Power Supply can be viewed through holes in the BEP6 Front Cover.
For description of the LEDs, refer to the label on the BEP6s Front Cover or to:
5-13-14-2 "LEDs on the BEP6s Side Cover" on page 5-97.

5-13-15-13 LEDs on BEP5 Power Supply

Several LEDs are viewable through cut-outs in the BEP Power supply.
Figure 5-64 LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Table 5-36 LEDs
POSITION LED POWER OFF POWER ON COMMENTS
1. PWR OK OFF LIT
2. -12V OFF LIT
3. 3.3V OFF LIT
4. 5V OFF LIT
5. 12V-2 OFF LIT
6. 12V-1 OFF LIT
7. 48V OK OFF LIT
8. 48V IN OFF LIT
9. FPO OFF OFF
10. PSON OFF LIT
11. 5Vstdby LIT LIT

5-13-15-14 Test Points on BEP5 Power Supply

Several Test Points are available through cut-outs in the BEP Power supply.
NOTICE Be careful so you dont short-circuit the signals when placing the test probe(s).
Figure 5-65 Test Points on BEP5 Power Supply
Table 5-37 Test Points
Test Point COMMENTS

48V
AGND Analog Ground

ACC3V3
SDA
ND SCL
PSON
PWR OK
-12V
3.3V
5V
12V-2
12V-1
48V OK
PGND Power Ground

48V IN
FPO
PSON
5Vstdby

5-13-16 IO Board
5-13-16-1 Content in this section

5-13-16-2General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5-13-16-3Location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5-13-16-4Input DC voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5-13-16-5Signals on BEP6 IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
5-13-16-6Signals on BEP5 IO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
5-13-16-7LEDs on the BEP5 Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

Different I/O Boards are used for BEP6 and BEP5:
The BEP6 I/O Board has two connectors for connection to the BEP6 Motherboard.
The BEP5 I/O Board has one connector for connection to the BEP5 Motherboard.
The IO Board is interfaceing between the:
BEP and the connectors on the rear side of VIVID E9 (video/audio/USB)

BEP and the Top Console
BEP and the internal printer
Audio for the speakers, the rear plugs and the DVR
(BEP5 I/O ONLY) Boundary Scan from the BEP to boards in the Front End Card Rack
5-13-16-3 Location in the unit

At the rear of the BEP with the Rear panel available at the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

Internal in BEP from the BEP Power Supply.

5-13-16-5 Signals on BEP6 IO Board
Table 5-38 Signals on BEP6 IO Board
4D w/ DVR:
Graphics Adapter > Cable 10 > DVR > Cable 9 >
CN DV12 > IO Board
4D wo/ DVR:
Graphics Adapter > Cable 9 > CN DV12 > IO Board
DVI Out Digital Video Interface Out
2D w/ DVR:
CN DV11 > Cable 9 > DVR > Cable 9 > CN DV12 >
IO Board
2D wo/ DVR:
CN DV11 > Cable 8 > CN DV12 > IO Board
GFI > FEP Backplane > Connector A > IPASS2 > CN IO 1 >
AUDIO OUT (L) Left audio channel IO Board > [a, b, c]
a: > CN IO 1 > CN AUDIO1 > [d, e]
d (w/ DVR): > DVR
AUDIO OUT (R) Right audio channel e (wo/ DVR): Not Connected
b: > J42/J43 (Rear of VIVID E9/VIVID E7)
c: > CODEC > Audio Amp > [f, g]
f > J22 > Cable D1 > L and R speakers
AUDIO OUT (C) Centre (woofer) audio channel g > J33 > Cable P > woofer (center speaker)
Ref.: Figure 5-58 "Audio map - BEP6" on page 5-94.
USB Refer to:

Figure 5-55 "USB distribution in BEP6" on page 5-91.
Refer to:
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment bus
Figure 5-57 "BEP6 - SATA distribution" on page 5-92.

5-13-16-6 Signals on BEP5 IO Board
Table 5-39 Signals on BEP5 IO Board

Digital Video Card > Cable 11 > DVR > Cable 10 > IO Board
DVI Out Digital Video Interface Out or:
Digital Video Card > Cable 10 > IO Board
AUDIO OUT (L) Left audio channel FEP > Cable N > IO Board
AUDIO OUT (R) Right audio channel FEP > Cable N > IO Board
AUDIO OUT (C) Centre (Bass) audio channel FEP > Cable N > IO Board > Cable P
BEP MBD CN4 > Front Panel Harness > FRONT PANEL
USB1 EXT Front 1
MODULE
BEP MBD CN4 > Front Panel Harness > FRONT PANEL
USB2 EXT Front 2
MODULE
BEP MBD CN4 > BEP MBD CN4 > Front Panel Harness >
USB3 Main Power Supply J4 (BEP) > USB Cable - Main Power Supply > MAIN
POWER SUPPLY
USB4 Patient I/O BEP MBD CN4 > Front Panel Harness > Patient IO
BEP MBD CN5 > Motherboard Harness > J35 (I/O Board) >
USB5 Touch Panel Video
MAIN CABLE > J22 (OP) Touch Panel
USB6 OP HUB
MAIN CABLE > J21 (OP) > USB HUB inside OP
USB7 BEP MBD CN5 > Motherboard Harness > J35 (I/O Board) >
USB8 I/O HUB 1
BEP > GFI
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment bus BEP MOTHERBOARD > HDD
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment bus NOT USED
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment bus BEP MOTHERBOARD > DVR Drive
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment bus BEP MOTHERBOARD > DVD Drive
PSON_N BEP POWER SUPPLY > Power Cable

5-13-16-7 LEDs on the BEP5 Rear Panel
Figure 5-66 LEDs on the BEP5 Rear Panel
L R
5180173 rev1
Two LEDs are located to the right for each USB connector.
The upper LED next to a USB connector: is USB connected and in use: Lit (green).
The lower LED next to a USB connector is USB activity: Lit (green).
NOTE: The BEP6 Rear Panel doesnt have any LEDs.

5-13-17 Graphics Adapter
5-13-17-1 General Description

The Graphics Adapter converts the display data to video signals for the LCD (Main) screen, for the LCD/
Touch screen and for the external video output on the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5-13-17-2 Software Requirements
Table 5-40 Software requirements
Application
Software
Graphics Adapter Requirement Comments
NVIDIA Quadro 410 Graphics Adapter (BT12) - BEP6 v112.0.7 and higher Used for 4D option
Nvidia Quadro 2000D (BT12) - BEP5 v112.0.0 and higher Used for 4D option
NVIDIA Quadro FX 1800 Graphics Adapter (BT11) -

v108.0.0 and higher Used for 4D option
BEP5
Intel HD Graphics and Intel Graphics Media v112.0.7 and higher Used if 4D not installed
Accelerator - BEP6
PROLINK ADD card for PCI Express - BEP5 v110.0.0 and higher Used if 4D not installed
ATI FireGL V7200 (BT09) - BEP5 v108.0.0 and higher 4D
5-13-17-3 Other Requirements

None

The Graphics Adapter is located in the PCI Express slot (PCI Express x16) inside the BEP cabinet.

Graphics data from the BEP (via the BEPs motherboard).

DVI to the LCD screen (main screen).
Video to the external output on the rear of VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5-13-17-7 Fuses
None.
5-13-17-8 LEDs
None
5-13-17-9 Dip Switches

None

5-13-18 Internal Storage Devices

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has these internal storage devices:
SATA (Serial ATA) Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet (size: 160 GB,
or more)
CD/DVD drive available from front of VIVID E9/VIVID E7. ONLY CD-R discs and DVD-R recordable
discs are supported.
The optional DVR uses DVD+RW discs.
5-13-18-1 Hard Disk Partitions

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Hard Disk is divided into four partitions plus a boot partition. The boot
partition is hidden for Windows, but can be seen via InSite.
Table 5-41 "Use of the Partitions" on page 5-110 describes the drive letter and the use of the partitions.
Table 5-41 Use of the Partitions
DRIVE LETTER LABEL SIZE COMMENTS
BOOT partition (GRUB)

- BOOT 0.05 GB Hidden in Windows, but available
via InSite
C: SYSTEM 15 GB System and program files
D: USER 10 GB User files and swap files
E: ARCHIVE REMAINING Database files and images
F: REPOSIT 8 GB Repository

Section 5-14
Power distribution
The power distribution within the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is described in this section.

5-14-3 Main Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
5-14-4 Power Up Sequence Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
5-14-5 Power Down Sequence description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
5-14-3 Main Power Supply

The Main Power Supplys main task is to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on-site Mains Power
System and to supply the various internal subsystems with AC or DC power.
Figure 5-67 Main Power Supply Principle
90-250Vac Line Filter

Rectifier
IEC60601-1
Inrush Current Isolation
Limiter
113 400 V Stand By + 5Vstb (12W)
110V
Inverter 120VA
SELV outputs (<60Vdc)
400V
PFC 24V + 24V
+ 48V
+ 48V
+ 15V
48V + 12V
+ 6V
- 48V
15V
6V
+/- 48V 0-140V

MLP 0-140V
130W
100 V
PMX 8W
0 95V
TLP 0 95V
2X20W


Power from the wall outlet (100 VAC to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz) is connected to the Main Power Supply.
Figure 5-68 Main Power Supply block diagram

0$,132:(56833/<
90 - 250 VAC 50/60 Hz MAINS
32:(5
)$&725
&255(&7,21
2 x 115 VAC 72

35,17(56 ,62/$7,21
$1'
9$& '&+($'
,19(57(5
&21752/
USB FROM BEP
+48 VDC
TO MOTOR/BRAKE CONTROL '&'&
DC VOLTGES -> FEPS MOTHERBOARD -> FEPS BOARDS
&219(57(56
'02725 TX POWER TO FEP MOTHERBOARD TO RELAY CARD

&175/
+%5,'*(
TO
BEP POWER SUPPLY
The Main Power Supply delivers the needed voltages to the rest of the system:
Internal Peripherals (115 VAC)

Front End Rack (DC power with several voltages)
- +24 VDC
- +/- 15 VDC
- +11 VDC
- +/-6V VDC
Front End Rack (TXPSV1 and TXPSV2 for the transmitters)
Front End Rack (PMXVOUT for the probe channel multiplexers)
Back End Processor (48 VDC)
Operator Panel, LCD, XYZ motors (48 VDC)
5 - 112 Section 5-14 - Power distribution


The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
wall outlet.
Figure 5-69 Main Power Supply
Main Power Supply
5-14-3-2 Temperature Control

The Main Power Supply is equipped with an internal fan with variable speed for temperature control.
Both the temperature of the air entering the power supply and leaving the power supply are measured.
The fan is controlled by software.
5-14-3-3 Input
Mains Power, 100 VAC to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Figure 5-70 L1 - Mains Inlet connector


USB bus
Table 5-42 USB connector
DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
Originates on the BEP.

The USB is used to set the power supply to the correct
transmit (XD) voltages.
5-14-3-5 Outputs
Table 5-43 Power outputs sheet 1 of 2
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
115 VAC OUT ON TWO CONNECTORS
P2 PERIPHERALS (B/W PRINTER)
Card Rack Connector
FRONT END PROCESSOR

P3 - The TSON_STRB signal is a watchdog for the
Transmit Signal (TS).
Card Rack Connector
FRONT END PROCESSOR
P4
EXT_SYNC is a 200kHz clock coming from the
GFI board.

Table 5-43 Power outputs (contd) sheet 2 of 2
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
+48 VDC
BACK END PROCESSOR AND MOTOR

POWER
P5 - The 48V_OK indicates that the 48 VDC

measured on the BEP, is OK.
- The +5Vstb is always ON, and is connected to
the BEPs motherboard and to the light in the ON/
OFF button on the Operator Panel.
P6 See: Table 5-42 "USB connector" on page 5-114. BACK END PROCESSOR
P7 GND STUD GROUND STUD
5-14-3-6 Fuses
Ceramic body fuses inside the power supply. (Only to be replaced by the Main Power Supply
manufacturer.)
Fuses data:
15 A Fast Acting type
5-14-3-7 Current limiter, over-voltage protection and temperature watch-dog

A current limiter will switch off the power if any of the outputs are overloaded.
Over-voltage Protection is provided for these voltages:
- + 3.3 V
- + 5 Vd
- +/- 5 Va
- +/- 15 Va
Voltage will be turned off if the temperature grows too high (temperature watch-dog).
5-14-3-8 Jumpers
None.
5-14-3-9 DIP-Switches
None.
5-14-3-10 LEDs
There are no LEDs on the Main Power Supply.

5-14-4 Power Up Sequence Description
5-14-4-1 Overview
The Power Up Sequence can be divided in the following steps:
1.) Connect the mains power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and switch AC Breaker to ON position.
2.) Press the ON button on the Operator Panel.
3.) BEP (and system) power-up.
5-14-4-2 AC Breaker to ON position

Connect the mains power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and switch AC Breaker to ON position:
Figure 5-71 AC Breaker turned ON
Main Power Supply USB USB FROM BEP
uP AC_FAIL_N
FILTER / 48V_OK
DC
100 - 230 VAC INRUSH LIMIT PSON_N
ECT_SYNC
DC/DC
AC POWER IEC SHIELD
CONVERTERS
BREAKER +5V_STB
DC BEP
SINEWAVE
GENERATOR
115 VAC +48V TX1 TX2
B/W
PRINTER BEP & FEP +/-100V (2x)
MOTOR
CONTROLLER
FEP +24V, +/-15V, +11V, +/-6V
The fans inside the Main Power Supply starts on a high speed and then settle to a lower speed.
+5V_STB (+5V DC Standby) power to BEP is turned on. It also gives power to the ON/OFF switch
on the OP so it can be used.

5-14-4-2 AC Breaker to ON position (contd)

The 5Vstdby LED is lit (green).
Figure 5-72 LEDs on BEP6 Power Supply (standby)
Figure 5-73 LEDs on BEP5 Power Supply (standby)
The ON/OFF switch on the OP is lit (amber color).

One green LED (LED-1) on the BEPs motherboard is lit.

5-14-4-3 The ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel has been pressed
When the ON/OFF switch is depressed, the BEP power is delivered to the different parts of the system
so it can start the boot sequence:
Figure 5-74 ON has been depressed
USB USB FROM BEP

Main Power Supply
uP AC_FAIL_N
FILTER / 48V_OK
DC
100 - 230 VAC INRUSH LIMIT PSON_N
FROM BEP, via I/O
ECT_SYNC
DC/DC
AC POWER IEC SHEELD
CONVERTERS
BREAKER +5V_STB
DC BEP
SINEWAVE
GENERATOR
115 VAC +48V TX1 TX2
B/W
PRINTER BEP & FEP +/-100V (2x)
MOTOR
CONTROLLER
FEP +24V, +/-15V, +11V, +/-6V
The fans below the Front End Card Rack starts.

The lights in the alphanumeric keyboard and in the Lower OP panel are turned on.
AC Power to the B/W printer is turned on.

5-14-4-3 The ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel has been pressed (contd)
Power to the BEP is turned on, so it can start to boot.
Figure 5-75 LEDs on BEP6 Power Supply (powered)
Figure 5-76 LEDs on BEP5 Power Supply (powered)
Power to the Front End rack (FEP) is turned on and the LEDs on the cards in the Front End are lit
(or start blinking). Please ref. the LED descriptions for each card.

5-14-4-4 Power On Sequence (button push), detailed sequence

1.) BEP, powered by 5Vstb, detects contact of Power-On button press.
2.) BEP sends PSON_N low to main power unit. (The Main Power Unit is the card with the uP
(Microprocessor) inside the Main Power Supply).
3.) Main power unit powers up +48V.
4.) Main power unit powers up +24V, 15V, 6V, +11V.
5.) Main Power unit provides 48V_OK as soon as +48V is within specification.
6.) BEP Power Supply Provides PC voltages from +48V.
7.) BEP enumerates PCI. (Note that GFI DSP and PCI Express bridge must be powered before BEP
enumerates PCI).
8.) BEP application software controls +24V, 15V, 6V, +11V via USB.
9.) BEP application software controls TSV1and TSV2 via USB.
10.)Main Power unit provides TS_OK and TS_LEVEL_OK output signals to GFI.
5-14-4-5 BEP Power-up

As soon as the BEP Power Supply gets power from the Main Power Supply, the different voltages
needed for the BEP are turned on and the BEP starts to boot:
1.) The BIOS is loaded.

2.) If present, the DVD drive is checked for a bootable disc. If the drive is empty, it continues (see next
step.)
3.) The USB ports are scanned for bootable media (UFD). If a UFD is found, the BEP starts to boot
from the UFD. If no bootable removal media was found, the BEP continuse (see next step.)
4.) If no bootable removal media was found, the BEP starts to load the current System Software from
the HDD and then the current Application Software.
5.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen, indicating
that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that no probe has
been connected.

5-14-5 Power Down Sequence description
5-14-5-1 Overview
There are three possible scenarios for Power Down of the unit:
Power Down
Forced Power Down
Power Loss
Each of the scenarios are described below.
5-14-5-2 Power Down

Press the ON/OFF button (for a short time)
1.) BEP detects the contact of Power (ON/OFF) switch.

2.) PSON_N goes high. This trigs the Main Power Supply to shut down the output voltages.
3.) Controller ACFAIL_N output signal goes low.
4.) Controller TS_OK output signal goes low.
5.) Controller turns OFF the TS (Transmit) voltages.
6.) Controller turns OFF the PMX (Probe MUX) voltages.
7.) Controller turns OFF voltages +/-15, +/-6, +11V, +24V.
8.) ACFAIL_N output signal goes high.
9.) Controller turns OFF +48V.

5-14-5-3 Forced Power Down
NOTE: In case of total lockup of the system, hold the ON/OFF button down a few seconds to turn the
system off.
Forced Power Down is initiated by depressing the ON/OFF button on the keyboard for a few seconds,
until the power down sequence starts:
1.) BEP detects long-term contact of Power (ON/OFF) switch.

2.) PSON_N goes high. This trigs the Main Power Supply to shut down the output voltages.
3.) Controller ACFAIL_N output signal goes low.
4.) Controller TS_OK output signal goes low.
5.) Controller turns OFF the TS (Transmit) voltages.
6.) Controller turns OFF the PMX (Probe MUX) voltages.
7.) Controller turns OFF voltages +/-15, +/-6, +11V, +24V.
8.) ACFAIL_N output signal goes high.
9.) Controller turns OFF +48V.
5-14-5-4 Power Loss

A power loss may be due to:
The Mains Switch has been switched to OFF

The Mains cable has been disconnected
Brown-out or power loss (burnout)
If a power loss (or error) occur, all power distribution within the unit is lost.
AC Failure Power Off Sequence
1.) Controller on Main Power Unit detects AC line failure condition or 48V failure.
2.) When the controller detects AC failure:
a.) Controller TS_OK output signal goes low.
b.) Controller turns OFF TS voltages. PMX is kept on for probe mux bias voltage.
c.) Controller ACFAIL_N output signal goes low.
d.) Controller records failure in Flash RAM.
e.) Controller turns OFF voltages +/-15, +/-6, +11V, +24V.
f.) Controller 48V_OK output signal goes low when 48V drops out of specification.
3.) GFI responds to TS_OK going low:
- GFI signals GTX to stop transmitting.
4.) GFI responds to ACFAIL_N going low:
- GFI stops scanning and disconnect GTX Transmit circuit from TSV1/TSV2 (MLP).
5.) BEP responds to ACFAIL_N going low:
a.) BEP commands GFI to stop scanning.
b.) BEP starts an orderly shutdown of Hard Drive and peripherals.
6.) After BEP shutdown, BEP sets PSON_N high. PSON_N circuit is powered by 5Vstb.
NOTE: This shut down sequence will typically be less than 1 second from the power failure is detected
to all voltages have been shut down.

Section 5-15
DC Surveillance overview
DC surveillance of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is done by the GFI board.
This means that the GFI board is monitoring ALL DC Voltages on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
The GFI board is not capable of monitoring its own voltages, this is done by the BEP I/O board.
The information is sent from the BEP I/O board to the GFI board via the cable that goes from BEP I/O
board to the FEP Backplane. This cable is located internally in the BEP, the cable PN is 5194491.
If the communication between the BEP I/O board and the GFI is halted, then it could look like there is a
problem with the GFI, BEP or the main power Supply.
A typical printout from the log:
board=GFI, GFI_DSP_CORE_V = 1.836 outside tolerance limits.
board=GFI, GFI_N_5VA = -2.560 outside tolerance limits
board=GFI, GFI_MGT_2V5 = 3.227 outside tolerance limits.
CUsbIobAdapter::Transact parameter Iob.Voltages could not send command
The crucial information is:
Transact parameter Iob

and
could not send command
If a TEE probe is connected when this problem occures, then the log file would also show:
Transact parameter Iob.GfiTemperatures could not send command
This means that the communication between the I/O Board and the GFI is halted and no surveillance of
DC voltages and TEE temperatures on the GFI board can be done.
Check logfile-DCVoltMon.txt to find out if this problem has occurred more than once.
Refer to: Section 7-16 "How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 7-169, for
information on how to import this file into Excel.
Root cause for repeat findings of the error message Outside Tolerance Limits that originates from the
GFI board (board=GFI in logfile.txt), could be as follows:
Software related (caused by unknown communication problems)

BEP5: The cable between the BEP I/O and the FEP Backplane Part Number 5194491. This cable
is located internally in the BEP.
BEP6: The cable between the BEP6, the GFI and the FEP Backplane, Part Number 5391509.
The BEP I/O board.

Section 5-16
Input and Output (I/O) modules
This section describes the input/output modules on VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

5-16-3 Patient I/O (Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
5-16-4 BEP6 I/O Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5-16-5 BEP5 I/O Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5-16-3 Patient I/O (Physio)
NOTE: The ECG functionality of the Patient I/O module is not intended for patient monitoring nor to
support alarm functionality. This input is intended as a tool for easier synchronization of images
and cineloop control during ultrasound examinations.
The Patient I/O panel is located on the front of VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 5-77 Patient I/O Panel
1 - PHONO
2 - ECG
The Patient IO contains the electronics for:
Phono
ECG/Respiration
Analog inputs - AUX (Pressure/Pulse)
5 - 124 Section 5-16 - Input and Output (I/O) modules


The three inputs are separately isolated due to safety requirements.
Figure 5-78 Patient I/O - Block Diagram
ISOLATION
PHONO
PHONO
ECG Digital Trace Data

ECG / RESPIRATION A/D
USB2 to BEP
AUX
AUX (Pulse/Pressure)
(PULSE/PRESSURE)
The patient leads for ECG and respiration can be rotated by software (i.e. it is possible to change
between Lead I, II and III by pushing a button).
The module extracts respiration from ECG signals from the ECG/Respiration input.
The scanned image that is displayed, is synchronized with the ECG, respiration and phono traces. In
M-Mode or Doppler, the traces are synchronized to that particular mode's sweep. The operator can
control the gain, the position and the sweep rate of the traces using the assignable controls.
AUX is capable of handling a pulse/pressure signal.
5-16-3-2 Patient I/O Location in the Unit

The Patient I/O is located in front of the Back End Processor with the connector panel available from
the front of the system.
Figure 5-79 Patient I/O Panel Location in the unit
1 - PHONO
2 - ECG


+5 VDC
+12 VDC
Pinout for the DC input on the Patient I/O module
Table 5-44 DC input pinout on the Patient I/O Module
CONNECTOR SIGNAL NAME
DC INPUT
Pin 1: +12VDC
Pin 2: GND
4 3 2 1 Pin 3: GND
Pin 4: +5VDC
5-16-3-4 Patient I/O - inputs

ECG / Respiration
Phono (from a phono heart microphone)
AUX - Analog Input (Pulse/Pressure)
Pinout for the AUX connector

The pinout for the AUX connector is described in the table below:
Table 5-45 Pinout for the AUX Connectors
AUX
1
Pin 1: Input -
5 2 Pin 2: Input +
Pin 3: Gnd
Pin 4: Nasal Sensor 1
4 3 Pin 5: Nasal Sensor 2
The AUX is default a 1 Vpp (Volt peak-to-peak) input with a max frequency of 300 Hz. It has a
programmable high gain mode with a maximum input signal of 300 mVpp (millivolt peak-to-peak).
The inputs are differential. For a single ended sensor signal, the pin 1 (input -) should be connected to
the GND of the sensor.

5-16-3-5 Patient I/O - outputs

USB2:
Digital Trace Data

Module ID PROM communication
Pinout for the USB outlet on the Patient I/O module
Table 5-46 USB outlet on the Patient I/O Module
USB 2
Pin 1: +5V (NOT USED BY PATIENT I/O)
Pin 2: D-
Pin 3: D+
5 4 3 2 1 Pin 4: GND
Pin 5: GND
5-16-3-6 Fuses
NONE
5-16-3-7 LEDs
NONE
5-16-3-8 Dip Switches

NONE

5-16-4 BEP6 I/O Board

BEP6s I/O board is the interface between the BEP and the rest of the system. It distrbutes USB to the
Rear IO, the OP and to internal units (printer and Patient IO). It distributes SATA to the DVD(s). It splits
video between the main monitor and rear video output. It also distributes audio to speakers and rear
connectors.
Figure 5-80 BEP6s I/O Board Block Diagram
MAIN CABLE - VIDEO
MAIN CABLE -
POWER/AUDIO
SATA CABLE DVD1
SATA CABLE DVD2
MAIN CABLE - USB

MAIN CABLE - USB
USB CABLE XYZ
CONTROLLER
USB CABLE
BW PRINTER
USB CABLE - MAIN

POWER SUPPLY
POWER CABLE, DVD (2X)
AUDIO CABLE -
SUBWOOFER


The I/O board is located inside the BEP with some connectors available on the rear of the system.

Supply voltage of 5V and 12V from BEP (and BEP Power Card).
5V STDBY from the BEP (and BEP Power Card) for OPIO (pass through).
PWR_ON signal from the Operator Panel to the BEPs Motherboard (pass through).
Two USB ports for OP Panel (pass through)
Two USB ports for the Rear IO
One USB port for internal B/W printer
One USB port for XYZ Controller
Some unused USB ports
Doppler audio (orginating on the GFI board)
Doppler audio mixed with Windows system sounds from BEPs motherboard
DVI-I input from the BEP (from the Graphics Adapter or onboard video controller, or from the DVR
Board.

12V DC and 5V DC for Patient IO, DVD drive and HDD.
5V STDBY from the BEP power supply card for OPIO (pass through)
USB ports
Audio to the OP Panel for the speakers.
External Audio outputs
Audio to the woofer (center speaker)
DVI-D output for Main Monitor (Digital Video)
DVI-I output for External Monitor (only the Digital Video Signal is included)

5-16-5 BEP5 I/O Board

The I/O board is the interface between the BEP and the rest of the system. It contains three USB hubs,
and it splits video between the main monitor and rear video output. It also distributes audio to speakers
and rear connectors.
Figure 5-81 BEP5s I/O Board Block Diagram
To OP Panel
XYZ Motor
Spare

The I/O board is located inside the BEP with some connectors available on the rear of the system.


Supply voltage of 5V and 12V from BEP power supply card.
The power voltages are regulated at +/-10%.
5V STDBY from the BEP power supply card for OPIO (Pass through).
PWR_ON signal from the Operator panel to the Motherboard (pass through).
Two USB ports for OP Panel (pass through), one USB for USB hub and one USB for Patient IO
module.
Doppler Audio from GFI
Doppler audio mixed with Windows system sounds from motherboard
DVI (Digital Video) input from the video card or DVR Board.
AC Fail and PSON_N signal from the BEP PS.

12V DC and 5V DC for Patient IO, DVD drive and High capacity drive.
5V STDBY from the BEP power supply card for OPIO (Pass through)
USB ports for Color and BW printer
3 x USB ports (Spare)
Audio Line In to the Motherboard
Audio to DVR board on Motherboard
Audio to the OP Panel for the speakers.
External Audio outputs
Audio to the sub woofer
DVI-D output for Main Monitor (Digital Video)
DVI-I output for External Monitor (only the Digital Video Signal is included)
Two external USB ports
Two spare internal USB ports
External Test connector
I2C bus clock and data signals to the Backplane and BEP PS.
5-16-6 Probe Connectors

The probe connectors are mounted on the Relay board.
See: 5-12-6 "Relay Board (RLY)" on page 5-60.

Section 5-17
Peripherals overview
5-17-1 Internal peripherals
For service parts, see Section 9-16 "Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-88.
5-17-1-1 DVD Drive

The DVD Drive is available from the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5-17-1-2 Digital Video Stream Recorder (DVR (Option))

This is a kit with a Video Recorder Card inside the BEP and a DVD R/W unit used for export of the
recorded video.
The DVD R/W unit is available from the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
NOTE: The DVD drive used for video recording, supports DVD+R/W.
NOTE: The DVR Board has a specific IP Address. Do Not Change This IP Address!
For installation instructions, see: Vivid E9 DVR Installation Manual, Direction Number: GA294614.
5-17-1-3 Black & White Digital Graphic Printer

The B/W Printer is available from the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5 - 132 Section 5-17 - Peripherals overview

5-17-2 External peripherals
5-17-2-1 Footswitch
A three-button, wired footswich can be connected to one of the USB ports at the rear side of the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (Introduced for BT12, software v112.0.0.).
CAUTION TO AVOID DAMAGE OF THE CABLE, KEEP THE CABLE AWAY FROM THE WHEELS.
DISCONNECT THE FOOTSWITCH BEFORE MOVING THE SYSTEM.
5-17-2-2 External Color Printer (Option)

A color video printer can be connected to the USB port on the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
For a list of supported printers, see: 3-6-5-3 "External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to USB"
on page 3-45.
For installation instructions, see: 3-11-3 "Color Video Printer setup" on page 3-109.
5-17-2-3 USB Flash Drive (USB Flash Card) (option)

Due to the EMC requirements, only USB Flash Cards tested for use with VIVID E9/VIVID E7 may be
used.
For a list of available USB Flash Cards, see: 9-16-8 "USB Flash Drive (UFD) for data storage" on page
9-92.
The following USB Flash Cards (USB Memory keys) have also been tested and approved for use with
Vivid E9 / Vivid 7 but are out-of-stock:
USB Memory Key 2GB Trancend (USB2-0)

The following USB Flash Cards, approved for Vivid 7, may also be used on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7,
but are not available for sale anymore:
- Kingston DataTraveler Elite 256 MB
- Sandisk Cruzer Micro 256 MB
- Twin MOS K24-256MB Mobile Disk III
- JMTek USB-Drive 256 MB

5-17-2-4 USB Hard Drive with RAID1

The USB Hard Drive with RAID1 is an external desktop hard drive, connected via USB to either a
Vivid E9 or an EchoPAC PC workstation. It is configured as RAID 1, so the content is mirrored on two
hard disk drives.
The intended use for the USB Hard Drive with RAID1 is for Disk Management.
NOTE: When Disk Management has been performed, it is recommended to backup the Patient Archive
to a medical grade DVD recordable disc (DVD-R).
NOTE: Only connect one USB storage device (like the USB Hard Drive with RAID1) to the Vivid E9
or EchoPAC PC at a time.
NOTE: To be able to use a USB storage device (like the USB Hard Drive with RAID1) on a Vivid E9,
the Vivid E9 may need a BIOS upgrade. If needed, a CD with the new BIOS software is included
in the kit.
NOTE: To be able to use a USB storage device (like the USB Hard Drive with RAID1) on a PC with
EchoPAC SW Only, the user must log on with Administrator rights.
WARNING IF THE USB HARD DRIVE WITH RAID1 IS CONNECTED TO A VIVID E9, ENSURE THAT
IT IS PLACED OUTSIDE THE PATIENT VICINITY/PATIENT ENVIRONMENT.
5-17-2-5 Ethernet
Ethernet is connected to the I/O panel (BEP I/O board) on the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Printers and external servers may be available via the Ethernet network.
5-17-2-6 Network printers

For more information, see: 3-6-5-4 "External Peripherals (Optional) for Connection to Ethernet (TCP/IP
Network)" on page 3-46.
5 - 134 Section 5-17 - Peripherals overview

Section 5-18
Cables for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Please refer to:
Section 9-17 "Mains Power Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-95
Section 9-18 "Internal Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-96
Section 9-19 "ECG cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-118
Section 5-19
Probes
For a list of supported probes, please refer to: Section 9-22 "Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-
122.

Section 5-20
Product manuals
The information needed to use and service the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 scanner is collected in the
documents described in this section.
5-20-1 User documentation

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 user manuals
Special Probes user guide
5-20-2 Service documentation

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Service Manual
VIVID E9 Unpacking/Packing Procedure
5-20-3 GE Service / Proprietary documentation

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Manual (this manual)
For a list of available product manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7, see: Section 9-26 "Product Manuals for
VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-140.
5 - 136 Section 5-20 - Product manuals

Section 5-21
Common Service Desktop overview
In this section, the Common Service Desktop, as implemented on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, is described.

5-21-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
5-21-4 iLinq Interactive Platform Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
5-21-5 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
5-21-3 Introduction
The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and
cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-
Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GEs scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service
Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.
5-21-4 iLinq Interactive Platform Features

Many of the services of the Common Service Desktop come from its integration with iLinq. The following
sections contain a brief introduction of iLinqs features.
5-21-4-1 Web Server/Browser

The Service Platform and other Service software use the iLinq web server and the Internet Explorer
browser.
5-21-4-2 Connectivity
NOTE: This feature that allow the customer to contact the GE OnLine Center are available for Warranty
and Contract customers only.
This feature provides basic connectivity between the scanner and the OnLine Center (OLC).
5-21-4-3 Configuration
This feature provides the interfaces to configure various iLinq parameters.
5-21-4-4 Contact GE
NOTE: This feature that allow the customer to contact the GE OnLine Center are available for Warranty
and Contract customers only.
Allows for an on-screen one-touch button used to contact the OnLine Center and describe problems
with their scanner in an easy and convenient way.
5-21-4-5 Interactive Application

The main application is displayed in the form of HTML pages whenever the browser starts. This is the
entry point for any user to start any iLinq application.

5-21-5 Global Service User Interface (GSUI)
5-21-5-1 Internationalization
The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in
English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
5-21-5-2 Service Login

Select the phone icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen.
This icon links the user or the Field Engineer (FE) to the service login screen.
5 - 138 Section 5-21 - Common Service Desktop overview

5-21-5-3 Access / Security

The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to
the tools that are authorized for their use.
NOTE: A Service Dongle (part number 066E0703) is necessary for use by GE Service when performing
proprietary level diagnostics. OnLine Center access to the scanner requires the password and
they must have Disruptive permission and customer input to run diagnostics.
Table 5-47 Access Authorization
USER LEVEL ACCESS AUTHORIZATION PASSWORD

Operator uls
Administrator Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same acquisition
uls
diagnostic tests as GE Service.
External Service gogems
Knowledge of a service level password. rotating security

GE Service
A physical Service Key (Dongle) required password
NOTE: For a GE Field Engineer, the password changes at specific intervals. Access with the password
is tied to the service key.
See 4-2-8 "Service Key (Dongle, HASP)" on page 4-17 for more about the Service Dongle and its use.
Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is
viewable to authorized users.
See Chapter 7 for more info about InSite and the Global Service User Interface.
Section 5-22
Restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 after diagnostics
Always shutdown the system and reboot after a diagnostics session.

5 - 140 Section 5-21 - Common Service Desktop overview

Chapter 6
Service adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to adjustments the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

6-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 Power Supply adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-3 LCD Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-4 Test the LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-5 Backlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-6 Main Monitor and Touch Screen - Setup and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-7 Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-8 DC Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-9 Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-10 Direction Lock and Brake adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6-11 Adjust time-out for DICOM servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Section 6-2
Power Supply adjustments
It is not possible to adjust the power supply.
Chapter 6 - Service adjustments 6-1

Section 6-3
LCD Monitor adjustments
This section describes how to adjust the 19 LCD monitor for optimal performance.
NOTE: On the 17 inch monitor, there are no adjustments on the monitor itself. To adjust the backlight,
blue tint and contrast, see: Section 6-5 "Backlight adjustment" on page 6-6.

6-3-3 Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-3-4 Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-3-5 LCD Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-3-6 Advanced LCD adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3-3 Cautions and Warnings

Be aware of pinch points at hinges when adjusting LCD Arm and LCD Monitor.
6-3-4 Access to Adjustments

NOTE: Before starting these adjustments, ensure that the correct monitor (17 or 19) has been
selected in the drop down menu on the Config > Service screen.
The monitor adjustment is done via three controls (buttons) on front of the monitor.
The LCD settings have been optimized at the factory, so normally, there should be no need for any
further adjustments.
Default Brightness for the 19 LCD screen on VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is: 89%.
Under special light conditions, you may want to adjust the LCD screens Brightness.
NOTE: Adjustments on the monitor will influence all modes. If you only want to change the settings for
one mode, please refer to: Section 6-5 "Backlight adjustment" on page 6-6.
Figure 6-1 LCD adjustment buttons
LEFT MODE RIGHT
6-3-4-1 Review Test Patterns

Through the Touch Panel, access Utilities / Test Patterns to review the test patterns.
The available test images are described in: 6-5-7 "Test Images" on page 6-8.
6-2 Section 6-3 - LCD Monitor adjustments

6-3-5 LCD Adjustment Procedure

Default Brightness is: 89%.
6-3-5-1 Brightness
To reduce the brightness, press the left arrow button. A popup box with the current brightness
setting will be displayed on the screen.
To increase the brightness, press the right button.
Push the mode button once to remove the popup bow from the screen and save the current values.

6-3-6 Advanced LCD adjustments

NOTE: Do not adjust these settings unless necessary!
To get access to the advanced adjustments, press the Mode button for more than 10 seconds. This
will display the Advanced Menu on the screen.
Figure 6-2 LCD Controls Advanced Menu
The Advanced Menu has the following choices:
Table 6-1 Advanced Menu
DEFAULT
MENU PARAMETER SETTING
Smoothing: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 3
Screen
Return -
Brightness: 0-100% 89%
Contrast: 0-100% 100%
Temperature: Custom / 9000K / 11000K / 13000K / 15000K 9000K
Color Gamma: 2.0/2.1/2.2 /2.3/ 2.4 /2.5/ 2.6 2.4
Adjusted value at the

Gain: R/G/B 0-100%
factory
Reset -
Return -
Screen Size: FullScreen / Enlarged / Normal FullScreen
Menu Position Center

Other
Reset -
Return -
Resolution, fH/fV -
Information
Model name, GPN No. (PSP No.), Serial No., Using time -
Language Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish English
6-3-6-1 Review Test Patterns

Through the Touch Panel, access Utilities / Test Patterns to review the test patterns.
The available test images are described in: 6-5-7 "Test Images" on page 6-8.
6-4 Section 6-3 - LCD Monitor adjustments

Section 6-4
Test the LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion
NOTE: This procedure is valid for both the 17 inch and the 19 inch LCD monitors.
Confirm LCD Arm and LCD Monitor have full range of motion.
1.) Move the LCD arm from side to side.

2.) Move the LCD from a face forward, vertical position to a face down, horizontal position (Figure 6-3).
- Too tight: If the customer finds the LCD difficult to move from a vertical to horizontal position,
use a 17mm wrench to loosen nuts at hinge. Be sure to loosen both sides equally. Start with
1/4 turn and test full 90 degree movement before loosening more.
- Too loose: If the customer finds the LCD does not remain in place after adjusting the LCD from
a vertical to horizontal position, use a 17mm wrench to tighten nuts at hinge. Be sure to tighten
both sides equally. Start with 1/4 turn and test full 90 degree movement before tightening
more.
Figure 6-3 Test LCD Vertically and Horizontally
LCD vertical
Figure 6-4 Adjusting LCD Hinge Nuts

Section 6-5
Backlight adjustment
This section describes how to adjust the backlight on the 17 LCD monitor.

6-5-3 Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-5-4 Accessing the Main LCD and Touch Screen Backlight Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-5-5 Backlight and Blue Tint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-5-3 Cautions and Warnings

N/A
6-5-4 Accessing the Main LCD and Touch Screen Backlight Adjustments
1.) Select Utility on the Touch Screen.
2.) Ensure that Page 1 of 2 is selected.
Figure 6-5 Utility screen - page 1
6-6 Section 6-5 - Backlight adjustment

6-5-5 Backlight and Blue Tint Adjustment

On the Utility screen - Page 1 of 2, you can adjust the Backlight and the Blue tint on the Main LCD
screen and the Backlight on the Touch Panel (TP).
Figure 6-6 Utility screen - page 1
Adjust the left most rotary to adjust the LCD Backlight.

Push and adjust the left most rotary to adjust the LCD Blue Tint.
Adjust the second rotary from the left side, to adjust the Touch Panel (TP) Backlight.
6-5-6 Adjust LCD Brightness and Contrast

Select Page 2 of 2 on the Utility screen.
Adjust the left most rotary to adjust the Main LCDs Brightness.
Push and adjust the left most rotary to adjust the Main LCDs Contrast.
Figure 6-7 Adjust LCD Brightness and Contrast

6-5-7 Test Images

Select Page 2 of 2 on the Utility screen.
Figure 6-8 Select Test Image
Turn the second rotary from the left side, to select between the Test Images. The Test Images are
reproduced in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Test Images sheet 1 of 3
TEST IMAGE No. TEST IMAGES DESCRIPTION
1.
Test - Standard
2.
Test - Red grades
6-8 Section 6-5 - Backlight adjustment

Table 6-2 Test Images (contd) sheet 2 of 3
3.
Test - Green grades
4.
Test - Blue grades
5.
Blue Circle on Black background
6.
Black

Table 6-2 Test Images (contd) sheet 3 of 3
7.
White
8.
Straight Line
6 - 10 Section 6-5 - Backlight adjustment

Section 6-6
Main Monitor and Touch Screen - Setup and Alignment
6-6-1 Select the Display Control Panel
1.) Plug in the Service Key and log on as GE Service.
2.) Exit to desktop, from start menu.
3.) Select: Settings > Control Panel > Display.
Figure 6-9 Select the Display Control Panel
Chapter 6 - Service adjustments 6 - 11

6-6-2 Identification of the monitors

The icons in the control panel is marked with a number to ease identification:
The largest monitor icon marked 1, is the Main Monitor.

The touch panel icon is marked 2.
Make sure that the touchscreen is aligned below the main monitor as indicated below.
Figure 6-10 Identification of the monitors and Main LCD Screen setup
6-6-3 Main LCD Screen Resolution and Color Quality

Set Screen resolution to 1280x960 pixels.
Set Color quality to Highest (32 bit).
6 - 12 Section 6-6 - Main Monitor and Touch Screen - Setup and Alignment
6-6-4 Touch Screen Resolution and Color Quality

Set Screen resolution to 640 by 480 pixels
Set Color quality to Medium (16 bit]
Un-check the Use this device as the primary monitor check box.
Check Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box.
Figure 6-11 Touch Screen settings

Section 6-7
Touch Screen Calibration
The Touch Screen Calibration is found on the Operator Panel Test Dialog.
Follow these steps to open the Operator Panel Test Dialog:

2.) Log on as ADM.
3.) Select System > Test.
4.) Select Operator Panel Test. This will open the Operator Panel Test Dialog (Figure 6-12).
Figure 6-12 The Operator Panel Test Dialog
The Calibrate button is used to start to calibrate the position of the touch sensitive area on the Touch
screen relative to the graphic artwork.
Follow these steps to calibrate the Touch screen:
1.) Select Calibrate. The Touch screen goes blank and display a cross in the screens upper left
corner.
2.) Point your finger on the centre of the cross and press slightly. This calibrates this point, and the
cross moves to the screens upper right corner.
cross moves to the lower right corner.
cross moves to the lower left corner.
5.) Point your finger on the centre of the cross and press slightly. This calibrates this last point.
6.) Select Done. The calibration is complete.
6 - 14 Section 6-7 - Touch Screen Calibration

Section 6-8
DC Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment)
6-8-1 Introduction
DC Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment) is performed to calibrate each ADC channel of the GRX
inputs. The system calibrates the ADC to zero output when there is no signal on the input. These bias
voltages are stored in the Back End Processor.
6-8-2 When to do a Front End Alignment

Do the Front End Alignment:
when installing a new VIVID E9/VIVID E7

after software has been updated or replaced
when DRX boards have been interchanged
when a DRX board has been replaced
when the Back End Processor has been replaced
6-8-3 Front End Alignment Procedure

The Front End Alignment is available on the Common Service Desktop interface.
1.) Disconnect all probes.

2.) Power on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
3.) Select the InSite ExC icon (GE phone icon) on the screen to display the InSite ExC menu.
Figure 6-13 InSite ExC icon in the status bar
4.) Select Service Desktop.
Figure 6-14 InSite ExC Menu
5.) Select the Diagnostics tab.

6.) Open the Analog Receive folder.
7.) Select Execute to run the calibration.
8.) After completing the calibration, restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

Section 6-9
Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism
6-9-1 Overview
The following topics are covered in this section:
6-9-2 Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

6-9-3 Release the XY Lock and XY Brake (manually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-9-4 Adjusting the XY Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-9-5 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-9-6 Using the Park Lock Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-9-7 Adjusting the Z mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-9-2 Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation

When the OP is in the locked position, press the left button lock of the Frogleg Controls, which causes
the motorized park lock to release and releases the brakes, momentarily in the froglegs. This allows the
OP to move in the XY direction.
When the console is not locked (floating), press the lock button, this will only release the brakes in the
froglegs, to allow easy movement. When the lock button is pressed and the console is pushed back into
the locked position, the U-bolt mechanically engages the park lock (similar to a car door). Pushing the
lock button does not affect the locking action of the park lock, it only releases the brakes, to allow the
OP to get pushed into the park lock easier. But, the lock button must be pushed to get the OP to the
locked position. Once the OP is in the lock position and the lock button is released, you can hear the
sound of the park lock rotating to engage the U-bolt.
NOTE: Remember, if the device brakes are not locked when trying to lock the OP, this can act as a
shock absorber and make it more difficult for the park lock to lock.
6-9-3 Release the XY Lock and XY Brake (manually)

For instructions, please refer to: 4-2-5-5 "Manually releasing the XY Lock" on page 4-12.
6 - 16 Section 6-9 - Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism

6-9-4 Adjusting the XY Lock

Use a 3 mm hex tool to adjust the XY Lock release for optimal lock and minimal slack in transport mode.
Rotating the screw clockwise will tighten the Lock and will reduce slack, but will also require more
force for engaging the Lock.
Rotating counterclockwise will open the lock (more slack).
Figure 6-15 Adjusting the XY Locking mechanism
Follow the steps below to adjust the XY Lock:
1.) Locate the hex screw behind the XY Assembly. This is the adjustment screw.
NOTE: When turning the hex screw, do not exceed half turn increments. Overtightening will prevent the
console from locking into place and too loose will make the console loose.
2.) Use a 3 mm hex tool to rotate the adjustment screw clockwise to tighten the XY Lock.
For optimal adjustment, rotate the adjustment screw 1/4 turn and test the Lock function. Repeat
procedure if needed.
Rotating the screw counterclockwise will loosen the lock.
Too tight will reduce the slack and make it harder to engage the Lock. Make the adjustments in 1/4 turn
increments and test the lock until the optimum adjustment is achieved.

6-9-5 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment
The following procedure is intended to release and adjust the XY mechanism.
6-9-5-1 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts
Figure 6-16 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts
1.) U-bolt
2.) Brakes (one inside each of the four XY arms)
3.) Park Lock (engages U-bolt)

6-9-5-2 XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Follow this procedure if the park lock is not working, or the lock does not respond when pressing the
Frogleg Controls:
1.) Release the lock manually. See Figure 4-12 "Manually releasing the XY Lock" on page 4-12.
2.) Remove the four screws, Item 1. The screwss heads are marked with red color in the figure below.
NOTICE Be aware of the fragile power cable and do not pull the Park Lock out with force. It should fall
out by just guiding.
Figure 6-17 Remove the Park Lock

6-9-5-2 XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism (contd)

If the Park Lock Nut (2) and the Park Lock Lever (3), are in the positions illustrated in Figure 6-
18, the lock will not engage.
(This occurred in some earlier systems. The nut and retainer did not return to the charged mode
after unlock.)
Figure 6-18 Park Lock Failure
By hand, rotate the Threaded Lead Screw on the actuator (4) counterclockwise until the Lock Nut
is barely touching the Bearing Housing (5).
The two small plastic springs should just touch, but do not deform.
Figure 6-19 Park Lock adjustment
Make sure the Park Lock Lever (3) is loose and can engage and hold the Lock Wheel, (6), in
locked position, as illustrated in Figure 6-19.

6-9-5-2 XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism (contd)

Before reassembling the Lock Assembly, make sure the Park Lock Nut (2) and the Park Lock
Lever (3) are in the position illustrated in Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20 Adjustment Set
6-9-6 Using the Park Lock Properly

It is important to inform a customer of the following if they are experiencing problems with the XY park
lock function.
Be sure to:
Apply the brakes. The locking mechanism will not engage if the device can move when trying to
park the console.
Push the release button and gently guide the console into the locked position until the lock is
engaged.
Not apply any weight on the console or lean on it. If the console is not in the normal resting position,
the lock will not engage when trying to park it.
6-9-7 Adjusting the Z mechanism

There are no adjustments for the Operator Panels vertical movement.
4-2-5-6 "Moving the Top Console up or down when Power is OFF" on page 4-13

Section 6-10
Direction Lock and Brake adjustments
There are no adjustments for the Direction Lock or the Brakes.
Section 6-11
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers
If you are experiencing problems with slow responses from DICOM servers, increase the time-out in the
DICOM server properties dialog.
Problems with slow responses may result in images being re-sent automatically and low transfer rates.
The retry settings can be used to make jobs retry on bad networks. There is no need to set retries for
mobile (off-line) use.
6 - 22 Section 6-10 - Direction Lock and Brake adjustments

Chapter 7
Section 7-1
Overview
This section gives you an overview of the contents in chapter 7. It also includes lists of available Service
Software Tools, Special Service Tools and a FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions).

This chapter describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host-, system- and board-level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

7-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 Service Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-4 FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-5 Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-6 Network Connectivity Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-7 Work-around procedure for connecting Vivid E9 to ImageVault v4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-8 InSite ExC troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7-9 Gathering Troubleshooting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-10 Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-11 Virtual Console Observation (VCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-12 Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-13 Motor Controller Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-121
7-14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-123
7-15 Noise troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-159
7-16 How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-169
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics / troubleshooting 7-1

Section 7-2
Service Safety Considerations

ADJUSTING.
Section 7-3
Service tools
7-3-1 Service Software tools
A set of Service Software tools are available on the Common Service Desktop.
See Section 7-12 "Common Service Desktop" on page 7-35 for more info.
7-3-2 Special Service tools

NOTE: A Service Dongle (part number 066E0703) is necessary for use by GE Service when performing
proprietary level diagnostics.
NOTE: OnLine Center access to the scanner requires the password and they must have Disruptive
permission and customer input to run diagnostics.
Test Attenuator, PN: AA200215

Service Dongle (see NOTE above.)
7-2 Section 7-2 - Service Safety Considerations

Section 7-4
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
7-4-1 Overview
Content in this section
7-4-2 BSCAN Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-4-3 Trackball issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-4-4 High System Temperature Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-4-5 Reset the BEP from a Hang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-4-6 How to Release the Top Console when power is unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-4-2 BSCAN Cable

Question:
What data is transferred via the BSCAN cable?
Answer:
Main information that is routed over this cable:
Surveillance data of voltages and temperatures from the PCB boards.

Readout of VPD data for the backplane. Without this data the BEP does not know what type of
backplane that is mounted.
5V standby from BEP to the Backplane to be able to read VPD data and 24V from the Front End to
the BEP to check that the Front End is present.
7-4-3 Trackball issues

Refer to: 7-14-6 "Trackball troubleshooting" on page 7-139.
7-4-4 High System Temperature Error

Question:
What is the highest temperature when VIVID E9/VIVID E7 starts giving the High System Temperature
Error?
Answer:
All Card Rack (PCBs, or Front End) sensors:

- The limit for the first warning is 78 degrees centigrade (78 C).
- The system starts the shutdown sequence at 80 degrees centigrade (80 C)
New in v110.1.10 - DRX_TOP sensors:
- The limit for the first warning is 87 degrees centigrade (87 C).
- The system starts the shutdown sequence at 90 degrees centigrade (90 C).
New in v112.0 - Clean air filter:
- The reminder Clean air filter is displayed at start-up of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, and is
repeated at specific pre-defined intervals.
7-4-5 Reset the BEP from a Hang

Question:

It seems that the BEP is hanging - its not responding at all. How do I Reset it?
Answer:
1.) Try this method first:

Press the ON/OFF switch on the Operator Panel for more than six seconds. This should cause the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to perform a Forced Restart.
2.) If the instruction in step 1 didnt help, as the last solution, after waiting several minutes, switch off
the power on the rear of the system.
7-4 Section 7-4 - FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions

7-4-6 How to Release the Top Console when power is unavailable

Question:
How to release the Z brakes (Up/Down) when without power?
Answer:
There is a lever behind the openings in the Rear Cover. Press the lever to the right to release the X/Y
brakes. At the same time, push the Upper Console down. If you stop to press the lever, the Z brakes
engage.
For more information, see: 4-2-5-6 "Moving the Top Console up or down when Power is OFF" on page
4-13.
Question:
How to release the XY brakes when without power?
Answer:
See the instructions in: 4-2-5-5 "Manually releasing the XY Lock" on page 4-12.

Section 7-5
Troubleshooting Tips
7-5-1 Content in this section
7-5-2 "Shortcut Keys" on page 7-6
7-5-3 "Noise" on page 7-7
7-5-4 "EMI Prevention/Abatement" on page 7-7
7-5-5 "Image Artifacts Caused by Front End Boards" on page 7-8
7-5-6 "Connectivity" on page 7-8
7-5-7 "Back End Processor" on page 7-9
7-5-8 "Operator Panel" on page 7-10
7-5-9 "Probes" on page 7-11
7-5-10 "Software" on page 7-11
7-5-2 Shortcut Keys

This is a list of useful shortcuts for use during VIVID E9/VIVID E7 service.
Table 7-1 Shortcuts
SHORTCUT DESCRIPTION
Alt+B BOOKMARK. PLACE A BOOKMARK IN LOGS.
SYSTEM PROBLEM REPORTING. See: 7-9-4 "Collect a Trouble Image with Logs" on page 7-21.
Alt+D
PRINT SCREEN / Make a SCREENSHOT: See: 7-9-4 "Collect a Trouble Image with Logs" on page 7-21.
Alt+E EJECT DEVICE (i.e.CD or DVD MEDIA)
QUALITY TEST SCREEN.
Alt+Q
Alt+S DICOM JOB SPOOLER
Ctrl+Alt+R RESTART THE APPLICATION SOFTWARE
Ctrl+Alt+Del OPEN TASK MANAGER IF SERVICE DONGLE IS USED
Ctrl+PrintScreen SCREEN CAPTURE. See: Section 7-10 "Screen Captures" on page 7-27.
F4 CLEAN THE SPOOLER
InSite ExC / VPN
Alt+F1 Activate the Front Panel Simulator when accessing the scanner remotely through InSite ExC / VPN
7-6 Section 7-5 - Troubleshooting Tips

7-5-3 Noise
See:
2-2-4 "EMI limitations" on page 2-7.

7-15-5 "Overview of Types of Noise" on page 7-162.
7-5-4 EMI Prevention/Abatement

See:
7-15-4 "EMI Prevention/abatement" on page 7-161.

7-5-5 Image Artifacts Caused by Front End Boards

Image artifacts can be caused by any of the boards on the Front End. Artifacts may be caused by the
power supply or board failures. It is important to use the Diagnostic tools on the service interface to try
to narrow down the failure to one or two boards.
Artifacts that look like white vertical lines, rain or snow cones in one or more areas of the image can
be troubleshot in different ways:
- One troubleshooting technique is to swap DRXs around to see if the artifact moves. (Pulling
out the boards will keep the system from booting up; all the boards must be present for the
system to operate)
- Another approach is to run the Diagnostic Utilities to establish which channel the artifact
affects. A channel is a signal path sent through the system boards. Any of these boards in the
path can be causing the failure.
- Be aware that the problem may only appear with one mode, probe or preset. Normally, in B-
Flow the problem becomes more evident and may be easier to troubleshoot.
- Check all the probes on all the ports. Remove all the probes, and then check each probe
singly in every port.
- If port-related, replace the Relay Board.
- If the artifact only occurs with one probe, replace probe.
- If the problem persists with the new probe, reload software. Do not reload presets until
you have tested the system with the default settings and be sure that the problem does
not persist. User Defined Presets can carry corruption back to the system.
- If you suspect that the problem may be caused by software corruption, please note: Corrupt
Presets can be identified by a problem in only one exam category using a specific probe, or
a particular mode with a specific probe. Use the Clean Userdef function under Scanner
Utilities, leaving the system with only the factory defaults. Be sure to back up the presets,
including Connectivity configuration, TCP/IP page and Option strings before deleting the User
defined files. Do NOT reload presets until you have tested the system.
- Before performing Clean User Defs function, perform an Alt-D to capture the logs and preset
files. If the problem is corrected with Clean User Defs, send in the log to the OLC so that the
corrupted preset files can be reviewed.
- After booting up the system, without starting any patient or accessing any menu, click on the
Service and log in. Click on Utilities, then on Scanner utilities and then on Clean User Defs.
Select OK and that will clean the folder. Shutdown the system immediately, using the System
Shutdown function under Scanner Utilities. After rebooting, the system will come up with
default settings. Only reload presets from disk if you are sure they were stored before the
corruption occurred. If only Imaging Presets are affected you can restore the Connectivity
presets by using the selective Restore function.
7-5-6 Connectivity
See: Section 7-6 "Network Connectivity Troubleshooting" on page 7-12.
7-8 Section 7-5 - Troubleshooting Tips

7-5-7 Back End Processor
7-5-7-1 System Halt Errors - Lock ups or Intermittent Problems

Collect Error Logs and send them to the OLC to be evaluated. (On the scan screen, press ALT+D).
Refer to 7-9-4 "Collect a Trouble Image with Logs" on page 7-21.
It is extremely important to give as much details as possible about the occurrence of the problem
and the date and time it showed up.
Reload the software.
7-5-7-2 CD/DVD Drive Failures

Check that the media (disk capacity and speed) is supported.
- For the CD, the capacity is normally 700MB.
Check Windows for driver issues. Go to Control Panel > Administrative tools> Computer
management> Device Manager.
Re-install drivers if necessary.
If the CD drive is having problems, replace the CD Drive.
If the problem persists, replace the BEP.
7-5-7-3 Image CD/DVD not read

Put the CD or DVD in a laptop and see if it can be read. If it can't be read, the disk is bad.
If it can be read, make a copy at a low burn speed (8X). If the copy doesn't work replace CD-RW or
DVD-R drive.

7-5-8 Operator Panel
7-5-8-1 No Audio
See 7-12-11-3 "Audio" on page 7-68 and the I/O Board Audio Test on 7-12-12-9 "I/O Board Tests" on
page 7-91 for audio diagnostic tests.
Check volume settings in the application and also in Windows.

Use headphones, (the type that you use on a personal CD player or a laptop) to test the audio output
directly from the back of the BEP.
- If no Audio is present on the BEP, reload software. If the problem persists, replace the BEP.
- If Audio is present, follow the audio signal to the OP Panel (the audio amplifier is located in
the upper OP panel). The Audio output from the BEP goes to the Internal I/O and from there
to the OP Assembly (use an adapter to plug the headphones to the RCA outputs of the
Internal I/O). If Audio outputs are working, replace Upper OP Assembly. Otherwise replace
Internal I/O board.
- Always measure the speakers impedance; it should measure approximately 7 ohms. If
speakers are bad, it is possible that the amplifier on the Upper OP Assembly might be
defective, too.
7-5-8-2 No Video on LCD Display

See 7-12-10-6 "Video Card" on page 7-62 and the video status test on 7-12-12-9 "I/O Board Tests" on
page 7-91 for video card diagnostic tests.
If the video is too dim, has dimmed areas or there is no video at all, replace the HV LCD inverter.
Check the cabling within the system.
If the HV LCD inverter is burnt, there is a possibility that the Digital Video Card on the PC also got
damaged; in that case you can replace the Video Card.
Replace the Video Adapter inside the BEP.
Replace the Back End Processor if the problem continues.
Replace the Upper Panel Assembly.
7-5-8-3 Wrong Key Activated on the Touch Panel

Calibrate touch panel. See: Section 6-7 "Touch Screen Calibration" on page 6-14.
Replace Upper Panel Assembly.
7-5-8-4 Incorrect System Time when Daylight Savings Time changes

1.) From the touch panel, press Utility > System.
2.) Select Date/Time.
3.) On the Date and Time Properties screen, select the Time Zone tab.
4.) Disable the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box, select Apply.
5.) Select the Date & Time tab.
6.) Set the proper time for the systems location, and then select OK.
7.) Select Save.
7 - 10 Section 7-5 - Troubleshooting Tips

7-5-8-5 Intermittent Blank, but functional (responsive) Touch Panel

See: 7-14-8 - Intermittent Blank, but functional (responsive) Upper Panel Touch Screen.
7-5-8-6 Touch Panel Not Responding

Calibrate the Touch Panel. See: Section 6-7 "Touch Screen Calibration" on page 6-14. Access the
Service interface and go to Diagnostics > Service Diagnostics > Service Diagnostics > Touch Panel
> TP Calibration.
Reload software.
Replace Upper Panel Assembly.
7-5-9 Probes
7-5-9-1 Probe Recognition

Check all the probes on all the ports. Remove all the probes, and then check each probe singly in
every port.
- If the problems persist with all the probes, replace the GRLY board.
- If only one probe fails to be recognized, clean User Defs to check if the problem is caused by
corrupted presets. If the problem is not resolved, replace the probe.
7-5-10 Software
7-5-10-1 Image or Patient Data Loss

If you experience image or patient data loss, generate an Alt+D log and/or if possible, generate a copy
of the HDD data and submit a complaint.
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics / troubleshooting 7 - 11

Section 7-6
Network Connectivity Troubleshooting
7-6-2 First Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-6-3 Cannot connect to anything via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-6-4 No Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-6-5 No Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-6-6 System Pings and Verifies OK, but does NOT Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-6-2 First Status

Select the network icon on the bottom of the screen to get a first status for the network connectivity.
If the status reports No network, verify cabling.
7-6-3 Cannot connect to anything via the network

1.) Open Command Prompt.
2.) Ping 127.0.0.1", verify no lost packets. - if error, try re-image
3.) Ping machine IP address given by hospital or default in manual, verify no lost packets. - error here
replace BEP
4.) Ping gateway if given one else skip to next, verify no lost packets. - error here verify network cable
plugged in, and lights blink on BEP. Double check subunit and gateway are correctly entered. This
point and beyond are hospital issues
5.) Ping another machine on the network, verify no lost packets. - error here try pinging from another
computer on the same network
7-6-4 No Ping
Check the speed of your connection. Media Type should be set for Auto Select. Remember that
every time the system is re-ghosted, that setting goes back to the default value.
Check cables. You need a crossover cable if you are connected directly to the device. Use a straight
cable whenever you go through a hub. The use of a hub is highly recommended.
Try connecting the network cable directly to the Ethernet port in the back of the BEP. If the
connection works, troubleshoot the cabling to the external device.
Check proper addressing. System should be under the same subnet or have a gateway address to
be able to connect to another subnet.
Verify that the network is active and running.
Check with your laptop if you can ping the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and the device (Printer or PACs).
7 - 12 Section 7-6 - Network Connectivity Troubleshooting

7-6-5 No Verify
Check if the device supports Verify.
Check port and AE title info.
Check if device is up and running. It may be up but in an error status. Reboot the device if possible.
You also may need to reboot the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Use Network Sniffer (Alt+N).
Clean User Defs before reloading software in case there is a corrupt Connectivity.res file. Be sure
to do an Alt-D to capture logs before performing a Clean User Defs so that if the presets are corrupt
the logs can be sent to OLC for Engineering to review.
Reload software.
7-6-6 System Pings and Verifies OK, but does NOT Send
Check if device is up and running. It may be up but in an error status. Reboot the device if possible.
You may also need to reboot the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Check device configuration.
Clean the spooler (F4). If the jobs in the spooler cannot be deleted, you need to do it in Windows.
These jobs may be corrupted or may be using a lot of space in the disk and cause problems sending
Dicom images. Insert the Service Key (Dongle), turn the system on and log in into maintenance and
exit to Windows (the application should not be running). Then go to Windows Explorer and look for
the file c:\idunn\target\jobqueue.res. Delete the file.
Delete the files from E:/Spooler and then the Recycle Bin. Reboot the system.
Check Connectivity configuration on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
- If it is a printer, check that the printer supports the film type and format. Some printers dont
support different image sizes (or different formats, such as the Patient entry screen). If this is
the case, the spooler may show the job in a Done status but the images never get printed.
Try sending secondary capture.
- If it is a storage device, check if the type of image selected is supported (color, gray,
Multiframe)
- If it is a Worklist broker, you must use a Dataflow in which your Worklist is the primary input.
Otherwise it wont let you retrieve patients. Also check your Worklist search criteria
configuration.
Clean User Defs before reloading software in case there is a corrupt Connectivity.res file. Be sure
to do an Alt + D to capture logs before performing a Clean User Defs so that if the presets prove
corrupt the logs can be sent to OLC for Engineering to review.
Reload software.

Section 7-7
Work-around procedure for connecting Vivid E9 to ImageVault v4.x
NOTE: Minimum Software Requirement: Imagevault v4.3 is the lowest software level that this work-
around applies to.
NOTE: Work-around Duration: This work-around is obsolete the moment ImageVault v5.0 is installed
on site and set up according to the needs. Please check with your local service networking
resources or the OLC if that is the case.
7-7-1 Introduction
ImageVault v4.3 was developed before the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, thus it cannot support any raw data
conversion from this newer product. Raw data of above units is converted when ImageVault v4.3 is set
to convert i.e.:
Raw data to DICOM multiframe.

Raw data to compressed raw data.
Raw data to compressed raw data including DICOM multiframes.
ImageVault v4.3 runs a CV Web attached.
Raw data conversion happens on ImageVault in scenarios like:
There is a CV Web installed.

ImageVault is set to compress raw data locally (compress setting for STS).
ImageVault is set to add DICOM MF for data to raw data when forwarding data to LTS on a shared
volume, a jukebox or any PACS.
ImageVault auto-routing is configured that requires raw data to be converted to DICOM multiframe.
There are 3rd-party workstation connected to ImageVault that is using DICOM Q/R to review
images from ImageVault which implies that ImageVault has to convert image data from VIVID E9/
VIVID E7.
Where does this procedure NOT apply:
There is no CV Web installed.

ImageVault is not set up to do raw data compression.
ImageVault does not use a DICOM PACS as LTS.
ImageVault does not do any auto-routing to any DICOM server or DICOM workstation.
There is no 3rd-party workstation connected to ImageVault that is using DICOM Q/R to review
images from ImageVault.
If you are unsure about the way the above unit mentioned will be used in an ImageVault network,
please connect your local network service specialist or the OLC. Contact data can be found last
page.
ISSUE:
The issue caused by missing the setup of this procedure will be, in worst case, total image data loss.
To avoid this issue, the procedure below has to be applied on all units and scenarios as outlined above.
7 - 14 Section 7-7 - Work-around procedure for connecting Vivid E9 to ImageVault v4.x

7-7-2 Connectivity Work-around - Image Vault v4.3

Work-around procedure connecting VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to Image Vault v4.3
Until the ImageVault v5.0 will be installed, all raw data conversion has to be performed by the sending
unit. To achieve this, settings have to be executed or checked.
7-7-2-1 Affected Dataflows

Remote Archive - Remote HD.
Worklist/Local Archive - Dicom Server/Int.HD.
Worklist/Remote Archive - Dicom Server/Remote.HD.
Local Archive - Int.HD/DICOM Server.
Remote Archive - rem.HD/DICOM Server.
Remote Import/Export.
Worklist/Remote Archive - Remote Storage.
7-7-2-2 Limitations / Implications

The disadvantage for the user, is longer time to store the study. Approx. 2-3 minutes extra time for a
typical study. So for each site where this work around is relevant, please check carefully first if it is really
necessary.

7-7-2-3 Configure VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to the work around

Please refer to below screen dump for details:
1.) Select the Config Tab.

2.) Select Connectivity Tab.
3.) Select Dataflow Tab.
4.) Select the dataflow
NOTE: As sample screen dump the Remote Archive - Remote Storage was used.
These settings have to be repeated for every data flow mentioned in 7-7-2-1 "Affected
Dataflows" on page 7-15.
5.) Click Properties.

6.) Under Image Settings, select check marks as shown in screen dump:
- Allow Raw Data.
- Allow Multiframe.
- The specific configuration of Max.Framerate, Compression, Quality should be similar to those
set on i.e. LTS configuration on ImageVault.
NOTE: If ImageVault is set to compress raw data, please select the check mark Raw Compr., not
selected in the screen dump.
7.) Click OK.

For details see below screen dump:
Figure 7-1 Workaround details
7 - 16 Section 7-7 - Work-around procedure for connecting Vivid E9 to ImageVault v4.x

7-7-2-4 Reverse configuration on Vivid E9
WARNING DO NOT EXECUTE THIS STEP UNTIL IMAGEVAULT V5.0 IS INSTALLED! ELSE IMAGE
DATA LOSS MIGHT OCCUR!
Please refer to below screen dump for details:
1.) Select the Config Tab.

2.) Select Connectivity Tab.
3.) Select Dataflow Tab.
4.) Select the dataflow
NOTE: As sample screen dump the Remote Archive - Remote Storage was used.
These settings have to be repeated for every data flow mentioned in 7-7-2-1 "Affected
Dataflows" on page 7-15.
5.) Click Properties.

6.) Under Image Settings, unselect check marks you have selected in 7-7-2-3 "Configure VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 to the work around" on page 7-16. This means you unselect the checkmarks for:
- Raw Data.
- Multiframe.
7.) Click OK.
Figure 7-2 Reverse work around details

Section 7-8
InSite ExC troubleshooting
7-8-1 Wrong System ID in InSite
Even if the System ID is correct on the Tcpip screen, the System ID in InSite is wrong. To correct this
issue, use the Set Serial Number CD, Part Number GA200649.
To use this tool, follow this procedure:
1.) Insert the Set Serial Number CD in the upper DVD drive.
2.) Restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
3.) Enter the correct Serial Number when asked for.
4.) Remove the CD from the DVD drive.
After a restart, the System ID should be correct in InSite.
7-8-2 Basic Connectivity
7-8-2-1 Prerequisites
Questra agent is configured in the Common Service Desktop (CSD).
No proxy is selected unless supplied by the customer.
Access is available to Internet Explorer on the desktop of the product.
System has IP/Gateway/Subnet Mask assigned and active.
System has been rebooted since configuration changes.
7 - 18 Section 7-8 - InSite ExC troubleshooting

7-8-3 Troubleshooting flowchart
Start Requirements for VPN:

1. IP address 150.2.1.251 and port number
8002 must be in the proxy configuration.
System configured to use InSite 2. Upgrades from InSite must have the same
VPN or via Internet? IP address and gateway as previous machine.
InSite 3. New machines will require a VPN add form
Internet VPN in order to connect.
(default
method)
The hospital is not allowing the system to route
Open Internet Explorer and type: out. Request IT to open a path to the Internet
https://198.169.188.10:443 port 443 (Secure Socket Layer).
No message
Returns GE Message
No returned?
Healthcare
Web Server? (Access
Denied)
Yes Yes
The hospital firewall is blocking your access
Type:
https://us1-ws.service.gehealthcare.com:443
to the Internet. Request IT to allow access.
No DNS server is available. Use Other
Yes No on the Questra configuration page and
carefully type these IP addresses;
Server: https://198.169.188.10:443
Re-check configuration and Tunnel: https://198.169.188.11:443
reboot. System should work.
Figure 7-3 Basic Connectivity Troubleshooting Flowchart

Section 7-9
Gathering Troubleshooting Data
Trouble images and system data (logs) can be acquired at the device or through remote diagnostics
(InSite). These data can be used to perform service at the device, or can be sent back to the
manufacturer for analysis.

7-9-3 Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-9-4 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-9-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7-9-3 Collect Vital System Information

The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
Product Name = VIVID E9 or VIVID E7
Select Config (F2) > About screen.
Applications Software
- Application Software Version

- Application Software CD Part Number
System Software
- System Software Revision

- System Software CD Part Number
7 - 20 Section 7-9 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

7-9-4 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs

If the system should malfunction, press the Alt+D keys simultaneously. This will collect a screen capture
of the monitor, system presets and several log files in a date and time stamped .zip file.
NOTE: This function may also be used to make a Print Screen.
The Alt+D function is available at all times.
When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box appears that allows for;
a place to enter a description of the issue

a check box to indicate a System lockup
a choice to Export to a pre-formatted CD-R/DVD-R or save to the Export directory D: drive (for
remote viewing through InSite).
NOTE: You MUST select one of the available devices as the destination device if it is to be different
than the default Export directory on the hard drive.
The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression.
Figure 7-4 System problem report (ALT+D dialog box)
TYPE DESCRIPTION OF ISSUE HERE
SELECT IF YOUVE HAD A SYSTEM

LOCKUP (AFTER RESTART)
SELECT WHERE TO STORE THE

REPORT
7-9-4-1 Advanced log options

Extensive Log enables the creation of a log file containing additional information for the selected
functionality.
Options enables creation of a log file based on a selected bookmark or for a user configurable time
frame. Different type of information can be selected to be part of the log file.

7-9-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer

A sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it.
NOTE: If you are launching the network sniffer from the Utilities menu (7-12-16-15 "Distinct Network
Monitor" on page 7-115), you can begin with step 4 of this procedure. If you want to launch the
sniffer from the Windows Desktop, start with step 1 of this procedure.
1.) Power Down the system as described in 4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-8.
2.) Access the Windows Desktop. Be sure to boot into Windows only.
3.) From the Start menu, select Programs > Distinct > Network Monitor.
The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens (Figure 7-5).
Figure 7-5 Distinct Network Monitor screen
4.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen (Figure 7-5), select Configure > Capture Settings. The
Configuration screen opens.
Figure 7-6 Configuration screen

7-9-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (contd)

NOTE: Steps 5 - 12 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this systems network activity.
If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will
capture all network activity, not just this systems.
5.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-6), select the Filters tab
6.) In the New Filter section confirm built-in templates is selected, then click Create.
Figure 7-7 Configuration - Filters Tab
7.) On the Select Filter Task screen (Figure 7-7), select Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more
IP addresses, then select Next.
The Enter Filter Settings screen opens (Figure 7-8).
Figure 7-8 Enter Filter Settings
8.) Enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the Add button (Figure 7-8. Repeat this step for
all IP addresses you wish to add, then select Finish.
The Enter Filter Settings screen closes.


9.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-9).
10.)In the Filter to Apply field, select My Computer.
Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
11.)Select Close. The Configuration screen closes.

12.)On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play).
NOTE: The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop.
13.)Double-click on the Go Ichiro icon to start the system application.

14.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS,
etc.). Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.


15.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager. Select Exit to
close the application and return to Windows. Then open Windows Task Manager to open the
Distinct Network Monitor screen.
Figure 7-10 Application Tab on Windows Task Manager screen
16.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button. The
Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.
17.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-3), select Capture > Stop. After stopping the data
collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-10 opens.
Figure 7-11 Capture Data Sample
18.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name D:\log\Sniffer\MyLog .
19.)Select Save.


20.)On the Save As Capture File dialog (Figure 7-12), select Save.
Figure 7-12 Save As Capture File dialog box
21.)Check the D:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files: MyLog.cap,
MyLog.num.
22.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.

Section 7-10
Screen Captures
7-10-1 Purpose of this Section
To capture screen images that can be used for diagnostic and troubleshooting purposes.

7-10-1 Purpose of this Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-10-3 Ctrl+PrintScreen shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-10-4 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-10-3 Ctrl+PrintScreen shortcut

A Ctrl+PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image displayed on the system. Images
captured using this shortcut are saved in the D:\export directory using both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw
DICOM (.dcm) formats.
The InSite connection will have access to the export folder on the D: drive to retrieve these images.
This feature will allow the customer to quickly and easily acquire images that can then be viewed by the
OLC.
7-10-4 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut

1.) With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc (print screen) keys
simultaneously.
2.) From the touch panel, select Utility > Service > Utilities > Common Utilities > Image Compress
& Delete Utilities. 7-12-16-13 "Image Compress & Delete Utility" on page 7-113.
3.) Select the check box for the image(s) you want to save in the D:\export directory.
4.) Select Compress Files.
A compressed file of the images is stored in D:\export. You may rely on the date and time of the
Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent image recorded.
The uncompressed files are stored in d:\export\service\image.

Section 7-11
Virtual Console Observation (VCO)
7-11-1 Purpose of this Section
This section describes how to use the Virtual Console Observation (VCO) feature for remote service
capability.

7-11-1 Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-11-3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7-11-4 How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7-11-5 How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-11-6 Customer Enables VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7 - 28 Section 7-11 - Virtual Console Observation (VCO)

7-11-3 General
This tool allows you to view the entire customer's desktop and operating system.
Using VCO, a remote service technician or the Online Center (OLC) can access and modify all scanner
settings and programs on the customer's ultrasound scanner.
The customer has to enable this feature by choosing Disruptive Mode and confirming Yes, before a
GE Service FE can access the customers ultrasound scanner remotely. Disruptive Mode can be
requested remotely by the service technician or OLC, or it can be selected by the customer directly on
the scanner or workstation.
NOTE: Only GE Service personnel have access to this feature. A password is required. All actions and
changes should be documented.
7-11-4 How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO

1.) The OLC or FE connects to the remote scanner or workstation through a Remote Service Tool
(RST).
NOTE: The behavior of the Remote Service Tool (RST) is beyond the scope of this manual. The
following steps describe the activities that take place once the OLC or FE remotely enables
connection to the scanner or workstation.
Once connected to the remote scanner the OLC or FE will sign in at the Service Login Screen (See
Disruptive Mode on page 7-30.).
GEVU General
Vivid E9
2.) Select GE Service, enter the current password, and select Okay.
3.) Select Utilities > Common Utilities > Disruptive Mode (See: Figure 7-14 "Disruptive Mode" on page
7-30).

7-11-4 How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO (contd)
Figure 7-14 Disruptive Mode
4.) To Enable Disruptive Mode select Yes.

5.) A request is sent to the scanner or workstation asking permission to diagnose the system remotely.
The customer receives the InSite Notification shown in Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15 InSite Notification


6.) The customer selects Yes.
NOTE: If the customer does not wish to have diagnostics running at the time of the request, they select
No. A message is sent back to the OLC or FE that Disruptive Mode is not enabled.
The screen below confirms the Disruptive Mode status change.
Figure 7-16 Disruptive Mode Enabled
7.) After Disruptive Mode is enabled, Virtual Console Observation can be activated by selecting
Utilities > Common Utilities > Virtual Console Observation, and then pressing the Start button.
If Virtual Console Observation has been activated successfully, the following display is shown to the
OLC or FE:
Figure 7-17 Virtual Console Observation is Running
8.) To terminate Virtual Console Observation, the OLC or FE can press the Stop button.


9.) Once the OLC or FE selects Stop, Figure 7-18 is displayed.
Figure 7-18 Virtual Console Observation is stopped
10.)An attempt to activate the Virtual Console Observation Tool without first enabling Disruptive
11.)Mode will result in the screen display shown in Figure 7-19:
Figure 7-19 Virtual Console Observation Warning

7-11-5 How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode

Perform these steps for a customer to enable Disruptive Mode.
1.) Click on the Service Browser wrench icon in the applications status bar at the bottom of the
ultrasound display. This icon links the User or Field Engineer (FE) to the Service Login screen
shown in Figure 7-20 "Service Login Screen" on page 7-33.
NOTE: The screen in Figure 7-20 "Service Login Screen" on page 7-33 is an example from an
engineering system. The System Type and/or System ID will vary between scanners and
workstations.
GEVU General
Vivid E9
2.) Select Operator and enter the password ULS, then click Okay.
3.) Select Utilities > Common Utilities > Disruptive Mode (See: Figure 7-21).

7-11-5 How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode (contd)

4.) To Enable Disruptive Mode select Yes.
The screen below confirms the Disruptive Mode status change.
Figure 7-21 Disruptive Mode Enabled
7-11-6 Customer Enables VCO

Perform these steps for a customer to enable VCO:
1.) Left click on the InSite icon.

2.) Select Clinical Life Line. This will activate disruptive mode and VCO for the application OLC to
quickly assist the customer.
3.) If you select Clinical Life Line again, it will turn off disruptive mode and VCO.
4.) A Red message indicating that the system should be rebooted will remain until the system is
rebooted.

Section 7-12
Common Service Desktop
This section describes the features of the Common Service Desktop (CSD).
NOTE: Detach probes and reboot system after performing any diagnostics.
As described in Components and functions (theory), the service platform uses a web-based user
interface (UI) to provide access to common service components. A service key (dongle - part number
066E0703) is required to access areas proprietary to GE.
NOTE: When using the Common Service Desktop do NOT minimize any of the Common Service
Desktop windows. If you minimize them they end up in the lower left corner of the screen behind
the Service Desktop Manager window and cannot be restored.

7-12-3 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7-12-4 Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7-12-5 Diagnostics Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7-12-6 Diagnostic Utility Freezes Up/Times Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-12-7 Diagnostic Symptom Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7-12-8 Diagnostics - Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7-12-9 Diagnostics - Engineering Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7-12-10 Diagnostics - Non-Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
7-12-11 Diagnostics - Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
7-12-12 Diagnostics - Service Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7-12-13 Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7-12-14 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
7-12-15 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
7-12-16 Utilities - Common Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
7-12-17 Utilities - Scanner Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-118
7-12-18 Dicom Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-118
7-12-19 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-119
7-12-20 PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120
7-12-21 Exit From Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120
7-12-22 Restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 After Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120

7-12-3 Home
The Home page displays a summary of information from various items that are monitored.
System Information hardware versions (Boards/FRUs, Console), software versions (both

System software (base Image) and Application software).
- Click Details to view the Server History of all TCP/IP pages that have occurred to the system
since the system was re-ghosted. See 7-12-3-1 "Server History Log" on page 7-37.
Connected Probes probes connected, network devices connected, and peripherals connected.
Options Installed with status and expiration date.
Windows Printers lists available printers.
Current System Status lists Current System status
System Health Information alerts for temperature, FRUs, application, OS, and archive.
- Check Auto Update and set the Frequency (in seconds) for the system to perform self-checks.
- Click the Update link to manually refresh the System Health Information.
Figure 7-22 Home window (Example)
7 - 36 Section 7-12 - Common Service Desktop

7-12-3-1 Server History Log

If you click Details (see: Figure 7-22 "Home window (Example)" on page 7-36) to view the Server History
of all TCP/IP pages that have occurred to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 since it was last re-ghosted.
Figure 7-23 Server History Log

7-12-4 Error Logs

1.) From the Log Viewer page click the Click Here link.
Figure 7-24 Error Logs - Log Viewer (Example)
On VIVID E9/VIVID E7 there are

two choices:
- Log Viewer
- Diag Results
2.) Select the Log you wish to view.
Figure 7-25 Log Viewer - Log Options (Example)

Logs on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7:
- System
- Start Loader
- Informatics
- DC Voltage
- Tx Power
- Temperature
- Dicom
- Boards

7-12-4 Error Logs (contd)

Features of the log viewer include:
Plot logs and pages using the Utilities menu.

Text search using the Search menu.
Color-coded log entries to identify severity levels:
- Severity 3 = Green (the parameter is within 5%-0% of specification)
- Severity 2 = Orange (the parameter is within 10% to 5% of specification)
- Severity 1 = Red (the parameter is fully out of specification)
Figure 7-26 Log Viewer - Sample Page

7-12-5 Diagnostics Window Overview
Figure 7-27 Diagnostic Window Overview (Example)
3 4 5 6 7
The digits in Figure 7-27 corresponds to the numbered list below:
1.) Instructions Frame

- Displays either test-specific text or the default instructions.
2.) Status Frame
- Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts,
the frame displays the current status of all test results.
- The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and
Operator Feedback.
3.) Loop Count
- This is an editable text field that only accepts numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the
switch is configured as an execute switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried
to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.
4.) Execute Button
- This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:
- Execute - to start the diagnostic
- Abort - to stop a diagnostic
5.) Progress Indicator
- Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.
6.) Short Text Message
- Displays brief messages about the tests progress during execution.
7.) Status Frame Background Color
- Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to
indicate completion status.
- Code Status Fail = Red
- Code Status Pass = Green
- Code Status Abort = Yellow

7-12-5 Diagnostics Window Overview (contd)

The Service Diagnostics windows have some advanced features.
NOTE: The Loop Count field must have a value of 2 or greater to activate the Advanced features.
Figure 7-28 Advanced Features of Service Diagnostic Windows
9
10
11
8.) This button toggles between Standard and Advanced mode. The window below shows the
advanced features.
9.) Select the choice for Stop On Failure for the Looping and List sections:
- Yes = the test will abort at the first failure
- No = the test will complete even if there are failures
10.)Select the choice for Stop On Abort for the Looping and List sections:
- List = the list will abort when you click the Abort button
- Loop = the looping will abort when you click the Abort button
- Diag = the diagnostic test will abort when you click the Abort button
11.)Select the Loop Order:
- ABCABCABC = Runs the selected diagnostics as one group and runs each group for the
number of loops specified.
- AAABBBCCC = Runs the selected diagnostics one at a time for the maximum loop value then
proceeds to the next diagnostic.

7-12-5 Diagnostics Window Overview (contd)

Some diagnostic windows that verify the tolerance of known values, compile the test data and display
it in a table. You can access this data through the Details links.
12.)Click the Details icon to open the Details window.
12
13.)Click the See Details link to compile the Details data.
13
14.)The table displays the compiled detail data.
14

7-12-6 Diagnostic Utility Freezes Up/Times Out

If the diagnostic utility has timed out (freezes up, will no longer run) you have to reboot the scanner. This
may occur when issues with the scanner cause the diagnostic utility to fail completion of an executed
test.

7-12-7 Diagnostic Symptom Guide

Use this Diagnostic Symptom Table to help match a symptom with the possible diagnostic test.
For additional troubleshooting help, see Section 7-14 "Troubleshooting" on page 7-123 and
Section 7-5 "Troubleshooting Tips" on page 7-6.
Table 7-2 Diagnostic Symptom Table
Symptom Diagnostic Test
Audio - General/PC Audio Problems 7-12-12-9 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-91
7-12-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-76

Audio - Doppler Problems 7-12-11-3 "Audio" on page 7-68
7-12-12-9 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-91

Communication Problems
7-12-12-2 "Memory" on page 7-74
Connectivity/Network Problems 7-12-10-7 "Network Interface" on page 7-63
7-12-12-5 "Noise" on page 7-81

Image - Artifacts/Noise
7-12-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-76
7-12-12-6 "Analog Receive" on page 7-82

Image - Channel Failures/Noise
7-12-12-5 "Noise" on page 7-81
Image - Pixilated/Jagged edges 7-12-12-1 "Digital Receive" on page 7-70
Image - Scanner Refresh is Slow/ Image Hangs 7-12-10-6 "Video Card" on page 7-62
7-12-12-1 "Digital Receive" on page 7-70

Intermittent General Problems 7-12-10-8 "CMOS" on page 7-64
7-12-10-9 "DRAM Memory" on page 7-65
Keyboard Not Typing Correct Characters 7-12-11-1 "Keyboard" on page 7-66

Monitor not working
7-12-10-6 "Video Card" on page 7-62
Printer Problems 7-12-12-9 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-91
Scanning problems - Stops,

7-12-12-10 "Tx Power Supply Test" on page 7-94
interrupted, wont scan
Simulator Mode - Scanner launches into Simulator

Mode
7-12-10-3 "Hard Disk Surface Scan" on page 7-59

7-12-10-4 "Hard Disk Quick Test" on page 7-60
Slow Computing Speed
7-12-16-10 "Disk Defragmenter" on page 7-110
7-12-16-3 "Disk Usage" on page 7-103
7-12-12-4 "System" on page 7-79

Temperature - High/out of Spec
TGC Problems 7-12-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-76
7-12-11-2 "Mouse (Trackball)" on page 7-67

Trackball is Sticky & Squeaky, cursor is hard to control
4-2-19 "Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4)" on page 4-53
USB Ports/Devices not working 7-12-12-9 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-91
Voltage out of Spec 7-12-12-4 "System" on page 7-79

7-12-7 Diagnostic Symptom Guide (contd)
Table 7-3 GFI FRU Tests Table
FRU
Loop
Back
Connect
or Back
(Service End FREY Main
or Eng GRX64/ GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX Pro- BACK Fan Power
Test Tool) GRLY GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) GFI cessor PLANE Tray Supply
GFI Swept
Demodulator T R R R
Test
GFI Front-
End Interface T R R R
Test
GFI Analog
T R R R T R R R
Test
GFI Memory
T R R R
Access Test
GFE Access
T R R R
Test
Probe LVDS
R T T R R R
Test
GFI Fan Test T R R T R
Relay LVDS
T T R R R
Test
GFI GTX Test T T T T R R R
GFI Fixed
T R R R
Demod Test
Key:
T: The FRU is tested with the test.
R: The FRU is required for the test but is not specifically tested.

Table 7-4 Digital Receive Tests Table
FRU
Test DRX (slot2) DRX (slot3) DRX (slot4) GFI Back End Processor FREY BACK PLANE
FDEMOD Signal Test T T T T R R
DRX High Speed Bit Error Test T T T R R R
DRX IF FPGA Test T T T R R R
DRX ASIC Test T T T R R R
DRX Signal Path Test T T T R R R
Nathan Channel Repeater T T T R R R
Nathan Alignment Test T T T R R R
Nathan Input TVG Alignment T T T R R R
Nathan MLA Data Alignment T T T R R R
Key:
Table 7-5 Memory Tests Table
FRU
GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX

Test (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) GFI Back End Processor FREY BACK PLANE
GFI Memory Access Test T R R
DRX IF FPGA Memory Test T T T R R R
DRX Memory Test T T T R R R
GTX IF FPGA Memory Test T T T R R R
GTX Memory Test T T T R R R
Key:
Table 7-6 System Tests Table
FRU
GRX64/ GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX Back End FREY BACK Fan
Test GRLY GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) GFI Processor PLANE Tray
System Temperature
T T T T T T T T R R T
Test
System Voltage Test T T T T T T T T R R R
FPGA Version Test T T T T T T T T T R R
Key:

Table 7-7 Noise Test Table
FRU
GRX64/
Test GRLY GRX128 DRX (slot2) DRX (slot3) DRX (slot4) GFI Back End Processor FREY BACK PLANE
Noise Floor Test T T R R R R R R
Key:
Table 7-8 Analog Receive Tests Table
FRU
GRX64/ DRX DRX DRX Back End FREY BACK Front Plane Front Plane
Test GRLY GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) GFI Processor PLANE (upper) (lower)
DC Offset Calibration R R T T T R R R R R
Analog Rx Test (High gain) R T T T T R R R R R
Analog Rx Test (Medium gain) R T T T T R R R R R
Analog Rx Test (Low gain) R T T T T R R R R R
Key:
Table 7-9 Analog CW Tests Table
FRU
Back End FREY BACK

Test GRX128w/CW GFI Processor PLANE Front Plane (upper) Front Plane (lower)
GRX aCW Dual Channel T T R R R R
GRX aCW Beam Forming T T R R R R
GRX aCW IQ Symmetry T T R R R R
GRX aCW Mixer Clock Sync T T R R R R
GRX aCW BP Filter/Mixer Clk T T R R R R
GRX aCW Post Mixer Gain T T R R R R
GRX aCW Doppler LPF T T R R R R
GRX aCW Dither Injection T T R R R R
GRX aCW Pedof T T R R R R
GRX ADC Digital LVDS T T R R R R
GRX Mixer Phase Setup T T R R R R
Key:
aCw: Analog CW Doppler receiver

Table 7-10 Transmit Tests Table
FRU
GTX GTX GTX

Test (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) GFI Back End Processor FREY BACK PLANE Main Power Supply
GTX High Speed Bit Error Test T T T R R R R
Key:
Table 7-11 Transmit and Receive Tests Table
FRU
Loop
Back
Connect
or
(Service FREY Front Front
or Eng GRX64/ GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX Back End BACK Plane Plane
Test Tool) GRLY GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) GFI Processor PLANE (upper (lower)
T/R
Channel T T T T T T T T T R R R R
Test
Key:

Table 7-12 GRLY Tests Table

FRU
DL Loop
Loop Back
Test Back FREY Front Front
Connector DRX DRX DRX Back End
Connector GRLY GRX128 GFI Back Plane Plane
(Service or (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) Processor
(Service or Plane (upper) (lower)
Eng Tool)
Eng Tool)
GRLY
Receive Test R T T R R R R R R R R
conn 1
GRLY
conn 2
GRLY
conn 3
GRLY
conn 4
GRLY Pedof
T R R R R R R R R R
CW
4V T R R R R R R R R R
4V T R R R R R R R R R
Key:
Table 7-13 I/O Board Tests Table
FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor I/O Board FREY BACK PLANE Monitor External Monitor (Mfg tool)
I/O Board Pwr Supply Test R T
I/O Board GFI Voltage Test T R T R
GFI Temperature Test T R T R
I/O Board Self Test R T
I/O Board Loop Back Test R T
I/O Board Audio Test T R T R
Video Status (Manufacturing) R T T
Video Status (Service) R T T
Key:

Table 7-14 Tx Power Supply Tests Table
FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor FREY BACK PLANE Main Power Supply
TxPs Control Test R T
TxPs Watchdog Test T R R T
TxPs Alarm Test R T
TxPs Keep Alive Test T T
Key:
Table 7-15 Extended Power Shutdown Tests Table
FRU
Test Back End Processor I/O Board Extended Power Shutdown
Extended Power Shutdown

R R T
Detection Test

R R T
Voltage Test

R R T
Load Test

R R T
Charge State Test
Key:

Table 7-16 Tx Power Supply Tests Table
FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor FREY BACK PLANE Main Power Supply
TxPs Control Test R T
TxPs Watchdog Test T R R T
TxPs Alarm Test R T
TxPs Keep Alive Test T T
Key:
Table 7-17 BEP Tests Table
FRU
Test Back End Processor
Essential Test T
Hard Disk Long T
Hard Disk Short T
Memory T
Network Adapter T
System Board T
Video T
Key:

Table 7-18 BEP Interactive Tests Table
FRU
Test Back End Processor I/O Board OP Panel Monitor
AVI playback T
CD-R test T
CD-RW T
DVD-R T
DVD-RDL T
DVD-RW T
DVD+R T
DVD+RDL T
DVD+RW T
DVD_RAM T
DVD READONLY T
Keyboard* T T
Microphone T
Monitor T T T
Trackball T T
Sound T
USB Ports T T
Key:
* When testing footswitch, footswitch connection is required.
Table 7-19 Touch Panel Tests Table
FRU
Test Back End Processor OP Panel
TP Calibration R T
TP Cal Verification R T
TP Cal Verification Off R T
Key:

Table 7-20 DVR Tests Table
FRU
Test Back End Processor DVR
Self Test R T
Version Information R T
Key:
Table 7-21 Patient I/O Test Table
FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor Main Power Supply Patient I/O
Patient I/O T T R T
Key:

7-12-8 Diagnostics - Common Diagnostics
7-12-8-1 Disruptive Mode

The customer enables this feature by choosing Disruptive Mode and confirming Yes, before a GE
Service FE can access the customers ultrasound scanner remotely.
Disruptive Mode can be requested remotely by the service technician or OLC, or it can be selected by
the customer directly on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
See Section 7-11 "Virtual Console Observation (VCO)" on page 7-28 for details.
Figure 7-32 Disruptive Mode Utility Window (Example)

7-12-8-2 System Shutdown

System Shutdown is intended for use from a remote computer. The menu gives you the ability to either
Restart or Shutdown the system.
NOTE: Retain Disruptive Mode:

- Retain Disruptive Mode MUST be checked if you are working from a remote computer.
- Retain Disruptive Mode should be unchecked if you are working locally, on the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7.
Figure 7-33 System Shutdown Window

7-12-9 Diagnostics - Engineering Diagnostics
7-12-9-1 Reset PC Diagnostics

See 7-12-5 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-40 for a description of this windows features.
This function resets the PC diagnostics tool (PC-Doctor) to its default settings.
Figure 7-34 Reset PC Diagnostics Window

7-12-10 Diagnostics - Non-Interactive Tests
7-12-10-1 Essential Tests

Runs tests on essential functions of the BEP. This is a good starting point for isolation issues that may
originate from the BEP. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window.
Run Time: About 2 minutes.
1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button.
3.) Failed tests may have another diagnostic test that can help isolate the failure, or will indicate which
part to replace. For:
- PCI Bus configuration - run 7-12-10-5 "PCIBus" on page 7-61.
- CMOS memory - run 7-12-10-8 "CMOS" on page 7-64.
- CPU - run 7-12-10-2 "System Board" on page 7-58.
- RAM - run 7-12-10-9 "DRAM Memory" on page 7-65.
- Hard Drive status and Random Seek - run 7-12-10-3 "Hard Disk Surface Scan" on page 7-59
and run 7-12-10-4 "Hard Disk Quick Test" on page 7-60.
- Network Interface (loop back only) - run 7-12-10-7 "Network Interface" on page 7-63.
Figure 7-35 Essential Tests Window

7-12-10-2 System Board

Runs tests on essential functions of the PC Mother Board. The test results are displayed in the Status
portion of the window.
Run Time: About 1 minute.
3.) If there are any failures: Check the Motherboard Harness. Swap with a known good harness.
4.) If the problem continues: Replace the BEP.
Figure 7-36 System Board Window

7-12-10-3 Hard Disk Surface Scan

Runs tests on essential functions of the Hard Disk. The test results are displayed in the Status portion
of the window. This test can take a long time to complete. For a quick test to determine if there are
possible problems with the hard disk, run 7-12-10-4 "Hard Disk Quick Test" on page 7-60 before running
this test.
The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the hard disk controller and the drive
mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked.
Drive Status - Hard disk drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one track at a
time.
Random Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times.
Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the hard disk drive.
Run Time: May take over an hour.
3.) If there are any failures: Replace the Hard Disk.
Figure 7-37 Hard Disk Surface Scan Window

7-12-10-4 Hard Disk Quick Test

Runs an overview set of tests on essential functions of the Hard Disk. The test results are displayed in
the Status portion of the window. Run this test before running the 7-12-10-3 "Hard Disk Surface Scan"
on page 7-59.
Run Time: May take about 6 minutes.
2.) Click the Execute button. If there are any failures:
3.) Defragment the Hard Disk. See 7-12-16-10 "Disk Defragmenter" on page 7-110. If the problem
continues:
4.) Run the 7-12-10-3 "Hard Disk Surface Scan" on page 7-59. If the problem continues:
5.) Replace the Hard Drive.
Figure 7-38 Hard Disk Quick Test Window

7-12-10-5 PCIBus
Runs a test on essential functions of the PCIBus. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of
the window.
A Bus is a set of circuits, wires or connectors that connect the various components of a system. A PCI
(Peripheral Component Interconnect) Bus is a fast standard bus which is common in Pentium systems.
Various tests are run on the PCIBus in order to ensure it is working up to speed.
The motherboard is scanned to verify the configuration space and to make sure the diagnostics can
communicate with the board.
2.) Click the Execute button. If there are any failures:
3.) Check the motherboard harness. Swap with a known good harness. If the problem continues:
4.) Replace the Motherboard. If the problem continues:
5.) Replace the BEP.
Figure 7-39 PCIBus Window

7-12-10-6 Video Card

Runs a test on essential functions of the Video Card (Graphics Card). The test results are displayed in
the Status portion of the window.
This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the video memory with 18
patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see these tests being performed
on your monitor.
You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key.
The following tests are performed on the Video Card, and can be watched at your monitor:
Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one pattern at a
time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color.
Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These tests will
appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various sizes and
colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed.
Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video device driver
and video controller.
Run Time: May take about 10 minutes.
3.) Replace the Video Card if there are any errors. If the problem continues:
Figure 7-40 Video Card Window

7-12-10-7 Network Interface

Runs a test on essential functions of the Network Interface. The test requires the system to be
connected to a network. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window.
This test gives the current status of the network and provides the option to restart the network
components in the BEP.
Figure 7-41 Network Interface Window

7-12-10-8 CMOS
Runs a test on essential functions of the CMOS. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of
the window.
3.) Replace the BEP if any tests fail.
Figure 7-42 CMOS Window

7-12-10-9 DRAM Memory

Runs a test on essential functions of the DRAM Memory. The test results are displayed in the Status
portion of the window.
3.) Replace the BEP if any tests fail.
Figure 7-43 DRAM Memory Window
7-12-10-10 Parallel Port

The BEP used on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 doesnt have a Parallel Port, so there is no need to run this
test.

7-12-11 Diagnostics - Interactive Tests
7-12-11-1 Keyboard
1.) Click the Execute button on the Keyboard window. The PC-Doctor Keyboard Test opens.
2.) Select your keyboard type from the drop-down menu. Usually the default choice is the correct one.
3.) Click the Start button.
4.) Press each key on the systems keyboard once and make sure the corresponding keys on-screen
are removed from view.
- Click the Pass button if all the keys are removed from the PC-Doctor Keyboard Test.
- Click the Fail button if any key is not removed from the on-screen keyboard. Failed keys may
be damaged and you may have to have your keyboard repaired or replaced.
- Click the Abort button to exit the test.
5.) The test status is displayed in the Current Status portion of the window.
Figure 7-44 Keyboard Window

7-12-11-2 Mouse (Trackball)

Runs a test on essential functions of the Trackball. The test results are displayed in the Status portion
of the window.
3.) Verify the signal cable is connected securely.
4.) Clean the Trackball. For cleaning instructions, see: 4-2-19 "Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4)"
on page 4-53.
5.) If the problem continues: Replace the Trackball.
Figure 7-45 Mouse Window

7-12-11-3 Audio
1.) Click the Execute button at the bottom of the screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the first
test screen to open.
2.) Click Left Front and Right Front buttons to test your speakers. You should hear a recorded message
from each speaker.
3.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low beep from the BEP.
4.) If all work, click the Pass button. Click the Close button.
5.) Do not perform the Microphone Interactive Test. Click the Close button.
6.) To test the WAV sound reproduction, click Left Channel, Right Channel, or Both Channels to test
your speakers. You should hear a guitar chord.
7.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low beep from your PC.
8.) Click the Close button.
9.) When you return to the Audio Test screen, click the Abort button.
10.)After closing the Service screen, you may see a Runtime Error screen(s). Close the screen(s).
11.)Before returning the system to the customer, always remember to reboot.
12.)If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the More Info button in the Audio Test dialog box for
information about possible causes and solutions.
Figure 7-46 Audio Window

7-12-11-4 BEP
Table 7-22 BEP Test Description
Test Description
Essential test PCI, PCI Express, CPU, Memory, HD Disk, and Video
Hard Disk Long N/A
Hard Disk Short N/A
Memory Tests the memory on the mother board
Network Adapter N/A
System board Tests the real time clock
Video Tests the video boards
7-12-11-5 BEP Interactive
Table 7-23 BEP Interactive Test Description
Test Description
AVI playback Tests playing back an AVI file.
CD-R test Tests writing and reading to a CDR
CD-RW Tests writing and reading data to a CD-ROM
DVD-R Tests writing and reading data to a DVD-R disk
DVD-RDL Tests writing and reading to a DVD-R double layer disk
DVD-RW Tests writing and eading a DVD-RW disk
DVD+R Tests writing and reading to DVD+R media.
DVD+RDL DVD+R double layer
DVD+RW DVD+RW read write test
DVD_RAM DVD RAM read and write test
DVD READONLY DVD RAM read test
Keyboard N/A
Microphone N/A
Monitor Monitor test patterns
Trackball N/A
Sound Generates sounds for testing the speakers
USB Ports Lists USB Devices

7-12-12 Diagnostics - Service Diagnostics
7-12-12-1 Digital Receive

See 7-12-5 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-40 for a description of the looping and list
features.
Symptoms:
Intermittent general problems (communication between DRX and GFI)

Image artifacts - pixilated/jagged edges
1.) Select the Digital Receive check box to run all the tests, or select the individual sub tests to run only
the selected tests.
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).
Figure 7-47 Digital Receive Window

7-12-12-1 Digital Receive (contd)
Name: Digital Receive (all tests)

Tests the signal path from the DRX to the GFI to the BEP. Also tests for latency signals of the DRX or
Nathan to the GFI.
Name: FDEMOD Signal Test

Description: Signal path test starting from the Fixed Demod on the GFI
Run Time: 00:03
If this test failed:
1.) Replace the PCIe cable.

2.) Check that the output from the DRX is being received by the GFI. See 7-12-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-
76.
3.) If GFI test above fails, replace the GFI board.
4.) If this test still fails, swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are
moved.
5.) Replace any failed DRX boards.
Name: DRX IF FPGA Test

Description: Signal path test starting from IF FPGA on DRX boards
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
3.) Interface to GFI may be cause of the failure. See 7-12-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-76.
Name: DRX ASIC Test
Description: Digital Signal path tests sourced from output of Nathan ASIC
Run Time: 00:03

Name: DRX Signal Path Test (this test provides the most coverage on the DRX)
Description: Digital signal path sourced from input to Nathan. Does not test ADC. Sends simulated data
across the signal path.
Run Time: 00:03
Name: Nathan Channel Repeater Test

Description: Tests the functionality of the Nathan channel repeater. Looks for latency signal
communication issues analog signal path.
Run Time: 00:05
Name: Nathan Alignment Test

Description: Output TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. Verifies the alignment (16 identical samples in a row) of IF to GFI.
Run Time: 00:05
Name: Nathan Input TVG Alignment Test

Description: Input TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. (Internal and external test modes of Nathan.)
Run Time: 00:05

Name: Nathan MLA Data Alignment Test

Description: Output TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. Each MLA gain is set differently to detect MLA ordering problems. Verifies the alignment (16
identical samples in a row) of IF to GFI.
Run Time: 00:05

7-12-12-2 Memory
features.
Symptoms:
Intermittent Problems
Communication Problems
1.) Select the Memory check box to run all the tests, or select the individual sub tests to run only the
selected tests.
Figure 7-48 Memory Window
Assesses the general state of the system. Tests the integrity of memory and communication of the
described boards. Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. The utility fills the memory with
data, retrieves the data, and compares it to the original data.

7-12-12-2 Memory (contd)
Name: GFI Memory Access Test

Description: Tests the internal and external RAM of the GFI Board.
NOTE: There may be multiple board dependencies causing this test to fail. See also the FDEMOD
Signal Test, 7-12-12-1 "Digital Receive" on page 7-70.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the GFI board.
Name: DRX IF FPGA Memory Test

Description: Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the DRX boards
NOTE: Also run the DRX Memory Test (next test below) for a full range of testing capacity.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed DRX board.
Name: DRX Memory Test

Description: Tests the memory of the Nathan ASICs on the DRX Boards.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed DRX board.
Name: GTX IF FPGA Memory Test

Description: Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the GTX boards
NOTE: Also run the GTX Memory Test (next test below) for a full range of testing capacity.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed GTX board.
Name: GTX Memory Test

Description: Tests memory of the David ASICs on the GTX Board
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed GTX board.

7-12-12-3 GFI
features.
Symptoms:
TGC Problems
Doppler Audio Problems
Image Artifacts
Intermittent Instability
1.) Select the GFI check box to run all the tests, or select the individual sub tests to run only the
selected tests.
Figure 7-49 GFI Window
Name: GFI Swept Demodulator Test

Description: Performs a signal path test of the swept demodulator FPGA on the GFI
Run Time: 00:05

7-12-12-3 GFI (contd)
Name: GFI Front-End Interface Test

Description: Test that the GFI can access Front-End cards
Run Time: 00:06

2.) If the diagnostic identifies problems with other boards, run tests on those boards also.
3.) Replace any other failed boards as identified by the diagnostics for those boards. Name: GFI
Analog Test
Description: Tests the analog circuitry of the GFI Board.
NOTE: Used for test purposes only. There may not be any symptoms displayed by the system.
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Also run the Analog RX Tests (high, medium, low gain) for a complete test of the GFI gain.
See 7-12-12-6 "Analog Receive" on page 7-82.
Name: GFI Memory Access Test

Description: Tests the internal and external RAM of the GFI Board. (Same as the GFI Memory Test)
Run Time: 00:01
Name: GFE Version Test

Description: Reads the version of the GFE FPGA
Run Time: 00:01
Name: Relay LVDS Test

Description: Tests the LVDS connection between the GFI interface and the GRLY
Run Time: 00:02
1.) Swap GFI boards and/or GRLY board to determine which board has failed.
2.) Replace the failed board.

7-12-12-3 GFI (contd)
Name: GFI GTX Test

Description: Test communication with the GTX Board. (Same as the GFI Memory Test)
Run Time: 00:03
Name: GFI Fixed Demod Test

Description: GFI Fixed Demodulator signal path test. (Similar to the FDEMOD test with a slight variation
on how the test is run.)
Run Time: 00:03

7-12-12-4 System
features.
Symptoms:
High temperature reports on the Home page.

Temperature specifications are out of tolerance.
Voltage specifications are out of tolerance.
1.) Select the System check box to run all the tests, or select the individual sub tests to run only the
selected tests.
Figure 7-50 System Window

7-12-12-4 System (contd)
Name: System Temperature Test
NOTE: You can also view temperature logs in the System Health Information section of the Home
page. These logs may help identify a trend or subsystem where temperature and voltage have
been high, low, or erratic. See 7-12-3 "Home" on page 7-36 for temperature logs/reports.
Description: Compares all system temperatures to their specified values
Run Time: 00:01
If temperature specifications are out of tolerance:
1.) The system should not be in a small enclosed space with other equipment that generates a lot of
heat. Move the system away from walls and other equipment.
2.) Clean or replace any dirty fan filters.
3.) Replace the fan tray beneath the Card Rack if the tachometer readings are slow.
4.) Check the fan on the BEP and replace the fan if it is not working.
5.) Replace the GFI board if none of the above fixes the temperature problems.
Name: System Voltage Test

Description: Compares all system voltages to their specified values
Run Time: 00:01
If any system is out of tolerance:
1.) Check the voltage test points on the system boards.

2.) Replace the system boards that are out of tolerance.
3.) Check the power supply.
4.) Replace the power supply if it is out of tolerance.

7-12-12-5 Noise
features.
Symptoms:
Image artifacts
Image noise
Poor image quality
Missing image channels
1.) Select the Noise check box or the individual sub test to run the test.
3.) Click Execute to run the test.
Figure 7-51 Noise Window
Name: Noise Floor Test

Description: Measures the noise floor of the System. The entire system is required for this diagnostic.
The noise floor is calculated from IQ data received without a signal source.
Run Time: 00:02
1.) See 7-5-3 "Noise" on page 7-7 for information on minimizing environmental noise. If the problem
continues:
2.) Try a new probe (channels in the probe may be faulty). If the problem continues:
3.) Run the tests for 7-12-12-6 "Analog Receive" on page 7-82.

7-12-12-6 Analog Receive

features.
Symptoms:
Image artifacts - channel failure/noise

1.) Select the Analog Receive check box to run all the tests, or select the individual sub tests to run
only the selected tests.
Figure 7-52 Analog Receive Window
Tests the signal path from the GFI to the backplane (GTX) to the GRX.
Name: DC Offset Calibration Utility
NOTE: The DC Offset Calibration Utility diagnostic MUST be run when the DRX boards are replaced
or moved.
Description: Measures and corrects for the DC offset of the ADC on the DRX.
Run Time: 00:02
Run this utility to calibrate the correct DC offset after replacing or moving DRX boards. A popup
message alerts the user to run this utility after DRX boards have been replaced or moved.

7-12-12-6 Analog Receive (contd)
Name: Analog RX Test (High Gain)

Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to high (peak) gain. Failures could be
channel in DRX boards, Nathan, GRX to DRX communication.
Run Time: 00:02
NOTE: A block of 8 dead channels indicates a failed DRX board.
2.) Replace any failed boards.

3.) Replace GRX boards (these cannot be swapped as one is 64 channel and one is 128 channel).
Name: Analog RX Test (Medium Gain)

Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to medium gain.
Run Time: 00:02

Name: Analog RX Test (Low Gain)

Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to low gain.
Run Time: 00:02

Name: 3D_Probe_Digital_Test
Description: Tests that digital interface on the 3D probe and verifies that memory, receive and transmit
control is working. It's an absolute demand that a 3D probe is connected to the system. Therefore either
is a 4V-D connected to connector 2, 3 or 4, or alternatively, a 3V-D probe is connected to connector 4,
before the test is started.

Name: 4V_Probe_Analog_Test
Description: In this test a test signal is injected into the 3D probe. A 4V-D must be connected to
connector 2, 3 or 4 before the test is started. The probe is setup to receive the test signal for each
receive path (one at the time). The received data is then processed to extract signal properties for each
path. In this way the probe itself is verified (when assuming that all the receive path tests passed).
Name: 3V_D_Probe_Analog_Test
Description: In this test a test signal is injected into the 3D probe. A 3V-D probe must be connected to
connector 4 before the test is started. The probe is setup to receive the test signal for each receive path
(one at the time). The received data is then processed to extract signal properties for each path. In this
way the probe itself is verified (when assuming that all the receive path tests passed).

7-12-12-7 Analog CW
NOTE:Disconnect all probes before running diagnostics. Only connect a probe or test connector if instructed
for a specific test.
Figure 7-53 Analog CW and Patient I/O Service Diagnostics Options

7-12-12-7 Analog CW (contd)
Analog Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Tests

Under Service Diagnostics / Analog CW.
INPUT > a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator and injected on the GRX board(-s).
OUTPUT > The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board and into the GFI.
Figure 7-54 Analog Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Tests
The test input signal is a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator (TVG) and injected on
the GRX board (-s). The setup of the analog Doppler is done through a 512-bit setup word. The output
signal from the GRX will depend on the Doppler setup. For example the frequency will be determined
by the frequency of the signal in and the Mixer clock setup.
The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board and into the GFI. The GFE is
setup to receive CW data and the GFI processing in bypass mode.
The level is adjusted with the TSIG_GAIN and IQ_GAIN parameters to avoid saturation through the
GRX Doppler circuit.


The test input signal is a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator (TVG) and injected on
the GRX board (-s). The setup of the analog Doppler is done through a 512-bit setup word. The output
signal from the GRX will depend on the Doppler setup. For example the frequency will be determined
by the frequency of the signal in and the Mixer clock setup.
The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board and into the GFI. The GFE is
setup to receive CW data and the GFI processing in bypass mode.
The level is adjusted with the TSIG_GAIN and IQ_GAIN parameters to avoid saturation through the
GRX Doppler circuit.
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Dither Injection

A signal is injected in the dither input and result in the received I/Q data is checked. The test signal
generator is used for signal injection where the input signal is f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz
and a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither input is enabled for this test, while the Pedof inputs are
disabled. The DITHER_GAIN parameter values are set to 0, 1, 2 and 3. The parameter values
corresponds to Dither gain of 0 dB, -7 dB, -19 dB and -30 dB respectively. The RMS and the RMS
attenuation between the different gain settings in both I- and Q-data are tested.
Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.
Run Time: 00:05
1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Dither Injection test fails:
2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Pedof

In this test, the two center frequencies of 2 MHz and 6 MHz are verified. These frequencies are set
by switching the Pedof band pass filter.
The GFI test signal generator is used to input sine waves.
The Pedof test signal input is enabled.
The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled.
Sub tests using combinations of input signal frequency, Pedof band pass filter settings, mixer clock
frequency, test signal gain, and IQ gains, are run.
Parameters tested:
- fdop
- spectrum peak
- RMS
- SNR
- THD on both I- & Q-data
With this test the Pedof (SD probe) CW path on the GRX board is tested.
NOTE: The aCW Pedof Test will only be run on a GRX board with CW Doppler support.
NOTE: Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Pedof test fails:
2.) Replace the GRX board with CW Doppler.
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX ADC Digital LVDS

For the Analog-to-Digital Converter Digital Low-Voltage Differential Signaling test, the digital link from
the Doppler ADC and to the GFI board is verified. To verify signal integrity, the ADC is set up to
continuously transmit a predefined bit-pattern. Both I- and Q-data are acquired and each sample value
is tested. Port 0 on the PCA9554 I2C register on the GRX board is used to turn the ADC test pattern on/
off. The test signal generator on GFI is disabled for this test.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX ADC Digital LVDS test fails:
2.) Replace the GRX board with CW Doppler.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX Mixer Phase Setup

This test utilizes a PCA9554 I2C register on the GRX board. All phase bits are set to one in the analog
Doppler setup data, before reading back from the I2C register and test bits 6 and 7 in the returned byte.
Next, all zeroes are sent to the analog Doppler, read back again and bits 6 and 7 appear in the returned
byte. The test passes if the bits of interest in the read back byte match the phase values that were setup.
Bit 6 and 7 are the last bits in the two shift register chains and if the correct value were read, the chains
must be intact. The test signal generator on GFI is disabled for this test.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX Mixer Phase Setup test fails:
2.) Replace the CW GRX board.
7-12-12-8 GRLY Test
Name: GRLY Receive Test conn 1

The test is equivalent to the receive test except that a DL loop back connector i required in connector 1.
The loop back connector acts as load to the signal and large channel to channel deviations in load will
be detected by the signal processing done on the received data.
Run Time: _______________

The test is equivalent to the receive test except that a DLP loop back connector i required in connector
2. The loop back connector acts as load to the signal and large channel to channel deviations in load
will be detected by the signal processing done on the received data.
Run Time: _______________

Run Time: _______________

Run Time: _______________

Name: GRLY Pedof CW

This test is used to detect errors in signal path for the Standalone Doppler probes. An external signal
generator is connected to the Pedof input connector through a custom made attenuator. The test is then
run and the received input data is processed to extract signal characteristics such as frequency, signal
to noise ratio and harmonic distortion.
Run Time: _______________

7-12-12-9 I/O Board Tests

features.
Symptoms:
Intermittent Problems
Popup messages warning of system voltage problems - I/O Board Pwr Supply Test
System comes up in simulator mode - run I/O Board GFI Voltage Test
Unable to run diagnostics
No doppler audio/system audio/general audio sounds - run I/O Board Audio Test
No display on the monitor
1.) Select the I/O Board Tests check box to run all the sub tests, or select the individual sub tests to run
only the selected tests.
Figure 7-55 I/O Board Tests Window

7-12-12-9 I/O Board Tests (contd)
Name: I/O Board Pwr Supply Test

Description: Compares all local I/O Board voltages to their specified values.
NOTE: This is part of the self-monitoring process reported in the System Health Information section of
the Home page. See 7-12-3 "Home" on page 7-36.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the I/O Board.
Name: I/O Board GFI Voltage Test

Description: Compares all voltages on the GFI to their specified values. The GFI may not be working,
therefore the BEP can not communicate with the FEP.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Run the GFI tests to determine if the GFI is faulty. See 7-12-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-76.
Name: I/O Board Loop Back Test

Description: Basic test of the USB communications with the I/O Board
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Verify that the USB cable/connections are properly connected. If the problem continues:
2.) Swap the USB cable/device with a known working cable/device. If the problem continues:
Name: I/O Board Audio Test

Description: Test all the audio channels on the I/O board.
Run Time: 00:03
2.) Run the GFI tests on 7-12-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-76 to verify that the GFI is working correctly. If the
GFI board is OK and the problem continues:

7-12-12-9 I/O Board Tests (contd)
NOTE: The following Video tests can be used when the Touch Panel and the keys on the control panel
are on/illuminated, but the monitor does not come on.
Name: Video Status (Manufacturing)

Description: Tests if the I/O can detect a primary, secondary monitor and mother board video signal.
Run Time: 00:01
2.) Swap monitors with a known working monitor. If the problem continues: Replace the monitor.
Name: Video Status (Service)

Description: Tests if the I/O can detect the primary monitor and the mother board video signal.
Run Time: 00:01
2.) Swap monitors with a known working monitor. If the problem continues:
3.) Replace the monitor.

7-12-12-10 Tx Power Supply Test

features.
1.) Select the Tx Power Supply Test check box to run all the sub tests, or select the individual sub tests
to run only the selected tests.
Figure 7-56 Tx Power Supply Tests Window
Name: TxPs Control Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply Control Test
Run Time: 00:10
Name: TxPs Watchdog Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply GFI Watchdog Test
Run Time: 00:07

7-12-12-10 Tx Power Supply Test (contd)
Name: TxPs Alarm Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply Alarm Test
Run Time: 00:04
Name: TxPs Keep Alive Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply Keep Alive Test
Run Time: 00:07
7-12-12-11 EPS Tests

Not used by VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
7-12-12-12 bayBIRD Tests

Not used by VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

7-12-13 Image Quality

The Image Quality window is not populated.
Figure 7-57 Image Quality Window

7-12-14 Calibration
The Calibration window is not populated.
Figure 7-58 Calibration Window

7-12-15 Configuration
7-12-15-1 Software Options Interface

Use this window to add, delete, and view details for software options.
Add = Click the Add button to enter a new Software Option Key.
Delete = Select a Software Option Key and click the Delete button to remove a Software Option Key.
Details = Select a Software Option Key and click the Details button. A table at the bottom of the
screen displays information for Hardware ID, Product Code, Version, Options Serial Number, and
Key Life.
Refresh = Click the Refresh button to update the list after adding or deleting Software Option Keys.
Figure 7-59 Software Options Interface Window
A table with information for the options,

is displayed here.
You may need to use the position bars
to be able to view all the information.

7-12-15-2 InSite ExC Agent Configuration

Regarding the contents on this page, please refer to:
Figure 3-94 "Completed Agent Configuration Tool screen" on page 3-104.
Figure 7-60 InSite ExC Agent Configuration Window

7-12-16 Utilities - Common Utilities
7-12-16-1 Event Log Viewer

1.) Select the log you wish to view:
- Application link = an event log relative to application events
- System link = an event log relative to system events
- Log Name = enter the Log Name you want to view and click the View button
Figure 7-61 Event Log Viewer Window

7-12-16-1 Event Log Viewer (contd)

This is an example of the Application Log.
Figure 7-62 Application Log Window (Example)

7-12-16-2 Disruptive Mode

Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. If you are accessing through InSite,
this can only be enabled with the customer/operator confirmation.
See Section Section 7-11 "Virtual Console Observation (VCO)" on page 7-28.
Figure 7-63 Disruptive Mode Window

7-12-16-3 Disk Usage

View capacity and usage statistics for the different disk drives.
Figure 7-64 Disk Usage Window (Example)

7-12-16-4 IP Configuration
View Windows IP configuration and LAN connection data.
NOTE: The content may vary, depending on local conditions.
Figure 7-65 IP Configuration Window (Example)

7-12-16-5 Network Status

View data for active network connections.
Figure 7-66 Network Status Window (Example)

7-12-16-6 Windows Services

View the Windows Services that are started and running. A Windows Service is a computer program
that has been automatically started and is running in the background on the computer.
NOTE: The content in the illustration below is only an example. Do not use the illustration for checking
running services on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7!
Figure 7-67 Windows Services Window (Example)

7-12-16-7 User Accounts

View the user accounts that have been given access to this system.
Figure 7-68 User Account Window (Example)

7-12-16-8 Shared Resources

This screen displays all shared network resources on this system.
Figure 7-69 Shared Resources Window (Example)

7-12-16-9 System Shutdown

System Shutdown gives you the ability to Restart or Shutdown the system when using Virtual Console
Observation from a remote computer. See Section 7-11 "Virtual Console Observation (VCO)" on page
7-28.
NOTE: Retain Disruptive Mode check box:
MUST be checked if you are working from a remote computer.

Should be unchecked if you are working locally on the scanner.
Figure 7-70 System Shutdown Window

7-12-16-10 Disk Defragmenter

Disk fragmentation can reduce the amount of disk space available, and slow computing speed. Use the
disk defragmenter to restore optimum disk space and speed performance.
NOTE: System performance can be significantly reduced while the Disk Defragmenter is running.
1.) Select the Volume (drive) you want to defragment, or analyze for fragmentation.
- Click the Defragment button to defragment the selected volume.
- Click the Analyze button to generate an Analysis Report that identifies any files that require
defragmenting. Continue with step 2 below.
Figure 7-71 Disk Defragmenter Window (Example)
Select the file(s) you wish to defragment and click the Defragment button on the Analysis Report
window.

7-12-16-11 Gather Logs Utility

Click the Gather Logs button to prepare them for retrieval by the On Line Center. The logs are
compressed into a ZIP file and the file path and file name is displayed on the window.
Figure 7-72 Gather Logs Utility Window

7-12-16-12 Image Viewer Utility

The Image Viewer Utility lists the availability of images for export. This example shows no images
available for export.
Figure 7-73 Image Viewer Utility Window

7-12-16-13 Image Compress & Delete Utility

Select the images you want to compress or delete. This example shows no images available at this time.
Compress Files = compresses images into a .zip file.

Delete Files = deletes the images from the image export directory.
Figure 7-74 Image Compress & Delete Utility Window

7-12-16-14 Scanner Documentation Interface

Use this to view the user and service documentation for the system.
Figure 7-75 Scanner Documentation Interface Window

7-12-16-15 Distinct Network Monitor

The Distinct Network Monitor has a sniffer that monitors network traffic and allows you to capture
network data without redirecting or altering it.
For directions on how to configure the sniffer begin with step 4 of "Capturing Network Logs with Network
Sniffer" on page 7-22.
Figure 7-76 Distinct Network Monitor Window

7-12-16-16 Virtual Console Observation (VCO)

VCO is used by a remote service technician or the Online Center (OLC) to access and modify all
scanner settings and programs on the customer's ultrasound scanner.
See Section 7-11 "Virtual Console Observation (VCO)" on page 7-28.
Figure 7-77 Virtual Console Observation Window

7-12-16-17 Telnet Server Control

Telnet Server must be running to allow remote access to the DOS command prompt window. Click the
Start button to run Telnet Server.
NOTE: Telnet Server is a Windows service that runs in the background. Stop Telnet Server when you
are not using it to perform a service action. It can slow the system down if left running in the
background.
Figure 7-78 Telnet Server Control Window
Telnet Server
*** Telnet Server is Stopped ***

7-12-17 Utilities - Scanner Utilities

By opening the Scanner Utilities folder, you get access to:
Reset Database
Clean Userdefs
Set Debug Utility
Recource file utility
Scanner Documentation Interface
Virtual Console Observation
7-12-18 Dicom Verify

This utility provides an easy way to verify DICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices
on the network.
1.) Enter AE Title, IP Address, and Port values of the DICOM device.
2.) Check the Loop check box to repeat the operation, or leave it unchecked to perform the operation
once.
3.) Click the Verify button to see the results.
4.) Un-check the Loop check box to stop the operation.
Figure 7-79 Dicom Verify Window

7-12-19 Replacement
Field is not populated on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 7-80 Part Replacement Page

7-12-20 PM
Field is not populated on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 7-81 Planned Maintenance Page
7-12-21 Exit From Diagnostics

Select the X in the upper right corner of the screen to exit Diagnostics.
7-12-22 Restart VIVID E9/VIVID E7 After Diagnostics

Always shutdown the system and reboot after a diagnostics session.
NOTE: Do Not select Cal Reset after performing calibration. This will destroy the file located on the
Back End Processor and the image quality will not be optimized.

Section 7-13
Motor Controller Test
This test program tests the XYZ Motor Controller. It also includes a software recovery procedure for
Lock Release.
Follow this procedure to start the Motor Controller Test:
1.) Power up the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

See 4-2-3 "Power ON/Boot Up" on page 4-4 for detailed instructions.
After scanner initialization is complete, continue with the steps below;
2.) Press CONFIG on the Utility tab on the Touch Panel.
3.) Log on as ADM. A password for the user ADM may be required.
See 4-2-7 "Logging on to VIVID E9/VIVID E7 as ADM" on page 4-15 for detailed instructions.
4.) Select System from the bottom of the menu that appears on the monitor.
5.) Select Test.
Figure 7-82 Test screen
6.) Select MotorController Test

The following dialog is displayed on the screen.

Section 7-13Motor Controller Test (contd)
Figure 7-83 Motor Controller Test dialog
7.) Push Fix Lock button.

If in a quiet environment it should be possible to hear the Lock Engine engage for a few seconds.
8.) Check if the Lock function works now.
If the lock still does not work, try to press the TestXY button and wait for this dialog to appear:
Figure 7-84 TestXY results
9.) Continue with step 2 in 7-14-11 "XY Lock is not working" on page 7-145.
7 - 122 Section 7-13 - Motor Controller Test

Section 7-14
Troubleshooting
In this section you will find troubleshooting advises for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

7-14-3 System Doesnt Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-124
7-14-4 No Response from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - Its Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137.
7-14-5 Unable to scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-138.
7-14-6 Trackball troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-139
7-14-7 Monitor (Main LCD) troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-141
7-14-9 Lower OP Panel contact point cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-142
7-14-10 Locating DRX Boards with CRC Error in logfile.txt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-144
7-14-11 XY Lock is not working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-145
7-14-12 XY Brake Motors Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-145
7-14-13 Z Movement fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-145
7-14-14 Difficult to lock and release the alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-146
7-14-15 USB Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-147
7-14-16 USB Device(s) stopped working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-147
7-14-17 Peripheral Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-148
7-14-18 Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-152
7-14-19 Database Startup Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-154
7-14-20 DICOM Related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-155
7-14-21 Probe Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-156
7-14-22 System Temperature Too High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-158
7-14-23 DVR Issue (BEP5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-158

7-14-3 System Doesnt Power On / Boot Up

Contents:
7-14-3-1 "The ON/OFF Button is Dark (No Amber Light)" on page 7-124.
7-14-3-2 "Main Power Supply Start-up troubleshooting" on page 7-124.
7-14-3-3 "Back End Processor (BEP) Boot Up Troubleshooting" on page 7-134.
7-14-3-4 "VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Doesnt Boot" on page 7-135.
7-14-3-5 "Intermittent No Boot with old Main Power Supplies" on page 7-137.
7-14-3-1 The ON/OFF Button is Dark (No Amber Light)

1.) Verify that the AC cable is plugged into the AC wall outlet.
2.) Measure for proper AC Voltage at the receptacle.
3.) Plug the AC cable into the scanner and secure the plug with the retaining clamp.
4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker. (It is located at the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7).
5.) Verify if the On/Off button (on the Operator Panel) is amber now.
- If it is still dark, and nothing happens when you press On/Off button, go to
7-14-3-2 "Main Power Supply Start-up troubleshooting" on page 7-124.
- If it is amber, but nothing happens when you depress the On/Off switch, go to
7-14-3-3 "Back End Processor (BEP) Boot Up Troubleshooting" on page 7-134.
7-14-3-2 Main Power Supply Start-up troubleshooting

Before starting troubleshooting power-up issues, keep in mind:
When turning the rear panel Main Power Switch OFF, wait for the amber light to turn completely
OFF (approximately 25 seconds) before turning the rear panel Main Power Switch back ON.
This will ensure that the Main Power Supply is totally de-energized and reset.
NOTE: Reset the rear panel Main Power Switch in order to de-energize the Main Power Supply before
removing or installing any board or modifying the system.
Table 7-24 System not booting sheet 1 of 3
Symptom Tasks / Conclusions
If ON, Main PS is ok for 48V.

If OFF, check cable J1 that connects to the Main
Check DS5 48V OK (BEP Door)
PS. If the cable is connected, the Main PS may
be defective.
If ON, check the main cable from the BEP I/O

(J22) to the Operator Panel.
No Amber light on - ON/OFF button If OFF, short pin 12 to 24 (see BEP Cover Label)
on the Test Connector of the BEP I/O Board to
Check LED on BEP PS 5Vstb by-pass the ON/OFF button.
If that still does not turn on the BEP, unplug J22
and try again. The BEP PS may be defective.
If BEP turns ON, replace the cable and/or ON/
OFF button and/or OP Panel.
7 - 124 Section 7-14 - Troubleshooting

Table 7-24 System not booting (contd) sheet 2 of 3
When there is a failure that forces the Main Power Supply to shutdown, you will only see the
amber light trying to turn green once, until the rear panel Main Power Switch is reset.
Measure test connector, pin 12 and ground

5Vstb.Test connector pin (24V) to see if system
turns ON.
If there is no green light at all, even after If system does not power up, replace:
resetting the main breaker 1. BEP PS
2. BEP
If system powers up, troubleshoot connection to
OP Panel.
Main Power Supply Fan failure may cause this

problem. Use a mirror to look at the fans; check
if they try to rotate at boot up (two people may be
needed to test this).
Mirror Viewing fans under Main Power Supply
Amber light ON but no green light (or briefly ON)

when pressing ON/ OFF button
If the green light appears momentarily

If the fans do not move, tip the Main PS and
gently move each fan with a screw driver to
move them from their current position.
Sometimes removing the PS is enough
movement to move the fans.
If the Main PS powers up after the fans are
moved, you will see a failure message in the log
files.
See
Main Power Supply Logs (below.)
If the fans do not move after this step, the Main
PS needs replacement.
NOTE: This is a rare occurrence. Monitor site for
future occurrences.

Table 7-24 System not booting (contd) sheet 3 of 3
If all are present and FPO is ON, BEP PS may

be defective.
Check LEDs for:
If so, you should be able to have 48V
PS_ON, 5Vstb
measurable at Test connector of BEP I/O, pin 4.
48V in.
Pin 3 is the +24 V (there is no LED) if coming up
in simulator mode.
Disconnect J22 and short pins 12 to 24 to

observe if the BEP powers up.
Troubleshoot the LCD on the OP Panel. If it does not turn ON, then disconnect the cable
BEP PS isolation
to the backplane.
If not, check BEP devices.
Disconnect the following devices to

eliminate possible causes of over current:
DVD drive(s) If power is reestablished, troubleshoot individual
BEP I/O Board (Bottom connector devices disconnected.
inside the BEP) If no power, replace BEP PS.
DVR Board (if present, not a likely
problem)

7-14-3-2 Main Power Supply Start-up troubleshooting (contd)
Figure 7-85 BEP5 Power Supply Voltages

Table 7-25 System boots but cannot scan
If the system is booting, check error logs and run

diagnostics.
If 24V is present, then the simulator mode may
be caused by problems with GFI board or cable.
Check if the Fan Tray, under the Card Rack, is
running (Fan Tray uses 24V to run).Fan Tray
running means 24V is present. If not running, try
Check if 24V is present isolating the problem by removing all cards in the
Card Rack, except the GFI.
Simulator Mode or No Scan
Observe the LEDs in the Card Rack.If no lights
are observed, disconnect GFI and connect
another board. Observe LEDs.
If the Fan Tray is not running, go to isolate the
Backplane.
If 24V is not present, see:

Isolate cause Figure 7-87 "Troubleshooting Flow Chart" on
page 7-130.


Use Figure and Table to locate P4 Pins.
Figure 7-86 Main Power Supply P4 Location and P4 Pins Location (reference)
Pin Signal Name

Z B D Number
Z B D
2 GND GND GND
2
4 +6V +6V +6V
6 GND GND GND
4
8 -6V -6V +6V
6 10 GND GND GND
12 +15V AC_FAIL_N EXT_SYNC

14 -15V GND
16
18 GND GND GND

20 +11V +11V +11V
22 +24V +24V +24V
24 +24V +24V +24V
26 +24V +24V +24V

32
28 GND GND GND
30 GND GND GND
32 GND GND GND


Troubleshooting Flow Chart:
Use the Flow Chart and Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures to isolate cause/failure(s).
Figure 7-87 Troubleshooting Flow Chart
START Simulator Mode
No 24V
1. Power-down and wait for ON/OFF Button LED to turn from amber Yes 24V @
to OFF. Always wait for amber light to be completely OFF. TC-3 1. Power-down and wait for ON/OFF Button to turn OFF.
2. Remove all cards from Card Rack. 2. Install GFI Card. Observe power LEDs on GFI.
3. Remove the Card Rack Fan Tray. 3. Measure voltage at TC-3.
4. Inspect Backplane pins. Make sure none are broken or bent.
5. Power-up and locate Pin 3 of the Test Connector on BEP (will be Yes 24V @
referred to as TC-3). To locate the Test Connector and pin-out, TC-3,
see label on BEP door. TC-3 is connected to 24V of the Yes LED
Backplane. on GFI
No 24V @ TC-3,
6. Measure the voltage at TC-3.
No LED on GFI
No 24V @ TC-3
Replace GFI
Go to Power Supply 24V Out Test.
Fail Go to Remaining Parts Procedure.
Pass Procedure
complete.
Replace PS
No short
Go to Short found No Simulator
Circuit Test. Mode Finished.
Replace PS and Power-down.

Backplane. Pass Install all removed parts.
Short found.
Go to New PS and Power-up.
Faulty parts
Backplane Test Check for Simulator Mode.
replaced.
Procedure.
24V @ TC-3
Fail Still Go to START.
Simulator Mode
1. Contact Support.
2. Return unneeded new parts.


Troubleshooting Flow Chart procedures
Use these procedures together with the troubleshooting flow chart in Figure 7-87, to isolate cause/
failure(s):
Power Supply 24V Out measurement:
NOTE: A DMM is used in this procedure.

2.) Switch off the Main Power Switch (on the rear of VIVID E9/VIVID E7).
3.) Wait for the amber light in the ON/OFF button to turn OFF.
4.) Unplug the Mains Power Cable from the Main Power Supply and from the wall outlet.
5.) Disconnect the Main Power Supply from the FEPs Backplane connectors. Leave all the other
cables connected to the Main Power Supply.
6.) Measure the DC Voltage on the 24V pin. The 24V pin is pin Z 22 on the connector P4 on the Main
Power Supply. Refer to the illustration in Figure 7-86 on page 7-129.
If you are unable to get the probes of the DMM into pin Z 22 on P4, you may need to insert some
longer (non-braided) wires into the pinholes, so that they extend far enough upward for you to make
the measurements with the DMM probe. To do this, you may also need to disconnect the remaining
cables on the Power Supply so you are able to view and locate pins Z 22 and ground pin Z 28 on
P4 and insert the wires. Once the wires are in place, you MUST reconnect all cables that were
removed.
7.) With the Main Power Supply still disconnected from the FEPs Backplane, and all other cables
connected, power-up the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. Once the system has gone into simulator mode,
measure the DC voltage between pins Z 22 (+24V) and Z 28 (ground).
- If the measured voltage is between 23V and 25V, then this test passes.
- If the measured voltage is outside this range, the test fails.
FEP Backplane Short Circuit Test
In this test, the electrical isolation between the 24V and ground is measured.

2.) Switch off the Main Power Switch (on the rear of VIVID E9/VIVID E7).
3.) Wait for the amber light in the ON/OFF button to turn OFF.
4.) Unplug the Mains Power Cable from the Main Power Supply and from the wall outlet.
5.) Disconnect the Main Power Supply from the FEPs Backplane connectors.
6.) Disconnect the BEP I/O to Backplane cable from the BEP.
7.) Use the DMM to measure the resistance (ohms) between the 24V rail and ground.
8.) Measure the resistance between the 24V pins of the Backplane and the ground pin.
- If the resistance is low - less than 10 Mega ohms, then there is a short circuit in the FEP
Backplane. The FEP Backplane for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is not a FRU, so you must replace the
FEP Card Rack. Repeat the FEP Backplane Short Circuit Test on the new FEP Card Rack
before you install it. (This is to eliminate any measuring errors.)
- If there is no short between the 24V pins and ground, then go to the next step.


Test Connector Short Circuit Test
In this test, the electrical isolation between the TC-3 pin and the ground pin on the Test Connector is
measured.
1.) Measure the resistance between the TC-3 pin and the Ground Pin on the Test Connector.
- If the resistance is low - less than 10 Mega ohms, then there is a short circuit in the I/O Board.
Replace the I/O Board and go to the beginning of this step.
- If there is no short found, go to the next step.
2.) Reconnect the BEP I/O to FEP Backplane Cable.
3.) Measure the resistance between the TC-3 pin and the ground pin of the Test Connector.
- If the resistance is low - less than 10 Mega ohms, then there is a short circuit in the BEP I/O
to Backplane Cable.
Replace the BEP I/O to Backplane Cable, then repeat this test.


Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures (contd.):
New Power Supply and new Cardrack w/ Backplane Test Procedure
1.) Order a new Power Supply and a new VE9 Cardrack With Backplane.
2.) With the system powered-down and the rear panel Main Power Switch off, install the new Cardrack
With Backplane.
3.) Power-up the system, wait for simulator mode and measure the voltage at TC-3.
- If the voltage measured is between 23V and 25V, the test passes.
Return the new Power Supply to service.
- If the voltage at TC-3 is not in the acceptable range:
1.) Power-down the system.
2.) Turn the rear panel Main Power Switch off and install the new Power Supply.
- If the voltage measured is between 23V and 25V, the test passes.
- If the voltage is not in the acceptable range, the test fails.
4.) With the system powered-down and the rear panel Main Power Switch off, re-install the old
Cardrack With Backplane.
- If the voltage measured is between 23V and 25V, the new Backplane can be returned to
service.
- If not, re-install the new Cardrack With Backplane.
Remaining Parts procedure
1.) With the system powered-down and the ON/OFF Button LED OFF, install the Fan Tray.
2.) Power-up the system.
- If the fans dont run or the GFI power LED is OFF, replace the Fan Tray and repeat this step.
- If the fans are running and the GFI power LED is ON, go to the next step.
3.) With the system powered-down and the ON/OFF Button LED OFF, install one card in the rack.
4.) Power-up the system and check all power LEDs on the card.
- If any power LEDs go out on any of the installed cards and/or 24V at TC-3 is no longer
present, replace the card you installed and go to the beginning of this step.
- If all card LEDs are ON, repeat this step for the next card to re-install, until all cards are in
place.
- If you find that all cards need to be replaced, stop. It is very unlikely that all cards would be
faulty. The problem is more likely the Power Supply. Replace the Power Supply and go to
START on the Troubleshooting Flow Chart on page 7-130.
5-14-4 "Power Up Sequence Description" on page 5-116.

7-14-3-4 "VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Doesnt Boot" on page 7-135.

7-14-3-3 Back End Processor (BEP) Boot Up Troubleshooting

Failure Description:
The Main Power Supply is OK, but the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 doesnt boot. The Front End Fans are
running.
Possible Causes:
A cable is not properly connected, or broken.

If the +48V is lower than +42V, the system will shut down.
If the +48V is more than +53V, the BEP will shut down.
The BEP Power Supply is broken.
The BEP is broken.

7-14-3-4 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Doesnt Boot

This is an overall diagram showing a recommended sequence for troubleshooting a no-boot situation.
Figure 7-88 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Doesnt Boot
GO TO: Figure 7-89.

7-14-3-4 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Doesnt Boot (contd)
Figure 7-89 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Doesnt Boot (contd from Figure 7-88)
FROM: Figure 7-88.
NO
ARE THE FANS
RUNNING?
THE LV POW ER
(OR THE BEP)
YES MAY BE
BROKEN.
IS THE BEP
STARTING TO DISPLAY NO
START UP SCREENS ON
THE MONITORS?
CHECK/REPLACE
THE BEP
YES
IS THE BEP
STARTING TO DISPLAY NO
THE APPLICATION'S
SPLASH SCREEN ON THE
MONITOR?
TURN OFF THE
POWER, WAIT
AT LEAST TEN
SECONDS
YES BEFORE YOU
TRY TO
REBOOT.
NO
ARE THE OP KEYS LIT?
1. CHECK THE OPERATOR PANEL

CABLE CONNECTION.
YES 2. CHECK/REPLACE OPERATOR PANEL
NO
IS REGULAR SCAN
DISPLAY SHOWN ON THE
MONITOR?
PRESS AND HOLD THE ON/OFF SW ITCH

FOR FIVE SECONDS TO REBOOT THE
SYSTEM.
YES
GO TO: Figure 7-91.

7-14-3-5 Intermittent No Boot with old Main Power Supplies

Intermittent No Boot with the Main Power Supply, GA200730 rev 01 and rev 02. To identify this boot-
up problem, recycle the Mains Power Switch at the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (OFF-ON-OFF-ON).
If this boots the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, this is most likely related to this issue.
NOTE: If recycling the Mains Power Switch doesnt help, then the boot-up issue is caused by
something else than the issue described here.
An updated version of the Main Power Supply, GA200730 Revision 03, was introduced in
manufacturing in the second half of 2011. This version of the Main Power Supply includes a fix for the
No Boot issue.
To check the version of the installed Main Power Supply, select Config > About, then select the
HW Version tab.
NOTE: In the HV Version tab, the listed name for the Main Power Supply is Transmitter Power:
Figure 7-90 HW Version tab
The updated version of the Main Power Supply, GA200730 Revision 03 can replace both GA200004
and GA200730.
The updated version must be ordered on Part Number: GA200730-03.
7-14-4 No Response from VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - Its Locked

If the system appears to be locked, please wait at least 60 seconds for the watchdog to trap the
situation. This will, if the situation is trapped, bring up a dialog telling that the system is not responding.
1.) Press Restart to restart the application. This will save a special debug log. When the system
restarts it will show a dialog where it requests you to save the log.
2.) Enter a descriptive text then press Save.
3.) To export the log, press ALT+D. This will bring up the same dialog again.
4.) Now, select destination and choose Export to write the log-files to selected destination.

7-14-5 Unable to scan
Figure 7-91 Unable to scan
Unable to scan!
Are probes connected in right NO

way?
YES Check the probe connection.
END
YES
Are other operations possible?
NO
Check the Main Power Supply.
Restart the scanner.

7-14-6 Trackball troubleshooting

Sticky Trackball
- VIVID E9s with Serial Number below 2200:
This description applies to the Laser Trackball, identified by Silver Grey Colored Trackball.
The clearance between the Operator Panel Bezel and the Trackball Dust Gasket is very
marginal. For some Operator Panels there is a slight mechanical interference between the
Bezel and Dust Gasket, which causes added friction between the Trackball and Dust Gasket.
Hence the trackball feels sticky.
A new Trackball Fixing Ring will add approximate 0.7 mm more space between the Dust
Gasket and Bezel to eliminate unwanted pressure onto the Dust Gasket and Trackball.
Order and install the spare part Dust Gasket and Fixing Ring for Laser Trackball, Vivid E9,
with part number: GA200971.
For installation instructions, see: 8-9-5 "Replacing the Trackball" on page 8-198.
- VIVID E9/VIVID E7s with Serial Number above 2200:

Cleaning the Trackball (inside) should be sufficient.
For cleaning instructions, see: 4-2-19 "Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4)" on page 4-53.
Squeaky Trackball
Friction between the Trackball and Material of Dust Gasket.
See: "Sticky Trackball" (above).
Cursor is not moving

Most likely, dust has built up inside the trackball house so the two optical laser sensor inside the
trackball is covered by dust.
Clean the Trackball (inside).
Cursor drifts
The two optical laser sensor inside the trackball is covered by dust.
Clean the Trackball (inside).

7-14-6 Trackball troubleshooting (contd)

Cursor hangs approximately 2-3 seconds every 20 seconds
Incorrect DIP switch settings on the Trackball assembly.
There is a four position DIP switch mounted on the Trackball circuit board that needs to have all
four switch positions set to the OFF position in order for the Cursor to not hang, or stall during
rotation of the Trackball.
a.) Please verify if the switches are set to OFF.

b.) If necessary set all switches to OFF and try it again.
Figure 7-92 Correct DIP switch setting
No backlight, or response from the Select Buttons around the Trackball

Loose cable on the Trackball Assembly connector.
Reseat the two cables connected to the Trackball Assembly in both ends.
- 8-9-5 "Replacing the Trackball" on page 8-198.
Trackball - low sensitivity

Does the trackball move at all?
- If YES:
Remove the ball from the Trackball, and clean the ball and inside the Trackball assembly.
For cleaning instructions, see:

4-2-19 "Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4)" on page 4-53.
- If NO:
Replace the Trackball
8-9-5 "Replacing the Trackball" on page 8-198.

7-14-7 Monitor (Main LCD) troubleshooting

Intermittent black monitor on boot (17 LCD ONLY)
CAUSE: Problem with main monitor firmware version 1.12 and lower.
For firmware upgrade instructions, see: 8-7-8 "17 LCD Firmware Upgrade" on page 8-141.
Monitor does not work

- Verify that VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is fully powered up
- Verify power is present at monitor outlet
- Use an ohmmeter to check Monitor Cable Assembly or try with another Monitor Cable
Assembly.
Changing colors or wrong colors on monitor
The problem may be on the Video Card in the BEP. It is very unlikely that the problem comes from
the monitor.
Prints do not match monitor

- Verify factory default settings.
Example of errors that may be caused by other components than the monitor:
Digital Noise
Image out of sync
Red Shadows
Flickering
Blank screen
Black screen
Possible error sources:
HDMI-cable
power-cable
monitor
graphics card
BEP
Before you exchange any expensive parts, troubleshooting the graphics components as described
below:
1.) To check BEP I/O Video Output, connect a DVI monitor to the BEP I/O.
- If the image is NOT OK then check that the BEP graphics board and DVI Flex Cable is
properly seated.
Replace the graphic board and DVI Flex Cable if needed.
- If the graphic output from the BEP I/O is OK then check monitor cabling and monitor:
1.) Remove the LCD-monitors Rear Cover.
2.) Remove the Bulkhead Cover under the Top Console.
3.) Check that both the HDMI cable and the power cable are properly connected.
4.) Try moving the HDMI Cable and Power Cable on both Bulkhead and Monitor.
5.) Try swapping the HDMI cable between bulkhead and monitor for a new one. Connect the
new cable externally for testing purposes.
2.) If the above does not solve the problem then the monitor should be exchanged.
3.) If the problem is still not solved then the BEP should be exchanged.

5-8-4-12 "LCD Monitor" on page 5-35.

5-7-10 "VIVID E9/VIVID E7 interconnection diagram" on page 5-25.
7-14-8 Intermittent Blank, but functional (responsive) Upper Panel Touch Screen
Applies To: Vivid E9, S/N: < VE905200 (manufactured before May 2013)
Problem: Intermittent Blank, but functional (responsive) Upper Panel Touch Screen.
Cause: Incompatible HV Inverter (intermittent problem), High Voltage Inv. Board w. Cable, GA200442.
Solution: Release of new HV Inverter Module, HV Inverter with cable - ERG version spare part,
P/N: 5207000-6.
8-8-7 "High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable replacement" on page 8-177.
7-14-9 Lower OP Panel contact point cleaning

If the buttons on the Lower OP Panel fails intermittently or permanently, it may be due to bad connection
on the carbon rubber contact points under each button. This may be caused by wear and tear.
To resolve this issue, you can clean the contact points on the buttons on the Lower OP Panel as
described below:
WARNING ALWAYS CONSIDER GE EMS POLICY AND SAFETY-REGULATIONS WHEN USING CHEMICALS.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND GLOVES WHILE WORKING UNDER THESE CONDITIONS. ALSO
MAKE SURE TO FOLLOW ESD SAFETY-PROCEDURES WHEN WORKING WITH EXPOSED
ELECTRONICS.
1.) Remove the Rotary Knobs from the Upper Panel.

2.) Disassemble the Upper Panel.
See: 8-8-3-4 "Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-156.
3.) Disassemble the Lower Panel.
See: 8-9-4-4 "Remove the Operator Panel, Lower" on page 8-193.
4.) Remove the Trackball Assembly.
See: 8-9-5-4 "Remove the Trackball" on page 8-199.

7-14-9 Lower OP Panel contact point cleaning (contd)

NOTE: In the next steps: Take care NOT to move bezel with buttons when circuit board has been
removed. Buttons are NOT attached to bezel and will fall out.
5.) Disassemble the circuit board on the Lower Panel.

See: 8-9-7-4 "Lower Switch Board with Elastomer removal" on page 8-206.
Figure 7-93 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer - Trackball already removed
6.) Clean all contact points and carbon rubbers with a GE-approved electronics cleaner.
Figure 7-94 Clean all contact points and carbon rubbers
7.) Verify that all contact points are clean and dry before reassembly.
8.) Reinstall the Trackball assembly.
9.) Reconnect all cables and verify functionality before and after permanent reassembly.

7-14-10 Locating DRX Boards with CRC Error in logfile.txt

The system may display a dialogue box with A Setup Error Has Occurred. There may also be white
pixels on the screen.
Example: Monitoring: CRC info: GFE_BIT_STAT_DRX3_BOT_CRC_NATHAN_ERROR = 1 (board range 3..0)

The illustration below is listing how you can locate the physical board after you have located the
following in logfile.txt:
Figure 7-95 Physical location versus logfile.txt text
NOTE: The log file does NOT list the physical position of the DRX board in the Card Cage.
Lets have a look at the example above:
The text from logfile.txt is:
GFE_BIT_STAT_DRX3_BOT_CRC.
The illustration above shows that GFE_BIT_STAT_DRX3_BOT_CRC points to physical position of

DRX4, the right most DRX board that is located close to the GFI board.

7-14-11 XY Lock is not working

Follow the steps below to resolve this issue:
1.) Run the XYZ Test Program and select Fix Lock.
See: Section 7-13 "Motor Controller Test" on page 7-121.
2.) If the Lock still does not respond when pushing the buttons in front of the UI, release the Lock
manually.
See: 4-2-5-5 "Manually releasing the XY Lock" on page 4-12.
3.) Remove the Park Lock and adjust it manually.
See: 6-9-5-2 "XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism" on page 6-19.
7-14-12 XY Brake Motors Troubleshooting

NOTE: Cables are not labeled at the XY controller, so right side and left side motors are not defined.
When troubleshooting the XY brake motors, keep this in mind:
The rear motors are #1 and #3.

The front motors are #2 and #4.
Motor #1 and #2 are on the same side.
Motor #3 and #4 are on the same side (opposite to motor #1 and #2).
If you are in a silent environment, it may be possible to hear which motor is activated during the test.
7-14-13 Z Movement fails

If it is impossible to lower the Top Console, but moving it upwards, works OK, it indicates that one
of the control switches is stuck in Up position.
If you have to help the Top Console up when moving upwards, but the motor assistance work OK
when lowering the Top Console, it indicates that the gas spring inside the Z Mechanism is failing.
- Replace the Z Mechanism.

7-14-14 Difficult to lock and release the alphanumeric keyboard

The release/lock mechanism is located to the right most section of the drawer, thus the force needed to
release and lock the alphanumeric keyboard will increase significantly if the left most section of the
keyboard is used.
Figure 7-96 Best area to press to release (or lock) the alphanumeric keyboard
Press the right most section of the alphanumeric keyboard to release/lock it.

7-14-15 USB Footswitch

If there are any issues with the USB Footswitch, try this:
Ensure that the USB plug is plugged into one of the USB connectors on the rear side of the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Verify that the software configuration is set up for the Footswitch (Config > Imaging > Application
screen).
Try a replacement USB Footswitch.
7-14-16 USB Device(s) stopped working

If a keyboard and mouse, or other equipment, not intended for connection to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7,
has been connected to any of the USB connectors on the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, all the USB
devices may stop working due to an overload condition.
The work around is to use one of the USB ports on the I/O Rear Panel (BEP I/O Board).

7-14-17 Peripheral Troubleshooting
7-14-17-1 Contents in this subsection

7-14-17-1Contents in this subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-148
7-14-17-2Internal Printer troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-149
7-14-17-3CD/DVD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-150
7-14-17-4USB Harddrive Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-151

7-14-17-2 Internal Printer troubleshooting
Figure 7-97 Internal Printer troubleshooting
Unable to use Printer(s)!
Is the printer(s) properly NO

connected?
YES
- Verify that the USB cable is seated in both ends.
- Verify that the 115 VAC cable is seated in both
ends.
NO
Are there print papers left?
YES
Insert printer papers.
Is proper configuration for the NO

Print key(s) set?
Configure the Print key(s).
YES
Is there an error message on the
Main Monitor?
NO
Replace BEP.
Replace the Printer.

7-14-17-3 CD/DVD Troubleshooting
Figure 7-98 CD/DVD Troubleshooting
Unable to record to CD/DVD
Is a new, unused and formatted NO

CD/DVD disc inserted to the
drive?
YES Insert a new, unused CD/DVD disc.
Are CD/DVD discs rated at the NO

proper write speed
YES Acquire CD/DVDs rated at the proper write speed.
For SONY OPTIARC AD-7240S:

Update the firmware to version 1.0.4.
(P/N: GA200948)
NO
Is the drive working now?
Replace CD/DVD drive.

YES
END

7-14-17-4 USB Harddrive Troubleshooting
Figure 7-99 USB Harddrive Troubleshooting
Unable to record to USB Harddrive!
NO
Does Replay from USB Harddrive
function?
Verify cables to the USB Harddrive

YES
- USB cable from VIVID E9/VIVID E7
- Power cable to the USB Harddrive
NO
Is the DVD drive able to record
the data?
- Replace the BEP I/O module

YES
- Replace the BEP.
Replace the USB Harddrive. For more

information, see: Vivid E9 and EchoPAC PC
Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard Drive
Installation Manual, Direction Number:
EY194147.

7-14-18 Network Troubleshooting
7-14-18-1 No Connection to the Network
Figure 7-100 No Connection to the Network
No Connection to the Network
Is the
TCP/IP Cable between VIVID E9/ NO
VIVID E7 and network outlet
connected and well seated?
YES Connect the cable and verify that it is well

seated in both ends.
Try a network cable that is known to be OK
YES
Is the connection OK now?
NO Replace the network cable.
Is the
cable between BEP and NO
Internal I/O OK?
YES Replace the network cable between BEP and

Internal I/O.
Connect a Crossed Network Cable between the

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and your PC/laptop.
Try to ping from the PC/laptop to
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
If OK, the hardware connection
inside VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is OK.

7-14-18-2 No Contact with EchoPAC PC, but Network Connection Seems OK
Figure 7-101 No Contact with EchoPAC PC, but connection to network seems OK
No contact with EchoPAC PC, but connection to

network seems to be OK.
Does IP addresses and AE titles NO

match exactly to the device you
wish to send to?
Correct the setup.
Verify connectivity on the EchoPAC PC side.

7-14-19 Database Startup Problems

Description:
In the Local Archive - Int. HD workflow, the customer database may become unusable.
This issue have been seen when we have an exam with many images (more than 100) and the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 have been shut down shortly after that the exam was finished.
These potential problems have been identified:
Issues with Windows caching that controls file copy from Image Buffer to Local Archive
Issues with Sybase caching for update of image pointers. If power is removed before Sybase
operation is complete, then the database will not start next time due to internal table integrity
violation.
Solution:
Change the default workflow setting to Direct Store for the Local Archive - Int. HD dataflow.
Figure 7-102 Select Direct Store

7-14-20 DICOM Related Problems
7-14-20-1 Slow Response from DICOM Server

Symptom: Slow Responses from DICOM server, but network connection seems OK
Possible cause: If you are experiencing problems with slow responses from DICOM servers, increase
the time-out in the DICOM server properties dialog. Problems with slow responses may result in images
being re-sent automatically and low transfer rates
7-14-20-2 Images Remain in Spooler with Retry or Failed Status

Symptom: Images remain in spooler with Failed status.
Cause: Destination unable to accept raw data.
Workaround: Remove Raw Data from Service configuration and re-send.
7-14-20-3 Images Exit Spooler, But Do Not Display on Destination

Symptom: Images exit spooler but do not display on destination. Sometimes affects only Cine or
Secondary Capture.
Cause: Destination unable to view the particular photometric interpretation.
Solution: Check what compression and photometric interpretation the destination device supports and
adjust (if possible) on the destination service to the settings, which results in successful viewing.
NOTE: Note that compression JPEG will give photometric interpretation YBR_FULL_422, RLE will give
YBR_FULL and uncompressed will give RGB. The exception to this is if you enable B/W only,
then you will get photometric interpretation MONOCHROME2 for all compressions.
7-14-20-4 Images Not Sorted Into the Single pt Record

Symptom: Very large Cine loops. Images not sorted into the single pt record.
Cause: Destination view multiple series as a single exam. Destination ignoring the Series DICOM tag
and apparently assuming all images are a single exam and possibly a single cine loop.
Solution: Destination must adjust (if possible).

7-14-21 Probe Issues
7-14-21-1 i13L probe is not recognized on VIVID E9

This issue applies to all VIVID E9 with i13L, P/N: KW100011, below Probe Serial Number 1517.
Problem: i13L Probe is not recognized on Vivid E9, even though it is recognized on Vivid 7.
Cause: Wrong Content of the Probe ID EEPROM
Solution: Order new probe from OTR or GPRS, or send request for repair to NorwayCCTTeam@ge.com
NOTE: VIVID E9 BT09 does NOT support i13L Probe. If the VIVID E9 Application SW is below
V110.1.1 please upgrade with FMI 76119, GA200961 (Application SW v110.1.1), and
FMI 76122, GA200974 (Application v110.1.3).
7-14-21-2 M5S-D probe, GE-3MIX, serial numbers below 1697

(Manufactured before December 2009)
Problem: Probes with serial number below 1697 have an increased risk of lens delamination which would be seen by
degraded image quality, and in severe cases by visible delamination as shown on below picture.
Cause: Weakness in manufacturing process.
Solution: Starting with serial number 1697 of the M5S-D probe, corrective and preventive actions are implemented into
the manufacturing process. These probes are now shipped with new systems and to GPRS inventory.
7-14-21-3 TEE probe message: Scan-plane angle is inaccurate
Problem: Under certain situations, when operating the scan-plane of the TEE probe, the following message may be
displayed on the status line on the lower part of the screen:
Scan-plane angle is inaccurate. Endoscope shaft could be bent to hard.
Cause: The newest VE9 software keeps close track of actual scan-plane angle compared to the angle shown on the
screen. Therefore it alerts the user if there is a discrepancy and corrects the value shown on the screen.
During this time (less than one second), the Operator may observe a slight movement of the scan-plane.
Solution: No action is needed. The system automatically corrects the angle shown on the display, while the probe scan-
plane angle is retained unchanged. Typically this situation could occur when the probe is deflected fully as
this places more strain on the scan-plane operation than when the endoscope is straight.

7-14-21-4 TEE Probe Temperature Too High
Figure 7-103 TEE Probe Temperature Too High
TEE probe temperature too high!
Is the probe temperature too high NO

with all TEE probes?
YES
Replace TEE probe.
Replace GFI board.

7-14-22 System Temperature Too High

When the temperature inside the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 increase, the fan speed will increase to cool down
the system. If the air filters become too dusty, a higher fan speed is required to keep the air stream at
the needed level. When the fan speed increase, the fan noise will also increase.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will display messages on the LCD screen, prompting the user to clean the fans
when the card cage temperature is 70 C or more.
Figure 7-104 High temperature error message
When the card cage temperature reaches 80 C, the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will power down automatically
The error log (filename: logfile.txt) will have the following information:
SYS_TEMP_OUTSIDE_LIMIT
Following the message above, the following message will appear in the log:
Fatal error detected by Housekeeping, prompting the user to shutdown the system
If the cooling air stream is insufficient to stabilize the interior temperature within the operating
margin, the system will stop operating.
- Solution: Clean or replace the filters.
In some cases (on VIVID E9 systems with serial number below approximately serial number 1520,
produced before 15. January 2011), the metal mesh on the Card Rack fans are clogged, causing
system overheating:
- Cause: The filter frame was not matching the size of the opening, leading to some narrow
gaps around the filter. In addition, the filter mask width was not optimal compared to the Metal
Mesh.
- Solution: If not already updated to the new version that closes the air gaps found on the first
version, replace metal mesh of the four Card Rack fans.
Install the Fan Screen Kit VIVID E9 service kit, P/N: GA200957.
If already updated, just clean (vacuum) the metal mesh.
If a fan is worn out, it may be noisy, or stop working.
- Solution: Replace the fan(s).
7-14-23 DVR Issue (BEP5)

If the DVR doesnt function as intended, check if the SATA cable from BEP motherboard to DVR
has been installed. If installed, disconnect it!
Section 7-15
Noise troubleshooting
In this section you will find Noise troubleshooting procedures and hints.

7-15-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-160
7-15-3-1 General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-160
7-15-4 EMI Prevention/abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-161
7-15-5 Overview of Types of Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-162

7-15-3 Introduction
Before you start troubleshooting the noise, you should read the following subsections:
7-15-3-1 "General Recommendations" on page 7-160

7-15-4 "EMI Prevention/abatement" on page 7-161
7-15-5 "Overview of Types of Noise" on page 7-162
When talking to the customer, try to gather as much information as possible about the conditions when
the noise appear:
Table 7-26 Noise situations with links to related information
IS THE NOISE PRESENT THEN
see: 7-15-5-2 "Noise Received via the External Cables" on page 7-162
ALL THE TIME?
and: 7-15-5-1 "Noise Picked up from the Air" on page 7-162
AFTER SOME TIME OF USE? see: 7-15-5-6 "Self Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the VIVID E9/VIVID E7)" on
(AFTER HOW LONG TIME?) page 7-163.
AT SPECIAL TIMES OF THE

DAY OR NIGHT?
WHEN?
In All Locations:
see: 7-15-5-6 "Self Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the VIVID E9/VIVID E7)" on
AT ALL LOCATIONS IN THE page 7-163
HOSPITAL, OR ONLY IN ONE
ROOM/AREA? Only In One Room/area:
FROM TIME TO TIME, NO

SPECIAL PATTERN OF TIME IS
OBSERVED?
7-15-3-1 General Recommendations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. The VIVID E9/VIVID E7
complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. Some of
these sources include:
medical lasers
scanners
cauterizing guns
computers
monitors
fans
gel warmers
microwave ovens
light dimmers
portable phones
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
7 - 160 Section 7-15 - Noise troubleshooting
7-15-4 EMI Prevention/abatement
Table 7-27 EMI Prevention/abatement
EMI RULE DETAILS
Keep the unit at least 5 meters (15 feet) away from other EMI sources.
Be aware of RF sources Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high
frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.
Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images.
Ground the unit
Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws.
Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.
Install all screws, RF
gaskets, covers, cores Install the Card Rack Cover over the Card Rack.
Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound
signals.
Replace broken RF If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket.
gaskets Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. otherwise, the gap created will permit RF
RF gaskets touch metal leakage. or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
Use GE specified The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding.
harnesses and peripherals Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
Take care with cellular

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
phones
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the Card Rack or hang out of the peripheral bays.
Properly dress peripheral
Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. attach the monitor
cables
cables to the frame.
7-15-4-1 Different Power Outlet

Connect the unit to another power outlet and verify if the noise changes or disappear.
NOTE: GE requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its ultrasound equipment. This
dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.

Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main
facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
7-15-4-2 Different System

Try another VIVID E9/VIVID E7 at the same location and look for the same noise. If the noise is present
on the new system too, the noise is most likely from an external source/equipment.

7-15-4-3 Different Location

Move the scanner to another location and verify if the noise changes or disappear. This may help you
to locate an external noise source.
Try to move the scanner to:
another location inside the room

another room
another floor
7-15-4-4 Disconnect External Cables

Disconnect all external cables (network, all unused probes, ECG leads and verify if the noise
disappears.
7-15-5 Overview of Types of Noise
7-15-5-1 Noise Picked up from the Air

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air.
If picked up by a probe cable, the noise will be coherent -penlight noise pointing down in the picture -
due to the fact that the noise is received on all channels.
Is it a problem on one probe only?

- Try another probe.
Is it a problem on one of the probe connectors only?
- Move the scanner to another location and verify any changes.
7-15-5-2 Noise Received via the External Cables

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the wiring.
The noise can enter the system via the mains power cable, probe cable(s) or any other external
connected cable(s).
To troubleshoot this type of noise, disconnect cables that are not needed for the basic use of the
scanner. Check for any change in the noise each time a cable has been disconnected from the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Network cable
Cables to any external peripherals
ECG cables and other cables connected to the Patient I/O
Verify if the noise change or disappear when the cables are removed.
Often, this type of noise is due to grounding problems in the mains power system or that the scanner is
sharing a power line with other equipment.

7-15-5-3 Doppler Noise

Horizontal stripes:
This is typically an analog problem on either of these boards:
- Transmitter board (GTX)
- Receiver board (GRX)
Spikes
This is a typical digital problem and may be caused by an issue on:
- Digital Receiver board (DRX)
- Front End Interface Board (GFI)
7-15-5-4 Intermittent Noise

Is there any equipment that is turned on and off near the scanner?
Is the noise present all around the clock or only at special occasions?
7-15-5-5 Motor Boat Noise

May be a hardware failure on a GTX card or on the Main Power module.
7-15-5-6 Self Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the VIVID E9/VIVID E7)
Example: Color Noise in the near field.
Self generated noise will not change if you touch the scanner or the probes.
Self generated noise may be due to either:
- heat problems
- hardware problems
- software problems
7-15-5-7 Heat Problems

Heat problems are usually starting when VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has been ON for some time.
If VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has been used for scanning for some time before the noise appears, it may be
due to either heat problems or some software related issues. By doing a restart as described here, you
may learn some more about the cause:
Select Ctrl+Alt+R to restart the back end Processor without power-cycling the unit.
If the noise is present after the restart, the cause is most likely due to heat problems.
If the noise is gone after the restart, it may be due to either the setup/adjustments of the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 or a software failure.
Some possible causes for heat problems:
Fan filters need to be cleaned or replaced.

Use of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 at room temperatures outside the allowed temperature limits.
Fans are worn-out.
Hardware problems.
7-15-5-8 Hardware Problems

A hardware issue will typically be an error/malfunction on a card.

7-15-6 Investigate the Type of Noise

Use the flow chart below to investigate the type of noise.
Figure 7-105 Noise type

START
DISCONNECT ALL CABLES

THAT ARE NOT IN USE. (KEEP
POWER CABLE AND ACTIVE
PROBE CONNECTED.)
THIS MAY INDICATE THAT THE NOISE WAS PICKED

DOES UP BY ONE OF THE CABLES YOU DISCONNECTED.
YES CONNECT THE CABLES AGAIN, ONE BY ONE AND
THE NOISE
DISAPPEAR? WATCH THE NOISE. IF ONE CABLE IS
RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL THE NOISE, REPLACE IT.
NO
DOES THIS MAY INDICATE THAT THE NOISE IS PICKED UP

YES
THE NOISE DUE TO STRONG ELECTRIC OR MAGNETIC FIELDS
CHANGE? OR THAT THE GROUNDING IS FAULTY.
NO
DOES
THE NOISE CHANGE THIS MAY INDICATE THAT THE NOISE IS PICKED UP
IF YOU HOLD THE PROBE YES
DUE TO STRONG ELECTRIC OR MAGNETIC FIELDS
AND AT THE SAME TIME OR THAT THE GROUNDING IS FAULTY.
TOUCH THE
SCANNER?
NO
THE NOISE IS EITHER

RECEIVED VIA THE AC
POWER CABLE OR IS
SELF GENERATED.
GO TO 7-15-6-1 "Power
Cable Test" on page 7-164.
7-15-6-1 Power Cable Test

Use a ferrite core on the AC power cable to verify if the noise is picked up by the AC power cable.

7-15-6-2 Noise in 2D Mode
Table 7-28 Noise in 2D Mode
STEP TASK
Noise is shown in 2D Mode. Is there any electrical devices that affect the VIVID E9/VIVID E7?
1 If Yes, continue with step 2.
If No, continue with step 3.
2 Keep the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 away from those electrical devices.
3 Check the Probe(s).

7-15-6-3 Noisy Images

Typical noise problems:
coherent noise patterns straight down in the image field.

flashes of noise straight down.
Usually the noise is only picked up when coupling the probe to your body.
Table 7-29 Noisy Images
STEP TASK
Try another probe (same model). Does it help?

1 If Yes, replace the original probe.
If No, continue with the next step.
Disconnect all probes that are not in use. Keep only the active probe connected. Does it help?
2 If Yes: The noise is most likely from an external source. If possible, try to locate and remove the source.
Disconnect all external cables from the I/O (on the rear side of VIVID E9/VIVID E7) and from the Patient I/O, to
establish whether the noise is due to interference from external devices. Does it help?
3
If Yes, continue with step 4.
There are possible ferrite solutions to most of the cable connections.

On USB cables:
4
Wind the cable 5-6 times trough a ferrite ring, GE Part Number 038X0028.
Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O Cable(s)
5 Do the Front End alignment, see, 7-12-14 "Calibration" on page 7-97
Other possible internal noise sources:

6 Main Power Supply,
Peripherals.

7-15-6-4 Noise in Color Flow

coherent noise patterns straight down in the image field.

flashes of noise straight down.
Table 7-30 Noise in Color Flow
STEP TASK

3

On USB cables:
4
Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O Cable(s)
5 Do the Front End alignment, see, 7-12-14 "Calibration" on page 7-97.

6 Main Power Supply,
Peripherals.

7-15-6-5 Noise in Doppler Mode

Horizontal lines.
Table 7-31 Noise in Doppler Mode
STEP TASK

3

On video cables:
4 Wind the cable twice through a split ferrite, GE Part Number 038X1012 / 038X1112.
On USB cables:
5 Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O cable(s).
6 Adjust Acoustic Power a few dB down in order to determine if the noise is coming from the Main Power Supply,
If the noise disappears, the source is the main Power Supply.

7
Peripherals.
7-15-6-6 Excessive Noise Lines when the cursor is placed straight down
Table 7-32 Excessive noise lines when the cursor is placed straight down
STEP TASK
1 Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O Cable(s).

Section 7-16
How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Follow the steps below to open and sort a log file in MS Excel:
Table 7-33 How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sheet 1 of 3
Step Instruction Illustration
1. Open MS Excel.
2.
From the Data tab, select From Text.
3.
Navigate to the log file that you want to

display, and highlight it.
The log file for temperatures is shown as an
example.
4.
Select Import to load the file into MS Excel.

This action opens the Text Import Wizard.

Table 7-33 How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 2 of 3
5. Select Delimited.
6.
Select Next to advance to the next step.
7.
Select Tab, Semicolon and Comma as Delimiters.
8.
Select Next to advance to the next step.
9. Select General.
10.
Select Finish.
11.
Select OK to place the imported data in the existing

worksheet.
12.
The log file information will be sorted in columns.
7 - 170 Section 7-16 - How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Table 7-33 How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 3 of 3
13.
The BEP temperatures for SYS (motherboard temp),

CPU temp and AUX (air leaving the BEP) are shown as
examples for temperatures that are logged.

7 - 172 Section 7-16 - How to Sort Text Log Files from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Chapter 8
Replacement procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to remove and install, or replace, modules and subsystems in VIVID E9/
VIVID E7. It also includes instructions for installing and re-installing the software.

8-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-2 Warnings and important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-3 Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-4 Loading / Reloading the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-5 Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8-6 Top Console Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112
8-7 LCD Monitor and LCD Arm parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
8-8 Upper Operator Panel parts replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-153
8-9 Lower Operator Panel Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-189
8-10 A/N Keyboard parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-223
8-11 Other Top Console Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-237
8-12 Replacing XYZ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-266
8-13 Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-286
8-14 Casters and Brakes replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-309
8-15 Front End Processor (FEP) / Card Cage parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-321
8-16 Back End Processor (BEP) parts replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-359
8-17 Main Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-411
8-18 I/O Modules replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-416
8-19 Peripherals replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-425
8-20 Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-443
8-21 Verification - Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-446
Chapter 8 - Replacement procedures 8-1

Section 8-2
Warnings and important information
This section includes important information. Please read it before doing any of the procedures in this
chapter.

8-2-3 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2-4 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-2-5 Manpower - When two persons are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-2-6 Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-2 Section 8-2 - Warnings and important information

8-2-3 Warnings
TAG
&
LOCKOUT

Signed Date

WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, WE HAVE LIMITED THE LIFTING
WEIGHT FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG
(35 LBS) REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE.
WARNING AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS (WHEELS) OR
ADJUSTING BRAKES.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE

DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED
SEPARATELY.
PLEASE CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL
COMPANY TO DECOMMISSION YOUR EQUIPMENT.

8-2-3 Warnings (contd)
WARNING Spare Part order for Vivid E9 VET:

The same spare parts used in the current VIVID E9 consoles can be used in the
veterinary consoles.
When ordering any of the following, the Vet label(s) MUST be ordered as they need to
be applied to the new part:
- Side Covers - require label P/N: 5447716
- Back Cover - require label P/N: GB200182
- Probes - require label P/N: 5454608
CAUTION When performing replacement procedures within a veterinary environment, return any used/
unused spare parts with the purple scrap marking label (regardless of the actual condition of
the part) and add a description on the label stating that the items were removed from a
veterinary environment.

8-2-4 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have
been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment
with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound
probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as
the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
8-2-5 Manpower - When two persons are needed

This replacement procedure requires two persons:
Casters Replacement
The rest of the replacement procedures can be carried out by one person.

8-2-6 Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7

The following tools (TORX bits or drivers) are needed to service the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 scanner. Screw
diameter and standard torque values are also included. If the torque is not indicated with the procedure,
hand tighten the screws/nuts.
Table 8-1 Tools used for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7
ITEM NO. TOOL SIZE TORQUE COMMENTS
1. BIT # TX-10 M2.5

Use Torque specified in procedure.
2. BIT # TX-15 M3
If the torque is not indicated with the
3. BIT # TX-20 M4 procedure, hand tighten the screws/
nuts.
4. BIT # TX-25 M5 90 degree L are suggested.
5. BIT # TX-30 M6 A full set of 90 degree L TORX
wrenches are recommended.
6. BIT # TX-45 M10
7. FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER 3.2 mm
8. FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER 4 mm
9. FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER 6 mm
10. PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER PH1
13. HEX KEY 5 mm (UNBRAKO KEY / ALLEN KEY)
16. REAR CASTERS: (UNBRAKO KEY / ALLEN KEY)

HEX KEY M12
130 Nm REAR CASTERS
17. Nut Driver 5 mm
18. Nut Driver 3/16 inch
19. Heavy mechanical parts may need a

Torque Wrench, Up to 81 Nm specific torque. Each procedure will
indicate the torque needed.
FC200829
WOODEN WEDGE
20.
WHEEL CHANGE KIT N/A N/A
BEVEL EDGED BOARD

Section 8-3
Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back
The Figure below illustrates what is Left, Right, Front and Rear (or Back) of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 8-1 Definition of Left, Right, Front and Back of VIVID E9/VIVID E7
REAR / BACK
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
FRONT

Section 8-4
Loading / Reloading the software
This section describes how to reinstall and/or install the software on VIVID E9/VIVID E7. Depending on
the actual situation, you may have one or more choices to choose among, when doing the software load.
This will be discussed later in this section.

8-4-3 Software Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4-4 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models versus software requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-4-5 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-4-6 Customer provided prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-4-7 Tools provided with the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 at delivery or after an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-4-8 Data Management - moving all images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-4-9 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-4-10 Recording important settings and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-4-11 When to load or reload the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-4-12 Reloading the Software from Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-4-13 Loading the software from Usb Flash Drive (UFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8-4-14 Loading the Software - from DVD/CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8-4-15 Loading the Software - via InSite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-4-16 Verify the BIOS version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-4-17 Upgrade the BIOS version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-4-18 The BIOS Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-4-19 Setup after Software loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8-4-20 Verifications after the software has been re-loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8-4-21 Printer Driver Reload (from Remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
8-4-22 Functional Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
8-4-3 Software Upgrades

Software upgrades are covered by separate upgrade manuals. Please refer to the respective upgrade
manual if you are going to upgrade the software.
8-8 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading the software

8-4-4 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models versus software requirement
8-4-4-1 VIVID E9 models and hardware/software compatibility
FRONT END SYSTEM APPLICATION

MODEL PROCESSOR BACK END SOFTWARE SOFTWARE CAN BE UP-
NUMBER DESCRIPTION CARD RACK PROCESSOR VERSION(s) VERSION(S) GRADED TO
GB200063 or
GB000070
Complete with
MLA16, GB200001
4D TEE BEP6 w/4D
19 inch LCD (100-230V)
and one TX card
with 192 channels
GB000075
(100-230V)

(100-230V) GA200804 GB200002

GB000095
GB200001 v104.3.4
GB200003
BEP5 w/4D v104.3.3
- 17 LCD
GB200063 or 2000D
GA200824
MLA16, Nvidia
4D TEE
and one TX card
2000D
GA200890
BEP w/4D Nvidia



GB000040 v113.x
v112.1.0 or higher
GB000050 v113.x
GB200002
GA000945 GA200804
GB200002
v104.3.x v112.0.6 or higher v113.x
BEP6 wo/4D
GA000955 Vivid E9 100-230V 2D
- 19 LCD
GA200900
BEP5 wo/4D
GB200001
v110.1.12
BEP6 w/4D
GA200890 or v104.3.x
GA200800
v110.1.x
GA000810 v113.x
- 17 LCD Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
GA200824 or Nvidia
GB200063
v104.3.x v110.1.12
MLA16,
and GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
Nvidia
GA000815 GA200890 or v113.x
- 19 LCD
GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
BEP5 w/4D
Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
Nvidia
8 - 10 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading the software


GB200002
v110.1.12
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
GA200804 or v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
GB200062 v104.1.x
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
v104.1.x
GA200744 v113.x
GA200890,
v104.0.x v108.x.x
5145000-10 NOTE!
BEP5 w/4D Hardware
GA200035
update or box
(console) swap
required.
8-4-4-2 VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility


GB000099
GB200002
VIVID E7 Pro with XDclear configuration Complete w. MLA4 BEP6 wo/4D
GB000100
- 19 inch LCD
NOTE: The software version will increase if the software is updated.
8-4-5 Manpower
Software loading: 60 minutes.
Time for backup and restore/configuration may vary from site to site, and is not included in this estimate.
Chapter 8 - Replacement procedures 8 - 11

8-4-6 Customer provided prerequisite

Formatted and labelled media for Images storage.
Formatted and labelled media for Patient Archive and User Defined Settings.
Password for the user ADM.
The default password for the user ADM is ulsadm.
If the password has been changed by the site, you should record it for your own use, before you
start the work on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
8-4-7 Tools provided with the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 at delivery or after an upgrade
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 System software (UFD or DVD)
Application software (UFD or CD)
If present:
Patch for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (UFD or CD)

Printer Driver Software (UFD or CD)
Please verify that the software is current. Updated software may be available.
Check for any available FMIs.
NOTE: Service Key is not required and should NOT be installed during the software loading session.

8-4-8 Data Management - moving all images
NOTICE An error, or a power loss may occur.

Always backup the Patient Archive and the System Configurations before loading the software! In order
to complete a successful restore of the Patient Database, as needed after a hard disk replacement, or
if all the content on the hard disk has been erased, the images must be moved away from VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 before doing backup of the Patient Database. Depending on the location set-up, either move
the images to a remote server or to removable media.
As the images are moved, the database will point to the new location.
If the backup procedure is not completed correctly, the images and database information will be lost.
For instructions, please see Disk management in the User Manual.
page 9-140.
8-4-9 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations
NOTICE An error, or a power loss may occur.

Always backup the Patient Archive and the System Configurations before loading the software! In order
to complete a successful restore of the Patient Database, as needed after a hard disk replacement, or
if all the content on the hard disk has been erased, the images must be moved away from VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 before doing backup of the Patient Database. Depending on the location set-up, either move
the images to a remote server or to removable media.
As the images are moved, the database will point to the new location.
If the backup procedure is not completed correctly, the images and database information will be lost.
Backup the Patient Archive and System Configurations.
For instructions, please see Data Backup and Restore in the User Manual.
page 9-140.

8-4-10 Recording important settings and parameters
NOTICE An error, or a power loss may occur during the software loading.
It is considered to be a best practice to always keep a record on paper of the settings for the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7. Verify if it is current before you start to load software!
For more information, see: 4-2-17 "Recording important settings and parameters" on page 4-40.
Always ensure that the following information is available regarding a remote printer:
Printer Model (as selected on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.)

See: 4-2-17-3 "Connectivity Additional Outputs" on page 4-42.
The printers IP Number.

The printers IP number is not easily available via the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s menus. Print out a status
sheet on the printer. For more information, please refer to the printers documentation.
If the printer is assigned to a key, record the key

See: 4-2-17-3 "Connectivity Additional Outputs" on page 4-42.

8-4-11 When to load or reload the software

The software loading procedure is somewhat different, depending on why you need to load the software.
Use the table below to make the choice.
Table 8-4 Installation choices
Why Start here
The software installed on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has become corrupted

VIVID E9/VIVID E7s configuration/setup has issues that are difficult to
8-4-12 "Reloading the Software from Repository" on page 8-16.
troubleshoot and resolve, so it may be easier to do a software reload, and
start the setup from scratch.
8-4-13 "Loading the software from Usb Flash Drive (UFD)" on

page 8-21, or
The same as above, but it is impossible to access OLC.
8-4-14 "Loading the Software - from DVD/CD" on page 8-24.
(When asked, select B.)
8-4-13 "Loading the software from Usb Flash Drive (UFD)" on

You want to erase all data on the HDD
page 8-21, or
BEP or HDD has been exchanged.
8-4-14 "Loading the Software - from DVD/CD" on page 8-24.
The other methods failed.
(When asked, select A.)

8-4-12 Reloading the Software from Repository
8-4-12-1 Introduction to Software Reload from Repository

During the installation process, when the software was installed on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, the
compressed original files, from the UFD or DVD and CD, were stored on a separate disk partition on the
hard disk drive, labeled REPOSIT (Repository). If you are going to reinstall the software, you can
install from these files. Usually, when reinstalling the software on the same HDD, you dont need to copy
the files from UFD or DVD/CD once more!
Disconnect all external USB devices before starting the reload. (This is to ensure that the drive letters
are not mixed up during the software reload.)
8-4-12-3 Starting the Software Reload from Repository

There are two ways to initiate the software reload. If possible, use the first method.
If the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is up and running, the software reload can be initiated via the Common
Service Desktop. This method is also available from remote, during an InSite session.
To use this method, see:
8-4-12-4 "Initiate software reload from the Common Service Desktop" on page 8-17.
The software reload can be initiated from the Recovery Console. (This method is useful if the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 doesnt boot.).
To use this method, see:
8-4-12-5 "Initiate software reload from the Recovery Console" on page 8-19.

8-4-12-4 Initiate software reload from the Common Service Desktop

1.) Log on to the Common Service Desktop as GE Service. It requires the rotating security password.
2.) Select Utilities.
3.) Select Invoke SW Reload. This brings up the dialog in Figure 8-2 "Invoke SW Reload" on
page 8-17.
Figure 8-2 Invoke SW Reload
UTILITIES
Enter the response string for

the following challenge string:
Enter the password (from OLC)

in this field.
INVOKE SW RELOAD
4.) Call the Online Center (OLC).

Tell OLC that you need a Challenge Code, and on request, you must read the Challenge String
on the screen. OLC will return a password that you need to type in as the Response.
5.) Enter the Response (password) you got from OLC.

8-4-12-4 Initiate software reload from the Common Service Desktop (contd)
InSite session only: For the next steps you will need assistance from a person at the scanner site.
6.) On the scanner, ask the person at the scanner site to select: System Shutdown.
7.) Next, on the scanner, select: Restart System.
8.) Then, select Submit.
9.) Finally, select Confirm. The System power down and restarts.
Figure 8-3 Select Restart System > Submit
10.)Ask the person at the scanner site to select Confirm.
Figure 8-4 Select Confirm
11.)Ask the person at the scanner site to select Enter. The scanner restarts and the Software Reload
starts.

8-4-12-5 Initiate software reload from the Recovery Console

Ensure that the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is powered down.
1.) Depress the On/Off button on the Operator Panel. The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 starts.
2.) Press the Esc button, on the alphanumeric keyboard, multiple times until the GRUB menu is
displayed on the screen.
Figure 8-5 GRUB menu

GNU GRUB version 0.97 (638K lower / 2095879K upper memory)
USE THE ARROW DOWN KEY
___________________________________________________________ TO SELECT RECOVERY
Windows CONSOLE, THEN PRESS
Recovery Console ENTER.
Use the | and | keys to select which entry is highlighted.

Press enter to boot the selected OS or 'p' to enter a
password to unlock the next set of features.
3.) On the Grub menu, select: Recovery Console.

The GE Healthcare Recovery Console is displayed.
Figure 8-6 GE Healthcare Recovery Console (Example)
Enter the password (from OLC).
4.) Call the Online Center (OLC).

Tell OLC that you need a Challenge Code, and on request, you must read the Challenge String
on the screen. OLC will return a password that you need to type in as the Response.
5.) Enter the Response Code (password) you got from OLC.

8-4-12-5 Initiate software reload from the Recovery Console (contd)

If, accepted, the screen below is displayed.
Figure 8-7 Reload System Software
6.) Press the Enter key on the keyboard. The software reload starts.
NOTE: Time to complete the software reload is typically 15 to 25 minutes.
- When the System Software reload is done, the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 reboots.
- After the reboot, the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 starts to load the Application Software. This is done
without any interactions. The TCP/IP settings, Computer Name etc. are restored.
- The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 shuts down.
7.) Ask the customer to turn the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 back on.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is ready for verification.
Continue with: 8-4-20 "Verifications after the software has been re-loaded" on page 8-46.

8-4-13 Loading the software from Usb Flash Drive (UFD)
8-4-13-1 Installing the System Software (only for BEP6 / BEPY3)

Follow the instructions in the table below to reload or load the software from UFD:
Table 8-5 Reloading or loading the System software from UFD,
Step Task
Check if the alphanumeric keyboard has the F11 key.

If present, continue to the next step.
If the keyboard does not have the F11 key (old keyboard),
1. connect an external keyboard with the F11 key to one of the USB
ports, and use this external keyboard during the boot.
Another workaround is to go into BIOS and select USB as the
primary boot device.
Disconnect all UFDs from the USB ports on the VIVID E9/
2.
VIVID E7.
Plug in the Software UFD in one of the USB ports on the

3.
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Boot the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and at the same time press and hold
4.
the F11 key until you get the first menu on the screen.
Select the USB based boot device, and press Enter.

5.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 boots from the UFD.
Select System Software Installation and press Enter.

6. Follow instructions on screen to install the system software (select
Install).
7. Select Yes in the next dialog box. The installation continue.
Keep User Data and Patient Archive?

Select No.
8.
This starts to install the System Software image on the HDD.
All the existing content on the HDD will be erased.
9. Select Yes in the next dialog box. The installation continues.
When System Software Installation is done (takes about four

10.
minutes), select OK to continue.
11. When ready, unplug the UFD and restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

8-4-13-2 Installing the Application Software (all BEPs)
Table 8-6 Reloading or loading the Application software from UFD, sheet 1 of 2
Step Task
When started, the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will wait for the software on
1. the UFD.
Insert the UFD again.
In Start Application dialog box (after about 5 minutes), select

2.
Install SW ... to continue
3. Click OK in the two following dialog boxes to continue.
Select the button to the right for the software package you want to
4. install.
Then, follow the instructions on the screen.

Table 8-6 Reloading or loading the Application software from UFD, sheet 2 of 2 (contd)
Step Task
5. Enter the systems Serial Number when asked for.
6. Select OK in the next dialog box to continue.
When Application SW installation has completed (takes about 15

7.
minutes), select OK to reboot.
8-4-13-3 Installing the Latest Microsoft Software Patches (all BEPs)
Table 8-7 Installing the Latest Microsoft Software Patches from UFD (all BEPs)
Step Task
INSTALLING THE LATEST MICROSOFT SOFTWARE PATCHES
If the choice is available on the UFD, select the Latest Microsoft

1. Software patches.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
8-4-13-4 Installing the Translated User Manuals from UFD
Table 8-8 Installing the Translated User Manuals from UFD
Step Task
The English User Manual was installed as part of the Application

Software. To be able to select another User Manual language, the
1. translated User Manuals must be installed next.
Follow the instructions on the screen during the installation.
8-4-13-5 Installing the Translated User Manuals from UFD
Table 8-9 Installing the MV Option Software from UFD
Step Task
If the VIVID E9 has the MV option, the needed MV software must

be installed from the UDF with Tomtec software.
DO NOT INSTALL THE OTHER TOMTEC SOFTWARE
1.
OPTIONS ON THE SCANNER. THEY ARE FOR USE ON
ECHOPAC ONLY.
Follow the instructions on the screen during the installation.

8-4-14 Loading the Software - from DVD/CD
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 software is delivered on:
one DVD for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 System Software

one CD for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Application Software
extra CD(s) with software patch(es), may also be included.
A Software Patch CD is used when one or a few files should be replaced or added, but the change
doesnt require a complete software load. Example: Virus hardening software.
one CD with Printer Driver software
When installing the software, start with the System Software, then continue with the Application
Software and, if included, install the patch software after you loaded the Application Software.
The Printer Driver software must be loaded later, after the network connection has been verified or set
up.
Contents
8-4-14-2 Preparations for software loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

8-4-14-3 Boot from the System Software DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-4-14-4 Selecting installation (A, B or R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
8-4-14-5 Press A. Install System Software. (Erase all partitions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Loading the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8-4-14-6 Press B. Repair/Upgrade Partitions C:\. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8-4-14-7 Loading Software Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-4-14-2 Preparations for software loading

1.) If not already done, perform these tasks:
a.) 8-4-8 "Data Management - moving all images" on page 8-13
b.) 8-4-9 "Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations" on page 8-13
c.) 8-4-10 "Recording important settings and parameters" on page 8-14
2.) Disconnect all external USB devices (USB Flash Card, USB Hard Drive, Service Dongle etc.) before
you start loading the software.

8-4-14-3 Boot from the System Software DVD

1.) Insert the applicable VIVID E9/VIVID E7 System Software DVD into the DVD drive.
3.) Wait until the ON/Standby switch has turned amber.
4.) Power ON the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 starts to boots.
First, the BIOS software is loaded, and the BIOS Boot Screen is displayed.
Figure 8-8 BIOS Boot Screen (BEP6)
Next, the BEP starts to boot from the disc in the DVD drive.
Figure 8-9 First four screens - starting PC-DOS and loading drivers for the DVD-drive
Starting PC DOS. . .
Starting PC DOS. . . THE TEXT IN THESE SCREENS

DEPEND ON THE INSTALLED
PRESS F TO CONTINUE DVD DRIVE MAKE AND
*******************************
This driver is provided by Oak Technology, Inc . . MODEL.
Loading
OTI-91X ATAPI . . . device driver, Rev D91XV352
CD-ROM
(C)Copyright Oak Technology Inc. 1987-1997
Device Name : MSCD000
Transfer Mode : Programmed I/O
Number of drives :1
Several screens will be displayed, indicating the progress.
5.) If asked for; press F, and the booting continues.

8-4-14-4 Selecting installation (A, B or R)
NOTICE If you select A in the next step, ALL existing software and data will be erased. If backup has
not been performed, all data like: Patient Database, System Configuration and User
Configurations (Customer Presets), will be lost.
When the screen in Figure 8-10 is displayed, the installation halts and waits for your input.
You can choose if you want to do a complete software installation, deleting all data on the HDD, or if
you only want to update or reinstall the software on the C:\ partition.
Table 8-10 Descriptions of your choices
WHEN TO USE DESCRIPTION COMMAND
Use this procedure if:

To do a complete VIVID E9/VIVID E7 software
The BEP or the HDD has been exchanged
installation. A
You want to erase all data on the HDD
All data on the Hard Disk Drive will be erased.
The installation on C:\ failed.
Use this procedure if you are going to: To update or re-install the software on the C:\ partition.
Repair the software on C:\ Only data on the C:\ partition will be erased. This keeps B
Upgrade the software on C:\. Patient Archive and Presets intact.
This choice stops the installation.

Stop the software installation After stopping the installation, remove the DVD disc and R
reboot the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 8-10 Choices (A, B or R)
SELECT A TO INSTALL THE SYSTEM

SOFTWARE AND TO DELETE THE
DATABASE, THE SETTINGS AND THE
ARCHIVE.
6.) Make your choice, based on the information in Table 8-10.

- If you choose A, continue with:
8-4-14-5 "Press A. Install System Software. (Erase all partitions)" on page 8-27.
- If you choose B, continue with:
8-4-14-6 "Press B. Repair/Upgrade Partitions C:\" on page 8-40.

8-4-14-5 Press A. Install System Software. (Erase all partitions)
Installing the System Software

1.) Press A to erase all the content on the HDD and install the System Software.
Next, you are asked to confirm that you will erase the whole disk.
2.) Press Y to confirm that you will continue. (If you want to return to the previous screen, press N)
Figure 8-11 Are you really sure? Delete HDD Content

This will erase the whole harddisk before installation!
Are you really sure? y/n :
YOU HAVE TWO CHOICES HERE.
EITHER PRESS Y, AND THE INSTALLATION WILL CONTINUE,
OR PRESS N, AND RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS SCREEN
WITHOUT DELETING OR INSTALLING ANYTHING.

Are you really sure? y/n : Y Y WAS PRESSED, AND THE INSTALLATION STARTS.
Installing All . . .

Are you really sure? y/n : Y
Installing All . . .
Partition Status Type Volume Label Mbytes System Usage
C: 1 *DELETED*
THE EXISTING CONTENT ON THE HARDDRIVE
IS DELETED.

8-4-14-5 Press A. Install System Software. (Erase all partitions) (contd)
Figure 8-12 Installing Empty P-scheme onto the HDD
INSTALLING AN EMPTY P-SCHEME
A RESTART IS
REQUIRED
The system needs to be rebooted in order to continue the installation.

Please let the DVD remain in the CD tray, and press any key to continue.
To be able to copy anything into the new partitions on the HDD, a reboot is required. You are prompted
to press a key to initiate the reboot.
NOTE: Let the DVD remain in the DVD tray.
3.) Press any key to continue.

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will reboot.
The monitor may display the message No sync for a few seconds before the
BIOS Boot Screen is displayed (see next page).


The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 loads the BIOS
The BEP starts to boot into PC-DOS. (Refer to Figure 8-9 on page 8-25 for illustrations).


The BEP starts to copy the Image file from the DVD to the Repository partition on the HDD. This will
take typically eight to ten minutes.
Figure 8-14 Move contents from DVD to Repository

Saving Imagefile to repository (takes up to 10 minutes).
Please wait.
Next, the copied Image file is used as source when the System software is installed on the C:\ partition.
Several screens will be displayed.
Figure 8-15 Installing the System Software
When the installation of the System Software has finished, the DVD is ejected and you are requested
to remove the System Software DVD and insert the Application Software CD.
4.) Continue with: "Loading the Application Software" on page 8-31.

Loading the Application Software

1.) If not already done, remove the System Software DVD and insert the applicable Application
Software CD in the DVD drive.
2.) Press any key to continue.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will reboot.
Figure 8-16 Rebooting
BIOS Boot Screen is displayed.


When the screen below is displayed, just wait, and the installation continues.
Figure 8-18 Ready to boot
Several screens are displayed as illustrated below.
Figure 8-19 Booting
1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will then reboot once more, before it can continue.


BIOS Boot Screen is displayed.
When the screen below is displayed, just wait, and the installation continues.
Figure 8-21 Ready to boot (once more)


The booting continues.
Figure 8-22 Loading
When booted, the Start Application dialog will display on the screen.
Figure 8-23 Start Application dialog
3.) Select Install SW to continue the installation.
Figure 8-24 StartLoader dialog - 1
4.) Select OK.
Figure 8-25 StartLoader dialog - 2
5.) Select OK once more.


The LoadSoftware.bat file starts to run.
Figure 8-26 Starting the LoadSoftware.bat file
1. 2.
3.
4.
(Text in screenshot: Starting installation from media.)
Figure 8-27 Click OK to continue.

Figure 8-28 Preparing to load the Application software
NOTE: The next screen (Figure 8-29) will only be displayed if this is the first time the software is
installed. i.e. after a HDD replacement. If the computer name has been generated previously,
the pop-up screen in Figure 8-30 will be displayed.
Figure 8-29 Enter Serial Number
6.) Enter the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Serial Number. The Serial Number is located on a label at the rear
of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
NOTE: You dont need to include the leading zeroes in the Serial Number. They will be automatically
added.
Example: 4404 (Zeros will be added, so the result will be 004404

The Serial Number is used when the Computer Name is generated.


In the next screen, you are prompted to confirm the serial number (and Computer Name).
Figure 8-30 Confirm the Serial Number
CAUTION Computer Name must match original computer name. If changed, access to archived images from this
system will be lost.
7.) Select OK to confirm that the Serial Number and New Computer Name is correct., or select
Change if you want to change the Serial Number.
When confirmed, the software installation starts.
Figure 8-31 The next screens
1. 3. 4.
2.
Copying files Extracting package Unpacking SW
5. 6. 7. 8.
Installing new application software Installing new application software Installing Insite ExC Installation complete.

Figure 8-32 Installation complete. Press OK to restart.
After the installation is complete, you are prompted to restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, but remove the
CD first.
8.) Remove the CD.

9.) Select OK to restart.
When you have selected OK to restart, the CD/DVD drawer will close, and the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
will restart.
Several screens will display during this first boot from the installed software.
Figure 8-33 Screens during first boot
1. 2. 3.
4. 5.


The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 boots.
Figure 8-34 The Application software starts
Soon, the SW Licence dialog, asking for the Option Key, is displayed.
Figure 8-35 SW Licence dialog, asking for the Option Key
10.)Type the Option Key and select OK to continue.

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 continue to boot.
11.)Next:
- If any Software Patches or Virus Hardening software CDs are available, continue with:
8-4-14-7 "Loading Software Patches" on page 8-45.
- Else, start setup as described in: Section 3-6 "Configuration" on page 3-35.

8-4-14-6 Press B. Repair/Upgrade Partitions C:\
Installing the System Software

Follow these steps to install the System Software:
1.) Select B to update the software on C:\.

Next, a screen with the following text is displayed:
This will repair/upgrade partition C:\
Are you really sure? y/n:
2.) Select y.
The System Software image file is being copied from the DVD to the repository. Due to the file size, this
may take from 8 to 10 minutes.
Figure 8-36 Copying System Software image file from DVD to Repository.
Next, the installation of the System Software starts.
Figure 8-37 Installing the System Software

8-4-14-6 Press B. Repair/Upgrade Partitions C:\ (contd)
Figure 8-38 Prepare for application software installation
Installing the Application Software

Follow these steps to install the Application Software:
1.) Remove the System Software DVD.

2.) Insert the Application Software CD.
3.) Press a key on the keyboard to reboot.
After several minutes, and after an additional automatic reboot, a dialog box is displayed on the screen.
Figure 8-39 Select Install SW
4.) Select Install SW

Next, the Start Loader screen is displayed.

Figure 8-40 Select OK
5.) Select OK to confirm the software installation.
Figure 8-41 Select OK to start the software installation
6.) Select OK to start the software installation.

Next, the Application SW Installation warning is displayed on the screen.
7.) At the prompt, select OK to confirm that you will continue the installation.
WARNING DO NOT INTERRUPT THE INSTALLATION PROCESS.

INTERRUPTION WILL RESULT IN A NON-FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM!


In the next screen, you are prompted to confirm the serial number (and Computer Name).
Figure 8-43 Confirm the Serial Number
8.) Select OK to confirm that the Serial Number is correct, or select Change if you want to change the
Serial Number.
CAUTION Computer Name must match original computer name. If changed, access to archived images from this
system will be lost.
When confirmed, the unpacking of the software starts.
Figure 8-44 Unpacking the software
When the software has been unpacked, the installation of the Application software starts.

Figure 8-45 Installing the Application software
When the Application software has been installed, the InSite ExC software is installed.
Figure 8-46 Installing the InSite ExC software
After the InSite ExC software has been installed, the installation is complete and you are prompted
to restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
9.) Remove the CD from the DVD/CD drive.

10.)Select OK to restart.
When you have selected OK to restart, the CD/DVD drawer will close, and the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
will restart.
Figure 8-47 Installation complete. Restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and remove the CD.

8-4-14-7 Loading Software Patches

If a CD with a software patch is included, insert the disc in the drive, restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and
follow the on-screen instructions.
Please continue with 8-4-20 "Verifications after the software has been re-loaded" on page 8-46.
8-4-15 Loading the Software - via InSite

For software reload via InSite, see: 8-4-12-4 "Initiate software reload from the Common Service
Desktop" on page 8-17.
8-4-16 Verify the BIOS version

The BIOS version is displayed on the first white screen during startup.
Verify the BIOS software version.

- BEP6: The installed BIOS version is Revision 3.
- BEP5: For use with the Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard Drive, it must be GA200725 (Revision
1 or higher).
8-4-17 Upgrade the BIOS version

BEP6: No updated BIOS versions are available.
BEP5: Follow these steps to upgrade the BIOS software on the Vivid E9:
1.) Insert the BIOS CD (GA200725) in the DVD drive on the Vivid E9.
2.) Reboot the Vivid E9. A dialog is displayed, giving you 10 seconds to confirm that you will upgrade
the BIOS.
3.) Press Y to confirm that you want to upgrade the BIOS.
4.) It will now upgrade the BIOS software. When the upgrade has completed, you are asked to remove
the BIOS CD and restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5.) Remove the CD from the DVD drive.
6.) Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will do a second
reboot after a few seconds. (This is expected.)
8-4-18 The BIOS Password

The BEP6 BIOS password is: irosil
The BEP5 BIOS password is: ichygg

8-4-19 Setup after Software loading

NOTE: Use this procedure if all partitions on the HDD have been erased during the software load.
NOTE: If only the software on C:\ has been replaced or updated, please go to: 8-4-20 "Verifications
after the software has been re-loaded" on page 8-46.
1.) For networks with Image Vault 5 server running on Windows Server 2003:
- If not already done, install the Vivid Raw Data Module (RDCM), software version v113, on the
Image Vault server.
For instructions, see: Vivid Raw Data Module (RDCM) Installation Manual, Software Version
v113, Direction Number IV294001.
2.) Restore the Patient Archive and System Configurations from the backup you made before the
software loading.
- For instructions, please see Data Backup and Restore in the User Manual.
- For a list of available User Manuals, see: Section 9-26 "Product Manuals for VIVID E9/
VIVID E7" on page 9-140.
3.) With your recordings from before the software loading, available, continue with the setup
instructions starting in: Section 3-6 "Configuration" on page 3-35. Correct the settings as needed.
4.) Continue with: Section 3-8 "Connectivity setup" on page 3-50. Based on your recordings, correct
the settings as needed.
5.) Continue with: Section 3-11 "Options Setup" on page 3-109. Based on your recordings, correct the
settings as needed.
6.) After a software load, you should always calibrate the Front End, as described in: Section 6-8 "DC
Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment)" on page 6-15.
7.) Install the network printer (if any). Please refer to the Printer Driver Installation Manual.
For a list of available manuals, see: Section 9-26 "Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on
page 9-140.
8.) Next, continue with: 8-4-22 "Functional Checks" on page 8-51.
8-4-20 Verifications after the software has been re-loaded

NOTE: DO NOT use this procedure if all partitions on the HDD have been erased during the software
load, but refer to: 8-4-19 "Setup after Software loading" on page 8-46.
NOTE: Use this procedure if only the software on C:\ has been updated or reloaded.
1.) For networks with Image Vault 5 server running on Windows Server 2003:
- If not already done, install the Vivid Raw Data Module (RDCM), software version v112, on the
Image Vault server.
For instructions, see: Vivid Raw Data Module (RDCM) Installation Manual, Software Version
v112, Direction Number IV294001.
2.) With your recordings from before the software loading available, continue with the setup instructions
starting in: Section 3-6 "Configuration" on page 3-35. Correct the settings if needed.
3.) Continue with: Section 3-8 "Connectivity setup" on page 3-50. Based on your recordings, correct
the settings if needed.
4.) Continue with: Section 3-11 "Options Setup" on page 3-109. Based on your recordings, correct the
settings as needed.
5.) After a software load, you should always calibrate the Front End, as described in: Section 6-8 "DC
Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment)" on page 6-15.
6.) Next, continue with: 8-4-21 "Printer Driver Reload (from Remote)" on page 8-47.

8-4-21 Printer Driver Reload (from Remote)
8-4-21-1 Overview
This procedure describes how to reload the correct printer driver via the Common Service Desktop
(CSD).
8-4-21-2 Printer Driver Reload Procedure

1.) Connect to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 via CSD.
2.) Activate Disruptive Mode.
3.) Start Virtual Console Observation.
4.) Select Disable Tcpip Filter.
Figure 8-48 Disable Tcpip filter

8-4-21-2 Printer Driver Reload Procedure (contd)
Figure 8-49 Reboot Required!
5.) When prompted, select OK to Power Down VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

6.) Ask the customer to turn on VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
7.) Connect to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 via CSD.
8.) Activate Disruptive Mode.
9.) Start Virtual Console Observation.
10.)Go to Windows Desktop.
Figure 8-50 Go to Windows Desktop


11.)Go to the Repository, REPOSIT (F:).
12.)Select: PrinterInstaller > Installer
Figure 8-51 Go to: Reposit (F:) > PrinterInstaller > Installer
13.)Double-click the file name: LoadSoftware.bat. This will initiate the Printer software loading.
14.)Select OK.

Figure 8-53 Loading
15.)When prompted, select the correct printer.
Figure 8-54 Select Printer


16.)The rest of the installation is slightly different depending on the printer software. For more
information, please refer to the Printer Driver Installation Manual, Direction Number FC294837.
(For an overview of available manuals, see: Section 9-26 "Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7"
on page 9-140.)
17.)Next, continue with: 8-4-22 "Functional Checks" on page 8-51.
8-4-22 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional tests to confirm the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is operational before returning
the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to the customer.
Table 8-11 Functional Tests
See Sec-
tion Functional Test Debrief Script
4-3-6 2D Mode (B mode) Checks VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-4-22. Equipment passed all
4-3-7 M Mode Checks required tests and is ready for use.
4-3-10 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks
If all the tests are successful, include the following debrief script:
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-4-22.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.

Section 8-5
Replacing Covers and Bumpers
This section describes how to replace the Covers and Bumpers on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

8-5-3 Covers and Bumpers overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
8-5-4 Side Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8-5-5 Top Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8-5-6 Side Bumpers Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
8-5-7 Foot Rest Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8-5-8 Front Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
8-5-9 Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8-5-10 Filter Cover replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8-5-11 Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
8-5-12 Rear Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
8-5-13 Door, I/O Panel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
8-5-14 Cable Hooks replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
8-5-15 Rear Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
8-5-16 Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
8-5-17 Printer Filler Storage replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8-5-18 Column Cover Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94
8-5-19 Main Cable Cover replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98
8-5-20 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
8-5-21 Bulkhead Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
8-5-22 Bumper Boss Z Outer Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
8 - 52 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

8-5-3 Covers and Bumpers overview

The Main Console has a Front Cover, two Side Covers with Bumpers, one for the left side and one for
the right side, a Rear Cover and a Top Cover.
In addition there is a combined Foot Rest and Bumper mounted on the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Table 8-12 Covers and Bumpers for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sheet 1 of 2
ITEM PART NAME ILLUSTRATION QTY
1 LEFT SIDE COVER ASSY 1
2 RIGHT SIDE COVER ASSY 1
3 FOOT REST BUMPER 1
4 FRONT COVER 1
5 REAR COVER 1
6 COVER FILTER 1
7 Door I/O PANEL 1
8 BUMPER REAR 1

Table 8-12 Covers and Bumpers for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 2 of 2
ITEM PART NAME ILLUSTRATION QTY
9 TOP COVER 1
10 HANDLE REAR 1
12 COLUMN COVER KIT 1
14 BULKHEAD COVER 1

8-5-4 Side Covers replacement
8-5-4-1 Manpower
One person, 5 minutes per Side Cover
8-5-4-2 Tools
For tools needed, please refer to: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 8-6.
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
1.) Power down the VIVID E9/VIVID E7

2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet.
8-5-4-4 Side Covers removal
NOTE: The removal procedure is easier if the rear lock is released first, and then the front lock.
The Side Covers are clicked on to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 with two locks, located at the lower end of
the cover. Two rectangular holes give access to the locks. By inserting a #1 Phillips screwdriver (10 -
16 cm / 4 - 6 inch length) (or similar size and length tool) into the holes and bending the handle on the
screwdriver down to the floor, one lock at a time, you can release the locks. You may need to pull the
cover outwards at the same time, to release the lock mechanism.
Figure 8-55 System with covers

8-5-4-4 Side Covers removal (contd)

Follow these steps to remove one of the Side Covers:
1.) Push a #1 Phillips screwdriver into one of the rectangular holes in the Side Bumper until it reaches
the lock mechanism.
2.) Push the handle on the screwdriver downwards to release the lock.
Figure 8-56 Release locks and remove Side Cover
1 - RELEASE THE OTHER LOCK.
3 - REMOVE THE SIDE COVER
2 - RELEASE ONE LOCK.
(PUSH DOWN TO RELEASE)
3.) Repeat the steps above for the other lock.

4.) Lift the cover forward and up to remove it from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5.) Set it away on a safe place until you need it again.
6.) Repeat the steps above to remove the other Side Cover.
Figure 8-57 Side Cover removed

8-5-4-5 Side Covers installation

Follow these steps to install the Side Covers:
1.) Align tabs at the top inside of Side Cover with the slots on Top Cover.
2.) Place the top edge of the Side Cover so it hooks onto the Top Cover.
Figure 8-58 Hook the Side Cover onto Top Cover
SIDE LOCK
LOCATION
FRONT LOCK
LOCATION
3.) Align and squeeze the front edge of the side cover to latch it into place.
4.) Position the Side Covers side lock first.
5.) Position the Side Covers front lock.
6.) Align and squeeze the bottom front of the side cover to latch it into place.
7.) Position the Side Covers rear lock, lifting up the rear tab and guiding it into place.
8.) Align and squeeze the bottom rear of the side cover to latch it into place.
8-5-4-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.
8-5-4-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:
1.) Connect cables and probes you removed earlier.

2.) Power up the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-4-8 Functional Checks

SEE SEC-
TION FUNCTIONAL TEST DEBRIEF SCRIPT
GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-5-4-8. Equipment passed all
4-3-7 M Mode Checks required tests and is ready for use.
If all are successful, include the following debrief script:
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-5-4-8.

8-5-5 Top Cover replacement
8-5-5-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes
8-5-5-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Side Covers.

8-5-4 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-55.

8-5-5-4 Top Cover removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Top Cover:
1.) Remove two screws.
Figure 8-59 Top Cover fixing screws (seen from above)
REAR HANDLE
2.) Remove the Top Cover.

8-5-5-5 Top Cover installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Top Cover:
1.) Position the Top Cover onto the Front Cover at the four hooks.
Figure 8-60 Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover (seen from front)
2.) Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover.
Figure 8-61 Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover (seen from side)
3.) Install and tighten the two screws.

1.) Connect cables and probes you removed earlier



SEE SEC-

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
4-3-6 2D Mode (B mode) Checks GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-5-5-8. Equipment passed all
required tests and is ready for use.
If all tests are successful, include the following debrief script:

8-5-6 Side Bumpers Replacement Procedure
8-5-6-1 Overview
This procedure can be used for replacing both the left and the right bumpers. The bumpers are fastened
with six screws to the side covers. To be able to unscrew and remove the screws, you must first remove
the Side Cover(s).
8-5-6-2 Manpower
One person, 10 minutes per Side Bumper.
8-5-6-3 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


8-5-6-5 Side Bumpers removal

1.) Unscrew and remove the six screws and washers that fasten the Side Bumper to the Side Cover.
2.) Remove the Side Bumper from the Side Cover.
8-5-6-6 Side Bumpers installation

Follow these steps to install the Side Bumper:
1.) Align the fastening holes in the Side Bumper with the holes in the Side Cover.
2.) Fasten the screws with washer, one by one until all have been inserted.
3.) Tighten the screws
4.) Install the Side Cover.




SEE SEC-


8-5-7 Foot Rest Bumper replacement
8-5-7-1 Manpower
8-5-7-2 Tools
No additional tools required.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

Related Information:

8-5-7-4 Foot Rest Bumper removal

Follow these steps to remove the Foot Rest Bumper:
The Foot Rest Bumper is fixed with snap locks.
1.) Pull the Foot Rest Bumper upwards and over the pedals to release the snap locks, while freeing the
side latches.
You may need to push down the pedals to be able to remove the Foot Rest Bumper.
NOTE: In the illustration below (Figure 8-62), the Side Cover was removed to be able to view the Side
Latch. You dont need to remove the Side Cover to perform this procedure.
Figure 8-62 Side latch
NOTE: The Side Covers were removed before shooting the picture in Figure 8-62 "Side latch" on
page 8-66, in order to show the latch. You can replace the Foot Rest Bumper without removing
the Side Covers.

8-5-7-5 Foot Rest Bumper installation

Follow these steps to install the Foot Rest Bumper:
1.) Position the Foot Rest Bumper in place.

2.) Push the Foot Rest Bumper down and over the pedals.
You may need to push down the pedals to be able to place the Foot Rest Bumper.
3.) Replace the Side Covers, if they were removed.



SEE SEC-


8-5-8 Front Cover replacement
8-5-8-1 Manpower
8-5-8-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the Foot Rest Bumper.

8-5-5 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-59.
8-5-7 "Foot Rest Bumper replacement" on page 8-65.

8-5-8-4 Front Cover removal

Follow these steps to remove the Front Cover:
1.) Unscrew the two (2 pc) screws that fix the Front Cover Assembly to the chassis.
Figure 8-63 Fixing screws
2.) Pull the upper end of the Front Cover out and upwards to free it from the pedals and the frame.
8-5-8-5 Front Cover installation

Follow these steps to install the Front Cover:
1.) Thread the Front Cover so it fits in between chassis and pedals.
2.) Align the Front Cover guide pins with holes in the frame.
3.) Fasten Front Cover with two (2 pc) screws and washers.
NOTE: Orientate the washers as illustrated in the detail in the figure below.
Figure 8-64 Fixing screws with washers
4.) Install the Foot Rest Bumper.

5.) Install the Top Cover.
6.) Install the Side Covers.




SEE SEC-


8-5-9 Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement
8-5-9-1 Manpower
8-5-9-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the Front Cover.

8-5-4-4 "Side Covers removal" on page 8-55.
8-5-5-4 "Top Cover removal procedure" on page 8-60.
8-5-7-4 "Foot Rest Bumper removal" on page 8-66.
8-5-8-4 "Front Cover removal" on page 8-69.
8-5-9-4 Plate Connectors w/Guide removal

The Plate Connectors w/Guide is attached with hatches.
1.) Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen the hatches.

2.) Remove the Plate Connectors w/Guide

8-5-9-5 Plate Connectors w/Guide installation

1.) Position the plate and snap it into position.
2.) Install Front Cover.
3.) Install Foot Rest Bumper.
4.) Install Top Cover.
5.) Install Side Covers.

Perform the following functional tests to confirm the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is operational before
returning the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to the customer.
SEE SEC-


8-5-10 Filter Cover replacement
8-5-10-1 Manpower
8-5-10-2 Tools
No tools are needed to replace the filter.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT

Signed Date


For more information, see:
8-5-10-4 Filter Cover removal

Follow these steps to remove the Filter Cover:
1.) Gently pull the Filter Cover out and away from the System.
2.) Inspect the Filter, and clean if necessary.
Figure 8-65 Remove the Filter Cover

8-5-10-5 Filter Cover installation

Follow these steps to install the Filter Cover:

2.) Place the Filter Cover into position and press the Filter Cover top corners until the Filter Cover locks
engage.




SEE SEC-

8-5-11 Filter replacement

Please refer to:
8-13-3 "Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement" on page 8-286.
8-13-4 "Rear Air Filter replacement" on page 8-291.
8-13-5 "Bottom nylon strip Air Filter replacement" on page 8-293.

8-5-12 Rear Cover replacement
8-5-12-1 Manpower
8-5-12-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove both Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Rear Bumper.
6.) Remove Filter Cover at rear.
7.) Remove Filter.

8-5-15 "Rear Bumper replacement" on page 8-86.
8-5-10 "Filter Cover replacement" on page 8-73.

8-5-12-4 Rear Cover removal

Follow these steps to remove the Rear Cover:
1.) Remove two screws on each side of the Rear Cover.

2.) Lift the Rear Cover away.
Figure 8-66 Rear Cover fixing screws
REAR COVER

8-5-12-5 Rear Cover installation

Follow these steps to install the Rear Cover:
1.) Position the lower edge of the Rear Cover into place on the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 frame.
2.) Tilt the top edge of the Rear Cover toward the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 frame.
Be sure the Z mechanisms manual release handle extends through the air vent on the Rear Cover.
Figure 8-67 Z-lever in upper air ventilation slot
3.) Position the Rear Cover into place.

4.) Gently pull up on the Z mechanisms manual release handle to confirm proper position through the
Rear Cover air vents.
5.) Install the four screws, two on each side. Install the two lower screws first, then the upper screws.
7.) Install the Filter.
8.) Install the Filter Cover.
9.) Install the Rear Bumper.
10.)Install the Side Covers.




SEE SEC-

4-3-8 GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-5-12-8. Equipment passed all
Color Mode Checks
Casters (Wheels), Brakes and Direction Lock

4-3-17-2
Checks

8-5-13 Door, I/O Panel replacement
8-5-13-1 Manpower
8-5-13-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


8-5-13-4 Remove the I/O Door

Follow these steps to remove the Door I/O Panel:
1.) At the back of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, push a 4 mm flat blade screwdriver into the rectangular hole
at the Door I/O panel until it reaches the lock mechanism.
Figure 8-68 Door I/O Panel
Door I/O
2.) Push the handle on the screwdriver to the left to release the lock.
3.) Open the Door I/O Panel.
4.) Hold the Door I/O Panel near the upper hinge, and pop hinge out and away from the upper hinge
post on the Rear Cover.
Figure 8-69 Hinge placement on Door I/O Panel

UPPER HINGE
POST
UPPER HINGE
LOWER HINGE
POST
LOWER HINGE
8-5-13-5 Install the I/O Door

Follow these steps to install the Door I/O Panel:
1.) Place the Door I/O Panel into position by sliding lower hinge onto lower hinge post.
2.) Pop the upper hinge into place onto the upper hinge post.




SEE SEC-


8-5-14 Cable Hooks replacement
8-5-14-1 Manpower
8-5-14-2 Tools

5.) Remove Filter Cover at rear.
6.) Remove Filter.
8.) Remove the Rear Cover.

8-5-15 "Rear Bumper replacement" on page 8-86.
8-5-12 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-76.

8-5-14-4 Cable Hook removal

Follow these steps to remove the Cable Hook:
1.) Locate the Cable Hook(s).
Figure 8-70 Door I/O Panel
Cable Hook
2.) Place the Rear Cover face down on a protected, flat surface.
3.) Remove the screw securing the Cable Hook.
4.) Repeat step 2 to remove the other Cable Hook, if necessary.
Figure 8-71 Cable Hook screw placement

8-5-14-5 Cable Hook installation

Follow these steps to install the Cable Hook:
1.) Position the Cable Hook on the Rear Cover.

2.) Install the screw to secure the Cable Hook to the Rear Cover.
3.) Repeat step 2 to replace the other Cable Hook, if necessary.
4.) Install the Rear Cover.
8.) Install the Filter Cover at rear.



SEE SEC-


8-5-15 Rear Bumper replacement
8-5-15-1 Manpower
8-5-15-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove Side Covers.
5.) Remove Rear Cover.


8-5-15-4 Rear Bumper removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Rear Bumper:
1.) Remove one screw on each side of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 8-72 Left screw placement for Rear Bumper
8-5-15-5 Rear Bumper installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Rear Bumper:
1.) Place the Rear Bumper into position

2.) Install the 2 screws to secure the Rear Bumper.




SEE SEC-


8-5-16 Rear Handle replacement
8-5-16-1 Manpower
8-5-16-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date



8-5-16-4 Rear Handle removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Rear Handle:
1.) Remove the 2 upper screws, one on each side.

2.) Remove the 4 lower screws, two on each side.
Figure 8-73 Three screws on each side (left side illustrated)
TOP COVER LEFT UPPER

SCREW REMOVED SCREWS USED TO
SECURE THE REAR
HANDLE
AREA SUPPORTED
2 OF 4 WHEN
SCREWS SCREWS ARE IN
PLACE
3.) Lift the Rear Handle away.
8-5-16-5 Rear Handle installation procedure
Follow these steps to install the Rear Handle:
1.) Install the Rear handle in position so its fastening holes are flush with the holes in the frame.
2.) Install the two screws for the Rear Handle (torque=3Nm).
3.) Install the four hexcap screws for the Rear Handle.

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and probes removed earlier.


SEE SEC-


8-5-17 Printer Filler Storage replacement
8-5-17-1 Manpower
8-5-17-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Right Side cover.

8-5-17-4 Printer Filler Storage removal

Follow these steps to remove the Printer Filler Storage:
1.) Release the fixing bracket.

2.) Pull the Printer Filler Storage forwards, out of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
8-5-17-5 Printer Filler Storage installation

Follow these steps to install the Printer Filler Storage:
NOTE: The Printer Filler Storage is used in the printer compartment on VIVID E9/VIVID E7s without an
onboard printer.
1.) Insert the Printer Filler Storage from the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, into the empty printer
compartment.
2.) Fasten (lock) the fixing bracket.
3.) Install the Side Cover you removed earlier.


Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Printer Filler
Storage replacement:
1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier has been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and probes you removed earlier.

the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to the customer. If all are successful, include the following debrief script:
Table 8-25 Printer Filler Storage replacement Functional Tests
See Sec-
tion Functional Test Debrief Script
4-3-11 Probe/Connectors Check VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual,

Direction GA091999, 7 . Equipment passed all
4-3-6 2D Mode (B mode) Checks required tests and is ready for use.
4-3-17 Mechanical Functions Checks

8-5-18 Column Cover Assembly replacement
8-5-18-1 Manpower
8-5-18-2 Tools
Flexible shaft bit driver extension (optional).
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
1.) Shut down the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

4.) Remove the Side covers.


8-5-18-4 Column Cover Assembly removal

Follow these steps to remove the Column Cover Assembly:
1.) Lower the console to lowest possible level.

2.) Remove the lower screw on the right side that is visible near the rear of the DVD drive.
Figure 8-74 With console lowered, lower right side screw placement
LOWER RIGHT
SCREW
DVD DRIVE
3.) Raise the console to full height.

4.) Remove the remaining screw on the right side that secures the Column Cover Assembly.
Figure 8-75 With console raised, upper right side screw placement
5.) Remove the 2 screws on the left side that secure the Column Cover Assembly.
Figure 8-76 With console raised, left side screw placement
MAIN CABLE
COVER
6.) Remove Column Cover Assembly.
NOTE: The Main Cable Cover will also be released.

8-5-18-5 Column Cover Assembly Installation

Follow these steps to install the Column Cover Assembly
1.) Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges.
2.) Install screws to Column Cover Assembly (tighten by hand).
3.) Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover.
Figure 8-77 Position the column cover inside the front cover

8-5-18-6 Calibration and Adjustments

4.) Verify that the Column Cover Assembly function as intended when moving the Top Console up and
down.


SEE SEC-


8-5-19 Main Cable Cover replacement
8-5-19-1 Manpower
8-5-19-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the 4 screws to the Column Cover Assembly.
NOTE: To get access to the screws on the other side (not illustrated), you must move the Top Console
to its lower position.

8-5-18 "Column Cover Assembly replacement" on page 8-94.

8-5-19-4 Main Cable Cover removal procedure

The Main Cable Cover is held by four screws. Follow these steps to remove the Main Cable Cover:
1.) Remove the Main Cable Cover.
Figure 8-78 Main Cable Cover
COLUMN COVER OVERLAPS

MAIN CABLE MAIN CABLE COVER
COVER

8-5-19-5 Main Cable Cover installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Main Cable Cover:
1.) Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges
(see Figure 8-78).
2.) With the console raised to its full height, install the 3 screws to secure the Main Cable Cover and
Column Cover Assembly.
3.) Lower the console and install the lower right side screw (See: Figure 8-74 "With console lowered,
lower right side screw placement" on page 8-95).
4.) Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover.
Figure 8-79 Position the column cover tab inside the front cover




SEE SEC-
4-3-8 Color Mode Checks required tests and is ready for use.

8-5-20 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement
8-5-20-1 Manpower
8-5-20-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

8-5-20-4 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Covers under XY / Frogleg motors:
1.) At the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, release the consoles XY mechanism by inserting a
screwdriver into the release point and pressing until release. Pull the console out to its extended
position to gain access to the screws in the next step.
XY
(FROGLEG)
RELEASE

8-5-20-4 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal procedure (contd)

2.) Under the XY / Frogleg mechanism, identify the 4 separate covers. There are two types of covers,
one type has two screws (1) and the other type has one screw (2).
3.) Remove the screws from the cover(s) to replace.
Figure 8-81 XY / Frogleg mechanism covers, right side frog leg, from underneath
4.) Pull down and slide the cover away from the XY mechanism. Be sure to flex the plastic slightly so
the plastic clears the XY.
Figure 8-82 Pull down and slide XY cover out
PLASTIC MUST
CLEAR FOR THE
COVER TO
RELEASE AND
SLIDE OUT
5.) Disconnect the cable.

8-5-20-4 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal procedure (contd)

6.) Remove the screw securing the ground.
Figure 8-83 Pull down and slide XY cover out
GROUND
SCREW
DISCONNECT LOCATION
CABLE
COVER
7.) Thread the cover(s) off the cable.
8-5-20-5 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Covers under XY / Frogleg motors:
1.) Thread the cover(s) on the cable.

2.) Perform a dry fit of the covers (confirm the covers face the correct way) before connecting the cable
and ground.
3.) Install the screw securing the ground.
4.) Connect the cable.
5.) Slide cover(s) into place.
6.) Replace the screws to the covers.



SEE SEC-

8-5-21 Bulkhead Cover replacement

The Bulkhead Cover is the cover for the connector compartment at the rear side of VIVID E9/VIVID E7s
Top Console.
8-5-21-1 Manpower
8-5-21-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) At the rear of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, release the consoles frogleg mechanism by inserting a
Figure 8-84 XY / Frogleg mechanism release
XY RELEASE
POINT

8-5-21-3 Preparations (contd)
Figure 8-85 Bulkhead Cover location
BULKHEAD
COVER WITH XY
MECHANISM
EXTENDED
8-5-21-4 Remove the Bulkhead Cover

Follow these steps to remove the Bulkhead Cover:
1.) Use thumbs to press upper lock tabs toward the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to release the top
of the Bulkhead Cover, or, if needed, use a 4 mm flat blade screwdriver to release the 2 lock tabs.
Figure 8-86 Upper tab lock placement on Bulkhead Cover
2.) Pull the Bulkhead Cover away from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

8-5-21-4 Remove the Bulkhead Cover (contd)
Figure 8-87 Bulkhead Cover removed
BULKHEAD
COVER
LOWER TAB
LOCKS
8-5-21-5 Install the Bulkhead Cover

Follow these steps to install the Bulkhead Covers:
1.) Place the Bulkhead Covers mounting angle onto the lower edge of the bulkhead opening.
NOTE: Tuck any cables within the cover to avoid pinching the cables.
Figure 8-88 Install Bulkhead Cover
MOUNTING ANGLE Tab locks
2.) Push the two upper tab locks into the openings in the Frame UI Carrier.



SEE SEC-

8-5-22 Bumper Boss Z Outer Replacement
8-5-22-1 Manpower
8-5-22-2 Tools
1.) Move the Top Console to its upper position.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

8-5-22-4 Remove the Bumper Boss Z Outer

1.) Remove the two fixing screws on the lower part of the Bumper Boss Z Outer.
2.) Remove the Bumper Boss Z Outer.
8-5-22-5 Install the Bumper Boss Z Outer

1.) Install the Bumper Boss Z Outer.
2.) Install the two fixing screws.

1.) Connect cables and probes removed earlier.



SEE
SECTION FUNCTIONAL TEST DEBRIEF SCRIPT

Section 8-6
Top Console Parts Replacement
This section describes how to replace the Top Console parts.
8-6-2 Overview
The Top Console parts have been organized in three main sections, to ease the navigation and make
it easier to find the correct replacement procedure.
This are the four main sections:
8-7 LCD Monitor and LCD Arm parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113

8-8 Upper Operator Panel parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-153
8-9 Lower Operator Panel Parts replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-189
8-10 A/N Keyboard parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-223
8-11 Other Top Console Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-237
8 - 112 Section 8-6 - Top Console Parts Replacement

Section 8-7
LCD Monitor and LCD Arm parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the LCD Monitor and LCD Arm parts.

8-7-3 Replacing the 17 LCD Monitor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
8-7-4 Replacing the 19 LCD Monitor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119
8-7-5 Replacing the LCD Arm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
8-7-6 Replacing the LCD Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
8-7-7 LCD Mount Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-138
8-7-8 17 LCD Firmware Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-141
8-7-3 Replacing the 17 LCD Monitor assembly
8-7-3-1 Manpower
8-7-3-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

2.) Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower, locked position.

8-7-3-4 Remove the 17 LCD Rear Cover

A cover at the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly covers the two cables to the monitor. To get
access to the cable connectors, remove the LCD Rear Cover.
Follow these steps to remove the LCD Rear Cover:
1.) For easy access, tilt the LCD Monitor forward to horizontal position.
Figure 8-89 LCD Monitor assembly - rear view
FIXING SCREWS
2.) Unscrew the two fixing screws on the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly.
3.) Remove the LCD Rear Cover and place it on a safe place.
8-7-3-5 Disconnect the 17 LCD Monitor Cables

1.) Disconnect the two cables.
Figure 8-90 Disconnect cables
POWER/USB CABLE HDMI CABLE
2.) Tilt the monitor back to vertical position.
8 - 114 Section 8-7 - LCD Monitor and LCD Arm parts replacement
8-7-3-6 Remove the 17 LCD Monitor assembly

Two screws are used for fixing the LCD Monitor assembly to the LCD Arm Bracket.
FIXING SCREWS
1.) Loosen and remove the screws

2.) Lift the LCD Monitor assembly upwards until you can lift it away from the LCD Arm Bracket.
3.) Place the LCD Monitor on a clean and safe place.
Figure 8-92 LCD Bracket

8-7-3-7 Install the 17 LCD Monitor

Follow these steps to install the LCD Monitor:
1.) Place the LCD assembly onto the LCD Arm Bracket. Be sure that the notches in the LCD fixing
bracket is well aligned onto the corresponding positions on the LCD Arm Bracket.
Figure 8-93 Install the LCD Monitor
NOTCHES
(ONE ON EACH SIDE
OF THE BRACKET,
ONE SHOWN HERE)
2.) Install the two screws (M5x8, Torque: 5.7 Nm).

Figure 8-94 Two fixing screws
FIXING SCREWS
3.) Tilt the monitor to horizontal position.
8-7-3-7 Install the 17 LCD Monitor (contd)

4.) Connect the two cables. Arrange the cables as illustrated in Figure 8-95 - Connect cables.
Figure 8-95 Connect cables
POWER/USB CABLE
HDMI CABLE
(USE HDMI/DVI ADAPTER, IF NEEDED)
5.) Install the LCD Rear Cover and fasten it with the fixing screws.
Figure 8-96 LCD Monitor - Rear View
LCD REAR COVER
FIXING SCREWS

There are no calibrations or adjustment on this monitor.
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this LCD Monitor
replacement:
1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.


If all are successful, include the following debrief script: VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual,
Direction GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-7-3-10. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
SEE SEC-
Section 10-7 Electrical Safety Tests
8-7-4 Replacing the 19 LCD Monitor assembly
8-7-4-1 Manpower
8-7-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

2.) Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower position.
4.) Disconnect all probes and I/O cabling.

8-7-4-4 Remove the 19 LCD Monitor Cables Cover

A cover at the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly covers the two cables to the monitor. To get
access to the cable connectors, remove the Cable Cover.
Follow these steps to remove the Cable Cover:
1.) For easy access, tilt the LCD Monitor forward to horizontal position.
Figure 8-97 LCD Monitor assembly- rear view
MONITOR
CABLES
COVER
FIXING SCREW
LCD MONITOR ASSEMBLY

TILTED FORWARDS
REMOVAL SLOT
2.) Unscrew the fixing screw on the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly.
3.) Remove the Monitor Cables Cover. Carefully insert a screwdriver into the Removal Slot to separate
the cover from the LCD Monitor assembly.
4.) Lift the cover away and place it on a safe place.
8-7-4-5 Disconnect the 19 LCD Monitor Cables
1.) Disconnect the two signal cables.

2.) Remove the 2 cable clips, if present.
NOTE: If you are replacing any cables, you will also need to remove 2 additional cable clips at the
bracket.
Figure 8-98 Disconnect cable clips and cables
CABLES
CABLE CLIPS
ADDITIONAL
CABLE CLIPS,
REMOVE ONLY IF
REPLACING CABLES

8-7-4-6 Remove the 19 LCD Monitor assembly

Four screws are used to hold the LCD Monitor assembly to the Monitor Bracket.
Figure 8-99 Four fixing screws
FOUR FIXING SCREWS
1.) Loosen the four screws by turning each screw between one half and one turn counter-clockwise.
You dont need to remove the screws.
2.) Lift the LCD Monitor assembly upwards until you can lift it away from the Monitor Bracket.
3.) Place the LCD Monitor on a clean and safe surface.
Figure 8-100 Monitor Bracket
8-7-4-7 Install the 19 LCD Monitor assembly

Follow these steps to install the LCD Monitor:
1.) Install the LCD Monitor assembly on the Monitor Bracket. Verify that all four fixing screws have
engaged in their slots.
2.) Tighten the four screws.
Figure 8-101 Four fixing screws
FOUR FIXING SCREWS
3.) Tilt the monitor to horizontal position.

4.) Connect the cables.
5.) Connect the cable clips, if present.
Figure 8-102 Connect cables
CABLES
CABLE CLIPS
ADDITIONAL
CABLE CLIPS,
INSTALL IF
REPLACING CABLES

8-7-4-8 Install the Monitor Cables Cover

1.) Install the Monitor Cables Cover and fasten it with the fixing screw.
Figure 8-103 LCD Monitor - rear view
MONITOR
CABLES
COVER
FIXING SCREW

Please refer to Section 6-5 "Backlight adjustment" on page 6-6 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this LCD Monitor
replacement:
2.) If finished, connect the cables and probes you removed earlier.

SEE SEC-

4-3-8 Color Mode Checks GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-7-3-10. Equipment passed all
Section 6-5 Backlight adjustment

8-7-5 Replacing the LCD Arm assembly
8-7-5-1 Manpower
8-7-5-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

NOTE: If you are also replacing the LCD Monitor, you do not need to remove the monitor from the arm.
4.) Remove the LCD Monitor assembly.

5.) Remove the Bulkhead cover.
4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-8

8-7-3 "Replacing the 17 LCD Monitor assembly" on page 8-113,
or,
8-7-4 "Replacing the 19 LCD Monitor assembly" on page 8-119.

8-5-21 "Bulkhead Cover replacement" on page 8-106.
8-7-5-4 Disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead board

Follow these steps to disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead board:
1.) Disconnect the Power/USB PLUG from the Bulkhead board.
Figure 8-104 LCD Cables at Bulkhead
BRACKET, LOCK HDMI, introduced

after the picture was taken.
SCREW
HDMI PLUG
POWER/USB PLUG
2.) Bend the HDMI Connector Lock upwards, then disconnect the HDMI plug.
8-7-5-5 Remove the LCD Arm assembly

Follow these steps to remove the LCD Arm assembly:
Figure 8-105 LCD Mount Lock Handle
LCD MOUNT LOCK HANDLE DO NOT ADJUST THIS NUT!
1.) Slide the LCD Mount Lock Handle into unlocked position.
2.) Move the LCD Arm from side to side when at the same time pulling upwards, until you can lift LCD
Arm assembly away.

8-7-5-6 Install the LCD Arm assembly

Follow these steps to install the LCD Arm Assembly:
1.) Carefully install the LCD Arm assembly into position, first feeding the LCD Arm cables down through
the console opening.
Figure 8-106 LCD Arm installed onto the UI Frame Upper (Arm for 17 screen illustrated)
2.) Push the LCD Mount Lock Handle into locked position.
Figure 8-107 LCD Mount Lock Handle
LCD MOUNT LOCK HANDLE
LOCKED POSITION DO NOT ADJUST THIS NUT!
8-7-5-6 Install the LCD Arm assembly (contd)

3.) Connect the LCD cables to the connectors on the Bulkhead.
Figure 8-108 Bulkhead board connections
BRACKET, LOCK HDMI, introduced

after the picture was taken.
SCREW
HDMI PLUG
POWER/USB PLUG
4.) Install the Bulkhead Cover.

5.) Install the LCD monitor:

See: Section 6-5 "Backlight adjustment" on page 6-6 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.
2.) If finished, connect the cables and probes you removed earlier.
4.) Move the LCD Monitor Arm from side to side and ensure that it moves as intended.


SEE SEC-
Lock the Monitor and Monitor Arm in transport

N/A position.
Verify that they lock in these positions.

8-7-6 Replacing the LCD Cables
8-7-6-1 Manpower
8-7-6-2 Tools
For tools needed, please refer to: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on
page 8-6.
2 pc Tie-Wrap
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the LCD Monitor.
5.) Remove the LCD Arm.

8-7-3 "Replacing the 17 LCD Monitor assembly" on page 8-113,
or,
8-7-4 "Replacing the 19 LCD Monitor assembly" on page 8-119

8-7-5 "Replacing the LCD Arm assembly" on page 8-126.

8-7-6-4 Remove the LCD Cables

Follow these steps to remove the LCD Cables:
NOTE: When handling the arm, use the arm lock unless the arm is being turned. Locking will help
stabilize the arm.
NOTE: LCD cable color may be different than pictured.
Figure 8-109 Three Arm Sections
Third Arm
Section
Second Arm
Section
Bumper Cover
First Arm
Section
1.) Remove the two M4 x 8 screws holding the Bumper Cover to the Arm.
Figure 8-110 Screws for Bumper cover
8-7-6-4 Remove the LCD Cables (contd)

2.) Remove the bumper cover from the end of the first arm, as shown in Figure 8-111.
Figure 8-111 Bumper Cover, Removed
3.) Remove the covers from all three arm sections of the arm assembly.
a.) Remove the M4 x 8 screw holding the first arm section cover.
b.) Remove the M4 x 8 screw holding the third arm section cover.
Figure 8-112 Third Arm Section Cover Removal

8-7-6-4 Remove the LCD Cables (contd)

c.) Remove the M4 x 16 screws holding the second arm section cover with Phillips screwdriver.
Figure 8-113 Second Arm Section Cover Removal
4.) Cut tie wraps securing cables in arm.

5.) Remove the cable(s) to be replaced.
6.) Mark cables: After removing the cable(s) to be replaced according to this section, stretch out both
the existing and replacement cable side-by-side, and transfer any markings from existing cable to
replacement cable.
8-7-6-5 Install the LCD Cables
NOTE: Do not over-stretch cables. Before putting covers on arms, be sure arm has full pivot motion/
rotation without stressing cables. If replacing more than one cable, begin with the thickest cable
first.
Follow these steps to install the LCD Cables:
1.) Holding the monitor-end of the cable and starting at the console-end of the first arm section, thread
the replacement cable(s) through the arm sections toward the monitor-end.
Figure 8-114 Feed Cable through First Arm
Console-End of Arm
Arm Lock knob
Arm Lock
Mechanism
Feed cables through

opening opposite the
Arm Lock Mechanism
side
2.) Feed cable through opening opposite the arm lock mechanism side of first arm section.
3.) Make sure the cable markings line up with the midpoint placement location for the first arm (Figure
8-115).
Figure 8-115 First (left) and Second Arm Section Midpoint Locations
Midpoint Locations
First Arm - Midpoint Location
Second Arm - Midpoint Location

8-7-6-5 Install the LCD Cables (contd)

4.) Feed cable through opening for second arm section.
5.) Make sure the markings line up with the midpoint placement location for the second arm
(Figure 8-116).
6.) Feed cable through opening for third arm section.
Figure 8-116 Feed Cable through Third Arm
Feed cable through

inside of third arm.
LCD Bracket
DO NOT feed cable

around outside of third
arm.
7.) For the Video and Power cables, make sure the markings appear past the third arm LCD bracket.
8.) Connect the Power Cable and the Video Cable to the LCD bracket with clips (Figure 8-117).
Figure 8-117 Clip location securing Power and Video Cables to bracket
LCD Bracket
9.) Repeat steps for each cable replaced.
NOTE: Do not pull cables too tight. Before putting covers on arms, test arm motion and cable stress.
10.)Secure the cables in the locations indicated in Figure 8-115. Band the tie wrap through the clamp.
11.)Replace the second arm cover.
12.)Replace the third arm cover.
13.)Replace the first arm cover.
14.)Replace the bumper cover
NOTE: Rotate arm adapter assembly on arm to ensure movement is smooth and free from binding
through full 180.
15.)Reinstall the LCD arm.

16.)Reinstall the LCD monitor.
NOTE: Rotate arm to ensure movement is smooth and free from binding through full 180. Make sure
you do this with the arm in the proper upright position with the LCD end up.

See: Section 6-5 "Backlight adjustment" on page 6-6 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this LCD Cables
replacement:
1.) Verify that the LCD monitor locking mechanism work as intended.

SEE SEC-


8-7-7 LCD Mount Lock replacement
8-7-7-1 Manpower
8-7-7-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Bulkhead Cover.

8-5-21 "Bulkhead Cover replacement" on page 8-106.
8-7-7-4 LCD Mount Lock removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the LCD Mount Lock:
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the LCD Monitor or the LCD Arm.
1.) Remove the 2 screws securing the LCD Mount Lock.
Figure 8-118 Screw placement, LCD Mount Lock
LCD MOUNT LOCK

HANDLE
DO NOT
LOOSEN NUT
2.) Remove the LCD Mount Lock.
8-7-7-5 LCD Mount Lock installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the LCD Mount Lock:
1.) Position the LCD Mount Lock.

2.) Install the 2 screws securing the LCD Mount Lock.
3.) Install the Bulkhead Cover.
4.) Move the LCD Monitor Arm from side to side and ensure that it moves as intended.


SEE SEC-

GA091999,
4-3-8 Color Mode Checks Rev 7 , section 8-7-7-7.
Section 6-5 Backlight adjustment
Direction GA091999, Rev. 7 , section 8-7-7-7. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
8-7-8 17 LCD Firmware Upgrade
8-7-8-1 Tools needed
Table 8-36 Tools needed for the upgrade
Item Description QTY Comments

1 Service Key (Dongle) 1
2 Memory Stick 1
A zip file with the name Kontron.zip is needed to perform this upgrade.
3 Upgrade SW zip file 1
Contact your Regional Support Engineer or OLC to obtain this file.
Table 8-37 Preparations
Step Procedure Illustrations
1. Copy the file Kontron.zip to the memory stick.

Unzip the file.
The file will be unzipped to the folder Kontron.
2. Open the folder Kontron.

Verify that seven (7) files are located in the folder.

8-7-8-3 Upgrade Procedure
Table 8-38 Upgrade Procedure sheet 1 of 7
Insert a service key (dongle).

1. Boot the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and exit to Maintenance
Level (Desktop).
Right-click on My Computer and select Manage to

2.
open the Computer Management window.
Select Device Manager (left section).

Then expand Ports (right section) and check the
USB Serial Port number.
3.
It is COM3 on the illustration.
If it is not set to COM3, then make a note of the Com
Port number, as you will need it later in this procedure.
Table 8-38 Upgrade Procedure (contd) sheet 2 of 7
Select Disk Management.

Verify that the memory stick is detected as drive H as
default.
4. If not detected as drive H, proceed to:
8-7-8-4 "Change the Drive Letter on the memory
stick" on page 8-149,
for instructions on how to change the drive letter,
before you continue with the next step.
Open the folder Kontron on the memory stick.

5.
Start the program SerialOsd.exe.
When the Serial OSD Configurator has started,

select COM3 under Communication Settings.
This MUST be the same COM port number as in
6.
step 3.
If it is different, then use the same port number as in
step 3.
7. Select Connect.

Verify that Device Information fields are populated.

This is done to verify that serial communication to the
monitor is established.
8. If the Firmware Version displayed is 1.14, then the
monitor has already been upgraded, and you can exit
the Serial OSD Configurator and stop the upgrade
process.
9. Select Finish to exit the Serial OSD Configurator.
Start the program CfgWorkbench.exe which is

located in the Kontron folder on the memory stick.
This will display the window in the lower illustration.

10.
Select File > Open.
Select the file CRTtoLCD-7.cwb, in the Kontron

folder on the memory stick.
11.
Select Open.
The lower window will appear.
The default Com Port setting is COM1. This MUST be

changed to COM3 or the Com Port that was detected in
step 3.
12.
Continue to the next step for instruction on how to

change the Com Port number.
If the Com Port is not set to COM3 (the same as in

step 3), then use the pull down menu to change the
13.
Com Port number, as the Com Port number must
match what was displayed in step 3.


VERY IMPORTANT STEP!
Move/drag the CfgWorkbench window down to the
touch screen. The main monitor will turn OFF during
the upgrade process.
The Kontron folder remains on the main LCD.
14.
The CfgWorkbench window is moved down to the

touch panel.
15. Select Firmware Update/Download.
16. Select Write.
In the next window, highlight the file

CRT2LCD7_V114_20130110_NW.hex.
17. Select Open.
DO NOT TURN OFF THE SCANNER DURING THE

PROGRAMMING PROCESS!
The main monitor will turn OFF now and a

programming dialogue box will appear on the touch
18. panel as shown in the illustration.
It will take approximately one minute to program the
new firmware into the main monitor.
The main monitor will turn ON when the programming

is done (after approximately one minute).
Do NOT proceed with the upgrade until the main
19. monitor has turned ON and displays its normal
image.
In the illustration, the monitor has turned ON again and
is displaying its normal image.
20. Select File > Exit to exit the CfgWorkbench program.
Start the program SerialOsd.exe located in the folder

Kontron on the main monitor.
21. Select COM3 in the Communication Settings (or the
Com Port displayed in step 3).
Select Connect.

Verify that the Device Information is displayed as

22.
illustrated, and that the Firmware Version is 1.14.
From the OSD Settings tab, select Reset to Default.

23. The main monitor will turn OFF for approximately
10 seconds until the reset process is complete.
From the OSD Settings tab, select Save Settings and

24.
then Finish.
The firmware upgrade is now complete.

Remove the memory stick and the service key.
25.
Reboot the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and verify normal
operation.
8-7-8-4 Change the Drive Letter on the memory stick

This procedure describes how to change the Drive Letter on the memory stick:
1.) Open the Computer Management window. (See the descriptions in step 2 and step 3 on
page 8-142.)
Figure 8-119 Change the Drive Letter on the memory stick
2.) Close the Computer Management window.

3.) Remove the memory stick from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
4.) Re-insert the memory stick and verify that the drive letter has changed to H.

8-7-8-5 Troubleshooting
The following problems are covered:
"No Serial Communication to the Main Monitor with SerialOSD" on page 8-150
"Error message displayed with Cfgworkbench tool when new firmware is uploaded" on page 8-151
8-7-8-5-1 No Serial Communication to the Main Monitor with SerialOSD
Table 8-39 No Serial Communication to the Main Monitor with SerialOSD sheet 1 of 2
Right-click on My Computer and select Manage to

1.
display the Computer Management window.
Select Device Manager (left section).

Expand Ports (right section).
Check the USB Serial Port number.
2.
It is (COM3) in the illustration.
If it is not set to COM3, then make a note of the COM
port number.
From the Kontron folder, double click on

3.her
SerialOSD.exe.
Table 8-39 No Serial Communication to the Main Monitor with SerialOSD (contd) sheet 2 of 2
Make sure that the COM Port number that you select
in the Serial OSD Configurator (upper, left)
4.her
is the same as displayed in Computer Management
(lower, right).
8-7-8-5-2 Error message displayed with Cfgworkbench tool when new firmware is uploaded
Table 8-40 Error Message when writing new firmware to the Main LCD sheet 1 of 2
Error Message when writing new firmware to the

1.
Main LCD
If the error message in the illustration, Error

2. opening COM port is displayed, check the selected
COM Port settings (see next step).

Table 8-40 Error Message when writing new firmware to the Main LCD (contd) sheet 2 of 2
Check the Com Port settings. The settings must

3. match what was displayed in step 3 and step 4 on
page 8-150.
Section 8-8
Upper Operator Panel parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the Upper Operator Panel parts.

8-8-3 Replacing the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-154
8-8-4 Replacing the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-162
8-8-5 Replacing the Main Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-167
8-8-6 USB Connector Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-173
8-8-7 High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-177
8-8-8 Upper Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-181
8-8-9 Frame UI Upper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-183
8-8-10 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-186

8-8-3 Replacing the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-8-3-1 Manpower
8-8-3-2 Tools
8 - 154 Section 8-8 - Upper Operator Panel parts replacement

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the five OP Panel Knobs along the base of the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly,
see Figure 8-120.
Figure 8-120 Remove five knobs
Remove the Operator Panel, Upper.
For more information:

8-9-3-4 "Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots removal procedure" on page 8-189.

8-8-3-4 Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly
Figure 8-121 Upper OP Panel//Touch Panel Assembly
OPERATOR PANEL,
UPPER
Follow these steps to remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly. Ensure that the OP Panel is
in its uppermost position with the LCD out of the way:
Figure 8-122 XY / Frogleg mechanism release
XY RELEASE
2.) Remove four screws with washers from the Operator Panels back cover.
Figure 8-123 Upper Operator Panels Back Cover
FASTENING SCREWS, 2 ON EACH SIDE

(ONE SIDE ILLUSTRATED)

8-8-3-4 Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly (contd)

Be sure to remove the five OP Panel Knobs. See:Figure 8-120 "Remove five knobs" on page 8-155.
NOTICE Failure to remove the five OP Panel Knobs first could cause damage to the knob shafts.
3.) Lift the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly slightly from the bottom, and then tilt the top toward
the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. There are tabs at the bottom of the Touch Panel Assembly. Pull
straight up on these tabs.
NOTE: For better access, swing the LCD Monitor to the side.
Figure 8-124 Remove Upper OP Panel/Touch Screen Assembly
LIFT UP AND
THEN TILT TOP
TOWARD FRONT
REMOVE
KNOBS
FIRST

8-8-3-4 Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly (contd)

4.) Disconnect the cables at the back of the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly. See Figure 8-125
"Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement" on page 8-158.
Figure 8-125 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement
USB - UPPER OP
PANEL from BEP
POWER - ON/OFF LOGIC

USB - VIDEO to BEP
from BEP
USB - OUT TO
BULKHEAD BOARD
AN KEYBOARD USB
AND POWER
LOWER OP USB - TRACKBALL

PANEL
5.) Lift out the Touch Screen Assembly and place it on an ESD safe surface.
8-8-3-5 Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly

Follow these steps to install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly:
1.) Place the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly in the frame.

2.) Ensure that all Ground cables are connected as shown in Figure 8-126 "OP Grounding" on
page 8-158.
Figure 8-126 OP Grounding
CONNECT YELLOW/GREEN GROUND

WIRE FROM LOWER OP HERE
(NOT ILLUSTRATED)

8-8-3-5 Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly (contd)
NOTICE Do not apply stretch on the Ribbon Cable. It stretched, the connector on Operator Panel, Lower may
break, resulting in a malfunction.
3.) Connect the following cables to the Operator Panel, Upper:

- Ribbon Cable from the Operator Panel, Lower
- Trackball Cable from the Operator Panel, Lower
- A/N Cable from the A/N Keyboard
- Power/On-Off switch (part of Main Cable) in position J23
- USB Cable 1 (part of Main Cable) in position J21
- USB Cable 2 (part of Main Cable) in position J22
- Bulkhead Board USB Cable 1 (from bulkhead position closest to the OP) in position J24
- Bulkhead Board USB Cable 2 (from bulkhead position most far from the OP) in position J25
Figure 8-127 Cables on rear of Operator Panel, Upper
A/N CABLE FROM THE A/N KEYBOARD

TRACKBALL CABLE FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL, LOWER
RIBBON CABLE FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL, LOWER.
BULKHEAD BOARD USB CABLE 1 (J24)
BULKHEAD BOARD USB CABLE 2 (J25)
USB CABLE 1 (J21)
USB CABLE 2 (J22)
POWER ON-OFF SWITCH (J23)

8-8-3-5 Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly (contd)
Figure 8-128 Cables to Upper OP
POWER - ON/OFF (FROM BEP)
USB - UPPER OP PANEL (FROM BEP)
USB - VIDEO (FROM BEP)
4.) Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly by securing the 5 tabs and 2 hooks.
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
Figure 8-129 Slots for alignment tabs.
SLOTS
SLOT
5.) Install the four screws to the Back Cover from behind.
6.) Install the five OP Panel Knobs.


SEE SEC-

8-8-4 Replacing the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-8-4-1 Manpower
8-8-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove five OP Panel Knobs, see Figure 8-130.
5.) Remove the Operator Panel, Upper.


8-8-4-4 Remove the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen

1.) Place the Operator Panel, Upper, with the front down on a clean, antistatic surface.
2.) Remove the three (3x) fixing screws (Phillips #1) and the two screws at the D-SUB connector (3/16
inch nut driver), see: Figure 8-131.
Figure 8-131 Operator Panel, Upper, seen from the rear side
PULL TO REMOVE
PROTUDING TABS
(NOT VISIBLE IN THIS ILLUSTRATION)
NOTE: On some VIVID E9/VIVID E7s, the openings for the USB connectors have EMC fingers
attached on the right and left sides of each opening, ref. Figure 8-132. Be careful to not loose
these EMC fingers when you remove the LCD Cover.
On newer VIVID E9/VIVID E7s, the construction has been changed, so this issue has been
resolved.
3.) Lift (pull) the upper part of the LCD Cover so you can release it from the four protuding tabs.
Figure 8-132 EMC fingers at openings for USB connectors

8-8-4-4 Remove the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen (contd)

4.) Remove the two (2x) fixing screws with spacers, see: Figure 8-133.
5.) Remove the five (5x) fixing screws used to fix the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen to the LCD
(plastic) Cover.
6.) Remove the two (2x) fixing screws used to fix the USB Connector Board to the LCD (plastic) Cover.
7.) Carefully, separate the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen from the LCD (plastic) Cover.
Figure 8-133 Operator Panel, Upper, without LCD Cover, seen from the rear side
FIXING SCREWS FOR FRAME W/LCD

AND TOUCH SCREEN
FIXING SCREWS
FOR USB BOARD
FIXING SCREWS WITH SPACERS
8.) Carefully separate the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen and the Upper Bezel.
Figure 8-134 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen (left) and Upper Bezel (right)
9.) Transfer the existing Main Controller Board to the new Frame w/LCD.
10.)Transfer the High Voltage Backlight Inverter to the new Frame w/LCD.

8-8-4-5 Install the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen

1.) Place the Upper Bezel, with the front down on a clean, antistatic surface.
2.) Install the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen so it aligns with the fixing screw holes on the Upper
Bezel.
3.) Install the fixing screws.
NOTE: Be careful so you dont bend the EMC fingers (see: Figure 8-135) when installing the LCD
Cover.
Figure 8-135 EMC fingers
EMC FINGERS EMC FINGERS
4.) Install the LCD Cover.

5.) Install the five (5x) fixing screws.
Figure 8-136 Position for screws
PROTRUDING TABS

7.) Install the Control Knobs.
8-8-3-5 "Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-158



Run the Touch Screen Calibration in section Section 6-7 "Touch Screen Calibration" on page 6-14.

SEE SEC-


8-8-5 Replacing the Main Controller Board
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-8-5-1 Manpower
8-8-5-2 Tools
page 8-6.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date





8-8-5-4 Remove the Main Controller Board

Follow these steps to remove the Main Controller assembly.
1.) Lift out the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly and place it face down on an ESD safe surface.
2.) Remove the back cover by removing the three (3x) fixing screws (Phillips #1) and the two screws.
at the D-SUB connector (3/16 inch nut driver), see: Figure 8-138 "Operator Panel, Upper, seen from
the rear side" on page 8-169.
Figure 8-138 Operator Panel, Upper, seen from the rear side
PULL TO REMOVE
PROTUDING TABS
3.) Lift (pull) the upper part of the cover so you can release it from the four protruding tabs.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the EMC gasketing that goes around the Touch Panel Assembly,
especially during re-assembly.

8-8-5-4 Remove the Main Controller Board (contd)

4.) Disconnect three (3x) cables:
- Disconnect the High Voltage cable (upper, left side in Figure 8-139).
- Disconnect the black connector (press on the button on the plug and at the same time pull
it out of the connector).
- Disconnect the connector (right side in Figure 8-139).
Figure 8-139 Disconnect three cables
5.) Disconnect the plug on the black cable from the connector on the Main Controller board.
NOTE: The Main Controller Board does not come with the High Voltage Inverter Board, BUT it does
come with the USB Video Board.
6.) If you are going to change the Main Controller board, you may want to remove the High Voltage
Inverter board now. (See: 8-8-7 "High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable replacement" on
page 8-177.) If not, continue with the next steps.

8-8-5-4 Remove the Main Controller Board (contd)

7.) Unscrew and remove five (5x) screws. Store them in a safe place, you will need them for the
installation.
Figure 8-140 Remove screws
8.) Remove the Main Controller Board.
8-8-5-5 Main Controller Board installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Main Controller Board:
1.) Position the Main Controller Board with the USB board plugged in, so it aligns with the fixing screw
holes in the LCD frame.
2.) Install the five (5x) screws (refer to Figure 8-140).
3.) If removed, install the High Voltage Inverter board.
4.) Connect the three (3x) cables (refer to Figure 8-139).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the EMC gasketing that goes around the Touch Panel Assembly,
especially during re-assembly.
5.) Install the Back Cover.

8-8-3-5 "Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-158.

8-9-3-5 "Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots installation procedure" on page 8-190.


Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Main OP Board
replacement:
2.) If finished, connect cables and probes you removed earlier

SEE SEC-


8-8-6 USB Connector Board replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-8-6-1 Manpower
8-8-6-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date



6.) Remove the Main Controller Board.

8-8-5-4 "Remove the Main Controller Board" on page 8-169.

8-8-6-4 USB Connector Board removal procedure

1.) Place the Main Controller Board on a clean, antistatic surface with the solder side up.
Figure 8-142 Main Controller Board with USB board
The USB Connector Board is plugged into the Main Controller Board.
2.) Pull the USB Connector Board upwards to disconnect it from the Main Controller Board.
8-8-6-5 USB Connector Board installation procedure

1.) Install the USB Connector Board.
2.) Install the Main Controller Board.
8-8-5-5 "Main Controller Board installation procedure" on page 8-171.




SEE SEC-


8-8-7 High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-8-7-1 Manpower
8-8-7-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date





8-8-7-4 High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable removal procedure

1.) Disconnect the cables to the High Voltage Inverter Board.
Figure 8-144 Remove cables
2.) Remove the two fixing screws.
Figure 8-145 Remove screws
3.) Remove the High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable.
8-8-7-5 High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable installation procedure

1.) Align the boards fixing holes to the respective holes on the Main Controller Board.
2.) Install the two fixing screws. (Size: M 2.5)
3.) Plug in the new cable to the connector on the Main Controller Board.

8-9-3-5 "Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots installation procedure" on page 8-190.



SEE SEC-

4-3-8 Color Mode Checks GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-8-7-7 Equipment passed all

8-8-8 Upper Bezel replacement
8-8-8-1 Manpower
8-8-8-2 Tools
8-8-8-3 Upper Bezel removal
Figure 8-146 Upper Bezel
The Upper Bezel is what is left when you have removed the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen.
Use the procedure in 8-8-4-4 "Remove the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen" on page 8-163, to
remove the Upper Bezel.
8-8-8-4 Upper Bezel installation

Use the procedure in 8-8-4-5 "Install the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen" on page 8-165, to install
the Upper Bezel.



SEE SEC-

8-8-9 Frame UI Upper replacement
8-8-9-1 Manpower
8-8-9-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

5.) Remove the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
6.) Remove the Lower Operator Panel.
7.) Remove the Bulkhead Board.
8.) Remove the Bulkhead Plate.

8-7-5-5 "Remove the LCD Arm assembly" on page 8-127.
8-8-3-4 "Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-156
8-11-4-4 "Remove the Bulkhead Board" on page 8-243.
8-11-5-4 "Remove the Bulkhead Plate" on page 8-246.

8-8-9-4 Remove the Frame UI Upper

The Bulkhead Plate is used to secure the Upper UI Frame to the Lower UI Frame.
Figure 8-147 Bulkhead Plate and Plate Washer Frame
Plate Washer Frame Plate Washer Frame
Bulkhead Plate
1.) Remove the eleven fixing screws (see: Figure 8-147 "Bulkhead Plate and Plate Washer Frame" on
page 8-184).
2.) Remove the Bulkhead Plate and the Cable Clamp.
3.) Remove the Frame UI Upper.
8-8-9-5 Install the Frame UI Upper

1.) Position the Frame UI Upper so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws.
2.) Position the Bulkhead Plate so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws.
3.) Install the seven fixing screws as described below:
- The two upper screws are M6 x 20, Torque: 8.5 Nm.
- The next screw is M6 x 45, Torque: 8.5 Nm.
- The lower, left-most screw is M6 x 30, Torque 8,5 Nm. It is also used for a ground wire (not
illustrated).
- The three remaining lower screws are M6 x 25, Torque: 8.5 Nm. Two of the screws are also
fixing the Cable Clamp (see: Figure 8-185 "The Bulkhead Plate" on page 8-246).
5.) Install the Bulkhead Board.
6.) Install the two Speaker assemblies.
8.) Install the Operator Panel Knobs.
8-9-4-5 "Install the Operator Panel, Lower" on page 8-195.

8-11-4-5 "Install the Bulkhead Board" on page 8-243.
8-11-3-5 "Install the Speaker Assembly" on page 8-239.
8-9-3-4 "Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots removal procedure" on page 8-189



SEE SEC-

8-8-10 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement

The Options Holder (the Left Support or Right Support) is the base piece that attaches to the upper
console to support either a Transvaginal Probe Holder or a Storage Tray. The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 can
support one Left Options Holder and one Right Options Holder at the same time.
8-8-10-1 Manpower
8-8-10-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

3.) Separate and remove the Storage Tray.

8-8-10-4 Options Holder removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Options Holder:
1.) From underneath the Upper Console, remove the 3 screws securing the Options Holder.
Figure 8-148 Screws, beneath upper console
2.) Remove the Options Holder from the Upper Console.
8-8-10-5 Options Holder installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Options Holder:
1.) Position the Options Holder in place.

2.) Install the 3 screws securing the Options Holder.
3.) Install the Storage Tray to the Options Holder.



SEE SEC-

Section 8-9
Lower Operator Panel Parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the Lower Operator Panel parts.

8-9-3 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-189
8-9-4 Replacing the Operator Panel, Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-192
8-9-5 Replacing the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-198
8-9-6 Encoder Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-202
8-9-7 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-205
8-9-8 Lower Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-208
8-9-9 Lower Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212
8-9-10 Operator Panel Cable Kit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-216
8-9-11 Convert old style OP Lower to new style OP Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-221
8-9-3 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-9-3-1 Manpower
8-9-3-2 Tools
No tools are needed for this procedure.
No special preparations needed.
8-9-3-4 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots removal procedure
NOTE: If you are going to remove the Upper Operator Panel, you only need to remove the five knobs
below the Touch Screen.
1.) Pull the knobs one by one until all knobs have been removed.
2.) Store the knobs in a clean place.

8-9-3-5 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots installation procedure
Figure 8-149 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots
Install the knobs one by one. Refer to the illustration above for the correct position for the knobs.

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this parts replacement.
8 - 190 Section 8-9 - Lower Operator Panel Parts replacement


SEE SEC-

8-9-4 Replacing the Operator Panel, Lower
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-9-4-1 Manpower
8-9-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove Operator Panel, Upper.


8-9-4-4 Remove the Operator Panel, Lower

Follow these steps to remove the Operator Panel:
1.) Pull the Alphanumeric keyboard to its extended position to get access to the screws in the next step.
Figure 8-150 OP seen from below
2.) The screws are available from the underside of the Operator Panel tray. Unscrew and remove the
four screws used for fixing the Operator Panel assembly to the Operator Panel tray.
3.) Loosen the screws for the cables grounding on the Bulkhead Bracket and move the OP Cables
away from the bracket.
Figure 8-151 OP Cables Grounding
4
1
2
5
3
1 - Cable, A/N Keybd. 4 - Bulkhead cable

2 - USB2 5 - HDMI Cable
3 - USB1 6 - OP Cable

8-8-4-4 Remove the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen (contd)

4.) On the Bulkhead Bracket, loosen the ESD wire from the Lower Panel.
Figure 8-152 OP Grounding
YELLOW/GREEN GROUND WIRE FROM

LOWER OP HERE
(NOT ILLUSTRATED)
Figure 8-153 Remove OP Panel Lower assembly
FINGER
5.) Pull and lift the Operator Panel assembly up and away. Be careful to not destroy the fingers on each
side of the Operator Panel, Lower.
6.) Store it on an ESD safe place.

8-9-4-5 Install the Operator Panel, Lower

Follow these steps to install the Operator Panel:
1.) Carefully, Slide in the Operator Panel. Lower.

Be careful with the fingers which have to be placed under the side walls of the UI Frame, Upper.
2.) On the Bulkhead Bracket, fasten the ESD wire from the Lower Panel.
Figure 8-154 Lower OP Grounding
YELLOW/GREEN GROUND WIRE FROM

LOWER OP HERE
(NOT ILLUSTRATED)
3.) Attach the cables to the cable grounding brackets/points, as illustrated below.
Since this feature is for the EMI compatibility the braid have to be exposed under the bracket and
the cables have to be well locked by the bracket.
Figure 8-155 OP Cables Grounding
4
1
2
5
3
1 - Cable, A/N Keybd. 4 - Bulkhead cable

2 - USB2 5 - HDMI Cable
3 - USB1 6 - OP Cable
4.) Install the four fixing screws that fix the Operator Panel assembly to the Operator Panel tray (2 pc.
M4x25 nearest to the front and 2 pc. M4 x 12 at the rear). The screws are entered from below the
Operator Panel tray.


Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Operator Panel
replacement:
3.) Verify that the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly can be moved as intended and that it locks in its
inner position.


SEE SEC-

8-9-5 Replacing the Trackball
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: Dust can interfere with the trackball function.

For trackball cleaning instructions, see: 4-2-19 "Cleaning the Trackball (OP-1 to OP-4)" on
page 4-53.
8-9-5-1 Manpower
8-9-5-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date



8-9-5-4 Remove the Trackball
Figure 8-156 Trackball with fixing screws
Follow these steps to remove the Trackball:
1.) Unplug the cable connectors from the Trackball.

2.) Use the Hex key to remove the two fixing screws with washers.
3.) Remove the Trackball and the Fixing Ring.

8-9-5-5 Install the Trackball

Follow these steps to install the Trackball:
1.) Install the Trackball with the Fixing Ring.

The Fixing Ring has small tabs on the top and bottom side, see figure below. The tabs are used to
fix the Fixing Ring in the correct position, and are positioned on different locations on the top and
the bottom sides of the ring. When used for the Vivid E9, install it so the fixing screw holes on the
Fixing Ring allign with the fixing screw holes on the Trackball assembly.
Figure 8-157 Fixing Ring installed for use on the Vivid E9.
2.) Install the two fixing screws with washers so it locks the Trackball and Fixing Ring in the correct
position.
3.) Connect signal cable connectors to the Trackball.



SEE SEC-
4-3-8 Color Mode Checks VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
4-3-9 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks required tests and is ready for use.
4-3-15 Operator Panel Test

and and
7-12-11-2 Mouse (Trackball)

8-9-6 Encoder Board replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-9-6-1 Manpower
8-9-6-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date



8-9-6-4 Encoder Board removal procedure

1.) Disconnect the cable to the Encoder Board.
2.) Turn the Operator Panel, Lower with the front up.
3.) Unscrew and remove 4 screws.

4.) Remove the Encoder Board.
8-9-6-5 Encoder Board installation procedure

1.) Position the Encoder board so the holes for the fixing screws aligns.
2.) Install the four screws.
3.) Turn the Operator Panel, Lower with the front down.
4.) Plug in the cable to the Operator Panel, Lower.



SEE SEC-

8-9-7 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-9-7-1 Manpower
8-9-7-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the Trackball.

8-9-5-4 "Remove the Trackball" on page 8-199.

8-9-7-4 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer removal

1.) Disconnect the cable to the Encoder Board.
Figure 8-159 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer - Trackball already removed.
2.) Remove the 26 fixing screws.
Figure 8-160 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer - Trackball already removed.
3.) Remove the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer. Store it in an ESD safe place.

8-9-7-5 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer installation

1.) Verify that all switch cups are in their correct positions.
2.) Position the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer in its correct position.
3.) Install the 26 fixing screws.
4.) Connect the cable to the Encoder Board.


SEE SEC-

8-9-8 Lower Bezel replacement
Figure 8-161 Lower Bezel
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-9-8-1 Manpower
8-9-8-2 Tools

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

5.) Remove the Operator Panel, Lower. Place it on a clean surface with the front down.
7.) Remove the Encoder Board.
8.) Remove the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer.

8-9-5-4 "Remove the Trackball" on page 8-199
8-9-6-4 "Encoder Board removal procedure" on page 8-203
8-9-7-4 "Lower Switch Board with Elastomer removal" on page 8-206.
8-9-8-4 Remove the Lower Bezel

1.) Remove all the Switch Cups.
If possible, place them in their relative position on a table, or other place where you can keep them
until you start the reinstallation. If you are going to install a new Lower Bezel, you should move the
Switch Cups over to the new Lower Bezel, one by one.
2.) When done, remove the Lower Bezel.

8-9-8-5 Install the Lower Bezel

1.) Install the Switch Cups in the correct positions on the Lower Bezel. Use the mirrored image in Figure
8-162 as a reference.
NOTE: THE ILLUSTRATION BELOW IS A MIRRORED ILLUSTRATION.

USE IT FOR REFERENCE WHEN INSTALLING THE SWITCH CUPS!
Figure 8-162 Mirrored illustration of the Switch Cups positions
MIRRORED VIEW
2.) Install the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer.

3.) Install the Encoder Board.
7.) Install the Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots.


SEE SEC-

8-9-9 Lower Frame Assembly replacement
Figure 8-163 Lower Frame Assembly
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-9-9-1 Manpower
8-9-9-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

5.) Remove the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.

8.) Remove Handle Left Top and Handle Right Top.
9.) Remove the Palm Rest.
10.)Remove the XYZ Buttons Frame.

8-8-3-4 "Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-156
8-11-8-4 "Handle Left Top / Handle Right Top removal" on page 8-253
8-11-9-4 "Palm Rest ASSY removal" on page 8-256
8-11-12-4 "XYZ Buttons removal procedure" on page 8-261

8-9-9-4 Lower Frame Assembly removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Lower Operator Panel Frame:
1.) Remove the 2 screws securing the Main Cable.
Figure 8-164 Screw placement, Main Cable clamp
2.) Remove the 5 remaining screws securing the Bulkhead Bracket.

3.) Remove the Bulkhead Bracket.
Figure 8-165 Screw placement, bulkhead bracket
4.) From underneath the Frame, pull the Main Cables through the Frame opening to free the Frame.
5.) Remove the Upper Frame.
6.) Remove two plastic Plate Washers on each side of the Bulkhead Bracket.
7.) Remove the Lower Operator Panel Frame.

8-9-9-5 Lower Frame Assembly installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Lower Operator Panel Frame:
1.) Position the Lower Operator Panel Frame.

2.) Install the Upper Frame.
3.) Install the plastic Plate Washers on both side of the Bulkhead Bracket.
4.) Position the Bulkhead Bracket.
5.) Install the 5 screws to secure the Bulkhead Bracket.
6.) Install the XYZ Buttons Frame.
7.) Install the Palm Rest.
8.) Install the Main Cable at the Lower Operator Panel end.
10.)Install the Lower Operator Panel.
11.)Install the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
12.)Install the LCD Arm.


SEE SEC-

8-9-10 Operator Panel Cable Kit Replacement
8-9-10-1 Overview
The Operator Panel Cable Kit includes three different cables, as illustrated in Figure 8-166.
The Trackball USB Cable is used on the Operator Panel, Lower.

The USB Video Board Flex Cable and the HV Inverter Cable are both used on the Operator Panel,
Upper.
Figure 8-166 The Operator Panel Cable Kit
TRACKBALL USB CABLE

Connects the Trackball to the Controller board.
USB VIDEO BOARD FLEX CABLE

Connects the Touch Screen to the USB Video board.
HV INVERTER CABLE
Connects the Touch Screen to the HV Inverter board.
Contents
8-9-10-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-216

8-9-10-2 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-216
8-9-10-3 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-216
8-9-10-4 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-217
8-9-10-5 Disconnect the Trackball USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-218
8-9-10-6 Install the Trackball USB Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-218
8-9-10-7 Disconnect the USB Video Board Flex Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-218
8-9-10-8 Install the USB Video Board Flex Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-218
8-9-10-9 Disconnect the HV Inverter Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-218
8-9-10-10Install the HV Inverter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-219
8-9-10-11Calibration and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-219
8-9-10-12Functional Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-220
8-9-10-2 Manpower
8-9-10-3 Tools

POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Operator Panel, Upper and place it on a clean surface with the front down.


Figure 8-167 The Operator Panel Cable Kit
TRACKBALL USB CABLE

Connects the Trackball to the Controller board.
USB VIDEO BOARD FLEX CABLE

Connects the Touch Screen to the USB Video board.
HV INVERTER CABLE
Connects the Touch Screen to the HV Inverter board.
8-9-10-5 Disconnect the Trackball USB Cable

The Trackball USB Cable is connected between the Trackball and the Main Controller board.
Disconnect both ends of the cable and remove it.
8-9-10-6 Install the Trackball USB Cable

1.) Connect the Trackball USB Cable to the Trackball.
3.) Install the cable below the Ground Clamp.
4.) Connect the Trackball USB Cable to the Operator Panel, Upper.
6.) Continue with: 8-9-10-11 "Calibration and adjustments" on page 8-219.
8-9-10-7 Disconnect the USB Video Board Flex Cable

The USB Video Board Flex Cable is the connection between the USB Video Board and the LCD (Touch)
Display.
1.) Remove the Rear Cover on the Operator Panel, Upper.

2.) Disconnect both ends of the cable and remove it.
8-9-10-8 Install the USB Video Board Flex Cable

1.) Connect the USB Video Board Flex Cable to the USB Video Board and the other end to the LCD
(Touch) Display.
2.) Install the Rear Cover on the Operator Panel, Upper.
4.) If removed, install the Operator Panel, Lower.
8-9-10-9 Disconnect the HV Inverter Cable

The HV Inverter Cable is the cable between the HV Inverter board and the Main Controller board.
1.) Remove the Rear Cover on the Operator Panel, Upper.

2.) Disconnect both ends of the cable and remove it.

8-9-10-10 Install the HV Inverter Cable

1.) Connect the HV Inverter Cable to the HV Inverter board and the other end to the Main Controller
board.
2.) Install the Rear Cover on the Operator Panel, Upper.
4.) If removed, install the Operator Panel, Lower.

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this parts replacement.


SEE SEC-


8-9-11 Convert old style OP Lower to new style OP Lower

NOTE: On the *new style Operator Panel, Lower, the trackball can be opened from the front for
cleaning. This is not possible on the old style Operator Panel, Lower.
This procedure describes how GA200953 (old style) can be converted to the new style.
8-9-11-1 Parts
To convert old type operator panel to new type operator panel the following parts must be ordered:
GB200017 Laser Trackball Assembly.

GB200024 Operator Panel Lower Bezel.
8-9-11-2 Procedure
1.) Remover Upper Panel and disconnect cables.
2.) Remove Lower Panel.
4.) Disassemble Lower Panel.
Figure 8-168 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer - Trackball already removed
5.) Move all buttons and electronics to the new Bezel.
NOTE: Buttons are not attached to Bezel and will fall out if turned over!

8-9-11 Convert old style OP Lower to new style OP Lower (contd)

6.) Reassemble Lower Panel with new Bezel and Laser Trackball.
Figure 8-169 Trackball on new style Lower panel
7.) Reinstall Lower Panel.

8.) Reinstall Upper Panel and reconnect cables.
9.) Verify functionality.

Section 8-10
A/N Keyboard parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the different A/N Keyboard parts.

8-10-3 Replacing the Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-224
8-10-4 Replacing the A/N Keyboard or the A/N Keyboard Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-227
8-10-5 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-231
8-10-6 J-Rail Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-234

8-10-3 Replacing the Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly
8-10-3-1 Overview
The Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly is not a FRU, but both the language specific keyboard, called
the A/N keyboard, and the A/N Keyboard Enclosure are FRUs. These two parts together equals one
Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly.
8-10-3-2 Manpower
8-10-3-3 Tools
page 8-6.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

8 - 224 Section 8-10 - A/N Keyboard parts replacement

8-10-3-5 Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly removal procedure

The Alphanumeric Keyboard is installed on a rail below the Operator Panel.
Figure 8-170 Alphanumeric Keyboard
Follow the steps below to remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly:
1.) Disconnect the cable (plug) that is connected to the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly.
2.) Disconnect the ESD cable.
Figure 8-171 Alphanumeric Keyboard seen from below
PLUG
LOCK

8-10-3-5 Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly removal procedure (contd)

3.) Tilt down the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly. If you are afraid to use the needed force, you may
use a flat blade screwdriver to unlock the two locks illustrated in Figure 8-171 "Alphanumeric
Keyboard seen from below" on page 8-225.
4.) Move the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly so it un-gage, then lift it away.
8-10-3-6 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly:
1.) Install the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly in the hinges on the rail.
2.) Tilt the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly up so it locks in horizontal position.
3.) Connect the ESD cable.
4.) Connect the cable to the connector on the rear of the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly.


SEE SEC-

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction GA091999, Rev 7 ,

section 8-10-3-8. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.

8-10-4 Replacing the A/N Keyboard or the A/N Keyboard Enclosure
8-10-4-1 Manpower
8-10-4-2 Tools
page 8-6.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT

Signed Date


4.) Remove the Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

8-10-3 "Replacing the Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly" on page 8-224

8-10-4-4 Disassemble the A/N Keyboard and the A/N Keyboard Enclosure
1.) Place the Alpha-Numeric Keyboard Assembly on a table with the keys down.
The A/N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure has two holes where you can access two of the fixing tabs to
release them.
2.) Insert a thin screwdriver in one of the provided holes and use it to release the tabs buy pressing as
illustrated with the arrow in the figure below.
Figure 8-172 Release the two tabs
3.) Separate the A/N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure from the rest of the A/N Keyboard Assembly.
4.) You can now separate the A/N Keyboard from the A/N Keyboard Top Enclosure, by releasing the
fixing tabs, one by one, until the parts are separated.

8-10-4-5 Assemble the A/N Keyboard and the A/N Keyboard Enclosure
1.) If not already done, connect the Ground Cable to the A/N Keyboard, using the current screw and
two additional washers (tooth, 3.2mm). Use one washer under and one washer over the cable shoe.
(Torque: 2.3 Nm.)
Figure 8-173 Install Ground Cable
2.) Install the A/N keyboard into the A/N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure. First position the keyboard under
the front clips (A) then press the rear side of the keyboard under the rear clips (B).
Figure 8-174 Install A/N keyboard into the A/N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure

8-10-4-5 Assemble the A/N Keyboard and the A/N Keyboard Enclosure (contd)
3.) Position the Ground Cable (C) in the opening of the A/N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure.
Figure 8-175 Ground Cable (C) in the opening of the A/N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure
4.) Install the A/N Keyboard Top Enclosure onto the keyboard by snapping the eight small clips on the
Top Enclosure onto the keyboard metal base plate. The eight positions are marked in the figure
below.
Figure 8-176 Install A/N Keyboard Top Enclosure
The A/N Keyboard Assembly is now ready for installation on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, see:
8-10-3-6 "Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly installation procedure" on page 8-226.
(For Verification test and debrief script, see: 8-10-3-8 "Functional Checks" on page 8-226.)

8-10-5 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly replacement
8-10-5-1 Manpower
8-10-5-2 Tools
page 8-6.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT

Signed Date


4.) Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.
6.) Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly.

8-10-3-5 "Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly removal procedure" on page 8-225.

8-10-5-4 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly removal

The Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly is located below the User Interface.
Figure 8-177 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly
1.) Remove the six screws that fix the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly to the UI Console (three
screws on each side).
2.) Remove the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly.
8-10-5-5 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assy installation
Figure 8-178 The Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assy.
1.) Position the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assy below the UI Console as illustrated in Figure 8-177
"Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly" on page 8-232. Ensure that the wagon is running free,
before you tighten the screws in the next step.
2.) Install the six fixing screws M4 x 8, Torque: 2.5 Nm.
3.) Install the Alphanumeric Keyboard.
4.) Install the Lower OP Panel.
5.) Install the Upper OP Panel.

There are no calibrations for this unit.
The only adjustment is to ensure that the wagon is running free, before you tighten the screws.


SEE SEC-

8-10-6 J-Rail Assy replacement
Figure 8-179 J-Rail Assy
8-10-6-1 Manpower
8-10-6-2 Tools
page 8-6.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly.
7.) Remove the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assy.

8-10-3-5 "Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly removal procedure" on page 8-225.
8-10-5-4 "Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly removal" on page 8-232.

8-10-6-4 J-Rail Assy removal
Figure 8-180 The Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assy.
1.) Bend up the tab so it doesnt stop the Wagon, A/N Drawer Sheet Met. Assy.
2.) Slide the Wagon, A/N Drawer Sheet Met. Assy out of the J-Rail.
3.) If needed, repeat this procedure for the other J-Rail Assy.
8-10-6-5 J-Rail Assy installation procedure

1.) Slide the Wagon, A/N Drawer Sheet Met. Assy into the J-Rail w/Lining.
2.) Put a Shrink Tube onto the front tab.
3.) Bend down the tab.
4.) If needed, repeat the three steps above for the other J-Rail Assy.
5.) Position the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assy below the UI Console as illustrated in Figure 8-177
"Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met. Assembly" on page 8-232. Ensure that the wagon is running free,
before you tighten the screws in the next step.
6.) Install the six fixing screws M4 x 8, Torque: 2.5 Nm.
7.) Install the Alphanumeric Keyboard.
8.) Install the Lower OP Panel.
9.) Install the Upper OP Panel.

There are no calibrations for this unit.
The only adjustment is to ensure that the wagon is running free, before you tighten the screws.


SEE SEC-

Section 8-11
Other Top Console Parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the Operator Panel parts.

8-11-3 Replacing the Speaker Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-238
8-11-4 Replacing the Bulkhead Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-241
8-11-5 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-245
8-11-6 Probe Cable Hook Twin replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-248
8-11-7 Non-Magnetic Touch Latch replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-250
8-11-8 Handle, Left Top / Handle Right Top, replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-252
8-11-9 Palm Rest ASSY replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-255
8-11-10 Replacing the Probe Holder Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-257
8-11-11 Replacing the Gel Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-259
8-11-12 Up-Down Button Board (Buttons Frame UI Assy) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-260
8-11-13 Button IF Board Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-263

8-11-3 Replacing the Speaker Assembly
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-11-3-1 Manpower
8-11-3-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


8-8-3 "Replacing the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-154.
8 - 238 Section 8-11 - Other Top Console Parts replacement

8-11-3-4 Remove the Speaker Assembly

Follow these steps to remove one of the Speaker Assemblies:
1.) Remove the hex key screw, fixing the Speaker Bracket to the OP frame.
Figure 8-181 Speaker hex key screw
hex key screw BEHIND

RIGHT SPEAKER
2.) Disconnect the Speaker Cable from the Bulkhead board.

3.) Remove the Speaker.
4.) Repeat steps 1 - 3 for the other Speaker assembly, if necessary.
8-11-3-5 Install the Speaker Assembly

Follow these steps to install the Speakers:
1.) Position the Speaker.

2.) Install the hex key screw, fixing the Speaker Bracket to the OP frame.
NOTE: Check that the speaker bottom edge is tight or the speaker may rattle.
3.) Connect the Speaker Cable to the Bulkhead board.

4.) Repeat steps 1 - 3 for the other Speaker.



SEE SEC-

8-11-4 Replacing the Bulkhead Board

The Bulkhead board is located behind the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.
8-11-4-1 Manpower
8-11-4-2 Tools
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date



4.) Remove five knobs, see Figure 8-182.
5.) Remove the Upper OP Panel.



8-11-4-4 Remove the Bulkhead Board
Figure 8-183 Bulkhead Board screws
Follow these steps to remove the Bulkhead Board:
1.) Disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead Board:

- cable from Main Cable
- cables to left and right speaker
- two short USB cables (Bulkhead Board to OP)
2.) Unscrew and remove two screws.
8-11-4-5 Install the Bulkhead Board

Follow these steps to install the Bulkhead Board:
1.) Slide the Bulkhead Board into the correct position.

2.) Install the two screws (M3 x 6, Torque: 1.2 Nm).
3.) Install the cables from the Bulkhead Board:
- two short USB cables (Bulkhead Board to OP)
- cables to left and right speaker
- cable from Main Cable
4.) Install the Upper OP panel and the five rotary knobs.
5.) Connect probe(s) and external cables (network and mains power).




SEE SEC-

8-11-5 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement
8-11-5-1 Manpower
8-11-5-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


6.) Remove the two Speaker Assemblies.
7.) Remove the Bulkhead board.
8.) Remove the Operator Panel, Lower.

8-11-3-4 "Remove the Speaker Assembly" on page 8-239.
8-11-5-4 Remove the Bulkhead Plate

The Bulkhead Plate is used to secure the Upper UI Frame to the Lower UI Frame.
Figure 8-185 The Bulkhead Plate
1.) Remove the seven fixing screws (see: Figure 8-185 "The Bulkhead Plate" on page 8-246).
2.) Remove the Bulkhead Plate and the Cable Clamp.
8-11-5-5 Install the Bulkhead Plate

1.) Position the Bulkhead Plate so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws.
2.) Install the seven fixing screws as described below:
- The two upper screws are M6 x 20, Torque: 8.5 Nm.
- The next screw is M6 x 45, Torque: 8.5 Nm.
- The lower left-most screw is M6 x 30, Torque: 8.5 Nm.
- The three other lower screws are M6 x 25, Torque: 8.5 Nm. Two of the screws are also fixing
the Cable Clamp (see: Figure 8-185 "The Bulkhead Plate" on page 8-246).
5.) Install the two Speaker assemblies.
7.) Install the Operator Panel Knobs.
8-9-4-5 "Install the Operator Panel, Lower" on page 8-195.

8-11-4-5 "Install the Bulkhead Board" on page 8-243.
8-11-3-5 "Install the Speaker Assembly" on page 8-239.



SEE SEC-

8-11-6 Probe Cable Hook Twin replacement
8-11-6-1 Manpower
8-11-6-2 Tools
Figure 8-186 Cable Hook, Twin
CABLE HOOK, TWIN
SCREW, M5X20 WITH M6 WASHER
8-11-6-3 Remove the Cable Hook, Twin

1.) Unscrew the fastening screw. (It has been locked with Lock-Tite, so you may need to apply a little
extra force to unscrew the screw.)
2.) Remove the Cable Hook, Twin.
8-11-6-4 Install the Cable Hook, Twin

1.) Position the Cable Hook, Twin as shown in Figure 8-186 "Cable Hook, Twin" on page 8-248.
2.) Fix it in place by using an M5x20 screw with an M6 washer. Lock-Tite has to be used.
Torque: 50 Ncm (fingertight).



SEE SEC-

8-11-7 Non-Magnetic Touch Latch replacement
8-11-7-1 Manpower
8-11-7-2 Tools
page 8-6.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Pull out the Alphanumeric keyboard to get access to the Touch Latch.
8-11-7-4 Non-Magnetic Touch Latch removal procedure

1.) Unscrew two screws.
2.) Remove the Non-Magnetic Touch Latch.
8-11-7-5 Non-Magnetic Touch Latch installation procedure

1.) Position the Non-Magnetic Touch Latch and fasten it with one screw.
2.) Install the other screw.

Ensure that the Non-Magnetic Touch Latch works as intended.


SEE SEC-

8-11-8 Handle, Left Top / Handle Right Top, replacement
Figure 8-187 Handle, Left, Top
8-11-8-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.
8-11-8-2 Tools
1.) Power down the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and disconnect the Mains Power Cable.
2.) Remove the buttons below the Touch Panel.
3.) Remove the Upper Operator Panel.

8-9-4 "Replacing the Operator Panel, Lower" on page 8-192.

8-11-8-4 Handle Left Top / Handle Right Top removal

Hatches are used to attach the Handle Left Top and Handle Right Top to the Lower UI.
NOTE: Be careful when doing this procedure. It is easy to break the plastic hatches.
NOTE: The screwdriver positions in Figure 8-188 "Release Hatches" on page 8-253 indicates where
the hatches are located.
1.) Use a thin screwdriver to release the hatches, one by one as illustrated in Figure 8-188 "Release
Hatches" on page 8-253, until you can remove the Handle Left Top or Handle Right Top.
Figure 8-188 Release Hatches
1 2 3
4 5 6
2.) Remove the Handle Left Top or Handle Right Top.

3.) If needed, repeat the previous steps for the other handle.
8-11-8-5 Handle Left Top / Handle Right Top installation

1.) Remove the Gel Cups (if present).
2.) Install the Handle, Left Top / Handle, Right Top by pressing them into the UI Frame, Lower.
3.) Install the Gel Cups you removed in step 1.



SEE SEC-

8-11-9 Palm Rest ASSY replacement
Figure 8-189 The Palm Rest ASSY
8-11-9-1 Manpower
8-11-9-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Upper Operator Panel.

8-8-3 "Replacing the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly" on page 8-154
8-9-4 "Replacing the Operator Panel, Lower" on page 8-192.
8-11-8 "Handle, Left Top / Handle Right Top, replacement" on page 8-252.

8-11-9-4 Palm Rest ASSY removal

Follow these steps to remove the Palm Rest:
1.) Release the lock mechanisms securing the Palm Rest ASSY.
2.) Remove the Palm Rest ASSY.
8-11-9-5 Palm Rest ASSY installation

Follow these steps to install the Palm Rest ASSY:
1.) Ensure the XYZ Buttons cable runs along the lower tray cable channel so that the cable is not
pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced.
2.) Replace the Palm Rest ASSY.
3.) Install Handle Left Top and Handle Right Top.
4.) Install the lock mechanisms securing the Palm Rest Cover.
5.) Replace the Lower Operator Panel.
6.) Replace the Upper Operator Panel.


SEE SEC-

8-11-10 Replacing the Probe Holder Inserts
The Probe Holder Inserts are soft rubber inserts, used to protect the probes from scratches, when stored
on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. You can place the Probe Holder Inserts in any of the desired places on the
edge of the Operator Panel. The following types of inserts are available:
Probe Holder Insert STD

Probe Holder Insert 3D
Probe Holder Softinsert Doppler
Figure 8-190 Probe holders (used on both sides)
PROBEHOLDER, DOPPLER
PROBEHOLDER, 3D/4D
PROBEHOLDER, STANDARD
8-11-10-2 Manpower
One person, 1 minute.
8-11-10-3 Tools
No tools needed.
1.) Disconnect and remove all the probes.
2.) Store the probes in a safe place.
8-11-10-5 Removal
To remove a Probe Holder Insert, grab it and pull or push it upwards.
8-11-10-6 Installation
To install a Probe Holder Insert, place it so it fits one of the probe positions on the side of the Operator
Panel.


Direction GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-11-10-7. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use.
SEE SEC-

8-11-11 Replacing the Gel Cup
Figure 8-191 Gel Cup (used on both sides)
GEL CUP
The Gel Cup is a soft insert used for storing the gel bottle on the scanner so it is easy to access during
scanning.
For replacement, see: 8-11-10 "Replacing the Probe Holder Inserts" on page 8-257.

8-11-12 Up-Down Button Board (Buttons Frame UI Assy) replacement

These buttons are also called the XYZ Buttons.
The XYZ Buttons, located on the palm rest, control the XY and Z movement.
Figure 8-192 Top Console adjustment controls
1. Lock and brake release button: Unlock and move the Top Console horizontal.
2. Up/Down button: Move the Console up or down
Push one of the buttons marked 1, and then reposition the XY (horizontal) location of the upper
console. Three seconds after pushing the left button, the 4 motors in the XY Frog Leg lock to
stabilize the console.
Toggle one of the buttons marked 2 to reposition the Z (vertical) location of the upper console.
Toggle up to raise, or down to lower, the console.
Figure 8-193 XYZ Buttons
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-11-12-1 Manpower
8-11-12-2 Tools

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the Handle Top Left and Handle Top Right.
7.) Remove the Palm Rest Cover.

8-11-8-4 "Handle Left Top / Handle Right Top removal" on page 8-253
8-11-9-4 "Palm Rest ASSY removal" on page 8-256.
8-11-12-4 XYZ Buttons removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the XYZ Buttons:
1.) Disconnect the cable to the XYZ Buttons.

2.) Gently pop the XYZ Buttons Frame out of the Palm Rest section of the Lower Op Panel frame
handle.
8-11-12-5 XYZ Buttons installation procedure

1.) Insert the XYZ Buttons Frame into the Palm Rest section of the Lower Op Panel frame handle.
2.) Connect the cable to the XYZ Buttons Frame.
3.) Ensure the XYZ Buttons Frame cable runs along the Lower Op Panel cable channel so that the
cable is not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced (see Figure 8-117).
4.) Replace the Palm Rest.
5.) Replace the Handle Top Left and Handle Top Right.
7.) Replace the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.



use.
SEE SEC-

8-11-13 Button IF Board Assy replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-11-13-1 Manpower
8-11-13-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

7.) Remove the Palm Rest Cover.

8-11-8 "Handle, Left Top / Handle Right Top, replacement" on page 8-252.
8-11-9-4 "Palm Rest ASSY removal" on page 8-256.

8-11-13-4 Button IF Board removal procedure
Figure 8-194 Button IF Board
1.) Disconnect all the five (5x) connectors from the board.
2.) Push the TABs away to release the board.
3.) Remove the board.
8-11-13-5 Button IF Board installation procedure

1.) Install the Button IF Board into the UI Frame, Lower by pressing it under the small hooks.
2.) Ensure the XYZ Buttons Frame cable runs along the Lower Op Panel cable channel so that the
cable is not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced (see Figure 8-117).
3.) Install the Handle Left Top and Handle Right Top.
4.) Replace the Palm Rest.
6.) Replace the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.



use.
SEE SEC-

Section 8-12
Replacing XYZ Parts
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console

8-12-3 XY Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-266
8-12-4 XY Brake Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-270
8-12-5 XY Park Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-274
8-12-6 Z-Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-276
8-12-7 Drive Gear Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-280
8-12-8 XYZ Control Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-283
Replacement procedures for related parts:
8-11-12 Up-Down Button Board (Buttons Frame UI Assy) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-260

8-11-13 Button IF Board Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-263
8-12-3 XY Mechanism replacement
8-12-3-1 Manpower
8-12-3-2 Tools
8 - 266 Section 8-12 - Replacing XYZ Parts

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the LCD Rear Cover.
6.) Remove the LCD Arm assembly.
10.)Remove the Bulkhead Plate.
11.)Remove the Upper Frame Assembly.
12.)Remove the Lower Frame Assembly.

8-7-3-4 "Remove the 17 LCD Rear Cover" on page 8-114.
8-7-3-6 "Remove the 17 LCD Monitor assembly" on page 8-115.
8-7-5-4 "Disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead board" on page 8-127.
8-8-9-4 "Remove the Frame UI Upper" on page 8-184
8-9-9-4 "Lower Frame Assembly removal procedure" on page 8-214.

8-12-3-4 XY Mechanism removal procedure
Figure 8-195 Operator Panels have been removed

NOTE!
MAIN CABLE IS NOT SHOWN IN
THIS PICTURE.
Figure 8-196 Remove screws for the XY (Frogleg) mechanism
REMOVE FOUR (4X) SCREWS
1.) From the rear side of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, remove the four (4x) fixing screws.
2.) Remove the XY mechanism.

8-12-3-5 XY Mechanism installation procedure

1.) Position the XY mechanism so it aligns with the holes for the four fixing screws.
2.) Install the four fixing screws.
3.) Install the Lower Frame Assembly.
NOTE: Ensure that Bumper Z enters the slide at the back, before tighten the screws.
4.) Install the Upper Frame Assembly.

5.) Install the Bulkhead Plate.
9.) Install the LCD Arm assembly.
10.)Install the LCD Monitor assembly.
11.)Install the LCD Rear Cover.

If it is difficult to lock the XY mechanism in parked position, the locking mechanism need adjustments.
(Ref. Chapter 4).

SEE SEC-


8-12-4 XY Brake Assy replacement
Figure 8-197 XY-Brake Assy
8-12-4-1 Manpower
8-12-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
1.) Make sure the XY arms are in the unlocked (floating) position.
NOTE: While VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is shutting down, make sure the XY arms are in the unlocked
(floating) position and hold the brake release/XY unlock button until VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is fully
shut down. This will remove tension from the brake shoes and allow for much easier brake
assembly removal.


8-12-4-4 XY-Brake Assy removal procedure

The four (4x) XY-Brake Assemblies are located inside the XY (froglegs), one in each leg.
To remove one XY-Brake ASSY, follow these steps:
1.) Unscrew and remove the screw(s) that fix the cover to the leg.
Figure 8-198 Covers, XY Brake ASSY and fixing screws
XY BRAKE ASSY
FIXING SCREWS FOR

XY BRAKE ASSY FIXING SCREWS
FOR COVERS
2.) Remove the cover.

3.) Disconnect the XY Brake cable.
4.) Unscrew and remove the fixing screw for the XY Brake Assy.
Figure 8-199 XY Brake Retaining Screw
5.) Remove the brake retainer screw.

6.) Disconnect the brake motor wire connector.
7.) Using a 3 mm, L Allen wrench, slide the short L end of the wrench between the motor and the
metal part of the brake ramp. The short L-end, should be visible as shown in Figure 8-200.
BE CAREFUL not to pinch the brake motor wires. See: Figure 8-201 "XY Brake Allen wrench
placement - reference" on page 8-272.

8-12-4-4 XY-Brake Assy removal procedure (contd)
Figure 8-200 XY Brake Removal
8.) Gently, but firmly, pull down on the long end of the allen wrench. The brake assembly will slide out
of the slot it mates with in the brake shoe.
NOTE: Figure 8-201 shows the XY brake removed and demonstrates placement of the Allen wrench.
Figure 8-201 XY Brake Allen wrench placement - reference

8-12-4-5 XY-Brake Assy installation procedure
NOTE: Be careful when fighting screws that are entered into plastic. Use 2-3 Nm. If you tighten to
much, the internal screw-threads in the plastic are destroyed, and the plastic part must be
replaced.
1.) Position the XY-Brake Assy into the arm. You may need to turn the axle on the motor (by hand) to
adjust the lever so it fits.
2.) Install the fixing screw for the XY Brake Assy.
3.) Connect the cable from the motor to the XY Brake cable.
4.) Position the Cover so it aligns with the hole(s) for the fixing screw(s).
5.) Install the fixing screws:
- The covers for the front legs are fixed with one screw. Use low Torque, max 2.5 Nm (Plastic
part)
- The covers for the rear legs are fixed with two screws. Use low Torque, max 2.5 Nm (Plastic
part)


SEE SEC-

8-12-5 XY Park Lock replacement
8-12-5-1 Manpower
8-12-5-2 Tools
8-12-5-3 Preparation
Unlock the XY, either by using the release knobs or by manually release the lock.
screwdriver into the release point and pressing until release.
XY
(FROGLEG)
RELEASE
8-12-5-4 XY Park Lock removal

1.) Remove four screws.
Figure 8-203 Remove four screws
2.) Carefully pull out the XY Park Lock assembly.

3.) Disconnect the cable at the connector.
4.) Remove the XY Park Lock assembly.
8-12-5-5 XY Park Lock installation

1.) Install the cable from the XY Park Lock assembly in the assigned connector.
2.) Position the XY Park Lock assembly.
3.) Install the four screws.
Verify that the XY locks and unlocks as intended.

If needed, adjust the locking mechanism as described in:
Section 6-9 "Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism" on page 6-16.

SEE SEC-

8-12-6 Z-Mechanism replacement
Figure 8-204 Z-Mechanism
8-12-6-1 Manpower
8-12-6-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the LCD Rear Cover.
6.) Remove the LCD Arm assembly.
10.)Remove the Bulkhead Plate.
11.)Remove the Upper Frame Assembly.
12.)Remove the Lower Frame Assembly.


13.)Remove the XY (Frogleg) Assembly.
14.)Remove the XYZ Control Box

8-7-3-4 "Remove the 17 LCD Rear Cover" on page 8-114.
8-7-3-6 "Remove the 17 LCD Monitor assembly" on page 8-115.
8-7-5-4 "Disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead board" on page 8-127.
8-8-9-4 "Remove the Frame UI Upper" on page 8-184.
8-9-9-4 "Lower Frame Assembly removal procedure" on page 8-214.
8-12-3-4 "XY Mechanism removal procedure" on page 8-268.
8-12-8-4 "XYZ Control Assembly removal procedure" on page 8-284

8-12-6-4 Z-Mechanism removal procedure

The Z-Mechanism is fastened with several screws.
1.) Remove four (4x) screws from the lower part of the Z-Mechanism.
Figure 8-205 Remove four (4x) screws
2.) Remove four (4x) screws.
Figure 8-206 Remove four (4x) screws
3.) Lift the Z-Mechanism away.
Figure 8-207 Lift the Z-Mechanism away.

8-12-6-5 Z-Mechanism installation procedure

1.) Position the Z-Mechanism so the holes for the fixing screws align.
2.) Install two (2x) M6x16 Countersunk and two (2x) M6x16 screws.
3.) Install four (4x) M6x16 (lower part of unit).
4.) Install the XY (Frogleg) Mechanism.
5.) Install the Lower Frame Assembly.
6.) Install the Upper Frame Assembly.
7.) Install the Bulkhead Plate.
10.)Install the Operator Panel, Upper.
11.)Install the LCD Arm assembly.
12.)Install the LCD Monitor assembly.
13.)Install the LCD Rear Cover.


SEE SEC-

8-12-7 Drive Gear Assembly replacement
Figure 8-208 Drive Gear Assembly
8-12-7-1 Manpower
8-12-7-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Right Side Cover.

8-5-12-4 "Rear Cover removal" on page 8-77.

8-12-7-4 Drive Gear Assembly removal procedure
Figure 8-209 Drive Gear Assembly location
The Drive Gear Assembly is a part of the Z Mechanism. To remove the Drive Gear Assembly, follow
these steps:
1.) Disconnect the motor cable from the XYZ Control Box.
2.) Unscrew and remove the four fixing screws.
Figure 8-210 Remove four screws
3.) Pull the unit away. You may need to either operate the Z-release lever when pulling, or move the
Top Console slightly up or down to make the wheel disengage from the gear.
8-12-7-5 Drive Gear Assembly installation procedure

1.) Position the Drive Gear Assembly in the correct position. You may need to either operate the Z-
release lever when positioning, or move the Top Console slightly up or down to engage the teeth
on the wheel with the teeth on the gear.
Figure 8-211 Install the Drive Gear Assembly
2.) Install the four (4x) fixing screws with washers. (M6 x 16, Torque: 9,5 Nm.)

8-12-7-5 Drive Gear Assembly installation procedure (contd)

3.) Connect the cable from the motor to the XYX Control Box.
4.) Power up the unit and verify that the XYZ function as intended.
5.) Power down the unit.
8.) Install the Right side Cover.


SEE SEC-

8-12-8 XYZ Control Assembly replacement
Figure 8-212 XYZ Control Assembly
8-12-8-1 Manpower
8-12-8-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Left Side Cover.


8-12-8-4 XYZ Control Assembly removal procedure

1.) Disconnect the cables to the XYZ Control Assembly.
2.) Unscrew and remove two (2x) screws.
Figure 8-213 XYZ Control Assembly removal
3.) Pull the top of the XYZ Control Assembly forwards, up and away from the bracket.
8-12-8-5 XYZ Control Assembly installation procedure

1.) Thread the XYZ Control Assembly into position.
2.) Install the three screws at the top, rear. (M6x16 sunken. Torque: 9.8 Nm.)
3.) Install the two remaining screws on the top. (M4x8, sunken. Torque: 4.9 Nm.)
4.) Connect the cables to the XYZ Control Assembly.
7.) Install the Left Side Cover.



SEE SEC-

Section 8-13
Main Console parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console.

8-13-3 Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-286
8-13-4 Rear Air Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-291
8-13-5 Bottom nylon strip Air Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-293
8-13-6 Fan Assembly replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-296
8-13-7 Replacing Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-299
8-13-8 Main Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-301
8-13-9 Subwoofer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-305
8-13-10 Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
8-13-11 Pedal Mechanism replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
8-13-12 Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
8-13-13 Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
8-13-14 Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
8-13-15 Front End parts replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
8-13-16 Back End parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
8-13-3 Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement
8-13-3-1 Manpower
8-13-3-2 Tools

3.) Remove the Filter Cover.
4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-8

8-5-10 "Filter Cover replacement" on page 8-73
8 - 286 Section 8-13 - Main Console parts replacement

8-13-3-4 Remove and clean the filters

Clean the air filters to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to overheat
and reduce system performance and reliability. It is recommended the filters be cleaned quarterly (once
every three months) or more often in locations where high levels of dust are present.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has two air filters which need to be cleaned. The top air filter is located on the
back of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 below the power cord and the bottom air filter is located underneath the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Follow these steps to remove and clean the rear filter and the handle type bottom filter.
Table 8-76 Removing and cleaning filters, sheet 1 of 3
Steps Corresponding Graphic
1.
Power down the VIVID E9/VIVID E7

before removing the filters to prevent
any loose or knocked-off debris from
entering the Fan Tray.
Walk the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 forward

until the caster is in position to access
the filter handle. The right side, rear
caster must be in-line and away from the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
2.
Lock the Brakes.

Table 8-76 Removing and cleaning filters, (contd) sheet 2 of 3
3.
Filter Locations
A. Rear Filter - Remove the Cover and

then remove the filter.
B. Bottom Filter - Remove the Filter

Assembly by lowering the handle.
NOTE: The handle for the bottom

filter is located in the same location for
both Filter Assemblies.
4.
Clean the Rear Filter after it is removed

by removing excess lint or dust from the
soiled side; or vacuum if necessary.

Table 8-76 Removing and cleaning filters, (contd) sheet 3 of 3
5.
Clean the Bottom Filter after it is

removed by removing excess lint or dust
from the soiled side. If necessary, use a
clean, soft brush; or vacuum.
6.
Reinstall the rear filter and tuck the

edges of the filter under the Rear
Bumper and Rear Cover. Reinstall Filter
Cover.
7.
Reinstall Bottom Filter by positioning the

filter under the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and
placing the handle into the stowed
position. The filter will be drawen to the
filter mounting magnets.



SEE SEC-

8-13-4 Rear Air Filter replacement
8-13-4-1 Manpower
8-13-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT

Signed Date



8-13-4-4 Filter removal procedure

Grab the Filter and remove it.

8-13-4-5 Filter installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Filter:

2.) Tuck the edges of the filter under the Rear Bumper and Rear Cover.
Figure 8-214 Tuck Filter behind Rear Bumper and Rear edges


SEE SEC-

8-13-5 Bottom nylon strip Air Filter replacement
8-13-5-1 Manpower
8-13-5-2 Tools
A long screwdriver or rod to use as a handle when removing the filter.
8-13-5-3 Overview
Figure 8-215 Bottom nylon strip Air Filter
The bottom air filter is held in place with magnets. A tab made of Nylon (Nylon Strip) extends from the
air filter. The tab can be accessed on the right side of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
CAUTION Lock the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s wheels prior to removing/cleaning the air filter. This prevents the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from moving unexpectedly.

3.) Kneeling down on the right side of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 enables you to access the air filter tab.
4.) Locate the tab extending from the air filter on the bottom of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

8-13-5-5 Filter removal procedure

1.) Thread a long screwdriver through the extending cloth loop (tab).
2.) Pull down the screwdriver to release the filter from the unit.
Figure 8-216 Release of the bottom air filter
3.) Remove the filter.
CAUTION DO NOT operate the unit without the air filters in place.
8-13-5-6 Filter Cleaning

You may either use a vacuum cleaner to vacuum the filter, or if needed, clean the filter by rinsing with
water.
CAUTION Allow the air filter to dry thoroughly before re-installing it in the unit.
After cleaning the filter by rinsing with water, allow it to dry completely before re-installing.
When dry, install the filter as described next.
8-13-5-7 Filter installation procedure

Install the filter at the bottom of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. Align it in position (see: the tab in Figure 8-
217). The magnets will help to position it correct.
Figure 8-217 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 seen from below

LINE UP THE FILTER SO THAT THE MAGNETS
ATTACH IN PLACE ON THE BOTTOM OF THE
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
WITHOUT FILTER WITH FILTER



SEE SEC-

8-13-6 Fan Assembly replacement
8-13-6-1 Manpower
8-13-6-2 Tools
page 8-6.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove the Right Side Cover


8-13-6-4 Fan Assembly removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Fan Assembly:
1.) Disconnect the PCIe express cable from the GFI board visible at the front of the Card Rack Cover.
2.) Unscrew the thumb screws of the Card Rack Cover.
3.) Remove the Card Rack Cover.
4.) Pull the Fan Assembly out of the frame.
Figure 8-218 Fan Assembly removal
8-13-6-5 Fan Assembly installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Fan Assembly:
1.) Align the Fan Assembly with the rails in the frame and push it into position.
2.) Install the Card Rack Cover.
3.) Install the thumb screws of the Card Rack Cover.
4.) Connect the PCIe express cable to the GFI board connector.



SEE SEC-

8-13-7 Replacing Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame
8-13-7-1 Remove the Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame

1.) Remove the fan drawer as describen in the service manual.
2.) Remove the rubber bushings that holds the old fan screens.
3.) Remove the old fan screen and fan screen frame.
Figure 8-219 Remove Rubber Bushings
8-13-7-2 Install the new Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame
1.) Place the new fan screen and fan screen frame ontop of the fan.
Figure 8-220 New Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame ontop of the fan
2.) Place the rivet bushing into the frame screen hole.
Figure 8-221 New Fan Screen and Fan Scree Frame ontop of the fan

8-13-7-2 Install the new Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame (contd)
3.) Hold the frame screen firmly down onto the fan.
Figure 8-222 Hold the frame screen firmly down onto the fan
4.) Press the rivet pin firmly down to secure the fan screen.
5.) Install the Fan Drawer back into the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.


SEE SEC-

8-13-8 Main Cable replacement
Figure 8-223 Main Cable
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-13-8-1 Manpower
8-13-8-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date




9.) Remove the Main Cable Cover.

8-5-19-4 "Main Cable Cover removal procedure" on page 8-99.
8-13-8-4 Main Cable removal procedure

Three cable connectors must be disconnected in the Operator Panel area:
1.) The cable with the D-SUB connector was disconnected from the Controller Board when you
removed the Operator Panel, Upper.
2.) Disconnect the HDMI cable from the Bulkhead.
3.) Disconnect the cable from the Z switch (Up/Down control).
4.) If not already done, unscrew the fixing screws on the Ground (GND) Clamp on the Bulkhead
Bracket, so you can release the cables from the clamp.
Two cables are connected to the XY (Frog) brakes. They are routed to connectors inside the rear XY
(Frog) legs. To disconnect these cables, follow this procedure:
1.) Remove the covers on the rear XY (Frog) legs.

2.) Disconnect the cables.
Two (2x) cables (from the Main Cable) are connected to the XYZ Control box.
Disconnect the two cables.

The remaining two cables originate on the I/O at the BEP.
1.) Disconnect the DVI cable from J22.

2.) Disconnect the D-SUB from J21.

8-13-8-4 Main Cable removal procedure (contd)

The Cable Chain is attached with two screws in the UI end and one screw in the other end.
1.) Remove two screws from the Cable Chains anchor point at the lower UI.
2.) Remove one screw on the other end of the Cable Chain.
3.) Remove the Main Cable, including the Cable Chain away from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
8-13-8-5 Main Cable installation procedure
Figure 8-225 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Cable Diagram

;<
)52*
/2&.
02725 %5$.(6
,11(5
7 /()7%5$.(
287(5
/()7%5$.(
'92,*+7 -81 -$1'-6:$33('
% &
' '
'
0$,1/&'',63/$<
: :
9 +9,19
9,'(2 )/$7
' &17/ 6&5((1
& (
=02725 % ,11(5 287(5 ) 56
5,*+7%5$.( 5,*+7%5$.(
86% 86%WR
56
9 '&'&
9
*
$
0$,132:(56833/< &$5'5$&.
32:(5 &21752//(5%2$5'
;<=&21752//(5 )$&725
-
0(025<67,&.
&255(&7,21
*(/:$50(5 -
237,21$/ -
'5;
'5;
'5;
*7;
*7;
*7;
5;
5;
5(/$<
*),
72 %8/.+($' 5
35,17(56 9 75$&.%$//
,62/$7,21 %2$5' -
7(03 -
$1' &21752/ 3 3 3
9 9$& 86% 86%
'&+($' 86% -
,19(57(5 +8%
+ 3
86%
-
3 -
86% .(<%2$5'
&21752/ $8',2
9
/
3 9
9 9 9 9
9
:,5(/(66 3 9
3 5(* X3 -
6 ; 21
%6&$1 2)) 9 9
'&'& '& 9 / 728&+
92/7$*(6
+9,19
&219(57(56 *),$8',2 86%
38/6(5
92/7$*(6
,&
93' %$&.3/$1( 9,'(2 /&' 6:,7&+
- , '02725
&175/
$ '02725'5,9(
&:352%(
&211(&7,21 %8/.+($' %87721,)
%2$5'
+%5,'*( 237,21$/ 3/$7( 9
.
233$1(/ 83'1/2&.
'9'$'$373:$
6$7$3:5 6$7$
5(/($6(
%877216
'9' 9
0 8 8
.
'9'$'$373:$
6$7$3:5 6$7$
'9' 0$,1&$%/(
237,21
'9,9,'(2
932:(5$8',2
0 86%)25233$1(/
86%)259,'(221728&+3$1(/
83'1%5$.(5(/($6(6:,7&+(6
-
%(3
- - - -
(;7(51$/&$%/(6$1'+$51(66(6

99VWE\
36B21
,7(03$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
99
99VWE\
'&'&
9B2.
$&B)$,/
$ & 0$,132:(5&25' 86&$1$'$&(8523(
&219(57(56 % *$ )52*%5$.(&21752/XVHG
6(48(1&(
36B213:52.
999
/2*,& %(33:5 & *$ )52*%5$.($50XVHG
99VWE\ 6833/< )5217
3$1(/ ' 0$,1&$%/($66(0%/<
02'8/( ' 0$,1&$%/(32:(5$8',2

' 0$,1&$%/(9,'(2
5($5 ' 0$,1&$%/(;<=6:,7&+6,*1$/6
3$1(/ -
' 0$,1&$%/(86%XVHG
( 9,'(2+'0,'9,&$%/( /&'
E7 ,)12
- '95 ) 32:(586%&$%/( /&'
'9,,287 * 86%233$1(/72%8/.+($'XVHG
$8',25
- + 86%&$%/( 0$,132:(56833/<
-
$8',2/ , *$ 32:(5&$%/(%(39
(;786% - - 3&,(;35(66&$%/(
'9,$ 3$7,(17,2 . 32:(5&$%/('9'XVHGLI'9'
;3&,(;35(66
3&,
3&,
3&,(;35(66
-
(;786% &1
&1 &1
237,21$/
'9,'
/ 86%&$%/(;<=&21752//(5
$1$/2*9,'(2
027+(5%2$5'
'9,,287
'9,,,1
$8',2,1
- $7;
0E7
86%

7; '9,' 0$,1
/('6
32:(5
0 6$7$&$%/('9'XVHGLI'9'
63$5(3&,(;35(66[
5;
$
'9,'
7;
-
1 %(372&$5'5$&.%$&.3/$1(&$%/(
63$5(3&,
3 *$ $8',2&$%/( 68%:22)(5

237,21$/
VWE\
4 86%&$%/(%:35,17(5
'95
9,'(2&$5'
9
- 6$7$
*), -
5 32:(5&$%/(%:35,17(5
',*,7$/
$8',2
9
/5
$8',2 9 6 *$ &:&211(&7255,%%21&$%/(
+267
9 6$7$
287
7 *$ ;</2&.
'9'
$8',2
9
-
$03 1 32:(5
,)12
8 *$ 83'2:1/2&.%877216XVHG
%6&$1
212))6:
,&
- 3:5/(' '95 6$7$
-
86%
9 *$ /2&.%877216XVHG
-
6$7$ : 6$)(7<*5281':,5(/&'$50XVHG
86%
-
86%
; 86%%8/.+($'72:/$1
-
86% &1
-
-
%(3$66(0%/<&$%/(6$1'+$51(66(6
86%
86%
3&,
(;35(66[
,7(03$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
86%+8%
-
86%0LFUR
-
&1
%(332:(5+$51(66
86%+8%
&RQWUROOHU
237,21.(< $8',2,1
,23RUWV
4 - 93' /5&(17(5$8',2287 027+(5%2$5'+$51(66
86%+8%
212))6:
5 - - 3:5/(' )52173$1(/+$51(66
-
9
32:(5
X%7; 3&,(;35(66%8/.+($'
%: 86%
9
&(17(5
$7;
027+(5%2$5' 6$7$%8/.+($'-
- $8',2 $8',2287
35,17(5 720$,1
6$7$%8/.+($'-
3:5 3:5 3 $03
237,21$/ -
6833/<
6$7$+$5''5,9(
6$7$ 6$7$3:5
9 9 9 VWE\
5(* 9
+$5' 6$7$'9586('21/<,)'95,167$//('
&2/25 '5,9(
86% 9 32:(5+$5''5,9(9,'(2&$5'
35,17(5 720$,1 9
)8785(
3:5 3:5 '9,)/(;0$,1<**'5$6,/
6833/< ,2%2$5' '9,)/(;'95-803(5<**'5$6,/86('21/<,)'95,167$//('
1(7:25.3$7&+&$%/(&$7
1.) Route the Main Cable, including the Cable Chain into its position.
2.) Install the two (2x) screws used to attach the Cable Chain to the UI.
3.) Install the screw at the other end of the Cable Chain.
4.) Connect the D-SUB to J21 on the BEP I/O.
5.) Connect the DVI to J22 on the BEP I/O.
6.) Connect two (2x) cables to the XYZ Control box.
7.) Route and connect the two XY cables.
8.) Connect the HDMI connector to the Bulkhead.
9.) Install the Cable Clamps.
10.)Connect the cable to the Z-switch.
11.)Power up VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
12.)Verify that the XYZ functions operate as they should.
13.)Power down VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
14.)Install all covers.



SEE SEC-


8-13-9 Subwoofer replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-13-9-1 Manpower
8-13-9-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

5.) Remove the BEP.

8-16-4 "Back End Processor (BEP) replacement" on page 8-361.

8-13-9-4 Sub Woofer removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Sub woofer:
1.) Remove the six (6x) hex key screws securing the Sub woofer to the chassis.
Figure 8-226 Sub woofer
2.) Remove the Sub woofer.

8-13-9-5 Sub woofer installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Sub woofer:
1.) Place the Sub woofer in position at the base of the chassis.
2.) Install the six (6x) hex key screws securing the Sub woofer to the chassis.

4.) Turn the volume control on at the OP Panel.
5.) Select PW mode and press on the selected probe to ensure the sub woofer produces sound.

SEE SEC-


8-13-10 Casters replacement

See: Section 8-14 "Casters and Brakes replacement" on page 8-309.
8-13-11 Pedal Mechanism replacement

See: 8-14-5 "Pedal Mechanism replacement" on page 8-316.
8-13-12 Rear Handle replacement

See: 8-5-16 "Rear Handle replacement" on page 8-89.
8-13-13 Covers replacement

See: Section 8-5 "Replacing Covers and Bumpers" on page 8-52.
8-13-14 Power Supply replacement

See: Section 8-17 "Main Power Supply replacement" on page 8-411.
8-13-15 Front End parts replacement

See: Section 8-15 "Front End Processor (FEP) / Card Cage parts replacement" on page 8-321.
8-13-16 Back End parts replacement

See: Section 8-16 "Back End Processor (BEP) parts replacement" on page 8-359.

Section 8-14
Casters and Brakes replacement
WARNING AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS (WHEELS) OR
ADJUSTING BRAKES.

This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts for the Casters and Brakes.

8-14-3 Rear Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-310
8-14-4 Front Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-313
8-14-5 Pedal Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-316
8-14-6 Brake Pedal replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-319
8-14-7 Pedal Release replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-320
8-14-8 Pedal Dir Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-320

8-14-3 Rear Casters replacement
8-14-3-1 Manpower
Two people, 15 minutes
8-14-3-2 Tools
NOTE: This procedure requires an extended Hex key (UNBRAKO / ALLEN key) due to the high torque:
130 Nm.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


8-5-15-4 "Rear Bumper removal procedure" on page 8-87.
8 - 310 Section 8-14 - Casters and Brakes replacement

8-14-3-4 Rear Casters removal procedure

1.) Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forwards.
2.) Activate Direction Lock.
3.) Put the Bevel Edged Board on the floor.
WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE FLOATING OPERATOR PANEL
IS LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST, PARKING POSITION.
WARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION AS LONG AS VIVID E9/VIVID E7 IS UN-STABLE, NOT

RESTING ON ALL FOUR CASTERS.
4.) Pull the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 backwards up the board incline. This will lift the Rear Wheel on the
opposite side of the System from the floor.
5.) Turn the Rear Caster that stands on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown in Figure 8-
227.
Figure 8-227 Pull VIVID E9/VIVID E7 backwards up the board incline
6.) Activate the brakes.

7.) The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster.
8.) Make the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 rest on both Front Casters and lift the Rear Caster. Put the Wooden
Wedge under the chassis. This will stabilize the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 with one Rear Caster free from
the floor. This Rear Caster can now be removed.
9.) Unscrew and remove the fixing bolt. Save the bolt for later use.
10.)Remove the Rear Caster.

8-14-3-5 Rear Casters installation procedure

1.) Position the Caster so it align with the hole for the fixing bolt.
2.) Install the fixing bolt (M12 X 40 mm). Use a 10 mm HEX key, Torque: 130 Nm.
3.) Remove the Wooden Wedge.
4.) Roll the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 off the Bevel Edged Board.
5.) To replace the other Rear Caster, repeat all the steps, starting from 8-14-3-4 "Rear Casters removal
procedure" on page 8-311, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the
other side of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.


SEE SEC-

Color Mode Checks

4-3-17-2
Checks

8-14-4 Front Casters replacement
8-14-4-1 Manpower
Two person, 15 minutes
8-14-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date



8-14-4-4 Front Casters removal procedure

1.) Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forwards.
2.) Activate Direction Lock.
3.) Put the Bevel Edged Board on the floor.
WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE FLOATING OPERATOR PANEL
IS LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST, PARKING POSITION.
WARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION AS LONG AS VIVID E9/VIVID E7 IS UN-STABLE, NOT

RESTING ON ALL FOUR CASTERS.
4.) Pull the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 backwards up the board incline. This will lift the Rear Wheel on the
opposite side of the System from the floor.
5.) Turn the Rear Caster that stands on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown in Figure 8-
227.
Figure 8-228 Pull VIVID E9/VIVID E7 backwards up the board incline
6.) The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster.
7.) Make the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 rest on both Rear Casters and lift the Front Caster.
8.) Put the Wooden Wedge under the chassis. This will stabilize the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 with one Front
Caster free from the floor.
9.) Unscrew and remove the fixing screws for the Front Caster that is free from the floor. Save the
screw for later use.
10.)Remove the Caster.

8-14-4-5 Front Casters installation procedure

1.) Position the Caster so it align with the fastening screw.
2.) Install the three fixing screws (M8 x 20 mm), Torque: 20.5 Nm.
3.) Remove the Wooden Wedge.
4.) Roll the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 off the Bevel Edged Board.
5.) To replace the other Front Caster, repeat all the steps from 8-14-4-4 "Front Casters removal
procedure" on page 8-314, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the
other side of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
6.) Install the Foot Rest Cover.


SEE SEC-

Color Mode Checks

4-3-17-2
Checks

8-14-5 Pedal Mechanism replacement
Figure 8-229 Pedal Mechanism Assembly
8-14-5-1 Manpower
8-14-5-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the Top Cover
7.) Remove the Front Cover

8-5-5 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-59
8-5-8-4 "Front Cover removal" on page 8-69

8-14-5-4 Pedal Mechanism removal procedure

1.) Disconnect the rods from the Pedal Mechanism. This is done by pulling the ball joints apart.
2.) Four screws are used to fix the Pedal Mechanism to the chassis. Unscrew and remove the screws.

FIXING SCREWS FOR PEDAL MECHANISM
3.) Lift away the Pedal Mechanism.
8-14-5-5 Pedal Mechanism installation procedure

1.) Position the Pedal Mechanism and install the four fixing screws (Torque: 20.5 Nm).
2.) Connect the rods by snapping on the ball joints.
3.) Verify that the pedals work as intended:
a.) Push down brake pedal (from free position), release it and verify the pedal to return quickly
up to half position.
b.) Try to move the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 back and forward; and verify that the brake pedal stay in
brake mode.
c.) Push down direction lock pedal and verify the pedal to return quickly.
d.) Move VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and verify Casters stay in direction lock mode.
e.) At push down, observe the Latches to come over pivot T-Shape, and interfere by engaging.
4.) Install the Front Cover.
6.) Install the Foot Rest Bumper.



SEE SEC-

Color Mode Checks

4-3-17-2
Checks

8-14-6 Brake Pedal replacement
8-14-6-1 Manpower
8-14-6-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

6.) Remove the Top Cover
7.) Remove the Front Cover
8.) Remove the Pedal Mechanism.

8-5-5 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-59
8-5-8-4 "Front Cover removal" on page 8-69
8-14-5 "Pedal Mechanism replacement" on page 8-316
8-14-6-4 Brake Pedal removal procedure

The pedal is fixed to the Pedal Mechanism with four (4x) hex key screws from below.
1.) Unscrew and remove the four screws.

2.) Remove the Brake Pedal.

8-14-6-5 Brake Pedal installation procedure

1.) Position the Brake Pedal so you can install the fixing screws.
2.) Install the four fixing screws.


SEE SEC-

Color Mode Checks

4-3-17-2
Checks
8-14-7 Pedal Release replacement

This pedal, placed in the middle, is fixed with three screws. With this in mind, please refer to 8-14-6
"Brake Pedal replacement" on page 8-319 for replacement instructions.
8-14-8 Pedal Dir Lock replacement

This pedal is fixed to the Pedal Mechanism in the same manner as the Brake Pedal.
Please refer to 8-14-6 "Brake Pedal replacement" on page 8-319 for replacement instructions.

Section 8-15
Front End Processor (FEP) / Card Cage parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the parts in the Front End Processor.

8-15-3 Front End parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-322
8-15-4 Front End (FEP) Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-325
8-15-5 Front Plane / XD BUS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-328
8-15-6 Relay Board (RLY) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-333
8-15-7 Receiver Board (GRX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-337
8-15-8 Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-341
8-15-9 Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-345
8-15-10 GFI Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-348
8-15-11 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Card Rack replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-351
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, VIVID E9/VIVID E7 MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT.

8-15-3 Front End parts overview

The table below list the positions of the cards. Position #1 is nearest the probe connectors (front of unit).
Figure 8-231 Cards in Front End rack
UPPER FRONT
PLANE CARD
LOWER FRONT
PLANE CARD
NOTE: The number of each card type depends on VIVID E9 model card version (P/N) and installed
options.
NOTE: VIVID E7 was introduced with the v113.0 with XDclear software release.
Table 8-88 FEP Cards per VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sheet 1 of 2
TOTAL NUMBER OF CARDS PER SYSTEM
BT09 BT11 BT12 XDclear
CARD ABBREVIA- SW v110.0.0 SW v110.1.4

POSITION TION CARD NAME SW v108.x.x to v110.1.3 (or higher) SW v112.x SW v113.x
1 RLY RELAY BOARD 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x
ANALOG RECEIVER
2 GRX64 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x
BOARD
3 GRX128 ANALOG RECEIVER 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x

BOARD
GTX-TLP192 TRANSMITTER BOARD NOT USED NOT USED 1x 1x 1x

4
GTX-TLP3 TRANSMITTER BOARD NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
6 GTX-TLP3 TRANSMITTER BOARD NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED

4x
7 GTX-TLP3 TRANSMITTER BOARD 3x NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
8 GTX-TLP3 TRANSMITTER BOARD NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
8 - 322 Section 8-15 - Front End Processor (FEP) / Card Cage parts replacement
Table 8-88 FEP Cards per VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 2 of 2
TOTAL NUMBER OF CARDS PER SYSTEM
BT09 BT11 BT12 XDclear
CARD ABBREVIA- SW v110.0.0 SW v110.1.4

POSITION TION CARD NAME SW v108.x.x to v110.1.3 (or higher) SW v112.x SW v113.x
9 DRX EMPTY NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
DIGITAL RECEIVER
9 DRX
BOARD
DIGITAL RECEIVER
10 DRX 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x
BOARD
11 DRX DIGITAL RECEIVER

BOARD
GLOBAL RADIO
12 GFI FREQUENCY 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x
INTERFACE
FRONT PLANE
/
THE FRONT PLANE 2x 2x NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
XD BUS FOR
BOARDS CONNECT TO
GTX-TLP3 THE BACK OF THE
N/A
FRONT PLANE RELAY BOARD, THE GTX
/ BOARD(S) AND THE GRX
NOT USED NOT USED 2x 2x 2x
XD BUS FOR BOARDS
GTX-TLP192
Table 8-89 FEP Cards per VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sheet 1 of 2
TOTAL NUMBER OF CARDS

PER SYSTEM
XDclear
CARD ABBREVIA-
POSITION TION CARD NAME SW v113.x
1 RLY RELAY BOARD 1x
ANALOG RECEIVER
2 GRX64 1x
BOARD
ANALOG RECEIVER
3 GRX128 1x
BOARD
4 GTX-TLP192 TRANSMITTER BOARD 1x
5 NOT USED EMPTY NOT USED
9 DRX EMPTY NOT USED
9 DRX DIGITAL RECEIVER

BOARD
DIGITAL RECEIVER
10 DRX 3x
BOARD
DIGITAL RECEIVER
11 DRX
BOARD

Table 8-89 FEP Cards per VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 2 of 2
TOTAL NUMBER OF CARDS

PER SYSTEM
XDclear
CARD ABBREVIA-
POSITION TION CARD NAME SW v113.x
GLOBAL RADIO
12 GFI FREQUENCY 1x
INTERFACE
THE FRONT PLANE

FRONT PLANE BOARDS CONNECT TO
/ THE BACK OF THE
N/A 2x
XD BUS FOR RELAY BOARD, THE GTX
GTX-TLP192 BOARD(S) AND THE GRX
BOARDS
NOTE: The number of each card type depends on VIVID E9/VIVID E7 model card version (P/N) and
installed options.
8-15-4 Front End (FEP) Cover replacement
8-15-4-1 Manpower
8-15-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.


8-15-4-4 FEP Cover removal procedure

An EMI cover is used to ground the PCIe (GFI) cable to the FEP cover.
Figure 8-232 EMI cover for PCIe cable
PCIe (GFI) cable
Fixing screw for PCIe cable
EMI cover for PCIe cable
1.) Unscrew the fixing screw for the cover for the PCIe (GFI) cable.
2.) Remove the cover for the PCIe cable.
3.) Unplug the PCIe Cable.
4.) Unscrew the FEP Covers ten fixing screws.
Figure 8-233 FEP Covers fixing screws
5.) Remove the FEP Cover.
8-15-4-5 FEP Cover installation procedure
NOTE: Do not use any tools when you tighten the finger screws.
1.) Install the FEP Cover and fasten it with the ten fixing screws.
Use your fingers to tighten the screws.
2.) Plug in the PCIe cable in the GFI board. The connector on the GFI card is available through the
opening in the FEP Cover.
3.) Install the EMI cover for the PCIe cable.
4.) Fasten the EMI cover for the PCIe cable with the M4 fixing screw.
5.) Install the side cover.


SEE SEC-

8-15-5 Front Plane / XD BUS replacement
Figure 8-234 Front Plane cards
FRONT PLANE CARDS
8-15-5-1 Manpower
8-15-5-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.
WARNING PRIOR TO REMOVING THE CARD RACK BOARDS, THE LEDS ON THE END OF EACH
BOARD SHOULD BE UNLIT, TO INDICATE BOARDS ARE UNPOWERED.
5.) Remove the cover for the PCIe (GFI) cable.

8-15-4 "Front End (FEP) Cover replacement" on page 8-325.

8-15-5-4 Front Plane Boards removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Front Plane Boards:
NOTICE Read through the removal and installation steps completely before performing. Perform the steps
carefully to avoid damage to the Front Plane Board connectors.
These steps help unseat the Front Plane Boards from the other boards:
1. Start by pulling out the Relay Board slightly.
2. Secondly pull the RX Board slightly out.
3. Repeat once more for the Relay Board.
4. Repeat the same also for the RX Board.
5. Holding the upper and lower edges of the upper Front Plane Board with both hands, rock the upper Front Plane Board
evenly away from the GRLY and RX boards. Be careful not to bend the connector pins.
6. Repear the previous step for the Lower Front Plane Board.
NOTE: Even if only one Front Plane Board is replaced, remove both so that the Relay Board and GTX
Board(s) are returned to proper position before installing the Front Plane Board.

8-15-5-5 Front Plane Cards installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Front Plane Cards:
NOTE: The silk print on the two cards say Lower Frontplane only This statement is from an earlier
design, and is not valid anymore.
1.) Install the GRLY and GTX boards.

2.) Holding the upper and lower edges of the board with both hands, carefully install the lower Front
Plane Board. Ensure that you do not bend any of the connector pins during the installation.
Be sure to apply even pressure across the board and to apply gentle, even pressure at the 4 corners
of the Front Plane Board to make full contact with the other boards.
3.) Repeat step 2 for the other Front Plane Card.

4.) Install the FEP Cover and fasten it with its fixing screws.
5.) Plug in the PCIe (GFI) Cable.
6.) Install the cover for the PCIe cable to the front of the GFI board.
7.) Install the Right Side Cover.

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after these parts replacement.

SEE SEC-

8-15-6 Relay Board (RLY) replacement
Figure 8-235 Relay Board location
RELAY BOARD
8-15-6-1 Manpower
8-15-6-2 Tools

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.
8.) Carefully remove the two Front Plane Boards.

8-15-5 "Front Plane / XD BUS replacement" on page 8-328.
8-15-6-4 Relay Board removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Relay Board:
1.) Pull out the Relay Board.

2.) Place it on an ESD safe place.
8-15-6-5 Relay Board installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Relay Board:
1.) Carefully align the Relay Board with the rails and push it. Push the card to the left, so it enters
correct in the mechanical slide, before you push it in position so it is seated in the Back Plane
connectors.
2.) Carefully install the two Front Plane Boards.
5.) Install the cover for the PCIe cable.
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Front End Rack
replacement:
3.) Power up the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to verify that it starts as it should.

Calibrate the Front End A/D converters as described in:
Section 6-8 "DC Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment)" on page 6-15.


SEE SEC-
8-15-7 Receiver Board (GRX) replacement
Figure 8-236 GRX Boards location
GRX BOARDS
8-15-7-1 Manpower
8-15-7-2 Tools

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.

8-15-7-4 GRX Board removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the GRX Board:
1.) Pull out the GRX Board.

8-15-7-5 GRX Board installation procedure
NOTE: The 128 channel board (GRX128) is positioned in the right hand position (nearest the GFI), the
64 channel board (GRX64) is positioned in the left hand position.
Follow these steps to install the GRX Board:
1.) Carefully align the GRX Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane
connectors.
replacement:

Calibrate the Front End as described in: Section 6-8 "DC Offset Calibration (Front End Alignment)" on
page 6-15.


SEE SEC-
8-15-8 Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement
8-15-8-1 Overview
Two different GTX board models have been used:
GTX - TLP 3.0

This board has 64 TX channels.
GTX-TLP192
This board has 192 TX channels.
NOTE: When a GTX-TLP192 is used , it is occupying the rightmost TX-slot.
Figure 8-237 GTX Boards location
GTX BOARDS
8-15-8-2 Manpower
8-15-8-3 Tools

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.



8-15-8-5 GTX Board removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the GTX Board:
1.) Pull out the GTX Board.

8-15-8-6 GTX Board installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the GTX Board:
NOTE: If a GTX-TLP192 is used, it must be positioned in the right-most TX slot.
1.) Carefully align the GTX Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane
connectors.

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after these parts replacement.

SEE SEC-
8-15-9 Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement
Figure 8-238 DRX Boards location
DRX BOARDS
8-15-9-1 Manpower
8-15-9-2 Tools

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.

8-15-9-4 DRX Board removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the DRX Board:
1.) Remove the DRX Shield.

2.) Pull out the DRX Board.
8-15-9-5 DRX Board installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the DRX Board:
1.) Carefully align the DRX Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane
connectors.
2.) Install the DRX Shield.

page 6-15.

SEE SEC-

8-15-10 GFI Board replacement
Figure 8-239 GFI Board location
GFI BOARD
GFI CABLE
8-15-10-1 Manpower
8-15-10-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.
5.) Unscrew the fixing screw for the cover for the PCIe (GFI) cable.
6.) Remove the cover for the PCIe cable.

8-15-10-4 GFI Board removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the GFI Board:
1.) Pull out the GFI Board.

8-15-10-5 GFI Board installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the GFI Board:
1.) Carefully align the GFI Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane
connectors.
2.) Install the FEP Cover.
3.) Install the FEP Covers fixing screws.
replacement:

8-15-10-7 Collect error logs

1.) Collect the error logs and record information on why the GFI Board was changed.
2.) Please send the error logs and the information to your regional RCSS or send it by email to:
oddmund.fjordbakk@med.ge.com.

page 6-15.

use.
SEE SEC-
8-15-11 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Card Rack replacement
8-15-11-1 Manpower
8-15-11-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.
6.) Remove the Front Cover.

8.) Remove the Main Power Supply.
9.) Remove the DVD drive(s).
10.)Loosen or remove the B/W Printer Bracket
11.)Remove the BEPs cover.
12.)Reach inside the BEP and disconnect the Boundary Scan Cable from the FEP Backplane.
Figure 8-240 Boundary Scan cable connects BEP to Back Plane (BEP view)

8-5-8 "Front Cover replacement" on page 8-68.
Section 8-17 "Main Power Supply replacement" on page 8-411.
8-19-4 "DVD R/W drive replacement" on page 8-426.
8-15-11-4 Vivid E9 Card Rack removal

Follow these steps to remove the Front End Card Rack:

5.) Remove the Fan Assembly (8-13-6 "Fan Assembly replacement" on page 8-296).
6.) Remove the three #5 hex key screws at the back of the Card Rack.
Figure 8-241 Back of the Card Rack with Main PS removed
7.) Remove the four #5 hex key screws at the front base of the rack.
Figure 8-242 Front Card Rack screws with Front Cover and Card Rack Cover removed, side
view
8.) Lift the entire Card Rack out of the chassis.

8-15-11-5 Vivid E9 Card Rack installation
CAUTION If the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is equipped with the GTX-TLP192 board (one GTX board), the Plate
Cover Empty Slot must be present on the Front End Rack.
If the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is equipped with three GTX-TLP 3.0 boards, the Plate Cover Empty Slot
must be removed (if installed).
The Plate Cover Empty Slot
The Plate Cover Empty Slot is mounted on the top of the Front End Rack as shown in the Figure below.
It is fastened with six lips (two lips shown in the illustration below).
Figure 8-243 Plate Cover Empty Slot mounted on top of the Front End Card Rack.
If the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is equipped with three GTX-TLP 3.0 boards:
Remove the Plate Cover Empty Slot.
Follow these steps to install the Front End Rack:
1.) Place the entire Card Rack onto the chassis.

2.) Install the four #5 hex key screws at the front base of the Card Rack.
3.) Install the three #5 hex key screws at the back base of the Card Rack.
4.) Install the fan tray below the Card Rack.
8.) Connect the Boundary Scan Cable to the BEPs Backplane.
9.) Install the BEPs cover.
10.)Install the DVD drive and storage tray (or two DVD drives, if mounted), and reconnect the cables.
11.)Install and/or fasten the B/W Printer Bracket.
12.)Install the Main Power Supply.
13.)Install the Rear Cover.
14.)Install the Front Cover.
15.)Install the Top Cover.
8-15-11-6 Programming Backplane Serial Number

Follow this procedure to program the correct serial number on the Backplane:

2.) Insert the service key.
3.) Boot VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Exit to the Desktop.
4.) Open a CMD window.
Figure 8-244 Command Prompt
5.) Type: gfitest -s-i-n to display the gfitest menu.

6.) Scroll down and double click on BP.
Figure 8-245 The gfitest menu
Copyright 2010 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved

8-15-11-6 Programming Backplane Serial Number (contd)

7.) Scroll down and select the file Vpd_BP_2B_GA200685.dat.
Figure 8-246 Select the file Vpd_BP_2B_GA200685.dat
8.) Select Open.
Figure 8-247 Select Edit VPD
9.) Select Edit VPD.
8-15-11-6 Programming Backplane Serial Number (contd)

10.)Scroll down to the SSN field.
Figure 8-248 The SSN field
11.)Enter VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Serial Number in the Value field.

12.)Select Exit when done.
13.)Remove the service key.
14.)Reboot VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
replacement:


page 6-15.

use.
SEE SEC-
Section 8-16
Back End Processor (BEP) parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the BEP itself and the service parts inside the BEP.

8-16-3 Back End Processor parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-360
8-16-4 Back End Processor (BEP) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-361
8-16-5 Back End Processor Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-368
8-16-6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-373
8-16-7 Graphics Adapter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-379
8-16-8 I/O Board Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-390
8-16-9 Patient I/O replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-390
8-16-10 BEP Front Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-391
8-16-11 Digital Video Stream Recorder (DVR) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-394
8-16-12 BEP6 Fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-395
8-16-13 BEP Power In Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-398
8-16-14 SATA Jumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-400
8-16-15 Patient I/O Interface Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-401
8-16-16 Video Jumper (Flex) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-403
8-16-17 DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-404
8-16-18 SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-406
8-16-19 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-407
8-16-20 DVR Audio cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-408
8-16-21 BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-409

8-16-3 Back End Processor parts overview

The spare parts (FRUs) for the BEP models are listed in:
9-13-2 "BEP6 Spare Parts" on page 9-81

9-13-3 "BEP5 Spare Parts" on page 9-83
Cables and cable kits are listed in:
9-18-7-2 "BEP6 cables" on page 9-105

9-18-7-3 "BEP5 cables" on page 9-112
8 - 360 Section 8-16 - Back End Processor (BEP) parts replacement

8-16-4 Back End Processor (BEP) replacement
8-16-4-1 Manpower
One person, 30 minutes + software installation (if new BEP is installed), calibration and verification.
8-16-4-2 Software requirements

Please refer to: Section 9-6 "Software overview" on page 9-10.
8-16-4-3 Tools
If the old BEP is a BEP5 with 4D, and the new BEP is a BEP6, a new Graphics Adapter is needed.
If present, the DVR Board must be moved over from the old to the new BEP.
8-16-4-4 Warnings
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WARNING WHEN YOU RETURN THE USED BEP TO YOUR LOCAL PARTS ORGANIZATION, MAKE
SURE YOU REMOVE ALL PATIENT DATA FROM THE HARD DRIVE, GIVEN THAT THE
HARD DRIVE IS STILL FUNCTIONAL.
IN SOME COUNTRIES, YOU MAY BE REQUIRED TO DELETE ALL SOFTWARE FROM
THE DISK BEFORE RETURNING THE BEP TO THE PARTS WAREHOUSE. FOLLOW
YOUR LOCAL POLICIES.
WARNING BEFORE YOU DISPOSE OF THE HARD DRIVE, MAKE SURE YOU REMOVE ALL
PATIENT DATA FROM THE HARD DRIVE, GIVEN THAT THE HARD DRIVE IS STILL
FUNCTIONAL.
THE DISK BEFORE RETURNING THE HARD DRIVE TO THE PARTS WAREHOUSE.
FOLLOW YOUR LOCAL POLICIES.

1.) Record the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings.
2.) Export the Patient Archive images to a server or to external media.
3.) Back up the Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and Service
settings.
You will perform a Restore after you have installed the new BEP and loaded the correct software.
4.) Collect the error logs and record information on why the BEP must be changed.
6.) If possible, wipe the HDD partitions as described in the WIPE HDD INSTRUCTIONS manual,
Direction Number: 5330218-100.
Alternatives:
- Reload the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 System software from DVD. Select A: to overwrite all content
on HDD, or:
- Reload the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 System software from UFD. Select No when asked: Keep
User Data and Patient Archive?
10.)Remove the Side Covers.
11.)Remove the Top Cover.
12.)Remove the B/W Printer.
- Disconnect the Power Cable from the rear of the printer.
- Disconnect the signal cable from the I/O panel.
- Loosen the printer bracket wing nut.
- Slide the printer (with signal cable) forward, out of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
13.)For easier access in the next steps, remove the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Front Cover.

8-19-6 "Black & White Digital Graphic Printer replacement" on page 8-438.

8-16-4-6 Back End Processor (BEP) removal procedure
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
Follow these steps to remove the BEP:
1.) Disconnect all I/O cables.

2.) Disconnect the cables at the top of the BEP.
3.) Unlatch the two latches that clamp the printer bracket to the top of the BEP.
Figure 8-249 Printer Bracket (BEP6)
LATCHES (2x)
Figure 8-250 Printer Bracket (first version for BEP5)
LOWER COLUMN COVER

STOP TAB
PRINTER BRACKET
WING NUT
TABS (3x)
LATCH (NOT SHOWN)
LATCH
BEP COVER

8-16-4-6 Back End Processor (BEP) removal procedure (contd)

4.) Tilt the Front Cover forward just until the Column Cover Stop Tabs clear.
5.) Lift the Lower Column Cover.
6.) Push the printer bracket toward the FEP approximately 1.3 cm (1/2 inch) to free the 3 tabs from the
BEP. Push in the direction of the white arrow in Figure 8-250.
7.) Remove the BEP Cover.
a.) Loosen the BEP Covers fixing screw(s).
- On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover.
- On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws, one on the top and one on each side of
the BEP Cover.
- On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover.
b.) Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP.
c.) Set the BEP Cover aside.
8.) Remove the Printer Bracket from the BEP.
9.) Remove the two hex key screws at the inside base of the BEP.
Figure 8-251 BEP hex key screws
HEX KEY SCREWS AT

BASE
10.)Reach inside the BEP and disconnect the Boundary Scan Cable from the the FEP Backplane
Connector. It is available through a cut out in the BEPs Rear Cover.
Figure 8-252 Boundary Scan cable connects BEP to Back Plane (BEP5 is illustrated)
11.)Slide the entire BEP out of chassis.

8-16-4-7 Prepeare the new BEP for installation
WARNING BEFORE YOU DISPOSE OF THE HARD DRIVE, OR RETURN THE BEP TO THE LOCAL
PARTS ORGANIZATION, MAKE SURE YOU REMOVE ALL PATIENT DATA FROM THE
HARD DRIVE, GIVEN THAT THE HARD DRIVE IS STILL FUNCTIONAL.
1.) If installed, remove the DVR Board from the existing BEP and install it in the replacement BEP.
For instructions, see: 8-19-5 "Digital Video Recorder (DVR) replacement" on page 8-429.
2.) If 4D is installed:
- If the BEP you removed was a BEP6, and the new BEP is a BEP6, you can move over the
Graphics Adapter.
- If the BEP you removed was a BEP5, and the new BEP is a BEP5, you can move over the
Graphics Adapter.
- If the BEP you removed was a BEP5, and the new BEP is a BEP6, you must also order a new
Graphics Adapter.
- 9-13-2 "BEP6 Spare Parts" on page 9-81.

- 8-16-7 "Graphics Adapter replacement" on page 8-379.

8-16-4-8 Back End Processor (BEP) installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the BEP:
1.) Slide the BEP into the left side of the chassis frame.
2.) Install the two (2x) hex key screws at the inside base of the BEP.
3.) Reach inside the BEP and connect the Boundary Scan Cable to the BEPs Backplane.
NOTE: If you do not reconnect the internal BEP cable (Boundary Scan Cable) to the Backplane, the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 will power up, but will not scan. The BEP will launch into simulator mode.
4.) Install the BEP Cover as described in these steps:
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP Cover.
a.) Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP.
Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP.
b.) Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
c.) Install the fixing screw(s) for the BEP Cover:
the BEP Cover.
5.) Replace the Printer Bracket at the top of the BEP.

Be sure the lip, on the underside of the bracket, hooks on the edge of the Card Rack, and the 3 tabs
insert into the slots on the top of the BEP frame. The lip clamps the Card Rack and BEP together.
This is a tight fit.
6.) Lower the Lower Column Cover.

7.) Position the Front Cover to engage the Column Cover Stop Tabs.
8.) Latch the two latches that clamp the Printer Bracket to the top of the BEP.
9.) Slide the B&W printer into the Printer Bracket and connect the cables to the back of the printer.
10.)Tighten the Printer Bracket Wing Nut to secure the printer.
11.)Connect all I/O cables at top and/or face of the BEP, including the printer cables.
12.)Install the Top Cover (if removed), the Front cover (if removed) and the side covers.
13.)If applicable, install the correct software on the new BEP.
14.)Enter the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s TCPIP settings and Option strings.
15.)Restore the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer
Presets), and Service settings.
8-19-6-6 "Black & White Digital Graphic Printer installation procedure" on page 8-439.
Table 5-22 "BEP6 Face connections" on page 5-87.
Figure 5-52 "BEP5 Face connections" on page 5-89.
8-5-5-5 "Top Cover installation procedure" on page 8-61.
8-5-4-5 "Side Covers installation" on page 8-57.


8-16-4-10 Verification after HDD or BEP replacement

4.) Check/set Date, Time, and Timezone, and set the Preset Region accordingly.
5.) Reconnect to the network.
6.) If the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 was connected to InSite ExC, restore the service settings backed up prior
to the software loading. Reboot and verify remote connectivity.
7.) Confirm Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration (Customer Presets),
and Service settings are restored.
8.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper CD/DVD write functionality.
8-16-4-11 Functional Checks after BEP parts replacement

SEE SEC-



8-16-5 Back End Processor Power Supply replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-16-5-1 Manpower
8-16-5-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

4.) Remove Left Side Cover.
the BEP Cover.


8-16-5-4 Remove BEP6 Power Board Assembly
Figure 8-253 BEP6 Power Board Assembly removal
Follow these steps to remove the BEP6 Power Board Assembly:
1.) Unplug the cable (plug) at the top of the BEP6 Power Board Assembly.
2.) Remove the two screws that secure the BEP6 Power Board Assembly.
3.) Slide the BEP6 Power Board Assembly out of the BEP. You will need to apply some force - use the
two brackets as handles. Refer the two small yellow rings in Figure 8-253 - BEP6 Power Board
Assembly removal (above).
4.) To install the BEP6 Power Board Assembly, go to:
8-16-5-5 "Install the BEP6 Power Board Assembly" on page 8-370.

8-16-5-5 Install the BEP6 Power Board Assembly

Follow these steps to install the BEP6 Power Board Assembly:
1.) Position the BEP6 Power Board Assembly so it enters the two guides and slide the BEP6 Power
Board Assembly in so it is plugged into the BEP6s backplane. You may need to apply a pressure
to make it slide into position.
2.) Install the two screws that secure the BEP6 Power Board Assembly to the BEP frame.
3.) Plug in the cable plug in the connector near the top of the BEP6 Power Board Assembly.
the BEP Cover.
5.) Replace the Left Side Cover.


See: 8-16-4-11 "Functional Checks after BEP parts replacement" on page 8-367.

8-16-5-8 Remove BEP5 Power Supply

Follow these steps to remove the BEP5 Power Supply:
1.) Remove the two screws on the Power Supply.
Figure 8-254 BEP Power Supply Fixing Screws
2.) Gently insert a flat screwdriver between the power supply and the BEP frame to create enough
space to get hold on the power supply.
Figure 8-255 BEP Power Supply removal
3.) Pull the Power Supply toward you while gently rocking the board up and down, freeing the 2 pins
connected at the back of the board.
4.) To install the BEP5 Power Supply, go to:
8-16-5-9 "Install BEP5 Power Supply" on page 8-372.

8-16-5-9 Install BEP5 Power Supply

Follow these steps to install the BEP5 Power Supply:
1.) With the 2 pins pointing to the back of the BEP, guide the pins into the 2 holes in the top right of the
BEP. Apply a pressure to make it slide into position.
2.) With the pins in place, replace the 2 screws that secure the front of the power supply to the BEP
frame.
the BEP Cover.



8-16-6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) replacement

NOTE: BEP HDD replacement requires a software installation.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-16-6-1 Manpower
One person, 30 minutes + software installation, calibration and verification.
8-16-6-2 Tools
WARNING BEFORE YOU DISPOSE OF THE HARD DRIVE, MAKE SURE YOU REMOVE ALL
PATIENT DATA FROM THE HARD DRIVE, GIVEN THAT THE HARD DRIVE IS STILL
FUNCTIONAL.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
1.) Record the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings.
2.) Back up the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer
You will perform a Restore after the install.
3.) If possible, wipe the HDD partitions as described in the WIPE HDD INSTRUCTIONS manual,
Direction Number: 5330218-100.
- Reload the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 System software from DVD. Select A: to overwrite all content
on HDD, or:
- Reload the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 System software from UFD. Select No when asked: Keep
User Data and Patient Archive?

6.) Disconnect all external cables (probes, ECG, physio, Ethernet, audio, video, USB).
the BEP Cover.
9.)


8-16-6-4 BEP6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the HDD:
1.) Disconnect the cables connecting the HDD.

2.) Remove the two screws that secures the HDD Bracket to the BEPs frame.
Figure 8-256 BEP6 HDD screws
3.) Get hold of the HDD assembly, see figure below, and pull it out.
Figure 8-257 Pull out the HDD assembly

8-16-6-5 BEP6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) installation procedure

1.) Position the HDD Assembly so it enters the two guides and slide the HDD in. You may need to apply
a pressure to make it slide into position.
2.) Install the two screws that secures the HDD Bracket to the BEPs frame.
3.) Connect the two HDD cables to the HDD.
the BEP Cover.

6.) Connect the Mains Power Cable to the wall outlet.
8.) Install the System software and the Application software.
9.) Enter the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s TCPIP settings and Option strings.
11.)Continue with 8-16-6-8 "Calibration and adjustments" on page 8-378.
Section 8-4 "Loading / Reloading the software" on page 8-8.

8-16-6-6 BEP5 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) removal procedure

1.) Remove the screw that secures the HDD bracket.
Figure 8-258 BEP Hard Disk Drive screw
SCREW SECURES
HDD BRACKET
2.) Swing the HDD bracket out.

3.) Disconnect the cables connecting the HDD.
4.) Lift the bracket up, freeing the hinge tabs from the slots.
Figure 8-259 BEP Hard Disk Drive
HDD BRACKET
HINGES

8-16-6-7 BEP5 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Hard Disk Drive:
1.) Slide the HDD bracket hinges into the BEP frame slots.
2.) Connect the cables to the HDD.
3.) Swing the HDD bracket into place.
4.) Install the screw that secures the HDD bracket.
the BEP Cover.
6.) Replace the side cover.

9.) Install the System software and the Application software.
10.)Enter the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s TCPIP settings and Option strings.
Section 8-4 "Loading / Reloading the software" on page 8-8

See: 8-16-4-10 "Verification after HDD or BEP replacement" on page 8-367.


8-16-7 Graphics Adapter replacement
8-16-7-1 Contents in this section

8-16-7-2 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-379
8-16-7-3 Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-380
8-16-7-4 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-380
8-16-7-5 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-380
8-16-7-6 Preparations - BEP5/BEP6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-381
8-16-7-7 Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-382
8-16-7-8 Installing the Graphics Adapter in the BEP6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-383
8-16-7-9 Removing the Video Bypass Board in the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-385
8-16-7-10Installing the Video Bypass Board in the BEP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-385
8-16-7-11Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-386
8-16-7-12Installing the Graphics Adapter in the BEP5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-389
8-16-7-13Calibration and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-389
8-16-7-14Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-390
8-16-7-2 Overview
NOTE: On BEP6 without 4D, the graphics circuits (Intel HD Graphics and Intel Graphics Media
Accelerator) are included on the BEPs motherboard. A Video Bypass Board is plugged into the
graphics port for signal routing purpose.
BT13 scanners:
These Graphics Adapters may be used, depending on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 model and BEP model:
BT13 with BEP6 with 4D: Nvidia Quadro 410

BT13 with BEP6 without 4D: Video Bypass Board
BT12 scanners:
These Graphics Adapters may be used, depending on the VIVID E9 model and BEP model:
BT12 with BEP6 with 4D: Nvidia Quadro 410

BT12 with BEP6 without 4D: Video Bypass Board
BT12 with BEP5 with 4D: Nvidia Quadro 2000D
BT12 with BEP5 without 4D: Prolink Add 2 card
BT11 scanners:
These Graphics Adapters are used, depending on the VIVID E9 BT11 model.
BT11 with 4D: Nvidia Quadro FX1800 or Nvidia Quadro 2000D

BT11 without 4D: Prolink Add 2 card
BT09 scanners:
These Graphics Adapters have been installed on VIVID E9 BT09:
ATI Fire GL V7200

Nvidia Quadro FX1800
Repaired scanners may have Nvidia Quadro 2000D

8-16-7-3 Warnings
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
8-16-7-4 Manpower
8-16-7-5 Tools

8-16-7-6 Preparations - BEP5/BEP6

When preparing for the removal, or replacement, of a Graphical Adapter, you must perform the following
steps:

the BEP Cover.
6.) Next;
- for BEP6, continue with:
8-16-7-7 "Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP6" on page 8-382.
- for BEP5, continue with:
8-16-7-11 "Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP5" on page 8-386.


8-16-7-7 Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP6
Figure 8-260 Graphics Adapter position in BEP6
GRAPHICS ADAPTER
1.) Remove the HDD to get easier access in the rest of the procedure.
2.) Unscrew the fixing screws from the connector at top of the Graphics Adapter.
- If DVR is installed: the flex between the Graphics Adapter and the DVR board uses finger
screws.
- Without DVR: the flex from the motherboard is fixed with Hex screws.
3.) Disconnect the plug.
4.) Remove the fixing screw for the Graphics Adapter.
5.) Pull out the Graphics Adapter.

8-16-7-8 Installing the Graphics Adapter in the BEP6

Follow these steps to install the (new) Graphics Adapter:
1.) Plug in the (new) Graphics Adapter.

2.) Insert and fasten the fixing screw.
3.) Plug in the cables you removed earlier.
- Connections if DVR is installed in the BEP6:
DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil

DVI-Samtech Flex
DVR Audio
- Connection if the BEP6 is without DVR:
DVI-SAMTECH FLEX
4.) Install the fixing screws you removed earlier.

5.) Install the HDD.

8-16-7-8 Installing the Graphics Adapter in the BEP6 (contd)

the BEP Cover.

10.)Continue with: 8-16-7-14 "Functional Checks" on page 8-390

8-16-7-9 Removing the Video Bypass Board in the BEP6

1.) Unscrew and remove the fixing screws from the connector at top of the Video Bypass Board.
2.) Pull out the Video Bypass Board.
8-16-7-10 Installing the Video Bypass Board in the BEP6

1.) Plug in the (new) Video Bypass Board.
the BEP Cover.

7.) Continue with: 8-16-7-14 "Functional Checks" on page 8-390.

8-16-7-11 Removing the Graphics Adapter from the BEP5

To get access, you may remove the Hard Disk Drive (HDD).
1.) Remove the screw that secures the HDD bracket. Save it for reinstallation later.
2.) Swing the HDD bracket out.
3.) Disconnect the two cables from the HDD.
Figure 8-261 Remove fixing screw, disconnect cables
1. Fixing screw for HDD bracket.

2. Two cables to the HDD
Follow these steps to remove the Graphics Adapter:
1.) Disconnect the cable(s) from the Graphics Adapter.
Table 8-99 Disconnect the cables from the Graphics Adapter - BEP5
Graphics Adapter Without DVR With DVR

Prolink Add2 card Disconnect the DVI Out cable Disconnect the DVI Flex, Main cable
Disconnect the extra Power cable Disconnect the extra Power cable
ATI FireGL V7200
Disconnect the DVI Out cable Disconnect the DVI Flex, Jumper (Z cable)
Nvidia Quadro 2000D

and Disconnect the DVI Out cable Disconnect the DVI Flex, Main cable
Nvidia Quadro FX1800
NOTE: Newer VIVID E9/VIVID E7 units have a locking mechanism on the connector on the BEPs
motherboard.
2.) If a locking mechanism is installed on the connector on the BEPs motherboard, push the plastic
slider down to release the Graphics Adapter.
3.) Unplug and remove the Graphics Adapter. Store it in an ESD safe place.

8-16-7-11-1 Cables for the Prolink Add2 card
Figure 8-262 Cables on the Prolink Add2 card
1. I/O Unit
2. Graphics Adapter (Add2)
3. DVR Board (stipulated position to the left, installed to the right)
4. DVI Out cable
5. DVI Flex Main cable
6. SATA cable (Dont disconnect in this procedure)
8-16-7-11-2 Cables for the ATI FireGL V7200 card - BEP5
Figure 8-263 Cables on the ATI FireGL V7200 card - BEP5
1. I/O Unit
2. Graphics Adapter (ATI FireGL V7200)
4. DVI Out cable
5. DVI Flex Jumper (X cable)
7. Extra Power cable for the ATI FireGL V7200 card

8-16-7-11-3 Cables for the Nvidia Quadro FX1800 / Nvidia Quadro 2000D - BEP5
Figure 8-264 Cables on the Nvidia Quadro FX1800 / Nvidia Quadro 2000D card - BEP5
1. I/O Unit
2. Graphics Adapter (Nvidia Quadro FX1800 / Nvidia Quadro 2000D)
4. DVI Out cable
5. DVI Flex Main cable

8-16-7-12 Installing the Graphics Adapter in the BEP5

Follow these steps to install the new Graphics adapter:
1.) Plug in the new Graphics adapter.

2.) If a locking mechanism is installed on the connector on the BEPs motherboard, pull the plastic
slider up to fix the Graphics adapter in position.
3.) Connect the cables to the Graphics adapter.
Table 8-100 Connect the cables to the Graphics Adapter - BEP5
Graphics Adapter Without DVR With DVR

Prolink Add2 card Connect the DVI Out cable Connect the DVI Flex, Main cable
Connect the extra Power cable Connect the extra Power cable
ATI FireGL V7200
Connect the DVI Out cable Connect the DVI Flex, Jumper (Z cable)
Nvidia Quadro FX1800 Connect the DVI Out cable Connect the DVI Flex, Main cable
Connect the DVI Out cable to the connector Connect the DVI Flex, Main cable to the
Nvidia Quadro 2000D
closest to the motherboard. connector closest to the motherboard.
4.) Connect the two cables to the HDD.

5.) Swing the HDD bracket back in positon and fix it with the screw you removed earlier.
the BEP Cover.



8-16-8 I/O Board Assembly replacement

For the I/O Board replacement procedure, please refer to: 8-18-4 "Side I/O Board Assembly
replacement" on page 8-420.
8-16-9 Patient I/O replacement

The Patient I/O module is located in front of, outside, the BEP. See: 8-18-3 "Patient I/O Assembly
replacement" on page 8-416.

8-16-10 BEP Front Module replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-16-10-1 Manpower
8-16-10-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

5.) Remove the BEP.


8-16-10-4 Front Module removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Front Module:
1.) Place the BEP on a table for better access (and ergonomics).
the BEP Cover.
NOTE: BEP5: Remove the HDD to get better access.

Ref.: 8-16-6 "Hard Disk Drive (HDD) replacement" on page 8-373.
3.) BEP6 only: Remove the Graphics Adapter to get better access.
4.) BEP5: Disconnect the cables at the back of the Front Module.
BEP6: Disconnect the Front Module Cable from the motherboard.
NOTE: See 8-16-6 "Hard Disk Drive (HDD) replacement" on page 8-373 for more information.
Figure 8-265 Front Module cable placement (BEP5 illustrated)
FRONT MODULE CABLES

FROM INSIDE BEP
5.) Remove the two screws securing the Front Module to the BEP frame.
Figure 8-266 Front Module screw placement
6.) Remove the Front Module.

8-16-10-5 Front Module installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Front Module:
1.) Install the Front Module into the BEP frame. Be sure the Front Module lip slides into the Module
opening.
Figure 8-267 Lip on the Front Module
2.) Install the two screws securing the Front Module to the BEP frame.
3.) BEP6: Connect the Front Module Cable to the connector on the motherboard.
BEP5: Connect the cables to the Front Module.
4.) BEP5 only: Install the HDD (if removed).
the BEP Cover.
6.) Replace the Side Cover.
7.) Install the BEP.



8-16-11 Digital Video Stream Recorder (DVR) replacement

The Digital Video Stream Recorder is mounted in a PCI slot. For replacement, see:
8-19-5 "Digital Video Recorder (DVR) replacement" on page 8-429.

8-16-12 BEP6 Fan replacement

NOTE: This procedure describes how to replace the two fans installed to the bottom of the BEP6.
NOTE: The CPU fan is not replaceable.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE POWER
CONNECTOR).
FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, VIVID E9/VIVID E7 MUST BE TURNED OFF.

AVOID ALL CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND
COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS.
ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE
DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
8-16-12-1 Manpower
8-16-12-2 Tools


the BEP Cover.
6.) Remove the BEP and place it on a table.

8-16-12-4 Back End Processor Fan removal
Figure 8-268 BEP replaceable fans
Follow these steps to remove one of the Back End Processor fans:
1.) Locate the BEP Fan(s) inside the BEP (see arrows in Figure 8-268.)
2.) Disconnect the fans plug from the connector on the motherboard.
3.) Cut the head (end) of the four rubber mounts, and remove the fan from the BEP frame.

8-16-12-5 Back End Processor Fan installation

Follow these steps to install the replacement fan:
1.) Position the new fan in position so its mounting holes are aligned with the respective holes in the
BEP frame. Ensure that it is turned so the wire will reach the plug on the motherboard and so it will
blow the correct way, when running..
(See: Figure 8-268 "BEP replaceable fans" on page 8-396.)
2.) Insert the thin end of one of the new rubber mounts from the BEP frames outside and through the
fans fastening hole.
3.) Pull the rubber mount so the thicker part of the rubber mount is pulled through the fans fastening
hole.
4.) Repeat the steps above for the three other rubber fasteners.
5.) When done, cut away the excissive thin rubber from the rubber fastner.
6.) Plug in the fans plug to the connector on the motherboard.
7.) Install the BEP in the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
8.) You may want to power up the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 for a short time, just to check that the new fan is
running OK, and running (blowing) the correct way, before you continue. Turn the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 off again, as soon as possible (within a few minutes), due to the risk of overheating when
the covers are removed.
the BEP Cover.
10.)Install the Left Side Cover.


8-16-13 BEP Power In Cable replacement
The J1 chassis connector on the BEP Power In Cable is fixed to the top of the BEP6 frame. The other
end is plugged into PCN 2 on the BEP6 Power Board.
The BEP Power In Cable is included in the BEP6.X Cable Kit - Spare Part, Part Number 5433408-80.
Figure 9-7 "BEP6 internal cables" on page 9-105.
To get better access, you should remove the BEP from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 before you start to
replace the cable.

3.) Disconnect all probes and external cables.
6.) Remove the B/W Printer.
7.) For easier access in the next steps, remove the Front Cover.
8.) Remove the BEP and place it on a table for easy access.
9.) Remove the HDD assembly.

8-19-6 "Black & White Digital Graphic Printer replacement" on page 8-438.
8-16-4-6 "Back End Processor (BEP) removal procedure" on page 8-363.
8-16-6-4 "BEP6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) removal procedure" on page 8-375.
8-16-13-3 BEP Power In Cable removal

Follow these steps to remove the BEP Power In Cable:
1.) Disconnect the cable from PCN 2 on the BEP6 Power Board.
2.) The J1 connector is fixed to the BEP6 frame with two screws (from below) and nuts (above).
Remove the two nuts and screws.
3.) Remove the HDD Bracket. It is fixed to the frame with four Phillips screws from above.
4.) Remove the BEP Power In Cable.

8-16-13-4 BEP Power In Cable installation

Follow these steps to install the BEP Power In Cable:
1.) Connect the new BEP Power In Cable to PCN 2 on the BEP6 Power Board.
2.) Install the J1 connector in the frame with the two screws (from below) and the nuts (above).
3.) Install the HDD Bracket. Ensure that the BEP Power In Cable is routed above the HDD Bracket
before you fix it to the frame with the four Phillips screws from above.
5.) Install the BEP in the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
6.) Install all the cables to the BEP.
7.) Install the BEP Cover.
8.) Install the B/W Printer.
9.) Install the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 covers you removed earlier.
8-16-6-5 "BEP6 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) installation procedure" on page 8-376
8-16-4-8 "Back End Processor (BEP) installation procedure" on page 8-366
8-19-6-6 "Black & White Digital Graphic Printer installation procedure" on page 8-439.
8-5-5-5 "Top Cover installation procedure" on page 8-61.
8-5-8-5 "Front Cover installation" on page 8-69.


8-16-14 SATA Jumper replacement

The SATA Jumper connects CN DV11 to CN DV12 in 2D systems wilhout DVR.
The jumper is included in the BEP6.X Cable Kit - Spare Part, Part number 5433408-80.

the BEP Cover.

8-16-14-2 SATA Jumper removal

Disconnect the SATA Jumper from the connectors CN DV11 and CN DV12 on the motherboard.
8-16-14-3 SATA Jumper installation

1.) Install the SATA Jumper in the connectors CN DV11 and CN DV12 on the motherboard.


8-16-15 Patient I/O Interface Cable replacement

The Patient I/O Interface Cable connects the Patient IO to the BEPs motherboard.
It is included in the BEP6.X Cable Kit - Spare Part, Part Number 5433408-80.

the BEP Cover.

8-16-15-2 Patient I/O Interface Cable removal

Follow these steps to remove the Patient I/O Interface Cable:
1.) Remove the BEP Power Board. This is required to get access to the Patient I/O Interface Cable.
2.) Unplug the two connectors (Power and USB) from the Patient I/O.
3.) Unplug the connector from CN USB11 on the BEPs motherboard.
8-16-5-4 "Remove BEP6 Power Board Assembly" on page 8-369.

8-16-15-3 Patient I/O Interface Cable installation

Follow these steps to install the Patient I/O Interface Cable:
1.) Connect the two connectors (Power and USB) to the Patient I/O.
CAUTION BE AWARE OF CORRECT ORIENTATION OF THE PATIENT I/O CABLE CONNECTOR WHEN
CONNECTING TO CN USB11 ON THE BEP'S MOTHERBOARD.
ON SOME BEPS, THE KEYING TO PREVENT ERROR MAY BE MISSING.
2.) Connect the other end of the cable to CN USB11 on the BEPs motherboard.
3.) Install the BEP Power Board.



8-16-16 Video Jumper (Flex) replacement

The Video Jumper (Flex) is used in VIVID E9/VIVID E7 with 2D and without DVR.
The jumper is included in the BEP6.X Cable Kit - Spare Part, Part Number 5433408-80.

the BEP Cover.

8-16-16-2 Video Jumper (Flex) removal

Follow these steps to remove the Video Jumper (Flex):
1.) Flip the retainer levers on the side of the connectors CN DV11 and CN DV12 to the side.
2.) Unplug and remove the Video Jumper (Flex).
8-16-16-3 Video Jumper (Flex) installation

Follow these steps to install the Video Jumper (Flex):
1.) Connect the two connectors on the Video Jumper (Flex) to CN DV11 and CN DV12 (on the BEPs
motherboard).



8-16-17 DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) replacement

The DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) is included in the BEP6.X Cable Kit - Spare Part,
Part Number 5433408-80.

the BEP Cover.

8-16-17-2 DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) removal

The number of cables in use, depends on the configuration:
4D with DVR: one cable is used.

4D without DVR: one cable is used.
2D with DVR: two cables are used.
2D without DVR does not use this cable.
Follow these steps to remove the DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex):
1.) Disconnect the cable from CN DV12 (on the motherboard).

2.) Repeat the step above for the second cable, if installed.

8-16-17-3 DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) installation

Follow these steps to install the DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex):
1.) Install the DVI to Samtec Jumper(s) (Flex(es))

- 4D with DVR:
- Install the DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) between CN DV12 on the MBD and DVI OUT
on the DVR board.
- 4D without DVR:
- Install the DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) between CN DV12 on the MBD and the
Graphics Adapter.
- 2D with DVR:
1.) Install one DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) between CN DV12 on the MBD and DVI OUT
on the DVR board.
2.) Install one DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) between CN DV11 on the MBD and DVI IN on
the DVR board.


8-16-18 SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD replacement

the BEP Cover.
6.) Remove the BEP and place it on a table.

8-16-18-2 SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD removal

Follow these steps to remove the SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD:
1.) Unplug the SATA Cable from the DVD connector on the DVR.
2.) Unplug the other end of the SATA Cable from the CN SATA5 connector on the motherboard.
8-16-18-3 SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD installation

Follow these steps to install the SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD:
1.) Connect the SATA Cable to the CN SATA5 connector on the motherboard.
2.) Connect the other end of the SATA Cable to the DVD connector on the DVR.


8-16-19 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil replacement

the BEP Cover.

8-16-19-2 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil removal

1.) Disconnect one end of the DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil from the connector on the Graphics Adapter.
2.) Disconnect the other end of the DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil from the DVI-IN connector on the DVR.
8-16-19-3 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil installation

1.) Install one end of the DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil to the DVI-IN connector on the DVR.
2.) Install the other end of the DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil to the connector on the Graphics Adapter.


8-16-20 DVR Audio cable replacement

the BEP Cover.

8-16-20-2 DVR Audio cable removal

1.) Disconnect one end of the DVR Audio cable from the connector on the DVR Board.
2.) Disconnect the other end of the DVR Audio cable from the connector on the motherboard.
8-16-20-3 DVR Audio cable installation

1.) Install one end of the DVR Audio cable to the connector on the motherboard.
2.) Install the other end of the DVR Audio cable to the connector on the DVR Board.


8-16-21 BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable replacement



8-16-21-2 BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable removal

1.) Reach inside the BEP and disconnect the Boundary Scan Cable from the FEP Backplane
Connector.
Figure 8-269 Boundary Scan cable connects BEP to FEP Back Plane (BEP view)
2
3
1. Chassis Connector for PCIe to GFI
2. FEP Backplane Connector
3. PCIE L5 Connector
2.) Disconnect the plug from the PCIE L5 Connector on the BEP Motherboard.
3.) Unplug the GFI cable outside (on the top of) the BEP chassis.
4.) Unscrew the 3 mm fixing screw for the Chassis Connector.
You can now remove the BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable.
8-16-21-3 BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable installation

1.) Connect the Boundary Scan Cable to the FEP Backplane Connector.
2.) Connect the PCIE L5 plug to the PCIE L5 Connector on the BEP Motherboard.
3.) Position the Chassis Connector in the cut out in the chassis and fasten it with the 3 mm screw.
4.) Plug in the GFI PCIe Cable in the Chassis Connector (from the outside of the BEP chassis).


Section 8-17
Main Power Supply replacement
This section describes how to replace the Main Power Supply.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-17-2 Manpower
8-17-3 Tools
8-17-4 Preparations
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


8-17-4 Preparations (contd)


8 - 412 Section 8-17 - Main Power Supply replacement

8-17-4-1 Main Power Supply removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Main Power Supply:
Figure 8-270 Main Power Supply
SCREW PLACEMENT
Main Power Supply
1.) Disconnect the cables on top of the power supply.

2.) Remove the three screws that secure the Main Power Supply.
Figure 8-271 Main Power Supply cables
SCREW
FANG
BRACKET
AC OUTPUT TO
PERIPHERALS, POWER TO BEP USB
PRINTER
3.) Ease the Main Power Supply away from the fang bracket.
4.) Pull/slide the entire Main Power Supply backwards until the connectors to the Front End Processor
are unseated.
5.) Lift the Main Power Supply away.

8-17-4-2 Main Power Supply installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Main Power Supply:
1.) Place the Main Power Supply base on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 frame, and then tilt the top of the Main
Power Supply toward the rear of the Card Cage until the Main Power Supply is vertical.
Figure 8-272 Main Power Supply installation
CONNECTORS TO
BACKPLANE IN THE
CARD CAGE.
2.) Slide the Main Power Supply forward to seat the connectors on the Card Cage.
3.) Engage the tab onto the Fang.
4.) Install the three screws.
5.) Connect the cables at the top of the Main Power Supply.
9.) Install both Side Covers.

8-17-4-4 Collect error logs

1.) Collect the error logs and record information on why the Power Supply was changed.
8 - 414 Section 8-17 - Main Power Supply replacement


SEE SEC-


Section 8-18
I/O Modules replacement
This section describes how to replace VIVID E9/VIVID E7s I/O modules.

8-18-3 Patient I/O Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-416
8-18-4 Side I/O Board Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-420
8-18-3 Patient I/O Assembly replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-18-3-1 Manpower
8-18-3-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

8 - 416 Section 8-18 - I/O Modules replacement


4.) Remove Left Side cover.
the BEP Cover.
6.) BEP6 Only: Remove the BEP6 Power Board Assembly.

8-16-5-4 "Remove BEP6 Power Board Assembly" on page 8-369.
8-18-3-4 Patient I/O module removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Patient I/O module:
1.) Inside the BEP there is an opening for the Power and USB cables to the Patient I/O module.
Disconnect the Power cable connector and the USB cable connector from the Patient I/O module.
2.) Remove one screw inside the BEP.
3.) Remove the two fastening screws on the Patient I/O modules mounting bracket.
4.) Pull the Patient I/O module sideways, out of the frame.
8-18-3-5 Patient I/O installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Patient I/O:
1.) Align the Patient I/O with the opening and push it into its final position.
2.) Connect the Power and USB cables (inside the BEP).
Figure 8-273 Power and USB connectors (rear side of Patient I/O)
USB2 SIGNAL POWER

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
3.) BEP5 only: Install one screw inside the BEP.

4.) Install two fastening screws on the mounting bracket.
5.) BEP6 Only: Install the BEP6 Power Board Assembly.

8-18-3-5 Patient I/O installation procedure (contd)
the BEP Cover.
7.) Install the Left Side Cover, see 8-5-4-5 "Side Covers installation" on page 8-57.


Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Patient I/O
replacement:

SEE SEC-



8-18-4 Side I/O Board Assembly replacement
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-18-4-1 Manpower
8-18-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

the BEP Cover.


8-18-4-4 BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly removal
Figure 8-274 Position of screws (two are hidden by cables, one is behind the BEP Cover)
Follow these steps to remove the BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly:
1.) Disconnect the cables connected to the face of the BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly.
2.) Remove the four screws connecting the BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly to the BEP.
3.) Pull the BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly out of the BEP.

8-18-4-5 BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly installation

Follow these steps to install the BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly:
1.) Guide the BEP6 Side I/O Board Assembly into the BEP frame.
2.) Be sure the three tabs on the end of the I/O fit into the three slots in the back of the BEP frame.
3.) Install the four screws connecting the I/O to the BEP.
4.) Reconnect the I/O cabling.
the BEP Cover.



8-18-4-7 BEP5 I/O Board Assembly removal

Follow these steps to remove the BEP5 I/O Board Assembly:
1.) Disconnect the cables inside the BEP that connect to the I/O.
- Flat cable from the Video (Graphics) board.
2.) Remove the five screws connecting the I/O to the BEP.
Figure 8-275 BEP5 I/O Board Assemblys screw placement
SCREWS
3.) Reach inside the BEP frame to pull the I/O Board Assembly out of the BEP.
Figure 8-276 Remove the BEP5 I/O Board Assembly
4.) Set the I/O Board Assembly aside.

8-18-4-8 BEP5 I/O Board Assembly installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the BEP5 I/O Board Assembly:
1.) Guide the BEP5 I/O Board Assembly into the BEP frame.
2.) Be sure the three tabs on the end of the I/O fit into the three slots in the back of the BEP frame.
Figure 8-277 I/O board tabs
TABS
3.) Install the five screws connecting the I/O Board to the BEP.
4.) Reconnect the cables inside the BEP to the I/O Board.
- Flat cable from the Video (Graphics) board.
5.) Reconnect the I/O cabling.
the BEP Cover.



Section 8-19
Peripherals replacement
Follow the instructions in this section to replace peripherals.

8-19-3 Internal Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-425
8-19-4 DVD R/W drive replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-426
8-19-5 Digital Video Recorder (DVR) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-429
8-19-6 Black & White Digital Graphic Printer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-438
8-19-7 External Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-440
8-19-8 External USB Storage Drive w/RAID replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-440
8-19-9 USB Flash Card replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-440
8-19-10 Color Video Printer Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-441
8-19-3 Internal Peripherals overview

Please refer to: Section 5-17 "Peripherals overview" on page 5-132.

8-19-4 DVD R/W drive replacement

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 may be equipped with one or two DVD drives. If two drives are installed, one is
for storing data and one for recording the streaming video from the optional DVR board inside the BEP.
On units without the DVR option, a Drive Bay Storage Box is installed in the empty DVD drive location.
8-19-4-1 Manpower
8-19-4-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


8 - 426 Section 8-19 - Peripherals replacement

8-19-4-4 DVD R/W drive removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the DVD R/W drive:
1.) Raise the console height to the highest level.

2.) Remove the 4 screws securing the right side of the DVD R/W drive.
Figure 8-278 Screw placement for right side of DVD R/W drive
COLUMN
COVER
RAISED
3.) Tilt the Front Cover forward just until the Column Cover stop tabs clear.
4.) Raise the Column Cover to access and remove the 4 screws securing the left side of the DVD R/W
drive.
5.) Disconnect the cables to the DVD R/W drive.
6.) Slide the DVD R/W drive out the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
7.) If Power Connection is different on new and old DVD R/W drive: Move the DVD Interface Board,
Part Number 5301204, from the old DVD R/W drive that you removed, to the new DVD R/W drive.
8-19-4-5 DVD R/W drive installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the DVD R/W drive:
1.) Slide the DVD R/W drive into position.

2.) Install the 8 screws to secure the DVD R/W drive.
3.) Connect the cables to the DVD R/W drive.
4.) Install the Covers.



SEE SEC-


8-19-5 Digital Video Recorder (DVR) replacement

The Digital Video Recorder is a circuit board located in the BEP. The DVR board is connected to a DVD
drive, accessible from the front of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7. The DVD drive automatically stores data
recorded by the DVR.
8-19-5-1 Manpower
8-19-5-2 Tools
8-19-5-3 Warnings
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


the BEP Cover.
6.) For easier access to the DVR Board, remove the Hard Disk Drive.

8-16-6 "Hard Disk Drive (HDD) replacement" on page 8-373.
Next (select what applies):
8-19-5-5 "BEP6 - Digital Video Recorder removal procedure" on page 8-431.

8-19-5-6 "BEP5 - Digital Video Recorder removal procedure" on page 8-432.

8-19-5-5 BEP6 - Digital Video Recorder removal procedure
Figure 8-279 DVR board position in BEP6
DVR
Follow these steps to remove the Digital Video Recorder from a BEP6:
1.) Locate the DVR Board inside the BEP6.

2.) Unscrew the fixing screws from the connector at top of the DVR.
- The flex between the Graphics Adapter and the DVR board uses finger screws.
- The flex from the motherboard is fixed with Hex screws.
3.) Disconnect the audio jack and the two flex cables where they attach to the DVR Board.
4.) Disconnect the DVR to SATA Cable.
5.) Remove the fixing screw for the DVR board.
6.) Pull out the DVR board.
Next:
8-19-5-7 "BEP6 - Digital Video Recorder installation procedure" on page 8-433.

8-19-5-6 BEP5 - Digital Video Recorder removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Digital Video Recorder from a BEP5:
1.) Locate the DVR Board behind the HDD.
Figure 8-280 DVR Board (BEP5)
BEP HDD HINGES

(HDD REMOVED)
DVR Board
2.) Disconnect the audio jack, SATA, DVI flex cables where they attach to the DVR Board.
Figure 8-281 DVR Cables (BEP5)
DVI FLEX
AUDIO
JACK
SATA
3.) Remove the DVR Board from the motherboard slot.
Next:
8-19-5-8 "BEP5 - Digital Video Recorder installation procedure" on page 8-435.

8-19-5-7 BEP6 - Digital Video Recorder installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Digital Video Recorder:
1.) Plug in the (new) DVR Board in the correct slot.

3.) Plug in the cables you removed earlier:.
- Connections if the DVR Board is installed in a VIVID E9 with 4D:
DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil

DVI-Samtech Flex
DVR Audio
DVR TO SATA
CN SATA3
CN SATA5
- Connections if the DVR Board is installed in a VIVID E9/VIVID E7 with 2D:
DVI-Samtech Flex
DVR Audio
DVR TO SATA
CN SATA3
CN SATA5
4.) Install the fixing screws you removed earlier.


8-19-5-7 BEP6 - Digital Video Recorder installation procedure (contd)

the BEP Cover.
Next:
8-19-5-9 "Calibration and adjustments" on page 8-435.

8-19-5-10 "Verification" on page 8-436.
8-19-5-11 "Functional Checks" on page 8-437.

8-19-5-8 BEP5 - Digital Video Recorder installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Digital Video Recorder:
1.) Seat the (new) DVR Board in the correct slot.

2.) Connect the cables to the DVR Board.
3.) Install the HDD (if removed).
the BEP Cover.


1.) Connect cables and probes removed earlier.

- Tests for BT11 software and Later (doing record/playback directly to/from DVD):
1.) When application is up and running, enter the UTILITY window on the touch LCD.
2.) Check that the Video Control Buttons (Record, Playback, Clear DVR Disk) are visible
in the lower right corner. (They may not be available immediately, but will show when
communication with the DVR board is OK.)
3.) Put a DVD+RW in the DVR drive.
4.) Record an ultrasound sequence by pushing the Record button.
5.) Eject the DVD+RW from the DVR drive and put it in the DVD drive.
6.) Do a playback from the DVD drive by pushing the Playback button.
- Tests for BT09 software
1.) When application is up and running, enter the UTILITY window on the touch LCD.
2.) Check that the Video Control Buttons (Record, Playback, Burn to DVD,
Clear DVR Disk) are visible in the lower right corner. (They may not be available
immediately, but will show when communication with the DVR board is OK.)
3.) Record an ultrasound sequence by pushing the Record button.
4.) Put a DVD+RW in the DVR drive.
5.) Burn the ultrasound sequence to the DVR drive by pushing the Burn to DVD button.
6.) Eject the DVD+RW from the DVR drive and put it in the DVD drive.
7.) Do a playback from the DVD by pushing the Playback button.
8.) Take out the DVD+RW from the DVD drive.
9.) Do a playback from the internal disk by pushing the Playback button.


SEE SEC-

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Proprietary Manual,
4-3-8 Color Mode Checks Direction GA091999, Rev 7 , section 8-19-5-11.
use.

8-19-6 Black & White Digital Graphic Printer replacement
8-19-6-1 Manpower
8-19-6-2 Tools
No special tools are required.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date



8-19-6-4 Black & White Digital Graphic Printer removal procedure

Follow these steps to remove the Black & White Digital Graphic Printer:
1.) Disconnect the cables from the back of the printer.

2.) Loosen the printer bracket wing nut that secures the printer.
3.) Slide the printer out.
Figure 8-282 Black & White Digital Graphic Printer
PRINTER BRACKET
WING NUT
8-19-6-5 BW Printer Filler Storage Box removal

If a BW Printer Filler Storage Box is installed, follow these instructions to remove it:
1.) Loosen the printer bracket wing nut that secures the BW Printer Filler Storage Box.
2.) Slide the BW Printer Filler Storage Box out.
8-19-6-6 Black & White Digital Graphic Printer installation procedure

Follow these steps to install the Black & White Digital Graphic Printer:
1.) Slide the printer into the printer bracket until the face is flush with the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
2.) Tighten the printer bracket wing nut to secure the printer in the printer bracket.
3.) Connect the cables to the back of the printer.



SEE SEC-

8-19-7 External Peripherals overview

Please refer to: Section 5-17 "Peripherals overview" on page 5-132.
8-19-8 External USB Storage Drive w/RAID replacement

Please see: Vivid E9 and EchoPAC PC Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard Drive Installation Manual,
Direction Number: EY194147.
8-19-9 USB Flash Card replacement
8-19-9-1 Removing the USB Flash Card

1.) Select Utility > Eject. The Eject device menu is displayed.
2.) Select the USB Flash Card.
3.) The selected media is prepared for ejection.
4.) Remove the USB Flash Card.
8-19-9-2 Installing the USB Flash Card

Plug the USB Flash Card into one of the USB ports on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.

No special tests are needed.

8-19-10 Color Video Printer Replacement
8-19-10-1 Manpower
8-19-10-2 Tools
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
Power down the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
8-19-10-4 Color Video Printer removal

If you are going to move the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 to another location:
1.) Switch off the power on the printer.
2.) Disconnect the USB cable from the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
If you are going to replace the printer:
1.) Switch off the power on the printer.
2.) Disconnect the USB cable from the printer.
3.) Remove the printer.
8-19-10-5 Color Video Printer installation

Preparation
MITSUBISHI color printer CP30DW:

- Set Switch 1 and 2 on the rear side of the printer to ON.
Please refer to the documentation for the printer if you need help to locate the switches.
If you are installing a new printer model, please refer to the Printer Driver Installation Manual,
Direction Number GA294652 revision 3 or higher, for installation and setup instructions.
General installation instructions
1.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and to the USB port on VIVID E9/VIVID E7s Rear Panel.
2.) Connect the power cable to the printer and to the mains power outlet.
3.) Switch on the power on the printer.



use.
SEE SEC-


Section 8-20
Cables replacement
8-20-1 LCD Monitor Cables replacement
See: 8-7-6 "Replacing the LCD Cables" on page 8-131.
8-20-2 Main Cable replacement

See: 8-13-8 "Main Cable replacement" on page 8-301.
8-20-3 OP Cable Kit replacement

See: 8-9-10 "Operator Panel Cable Kit Replacement" on page 8-216.
8-20-4 BEP6 Internal Cables replacement

See:
8-16-13 "BEP Power In Cable replacement" on page 8-398.

8-16-14 "SATA Jumper replacement" on page 8-400.
8-16-15 "Patient I/O Interface Cable replacement" on page 8-401.
8-16-16 "Video Jumper (Flex) replacement" on page 8-403.
8-16-17 "DVI to Samtec Jumper (Flex) replacement" on page 8-404.
8-16-18 "SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MBD replacement" on page 8-406.
8-16-19 "DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil replacement" on page 8-407.
8-16-20 "DVR Audio cable replacement" on page 8-408.
8-16-21 "BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable replacement" on page 8-409.

8-20-5 GFI PCIe Cable replacement

The GFI PCIe Cable connects the GFI Board in the Front End Card Rack (FEP) to the top of the Back
End Processor (BEP).

4.) Remove both the Left Side Cover and the Right Side Cover.
8-20-5-2 Remove the GFI PCIe Cable

Follow these steps to remove the GFI PCIe Cable:
1.) Disconnect the GFI PCIe Cable from the top of the BEP.
2.) Disconnect the GFI PCIe Cable from the GFI board as described in these steps:
a.) On the Front End Card Rack, remove the cover for the GFI PCIe Cable connector.
b.) Unplug the GFI PCIe Cable.
3.) Loosen the GFI PCIe Cable from the cable clip.
4.) Remove the GFI PCIe Cable.
8-20-5-3 Install the GFI PCIe Cable

Follow these steps to install the GFI PCIe Cable:
1.) Route the new GFI PCIe Cable between the top of the BEP and the top of the FEP.
2.) Secure it with the cable clip illustrated in Figure 8-283.
Figure 8-283 GFI PCIe Cable secured with cable clip
1. GFI PCIe Cable secured with cable clip.
3.) Connect the GFI PCIe Cable to the GFI board as described in these steps:
a.) Plug in the GFI PCIe Cable in the connector on the GFI board.
b.) Install the cover for the GFI PCIe Cable.
8 - 444 Section 8-20 - Cables replacement

8-20-5-3 Install the GFI PCIe Cable (contd)

4.) Connect the other end of the GFI PCIe Cable to the connector on top of the BEP.
Ensure that the GFI PCIe Cable is kept out of the drawed box area in Figure 8-284, as there is a
risk that the Z Mechanism damage the cable.
Figure 8-284 Keep cables out of the marked area
1. GFI PCIe Cable (at top of BEP)

2. Keep cables out of the marked area
5.) Install the Left Side Cover and the Right side Cover.


Section 8-21
Verification - Functional Checks
8-21-1 Service Dispatch Debriefing
Use the script at the end of the respective replacement procedure to close the dispatch.
8 - 446 Section 8-21 - Verification - Functional Checks

Chapter 9
Renewal parts
Section 9-1
Overview
This chapter gives you an overview of the available Spare Parts for VIVID E9/VIVID E7. In addition,
upgrade kits and probes that may be used on VIVID E9/VIVID E7, are listed.

9-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-2 Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-3 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-4 Parts list groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-5 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9-6 Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9-7 Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9-8 Top Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9-9 XYZ parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
9-10 Main Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
9-11 Casters (Wheels) parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
9-12 Front End Processor (FEP) Card Rack parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
9-13 Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
9-14 Main Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
9-15 I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
9-16 Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
9-17 Mains Power Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
9-18 Internal Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96
9-19 ECG cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118
9-20 Labels VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120
9-21 Physio TX Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121
9-22 Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-122
9-23 Probe Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-124
9-24 Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126
9-25 Kits - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-133
9-26 Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140
9-27 Packing parts for reshipment of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-154
Chapter 9 - Renewal parts 9-1

Section 9-2
Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back
The Figure below illustrates what is Left, Right, Front and Rear (or Back) of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Figure 9-1 Definition of Left, Right, Front and Back of VIVID E9/VIVID E7
REAR / BACK
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
FRONT
9-2 Section 9-2 - Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back

Section 9-3
List of Abbreviations
Table 9-1 List of Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION
THREE DIMENSIONAL
3D
(SEE RT3D and 4D)
FOUR DIMENSIONAL IS THE SAME AS

4D HDD HARD DISK DRIVE
THREE DIMENSIONAL + REALTIME
ACP AC CONTROLLER (AC POWER) I/O INPUT/OUTPUT
ACT AC TRANSFORMER InSite EXC InSite with Express Connect
ASSY ASSEMBLY INT INTERNAL
BEP BACK END PROCESSOR LCD LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
SEE DESCRIPTION IN:

BEPY1 MBD MOTHERBOARD
5-13-3 "Introduction" on page 5-82.
SEE DESCRIPTION IN:

BEPY2 OP OPERATOR PANEL
SEE DESCRIPTION IN: PERSONAL COMPUTER (Back End

BEPY3 PC
5-13-3 "Introduction" on page 5-82. Processor)
SEE DESCRIPTION IN:

BEP5 PCIe PCI Express
SEE DESCRIPTION IN:

BEP6 PS POWER SUPPLY
CRU CUSTOMER REPLACEABLE UNIT PWA PRINTED WIRE ASSEMBLY
CTRL CONTROL PWR POWER
QUANTITY USED PER VIVID E9/

CW CONTINUOS DOPPLER QTY
VIVID E7
REAL TIME THREE DIMENSIONAL

DMM DIGITAL MULTIMETER RT3D
(Same as 4D)
ECG ELECTRO CARDIO GRAPHY RX RECEIVER
EXT. EXTERNAL TX TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY.

Most places in this manual the name
Main Power Supply is used, since this
FRONT END PROCESSOR, ALSO
FEP TXPS combined power supply delivers both the
CALLED: CARD RACK
high voltages to the transmitter circuits
and the +48 VDC power to the rest of the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
REPLACEMENT PART/SPARE PART Usb Flash Drive.

FRU Y (Yes) means that a part has been Other terms used: USB/Mem stick, USB
FRU Y UFD
set up as a replaceable part so it can be Flash Card, USB Memory Key and USB
ordered by Service. Drive
NOT A SPARE PART

FRU N (No) means that a part is not set
FRU N XFRMR TRANSFORMER
up as a replaceable part, and it CAN NOT
be ordered by Service.

Section 9-4
Parts list groups
Table 9-2 Parts List Groups sheet 1 of 3
TABLE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NUMBER

Table 9-3 VIVID E9 Models and Hardware/Software Compatibility 9-7
Table 9-4 Software on UFD used for XDclear (v113) 9-10
Table 9-5 System Software used for XDclear 9-10
Table 9-6 Application Software used for XDclear 9-11
Table 9-7 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for XDclear 9-11
Table 9-8 System Software used for BT12 9-12
Table 9-9 Application Software used for BT12 9-13
Table 9-10 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT12 9-14
Table 9-11 System Software used for BT11 9-16
Table 9-12 Application Software used for BT11 9-17
Table 9-13 Software Patches used for BT11 9-18
Table 9-14 Miscellaneous Software used for BT11 9-20
Table 9-15 System Software and Application Software used for BT09 9-21
Table 9-16 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT09 9-22
Table 9-17 COVERS - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 9-23
Table 9-18 LCD parts 9-28
Table 9-19 OP-6 parts 9-30
Table 9-23 OP-2 specific parts 9-39
Table 9-24 OP-1 specific parts 9-41
Table 9-25 Top Console PCBs 9-43
Table 9-26 Trackball parts 9-46
Table 9-27 Operator Panel Cable Kit for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9 9-47
Table 9-28 Button Kits and Knobs 9-49
Table 9-30 Other Top Console parts 9-58
Table 9-31 Other Common Top Console parts 9-61
Table 9-32 XYZ parts 9-69
Table 9-33 Main Console parts 9-71
Table 9-34 Casters (Wheels) parts 9-73
Table 9-35 Front End Processor Card Rack parts - BT11 and newer - with 2D 9-75
9-4 Section 9-4 - Parts list groups

Table 9-2 Parts List Groups (contd) sheet 2 of 3

Table 9-36 Front End Processor Card Rack parts - BT11/BT12 9-77
Table 9-37 Front End Processor Card Rack BT09 parts 9-79
Table 9-38 BEP6 Spare Parts 9-81
Table 9-39 BEP5 Spare Parts 9-83
Table 9-40 Main Power Supply 9-86
Table 9-41 I/O Parts 9-87
Table 9-42 DVD drives 9-88
Table 9-43 Printer, B/W, Internal 9-89
Table 9-44 Printer, External - USB 9-89
Table 9-45 Printer, Color, Network 9-90
Table 9-46 Digital Video Stream Recorder 9-92
Table 9-47 USB Flash Drive (UFD) for data storage 9-92
Table 9-48 USB Hard Drive with RAID1 9-93
Table 9-49 USB Hard Drive 2TB with RAID1 9-94
Table 9-50 Mains Power Cables 9-95
Table 9-51 Cable Harness 9-96
Table 9-52 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Top Console cables 9-99
Table 9-53 XYZ Controller cables 9-101
Table 9-54 Main Power Supply cables 9-103
Table 9-55 Front End Processor (FEP) cables 9-104
Table 9-56 BEP6 Internal Cables 9-106
Table 9-57 BEP6 External Cables and Harnesses 9-109
Table 9-58 Back End Processor (BEP) cables 9-112
Table 9-59 Peripherals Cables 9-116
Table 9-60 ECG Cables 9-118
Table 9-61 Vivid E9 Name Labels 9-120
Table 9-62 Vivid E9 Vet Labels 9-120
Table 9-63 Physio TX Parts 9-121
Table 9-64 Supported Phased Array Sector probes 9-122
Table 9-65 Supported Linear & Curved Array (Convex) probes 9-122
Table 9-66 Supported Doppler probes 9-123
Table 9-67 Supported Multiplane Transesophageal Phased Array Probes (PAMPTE) 9-123
Table 9-68 Supported Intra-Operative probe 9-123
Table 9-69 Probe Service Part 9-124
Table 9-70 Other Probe Part 9-125

Table 9-2 Parts List Groups (contd) sheet 3 of 3

Table 9-71 Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - XDclear, application software v113 9-126
Table 9-72 Options - VIVID E9 - BT12, application software v112.x 9-129
Table 9-75 Service kit 9-133
Table 9-76 Upgrade kits 9-138
Table 9-77 Language Kits, Overview 9-139
Table 9-78 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 with XDclear 9-141
Table 9-78 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 with XDclear 9-141
Table 9-80 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 (BT12) 9-144
Table 9-81 Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (BT11) 9-146
Table 9-82 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 (BT09) 9-148
Table 9-83 6VT-D Probe Care Cards 9-150
Table 9-84 6T/6T-RS/6Tc/6Tc-RS/6Tv/9T/9T-RS Probe Care Cards 9-150
Table 9-85 TEE Probes user manuals 9-151
Table 9-86 TEE Probes Accessories user manuals 9-152
Table 9-87 Intraoperative (IO) Probes Users Manuals 9-153
9-6 Section 9-4 - Parts list groups

Section 9-5
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility
9-5-1 VIVID E9 models and hardware/software compatibility

GB200063 or
GB000070
Complete with
MLA16, GB200001
4D TEE BEP6 w/4D
19 inch LCD (100-230V)
and one TX card
with 192 channels
GB000075 Vivid E9 with XDclear 2D 17 inch LCD
(100-230V)
Vivid E9 with XDclear 2D 19 inch LCD GB200062 or

GB000085
(100-230V) GA200804 GB200002
GB000095 Vivid E9 with XDclear Pro configuration

GB200001 v104.3.4
GB200003
BEP5 w/4D v104.3.3
- 17 LCD GB200063 or 2000D
GA200824
MLA16, Nvidia
4D TEE
and one TX card
GA000950 Vivid E9 100-230V 4D Expert Option BEP5 w/4D v104.3.3
v112.0.x or higher v113.x
2000D
GA200890
BEP w/4D Nvidia



GB000040 v113.x
v112.1.0 or higher
GB000050 v113.x
GB200002
GA000945 GA200804
GB200002
v104.3.x v112.0.6 or higher v113.x
BEP6 wo/4D
GA000955 Vivid E9 100-230V 2D
- 19 LCD
GA200900
BEP5 wo/4D
GB200001
v110.1.12
BEP6 w/4D
GA200890 or v104.3.x
GA200800
v110.1.x
GA000810 v113.x
- 17 LCD Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
GA200824 or Nvidia
GB200063
v104.3.x v110.1.12
MLA16,
and GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
Nvidia
GA000815 GA200890 or v113.x
- 19 LCD
GA200800
v104.3.2 v110.1.x
BEP5 w/4D
Nvidia
GA200890 or
GA200800 v104.2.x
v110.0.x
BEP5 w/4D v104.1.x
Nvidia


GB200002
v110.1.12
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
GA200804 or v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
GB200062 v104.1.x
BEP6 wo/4D v104.3.x
GA200900 or
GA200805
v104.2.x
BEP5 wo/4D v110.0.x
v104.1.x
GA200744 v113.x
GA200890,
v104.0.x v108.x.x
5145000-10 NOTE!
BEP5 w/4D Hardware
GA200035
update or box
(console) swap
required.

Section 9-6
Software overview
This section includes overview for the following software:
9-6-2 XDclear Software (Application Software Version 113) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9-6-3 BT12 Software (Application Software Version 112) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9-6-4 BT11 Software (Application Software Version 110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-6-5 BT09 Software (Application software v108.x.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9-6-2 XDclear Software (Application Software Version 113)
9-6-2-1 Software on UFD
Table 9-4 Software on UFD used for XDclear (v113)
PART
ITEM PART NAME NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU
1. The UFD includes:

System software for BEP6
MS Security patches
UFD VE9 & EP SW GB200156 Application Software 1 N N
Printer Driver Software
User Manuals
Service Manual
2. UFD VE9 & EP SW GB200156-01 UFD - Service edition 1 N Y
3. UFD TomTec SW GB200157 TomTec software 1 N N
9-6-2-2 System Software used for XDclear (BT13)
Table 9-5 System Software used for XDclear
PART
1. SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD (GHOST) FOR

VIVID E9 SYSTEM
GB200015 BEP6. 1 N N
SOFTWARE (BEP6)
LATEST SYSTEM SOFTWARE (2013 NOV 20): v104.3.5
2. VIVID E9 System
Software Spare Part GB200015-02 Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.5 for BEP6 1 N Y
(BEP6)
3. VIVID E9 SYSTEM SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD (GHOST)

GA200895 1 N N
SOFTWARE (BEP5) LATEST SYSTEM SOFTWARE (2013 JUNE): v104.3.5
4. VIVID E9 System
Vivid E9 System software (2013 NOV 20): v.104.3.5 for
software Spare Part GA200895-05 1 N Y
BEPY1 (BEP5)
(BEP5)
9 - 10 Section 9-6 - Software overview

9-6-2-3 Application Software used for XDclear (BT13)
Table 9-6 Application Software used for XDclear
PART
1. APPLICATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION CD,

Vivid E9 and EchoPAC LATEST APPLICATION SOFTWARE
GB200066 1 N N
PC Application SW (2013 NOV 20): v113.0.3
The CD is labeled Version 113 Revision 0.3
2. VE9 and EPPC

Application SW - Service GB200066-04 APPLICATION SOFTWARE v113.0.3 1 N Y
Edition
9-6-2-4 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for XDclear (BT13)
Table 9-7 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for XDclear
PART
Software Patches
1. FOR THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION:

v104.3.x
The patches must be installed after the installation of system
software and application software.
This security patch CD includes the following patches:
MS11-006 Vulnerability in Windows Shell Graphics
Processing Could Allow Remote Code Execution.
Vivid E9 and EchoPAC MS11-020 Vulnerability in SMB Server Could Allow Remote
GA200973-03 1 N Y
PC MS Security Patch Code Execution.
MS11-042 Vulnerabilities in Distributed File System could
allow remote code execution
MS11-043 Vulnerabilities in SMB Client Could Allow Remote
Code Execution.
MS12-054 Vulnerabilities in Windows Networking
Components Could Allow Remote Code Execution
(Updated 2013-JNOV.20)
Miscellaneous Software
2. BEP5 BIOS Load CD

Release, GA200725 FOR VIVID E9 - BEP5 1 N Y
version A563E121
3. SET SERIAL NUMBER GA200649-05 Latest version (2013 NOV 20): v1.4. 1 N Y
4. Printer Driver Installer CD.

Latest version per 2013.NOV.20: GA200652-05
PRINTER INSTALLER GA200652-05 1 N Y
For Installation instructions, see: Printer Driver Installation
Manual, Direction Number GA294652 (use the latest revision)
Chapter 9 - Renewal parts 9 - 11

9-6-3 BT12 Software (Application Software Version 112)
9-6-3-1 System Software used for BT12
Table 9-8 System Software used for BT12
PART
1. SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD (GHOST) FOR

VIVID E9 SYSTEM GB200015 BEP6. 1 N Y
SOFTWARE (BEP6)
LATEST SYSTEM SOFTWARE (2013 NOV.20): v104.3.5
2. GB200015-02 Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.5 for BEP6 1 N Y

Vivid E9 System
software Spare Part GB200015-01 1 N Y
Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.4 for BEP6
3. VIVID E9 SYSTEM GA200895 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD (GHOST) 1 N N

SOFTWARE (BEP5) LATEST SYSTEM SOFTWARE (2013 NOV.20): v104.3.5
4. GA200895-05 Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.5 for BEPY1 (BEP5) 1 N Y
Vivid E9 System
software Spare Part
7. GA200895-02 Vivid E9 System SW 104.3.1 for BEPY1 (BEP5) 1 N Y

9-6-3-2 Application Software used for BT12
Table 9-9 Application Software used for BT12
PART

VIVID E9 APPLICATION LATEST APPLICATION SOFTWARE
GA200965 1 N N
SOFTWARE (M4) (2013 NOV.20): v112.1.5
The CD is labeled Version 112 Revision 1.5
2. VIVID E9 APPLICATION APPLICATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION CD (v.112.1.5)

GA200965-14 1 N Y
SOFTWARE v.112.1.5 The CD is labeled Version 112 Revision 1.5

GA200965-13 1 N Y

GA200965-12 1 N Y

GA200965-11 1 N Y

GA200965-10 1 N Y

GA200965-09 1 N Y

GA200965-08 1 N Y

GA200965-07 1 N Y

GA200965-06 1 N Y

9-6-3-3 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT12
Table 9-10 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT12 sheet 1 of 2
PART
1. FOR THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSIONS:

v104.3.x
Code Execution.
GA200973-03 1 N Y
MS11-020 Vulnerability in SMB Server Could Allow Remote
Code Execution.
Code Execution.
MS12-054 Vulnerabilities in Windows networking
components could allow remote code execution.
(Updated 2013.NOV.20)
FOR THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSIONS:

v104.3.x
Vivid E9 and MS11-006 Vulnerability in Windows Shell Graphics
EchoPAC PC Processing Could Allow Remote Code Execution.
MS Security Patch MS11-019 Vulnerabilities in SMB Client Could Allow Remote
GA200973-02 1 N Y
Code Execution.
Code Execution.
Code Execution.
(Updated 2013MAR15)

v104.3.x
GA200973-01 MS11-019 Vulnerabilities in SMB Client Could Allow Remote 1 N Y
Code Execution.
Code Execution.
(Updated 2012MAY04)

Table 9-10 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT12 (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART

Release, GA200725 FOR VIVID E9 - BEP5 1 N Y
version A563E121
3. SET SERIAL NUMBER GA200649-05 Latest version (2013 NOV 20): v1.4. 1 N Y

PRINTER DRIVER Latest version per 2013.NOV.20: v1.0.7.
GA200652-05 1 N Y
INSTALLER For Installation instructions, see: Printer Driver Installation
5. Firmware for Sony

GA200948-01 Updated: 2013 NOV.20. 1 N Y
Optiarc AD-7240S

9-6-4 BT11 Software (Application Software Version 110)
9-6-4-1 System Software used for BT11
Table 9-11 System Software used for BT11
PART
System Software
1. Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.5 for BEP6

GB200015 (Delivered with new VIVID E9s.) 1 N N
VIVID E9 SYSTEM Latest version: (2013 NOV.20): v104.3.5
SOFTWARE
2. GB200015-02 Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.5 for BEP6 service edition 1 N Y
3. GB200015-01 Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.4 for BEP6 service edition 1 N Y
4. SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD (GHOST)

(Delivered with new VIVID E9s.)
GA200895 1 N N
Latest version: (2013 NOV.20): v104.3.5
For use with Application Software v110.1.x

VIVID E9 SYSTEM
SOFTWARE GA200895-04 1 N Y
6. Vivid E9 System software v.104.3.3 for BEPY1 (BEP5)
10. GA200840 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD (GHOST)

(Was delivered with new VIVID E9s.) 1 N N
VIVID E9 SYSTEM
SOFTWARE Latest version: (2011 SEP. 02): v104.2.0
11. GA200840-02 Service Part: VIVID E9 System software v.104.2.0 1 N Y
12. SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD (GHOST)

For use with Application Software v110.x.x)
GA200360 1 N N
(Was delivered with new VIVID E9s.)
Latest version: (2011 SEP.02): v104.0.2
VIVID E9 SYSTEM
SOFTWARE GA200360-01 1 N Y
13. Service Part: Vivid E9 System Software v.104.0.0
14. GA200360-02 Service Part: Vivid E9 System Software v.104.0.1 1 N Y
15. GA200360-03 Service Part: Vivid E9 System Software v.104.0.2 1 N Y

9-6-4-2 Application Software used for BT11
Table 9-12 Application Software used for BT11
PART
Application Software
1. APPLICATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION CD.

GA200956 (Delivered with new VIVID E9/VIVID E7s with GTX192 board.) 1 N N
Latest version (2013 NOV.20): v110.1.13
2. GA200956-11 Service Part: Application software v.110.1.13 1 N Y
3. Service Part: Application software v.110.1.12

GA200956-10 1 N Y
(Supports BEP6)
5. VIVID E9 APPLICATION GA200956-08 Service Part: Application software v.110.1.10 1 N Y

SOFTWARE
6. (M4 and later) GA200956-07 Service Part: Application software v.110.1.8 1 N Y

GA200845 (Was delivered with new VIVID E9/VIVID E7s.) 1 N N
VIVID E9 APPLICATION Latest version: (2011 SEP.02): v110.0.2.
SOFTWARE (M3)

9-6-4-3 Software Patches used for BT11
Table 9-13 Software Patches used for BT11 sheet 1 of 2
PART
Software Patches

v104.3.x
GA200973-03 Code Execution. 1 N Y
Code Execution.
Code Execution.
MS12-054 Vulnerabilities in Windows networking
components could allow remote code execution.
(Updated 2013.NOV.20)

v104.3.x
Vivid E9 and
EchoPAC PC
MS Security Patch MS11-006 Vulnerability in Windows Shell Graphics
GA200973-02 MS11-019 Vulnerabilities in SMB Client Could Allow Remote 1 N Y
Code Execution.
Code Execution.
Code Execution.
(Updated 2012MAY04)

v104.3.x
GA200973-01 MS11-006 Vulnerability in Windows Shell Graphics 1 N Y
Code Execution.
Code Execution. .
(Updated 2012MAY04)

Table 9-13 Software Patches used for BT11 (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART

v104.1.x
v104.2.x
Vivid 7, Vivid E9 and The patches must be installed after the installation of system
EchoPAC PC FC200821-11 software and application software. 1 N Y
MS Security Patch WINDOWS PATCHES INCLUDED:
MS08-067, MS09-001, MS09-22, MS10-007, MS10-020,
KB967715, MS10-046, MS10-054
(Updated 2011SEP.01)

9-6-4-4 Miscellaneous Software used for BT11
Table 9-14 Miscellaneous Software used for BT11
PART

Release, GA200725-01 FOR VIVID E9 - BEP5 1 N Y
version A563E121
2. SET SERIAL NUMBER GA200649-05 Latest version per 2013.NOV.20: v1.4. 1 N Y

Latest version per 2013.NOV.20: v1.0.7.
PRINTER INSTALLER GA200652-05 1 N Y
For Installation instructions, see: Printer Driver Installation
4. Firmware for Sony

GA200948-01 Latest update: 2013.NOV.20. 1 N Y
Optiarc AD-7240S

9-6-5 BT09 Software (Application software v108.x.x)
9-6-5-1 System Software and Application Software used for BT09
Table 9-15 System Software and Application Software used for BT09
PART
System Software
1. System software installation DVD (GHOST).

Vivid E9 System SW Software version v104.3.1 (with XP Service Pack 3)
GA200895-02 1 N Y
104.3.1 Only for use with Application Software v108.1.13.
Updated 2013.11.20.
2. System software installation DVD (GHOST).

Vivid E9 System Software version v104.0.x.
Software v.104.0.x for GA200360 (Was delivered with new VIVID E9s.) 1 N N
BEP Y1 Latest system software version: v104.0.2
Updated 2013 NOV.20.
3. Vivid E9 System
GA200360-03 Service Part: Vivid E9 System Software v.104.0.2 1 N Y
software v.104.0.2
4. Vivid E9 System SW
GA200360-02 Service Part: Vivid E9 System Software v.104.0.1 1 N Y
104.01 BEPY1
Application Software
5. Application software installation CD,

(Was delivered with new VIVID E9s.)
Application software version: v108.1.12 was used on
GA200355 FMI 76114. 1 N N
v108.1.13 introduced for use with XP Service Pack 3
See below for latest patch(es).
(Updated 2013 NOV.20)

VIVID E9
APPLICATION GA200355-09 1 N Y
8. Service Part: Application software v.108.1.11
SOFTWARE

9-6-5-2 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT09
Table 9-16 Software Patches and Miscellaneous Software used for BT09
PART
Software Patches

v104.0.x and v104.2.x
Windows Vulnerability software and application software.
FC200821-11 1 N Y
Patches WINDOWS PATCHES INCLUDED:
MS08-067, MS09-001, MS09-22, MS10-007, MS10-020,
KB967715, MS10-046, MS10-054
(Updated: 2013.NOV.20)
2. Install this patch after application software v108.1.6 has been

Patch for 108.1.6 GA200814-01 1 N N
installed. Updates the VIVID E9 to software v108.1.8.

Release, GA200725-01 FOR VIVID E9 - BEP5 1 N Y
version A563E121
4. SET SERIAL NUMBER GA200649-05 Latest version per 2013.NOV.20: v1.4. 1 N Y

PRINTER DRIVER Latest version per 2013.NOV.20: v1.0.7.
GA200652-05 1 N N
INSTALLER For Installation instructions, see: Printer Driver Installation

Section 9-7
Covers and Bumpers
WARNING Spare Part order for Vivid E9 VET:

The same spare parts used in the current VIVID E9 consoles can be used in the
veterinary consoles.
When ordering any of the following, the Vet label(s) MUST be ordered as they need to
be applied to the new part:
- Side Covers - require label P/N: 5447716
- Back Cover - require label P/N: GB200182
- Probes - require label P/N: 5454608
Figure 9-2 COVERS - VIVID E9/VIVID E7
8 8
5
6 7
10
9
1 4
3
11
Table 9-17 COVERS - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sheet 1 of 5
ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU
1. FRONT COVER
COVER FRONT GA307022 1 N Y
2.
PLATE CONNECTORS W/GUIDE GA307056 1 N Y

Table 9-17 COVERS - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (contd) sheet 2 of 5
3. LEFT SIDE COVER ASSEMBLY
COVER LEFT ASM GA200107 1 N Y
4. RIGHT SIDE COVER ASSEMBLY
COVER RIGHT ASM GA200108 1 N Y
5. TOP COVER
COVER TOP GA307023 1 N Y
6. REAR COVER ASSEMBLY
COVER REAR ASM GA200232 1 N Y
7.
Door I/O PANEL GA307046 1 N Y
8.
CABLE HOOK GA307047 2 N Y
9.
BUMPER REAR GA307008 1 N Y
9 - 24 Section 9-7 - Covers and Bumpers

10. FILTER COVER
COVER FILTER GA307515 1 Y Y
11. FRONT BUMPER FOOTREST
BUMPER FOOTREST ASSY GA200005 1 N Y
12.
HANDLE REAR GA307029 1 N Y
13.
BUMPER LEFT GA307006 1 N Y
14.
BUMPER RIGHT GA307007 1 N Y
15.
COLUMN COVER ASSY GA200359 1 N Y
16.
COVER CABLE MAIN GA307192 1 N Y
17.
HANDLE LEFT TOP, METAL FINISH GA307233 1 N Y

18.
HANDLE RIGHT TOP, METAL FINISH GA307235 1 N Y
19.
BULKHEAD COVER GA307061 1 N Y
20.
BUMPER BOSS Z OUTER

GA307188 1 N Y
(Frogleg Bolt cover, rubber)
21. USED ON UNITS WITHOUT INTERNAL

B/W PRINTER
BW PRINTER FILLER BOX 5309088 1 N Y
22. USED ON UNITS WITHOUT DVR AND /

OR DVD OPTION
STORAGE DRAWER FOR 5 1-4 INCH

DRIVE BAY WHITE DRAWER, METAL 1 or
5267580-3 N Y
HOUSING 2
(DRIVE BAY STORAGE DRAWER)
9 - 26 Section 9-7 - Covers and Bumpers

23.
PRINTER TRAY FOR BEP 6 5174885-2 1 N Y

Section 9-8
Top Console parts
9-8-1 Overview
This section has been divided in the following sub-groups:
9-8-2 LCD Monitor parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

9-8-3 Operator Panel (OP) parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9-8-4 Top Console PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9-8-5 Trackball parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
9-8-6 Operator Panel Cable Kit for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
9-8-7 Button Kits and Knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
9-8-8 Alphanumeric (AN) Keyboard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
9-8-9 Common Top Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
9-8-2 LCD Monitor parts
Table 9-18 LCD parts sheet 1 of 2
17 INCH MONITOR AND PARTS
1. 17 INCH LCD MONITOR

WITH LED BACKLIGHT
LCD MONITOR 17 GB200058 1 N Y
2. 17 INCH LCD MONITOR
LCD MONITOR 17 GA200550 1 N Y
3.
LCD ARM FOR 17 LCD 5199125 1 N Y
9 - 28 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

Table 9-18 LCD parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
19 INCH MONITOR AND PARTS
4. 19 Inch LCD Monitor for VIVID E9
LCD MONITOR 19 5198551 1 N Y
5.
LCD ARM FOR 19 LCD 5183750 1 N Y

9-8-3 Operator Panel (OP) parts
9-8-3-1 OP-6 parts
Table 9-19 OP-6 parts sheet 1 of 2
OPERATOR PANEL UPPER 6
1.
VIVID E9 OPERATOR PANEL UPPER

GB200092 1 N Y
6, LED BACKLIGHT
2. Video Interface cable is included
FRAME W. LED BACKLIGHT LCD 5207000-65 1 N Y

AND TOUCHSCREEN - spare part
3. 2.
LED BACKLIGHT DRIVER 3.

5207000-64 1 N Y
WITH CABLES 1.
1. - LED Backlight Driver Board

2. - Interface Cable to LCD Display
3. - Interface Cable to Main Board
The two interface cables are included.
4. Supporting CMO display (OP Upper

GA200865, GB200091 and GB200092).
INTERFACE CABLE
INCLUDED
5.
6.
HV INVERTER WITH CABLE - ERG

5207000-6 1 N Y
VERSION
ERG BRAND
HV INVERTER

Table 9-19 OP-6 parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
5.
UPPER BEZEL GA200437 1 N Y
This part is compatible with all OP versions.
OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 6
1.
Operator Panel Lower 6 GB200148 1 N Y
2. Enlarged hole for trackball.

For use with Operator Panel, Lower 5 and
Operator Panel, Lower 6
OP LOWER BEZEL 4 GB200152 1 N Y

9-8-3-2 OP-5 parts
1. GB200091
Vivid E9 Operator Panel Upper 5 Use GB200092 as a replacement when 1 N Y
GOING
GB200091 becomes unavailable.
OBSOLETE
2. Supporting CMO display (OP Upper

GA200865, GB200091 and GB200092).
INTERFACE CABLE
INCLUDED
5.
6.
HV INVERTER WITH CABLE
5207000-6 1 N Y
- ERG VERSION
ERG BRAND
HV INVERTER
1.
GB200030
OPERATOR PANEL, LOWER 5 GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
On this OP, the Top Locking Plate including

the Rubber Dust Filtering Ring can be
detached from outer side of the Operator
Panel for cleaning purposes (do not need to
get inside the panel).
This part is backward compatible.
2. Enlarged hole for trackball.

For use with Operator Panel, Lower 5 and
Operator Panel, Lower 6

3. With enlarged hole in bezel for new

trackball.
For OP-5 ONLY:
GB200024
OP Lower Bezel 2. GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
Use GB200152 as replacement when

GB200024 becomes unawailable
4. For OP-5 and OP-6:

On this new trackball, the top locking plate
including the rubber dust filtering ring can
be detached from outer side of the
Operator Panel for cleaning purposes (do
not need to get inside the panel).
The new Laser Trackball Assembly can be
used with old versions of
Operator Panel Upper.
Laser Trackball Assembly. GB200017 1 N Y
Dust Gasket, Rubber Type, for older Lower

Panels with small trackball opening in the
bezel.
(To be used together with the
complete Trackball Assembly,
by just replacing the Dust
Gasket.)

9-8-3-3 OP-4 parts
1.
GA200865
OPERATOR PANEL, UPPER 4 GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
Replaces GA200822, GA200720 and

GA200365
2.
3.
5207000-39
Frame w/LCD and TouchScreen GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
4. Replaces 5207000-40 when it becomes

5207000-50
obsolete.
5.
Main board, Video board, Video Cable,

USB Aux Board 1 N Y
5207000-40
Going OBSOLETE

6. For details, see:

9-8-6 "Operator Panel Cable Kit for
OP Cable Kit 2 5207000-46 1 N Y
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9" on page
9-47.
7.
USB CONNECTOR BOARD 3

for 5207000-41 1 N Y
Upper OP- Panel
8.
GA200953
OPERATOR PANEL, LOWER 4 1 N Y
Going OBSOLETE
Phased out of manufacturing

late October 2012.
Use GB200030 as the replacement.

9-8-3-4 OP-3 parts
1.
GA200822
OPERATOR PANEL, UPPER 3 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
Use GA200865 as the replacement.
2.
3.
GA200439
Frame w/LCD and TouchScreen GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
GA200439 is going obsolete.

When unavailable, order GA200865
(Operator Panel, Upper 4)
4. For kit details, see:

9-8-6 "Operator Panel Cable Kit for
GA200446
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9" on page
OPERATOR PANEL CABLE KIT GOING 1 N Y
9-47.
OBSOLETE
If GA200446 is unavailable, order
5207000-46.

5. Replaces 5207000-40 when it becomes

5207000-50
obsolete.
6.
Main board, Video board, Video Cable,

1 N Y
USB Aux Board
5207000-40
Going OBSOLETE
May be used as a replacement for

5207000-30 on OP-3.
Install with the old video cable on OP-3.
7.
Main Ctrl Bd. w/USB Video Bd. & 5207000-30

1 N Y
Cable Going OBSOLETE
This part is going obsolete.

If unavailable, you may use 5207000-40 as
a replacement, but install with the old video
cable.
8.
GA200717
USB CONNECTOR BOARD 2 GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE.
If unavailable, you may use 5207000-40

and 5207000-41, but install with the old
video cable.

9.
GA200823
OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
Use GA200953 or GB200030 as the
replacement.

9-8-3-5 OP-2 specific parts
Table 9-23 OP-2 specific parts sheet 1 of 2
1.
GA200720
OPERATOR PANEL, UPPER 2 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
2.
This part is compatible with all OP

versions.
3.
Main Controller Board With USB Board GA200718

1 N Y
and Cables 2 OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
Use 5207000-40 as the replacement.
Note: Use the old LCD cable.
4.
GA200717
USB Connector Board 2 1 N Y
Going OBSOLETE

Table 9-23 OP-2 specific parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
5.
GA200755
OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
Use GA200953 or GB200030 as the
replacement.

9-8-3-6 OP 1 specific parts
Table 9-24 OP-1 specific parts sheet 1 of 2
1.
GA200365
OPERATOR PANEL, UPPER 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
2.
3.
GA200394
OBSOLETE
4.

1 N Y
and Cables OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
NOTE! GA200448 is compatible with the
USB Connector Board models,
GA200441 and GA200717.

Table 9-24 OP-1 specific parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
5.
GA200717
USB Connector Board 2 GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE.
NOTE! This board is compatible with

both GA200448 and GA200718.
6.
GA200441
USB Connector Board GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE.
NOTE! This board is only compatible

with GA200442

9-8-4 Top Console PCBs
Table 9-25 Top Console PCBs sheet 1 of 3
PCB FRUs on the Upper OP
1. Main board, Video board, Video Cable, Replaces 5207000-40 when it becomes
5207000-50 1 N Y
USB Aux Board obsolete.
2.
Main board, Video board, Video Cable, 5207000-40

1 N Y
USB Aux Board Going OBSOLETE
For OP-4.
May be used as a replacement for
5207000-30 on OP-3.
Install with the old video cable on OP-3.
3.
USB CONNECTOR BOARD 3

for 5207000-41 1 N Y
Upper OP Panel
4.
Main Ctrl Bd. w/USB Video Bd. & 5207000-30

1 N Y
Cable Going OBSOLETE
For OP-3.
This part is going obsolete.
If unavailable, you may use 5207000-40 as
a replacement, but install with the old video
cable.

Table 9-25 Top Console PCBs (contd) sheet 2 of 3
5.

1 N Y
and Cables 2 OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
6.

1 N Y
and Cables OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE.
NOTE! GA200448 is compatible with the
USB Connector Board models,
GA200441 and GA200717.
7.
GA200717
USB Connector Board 2 1 N Y
Going OBSOLETE
NOTE! This board is compatible with

both GA200448 and GA200718.
8.
GA200441
USB Connector Board GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE.
NOTE! This board is only compatible

with GA200442

Table 9-25 Top Console PCBs (contd) sheet 3 of 3
9.
INTERFACE CABLE
INCLUDED
5.
6.
HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER BOARD

WITH CABLE 5207000-6 1 N Y
(Replaces GA200442)
ERG BRAND
HV INVERTER
10.
GA200442
HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER BOARD
Going 1 N Y
WITH CABLE
OBSOLETE.
PCB FRUs on the Lower OP
11.
Lower Switch Board with Elastomer GA200440 1 N Y
12.
Encoder Board GA200443 1 N Y
13.
Encoder w. Push Button 066E2306 5 N Y
Replaces GA200447.
14.
BUTTON IF BOARD ASSY GA200286 1 N Y

9-8-5 Trackball parts
Table 9-26 Trackball parts
1. For OP-2 and later

Complete Laser Trackball with connector
for USB interface.
Trackball Switch Cable - for connecting
the switches located around the Trackball
to the USB interface.
Screws/washers for fixing the Trackball to
LASER TRACKBALL GA200742 1 N Y
the Lower Operator Panel.
2. For OP-2 and later
Dust Gasket and Fixing Ring for Laser

GA200971 1 N Y
Trackball, Vivid E9.
NOTE! THESE PARTS ARE NOT

COMPATIBLE WITH THE INDUCTIVE
TRACKBALL USED ON OP-1.
3. For OP-1
GA200682 replaces GA200444.
GA200682
INDUCTIVE TRACKBALL 1 N Y
Going OBSOLETE
4. For OP-1
Obsolete. Use GA200682
GA200444
INDUCTIVE TRACKBALL 1 N N
OBSOLETE

9-8-6 Operator Panel Cable Kit for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9
Table 9-27 Operator Panel Cable Kit for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9 sheet 1 of 2
1. Operator Panel Cable Kit for VIVID E9 OP Cable Kit 2 is for use with GA200865
and LOGIQ E9 (Upper OP Panel 4).
5207000-46 OP Cable Kit 2 can also be used for
(OP Cable Kit 2) 1 N Y
GA200822 (Upper OP Panel 3) as a
second choice if GA200446 is
unavailabe.
Trackball USB Cable

For connection between Trackball and
Main Controller Board.
Trackball Switch Cable (First version)

For connecting the switches located
around the Trackball to the USB interface.
Trackball Switch Cable (Second

Version)
For connecting the switches located
around the Trackball to the USB interface.
USB Video Board Flex Cable (New type

- CMO display)
For connection between the USB Video
Board and the LCD Display.
(Connectors in opposite direction).
USB Video Board Flex Cable

(Old type - NEC display)
For connection between the USB Video
Board and the LCD Display.
(Connectors in same direction)
HV Inverter Cable
For connection between the HV Inverter
Board and the Main Controller Board.
Not Used for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Cable tie (2x)

For fixing Trackball USB Cable. (Not Illustrated).

Table 9-27 Operator Panel Cable Kit for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and Logiq E9 (contd) sheet 2 of 2
2.
Trackball USB Cable
For connection
between
Trackball and
Main Controller
Board.
USB Video Board Flex Cable (Old)

For connection
GA200446 between the
OPERATOR PANEL CABLE KIT GOING USB Video Board 1 N Y
OBSOLETE and the LCD
Display.
(Connectors in same direction)
HV Inverter Cable
For connection
between the HV
Inverter Board
and the Main
Controller Board.
3.
CABLE, A/N KEYBOARD, USB & 12V GA200368 1 N Y

9-8-7 Button Kits and Knobs
Table 9-28 Button Kits and Knobs sheet 1 of 7
1.
Button Kit, Danish 066E3230 1 N Y
2.
Button Kit, Dutch 066E3231 1 N Y

Table 9-28 Button Kits and Knobs (contd) sheet 2 of 7
3.
Button Kit, Universal English 066E3221 1 N Y
4.
Button Kit, Finnish 066E3229 1 N Y

5.
Button Kit, French 066E3222 1 N Y
6.
Button Kit, German 066E3223 1 N Y

7.
Button Kit, Spanish 066E3224 1 N Y
8.
Button Kit, Portuguese 066E3225 1 N Y

9.
Button Kit, Italian 066E3226 1 N Y
10.
Button Kit, Swedish 066E3227 1 N Y

11.
Button Kit, Norwegian 066E3228 1 N Y
12. SWITCHES ASSY FOR XY CONTROL
BUTTON FRAME, UI ASSY GA200270 2 N Y
This ASSY includes the following parts:

Up-Down Button Board: GA200285
Button, XY-Break
Button, Z-Lift
Bracket, Buttons
13. Circuit Board without Plastic Front Cover

and Buttons.
UP-DOWN BUTTON BOARD GA200285 2 N Y

14. KNOB KIT FOR OP
Knobs - Encoders and Slidepots GA200445 1 Y Y

9-8-8 Alphanumeric (AN) Keyboard parts
9-8-8-1 AN Keyboard Keysonic KSK-5001 U
Table 9-29 AN Keyboard Keysonic KSK-5001 U sheet 1 of 2
1.
Cable USB Keysonic AN Keyboard GB200064 1 N Y
2.
A/N Keyboard, Universal GB200057-1 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
3.
A/N Keyboard, Danish GB200057-9 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
4.
A/N Keyboard, Dutch GB200057-10 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
5.
A/N Keyboard, French GB200057-2 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
6.
A/N Keyboard, German GB200057-3 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure

Table 9-29 AN Keyboard Keysonic KSK-5001 U (contd) sheet 2 of 2
7.
A/N Keyboard, Spanish GB200057-4 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
8.
A/N Keyboard, Portuguese GB200057-5 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
9.
A/N Keyboard, Italian GB200057-6 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
10.
A/N Keyboard, Swedish GB200057-7 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
11.
A/N Keyboard, Norwegian GB200057-8 1 N Y
Includes Enclosure
12.
NON-MAGNETIC TOUCH LATCH,
080X1424 2 N Y
PR-21P
13.
SPRING AN LATCH GA307643 1 N Y

9-8-8-2 Keyboard - 1st version
Table 9-30 Other Top Console parts sheet 1 of 3
1.
Cable, A/N Keyboard, USB & 12V GA200368 1 N Y
2. The A/N Keyboard Encloser includes

these parts:
- A/N Keyboard Enclosure, Bottom
- A/N Keyboard Enclosure, Top
- Cable GND, A/N keyboard
A/N KEYBOARD ENCLOSURE GA200683 1 N Y
3.
A/N Keyboard, Universal 066E3201 1 N Y
4.
A/N Keyboard, Danish 066E3210 1 N Y
5.
A/N Keyboard, Dutch 066E3211 1 N Y

Table 9-30 Other Top Console parts (contd) sheet 2 of 3
6.
A/N Keyboard, French 066E3202 1 N Y
7.
A/N Keyboard, German 066E3203 1 N Y
8.
A/N Keyboard, Spanish 066E3204 1 N Y
9.
A/N Keyboard, Italian 066E3206 1 N Y
10.
A/N Keyboard, Swedish 066E3207 1 N Y
11.
A/N Keyboard, Norwegian 066E3208 1 N Y
12.
WAGON AN DRAWER SHEET MET.

GA200304 1 N Y
ASSY

Table 9-30 Other Top Console parts (contd) sheet 3 of 3
13.
J-RAIL + LINING
GA200544 2 N Y
(J-RAIL ASSY)
14.
080X1424 2 N Y
PR-21P
15.

9-8-9 Common Top Console parts

The parts listed below can be used on all VIVID E9/VIVID E7 systems.
Table 9-31 Other Common Top Console parts sheet 1 of 8
1.
FRAME UI UPPER ASM GA200392 1 N Y
2.
USB Socket Cover 5207000-54 1 N Y
3. Options holder
LEFT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 5307245 1 N Y
4. Options holder
RIGHT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 5307243 1 N Y
5.
TRAY UNIT ASSEMBLY 5307236 2 N Y

Table 9-31 Other Common Top Console parts (contd) sheet 2 of 8
6.
7.
LCD MOUNT LOCK ASSY GA200302 1 N Y
8. CMO LCD display
5207000-39
Frame w/LCD and TouchScreen GOING
OBSOLETE
1 N Y
9. GA200439 is going obsolete.
GA200439
Frame w/LCD and TouchScreen GOING
OBSOLETE
10. Small hole for trackball.

11. Small hole for trackball.
GA200438
OP LOWER BEZEL GOING 1 N Y
OBSOLETE
Use GB200151 as replacement when

GA200438 becomes unavailable.
12.
GA200743
SPEAKER WITH CABLE 2 N Y
5265030
GA200743 replaces 5265030
13.
Cable, A/N Keyboard, USB & 12V GA200368 1 N Y
14.
CABLE HOOK, TWIN GA307069 2 N Y
15.
PROBEHOLDER INSERT 3D GA307073 1 Y Y
PROBEHOLDER SOFTINSERT
FOR 3D/4D PROBES

16.
PROBEHOLDER INSERT STD GA307072 1 Y Y
PROBEHOLDER INSERT FOR

STANDARD PROBES
17.
PROBEHOLDER SOFTINSERT
GA307074 1 Y Y
DOPPLER
PROBEHOLDER INSERT FOR

DOPPLER (PEDOF) PROBE
18.
GEL CUP GA307239 1 Y Y
19.
SOFT INSERT GEL CUP GA307676 1 Y Y

20. The A/N Keyboard Encloser includes

these parts:
- A/N Keyboard Enclosure, Bottom
- A/N Keyboard Enclosure, Top
- Cable GND, A/N keyboard
A/N KEYBOARD ENCLOSURE GA200683 1 N Y
21.
A/N Keyboard, Universal 066E3201 1 N Y
22.
A/N Keyboard, Danish 066E3210 1 N Y
23.
A/N Keyboard, Dutch 066E3211 1 N Y
24.
A/N Keyboard, French 066E3202 1 N Y

25.
A/N Keyboard, German 066E3203 1 N Y
26.
A/N Keyboard, Spanish 066E3204 1 N Y
27.
A/N Keyboard, Italian 066E3206 1 N Y
28.
A/N Keyboard, Swedish 066E3207 1 N Y
29.
A/N Keyboard, Norwegian 066E3208 1 N Y
30.
WAGON AN DRAWER SHEET MET.

GA200304 1 N Y
ASSY
31.
J-RAIL + LINING
GA200544 2 N Y
(J-RAIL ASSY)

32.
080X1424 2 N Y
PR-21P
33.
34.
FRAME, UI LOWER ASSEMBLY

GA200358 1 N Y
(LOWER FRAME ASSEMBLY)
35. PALM REST + PALM REST PAD 2
PALM REST ASSY GA200605 1 N Y
36.
PALM REST GA307063 1 N Y
PALM REST PAD
37.
Handle, Left Lower GA307234 1 N Y

38.
Handle, Right Lower GA307236 1 N Y
39.
Bulkhead, Plate, Extended GA307059 1 N Y
40.
BRACKET, LOCK HDMI 2 GA307624 1 N Y

Section 9-9
XYZ parts
Table 9-32 XYZ parts sheet 1 of 2
1. FROG LEG
Replaces GA200036
XY MECHANISM GA200946 NOTE! This part requires that either the 1 N Y
XYZ controller, Part Number GA200795 or
Part number GA200994, is installed.
2. FROG LEG
XY MECHANISM GA200036 1 N Y
3.
Z-MECHANISM GA200039 1 N Y
4.
Z-Mech Sub Assy GA200134 1 N Y
5.
DRIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY GA200750 1 N Y
6.
DRIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY GA200177 1 N Y

Table 9-32 XYZ parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
7. Introduced in manufacturing in late 2012.

Will be phased in as Service Part when old
parts become unavailable.
May replace both GA200795 and
GA200644
XYZ Controller Module GA200994 1 N Y
8. Replaces GA200644
XYZ CONTROL ASM GA200795 Can be used with both GA200036 and 1 N Y
GA200946.
9. XYZ CONTROL ASM GA200644 1 N Y
10.
XY BRAKE ASSY GA200952 4 N Y
Replaces GA200535
NOTE! This part requires that the
new XYZ controller, Part Number
GA200795 or GA200994, is installed.
11.
XY BRAKE ASSY GA200535 4 N Y
Can be used with both GA200036 and

GA200946.
12. XY Park Lock
PARK LOCK GA200161 1 N 1
9 - 70 Section 9-9 - XYZ parts

Section 9-10
Main Console parts
Table 9-33 Main Console parts sheet 1 of 2
1. BACK END PROCESSOR PARTS SEE: Section 9-13 "Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts" on page 9-81
2. FRONT END PROCESSOR PARTS SEE: Section 9-12 "Front End Processor (FEP) Card Rack parts" on page 9-75
3. CASTERS SEE: Section 9-11 "Casters (Wheels) parts" on page 9-73
4. COVERS SEE: Section 9-7 "Covers and Bumpers" on page 9-23
5. P8
2 L9 2
P3 P2 P1
1 P6 1 1
1 P5
2
P7
L4 L6
8 8 L8 1
L3
L5 L7
L2 L1
BULKHEAD BOARD ASSY GA200290 MODULE NAME S/N :

1 N Y
1
6
P/N: NNxxxxxx-xx Dev waver :
P4
BAR-CODE
9
5
6. Fan for VE9 cardcage 098A0093 Spare part for VE9 Fan Tray / Fan Drawer 1 N Y
7. Replaces GA200829 and 5141940.

Requires Application Software v110.1.11 or
later, or v112.0 or later.
(Ferrite included)
FAN DRAWER ASSY COMPLETE GB200014 1 N Y
8. GA200829 OBSOLETE
FAN DRAWER INCL FERRITE 1 N Y
OBSOLETE Use GB200014 as the replacement.
9. 5141940 OBSOLETE
FAN TRAY ASSEMBLY 1 N Y
OBSOLETE Use GB200014 as the replacement.

Table 9-33 Main Console parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
10. DUST FILTER WITH HANDLE, LOCATED

AT BOTTOM OF VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
5316340-2 REPLACES GA200828
5316340-2
AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY 1 N Y
DUST FILTER WITH NYLON STIP,

LOCATED AT BOTTOM OF VIVID E9
GA200828 GA200828 REPLACES 5316340
5316340
11.
FILTER DUST REAR GA307351 1 Y Y
12.
CABLE MAIN - Top Console 5272357 1 N Y
9 - 72 Section 9-10 - Main Console parts

Section 9-11
Casters (Wheels) parts
Table 9-34 Casters (Wheels) parts sheet 1 of 2
1. Replacement CAP with snap-on locks
Wheel cap for VE9 casters GA200245

GA307888 8 N Y
and GA200246
2. FRONT CASTERS (FRONT WHEELS)
CASTERS, FRONT W/BRAKE AND

GA200245 2 N Y
LOCK
3. REAR CASTERS (REAR WHEELS)
CASTERS, REAR SVIWEL AND

GA200246 2 N Y
BRAKE
4.
PEDAL MECHANISM ASSEMBLY GA200070 1 N Y
5.
PEDAL BRAKE GA307052 1 N Y

Table 9-34 Casters (Wheels) parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
6.
PEDAL RELEASE GA307053 1 N Y
7.
PEDAL DIR LOCK GA307054 1 N Y
9 - 74 Section 9-11 - Casters (Wheels) parts

Section 9-12
Front End Processor (FEP) Card Rack parts
9-12-1 Front End Processor Card Rack - BT11/BT12 and XDclear with 2D
NOTE: For use in VIVID E9 with Part Number GA000830, GA000835, GA000945, GA000955,
GB000075, GB000085, GB000090 and GB000095.
NOTE: For use in VIVID E7 with Part Number: GB000099 and GB000100.
Table 9-35 Front End Processor Card Rack parts - BT11 and newer - with 2D sheet 1 of 2
1. VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Card Rack
VE9 CARDRACK WITH BACKPLANE GA200813 1 N Y
2. Can be used on VIVID E9 with serial

numbers higher than S/N: 400, or with
GRLY v2 GA200695 1 N Y
Back Plane (BP), P/N: GA200685,
installed.
3. NOTE! This board will be phased into

production and phased in as a Service Part
when GA200300 becomes unavailable.
GRX64 GB200025 1 N Y
RECEIVER BOARD, 64 CHANNELS,
WITHOUT ANALOG DOPPLER
Requires software v110.1.12 or higher.
4. RECEIVER BOARD, 64 CHANNELS,

GRX64 GA200300 1 N Y

GRX128 WITH CW GB200020 1 N Y
WITH ANALOG DOPPLER

GRX128 WITH CW GA200105 1 N Y
WITH ANALOG DOPPLER
7. TRANSMITTER BOARD, 192 CHANNELS

GTX-TLP192 GA200726 REQUIRES: 1 N Y
FRONT PLANE P/N: GA200760
8. GTX - TLP 3.0 GA200625 TRANSMITTER BOARD, 64 CHANNELS 3 N Y
9. USE TOGETHER WITH GTX-TLP192,

P/N: GA200726
FRONT PLANE GA200760 2 N Y
(USED IN BOTH UPPER AND LOWER
POSITION)

Table 9-35 Front End Processor Card Rack parts - BT11 and newer - with 2D (contd) sheet 2
10. FRONTPLANE
USED IN BOTH UPPER AND LOWER
FRONT PLANE / XD BUS 5201002 2 N Y
POSITION. THE MARKING ON THE
CARD IS FOR AN EARLIER DESIGN.
11. DIGITAL RECEIVER BOARD 4 MLA

DRX6 BOARD MLA4 VERSION 5301040-6 Backward compatible. 3 N Y
(Introduced MAY 2013)

DRX5 BOARD MLA4 VERSION 5301040-5 DO NOT MIX WITH 5301040-4 3 N Y
(Introduced AUG 2010)

DO NOT MIX WITH 5301040-5
DRX3 BOARD MLA4 VERSION 5301040-4 3 N Y
(Used on units produced before the
introduction of the 5301040-5.)
14. GFI 2 5161631 RADIO FREQURENCY INTERFACE 1 N Y
9 - 76 Section 9-12 - Front End Processor (FEP) Card Rack parts

9-12-2 Front End Processor Card Rack - BT11/BT12 and XDclear with 4D Expert
Option
NOTE: For use in VIVID E9 with Part Number GA000810, GA000815, GA000940, GA000950,
GB000070 and GB000080.
Table 9-36 Front End Processor Card Rack parts - BT11/BT12
1. Backwards compatible.

GRLY v2 GA200695 numbers higher than S/N: 400, or with 1 N Y
Back Plane (BP), P/N: GA200685,
installed.

GRX64 GB200025 1 N Y

GRX64 GA200300 1 N Y

GRX128 WITH CW GB200020 1 N Y
WITH ANALOG DOPPLER

WITH ANALOG DOPPLER
7. TRANSMITTER BOARD, 192 CHANNELS

GTX-TLP192 GA200726 1 N Y
Requires Front Plane P/N: GA200760
9. USE TOGETHER WITH GTX-TLP192,

P/N: GA200726
FRONT PLANE GA200760 2 N Y
(USED IN BOTH UPPER AND LOWER
POSITION)
10. FRONTPLANE

Table 9-36 Front End Processor Card Rack parts - BT11/BT12

DRX6 MLA16 5301160-6 Replaces 5301160-5 3 N Y
12. DRX5 MLA16 5301160-5 DIGITAL RECEIVER BOARD 16 MLA 3 N Y

9-12-3 Front End Processor Card Rack - BT09

NOTE: For use in VIVID E9 with Part Number GA000100
Table 9-37 Front End Processor Card Rack BT09 parts
1. Backwards compatible. BT09 need new

software version V108.1.6.
Replaces GA200670.

numbers higher than S/N: 400, or with Back
GA200695 Plane (BP), P/N: GA200685, installed. Y
BT09 Need new SW (released V108.1.6)
GECKO RELAY BOARD (GRLY) Replacement for GA200630 1 N
RELAY BOARD
GA200714 Y
Replacement for GA200630
GA200630 RELAY BOARD Y
3. NOTE! This board will be phased in as a

Service Part when GA200300 becomes
unavailable.
GRX64 GB200025 RECEIVER BOARD, 64 CHANNELS, 1 N Y
Requires a software update to v110.1.12 or
higher.

GRX64 GA200300 1 N Y
5. NOTE! This board will be phased in as a

Service Part when GA200105 becomes
unavailable.
GRX128 WITH CW GB200020 RECEIVER BOARD, 128 CHANNELS, 1 N Y
WITH ANALOG DOPPLER
Requires a software update to v110.1.12 or
higher.

WITH ANALOG DOPPLER
8. FRONTPLANE

Table 9-37 Front End Processor Card Rack BT09 parts

Backwards compatible.
DRX6 MLA16 5301160-6 3 N Y
Replaces 5301160-5

Backwards compatible.
DRX5 MLA16 5301160-5 3 N Y
Requires software V108.1.8 or later.
Replaces 5301160-4.
11. DRX3 WITH NEW POWER SUPPLY DIGITAL RECEIVER BOARD 16 MLA
5301160-3 Y
MODULES FOR MLA16 Supports all software versions.

Section 9-13
Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts
There are two main families of BEPs used on the VIVID E9; BEP5 and BEP6.
BEP6 was phased into manufacturing late 2012, for use in BT11 and BT12 systems and is also used
for Vivid E9/Vivid E7 with XDclear.

9-13-2 BEP6 Spare Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
9-13-3 BEP5 Spare Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
9-13-2 BEP6 Spare Parts
Table 9-38 BEP6 Spare Parts sheet 1 of 2
1. BACK END PROCESSOR - BEP6

(without 4D)
BEP6.0 WITHOUT 4D GB200002-03 1 N Y
System software requirement: v104.3.4
(or higher)
2.
BEP6.0 SIDE IO BOARD ASSEMBLY 5433408-1 1 N Y
3.
BEP 6.0 POWER BOARD ASSEMBLY 5433408-20 1 N Y
4.
BEP6.0 FRONTIO ASSEMBLY

5433408-41 1 N Y
WITHOUT USB PORTS
5.
BEP6.X HDD ASSEMBLY - SPARE
5433408-50 1 N Y
PART (Including brackets)

Table 9-38 BEP6 Spare Parts (contd) sheet 2 of 2
6.
1
Fan Bottom Advantech 5433408-70 2 N Y
1 - FOUR (4x) MOUNTS INCLUDED
7. NVIDIA QUADRO 410
Graphics Adapter for BEP6.0 with 4D 066E0362 1 N Y
Used on VIVID E9s with BEP6 and 4D.
8.
BEP6.X Video By-Pass Board 5433408-90 1 N Y
9. "Intel HD Graphics" and "Intel

N/A Included on the BEP6s Motherboard 1 N N
Graphics Media Accelerator". - BEP6
10. OPTION
Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board 5135840 1 N Y
May be used with all BEPs
11. All BEP6 cables See Section 9-18-7-2 "BEP6 cables" on page 9-105
9 - 82 Section 9-13 - Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts

9-13-3 BEP5 Spare Parts
Table 9-39 BEP5 Spare Parts sheet 1 of 3
1. BACK END PROCESSOR

BEP without 4D - 2 GA200900 Software requirement: v110.0.0 and higher 1 N Y
Replaces GA200805

BEP without 4D GA200805 Used on BT11 VIVID E9s with 2D 1 N Y
Software requirement: v110.0.0 and higher

BEP COMPLETE 5145000-10 Used on BT09 VIVID E9s 1 N Y
Software requirement: v108.0.0 and higher
4. NVIDIA Quadro 2000D
066E0361
Used on VIVID E9/VIVID E7s with 4D.

System Software requirement:
v104.3.3 or higher.
GRAPHICS ADAPTER 1 N Y
This card will be phased in as a
replacement for 066E0360, when
066E0360 goes obsolete.
NVIDIA Quadro FX 1800 Graphics Adapter

Used on VIVID E9s with 4D as
replacement for 066E0339.
066E0360
5. PROLINK ADD card for PCI Express

5323903 Used on VIVID E9 systems with 2D 1 N Y
16X for ATX
6. BEP5 BIOS Load CD Release,

GA200725 FOR VIVID E9 - BEP5 1 N Y
version A563E121
7. Hard Disk Drive for BEP5

SATA, 250GB.
Seagate ST250DM0000 250GB HDD 5215286-3 For ALL BEP5. 1 N Y
Replaces 5215286-2 when it becomes
unavailable.
8. Hard Disk Drive for BEP5

SATA, 160GB
SERIAL HARD DRIVE 5215286-2 1 N Y
For 5145000-10, GA200800 and
GA200805.

9. I/O ASSEMBLY
For use with: GA200890, GA200900 and
GB200003.
Yggdrasil BEP IO Assembly 2 GA200878 1 N Y
10. I/O ASSEMBLY

For 5145000-10, GA200800 and
GA200805.
Yggdrasil BEP IO Assembly 5321212 1 N Y
11. Yggdrasil BEP Cover with Gaskets GA200897 For GA200890, GA200900 and GB200003 1 N Y
12. For 5145000-10, GA200800 and

YGGDRASIL BEP COVER 5266155 1 N Y
GA200805.
13. BEP FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY

GA200873 For GA200890, GA200900 and GB200003 1 N Y
WITHOUT USB, YGG
14. BEP FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY For 5145000-10, GA200800 and

5301222-3 1 N Y
WITHOUT USB, FREY GA200805.
15. RJ-45 Coupler and Flange Category 6 5176472-2 For all BEPs 1 N Y
16. BEP Power Supply, Vivid E9 GA200876 For GA200890, GA200900 and GB200003 1 N Y
17. GE CUSTOM POWER SUPPLY For 5145000-10, GA200800 and

5393800-2 1 N Y
BOARD GA200805.
18. OPTION
Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board 5135840 1 N Y
May be used on all BEPs
19.
BEP Fan 5198607 1 N Y
For all BEPs
9 - 84 Section 9-13 - Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts

20.
SHOCK MOUNT - HARD DRIVE 5267412 1 N Y
For all BEPs
21.
DVI FLEX, MAIN, YGGDRASIL BEP 5197216 1 N Y
For all BEPs
22. BEP CMOS Battery (BIOS BATTERY) 2404028-7 1 N Y
23. All BEP cables See Section 9-18-7 "Back End Processor (BEP) cables" on page 9-105

Section 9-14
Main Power Supply
Table 9-40 Main Power Supply
1. Main power supply Vivid E9 GA200730-03 Replaces GA200730 1 N Y
2. Replaces GA200004
Vivid E9 Main Power Supply GA200730 Note! A 2-minute wait might be necessary 1 N Y
for a certain restart
3. MAIN PS - FOR CARDIAC
POWER LV SUPPLY GA200004 1 N Y
9 - 86 Section 9-14 - Main Power Supply

Section 9-15
I/O modules
Table 9-41 I/O Parts
1. Replaces GA200240.
PATIENT IO GB200010 Patient IO with improved insulation of 1 N Y
Patient IO cover.
2. PATIENT IO GA200240 PATIENT IN/OUT 1 N Y
3. I/O ASSEMBLY
BEP6.0 SIDE IO BOARD ASSEMBLY 5433408-1 1 N Y
For: GB200001 and GB200002.
4. I/O ASSEMBLY
BEP I/O BOARD GA200878 1 N Y
For GA200890, GA200900 and GB200003.
5. I/O ASSEMBLY
BEP I/O BOARD 5321212 1 N Y
For GA200800 and GA200805.

Section 9-16
Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
9-16-1 Overview
The peripherals listed in this section have been approved by GE Vingmed Ultrasound for use with
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
Contents in this section:
9-16-2 Peripherals Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-88

9-16-3 DVD drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
9-16-4 Printer, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
9-16-5 Printers, External - USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
9-16-6 Printers, Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
9-16-7 Digital Video Stream Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
9-16-8 USB Flash Drive (UFD) for data storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
9-16-9 USB Hard Drive with RAID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
9-16-10 USB Hard Drive 2TB with RAID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
9-16-2 Peripherals Compatibility

All listed Peripherals can be used with all VIVID E9/VIVID E7 if no restrictions are included.
9-16-3 DVD drives
Table 9-42 DVD drives
PART
1. 1
DVD Drive SATA
066E8899 To replace 066E0854 and 066E0855 or N Y
DVD Multi Writer LG GH24NS95 2
2. 066E0855 1
DVD Drive SATA Sony Optiarc
Going Replaces 066E0854 or N Y
AD-7280S-0B 2
OBSOLETE
3. 1
DVD Drive SATA Sony Optiarc AD-7260S 066E0854 Replaces 066E0850 (VIVID E9) or N N
2
4. 1
DVD Drive SATA Sony Optiarc 066E0850 Replaces 066E0700 (VIVID E9) or N N
AD-7240S-0B
2
5. 1
DVD Drive SATA LG GH20NS15 066E0700 (VIVID E9) or N N
2
6.
DVD Interface Board 5301204 1 N Y
9 - 88 Section 9-16 - Peripherals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7

9-16-4 Printer, Internal
Table 9-43 Printer, B/W, Internal
PART
1. GA100980/
B & W PRINTER MITSUBISHI Digital Monochrome Printer P95DE 1 N Y
066E2961
2. SONY UP-D897SYN
DIGITAL GRAPHIC B/W PRINTER - USB
FC100942/
B & W PRINTER 1 N Y
066E0111
3. VIDEO PAPER UPP110HD BOX OF 10 CAT#

1 N N
ROLLS E14731GE
9-16-5 Printers, External - USB
Table 9-44 Printer, External - USB sheet 1 of 2
PART
1. Kit with printer, USB cable, mains power cable for

Mitsubishi Digital Color Printer CP30D for Japan, printer driver software and installation
GA100986 1 N N
Vivid E9 to Japan manual for printer drivers.
For Japan
2. Spare Part (printer)

Mitsubishi Digital Color Printer CP30D 066E2963 1 Y Y
For Japan
3. Kit with printer, USB cable, mains power cables

Mitsubishi Digital Color Printer (several types), printer driver software and
GA100987 1 N N
CP30DW-Z for Vivid E9 installation manual for printer drivers.
All other countries (Not for Japan)
4. Mitsubishi Digital Color Printer Spare Part (printer)

066E2964 1 Y Y
CP30DW-Z All other countries (Not for Japan)
5. SONY UP-D25MD
Color Video Printer UP-D25MD for Vivid E GA100964 DIGITAL GRAPHIC COLOR PRINTER - USB,
1 Y Y
products 066E2956 EXTERNAL
(REPLACES SONY UP-D23MD)
6. GA100677 SONY UP-D23MD

COLOR VIDEO PRINTER UP-D23MD DIGITAL GRAPHIC COLOR PRINTER - USB,
066E2958 1 Y Y
FOR VIVID E PRODUCTS EXTERNAL
OBSOLETE
(OBSOLETE FROM FACTORY)
7. CABLE, POWER 1XX VAC 070C3561
8. MAINS CABLE 3P HP PN DM293A

070C1502 1 Y Y
#ABJ,JAP
9. MAINS CABLE 3P HP PN DM293A

070C1501
#AB2 CHI

Table 9-44 Printer, External - USB (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART
10. CAT#
COLOR PAPER UPC21L SONY COLOR PAPER, LARGE A6 1 N N
E70151SA
9-16-6 Printers, Network
Table 9-45 Printer, Color, Network sheet 1 of 2
PART
1. Replaced by:
066E3023 HP Color Printer (230V) /
066E3024 HP Color Printer (115V)
EY100153 GA200652-02 Printer installer v.1.0.7
COLOR PRINTER HP OFFICEJET PRO OBSOLETE
8000 100-240V
1 N Y
066E0427
SPARE PART:
OBSOLETE
Color Printer HP Officejet Pro 8000 100-240V

CB092A
2.
HP Laser Jet Pro 400 color M451:

HP Color Printer 230V 066E3023 1 N Y
HP Color Printer 115V 066E3024
Printer Driver included on:

GA200652-02 Printer installer v.1.0.7
3. HP COLOR LASERJET CP2025n Printer Replaced by:

220-240V 066E0428 066E3023 HP Color Printer (230V) /
OBSOLETE 066E3024 HP Color Printer (115V)
SPARE PART: GA200652-02 Printer installer v.1.0.7
4.
EY100148 1 N Y
HP COLOR LASERJET CP2025n Printer
OBSOLETE
100-127V
066E0429
SPARE PART:
OBSOLETE

Table 9-45 Printer, Color, Network (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART
5. Replaced by:
066E3023 HP Color Printer (230V)
EQ100158 066E3024 HP Color Printer (115V)
HP OFFICEJET PRO K5400 KIT OBSOLETE
1 Y Y
SPARE PART:
066E0426
HP OfficeJet Pro K5400dn
OBSOLETE
6. Replaced by:
COLOR LASER PRINTER 100-127 VAC, 066E0418 066E3023 HP Color Printer (230V) /
Y
ASSEMBLY OBSOLETE 066E3024 HP Color Printer (115V)
-SPARE PART: GA200652-02 Printer installer v.1.0.7
7.
1 Y
COLOR LASER PRINTER 220-240 VAC, EP100912/
ASSEMBLY FD100237
Y
-SPARE PART: 066E0419
OBSOLETE

9-16-7 Digital Video Stream Recorder
Table 9-46 Digital Video Stream Recorder
PART
1. Plug-in board for BEP5 and BEP6 + DVD Recorder

Digital Video Stream Recorder (OPTION) GB200048 + Cables 1 N Y
(Replaces GA200859)
2. Plug-in board for the BEP5 + DVD Recorder

Digital Video Stream Recorder (OPTION) GA200859 1 N Y
(Replaces GA200614)
3. Digital Video Stream Recorder (OPTION) GA200614 Plug-in board for the BEP5 + DVD Recorder 1 N Y
4. DVD Assembly for Vivid E9 GA200618 DVD drive + bracket (part of GA200614) 1 N Y
5. See: Section 9-13 "Back End Processor (BEP) Spare Parts" on page 9-81.
DVR Board
Digital Video Disc Recorder - Board is installed in BEP
6. Cable - DVD Power, FREY Cable K, See: 9-18-7 "Back End Processor (BEP) cables" on page 9-105
9-16-8 USB Flash Drive (UFD) for data storage
Table 9-47 USB Flash Drive (UFD) for data storage
Part
ITEM Part Name Number Description QTY CRU FRU
1 USB Memory Key 8GB 066E0753 Kingston DataTraveler 410 1 Y Y
2 USB Memory Key 4GB 066E0754 SanDisk Cruzer Slice 1 Y Y
USB FLASH CARD (USB Flash Drive 2 GB USB

2.0) (OBSOLETE)
USB Flash Drive 2 GB (USB 2.0)
066E0751 Replaced:
The following model have been approved
3 - Kingston DataTraveler Elite 256 MB 1 Y Y
for use with VIVID E9: OBSOLETE
- USB Memory Key 2GB (Transcend) - Sandisk Cruzer Micro 256 MB
- Twin MOS K24-256MB Mobile Disk III
- JMTek

9-16-9 USB Hard Drive with RAID1
Table 9-48 USB Hard Drive with RAID1
Part
1.
External USB HD with RAID1 data

EY100452 1 N N
protection mirrored hard disk
2.
USB Hard Drive ICY BOX with RAID1 066E0856 1 N Y

For installation instructions, see:
EchoPAC PC and Vivid E9 Installation Manual for
ICY BOX Desktop Hard Drive,
Direction Number EY194452.
3. Hard Drive 3,5 inches 2TB SATA for ICY

066E0857 Spare HDD 2 N Y
BOX

9-16-10 USB Hard Drive 2TB with RAID1

NOTE: This Hard Drive is obsolete. It has been replaced by the ICY BOX with RAID1, 9-16-9 "USB
Hard Drive with RAID1" on page 9-93.
Table 9-49 USB Hard Drive 2TB with RAID1
Part
1.
External USB hard disk with RAID1 data EY100147

1 N N
protection mirrored hard disk. OBSOLETE
2.
EY100147 is the complete unit, with installation
manual and BIOS software for Vivid E9.
USB Hard Drive 2TB with RAID1 NDUR- 066E0661 066E0661 is the complete unit, without 1 N Y
2T-K OBSOLETE installation manual and BIOS software.
For more information, see: Iomega Ultramax
Desktop Hard Drive Installation Manual, Direction
Number: EY194147
3. 3.5 inch 1 TBytes SATA HDD

This is one of the 1TB hard disk drives installed
Hard Drive 3,5 inch 1TB SATA for inside the cabinet.
066E0662 2 N Y
IOMEGA NDUR-1T-HD For more information, see: Iomega Ultramax
Desktop Hard Drive Installation Manual, Direction
Number: EY194147

Section 9-17
Mains Power Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Table 9-50 Mains Power Cables
PART
1. 5148381-5
MAINS POWER CABLE - CHINA 1 Y N
H4000ZC
2. MAINS POWER CABLE - EUROPE 5148381-3

1 Y N
(CONTINENTAL EU POWER CORD) H4000ZB
3.
MAINS POWER CABLE - UK/ 5148381-4
IRELAND 1 Y N
H4000ZD
(UK/IRELAND POWER CORD)
4. 5148381-2
MAINS POWER CABLE - JAPAN 1 Y N
H4000ZK
5. MAINS POWER CABLE - NORTH 5148381

1 Y N
AMERICA H4000ZA
6. 5323129 replaces 5148381-6

5323129
MAINS POWER CABLE - AUSTRALIA 5148381-6 1 Y N
H4000ZG
7.
MAINS POWER CABLE - 5148381-7
1 Y N
SWITZERLAND H4000ZL
8.
5148381-8
MAINS POWER CABLE - DENMARK 1 Y N
H4000ZE
9. 5323275/
MAINS POWER CABLE -
5148381-9 1 Y N
ARGENTINA
H4000ZH
10. 5322309/
MAINS POWER CABLE - ISRAEL 5148381-10 1 Y N
H4000ZJ
11.
5323270/
MAINS POWER CABLE - INDIA
5148381-11 1 Y N
(CA-NET NETZKABEL INDIEN)
H4000ZF
12. MAINS POWER CABLE - BRAZIL

(CA-NET NETZKABEL BRASILIEN KTZ280186 1 Y Y
20A, 3M )

Section 9-18
Internal Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7
9-18-2 "Cable Harness" on page 9-96
9-18-3 "Top Console Cables" on page 9-99
9-18-4 "XYZ Controller cables" on page 9-101
9-18-5 "Main Power Supply cables" on page 9-103
9-18-6 "Front End Processor (FEP) cables" on page 9-104
9-18-7 "Back End Processor (BEP) cables" on page 9-105
9-18-8 "Peripherals Cables" on page 9-116
9-18-2 Cable Harness
Table 9-51 Cable Harness sheet 1 of 3
1. CABLE HARNESS UPDATED WITH

GA200075 1 N Y
NEW DVD SOLUTION
CONTENT IN GA200075
2. CABLE T (XYZ CONTROLLER - LOCK

MOTOR)
CABLE, XY-LOCK GA200225 1 N Y
3. CABLE I (J1 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY -

XYZ CONTROLLER)
(The upper version of the cable was
introduced 2011.)
CABLE POWER-CONTROLLER-BEP
GA200715 1 N Y
FOR VIVID E9/VIVID E7
GA200715 replaces GA200291
9 - 96 Section 9-18 - Internal Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Table 9-51 Cable Harness (contd) sheet 2 of 3
4. CABLE P (J33 - SUBWOOFER)
CABLE, SUB WOOFER GA200333 1 N Y
5. CABLE-PCI EXPRESS ON HDMI,

5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE (GFI to BEP-J5) 1 N Y
BEP-CARDRACK, FREY
6. CABLE - BEP TO BACKPLANE, FREY 5194491 CABLE N 1 N Y
7. CABLE - USB, BEP TO MAIN

5194492 CABLE H (J4 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY) 1 N Y
SUPPLY, FREY
8. CABLE - USB, BEP TO BW PRINTER,

5194492-2 1 N Y
FREY
9. Cable - USB BEP to XYZ MOTOR

5194492-5 1 N Y
CONTROLLER
10. CABLE - AC POWER BW PRINTER, CABLE R (MAIN POWER SUPPLY - BW

5194493 1 N Y
FREY PRINTER)
11. CABLE K (J30 - DVD 1 or DVD 2)
CABLE - DVD POWER FULLY

5266407 2 N Y
SHIELDED
12. CABLE M (J2 - DVD 1 or DVD 2)
CABLE - DVD eSATA FULLY

5270048 2 N Y
SHIELDED

Table 9-51 Cable Harness (contd) sheet 3 of 3
13. CABLE D, FROGLEG CABLE

DVI VIDEO (BEP > OP PANEL)
48V POWER/USB6 (BEP > OP PANEL)
AUDIO/ON/OFF/USB5 (BEP > OP
PANEL)
UP/DOWN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES
(OP PANEL > MOTOR/BRAKE CONTROL)
MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY, FREY 5272357 1 N Y

9-18-3 Top Console Cables

Figure 9-3 Top Console
0$,1/&'',63/$<
: :
9 +9,19
9,'(2 )/$7
&17/ 6&5((1
) (
56
86% 86%WR
56
9 9
'&'&
&21752//(5%2$5' -
0(025<67,&.
*(/:$50(5 -
0,&523+21(
237,21$/ 5
-
%8/.+($'
9 75$&.%$//
%2$5' -
7(03 -
3 3 3
&21752/ 86%
86%
- 86%
+8%
3 -
86% -
3
$8',2
86% .(<%2$5'
3 9 9 9
9 9 9
9
:,5(/(66 3 9
3 5(* X3 -
; 21
9
2)) 728&+
9
/
+9,19
86%
9,'(2 /&' 6:,7&+
%2$5'
%8/.+($' %87721,)
3/$7( 9
233$1(/ 83'1/2&.
5(/($6(
%877216
9
D
8 8
Table 9-52 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Top Console cables sheet 1 of 2
1.
Cable USB Keysonic AN Keyboard GB200064 1 N Y
2. J18 - KEYBOARD. USB and 12V
CABLE AN KEYBOARD, USB & 12V GA200368 1 N Y
3.
TRACKBALL
USB CABLE
GA200446
OPERATOR PANEL CABLE KIT GOING USB VIDEO 1 N Y
OBSOLETE BOARD
FLEX CABLE
HV
INVERTER
CABLE

Table 9-52 VIVID E9/VIVID E7 Top Console cables sheet 2 of 2 (contd)
4. CABLE D, FROGLEG CABLE

DVI VIDEO (BEP > OP PANEL)
48V POWER/USB6 (BEP > OP PANEL)
AUDIO/ON/OFF/USB5 (BEP > OP
PANEL)
UP/DOWN/BRAKE/RELEASE
SWITCHES
(OP PANEL > MOTOR/BRAKE
CONTROL)
CABLE MAIN 5272357 1 N Y
5. For mechanically securing the monitor

HDMI cable and the monitor Power/USB
cable to the rear side of the UI bulkhead.
BRACKET, LOCK BULKHEAD

GA307978 1 N Y
CONNECTORS
6. TO FIX THE LCD HDMI CONNECTOR TO

THE BULKHEAD BACKSIDE.
BRACKET, LOCK HDMI 2 GA307624 1 N Y
7. CABLE G
CABLE, USB OP-BULKHEAD 5248610 USB (short cable inside the UI) 2 N Y
(J24 - P7), (J25 - P8)
8. CABLE U
UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
CABLE, XYZ UP/DOWN GA200311 2 N Y
9. LCD Monitor Arm Cable Kit GA200668 - Powerd_USB_cable_frey 1 N Y

- L9 19 LCD Video Cable
10. Powerd_USB_cable_frey 5196890 1 N Y
11. L9 19 LCD Video Cable 5256600 1 N Y

9-18-4 XYZ Controller cables
Figure 9-4 XYZ Controller cables
UP / DOWN / BRAKE / RELEASE

D3 SWITCHES (ON TOP CONSOLE)
B C
XYZ CONTROLLER
L I
+48 VDC FROM MAINS POWER SUPPLY

FROM BEP
Table 9-53 XYZ Controller cables sheet 1 of 2
1. CABLE B
BRAKE CONTROL LEFT / RIGHT GA200335 (XYZ CONTROLLER - INNER FROG 2 N Y
BRAKES)
2. CABLE C (INNER BRAKE - OUTER

BRAKE)
BRAKE ARM LEFT RIGHT - CABLE GA200334 2 N Y
3. MAIN CABLE - XYZ SWITCH SEE MAIN CABLE [PART OF MAIN CABLE]
CABLE D3 (XYZ CONTROLLER - OP 1 N N
SIGNALS
PANEL)

Table 9-53 XYZ Controller cables sheet 2 of 2 (contd)
4. CABLE I (J1 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY -

XYZ CONTROLLER)
POWER CABLE - BEP 48V GA200291 1 N Y
5. CABLE L, USB CABLE (J28 - XYZ

CABLE USB A-B HIGH SPEED 5194492-2 1 N Y
CONTROLLER)
6. CABLE T (XYZ CONTROLLER - LOCK

MOTOR)
XY LOCK GA200225 1 N Y

9-18-5 Main Power Supply cables
Figure 9-5 Main Power Supply cables
0$,132:(56833/<
MAINS POWER CABLE
32:(5
)$&725
R &255(&7,21
72
35,17(56 ,62/$7,21
$1'
9$& '&+($'
,19(57(5
H &21752/
TO BEP (J4)
I
TO XYZ CONTROLLER '&'&
&219(57(56
PLUGGED INTO FRONT END
PROCESSOR.
'02725
&175/ (DC Voltages and Pulser/TX Voltages)
+%5,'*(
TO BEP (J1)
Table 9-54 Main Power Supply cables
1. MAINS POWER CABLE See: Section 9-17 "Mains Power Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 9-95
2. CABLE H
(J4 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY)
3. CABLE I
(J1 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY - XYZ
CONTROLLER)
POWER CABLE - BEP 48V GA200291 1 N Y
4. CABLE R
POWER CABLE - BW PRINTER 5194493 1 N Y
(MAIN POWER SUPPLY - BW PRINTER)

9-18-6 Front End Processor (FEP) cables
Figure 9-6 Front End Processor (FEP) Cables
TO J5 (BEP)
CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT
Table 9-55 Front End Processor (FEP) cables
1. PC2GFI CARD CABLE 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE (GFI to BEP-J5) 1 N Y
2. BEP - BACKPLANE CABLE 5194491 CABLE N 1 N Y
3. Cable Doppler MBD - Rot. ADPT. Box GA200536 1 N Y

9-18-7 Back End Processor (BEP) cables
9-18-7-1 Content
9-18-7-2 BEP6 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
9-18-7-3 BEP5 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112
9-18-7-2 BEP6 cables
Figure 9-7 BEP6 internal cables

9-18-7-2 BEP6 cables (contd)
Table 9-56 BEP6 Internal Cables sheet 1 of 2
0. BEP6.X CABLE KIT - SPARE PART 5433408-80 8 1 N Y
1 6
9
1 - BEP POWER IN CABLE

6 - SATA JUMPER
7 - PATIENT I/O INTERFACE CABLE
8 - VIDEO JUMPER (FLEX)
9 - DVI TO SAMTEC JUMPER (FLEX)
1. BEP POWER IN CABLE INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT 5433408-80. 1 N N
2. CABLE INCLUDED IN BEP6.0 FRONT IO ASSEMBLY

FRONT PANEL 1 N N
WITHOUT USB PORT 5433408-41.
3. SATA HARD DRIVE CABLE COMES WITH HDD 5433408-50. 1 N N
4. POWER HARD DRIVE CABLE COMES WITH HDD 5433408-50. 1 N N
5. USED ONLY IF DVR IS INSTALLED.
DVR TO SATA 5439827-2 1 N Y
6. INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT 5433408-80.

SATA JUMPER 1 N N
USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED.
7. PAT IO POWER AND USB INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT 5433408-80. 1 N N
8. VIDEO JUMPER FLEX INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT 5433408-80. 1 N N
9. DVI-SAMTECH FLEX INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT 5433408-80. 1 N N
10.
DVI FLEX MAIN YGGDRASIL 5197216 1 N Y
11.
DVR AUDIO 5435462 1 N Y

Table 9-56 BEP6 Internal Cables (contd) sheet 2 of 2
N. Refer to: Table 9-57 "BEP6 External Cables and Harnesses" on page 9-109.

Figure 9-8 BEP6 External Cables

Table 9-57 BEP6 External Cables and Harnesses sheet 1 of 3
X DEPENDS ON COUNTRY.
A 5148381-X For illustrations, see: Section 9-17 "Mains 1 Y Y
MAIN POWER CORD
Power Cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on
page 9-95.
CABLE B
B FROG BRAKE CONTROL GA200335 (XYZ CONTROLLER - INNER FROG 2 N Y
BRAKES)
CABLE C (INNER BRAKE - OUTER

BRAKE)
C FROG BRAKE ARM GA200334 2 N Y
D MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY 5272357 1 N Y
Part of:
D1 MAIN CABLE POWER/AUDIO 1 N N
5272357 - MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
Part of:
D2 MAIN CABLE VIDEO 1 N N
MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH Part of:

D3 1 N N
SIGNALS 5272357 - MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
Part of:
D4 MAIN CABLE USB 2 N N
USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY

H CABLE - USB, BEP6 TO MAIN 5194492-8 1 N Y
SUPPLY, FREY
POWER CABLE BEP 48V

CABLE I (J1 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY -
XYZ CONTROLLER)
Cable Power-Controller-BEP for

I GA200715 1 N Y
Vivid E9

Table 9-57 BEP6 External Cables and Harnesses (contd) sheet 2 of 3
CABLE-PCI EXPRESS ON HDMI,

J 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE 1 N Y
BEP-CARDRACK, FREY
POWER CABLE, DVD

CABLE K
(J30 - DVD 1)
(J29 - DVD 2)
CABLE - DVD POWER FULLY 1 or

K 5266407 N Y
SHIELDED 2
CABLE - USB BEP TO XYZ MOTOR

L 5194492-6 USB CABLE XYZ CONTROLLER 1 N Y
CONTROLLER
SATA CABLE DVD

CABLE M
(J2 - DVD 2)
(J3 - DVD 1)
CABLE - DVD eSATA FULLY 1 or

M 5270048 N Y
SHIELDED 2
BEP6 TO GFI AND CARDRACK

N 5391509 1 N Y
BACKPLANE CABLE
CABLE P
(J33 - SUBWOOFER)
P AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER GA200333 1 N Y
Q USB CABLE BW PRINTER 5194492-2 USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED 1 N Y

Table 9-57 BEP6 External Cables and Harnesses (contd) sheet 3 of 3
R POWER CABLE BW PRINTER 5194493 USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED 1 N Y

9-18-7-3 BEP5 cables
Figure 9-9 BEP5 cables

K
. J H I
'9'$'$373:$
6$7$3:5 6$7$
'9'
0
.
'9'$'$373:$
6$7$3:5 6$7$
'9'
237,21
-
- - - -
%(3

99VWE\
36B21
99
9B2.
99VWE\ '&'& $&B)$,/
&219(57(56
6(48(1&(
36B213:52.
999
/2*,& %(33:5
99VWE\ 6833/< )5217
3$1(/
02'8/(

5($5
3$1(/ -
E7 ,)12
- '95
'9,,287
$8',25
-

-
$8',2/
-
(;786%
'9,$ 3$7,(17,2
;3&,(;35(66
3&,
3&,
3&,(;35(66
-
(;786% &1
&1 &1
237,21$/
$1$/2*9,'(2
027+(5%2$5'
'9,,287
'9,'
'9,,,1
$8',2,1
$7;
0E7
- 86%

7; 0$,1
'9,' /('6
32:(5
63$5(3&,(;35(66[
5;
$
'9,'
D2 -
7;
63$5(3&,
237,21$/
VWE\
'95
9,'(2&$5'
9
D1 -
*), -
6$7$

',*,7$/
$8',2
9 /5
$8',2 9
+267
9 287 6$7$
'9'
$8',2
9
-
$03 1 32:(5
,)12
%6&$1
212))6:
,&
- 3:5/(' '95 6$7$
L -
86%
-
6$7$
86%
-
D4 -
86% &1
86%
-
D4
86%
- 86%
3&,
(;35(66[
86%+8%
-
86%0LFUR &1
86%+8%
- &RQWUROOHU
237,21.(<
,23RUWV $8',2,1
4 - 93' /5&(17(5$8',2287
86%+8%
212))6:
5 - - 3:5/('
-
9
32:(5
X%7;
%: 86%
9
&(17(5
$7;
027+(5%2$5'
$8',2 $8',2287
35,17(5
-
720$,1
3:5 3:5 3 $03
237,21$/ 6833/<
6$7$ 6$7$3:5
-
9 9 9 VWE\
+$5'
5(*
&2/25 86%
9
9
'5,9(
35,17(5 3:5
720$,1 9
3:5
)8785( 6833/< ,2%2$5'
Table 9-58 Back End Processor (BEP) cables sheet 1 of 4
I/O BOARD
1. CABLE P
(J33 - SUBWOOFER)
AUDIO CABLE -SUBWOOFER GA200333 1 N Y
2. CABLE K
(J30 - DVD 1)
POWER CABLE - DVD 5266407 1 N Y

Table 9-58 Back End Processor (BEP) cables sheet 2 of 4 (contd)
3. CABLE K
(J29 - DVD 2)
4. CABLE D1
SEE MAIN CABLE
MAIN CABLE - POWER AUDIO [PART OF MAIN CABLE] 1 N N
(J21 - OP PANEL)
5. CABLE D2
SEE MAIN CABLE
MAIN CABLE - VIDEO [PART OF MAIN CABLE] 1 N N
(J22 - OP PANEL)
BEP
6. CABLE J
PC2GFI CARD CABLE 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE 1 N Y
(J5 - GFI)
7. CABLE H
(J4 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY)
8. CABLE M
(J3 - DVD 2)
SATA CABLE - DVD 2 5270048 1 N Y

9. CABLE M
(J2 - DVD 1)
SATA CABLE - DVD 1 5270048 1 N Y
10.
CABLE BEP 6 5391509 1 N Y
11. CABLE USB-BEP6-MAIN POWER

5194492-8
SUPPLY
12. CABLE I
(J1 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY - XYZ
CONTROLLER)
POWER CABLE - BEP 48V 5194495 1 N Y
13. CABLE N
BEP - BACKPLANE CABLE 5194491 1 N Y
14.
CABLE-PCI EXPRESS OVER HDMI
5152291 1 N Y
BULKHEAD MOUNT
15.
HARNESS, BEP FRONT PANEL,

5193726 1 N Y
ICHIRO
16. HARNESS, BEP MOTHERBOARD-

IOBOARD, YGGDRASIL IMPROVED 5193725-3 1 N Y
AUDIO

17. For GA200890, GA200900 and

GB200003
Harness-BEP Power, Ygg GA200886 1 N Y
18. For GA200800 and GA200805
HARNESS - BEP POWER FREY 5165844 1 N Y
19.
Bracket, Lock BEP Top Connectors GA200984 1 N Y

9-18-8 Peripherals Cables
Figure 9-10 Peripherals Cables
'9'$'$373:$
6$7$3:5 6$7$
86% Q K
BW PRINTER '9'
3:5 R
M
'9'$'$373:$
6$7$3:5 6$7$
K '9'
237,21
M
Table 9-59 Peripherals Cables
1. CABLE R
POWER CABLE - BW PRINTER 5194493 1 N Y
(MAIN POWER SUPPLY - BW PRINTER)
2. CABLE K
(J30 - DVD 1)
3. CABLE K
(J29 - DVD 2)

Table 9-59 Peripherals Cables
4. CABLE M
(J2 - DVD 1)
SATA CABLE - DVD 5270048 1 N Y
5. CABLE M
(J3 - DVD 2)
SATA CABLE - DVD 5270048 1 N Y

Section 9-19
ECG cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Table 9-60 ECG Cables sheet 1 of 2
PART
1. CONTENT:
- CABLE
- CABLE ECG NICOLAY
ECG CABLE SET FC200389 1 Y Y
- ADAPTER RCA MALE -BNC FEMALE
- ADAPTER RCA FEMALE - 6
- ADAPTER RCA FEMALE - 3
2.
CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA / AMERICA 164L0025 1 Y Y
3.
CABLE ECG MARQ. IEC / EU + AS 164L0026 1 Y Y
4.
LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. AHA /

164L0027 1 Y Y
AMERICA
5.
LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. IEC/EU+AS 164L0028 1 Y Y
6. ECG cable neo AHA 164L0029 1 N N
7. ECG cable neo IEC 164L0030 1 N N
8. Multi-Link 3-lead ECG Care cable neonatal

ECG cable, neo, AHA 2017004-001 DIN, AHA (3.6 m/12ft) 1 N N
Used together with neonatal leads H45571RJ
9. Multi-Link 3-lead ECG Care cable neonatal

ECG cable, neo, IEC 2017004-003 DIN, IEC (3.6 m/12ft) 1 N N
Used together with neonatal leads H45571RK
9 - 118 Section 9-19 - ECG cables - VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Table 9-60 ECG Cables (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART
10. Neonatal cloth electrode with preattached

leadwire, AHA, DIN, 3/pouch, 600/box
Lead/electr neo AHA 600 2009101-404 1 N N
Used together with neonatal ECG cable
H45571RD.
11. Neonatal cloth electrode with preattached

leadwire, IEC, DIN, 3/pouch, 600/box
Lead/electr neo IEC 600 2009101-406 1 N N
Used together with neonatal ECG cable
H45571RE.
12. ECG Cable Adapter, Multi-link 3-lead DIN adapter

This adapter can be used together with adult ECG
Adapter, ECG 3-lead 414371-001 cables H45571PY (AHA) or H45571RA (IEC) 1 N N
and neonatal ECG leads/electrodes
H45571RJ (AHA) or H45571RK (IEC).

Section 9-20
Labels VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Table 9-61 Vivid E9 Name Labels
1. Vivid E9 Nameplate, Gold,

GA314811 New for BT11 N Y
Upper OP Panel
2. Vivid E9 Nameplate, Periwinkle,

GA314992 For Pro configuration N Y
Upper OP Panel
1
3. Vivid E9 Nameplate, Bronze, GA314812 N Y
New for BT11
Upper OP Panel
4. Vivid E9 Nameplate, Silver,

5255315 BT09 N N
Upper OP Panel
5. VIVID E9 XDCLEAR LABEL GB314141 For software v113 on Vivid E9 1 N N
Table 9-62 Vivid E9 Vet Labels
1. Vet product Label for VE9 GB314182 1 N Y
2. Side Cover Label 5410085 2 N Y
3. VET PRODUCT LABEL 5454608 FOR PROBEs CONNECTOR * N Y
*) Each probe used on a VIVID E9 Vet must be labeled with a Vet Product label on the probe connector.
9 - 120 Section 9-20 - Labels VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Section 9-21
Physio TX Parts
Table 9-63 Physio TX Parts
1. PCG MICROPHONE MA-300HDS

GB200036 Replaces FD20036 1 Y Y
WITH ADAPTER.
2.
KIT, HEART MICROPHONE MA300 AND

FD200036 1 Y Y
ADAPTER
MA-300 PHONO ADAPTER
3.
KIT, PULSE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER FD200037

TY306 AND ADAPTER TY-306 AUX/PRESSURE
ADAPTER
4.
Adapter for MA300 heartmicrophone FC200658 1 Y Y
PHONO ADAPTER

Section 9-22
Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Table 9-64 Supported Phased Array Sector probes
PART XD-
PROBES CAT NO. NUMBER BT09 BT11 BT12 clear COMMENTS QTY CRU FRU
PHASED ARRAY SECTOR PROBE
1.5 - 4.0 MHz

Can't be used on Vivid E9 2D
H4001BT 5160208 N/A X X X Special instructions for returned 1 N N
4V-D
probes, see:
4-2-20 "4V-D Field Failure Data
Collection" on page 4-58.
M5Sc-D H44901AE 5446030 N/A N/A N/A X 1.5 - 4.2 MHz 1 N N
PHASE ARRAY PEDIATRIC

6S-D H45021RR 5394466 X X X X PROBE 1 Y Y
2.7 - 8.0 MHz
PHASE ARRAY PEDIATRIC

12S-DLP H45021RT 5401857 N/A X X X PROBE 1 N N
4.0 - 12.0 MHz
M5S-D H45551NH GE-3MIX X X X X 1.5 - 4.5 MHz 1 Y Y
2.0 - 4.0 MHz

1860 elements
Can be used on older BT11 and
3V-D H4001BJ 5306595 X N/A N/A N/A BT12 upgraded VIVID E9s 1 N Y
equipped with 4 x GTX64 boards
(new VIVID E9/VIVID E7s are
using 1 x GTX192).
Table 9-65 Supported Linear & Curved Array (Convex) probes
PART XD-
LINEAR & CURVED ARRAY (CONVEX) PROBES
2.4 - 10.0 MHz

9L-D H40442LM 5212849 X X X X 1 Y Y
192 elements
5.0 - 12.0 MHz
11L-D H40432LN 5410800 X X X X 1 Y Y
Replaces: 5176908
4.0 - 13.0 MHz

ML6-15-D H40452LG 5410769 N/A X X X 1 N Y
Replaces: 5271060
4C-D H4001BC 5162351 X X X X 1.6 - 6.0 MHz 1 Y Y
C1-5-D H40452LE 5409287 N/A N/A N/A X 1 N Y
C2-9-D H40462LN 5405254 N/A N/A N/A X 1 N Y
8C H40412LJ 2348094 N/A N/A N/A X 1 N Y
iC5-9L-D H40442LK 5212417 N/A N/A N/A X 1 N Y
9 - 122 Section 9-22 - Probes for VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Table 9-66 Supported Doppler probes
PART XD-
DOPPLER PROBES
PEDOF DOPPLER PROBE - 2

2D (P2D) H4830JE TE100024 X X X X 1 Y Y
MHz
PEDOF DOPPLER PROBE - 6

6D (P6D) H4830JG TQ100002 X X X X MHz 1 Y Y
5.0 / 5.8 MHz
Table 9-67 Supported Multiplane Transesophageal Phased Array Probes (PAMPTE)
PART XD-
MULTIPLANE TRANSESOPHAGEAL PHASED ARRAY PROBES (PAMPTE)
3.0 - 8.0 MHz

6TC H45551ZD KN100105 X X X X 1 N Y
Replaces KN100102
May be used, but is obsolete from

KN100102
6TC X X X X manufacturer. 1 N N
OBSOLETE
2.9 - 6.7 MHz
6Tc-RS - KN100104 X X X X 3.0 - 8.0 MHz 1 N Y
Can't be used on Vivid E9 2D

6VT-D H45561TA KN100100 N/A N/A X X 1 N N
3.1 MHz - 8.0 MHz
6T OR - KN100092 X X X X 3.0 - 7.1 MHz 1 N Y
2.9 - 6.7 MHz

For Japan Customers ONLY.
6T-OR REV.J H45551BG X X X X 1 N N
Order new or replacement probes
from OTR (CAT. NO. H45551BG)
6T-RS - - X X 1 N N
PROBE PEDIATRIC MPTEE

9T H45521DY KN100072 X X X X 1 N Y
3.0 - 10.0 MHz
9T-RS - - X X 1 N N
6Tc-RS, 6T-RS and 9T-RS supported via RS adapter.
Table 9-68 Supported Intra-Operative probe
PART XD-
INTRA-OPERATIVE PROBE
i13L H45511NT KW100011 X X X 5.3 - 14.0 MHz 1 N Y

Section 9-23
Probe Parts
9-23-1 Probe Service Parts
Table 9-69 Probe Service Part
1. KIT INCLUDES:
- KNOB
- INSTRUCTION SHEET (not illustrated)
- M2X8mm SCREW
- ALLEN WRENCH, 2.5mm (not illustrated)
- ALLEN WRENCH, 1.5mm (not illustrated)
KNOB REPAIR KIT 2363861 1 N Y
2. BITEGUARD 086A0010 1 Y Y
3. TEE SCANHEAD PROTECTION

KZ307808 1 Y Y
COVER
4. CLIP-ON BITE BLOCK KZ200693 1 Y Y
5. CLIP-ON BITE BLOCK KZ200687 1 Y Y
6. CLIPS FOR MEZANINE BOARD KZ307771 1 N Y
9 - 124 Section 9-23 - Probe Parts

9-23-2 Other Probe Parts
Table 9-70 Other Probe Part
CAT# /
7. Secure probe stand to be used in:

Echo lab
Operation room
Cleaning room.
Fits to all GE TEE probes.

Probe shelf for safe storage of the probe
handle and connector.
Tube shelf for protection of the scan head.
TEE STORAGE RACK H45551NM/
1 N Y
KX200272

Section 9-24
Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7
9-24-1 Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - XDclear, application software v113
Table 9-71 Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - XDclear, application software v113 sheet 1 of 3
CAT #
or
ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER COMMENTS
ADVANCED OPTIONS
1. LVO CONTRAST IMAGING H45561MY
2. VASCULAR CONTRAST H45561MZ
3. ADVANCED CONTRAST IMAGING H45571GY
4. AFI PRODUCTIVITY PACKAGE H45561GX
5. IMT H45561GY
6. LV Mass Only H45561NA
7. 4D Strain and LV Mass H45561NB
8. Stress H45561NC
9. Auto 2D EF H45561ND
10. Rodent H45561NE
11. 4V Enable H45561RJ
12. Advanced Qscan Imaging (Not for Japan) H45561RK
13. Advanced Qscan Imaging (Japan) H45561RL
14. Tomtec software plug-in for Mitral Valve

quantification derived from the volume
ultrasound data of the Vivid scanner. The semi-
H45571GZ automatic surface detecting algorithm is
MV Assessment (Tomtec)
optimized for clinical users to get fast,
reproducible and accurate 4D visualization and
quantification of the Mitral Valve, acquired with
TTE or TEE probes.
15. This option offers support for viewing of 4D

datasets with polarized 3D glasses (not red/
green) on a dedicated off scanner 3D Sony
monitor. The option combines the use of depth
encoded color visualization with a 3D interlacing
technique, providing excellent 3D perception
4D Polarised Stereo Vision Interface H45571HA without the strain usually inflicted by the
conventional red/green 3D glasses. Included are
an isolation interface module, one pair of glasses
as well as the option code for enabling the stereo
interface display functionality.
Note that the Sony monitor must be purchased
separately from Sony.
9 - 126 Section 9-24 - Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Table 9-71 Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - XDclear, application software v113 (contd) sheet 2
CAT #
or
16. The Vivid E9 Advanced Bundle option includes:
Advanced Qscan Imaging
SmartStress
2D Auto EF
Vivid E9 Advanced Bundle H45571FA
AFI Productivity Package
LVO-Contrast
4D Strain
4D LV Mass
17. TEE Interface Module H45571FK
18. Quantitative Analysis Package H45571FL
19. Tissue Tracking H45571FM
20. The MPEGvue option allows clinicians to save

patient records to a local storage device or (as
eVue) to a remote shared volume in the compact
H45571FN high-quality MPEG4 format (in addition to AVI,
MPEGVue and eVue
JPEG, and BMP formats). The MPEGvue
Player/browser can be installed on any Standard
PC to view MPEG4-compressed images,
measurements, or reports.
21. Scan Assist Pro H45571FP
22. Enables support for DICOM functionality via

network connection (Image Storage, Storage
Commit, Modality Worklist, MPPS, DICOM Print,
DICOM Connectivity Package H45571FR
Structured Reporting, Query/Retrieve).
Note that DICOM Media is part of basic and is
supported without this option.
OTHER
23. This part will be introduced as a replacement for
H4910FT / 5331575.
H46732LF
5380960
24.
Tri-pedal USB Footswitch
H4910FT
5331575
OBSOLETE
Obsolete from GE.

Table 9-71 Options - VIVID E9/VIVID E7 - XDclear, application software v113 (contd) sheet 3
CAT #
or
25. Includes parts for installing DVR into both
BEP5 and BEP6.
KIT INCLUDES:
Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board (5135840)
DVI Flex, DVR jumper, Yggdrasil BEP
(5197217)
DVI Flex, Main, Yggdrasil BEP (5197216)
Cable - DVD Power fully shielded (5266407)
H45551NS/
DVR Option for Vivid E9. Cable - DVD eSATA fully shielded (5270048)
GB200048
DVD Assembly for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
(GA200618)
Label, DVR (GA314384)
Flex Cable - DVI to SAMTEC Video Jumper
(5428990)
Cable - DVR Audio BEP6 (5435462)
SATA Cable - DVR to BEP6 MB (5439827-2)

9-24-2 Options - VIVID E9 - BT12, application software v112.x
Table 9-72 Options - VIVID E9 - BT12, application software v112.x sheet 1 of 2
CAT #
or
ADVANCED OPTIONS
2. VASCULAR CONTRAST H45561MZ
4. IMT H45561GY
5. Stress H45561NC
9. Rodent H45561NE
11. Advanced Qscan Imaging (rev non-J) GA200891
12. Advanced Qscan Imaging (rev J) GA200892
OTHER
13. This part will be introduced as a replacement for
H4910FT / 5331575.
H46732LF
5380960
14.
Tri-pedal USB Footswitch
H4910FT
5331575
Going Obsolete from GE.

Table 9-72 Options - VIVID E9 - BT12, application software v112.x (contd) sheet 2 of 2
CAT #
or
BEP5 and BEP6.
KIT INCLUDES:
(5197217)
H45551NS/ Cable - DVD Power fully shielded (5266407)
DVR Option for Vivid E9.
GB200048 Cable - DVD eSATA fully shielded (5270048)
DVD Assembly for VIVID E9 (GA200618)
(5428990)
16. KIT INCLUDES:

(5197217)
DVR option VIVID E9
GA200859 Cable - DVD Power fully shielded (5266407)
(For BEP5)
Cable - DVD eSATA fully shielded (5270048)
Installation procedure, Digital Video Stream
Recorder option (GA294614)

Table 9-73 Options - VIVID E9 - BT11, application software v110.x
CAT #
or
ADVANCED OPTIONS
2. VASCULAR / ABDOMINAL CONTRAST H45561MZ
4. IMT H45561GY
5. Stress H45561NC
9. Rodent H45561NE
11. Advanced Qscan Imaging (rev non-J) H45561RK
12. Advanced Qscan Imaging (rev J) H45561RL
OTHER
BEP5 and BEP6.
KIT INCLUDES:
(5197217)
H45551NS/ Cable - DVD Power fully shielded (5266407)
DVR Option for Vivid E9.
GB200048 Cable - DVD eSATA fully shielded (5270048)
(5428990)
14. KIT INCLUDES:

- Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board (5135840)
- DVI Flex, DVR jumper, Yggdrasil BEP
(5197217)
- Cable - DVD Power fully shielded (5266407)
Digital video stream recorder option GA200614
- Cable - DVD eSATA fully shielded (5270048)
- DVD Assembly for VIVID E9 (GA200618)
- Label, DVR (GA314384)
- Installation procedure, Digital Video Stream
Recorder option (GA294614)

Table 9-74 Options - VIVID E9 - BT09, application software v108.x
ITEM PART NAME CAT # COMMENTS
ADVANCED OPTIONS
1. LVO CONTRAST IMAGING H45551DA
2. VASCULAR / ABDOMINAL CONTRAST H45551DB
3. ADVANCED QSCAN MAGING H45551DC STRAIN + TISSUE SYNC IMG
4. ADVANCED QSCAN MAGING Rev. J H45551DD STRAIN + TISSUESYNCIMG (FOR JAPAN)
QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS PACKAGES

5. IMT - INTIMA MEDIA THICKNESS H45551NN
6. AFI - AUTOMATED FUNCTION IMAGING H45551NP
NETWORK OPTIONS
7. DICOM CONNECTIVITY PACKAGE H45551NR
OTHER
8. KIT INCLUDES:
- DVI Flex, DVR jumper, Yggdrasil BEP (5197217)
- DVI Flex, Main, Yggdrasil BEP (5197216)
DVR option VIVID E9 GA200859
- Cable - DVD eSATA fully shielded (5270048)
- Installation procedure, Digital Video Stream Recorder option
(GA294614)
9. KIT INCLUDES:
- DVI Flex, DVR jumper, Yggdrasil BEP (5197217)
Digital video stream recorder option GA200614 - Cable - DVD eSATA fully shielded (5270048)
- Installation procedure, Digital Video Stream Recorder option
(GA294614)

Section 9-25
Kits - VIVID E9/VIVID E7
9-25-1 Service kits
Table 9-75 Service kit
PART
1.
WOODEN WEDGE
WHEEL CHANGE KIT FC200829 1 N Y
BEVEL EDGED BOARD
2. This tool is used to correct the units Serial

Number in InSite.
SET SERIAL NUMBER CD GA200649 1 N Y
Tool may be used for: Vivid 7, Vivid E9 and
EchoPAC PC Turnkey.
3. FAN SCREEN KIT VIVID E9 GA200957 1 N Y
4. HDD Wipe Tool Kit 5329420 CD Tool plus instructions 1 N Y
5. For detailed content, see:

Hardware Kit 5310019 1 N Y
9-25-2 "Hardware Kit" on page 9-134.

9-25-2 Hardware Kit

Hardware Kit, original made for LOGIQ E9. The kit includes two boxes with hardware, see:
Figure 9-9 and Figure 9-11.
To identify parts and keep the kit organized, see: Figure 9-10 and Figure 9-12.
Figure 9-11 Box 1 of 5310019 Kit
9 - 134 Section 9-25 - Kits - VIVID E9/VIVID E7

9-25-2 Hardware Kit (contd)

Use this figure to help identify contents of the Hardware Kit, Box 1 and keep them organized.
Figure 9-12 Box 1 of 5310019 Kit, contents and organization


Figure 9-13 Box 2 of 5310019 Kit


Figure 9-14 Box 2 of 5310019 Kit, contents and organization

9-25-3 Upgrade kits
Table 9-76 Upgrade kits
PART
Software v113 (XDclear) Upgrade Kits
1. Vivid E9 BT12 to BT13 Software DVDs and CDs are used for software and
GB200084 N/A N N
Upgrade kit documentation
2. The first kits had software and manuals on

Vivid E9 XDclear "2D Option" Upgrade
GB200086 DVD and CD discs. N/A N N
to XDclear "4D Expert Option" BEP5
Later, UFD was introduced.
3. The first kits had software and manuals on

Vivid E9 XDclear "2D Option" Upgrade
GB200088 DVD and CD discs. N/A N N
to XDclear "4D Expert Option" BEP6
Later, UFD was introduced.
BT12 Upgrade Kits
4. Vivid E9 BT11 to BT12 sw upgrade GA200931 Requires BT11 HW. N/A N N
5. Vivid E9 BT12 4D TEE HW upgrade For VIVID E9 BT09 systems with Serial
GA200998 N/A N N
from BT09 Number >400.
6. Vivid E9 BT12 4D TEE HW upgrade For VIVID E9 BT09 systems with Serial
GB200006 N/A N N
from BT09 Number <400.
7. Vivid E9 BT12 2D Option to 4D Expert

GA200933 2D (BT12) to 4D (BT12) N/A N N
Option
BT11 Upgrade Kits
8. 2D (4D READY OPTION) upgrade to VIVID E9 Upgrade BT11 4D Ready Option

GA200793 N/A N N
4D OPTION (2D) to BT11 4D Expert Option
9. VIVID E9 Upgrade BT09 to BT11 4D Expert

BT09 > BT11 GA200792 N/A N N
Option
BEP5 to BEP6 Upgrade Kit
10. Upgrade kit BEP5 to BEP6 Vivid E9 GB200160 1 N Y

9-25-4 Language kits
Table 9-77 Language Kits, Overview
PART
Item PART NAME NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU
1 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - GERMAN
2 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - FRENCH
3 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - ITALIAN

NEW KITS THE KITS ARE SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERING
4 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - SPANISH
FOR EACH THE VIVID E9.
5 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - PORTUGESE BT or main THE KIT INCLUDES: POWER CORD, ECG 1 N N
software CABLES, AND IF REQUIRED: PRINTED USER
6 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - SWEDISH
version. MANUAL.
7 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - NORWEGIAN
8 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - KOREAN

9 LANGUAGE ASSEMBLY - CHINA

Section 9-26
Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7
9-26-1 Overview
Contents in this section:
9-26-3 "Product manuals for VIVID E7 with XDclear, S/W v113.x" on page 9-143
9-26-3 "Product manuals for VIVID E7 with XDclear, S/W v113.x" on page 9-143
9-26-4 "Product manuals for BT12" on page 9-144
9-26-7 "Probes Documentation" on page 9-150
9 - 140 Section 9-26 - Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7

9-26-2 Product manuals for VIVID E9 XDclear, S/W v113.x

NOTE: The User manuals and the Service manual (PDF files) are located on the VIVID E9 Online
Manual Multi language CD set, Part Number: GB200133. The manuals are also included on the
UFD. Paper copies may be ordered from GE.
Table 9-78 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 with XDclear sheet 1 of 2
PART
ITEM NAME NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU
1. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Bulgarian GB092101 1 N N
2. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Croatian GB092103 1 N N
3. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Czech GB092104 1 N N
4. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Danish GB092105 1 N N
5. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Dutch GB092106 1 N N
6. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - English GB092107 1 N N
7. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Estonian GB092108 1 N N
8. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Finnish GB092109 1 N N
9. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - French GB092110 1 N N
10. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - German GB092111 1 N N
11. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Greek GB092112 1 N N
12. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Hungarian GB092113 1 N N
13. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Indonesian GB092114 1 N N
14. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Italian GB092115 1 N N
15. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Japanese GB092116 1 N N
16. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Korean GB092117 1 N N
17. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Latvian GB092118 1 N N
18. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Lithuanian GB092119 1 N N
19. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Norwegian GB092120 1 N N
20. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Polish GB092121 1 N N
21. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Portuguese (Europe) GB092122 1 N N
22. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Portuguese (Brazil) GB092123
23. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Romanian GB092124 1 N N
24. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Russian GB092125 1 N N
25. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Serbian GB092126 1 N N
26. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Slovak GB092127 1 N N
27. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Slovenian GB092128 1 N N
28. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Spanish GB092129 1 N N
29. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Swedish GB092130 1 N N

Table 9-78 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 with XDclear (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART
30. BT13 Vivid E9 User manual - Turkish GB092131 1 N N
31. REFERENCE MANUAL,

BT13 Vivid E9 Reference manual - English GB092132 1 N N
ENGLISH
SERVICE MANUALS
1. VIVID E9 UNPACKING/PACKING PROCEDURE, ENGLISH GB050018 For carton box 1 N N
2. VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SERVICE MANUAL, ENGLISH GB091046 FOR BT'13 ONLY 1 N N
3. VIVID E9/VIVID E7 PROPRIETARY MANUAL, ENGLISH GA091999 THIS MANUAL 1 N N
4. Printer Driver Installation Manual GA294652 1 N N
5. Vivid E9 DVR Option Installation Manual GA294614 Revision 4. 1 N N
6. ICY BOX Desktop Hard Drive Installation manual for

EY194452 1 N N
EchoPAC PC, EchoPAC SW Only and Vivid E9
7. Vivid E9 and EchoPAC PC Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard EY194147 1 N N

Drive Installation Manual.
8. Vivid E9 BT12 to Vivid E9 with Xdclear Upgrade Manual GB094196 1 N N

Includes Usb Flash Drive
9. Vivid E9 BT13 2D to 4D BEP6 Upgrade Manual GB094197 (UFD) for software and 1 N N
User Manuals..
10. Vivid E9 BT13 2D to 4D BEP5 Upgrade Manual GB094198 1 N N
11. Common upgrade

manual for the three
Vivid E9 XDclear Upgrade Manual GB094047 BT13 upgrade kits. 1 N N
Software and User
Manuals on CDs/DVDs.

9-26-3 Product manuals for VIVID E7 with XDclear, S/W v113.x
Table 9-79 Product Manuals for VIVID E7 with XDclear
PART
1. Vivid E7 User manual - Chinese GB092138 1 N N
2. Vivid E7 User manual - English GB092137 1 N N
Vivid E7 Reference manual - English GB092135 1 N N
ENGLISH
SERVICE MANUALS
5. VIVID E9/VIVID E7 SERVICE MANUAL, ENGLISH GB091046 FOR S/W v113 ONLY 1 N N
6. VIVID E9/VIVID E7 PROPRIETARY MANUAL, ENGLISH GA091999 THIS MANUAL 1 N N
9. ICY BOX Desktop Hard Drive Installation manual for

EY194452 1 N N
EchoPAC PC, EchoPAC SW Only and Vivid E9

9-26-4 Product manuals for BT12

Manual Multi language CD set, Part Number: GA200960. Paper copies may be ordered from
GE.
Table 9-80 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 (BT12) sheet 1 of 2
PART
1. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Bulgarian GA092901 1 N N
2. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Chinese GA092902 1 N N
3. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Croatian GA092903 1 N N
4. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Czech GA092904 1 N N
5. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Danish GA092905 1 N N
6. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Dutch GA092906 1 N N
7. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - English GA092907 1 N N
8. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Estonian GA092908 1 N N
9. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Finnish GA092909 1 N N
10. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - French GA092910 1 N N
11. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - German GA092911 1 N N
12. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Greek GA092912 1 N N
13. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Hungarian GA092913 1 N N
14. BT12 Vivid E9 User Manual - Indonesian GA092988 1 N N
15. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Italian GA092914 1 N N
16. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Japanese GA092915 1 N N
17. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Korean GA092916 1 N N
18. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Latvian GA092917 1 N N
19. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Lithuanian GA092918 1 N N
20. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Norwegian GA092919 1 N N
21. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Polish GA092920 1 N N
22. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Portuguese GA092921 1 N N
23. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Romanian GA092922 1 N N
24. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Russian GA092923 1 N N
25. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Serbian GA092924 1 N N
26. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Slovak GA092925 1 N N
27. BT12 Vivid E9 User Manual - Slovenian GA092989 1 N N
28. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Spanish GA092926 1 N N
29. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Swedish GA092927 1 N N

Table 9-80 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 (BT12) (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART
30. BT12 Vivid E9 User manual - Turkish GA092928 1 N N

BT12 Vivid E9 Reference manual - English GA092929 1 N N
ENGLISH
32. Remote Software Download and Installation manual GB094004 English 1 N N
SERVICE MANUALS
34. VIVID E9 UNPACKING/PACKING PROCEDURE, ENGLISH GA050318 For wooden box 1 N N
35. VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL, ENGLISH GA091568 1 N N
36. VIVID E9 PROPRIETARY MANUAL, ENGLISH GA091999 THIS MANUAL 1 N N
39. Vivid E9 and EchoPAC PC Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard EY194147 1 N N

40. Vivid E9 BT12 Upgrade Manual GA094990 1 N N


Manual Multi language CD, Part Number: GA200790. Paper copies may be ordered from GE.
Table 9-81 Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (BT11) sheet 1 of 2
PART
1. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ENGLISH GA092761 1 N N
2. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, GERMAN GA092762 1 N N
3. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, FRENCH GA092763 1 N N
4. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ITALIAN GA092764 1 N N
5. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SPANISH GA092765 1 N N
6. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, PORTUGESE GA092766 1 N N
7. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SWEDISH GA092769 1 N N
8. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, NORWEGIAN GA092770 1 N N
9. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, DANISH GA092771 1 N N
10. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, JAPANESE GA092767 1 N N
11. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, CHINESE, SIMPLIFIED GA092768 1 N N
12. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, POLISH GA092772 1 N N
13. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, FINNISH GA092773 1 N N
14. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, GREEK GA092774 1 N N
15. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, RUSSIAN GA092775 1 N N
16. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, DUTCH GA092776 1 N N
17. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, HUNGARIAN GA092777 1 N N
18. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SLOVAK GA092778 1 N N
19. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ROMANIAN GA092779 1 N N
20. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, CZECH GA092780 1 N N
21. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, LATVIAN GA092781 1 N N
22. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, LITHUANIAN GA092782 1 N N
23. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, TURKISH GA092783 1 N N
24. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ESTONIAN GA092784 1 N N
25. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, KOREAN GA092785 1 N N
26. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SERBIAN GA092786 1 N N
27. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, BULGARIAN GA092787 1 N N
28. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, CROATIAN GA092788 1 N N

VIVID E9 USER REFER. MANUAL GA092789 1 N N
ENGLISH

Table 9-81 Product Manuals for VIVID E9/VIVID E7 (BT11) (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART
30. Remote Software Download and Installation manual GB094004 English 1 N N
SERVICE MANUALS
31. VIVID E9 UNPACKING/PACKING PROCEDURE, ENGLISH GA050318 1 N N
36. Vivid E9 and EchoPAC PC Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard

EY194147 1 N N
37. Note!
Vivid E9 BT11 Upgrade Manual GA094798 1 N N
Rev. 1 is marked BT10


NOTE: The User manuals and the Service manual (PDF files) are located on the VIVID E9 Online Manual
Multi language CD, Part Number: GA200635. Paper copies may be ordered from GE.
Table 9-82 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 (BT09) sheet 1 of 2
PART
1. VIVID E9 UNPACKING/PACKING PROCEDURE, ENGLISH GA050318 1 N N
5. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ENGLISH GA092404 1 N N
6. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, GERMAN GA092405 1 N N
7. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, FRENCH GA092406 1 N N
8. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ITALIAN GA092407 1 N N
9. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SPANISH GA092408 1 N N
10. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, PORTUGESE GA092409 1 N N
11. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, JAPANESE GA092410 1 N N
12. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, CHINESE, SIMPLIFIED GA092411 1 N N
13. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SWEDISH GA092412 1 N N
14. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, NORWEGIAN GA092413 1 N N
15. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, DANISH GA092414 1 N N
16. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, POLISH GA092415 1 N N
17. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, FINNISH GA092416 1 N N
18. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, GREEK GA092417 1 N N
19. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, RUSSIAN GA092418 1 N N
20. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, DUTCH GA092419 1 N N
21. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, HUNGARIAN GA092420 1 N N
22. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SLOVAK GA092421 1 N N
23. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ROMANIAN GA092422 1 N N
24. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, CZECH GA092423 1 N N
25. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, LATVIAN GA092424 1 N N
26. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, LITHUANIAN GA092425 1 N N
27. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, TURKISH GA092426 1 N N
28. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, ESTONIAN GA092427 1 N N
29. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, KOREAN GA092428 1 N N
30. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, SERBIAN GA092615 1 N N

Table 9-82 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 (BT09) (contd) sheet 2 of 2
PART
31. VIVID E9 USER MANUAL, BULGARIAN GA092616 1 N N

VIVID E9 USER REFER. MANUAL GA092429 1 N N
ENGLISH

9-26-7 Probes Documentation
9-26-7-1 6VT-D Probe Care Cards
Table 9-83 6VT-D Probe Care Cards
PART
1. 6VT-D Probe Care Card, English and Chinese KX192613 1 N N
2. 6VT-D Probe Care Card, French and German KX192615 1 N N
3. Bulgarian, Croatian,
Czech, Danish, Dutch,
Estonia, Finnish, Greek,
Hungarian, Indonesian,
Italian, Japanese,
KX192655 Korean, Latvian, 1 N N
6VT-D Probe Care Card, multi language
Lithuanian Norwegian,
Polish, Portugese,
Romanian, Russian,
Slovenian, Serbian,
Slovakian, Spanish,
Swedish, Turkish
9-26-7-2 6T/6T-RS/6Tc/6Tc-RS/6Tv/9T/9T-RS Probe Care Cards
Table 9-84 6T/6T-RS/6Tc/6Tc-RS/6Tv/9T/9T-RS Probe Care Cards
PART
1. TEE Probe Care Card, English and Chinese KX192042 1 N N
2. TEE Probe Care Card, French and German KX192068 1 N N
3. Bulgarian, Croatian,
Czech, Danish, Dutch,
Estonia, Finnish, Greek,
Hungarian, Indonesian,
Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Latvian,
TEE Probe Care Card, multi language KX192656 1 N N
Lithuanian Norwegian,
Polish, Portugese,
Romanian, Russian,
Slovenian, Serbian,
Slovakian, Spanish,
Swedish, Turkish

9-26-7-3 TEE Probes user manuals
Table 9-85 TEE Probes user manuals
PART
1. TEE Probes user manual - Hungarian KX192076 1 N N
2. TEE Probes user manual - Slovak KX192077 1 N N
3. TEE Probes user manual - Romanian KX192078 1 N N
4. TEE Probes user manual - Czech KX192079 1 N N
5. TEE Probes user manual - Latvian KX192080 1 N N
6. TEE Probes user manual - Lithuanian KX192081 1 N N
7. TEE Probes user manual - Turkish KX192082 1 N N
8. TEE Probes user manual - Estonian KX192083 1 N N
9. TEE Probes user manual - Korean KX192084 1 N N
10. TEE Probes user manual - Serbian KX192240 1 N N
11. TEE Probes user manual - Bulgarian KX192241 1 N N
12. TEE probes User manual - Croatian KX192410 1 N N
13. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL

KZ192871 1 N N
ENGLISH, GERMAN, FRENCH, SIMPL. CHINESE
14. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL ITALIAN KZ192874 1 N N
15. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL SPANISH KZ192875 1 N N
16. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL PORTUGUESE KZ192876 1 N N
17. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL JAPANESE KZ192877 1 N N
18. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL SWEDISH KZ192879 1 N N
19. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL NORWEGIAN KZ192880 1 N N
20. USER MANUAL DANISH KZ192881 1 N N
21. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL POLISH KZ192882 1 N N
22. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL FINNISH KZ192883 1 N N
23. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL GREEK KZ192884 1 N N
24. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL RUSSIAN KZ192885 1 N N
25. TEE PROBES USER MANUAL DUTCH KZ192886 1 N N

9-26-7-4 TEE Probe Accessories user manual
Table 9-86 TEE Probes Accessories user manuals
PART
1. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Bulgarian KX192345 1 N N
2. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Croatian KX192662 1 N N
3. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Czech KX192338 1 N N
4. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Danish KX192329 1 N N
5. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Dutch KX192334 1 N N
6. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - English, French KX192322 1 N N

German, Simpl. Chinese
7. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Estonian KX192342 1 N N
8. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Finnish KX192331 1 N N
9. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Greek KX192332 1 N N
10. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Hungarian KX192335 1 N N
11. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Indonesian KX192663 1 N N
12. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Italian KX192323 1 N N
13. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Japanese KX192326 1 N N
14. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Korean KX192343 1 N N
15. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Latvian KX192339 1 N N
16. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Lithuanian KX192340 1 N N
17. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Norwegian KX192328 1 N N
18. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Polish KX192330 1 N N
19. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Portuguese KX192325 1 N N
20. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Romanian KX192337 1 N N
21. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Russian KX192333 1 N N
22. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Serbian KX192344 1 N N
23. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Slovakian KX192336 1 N N
24. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Slovenian KX192664 1 N N
25. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Spanish KX192324 1 N N
26. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Swedish KX192327 1 N N
27. TEE Probes Accessories User manual - Turkish KX192341 1 N N
28. TEE Probes Accessories User manuals CD KX192346 1 N N

9-26-7-5 Intraoperative Probes Users Manuals
Table 9-87 Intraoperative (IO) Probes Users Manuals
PART
1. IO Probes User manual, English French German and Chinese KX192055 1 N N
2. IO Probes User manual, Italian KX192056 1 N N
3. IO Probes User manual, Spanish - Latin American KX192057 1 N N
4. IO Probes User manual, Portuguese - Brazilian KX192058 1 N N
5. IO Probes User manual, Japanese KX192059 1 N N
6. IO Probes User manual, Swedish KX192060 1 N N
7. IO Probes User manual, Norwegian KX192061 1 N N
8. IO Probes User manual, Danish KX192062 1 N N
9. IO Probes User manual, Polish KX192063 1 N N
10. IO Probes User manual, Finnish KX192064 1 N N
11. IO Probes User manual, Greek KX192065 1 N N
12. IO Probes User manual, Russian KX192066 1 N N
13. IO Probes User manual, Dutch KX192067 1 N N
14. IO Probes user manual - Hungarian KX192085 1 N N
15. IO Probes user manual - Slovak KX192086 1 N N
16. IO Probes user manual - Romanian KX192087 1 N N
17. IO Probes user manual - Czech KX192088 1 N N
18. IO Probes user manual - Latvian KX192089 1 N N
19. IO Probes user manual - Lithuanian KX192090 1 N N
20. IO Probes user manual - Turkish KX192091 1 N N
21. IO Probes user manual - Estonian KX192092 1 N N
22. IO Probes user manual - Korean KX192093 1 N N

Section 9-27
Packing parts for reshipment of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Please refer to the VIVID E9 Unpacking/Packing Procedure.
For carton box, use GB050018

For wooden box, use GA050318
9 - 154 Section 9-27 - Packing parts for reshipment of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
Chapter 10
Care & maintenance
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1 Periodic maintenance inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your VIVID E9/VIVID E7 system does not have any high
wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance inspections are mandatory.
However, some customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or
inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and peripherals. These
procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s performance. Read this
chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

10-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10-2 Why do maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-3 Maintenance task schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-4 Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10-5 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-6 Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10-7 Electrical Safety Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10-8 When there's too much leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10-9 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Chapter 10 - Care & maintenance 10 - 1

10-1-4 Warnings
DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION,

AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT
THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT
BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER
POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION PRACTICE GOOD ESD PREVENTION. WEAR AN ANTISTATIC STRAP WHEN HANDLING
ELECTRONIC PARTS AND EVEN WHEN DISCONNECTING/CONNECTING CABLES.
CAUTION DO NOT PULL OUT OR INSERT CIRCUIT BOARDS WHILE POWER IS ON.
CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THIS UNIT UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND COOLING REQUIRE THIS.
CAUTION TO ENSURE THE MUTUAL PROTECTION AND SAFETY OF GE SERVICE PERSONNEL AND OUR
CUSTOMERS, ALL EQUIPMENT AND WORK AREAS MUST BE CLEAN AND FREE OF ANY
HAZARDOUS CONTAMINANTS BEFORE A SERVICE ENGINEER STARTS A REPAIR. THIS
INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, DECONTAMINATION AND/OR STERILIZATION,
DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION OR USE OF THE MEDICAL DEVICE.
Section 10-2
Why do maintenance
10-2-1 Keeping records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of periodic and corrective
maintenance. The Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate provides the customer with
documentation that the Ultrasound Scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check form should be kept in the same room or near the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
10-2-2 Quality assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it
is the customers responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each VIVID E9/
VIVID E7. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician
or appropriate designee.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period
so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and
maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for
a quality assurance program. Contact GE for coverage and/or price for service.
10 - 2 -
Section 10-3
Maintenance task schedule
10-3-1 How often should maintenance tasks be performed?
The Care and Maintenance task schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
NOTE: It is the customers responsibility to ensure the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 care & maintenance is
performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and
performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound
scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Contact GE for coverage
information and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care and Maintenance Task
Schedule assumes that you use your VIVID E9/VIVID E7 for an average patient load (10-12 per day)
and not use it as a primary mobile Ultrasound system which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to
increase the periodic maintenance frequencies.
.
Table 10-1 Customer Care Schedule sheet 1 of 2
Per
Facilities
QA
Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly Program Notes
Clean Probes * * or before each use
Clean Probe Holders

Clean Air Filters more frequently depending on
your environment
Clean Console
Inspect AC Mains Cable Mobile Unit Check Weekly
Inspect Cables and Connectors

Clean Monitor and Touch Panel
Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and
Swivel Locks
Mobile Unit Check Daily
Check Operator Panel Movement Mobile Unit Check Daily
Console Leakage Current Checks also after corrective

maintenance
Peripheral Leakage Current Checks also after corrective

maintenance
Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks also after corrective

maintenance

Table 10-1 Customer Care Schedule (contd) sheet 2 of 2
Per
Facilities
QA
Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly Program Notes
Endocavity Probe Leakage Current

Checks
also after corrective
maintenance
Transesphongeal Probe Leakage Current

Checks
also after corrective
maintenance
Surgical Probe Leakage Current Checks also after corrective

maintenance
Functional Checks also after corrective

maintenance
10 - 4 Section 10-3 - Maintenance task schedule

Section 10-4
Tools required
NOTE: A list of required tools for servicing the VIVID E9/VIVID E7, please refer to:
8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9/VIVID E7" on page 8-6.

10-4-1 Special tools, supplies and equipment used for maintenance

NOTE: Electrical leakage testing may be accomplished with any calibrated Electrical Safety Analyzer
tool compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.
Table 10-2 Overview of supplies and equipment used for maintenance
Tool Part Number Comments

Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
For 120V and 220V Units

Ultrasound Probe Leakage Adapter LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter
Kit (Leakage Current Ultrasound 2113015 Vendor Model 600/202 Ultrasound Probe Adapter
Kit) Vendor Model 600/203 Radius/sonochrome Probe Leakage
current Adapter
46194427P231 Kit includes antistatic mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240V
46194427P279 system
Anti Static Kit 46194427P369 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap
46194427P373 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap
46194427P370 3M #3051 conductive ground cord
46194427P278 120V
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner
46194427P279 230V
Air Filter See chapter 9.
RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS

QIQ Phantom E8370RB NOTE! The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive
Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality
Assurance Program tests.
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements
Disposable Gloves
10 - 6 Section 10-4 - Tools required

Section 10-5
System maintenance
10-5-1 Preliminary checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform.
Refer to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 user documentation whenever necessary.
Table 10-3 System preliminary checks
Step Item Description
1. Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
2. Paperwork Fill in the top of the EQC inspection form. Record all probes and VIVID E9/VIVID E7 options.
3. Turn the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on.
Power up
Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
4. Probes Verify that the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 properly recognizes all probes.
5. Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel.
6. InSite Where applicable, for Warranty & Contract Customers only:

Verify that InSite is functioning properly.
Ensure two-way remote communications.
7. Review Error Logs To view the logs, please refer to: 7-12-4 "Error Logs" on page 7-38.
8. Diagnostics Optional: Refer to: 10-5-2-4 "Optional diagnostic checks" on page 10-9.
9. Presets Backup all Customer Presets to an appropriate media.
10. Image Archive Back up the Image Archive onto appropriate media.

10-5-2 Functional checks

NOTE: See also Chapter 4.
The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 user
documentation whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1 System checks
Table 10-4 System Functional Checks
1. B-Mode Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic controls that affect this mode of operation.
2. Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic controls that affect this mode
CF-Mode
of operation.
3. Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW). Check the basic system controls that affect this mode
Doppler Modes
of operation.
4. M-Mode Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
5. Where applicable, verify basic 4D Mode operation.

4D Mode
Check the basic controls that affect this mode of operation.
6. Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 4D, Contrast, Harmonics,
Applicable
Cine, Stress Echo, etc.
Software Options
Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation.
7. System Diagnostic Perform the Automatic Tests.
8. Operator Panel
Perform the Operator Panel Test Procedure.
test
9. Keyboard Do the interactive keyboard test in 7-12-11-1 "Keyboard" on page 7-66.
10. Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions.
11. Monitor Verify basic monitor display functions.
12. Peripherals See: 10-5-2-2 "Peripheral/option checks" on page 10-9.
10 - 8 Section 10-5 - System maintenance

10-5-2-2 Peripheral/option checks

If any peripherals or options are not part of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 configuration, the check can be
omitted.
Table 10-5 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks
1. Media Verify media drive(s) read/write properlty. Clean if necessary.
2. B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3. Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4. DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
5. ECG Verify basic operation with customer
6. Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed.

Clean as necessary.
10-5-2-3 Mains cable inspection
Table 10-6 Mains Cable Inspection
1. Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
2. Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kinds.
3. Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that
Verify
no strands may cause a short circuit.
4. Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional.
10-5-2-4 Optional diagnostic checks

To complete the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 checks, access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters
5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-2-5 View the logs

1.) Review the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 error log for any problems.
2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.

10-5-3 Physical inspection
Table 10-7 Physical Checks
1. Labeling Verify that all VIVID E9/VIVID E7 labeling is present and in readable condition.
2. Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.
3. Covers Verify all covers are secured in place and are properly aligned with other covers. Replace any covers
that are damaged.
4. Input Power Refer to: 10-5-2-3 "Mains cable inspection" on page 10-9.
5. External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
6. Wheels & Brakes Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the VIVID E9/
VIVID E7 from moving, and release mechanism.
Check all wheel locks and wheel swivel locks for proper operation.
7. Probe Holders Inspect the Probe Holders for cracks or damage.
8. Control Panel
Inspect alphanumeric keyboard and Operator Panel. Record any damaged or missing items.
(Op Panel)
9. Control Panel Verify ease of Operator Panel (Operator Control Panel) movement in all acceptable directions.
(Op Panel) Ensure that Operator Panel (Operator Control Panel) latches in position as required.
Movement
10. Control Panel

Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.
(Op Panel) Lights
11. LCD Inspect the LCD Display for scratches and bad pixels.
Verify proper operation of Contrast and Brightness controls.
Confirm that the LCD arm allows:
swivelling the screen to the left and to the right
folding the screen to the locked position
release and adjustment backwards and forwards
can be adjusted in the up/down positions.
12. Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lighting, if available.
13. Cables and Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating.
Connectors Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs.
14. Shielding and Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
Covers Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
15. Power and System Check for proper operation of all Power and System Status Indicators.
Status Indicators

10-5-4 Cleaning
10-5-4-1 General cleaning

Frequent and diligent cleaning of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 ultrasound unit reduces the risk of spreading
infection from person to person, and also helps to maintain a clean working environment.
CAUTION When performing cleaning procedures, to prevent the risk of system damage, always observe
the following precautions:
Use only cleaning materials and solutions as recommended in the procedures described in the VIVID E9/VIVID E7
user manual.
Do not use any solutions or products not listed in the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 user manual.
Never use thinner, benzene, ethanol or methanol alcohol, abrasive cleaners, or other strong solvents, as these may
cause damage to the cabinet or LCD panel. Only use isopropyl alcohol, when instructed to do so.
Do not spray any liquid directly onto the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 covers, LCD Display or keyboard!
Do not allow any liquid to drip or seep into the system.
DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as pencils or pens, as this may result in damage
to the panel.
Make sure not to spill or spray any liquid on the controls, into the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 cabinet, or in the probe
connection receptacle.
Prior to cleaning, turn OFF power to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and disconnect the mains cable.
Refer to the user manual for the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 for cleaning instructions.

10-5-4-2 Air Filter cleaning
CAUTION Be sure to lock the wheels before cleaning the air filters to avoid injury by any unexpected
movement of the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
DO NOT operate the unit without the air filters in place.
The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 has two air filters, one at the rear (Rear Air Filter) and one below the Card Rack
(Bottom Filter).
Two bottom filters have been used:
nylon strip Bottom Filter (units manufactured before November 2010)

handle type Bottom Filter (introduced November 2010)
Please refer to the respective air filter replacement and cleaning instructions:
8-13-3 "Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement" on page 8-286
or
8-13-4 "Rear Air Filter replacement" on page 8-291

8-13-5 "Bottom nylon strip Air Filter replacement" on page 8-293

10-5-5 Probe maintenance
10-5-5-1 Probe related checks
Table 10-8 Probe Related Checks
1. Probe Holders Clean probe holders. (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
2. Thoroughly check the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 probe connectors and remove dust from inside the
Probes
connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins.
3. Probes Verify that the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 properly recognizes all probes.
10-5-5-2 Basic probe care

The VIVID E9/VIVID E7 user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description
of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the
proper care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the user manual and probe care
cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment
damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.
Do a visual check of the probe pins and VIVID E9/VIVID E7 sockets before plugging in a probe.
TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals.
For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.

10-5-5-3 Cleaning and disinfecting probes
WARNING TO HELP PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BLOOD BORNE DISEASES, WEAR APPROVED
DISPOSABLE GLOVES. THESE ARE MADE OF NITRILE DERIVED FROM VEGETABLE
STARCH TO PREVENT ALLERGIC LATEX REACTIONS.
CAUTION Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probes
warranty.
DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed for the probe. Doing so could result
in irreparable damage to the probe.
Follow care instructions that came with the probe.
CAUTION Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
CAUTION Transesophageal and intraoperative probes require a special handling. Refer to the user
documentation enclosed with these probes.
10-5-5-4 Cleaning probes

Follow these steps to clean the probes:
1.) Disconnect the probe from the unit.

2.) Remove the coupling gel by wiping the probe lens with a soft cloth.
3.) Wipe the probe and cable with a soft cloth moisten in a warm soap and water solution
(<80 F / 27 C).
4.) Wipe the probe and cable with a soft cloth moisten in clean water (<80 F / 27 C) until all soap is
removed.
5.) Wipe dry with a soft towel.

10-5-5-5 Cleaning TEE probes

To clean the handle:
Use a cloth or towel only lightly moistened with cleaner/ disinfectant (as recommended in TEE
Probe Care Card).
Avoid too much moisture on the cloth/ towel.
To remove residual chemicals wipe the handle with a cloth or towel lightly moistened with clean
water.
Dry with clean cloth or towel.
To clean the cable:
Use a cloth or towel only lightly moistened with cleaner/ disinfectant (as recommended in TEE
Probe Care Card).
Avoid too much moisture on the cloth/ towel as this may cause cleaning fluids to flow along the cable
and into the connector/ handle.
Always clean the cable from the connector towards the middle of the cable.
Hold the connector higher than the cable to avoid that cleaning fluids flows along the cable and into
the connector.
Use the same technique when cleaning the cable from the handle side.
To remove residual chemicals follow the same procedure as above but use a cloth or towel lightly
moistened with clean water.
Wipe off moisture with a cloth or towel and place the probe in a TEE Storage Rack and let it dry for
30 min.
Figure 10-1 Cleaning cable

10-5-5-5 Cleaning TEE probes (contd)

To clean the connector:
In normal TEE Probe use, the cleaning of the connector should be unnecessary. If cleaning is absolutely
necessary:
1.) Use a cloth or towel with only the smallest amount of cleaner/ disinfectant to wipe the connector.
2.) Avoid the connector pin area.
3.) Wipe off residual chemicals with a cloth or towel lightly moistened with clean water.
4.) Dry with clean cloth or towel.
5.) To remove residual chemicals follow the same procedure as above, but use a cloth or towel lightly
moistened with clean water.
6.) Wipe off moisture with a cloth or towel and place the probe in a TEE Storage Rack and let it dry for
30 min.

10-5-5-6 Disinfecting probes

In order to provide users with options in choosing a germicide, GE routinely reviews new medical
germicides for compatibility with the materials used in the transducer housing, cable and lens. Although
a necessary step in protecting patients and employees from disease transmission, liquid chemical
germicides must also be selected to minimize potential damage to the transducer.
Refer to the Probe Care Card enclosed in the probe case, or to:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/ultrasound/products/probe_care.html
for the latest list of compatible cleaning solutions and disinfectants.
The probe should not be exposed to the germicide longer than specified to achieve the desired effect.
Do NOT soak or saturate probes with solutions containing alcohol, bleach, ammonium chloride
compounds. In addition TE probes must not be immersed in solutions containing hydrogen peroxide.
Low-level disinfection
After cleaning, the probe and cable may be wiped with a tissue sprayed with a recommended
disinfectant.
Use additional precautions (e.g. gloves and gown) when decontaminating an infected probe.
High-level disinfection
High-level Disinfection destroys vegetative bacteria; lipid & non-lipid viruses, fungi and, depending
highly on time of contact, is effective on bacterial spores. This is required for endocavity (TV, TR, TE)
probes after contact with mucosal membrane.
1.) Prepare the germicide solution according to the manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions for storage, use and disposal of the disinfection solution.
WARNING USE ONLY GERMICIDES THAT ARE LISTED IN THE PROBE CARE CARD ENCLOSED
WITH THE PROBE. IN ADDITION, REFER TO THE LOCAL / NATIONAL REGULATIONS.
DO NOT STEAM AUTOCLAVE OR SUBJECT THE PROBE TO ETHYLENE OXIDE (ETO).
2.) Place the cleaned dried probe in contact with the germicide for the time duration specified by the
manufacturer.
WARNING DO NOT IMMERSE THE PROBE IN LIQUID BEYOND THE LEVEL SPECIFIED FOR THAT
PROBE.
NEVER IMMERSE THE PROBE CONNECTOR OR PROBE ADAPTERS IN LIQUID.
THE PROBE SHOULD NOT BE EXPOSED TO THE GERMICIDE LONGER THAN
SPECIFIED TO ACHIEVE THE DESIRED EFFECT.
DO NOT SOAK OR SATURATE PROBES WITH SOLUTIONS CONTAINING ALCOHOL,
BLEACH, AMMONIUM CHLORIDE COMPOUNDS OR HYDROGEN PEROXIDE.

10-5-5-6 Disinfecting probes (contd)
Figure 10-2 Probe immersion levels
A. 3V-D, 4V-D, M5S-D, 6S-, 12S-D

B. 4C-D
C. 9L-D, 11L-D, ML6-15-D
D. 2D (P2D)
E. 6D (P6D)
1. Fluid level
2. Contact face with patient environment
NOTE: For the 13L probe, please refer to the Users Manual for Intraoperative Probes, Direction
Number: KX192055.
3.) Rinse the part of the probe which was in contact with the germicide according to the germicide
manufacturer's instructions.
4.) Wipe dry with a soft towel or air dry the probe.
WARNING CREUTZFELD-JAKOB DISEASE

NEUROLOGICAL USE ON PATIENTS WITH THIS DISEASE MUST BE AVOIDED. IF A
PROBE BECOMES CONTAMINATED, THERE IS NO ADEQUATE DISINFECTING
MEANS.

Section 10-6
Using a Phantom
The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of
their Quality Assurance Program tests.

Section 10-7
Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-1 Overview
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
The following topics and measurements are covered in this subsection:
10-7-1 "Overview" on page 10-20

10-7-2 "Safety Test Overview" on page 10-21
10-7-3 "Leakage Current Limits" on page 10-22
10-7-4 "Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada" on page 10-24
10-7-5 "Grounding Continuity" on page 10-25
10-7-6 "Chassis Leakage Current Test" on page 10-26
10-7-7 "Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to ground" on page 10-29
10-7-8 "Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to lead" on page 10-31
10-7-9 "Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-isolation test" on page 10-32
10-7-10 "Probe leakage current test" on page 10-33
10 - 20 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

10-7-2 Safety Test Overview
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities
and IEC 62353 Medical electrical equipment Recurrent test and test after repair of medical
electrical equipment. These standards provide guidance on evaluating electrical safety of medical
devices which are placed into service and are intended for use in planned maintenance (PM) or testing
following service or repair activities. They differ somewhat from the standards that are used for design
verification and manufacturing tests (e.g., IEC 60601-1 and UL 60601-1) which require a controlled test
environment and can place unnecessary stress on the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
These tests may refer to specific safety analyzer equipment as an example. Always refer to the safety
analyzers user manual that will be used to perform the tests.
Prior to initiating any electrical test, the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 must be visually inspected. Perform the
following visual checks:
Check for missing or loose enclosure covers that could allow access to internal live parts.
Examine the mains cord, mains plug and appliance inlet for damaged insulation and adequacy of
strain relief and cable clamps.
Locate and examine all associated transducers. Inspect the cables and strain relief at each end.
Inspect the transducer enclosure and lens for cracks, holes and similar defects.
Equipment users must ensure that safety inspections are performed whenever damage is
suspected and at least every 12 months in accordance with local authorities and facility
procedures. Do not use the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 or individual probes which fail any portion of the
safety test.
WARNING TO MINIMIZE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED
TO PERFORM THE ELECTRICAL SAFETY INSPECTIONS AND TESTS.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test MUST NOT be connected to other electrical
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be
contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures
before handling the equipment.

10-7-3 Leakage Current Limits
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
The following acceptance limits and test conditions are summarized from NFPA 99 and IEC 62353 and
in some cases are lower than that specified by the standards.
In accordance with these standards, fault conditions like Reverse Polarity of the supply mains and Open
Neutral are no longer required for field evaluation of leakage current. Because the main source of
leakage current is the mains supply, there are different acceptance limits depending on the
configuration of the mains (100-120VAC or 230-240VAC).
CAUTION Compare all safety-test results with safety-test results of previously performed safety tests (e.g.
last year etc). In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety-test results consult
experienced authorized service personnel or GE for further analysis.
Table 10-9 Leakage Current Limits for Operation on 100-120 Volt mains (US/Canada/Japan)
Grounding/
Leakage Current Test System Power PE Conductor Limit mA
Chassis/Enclosure Leakage On and Off Open 0.3
Closed 0.1
Type BF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.5
Closed 0.01
Type CF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.05
Type BF Applied Parts (sink leakage, mains

On and Off Closed 5
voltage on applied part)
Type CF Applied Parts (sink leakage) On and Off Closed 0.05
NOTE: Open Grounding is also known as Lift Ground.

10-7-3 Leakage Current Limits (contd)
Table 10-10 Leakage Current Limits for System Operation on 230-240 Volt Mains
Grounding/PE
Leakage Current Test System Power Conductor Limit mA
Chassis/Enclosure Leakage On Open and Closed 0.5
Closed 0.1
Type BF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.5
Closed 0.01
Type CF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.05
Type BF Applied Parts (sink leakage, mains On and Off Closed 5

voltage on applied part)
Type CF Applied Parts (sink leakage) On and Off Closed 0.05
Table 10-11 ISO and Mains Applied Limits*
Probe Type Measurement
BF 5.0 mA
CF 0.05 mA
* ISO and Mains Applied refer to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the
part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains
voltage.
NOTE: Electrical leakage testing may be accomplished with any calibrated Electrical Safety Analyzer
tool compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.
Table 10-12 Equipment Type and Test Definitions
Parts or accessories that contact the patient to perform their function.

Applied Parts (AP)
For ultrasound equipment, this includes transducers and ECG leads.
Body Floating or non-conductive ultrasound probes

Type BF which are marked with the 'man in box' BF symbol.
This includes all transducers.
Cardiac Floating or non-conductive intraoperative

probes for direct cardiac contact and isolated ECG
Type CF
connections so marked with the 'heart in box' CF
symbol.
The current resulting from the application of mains voltage to the applied part.
Sink Leakage
This test is required test for Type CF applied parts.

10-7-4 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet
tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported
to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-3 Typical Alternate Outlet Tester
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the
Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this
should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

10-7-5 Grounding Continuity
DANGER ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. THE PATIENT MUST NOT BE CONTACTED TO

THE EQUIPMENT DURING THIS TEST.
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case.
The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC60601-1.
Figure 10-4 Ground Continuity Test

10-7-6 Chassis Leakage Current Test
DANGER ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. WHEN THE METER'S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN,
DON'T TOUCH THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 is powered ON. Be sure to turn the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 power OFF before
switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 may be damaged.
10-7-6-1 Definition
This test, also known as Enclosure Leakage current test, measures the current that would flow through
a grounded person who touches the accessible conductive parts of the equipment during normal and
fault conditions.
The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis.
The testing meter is connected to parts of the equipment, easily contacted by the user or patient.
Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in:
Table 10-9 on page 10-22,

or:

as applicable.
Record the highest reading.

10-7-6-2 Generic Procedure

The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis.
The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground.

or:

as applicable.
Record the highest reading of current.
1.) When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall
outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This
places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be
indicated in any of the current ranges. Connect Safety analyzer to wall AC power outlet.
2.) Plug the equipment under test power cable into the receptacle on the panel of the meter.
3.) Connect the meter to an accessible metal surface of the scanner using the cable provided with the
meter.
4.) Select the Chassis or Enclosure leakage function on the meter.
NOTE: For more information, refer to the safety analyzer's user manual.
5.) Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in:
or:

as applicable.
The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is also shown in:
Table 10-9 on page 10-22, or

as Chassis/Enclosure Leakage.

10-7-6-3 Data sheet for enclosure/chassis leakage current

Table 10-14 shows a typical format for recording the enclosure/chassis leakage current.
Measurements should be recorded from multiple locations for each set of test conditions.
The actual location of the test probe may vary by system.

.
Table 10-13 Chassis leakage current test locations
TEST CONDITION
1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle
2 Wheel support
3 Mounting screw for LCD or CRT housing
4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit
5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit
Record all data in the Electrical safety tests log. Keep a record of the results with other hard copies kept
on site.
Table 10-14 Typical data format for recording enclosure/chassis leakage
Unit under test: ____________________________ Date of test: _____________________
Test Conditions Measurement/Test Point Location
Rear Lower Probe Main

System Power Grounding/PE Panel Frame Connector Handle
off closed
off open
on closed
on open
NOTE: Values in italics font are given as examples only.

10-7-7 Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to ground
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure
to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise,
the unit may be damaged.
10-7-7-1 Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The
meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching
some other grounded surface.

or:

as applicable.
For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the
worst case condition.

10-7-7-2 Generic Procedure

1.) Connect Safety analyzer to wall AC power outlet.
2.) Plug the equipment under test power cable into the receptacle on the panel of the meter.
3.) Connect the ECG cable to the scanner and the Patient leads to the analyzer.
4.) Select the Patient lead leakage function on the meter.
5.) Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in:
- Table 10-9 on page 10-22,
or:
- Table 10-10 on page 10-23,

as applicable.
NOTE: Refer to the safety analyzers user manual that will be used to perform the tests.

or:

as applicable.
For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the
worst case condition.
Appliance power switch

(use both off and on positions) Patient lead selector switch (if any)
The connection is at service entrance (activated as required)
or on the supply side of a separately
Polarity reversing switch.
derived system
Patient connected leads
Appliance
H (Black)
H
POWER
N
OUTLET
N (White)
Internal
G
circuitry Between each patient
lead and ground
G (Green)
Building Insulating surface

ground
Current meter
Grounding contact switch (use in both H = Hot
open and closed positions) N = Neutral (grounded)
G = Grounding conductor
Figure 10-5 Test circuit for measuring patient lead leakage

10-7-8 Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to lead

Select and test each of the ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the
power and ground condition combinations found in:

Table 10-10 on page 10-23, as applicable.
Record the highest leakage current measured.
10-7-8-1 Lead to lead leakage test record

Table 10-15 shows a typical format for recording the patient lead to lead leakage current.
Measurements should be recorded from each lead combination under each set of test conditions
specified in:

Record all data on the EQC inspection certificate; also known as Patient Auxiliary Current.

2.) Plug the equipment under the test power cable into the receptacle on the meter's panel.
3.) Connect the ECG cable to the scanner and the Patient leads to the analyzer.
4.) Select the Patient lead leakage function on the meter.
5.) Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off, as indicated in Table 10-9 on
page 10-22 or Table 10-10 on page 10-23, as applicable.
Table 10-15 Typical data format for recording patient lead to lead leakage
Unit Under Test: __________________________ Date of Test: ______________________
Test Conditions Patient Lead or Combination Measured
System Power Grounding/PE RA-LA LA-LL LL-RA

Mains Off open
System On
open
(Transmit)

10-7-9 Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-isolation test
DANGER LINE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE ECG LEADS DURING THIS TEST.
TO AVOID POSSIBLE ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD, THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7
BEING TESTED MUST NOT BE TOUCHED BY PATIENTS, USERS OR ANYONE
WHILE THE ISO TEST SWITCH IS DEPRESSED. WHEN THE METER'S GROUND
SWITCH IS OPEN. DON'T TOUCH THE VIVID E9/VIVID E7!
1.) Select the ALL position on the lead selector since the test is performed with mains applied to all
leads at the same time.
2.) Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
10-7-9-1 Isolated lead (sink) leakage test record

Table 10-16 on page 10-32 shows a typical format for recording the isolated patient lead sink leakage
current.
Measurements should be recorded for the full lead combination under each set of test conditions
specified in:

Record all data on the EQC inspection certificate; also known as Patient Auxiliary Current.
Table 10-16 Typical data format for recording isolated lead (sink) leakage
Unit Under Test: ________________________ Date of Test: _____________________
Test Conditions Patient Lead
System Power Grounding/PE RA+LA+LL

on closed
off closed

10-7-10 Probe leakage current test
DANGER DO NOT USE THE PROBE IF THE INSULATING MATERIAL HAS BEEN
PUNCTURED OR OTHERWISE COMPROMISED.
INTEGRITY OF THE INSULATION MATERIAL AND PATIENT SAFETY CAN BE
VERIFIED BY SAFETY TESTING ACCORDING TO IEC60601-1.
10-7-10-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who
is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
NOTE: Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from
differences in line voltage and test lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is
measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment.

10-7-10-2 Generic procedure on probe leakage current

The most common method of measuring probe leakage is to partly immerse the probe into a saline bath
while the probe is connected to the ultrasound system and active. This method measures the actual
leakage current resulting from the transducer RF drive.
Record all data on the EQC inspection certificate.
1.) Turn the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 OFF.

3.) Set the Safety analyzer's function switch to Chassis or Enclosure Leakage.
4.) Plug the VIVID E9/VIVID E7s power cord into the test meter.
5.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's CHASSIS connector.
6.) Connect the Ultrasound Probe to the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
7.) Immerse the Saline Probe in the Saline Solution.
8.) Immerse the Ultrasound Probes probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath.
9.) Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off, as indicated in Table 10-9 on
page 10-22, or Table 10-10 on page 10-23, as applicable.
a.) Power ON the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 unit.
b.) After the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 unit has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested
so it is the active probe.
c.) Depress the LIFT GROUND rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
d.) Follow the test conditions and test limits described in Table 10-9 on page 10-22,
or Table 10-10 on page 10-23, as applicable for every probe.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the stated limits.
10.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of maintenance data.

10-7-10-2 Generic procedure on probe leakage current (contd)

For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.
Figure 10-6 Set up for probe leakage current
2 1
9
8
5
3
4 7
A6
1. Ultrasound System 4. Ground Switch 7. Isolator

2. Tester 5. Polarity Reversing Switch 8. Ultrasound Probe
3. Neutral Switch 6. Meter 9. Saline Probe
Figure 10-7 Test setup with meter
The ultrasound probes imaging area is immersed in the Saline solution along with a grounding probe
from the test meter to complete the current path.
NOTE: Follow manufacturers recommendations for handling saline solution. Refer to their Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) for more information.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in
line voltage and test lead placement.

10-7-10-2 Generic procedure on probe leakage current (contd)
NOTE: The Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making
it conductive. Normal saline solution is 0.9% salt and 99.1% water. If ready-mixed saline
solution is not available, a mixture of 1 quart or 1 liter water with 9 or more grams of table salt,
mixed thoroughly, will substitute.
DANGER TO AVOID PROBE DAMAGE AND POSSIBLE ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

IMMERSE PROBES INTO ANY LIQUID BEYOND THE LEVEL INDICATED IN THE
PROBE USERS MANUAL.
DO NOT TOUCH THE PROBE, CONDUCTIVE LIQUID OR ANY PART OF THE
UNIT UNDER TEST WHILE DOING THE TEST.
Table 10-17 on page 10-36 shows a typical format for recording ultrasound probe source leakage
current.
Follow the test conditions and test limits described in:

or:

as applicable for every probe.
11.)Record all data on the Inspection Certificate.

Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of maintenance data.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the
Ultrasound system is powered on. Power off the Ultrasound system, allow the stored energy to
bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the
NEUTRAL switch on the leakage meter to avoid possible power supply damage.
NOTE: Values in italics font are given as examples only.
Table 10-17 Typical Data Format for Recording Probe (source) Leakage
Unit under test: ________________________ Date of test: _____________________
Test conditions Probe as measured in saline bath
System Power Grounding/PE 4C i12L TS E8C

off closed
off open
on closed
on open

10-7-10-3 Mains on applied part
NOTE: Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part
to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains
voltage.
Mains on applied part is one of the described leakage current tests applicable for probes
(Ref: IEC60601-1).
This is to be performed with the probe disconnected from the device. Apply mains voltage over the
insulation barrier. (Between protective earth on the probe connector, and an electrical anode in saline
solution. The patient applied part of the probe is immersed into the saline solution.)
Measure current flowing in the circuit. = leakage current.
As a minimum, tests according to IEC60601-1 must be performed once a year. The requirements for
Body Floating (BF) have to be applied for TEE and Trans thorax probes bearing the symbol for safety
class BF.
The symbol for BF is indicated on the probe connector label below:
Figure 10-8 GE Probe Connector Label example

10-7-10-3 Mains on applied part (contd)

A typical test setup of non-TEE Probes can be as illustrated in: Figure 10-6 "Set up for probe leakage
current" on page 10-35 and Figure 10-6 "Set up for probe leakage current" on page 10-35.
A typical test setup for TEE probes could be as indicated below:
Figure 10-9 TEE Probe Leakage Isolation (Sink) Current Test
9g NaCL/1000g H20
WARNING THE HANDLE OF THE TEE PROBES MUST NOT BE IMMERSED.
The test passes when the reading measure less than the values in:
- Table 10-11 on page 10-23, as applicable.

Section 10-8
When there's too much leakage current
10-8-1 Chassis Fails
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed,
or intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or
owner to correct any deviations. As a work-around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used
instead.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding
wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a
possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-8-2 Probe Fails

Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the VIVID E9/VIVID E7.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from
differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for
body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe
type in the appropriate space on the check list.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor
connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
10-8-3 Peripheral Fails

Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
10-8-4 Still Fails

If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones,
one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
10-8-5 New Unit

If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new VIVID E9/VIVID E7 and if situation can not be
corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 problem. Remove the
VIVID E9/VIVID E7 from operation.
10-8-6 ECG Fails

Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.

Section 10-9
Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC)
Download and use the latest version of these forms: They can be retrieved from MyWorkshop.
EQC Refer to DOC0929340 in MyWorkshop

IQC Refer to DOC0535485 in MyWorkshop
10 - 40 Section 10-9 - Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC)

INDEX
Numerics configuration 3-42
17" LCD monitor diagnostics 7-66
block diagram 5-35 difficult to lock/release 7-146
19" LCD monitor 5-35 Alt+B 7-6
block diagram 5-35 Alt+D 7-6, 7-137
2D mode 5-27 Alt+E 7-6
controls 4-65 Alt+F1 7-6
47CFR Part 18 1-47 Alt+Q 7-6
4D imaging 5-28 Alt+S 7-6
4V-D application software
field failure data collection 4-58 description 5-6
application turnover check list 4-79
archiving and loading presets
A refer to the user manual 4-18
a setup error has occured 7-144 ARFS
abbrevations automatic request for service 5-18
list of abbrevations 9-3 audio
about diagnostics 7-68
firmware version 4-47 is missing 7-10
HW version 4-47 automatic request for service
probes 4-47 ARFS 5-18
software version 4-47 available probes 3-46
system version 4-47 average setup time 3-2
acclimate time 3-2
if system is very cold or hot 2-2
acoustic noise level 3-21 B
activate Front Panel Simulator (InSite ExC / VPN) 7-6 back end processor
adjust bi-directional signals 5-95
position of top console 4-11 block diagram 5-84
timeout for DICOM servers 6-22 boot up troubleshooting 7-134
adjusting the XYZ mechanism 6-16 cables 9-105
admin description 5-82, 5-85
backup 4-48 diagnostics 7-69
disk management 4-48 expansion slots on motherboard 5-93
restore 4-49 fan
system admin 4-50 replacement 8-395
users 4-49 front module replacement 8-391
air filter front panel 5-85
cleaning 10-12 input DC voltages 5-93
air flow input signals 5-94
components 5-41 interactive diagnostics 7-69
control 5-41 issue 7-9
software control 5-41 CD/DVD
air pressure limits 2-3 drive failures 7-9
align image CD/DVD not read 7-9
main monitor and touch screen 6-11 location 5-83
allow motherboard expansion slots 5-93
SR Private Data 3-72 parts replacement 8-359
alpha-numeric keyboard power supply replacement 8-368
replacement 8-224 replacement 8-361
alphanumeric keyboard 5-30 signal flow and processing 5-82
Index Index - 1
spare parts 9-81 black & white digital graphic printer 5-132
theory 5-82 replacement 8-438
top and side connections 5-89 block diagram 5-25
Back, Front, Left, and Right Vivid E9 5-22
definition 9-2 bookmark 7-6
backlight adjustment 6-6 boot up 4-4
backlight and blue tint troubleshooting 7-134
adjustment 6-7 bottom air filter replacement 8-293
backplane brake pedal replacement 8-319
description 5-79 brakes check 4-78
backup brightness adjustments on monitor 6-3
patient archive and system configurations 8-13 bscan cable 7-3
refer to the user manual 4-37 bulkhead cover replacement 8-106
beep codes 5-93 bulkhead, plate, extended
BEP replacement 8-245
bi-directional signals 5-95 bumpers
block diagram 5-84 replacement 8-52
boot up troubleshooting 7-134 button IF board assembly replacement 8-263
description 5-82, 5-85 buttons around trackball
diagnostics 7-69 no light 7-140
PCIBus diagnostics 7-61 no response 7-140
expansion slots on motherboard 5-93 buttons frame UI assy replacement 8-260
fan BW printer filler storage box removal 8-439
replacement 8-395
front module replacement 8-391
front panel 5-85 C
I/O board 5-105, 5-130 cable
block diagram 5-128, 5-130 bscan 7-3
input DC voltages 5-93 cable harness 9-96
input signals 5-94 cable hooks replacement 8-83
interactive diagnostics 7-69 cables
internal storage devices 5-110 back end processor 9-105
LEDs card rack 9-104
on the BEP front 5-96 ECG 9-118
on the BEPs face 5-97, 5-98 front end processor 9-104
location 5-83 internal 9-96
outputs 5-96 main power supply 9-103
power supply 5-99 mains power 9-95
block diagram 5-100 peripherals 9-116
replacement 8-361 top console 9-99
reset from hang 7-3 XYZ controller 9-101
signal flow and processing 5-82 calibration
spare parts 9-81 touch screen 6-14
theory 5-82 capture
top and side connections 5-89 a screen image 7-27
BEP5 5-82 network logs with network sniffer 7-22
BEP6 5-82 card rack
BEPY3 5-82 complete.replacement 8-351
BIOS spare parts 9-75
beep codes 5-93 care and maintenance 10-1
boot screen 8-25 casters
password 8-45 and brakes
upgrade BIOS version 8-45 description 5-42
verify version 8-45 replacement 8-309
Index - 2 -
checks 4-78 current system status 7-36

control 4-38 options installed 7-36
spare parts 9-73 system health information 7-36
CD/DVD system information 7-36
drive failures 7-9 Windows printers 7-36
drive issue 7-150 interactive tests 7-66
center speaker (woofer) non-interactive tests 7-57
replacement 8-305 scanner utilities 7-118
certified electrical contractor statement (for USA Only) -x service diagnostics 7-70
change tests and requirements
AE Title 3-52 GRLY tests table 7-49
port number (Port No.) 3-52 common service desktop interface 5-137
chassis leakage current test 10-26 compatibility 3-50
checks hardware/software compatibility 5-2, 9-7
preliminary checks 10-7 complete power down 4-9
cital system information 7-20 completing the setup 3-21
cleaning 10-11 compliance 1-47
trackball components and functions 5-1
from the outsides 4-52 configurable remote path user 3-77
remove OP to get access 4-53 configuration 3-35, 7-98
CMOS export 3-76
diagnostics 7-64 Questra Agent 3-104
cold configuring ultrasound scanner for Network InSite
if unit is very cold 2-2 Checkout 3-102
collect connect
trouble image with logs 7-21 AC (mains) power 4-5
vital system information 7-20 Ethernet 3-24
Color Doppler mode 5-27 heart microphone (phono) 3-25
Color Flow mode 5-27 phono 3-25
Color M mode 4-68 probes 3-26
color mode pulse pressure transducer 3-25
checks 4-67 USB flash card 3-24
overview 4-69 connected (InSite) 5-19
color noise in near field 7-163 connected probes 7-36
color printer 3-45 connection
external (option) 5-133 between scanner and DICOM server on a
color video printer network 3-49
installation 3-109 between ultrasound scanner and EchoPAC PC 3-49
replacement 8-441 connections
column cover assembly replacement 8-94 on the external IO 3-24
common service desktop on the Patient I/O panel 3-25
common utilities 7-100 connectivity
configuration 7-98 additional outputs 4-42
description 7-35 dataflow 4-41
diagnostic symptom guide 7-44 description 5-7
diagnostic utility freezes up/times out 7-43 formats 4-43
diagnostics 7-54 overview 3-49
diagnostics window overview 7-40 recording the TCP/IP settings 4-44
DICOM verify 7-118 setup 3-50
engineering diagnostics 7-56 tools 4-43
error logs 7-38 console
exit 7-120 environmental requirements 2-2
home 7-36 general requirements 2-2
connected probes 7-36 contact
- Index - 3
GE 5-137 dual export to DICOM servers 3-99

contact information 1-48 eVue setup 3-81
contents examples 5-9
in this service manual 1-2 export configuration 3-76
control panel export to Excel 3-79
see operator panel 5-36 export to MPEGVue 3-80
control panel (Operator Panel) 5-36 naming convention 5-8
conventions 1-10 new dataflow 5-13
used in this manual 1-10 Query/Retrieve (Q/R) setup 3-88
cooling 2-3 record settings 4-41
copyrights -xi retrieve is failing .. 3-94
covers screen 3-78
replacement 8-52 search criterias 3-91
covers and bumpers overview 8-53 setup connection to DICOM server 3-58
covers under XY motors replacement 8-102 date and time adjustments 3-37
CRC error DC Offset calibration 6-15
locate DRX boards with CRC error in logfile.txt 7-144 definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back 8-7
create new dataflow 3-82 defragmenter
example disk defragmenter 7-110
with Worklist and DICOM Storage 3-87 department name 3-36
with worklist, database and DICOM storage 3-86 depth of ultrasound scanner 3-21
create new dataflow with Worklist, Database and DICOM description 5-20
Storage 5-14 DHCP setup 3-53
Ctrl+Alt+R 7-6 diagnostic checks
Ctrl+PrintScreen 7-6, 7-27 optional 10-9
current system status 7-36 diagnostics
cursor drifts 7-139 common diagnostics 7-54
cursor hangs disruptive mode 7-54
approx. 2-3 seconds every 20 seconds 7-140 system shutdown from remote 7-55
cursor is not moving 7-139 engineering diagnostics 7-56
customer interactive tests 7-66
enables disruptive mode 7-33 non-interactive tests 7-57
provided prerequisite 8-12 service diagnostics 7-70
customer assistance 1-48 diagnostics/troubleshooting 7-1
phone numbers 1-48 DICOM
adjust timeout for DICOM servers 6-22
DICOM option preparations requirements 2-13
D DICOM SR 3-72, 3-74
damage in transportation -x, 3-7 job spooler 7-6
dangerous procedure warnings 1-44 related problems 7-155
data management verify 7-118
moving all images 8-13 worksheet for DICOM networkinformation 2-14
refer to the user manual 4-37 DICOM server
data sheet for IP address setup on ultrasound scanner 3-59
- chassis source leakage current 10-28 DICOM SR 3-72, 3-74
- ECG leakage current 10-32 DICOM storage
database startup problems 7-154 IP-address adjustment 3-68
dataflow setup 3-67
concept 5-7 digital receiver board 5-69
create new dataflow 3-82 description 5-69
example replacement 8-345
with Worklist and DICOM Storage 3-87 digital video recorder 3-111
with worklist, database and DICOM storage 3-86 checks 4-76
DICOM SR 3-74 DVR
Index - 4 -
setup 3-44 electrical contractor statement (for USA Only) -x

select offline mode 3-44 electrical tests
digital video recorder (DVR) 5-132 grounding continuity 10-25
digital video stream recorder electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 1-47
replacement 8-429 electronics description 5-24
spare parts 9-92 electrostatic discharge (ESD)
direct connection from ultrasound scanner to EchoPAC prevention 1-47
PC 5-8 EMC
direction lock electromagnetic compatibility 1-47
check 4-78 EMI 1-47
disconnect probe 3-27 limitations 2-7
disk prevention/abatement 7-161
defragmenter 7-110 different location 7-162
usage 7-103 different power outlet 7-161
disk management different system 7-161
setup 3-99 disconnect external cables 7-162
disruptive protection 3-20
access via InSite 5-19 enable
mode 7-54, 7-102 disruptive mode
distinct from remote 7-29
network monitor 7-115 enable disruptive mode
door, IO panel replacement 8-80 how customer enables disruptive mode 7-33
Doppler noise 7-163 enable VCO
DOT customer enables VCO 7-34
US Department of Transportation 1-46 from remote 7-29
down/up encoder board replacement 8-202
release handle 4-13 enter location 3-36
DRAM memory environmental requirements
diagnostics 7-65 probes 2-8
drive gear assembly replacement 8-280 EQC form
drive issue ultrasound equipment quality check form 10-40
USB harddrive (with RAID 1) 7-151 equipment required for functional checks 4-2
driveissue error
CD/DVD 7-150 high system temperature error 7-3
DRX error mesage
troubleshooting hints 5-74 a setup error has occured 7-144
dual export to DICOM servers 3-99 errors
DVD drive 5-132 omissions and errors -x
replacement 8-426 ESD
spare parts 9-88 electrostatic discharge 1-47
DVD recorder 3-111 essential tests 7-57
DVR 3-111 Ethernet 5-134
checks 4-76 connection 3-24
spare parts 9-92 event log viewer 7-100
eVue setup 3-81
examine all packages 3-6
E Excel
ECG cables 9-118 export to Excel
eject device 7-6 setup 3-79
electrical excessive noise lines
requirements 2-4 when cursor is placed straight down 7-168
safety 1-21 exit 3-32, 4-8
safety tests 10-20 from diagnostics 7-120
specifications 3-22 from InSite ExC 5-19
- Index - 5
to Windows 4-18 overview 5-44

Export configuration 3-76 front end processor parts replacement 8-321
export configuration 3-76 parts overview 8-322
external color printer (option) 5-133 processor 5-43
external data storage 3-45 front module replacement 8-391
external I/O front plane
connections 3-24 description 5-67
external peripherals 3-45, 3-46 replacement 8-328
description 5-133 Front, Back, Left and Right
foofswitch 3-45 definition 9-2
functional checks 10-8
2D mode (B mode) checks 4-63
F and general procedures 4-1
facility needs 2-10 back end processor checks 4-74
fan basic controls 4-61
fan assembly replacement 8-296 cineloop check 4-73
GFI fan test 7-45 color mode checks 4-67
system temperature test 7-46, 7-80 Doppler mode checks 4-69
FAQ ECG check 4-72
frequently asked questions 7-3 M mode checks 4-66
fataflow performance tests 4-63
create new dataflow with Worklist, Database and DI- preparation 4-60
COM Storage 5-14 probes/connectors check 4-71
FEP tissue velocity imaging (TVI) checks 4-70
Front End Processor 5-43
front end processor
spare parts 9-75 G
field failure data collection gather logs utility 7-111
4V-D probe 4-58 gather troubleshooting data 7-20
filter general
bottom cleaning 10-11
cleaning 8-294 procedures 4-3
cleaning 10-12 recommendations 7-160
rear filter cover replacement 8-73 general procedures
foot rest bumper replacement 8-65 and functional checks 4-1
footswitch 3-45, 5-133 GFI board replacement 8-348
forced power downpower Global Service User Interface (GSUI) 5-138
forced power down 5-122 graphics adapter 5-109
frame UI upper diagnostics 7-62
replacement 8-183 replacement 8-379
frequently asked questions 7-3 software requirements 5-109
front casters replacement 8-313 GRLY tests table 7-49
front cover replacement 8-68 grounding continuity 10-25
Front End GRX block diagram 5-64
interface board (GFI) 5-75 GSUI
front end Global Service User Interface 5-138
alignment 6-15 GTX board
when to do? 6-15 description 5-50
alignment, when to do 6-15 test points 5-58
card rack 5-43
cover replacement 8-325
description 5-43 H
front end processor cables 9-104 handle, left top / handle right top, replacement 8-252
front end processor cards hard disk
Index - 6 -
partitions 5-5 language policy -i

quick test 7-60 incorrect system time
surface scan 7-59 when daylight savings time changes 7-10
hard disk drive initiate a request for service (RFS) 5-17
partitions 5-110 input and output (I/O) modules
hard disk drive replacement 8-373 description 5-124
hardware problems 7-163 inrush current 2-6
hardware/software compatibility 5-2, 9-7 InSite
HASP (service dongle) 4-17 permanent user 3-107
hazard icons 1-11 InSite ExC
HDD Agent
partitions 5-5, 5-110 configuration 7-99
quick test 7-60 basic connectivity 7-18
replacement 8-373 checkout 3-48
surface scan 7-59 definitions 5-19
heat dissipation 2-3 description 5-15
heat problems 7-163 icon 5-15, 6-15
height of ultrasound scanner 3-21 menu 5-15
high system temperature error 7-3 network configuration 3-101
high voltage inverter board with cable prerequisites 7-18
replacement 8-177 requirements 2-13
home page 7-36 setup 3-101
hospital and department name 3-36 setup prerequesite 3-101
hot shortcuts 7-6
if unit is very hot 2-2 status 5-16
how often should maintenance be performed? 10-3 troubleshooting 7-18
human safety 1-16 troubleshooting flowchart 7-19
humidity limits 2-3 wrong system ID 7-18
InSite ExC Agent
configuration 7-99
I installation 3-1
I/O assembly replacement 8-420 color video printer 3-109
I/O modules warnings 3-2
spare parts 9-87 intermittent noise 7-163
icons 1-10 intermittent problems 7-9
product icons 1-12 back end processor
standard hazard icons 1-11 issue
IEC6060112 system halt errors 7-9
2001 1-47 internal cables 9-96
if unit is very cold or hot 2-2 internal peripherals 3-45, 5-132
iLinq 5-137 internal printer troubleshooting 7-149
interactive platform features 5-137 introduction to this manual 1-1
image artifacts IO board 5-105
caused by front end boards 7-8 IP configuration 7-104
image CD/DVD not read 7-9 IQC form
image compress and delete utility 7-113 ultrasound image quality check form 10-40
image data loss 7-11
image viewer utility 7-112
images exit spooler, but do not display on J
destination 7-155 J-rail assembly replacement 8-234
images not sorted into the Single pt Record 7-155
images remain in spooler with retry or failed status 7-155
important conventions 1-10 K
important precautions keeping records 10-2
- Index - 7
periodic maintenance 10-2 definition 9-2

keyboard 5-30 legal notes -xi
configuration 3-42 lighting 2-3
diagnostics 7-66 list of abbrevations 9-3
difficult to lock/release 7-146 list of effected pages
replacement 8-224 (revision) -xii
kits 9-133 load or reload software
knobs for encoders and slidepots replacement 8-189 when to... 8-15
loading
and archiving presets
L refer to the user manual 4-18
label application software 8-31
at AC mains inlet and circuit breaker 1-28 software patches 8-45
disassembly nester 1-43 system software 8-25
labels locations 1-22 location
labels on the BEP 1-42 enter location 3-36
on AC power supply (main power supply) 1-28 lock
on front of LCD monitor 1-22 the LCD monitor 4-14
on rear cover 1-29 the top console 4-11
detailed descriptions 1-37 lock ups 7-9
on rear of LCD monitor 1-23 locked system 7-137
on Upper OP panel 1-24 lockout/tagout (LOTO) 1-45
veterinary 1-29, 9-120 log
labels site log 4-81
near connectors on front 1-25 logfile.txt
on DVD units 1-26 locate DRX boards with CRC error 7-144
on top of console 1-24 Logoff 4-8
language logoff 3-32
select online manual language 3-39 logon as adm 3-41, 4-15
select user interface language 3-38 logs
language kits 9-139 add bookmark 7-6
language policy -i LOTO
LCD lockout/tagout 1-45
brightness and contrast low sensitivity
adjustment 6-7 on the trackball 7-140
main monitor 5-35 lower bezel replacement 8-208
17" block diagram 5-35 lower frame assembly replacement 8-212
main monitor (option) 5-35 lower operator panel arts replacement 8-189
LCD monitor and LCD arm parts replacement 8-113 lower switch board with elastomer replacement 8-205
LCD monitor position adjustment 4-14 lower/raise the top console 4-11
leakage current

Ve9ve7 PRP Ga091999 7 00

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ve9ve7 PRP Ga091999 7 00

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

VIVID E9/VIVID E7

Proprietary Service Manual

ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

Part Number: GA091999

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA EST DISPONVEL APENAS EM INGLS.

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

KESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

TM HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

EZEN KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYV KIZRLAG ANGOL NYELVEN RHET EL.

ESSI JNUSTUHANDBK ER EINGNGU FANLEG ENSKU.

TENTO SERVISN NVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKM JAZYCE.

DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN P ENGELSK.

DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.

APKALPES ROKASGRMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGU VALOD.

IS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA ILEISTAS TIK ANGL KALBA.

DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN FINNES BARE P ENGELSK.

NINIEJSZY PODRCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JZYKU

ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI N LIMBA ENGLEZ.

OVAJ PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM

TA SERVISNI PRIRONIK JE NA VOLJO SAMO V ANGLEINI.

OVAJ SERVISNI PRIRUNIK DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM JEZIKU.

TTO SERVISN PRRUKA JE K DISPOZCII LEN V ANGLITINE.

DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGNGLIG P ENGELSKA.

BU SERVS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA NGLZCE OLARAK SALANMITIR.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Mail the information to:

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

REVISION DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

Added information for:

List of Effected Pages

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2

Dangerous procedure warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 45

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 46

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47

General console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4

Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20

Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 21

Ethernet (TCP/IP Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 46

Disk Management setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 99

InSite ExC setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 101

Options Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109

Printer Software Driver installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 110

Setup paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 112

General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Moving and Transporting the VIVID E9/VIVID E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38

Operator Panel Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 78

Application Turnover Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 79

Power supply test & adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 80

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Initiating a Request for Service (RFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 17

VIVID E9/VIVID E7 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20

Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29